JP7500040B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachinko machines") and slot machine gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachislot machines").

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold a lottery based on the ball entering the starting hole, and display a pattern on a display means, and award a predetermined gaming value when the display result is a specific display result. For this type of gaming machine, it has been proposed to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the expectation for the display of the pattern during the period from when the ball enters the starting hole to when the display of the pattern is executed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-097994 A

However, while the above-mentioned suggestion presentation makes it possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the state of the pending display displayed on the display means , the only way to determine whether the state of the pending display will show a state with high expectation is to wait for the end of a period during which the state of the pending display can change, and even if one waits for such a period to end, it does not necessarily show a state with high expectation, which may result in a decrease in interest in the game.

The present invention was made in consideration of these circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

Effective solutions for achieving the above-mentioned objectives are shown below. The actions and other details will be explained as necessary. For ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations and other details will be shown in the embodiments of the invention as appropriate, but are not intended to be limiting.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device comprising the steps of:
A gaming machine that holds a lottery for winning when a ball enters a starting hole and a starting condition is satisfied, and awards a profit based on the result of the lottery,
A variable display means for displaying a variable pattern based on the result of the lottery;
A storage means for storing information about a ball entering the starting hole with a predetermined number as an upper limit when the ball enters the starting hole during the execution of the variable display of the symbol;
a hold display means for displaying a hold display corresponding to the information stored in the storage means;
a pre-determination means for determining whether or not the start condition is satisfied based on information stored in the storage means;
A performance execution means for determining and executing a predetermined performance from among a plurality of performances including a special performance,
The special performance is configured to be executed based on the lottery result regarding the winning corresponding to the variable display of the pattern being executed and the judgment result by the advance judgment means when a ball enters the starting hole, and is executed using a light-emitting unit different from the display unit on which the pending display is displayed, and can be executed at the timing when a ball enters the starting hole while the variable display of the pattern is being executed in a situation where the information stored in the storage means has not reached an upper limit,
Even if a ball enters the starting hole while the special effect is being executed, the special effect will not be executed anew. However, the special effect can be executed at the timing when a ball enters the starting hole even in a situation where there is no information stored in the storage means, and is executed for a time shorter than a specific time that can be selected when the variable display of the symbols is performed.
When a ball enters the starting hole in a predetermined situation in which the hold display corresponding to the information stored in the storage means is not displayed on the display unit, the special performance can be executed at the timing when the ball enters the starting hole,
A specific light-emitting unit different from the light-emitting unit used for the special performance is provided,
When the special performance is executed, the state of the specific light-emitting unit is configured to be different from the state indicating the expectation degree for the hit performed using the light-emitting unit,
The specific light-emitting unit is provided at a position separated from the position of the light-emitting unit used for the special performance ,
When looking at the gaming machine from the front,
The display unit on which the reserved display is displayed is configured to be located between the light-emitting unit used for the special performance and the specific light-emitting unit not used for the special performance.
It is characterized by:

In the above configuration, the special effect is executed based on the lottery result regarding the winning corresponding to the variable display of the pattern being executed and the judgment result by the advance judgment means at the timing when the ball enters the starting hole while the variable display of the pattern is being executed, so that when the ball enters the starting hole while the variable display of the pattern is being executed, it is possible to suggest the expectation of whether or not a winning is included in the variable display of the pattern (the variable display of the pattern being executed or the variable display of the pattern being held) whose result will be shown after the ball enters the starting hole by the execution of the special effect, and since it creates an incentive to try to get the ball to enter the starting hole without focusing only on the variable display of the variable display of the pattern being executed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game (for example, see the descriptions in paragraphs 2389 to 2415, Figures 245 to 246, etc.).

In this way, the present invention can provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 2 is a left side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front right. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. This is a front view of a pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine from the front right when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame open from the main frame and the main frame open from the outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine viewed from the front, disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. This is an oblique view of the outer frame from the front. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the outer frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the left and right outer frame assemblies of the outer frame, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame, as viewed from the front and above, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. FIG. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front left. This is a perspective view of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame disassembled into its main components from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of a door frame base unit of a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components from the rear. (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as viewed from the front and rear, (c) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of a conventional pachinko machine as viewed from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as viewed from the rear. 34(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) seen from the front, and FIG. 34(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) seen from the rear. FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock in Figure 34 (a) from the front, (b) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state in (a). (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit from the rear. (a) is an exploded oblique view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and anti-tamper member removed. 1A is a perspective view of the fall cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the fall cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a front view of the fall cover unit with the lid member removed. 1A is an enlarged front view showing the handle unit and handle cover unit portions of the door frame, and FIG. 1B is an enlarged perspective view showing the handle unit and handle cover unit portions of the door frame. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line I-I in Figure 41 (a). 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in FIG. 1. This is an oblique view of the tray unit of the door frame. This is an oblique view of the plate unit from behind. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the key parts of the door frame cut horizontally at the location of the lower tray ball supply port, (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the key parts of a conventional door frame cut at the same location as (a), and (c) is a table comparing the number of game balls stored in the lower tray of this embodiment and the conventional product. This is an enlarged plan view showing the ball lending operation unit area in the tray unit of the door frame. 1A is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of FIG. 1A seen from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from above and at the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main components, viewed from below and in the front. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member is at the upper end of its movement position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit has moved from the position of (a) to the raised position. This is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member is at the downward end of its travel position. This is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the outer peripheral decorative board of the performance operation unit, the outer decorative board of the buttons, and the inner decorative board of the buttons in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. (a) is a front view of the dish unit in its normal state, and (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is a plan view of a performance operation unit showing an example in which multiple contact detection bodies are provided in the performance operation unit of the performance operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic example of multiple contact detection bodies connected to one contact detection sensor main body, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic example of an example in which a switching section is provided between the contact detection sensor main body and multiple contact detection bodies in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the plate unit's left plate decorative unit, right plate decorative unit, and performance operation unit, etc. can be moved forward and backward, and contact detection bodies are provided on the front and rear of the performance operation unit, etc. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact detection body, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the performance operation unit. 1A is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame from the front, and FIG. 1C is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line U-U in Figure 62(a). (a) is a front view of the right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the right side unit of the door frame, (c) is an oblique view of the right side unit of the door frame from the front, and (d) is an oblique view of the right side unit of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 66(a). This is a cross-sectional view taken along line O-O in Figure 66(a). FIG. 1A is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame in an opaque state, and FIG. 1B is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the outer layer in a transparent state while leaving the inner layer intact in FIG. A front view showing each decorative substrate of the door frame. This is a plan view showing the decorative board in the part of the door frame's performance operation unit. A rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the front left. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. 1A is an enlarged oblique view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and FIG. 1B is an enlarged oblique view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame when the door frame is opened relative to the main body frame. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed relative to the main body frame. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the ball launcher as viewed from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main frame seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit seen from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the dispensing unit seen from the rear. FIG. 2A is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as viewed from the rear. This is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-to-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the fore-and-aft direction when the ball-removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in (a). An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the door frame foul cover unit and the lower full ball path unit. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. 1A is a perspective view of a board unit of a main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the rear. 1 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below and rear. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the front, disassembled into its main components. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. This is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut in the center in the left-right direction. 1A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. 1A is a plan view of a main body frame, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. This is an enlarged view showing the upper part of the main body frame in a perspective view seen from behind. 1A is a perspective view of the spherical tank with tank rails and the like assembled thereto, as viewed from above the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of FIG. 1A from below the front. 100(a) is an exploded perspective view seen from the front. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing the area through which game balls that overflow from the ball tank at the top of the main body frame circulate. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls that have overflowed from the ball tank at the top of the main body frame. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls into the bypass passage at the top of the main frame. 1 is an enlarged perspective view showing the main body frame from the rear of the hinge side, showing the tank rail and its surroundings. FIG. This is an oblique view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail as viewed from behind of a pachinko machine equipped with a tank rail of a second embodiment. 106 in an assembled state together with a spherical tank, (b) is an oblique view of the tank rail etc. in (a) seen from the front, and (c) is an oblique view of the tank rail etc. in (a) seen from the rear. 107, (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. of FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. of FIG. 107 as seen from the rear. FIG. 107(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail, etc., taken along the kerk line. An explanatory diagram showing a cross section of the flow of game balls within the tank rail of Figure 107. 13 is an enlarged perspective view of a main body frame including a tank rail and the like according to a third embodiment, showing the tank rail portion as viewed from the right rear. FIG. 13 is an enlarged perspective view of a main body frame including a tank rail and the like according to a third embodiment, showing the tank rail portion as viewed from the rear left. FIG. 1A is a rear view of the main body frame showing an enlarged view of the portion of the external terminal board, and FIG. 1B is a left side view of the main body frame showing an enlarged view of the upper portion. 113(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 113(b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 113(a). 114(b) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the tank rail and its vicinity in FIG. 114(b). 10A is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of the third embodiment as viewed from the front, FIG. 10B is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 10C is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and other components of FIG. 116 as viewed from the front. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and other components of FIG. 116 as viewed from the rear. 1A is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, FIG. 1B is an oblique view of the board unit of FIG. 1A seen from the front right, and FIG. 1C is an oblique view of the board unit of FIG. 1A seen from the front left. 119(a) is an oblique view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) seen from the upper right rear, and FIG. 119(b) is an oblique view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) seen from the lower right rear. 119(a) is an exploded oblique view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front. FIG. This is an exploded oblique view of the board unit of Figure 119(a) seen from behind. 119(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line K-K-I in FIG. 119(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-K in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line K-K in (a). This is a bottom view showing the area behind the door frame in a pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of Figure 119(a). An explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge outlet of the out ball passage. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out-sensor is detachable, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor in FIG. (a) is an oblique view of the base unit of the third embodiment, with the power supply unit, dispensing control unit, and interface unit omitted, viewed from the front right, and (b) is an oblique view of the base unit of (a) viewed from the front left. 127 from the upper right rear, and FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 from the lower right rear. 127A is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, FIG. 127B is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in FIG. 127A, and FIG. 127C is a cross-sectional view taken along line S-S in FIG. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in Figure 129(a). This is an exploded oblique view of the board unit of Figure 127 viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the board unit of Figure 127 seen from the rear. 128A is a perspective view of the ball path member of the base plate unit of FIG. 127 viewed from the front, and FIG. 128B is a perspective view of the ball path member of the base plate unit of FIG. 127 viewed from the back. An explanatory diagram showing the elimination of ball clogging in the board unit of Figure 127. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing the prevention of intrusion of linear illegal tools into the board unit of FIG. 127. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing how to remove dust from the board unit of FIG. 127. This is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, in which the center device and other parts are made opaque. FIG. 138 is an oblique view of the game board of FIG. 137 as seen from the front right. FIG. 138 is an oblique view of the game board of FIG. 137 as seen from the front left. FIG. 138 is a rear perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137. This is a front view of the game board, showing the inside of the game area where game balls circulate, by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components as seen from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along the soot line in Figure 137. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line SE in Figure 137. An explanatory diagram showing the positions of the rear cells and cell fixing pieces from the front of the game board. 1A is an exploded oblique view seen from the front with the rear cell and cell fixing piece disassembled from the front component and game panel, and FIG. 1B is an exploded oblique view seen from the rear with the rear cell and cell fixing piece disassembled from the front component and game panel. 1A is a four-sided view of a cell fixing piece, FIG. 1B is a front perspective view of the cell fixing piece, and FIG. 1C is a rear perspective view of the cell fixing piece. 1A is a front perspective view of the crane in the center distribution unit of the center role, FIG. 1B is a plan view of the crane in FIG. 1A, and FIG. 1C is a cross-sectional view taken along the So-So line in FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a partial oblique view of a portion of a center distribution unit in a center device of a game board, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a partial plan view of a portion of a center distribution unit in a center device of a game board. 149(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a crane of a different embodiment from that of FIG. 149, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a crane of a further different embodiment, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a sorting unit of a further different embodiment. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the attacca unit of the center role piece, as viewed from the front with a portion of the unit disassembled, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the attacca unit, as viewed from the rear with a portion of the unit disassembled. This is an exploded oblique view of the Attacca unit of the center part, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the Attacca unit, the center part, seen from behind. (a) is an oblique view of the second starting port opening/closing unit, first large prize opening/closing unit, second large prize opening/closing unit, and V distribution unit in the Attacca unit, viewed from the front, and (b) is an oblique view of the second starting port opening/closing unit, first large prize opening/closing unit, second large prize opening/closing unit, and V distribution unit in the Attacca unit, viewed from the back. 1A is an exploded oblique view of the second starting hole opening/closing unit in the attacca unit of the center role piece, seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded oblique view of the second starting hole opening/closing unit, seen from the rear. (a) is an oblique view of the second starting port opening/closing unit when the second starting port is closed, (b) is an oblique view of the second starting port opening/closing unit when the second starting port is open, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of each component of the second starting port opening/closing unit when the second starting port is closed, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of each component of the second starting port opening/closing unit when the second starting port is open. (a) is an exploded oblique view of the first large prize opening opening unit in the Attacca unit of the center role, viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of the first large prize opening opening unit viewed from the rear. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of each component of the first large prize opening opening/closing unit when the first large prize opening is closed, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of each component of the first large prize opening opening/closing unit when the first large prize opening is open. (a) is an exploded oblique view of the second large prize opening opening unit in the Attacca unit of the center role, viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of the second large prize opening opening unit viewed from the rear. 1A is an exploded oblique view of the V-distribution unit in the attacca unit of the center role piece, seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded oblique view of the V-distribution unit, seen from the rear. (a) is an oblique view showing the relationship between the V distribution unit, the V winning port sensor, the losing port sensor, and the center right bottom ball path, and (b) is an exploded oblique view showing (a) disassembled. 1A is a perspective view showing an installation state of an opening/closing unit according to a different embodiment, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. This is an explanatory diagram showing, in an oblique view, the relationship between the attacca front plate, second start port sensor, second large prize port sensor, V prize port sensor, losing port sensor, attacca base plate, and center lower right ball passage in the attacca unit of the center role. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a side cross section of a different embodiment of a door body applied to the first large prize opening opening unit in the attacca unit of the center role, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing (a) in a plan view. 1A is a perspective view from the rear of the attacca unit in the center role-playing device with the wiring omitted, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view showing the binding base in FIG. This is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the center base of the main unit and the attacca base plate of the attacca unit in the center role piece and the binding base. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of the binding base seen from the top front, FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the binding base seen from the top rear, and FIG. 1C is a perspective view of the binding base seen from the bottom front. 1A is an enlarged perspective view of the main parts of the center component with multiple wires bundled together on a binding base with cable ties, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the binding base separated from FIG. 1A. 169A is a perspective view showing a binding base of a different embodiment from the binding base of FIG. 168, and FIG. 169B is a perspective view showing a binding base of a further different embodiment. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an oblique view of the wiring engagement portion on the rear surface of the game board in use; FIG. This is an exploded oblique view of the rear unit of the game board disassembled into the presentation unit, mounting supporter, and rear box, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the rear unit of the game board disassembled into the presentation unit, mounting supporter, and rear box, viewed from behind. 1A is a six-sided view of the mounting supporter in the rear unit, FIG. 1B is a front perspective view of the mounting supporter in FIG. 1A, and FIG. 1C is a rear perspective view of the mounting supporter in FIG. 175, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing in an oblique view the main parts of the mounting supporter having a different shape of the main body portion in the mounting supporter of (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing in an oblique view from behind the main parts of the mounting supporter of (a). 175A is a perspective view of a mounting supporter having a different shape from that of FIG. 175, as viewed from the left front, FIG. 175B is a front view of the mounting supporter of FIG. 175A, FIG. 175C is a perspective view of the mounting supporter of FIG. 175A, FIG. 175D is a perspective view of the mounting supporter of FIG. 175A, as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 175D is a perspective view of the mounting supporter of FIG. 175A, as viewed from the back. FIG. 2 is an enlarged perspective view of the mounting supporter as a key part with the rear box made transparent, and of the rear unit as viewed from the rear. 177A is a photograph of the rear of one of the mounting supporters in FIG. 175 on the rear unit, and FIG. 177B is a photograph of the rear of the mounting supporter in FIG. 177 on the rear unit. This is an exploded oblique view of the rear unit of the game board, disassembled into each unit and viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the rear unit of the game board, disassembled into each unit and viewed from behind. (a) is a front view of the back front left performance unit in the back unit, (b) is an oblique view of the back front left performance unit seen from the front, (c) is an oblique view of the back front left performance unit seen from the back, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the back front left performance unit cut along the sarsa line in (a). This is an exploded oblique view of the rear front left performance unit in the back unit, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the rear front left performance unit in the rear unit, viewed from behind. This is a front view of the rear performance unit in the back unit. (a) is an oblique view of the rear performance unit seen from the front, and (b) is an oblique view of the rear performance unit seen from the back. This is an exploded oblique view showing the unit base side, rear upper decorative body, and rear lower decorative body of the rear performance unit from the front. This is an exploded oblique view showing the unit base side, rear upper decorative body, and rear lower decorative body of the rear performance unit from the rear. (a) is an exploded oblique view of the locking mechanism of the rear upper decorative body in the rear performance unit, viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of the locking mechanism of the rear upper decorative body, viewed from the rear. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an oblique view of the locking mechanism in the locked position on the back upper decorative body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an oblique view of the locking mechanism in the unlocked position on the back upper decorative body. This is an exploded oblique view of the rear lower decorative body of the rear performance unit, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the rear lower decorative body of the rear performance unit, viewed from behind. This is an explanatory diagram showing the wiring arrangement on the rear surface of the rear lower decorative body of the rear performance unit. (a) is an exploded oblique view of the first rotating decorative body in the rear lower decorative body viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of the first rotating decorative body in the rear lower decorative body viewed from the back. This is a front view of the rear performance unit showing the rear upper decorative body being moved to the drop position. This is a front view of the rear performance unit showing the rear upper decorative body and the rear lower decorative body moved to the central position. (a) is a front view of the game board showing the display screen of the performance display device with it blacked out, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic relationship between the display screen of the performance display device and the back front left back decorative sheet of the back front left performance unit in the back unit. This is a front view of the game board showing the back right upper decorative body, the back right middle decorative body, and the back right lower decorative body of the back right performance unit in the back unit being moved to their appearance positions. This is a front view of the game board showing the rear left decoration of the rear left performance unit in the rear unit being moved to the first appearance position. This is a front view of the game board showing the rear left decorative body of the rear left performance unit in the rear unit being moved to the second appearance position. This is a front view of the game board showing the rear upper decoration of the rear performance unit in the rear unit having been dropped from the retracted position to the appearance position. This is a front view of the game board showing the rear upper decoration and the rear lower decoration of the rear performance unit in the rear unit moved to the central position. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control configuration of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart of a vibration alarm process on a game board. FIG. 11 is a front view of the door frame of the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the door frame of the second embodiment. An oblique view of the door frame of the second embodiment from the front right. An oblique view of the door frame of the second embodiment seen from the front left. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment. 1A is an exploded oblique view of the door frame of the second embodiment disassembled into a door frame top add unit and other parts, viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded oblique view of (a) viewed from the rear. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top add unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top add unit as viewed from the rear. 1A is a side cross-sectional view of the upper part of the door frame of the second embodiment, and FIG. 1B is an exploded side cross-sectional view showing the door frame top add unit and other parts in FIG. 1A is an exploded oblique view of the main parts of the door frame of the second embodiment, viewed from behind with the right side panel and right side decorative sheet disassembled from the door frame right side unit, and FIG. 1B is an oblique view of the right side panel viewed from the left rear. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process performed when the main control side is powered on; This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 214. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a main control side timer interrupt processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing performed when the dispensing control unit is powered on. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit in Figure 217. Following Figure 218, this is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the dispensing control unit is powered on. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a dispensing control unit timer interrupt process. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process; 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special symbol and special electric device control processing (step S114). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing processing (step S232). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a performance pre-determination process (step S245). A flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S238). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern normal processing (step S280). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a hit determination process (step S305). Various tables showing a hit determination table (A), a big hit pattern determination table (B), and a small hit pattern determination table (C). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281). 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern change processing (step S283). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern stop processing (step S284). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control processing (step S235A). 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a button effect execution process. 13A is a table showing an example of a button effect determination pattern, and FIG. 13B is a table showing an example of a button effect execution pattern. This is a specific example of a button effect when it is executed. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for executing a crazy effect when a ball scores. 11 is a time chart showing an example of execution of a madness effect and a mute effect. An explanatory diagram showing the light-emitting state of the door frame when the crazy effect and the mute effect are executed. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for executing a suggestive effect when a ball scores. An explanatory diagram showing the illuminated points on the game area when a suggestive performance is executed.

[1. Overall structure of a pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 1 to 12. Fig. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, Fig. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and Fig. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Fig. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the right front, Fig. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the left front, and Fig. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the rear. Fig. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the performance operation unit is in the raised position, and Fig. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the performance operation unit is in the raised position, seen from the right front. Also, Fig. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame as viewed from the rear.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a game board 5 that has a game area 5a that is detachably attached to the main frame 4 from the front and is visible from the player's side through the door frame 3 and into which the player hits a game ball B (see Figure 89).

The outer frame 2 is formed into a rectangular frame that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, an upper outer frame member 30 that connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, a lower outer frame assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30, and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 so that they can rotate coaxially, and the main frame 4 is attached so that it can be opened and closed forward around the left side when viewed from the front.

In addition, when the main frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 has the lower outer frame assembly 40 which cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622, and the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, allowing the player to hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are dropped so that it can be seen from the front, stores the game balls B to be dropped into the game area 5a, and is equipped with a handle 195 that the player operates to drop the stored game balls B into the game area 5a. The door frame 3 also decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 also has a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player in addition to the handle 195. When a player-participation performance is being executed, the player can participate in the performance by operating the performance operation unit 301. This allows the player to enjoy the game not only by playing with the game ball B, but also by operating the performance operation unit 301.

The main body frame 4 comprises a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable and for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 which reinforces the main body frame base unit 500, a ball launching device 540 for shooting game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. It is equipped with a payout base unit 550 that receives the game balls B, a payout unit 560 that pays out the game balls B received by the payout base unit 550 to the player, a board unit 620 that has a power board 630 equipped with a power switch 630a that can turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 as well as a payout control board 633, a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

The main frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a play area 5a where a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and is used to pay out the game ball B to the player and to eject the game balls B used in the game to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment of the game hall). The main frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is removably stored inside from the front. The main frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3 is attached so that the open front side can be closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a where the game ball B is thrown by the player, a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit 1310 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and has a main control board 1310 and a setting change board. 300, a functional display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, a peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) located on the rear side of the game panel 1100, a performance display device 1600 that is located in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and can display a predetermined performance image, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is equipped with various performance units that can perform movable performances and light-emitting performances depending on the game status.

The game area 5a of the game board 5 includes a plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, a general winning hole 2001 that gives a player a predetermined privilege (e.g., the payment of a predetermined number of game balls B) when the game ball B is received or passes through, a first lower starting hole 2003, a first upper starting hole 2004, a second starting hole 2005, a first large winning hole 2006, a second large winning hole 2007, a V winning hole 2008, and a losing hole 2009. The obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general winning gate 2001, gate 2002, first lower starting gate 2003, first upper starting gate 2004, second starting gate 2005, first large winning gate 2006, and second large winning gate 2007 (V winning gate 2008, losing gate 2009) are provided in the front unit 2000.

The player can shoot the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. This allows the player to enjoy operating the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B so that it is accepted into or passes through the general winning gate 2001, the gate 2002, the first lower starting gate 2003, the first upper starting gate 2004, the second starting gate 2005, the first large winning gate 2006, the second large winning gate 2007 (the V winning gate 2008, the losing gate 2009), etc., in the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 can entertain the player by displaying a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600 according to the game state that changes when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a, and by providing light-emitting and moving performances using the starting hole display unit 2110, the back front upper performance unit 3200, the back front left performance unit 3300, the back right performance unit 3400, the back rear performance unit 3600, etc.

[2. Overall structure of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figs. 13 to 18. Fig. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, Fig. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and Fig. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Fig. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and Fig. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the rear. Fig. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main components and seen from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in an amusement hall or the like on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed into a rectangular frame that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 comprises a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other laterally and extend vertically, an upper outer frame member 30 that connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, a lower outer frame assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30, and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When the main frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622, and can invert the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiate it forward.

The outer frame 2 can detachably support the upper hinge assembly 50 of the main body frame 4. The upper hinge assembly 50 and the lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 can coaxially support the upper hinge member 510 and the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed forward around the left side when viewed from the front.

[2-1. Left outer frame assembly and right outer frame assembly]
The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 19. Fig. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, disassembled and viewed from the front. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are arranged spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 coaxially support the upper main frame hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so that they can rotate on the same axis, and attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 comprises a left outer frame member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-to-rear direction, an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper end of the right side of the left outer frame member 11, and a lower left connecting member 13 that is attached to the lower end of the right side of the left outer frame member 11.

The left outer frame member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed from an extruded aluminum alloy material. The left outer frame member 11 has a recess 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear part of the left side surface, which is one of three equal parts in the front-to-rear direction, a bulge 11b that bulges to the right from the part on the right side surface opposite the recess 11a, and a hollow portion 11c that penetrates the bulge 11b vertically. The strength and rigidity of the left outer frame member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulge 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

The left outer frame member 11 also has multiple grooves extending vertically formed on both the left and right side surfaces. The multiple grooves on the left side surface are V-shaped, and the multiple grooves on the right side surface are semicircular. The left outer frame member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the right outer frame member 21 of the right outer frame assembly 20 described below.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 is provided with a flat horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-to-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 is attached to the left outer frame member 11 by inserting the rear lower horizontal fixing part 12c into the hollow part 11c of the left outer frame member 11, abutting the horizontal fixing part 12a against the upper end of the left outer frame member 11, and further abutting the front and rear lower horizontal fixing parts 12c against the right side of the left outer frame member 11, and screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing part 12c from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 is also attached to the upper outer frame member 30 by abutting the horizontal fixing part 12a against the underside of the left end side of the upper outer frame member 30, and inserting the upper horizontal fixing part 12b into the notch part 30a on the left side of the upper outer frame member 30, and screwing a screw into the upper outer frame member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 12a and the upper horizontal fixing part 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 is provided with a flat horizontal fixing portion 13a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 13b extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a, a flat lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat abutment portion 13d extending short to the right from the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The left lower connecting member 13 is attached to the left outer frame member 11 by screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11 with the rear surface of the abutment portion 13d abutting against the front surface of the bulge portion 11b of the left outer frame member 11, the left side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b abutting against the right side of the left outer frame member 11, and the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a coinciding with the lower end of the left outer frame member 11. The left lower connecting member 13 is attached to the lower outer frame member 41 by screwing a screw into the lower outer frame member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c with the horizontal fixing portion 13a abutting against the upper surface of the left end side of the lower outer frame member 41 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c inserted into the notch 41a on the left side of the lower outer frame member 41.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 comprises a right outer frame member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-to-rear direction, an upper right connecting member 22 attached to the upper end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side of the right outer frame member 21.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed from an extruded aluminum alloy material. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface, which is one of three equal portions of the right side surface divided in the front-to-rear direction, a bulge 21b that bulges to the left from the portion of the left side surface opposite the recess 21a, and a hollow portion 21c that penetrates the bulge 21b vertically. The strength and rigidity of the right outer frame member 21 are increased by the recess 21a and the bulge 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

The right outer frame member 21 also has multiple grooves extending vertically formed on both the left and right side surfaces. The multiple grooves on the right side surface are V-shaped, and the multiple grooves on the left side surface are semicircular. The right outer frame member 21 is formed symmetrically to the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 is provided with a flat horizontal fixing portion 22a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-to-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 is attached to the right outer frame member 21 by inserting the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, abutting the horizontal fixing portion 22a against the upper end of the right outer frame member 21, and screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side of the right outer frame member 21 with the front and rear lower horizontal fixing portions 22c abutting against the left side of the right outer frame member 21. The upper right connecting member 22 is attached to the upper outer frame member 30 by abutting the horizontal fixing portion 22a against the lower surface of the right end side of the upper outer frame member 30, inserting the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the notch portion 30a on the right side of the upper outer frame member 30, and screwing a screw into the upper outer frame member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 is provided with a flat horizontal fixing portion 23a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 23b extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a, a flat lower lateral fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat abutment portion 23d extending short to the left from the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 is attached to the right outer frame member 21 by screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing part 23b from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21 with the rear surface of the abutment part 23d abutting against the front surface of the bulge part 21b of the right outer frame member 21, the right side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b abutting against the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 23a coinciding with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 is attached to the lower outer frame member 41 by screwing a screw into the lower outer frame member 41 through the horizontal fixing part 23a and the lower horizontal fixing part 23c with the horizontal fixing part 23a abutting against the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41 and the lower horizontal fixing part 23c inserted into the notch 41a on the right side of the lower outer frame member 41.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are hooked by the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main frame 4 described below. The upper hook member 24 has a flat mounting part 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and a flat hook piece part 24b that extends leftward from the front edge of the mounting part 24a and hooks the upper outer frame hook 653.

The lower hook member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a flat hook piece portion 25b that extends leftward from the front edge of the mounting portion 25a and to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion hole 25c that penetrates the hook piece portion 25b in the front-to-rear direction and through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted.

[2-2. Upper outer frame member]
The upper outer frame member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 18. The upper outer frame member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides. The upper outer frame member 30 has a width in the front-to-rear direction substantially the same as that of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 in the front-to-rear direction, a constant thickness in the up-down direction, extends in the left-to-right direction, and is made of wood. The upper outer frame member 30 is formed so that its length in the left-to-right direction is the same as that of the lower outer frame member 41 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 described below.

The upper outer frame member 30 has cutouts 30a at the center of the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. The upper horizontal fixing part 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted and attached into the cutouts 30a at both left and right ends.

The upper outer frame member 30 also has a mounting step 30b at the left end, the top and front surfaces of which are recessed from the general surface. The upper outer frame hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to this mounting step 30b.

[2-3. Lower Outer Frame Assembly]
The lower frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 20. Fig. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower frame assembly of the outer frame when viewed from the front. The lower frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left and right frame assemblies 10 and 20, which are spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and is used to close off the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 for decoration.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 comprises a lower outer frame member 41 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and extends left and right; a box-shaped front panel member 42 that is disposed in front of the lower outer frame member 41, extends left and right along the lower outer frame member 41, and is open at the rear; a box-shaped rear panel member 43 that is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42 and is attached to the top surface of the lower outer frame member 41, extends left and right, and is open at the front; and a ball-jamming prevention mechanism 44 formed at the left end of the top surface of the rear panel member 43.

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-to-rear direction that is approximately the same as that of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 in the front-to-rear direction, a constant thickness in the up-down direction, extends in the left-to-right direction, and is formed from wood. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that its length in the left-to-right direction is the same as that of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-to-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutouts 41a at the center of the front-rear direction on both left and right sides, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted and attached into the cutouts 41a at both left and right ends. This allows the lower ends of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 to be connected to each other.

The outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the top surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the back panel member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends left and right and extends from a position toward the rear of the center in the front-to-rear direction to the front end side. This recess 41b makes the volume of the back panel internal space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the back panel member 43 as large as possible.

The front panel member 42 has the same left-right length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular box shape with a short front-to-back depth relative to its height, with the entire rear side open. The front panel member 42 closes the open rear side with the rear panel member 43, thereby forming the front panel internal space 40a that becomes part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the rear panel member 43. The front panel member 42 has a long hole-shaped opening 42a on the front side near the right end that penetrates from front to back and extends left to right.

The rear panel member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. The rear panel member 43 has the front panel member 42 attached to its front surface, and cooperates with the front panel member 42 to form the interior space 40a of the panel, which is part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connecting tube portion 43a in the left-right center of the upper surface, which extends left-right and protrudes upward and communicates with the interior space 40a of the panel. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined so that its upper end is located higher from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43, toward the rear. In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a has a left-right length of approximately 1/3 of the length of the entire back panel member 43, and a front-rear depth slightly shorter than the depth of the entire back panel member 43. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front and rear ends are provided inside the connecting tube portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is connected to the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4, and is in communication with the internal space of the speaker unit 620a, forming an enclosure 624.

The ball trapping prevention mechanism 44 prevents the game ball B from being trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 by retaining the game ball B at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

The ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later can be attached, a first discharge port 44b opening upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c opening upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, a standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the mounting portion 44a, and an upper end protruding portion 44e protruding forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and slanting so that the upper surface is positioned upward as it approaches the rear.

The first discharge opening 44b is formed at a position that coincides with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c are formed to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c do not communicate with the front panel internal space 40a, and open to the rear surface of the front panel rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that enters the first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c can be discharged to the rear of the front panel rear member 43.

If an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 described below, the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 can prevent the illegal tool from entering by using the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a. Even if the tip of the illegal tool abuts against the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end protrusion portion 44e that protrudes forward at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent illegal acts from being performed through the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

However, if the rear end of the mounting portion 44a is provided with a vertical wall portion 44d, when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, if a game ball B falls onto the mounting portion 44a for some reason, the vertical wall portion 44d will prevent the game ball B from moving rearward relative to the outer frame 2, making it easier for the game ball B to remain on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, the game ball B will be pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, causing a problem that the main frame 4 cannot be closed.

In contrast, the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 of this embodiment allows game balls B that have fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or onto the placement portion 44a to be discharged to the rear of the curtain board rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first discharge opening 44b, or through the second discharge opening 44c, thereby preventing game balls B from being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 spaced apart on the left and right sides of the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43, a flat grill member 46 that closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear, a port member 47 with two cylinders extending forward and backward that is attached inside the front panel member 42 to close the opening 42a by sandwiching the grill member 46, and a frame-shaped seal member 48 that is placed at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 are against which the lower end of the door frame 3 abuts when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2. The guide members 45 are made of a low-friction material that has low friction resistance, making the lower end of the main frame 4 easier to slide on, facilitating opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is a strip-like plate extending in the left-right direction, and has multiple blades 46b spaced apart in the up-down direction. The blades 46b are inclined so that the front end is higher than the rear end (see FIG. 47). The grill member 46 allows ventilation between the inside of the front panel member 42 (the front panel internal space 40a) and the outside through the gaps between the blades 46b.

The port member 47 uses two cylinders to connect the interior space 40a of the panel (enclosure 624) to the front of the outer frame 2 through the gap between the blades 46b of the grill member 46. The port member 47 is made of two cylinders with a specified inner diameter and length, and can resonate and amplify the low-pitched sounds emitted backward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main frame speaker 622 using the principle of Helmholtz resonance, radiating rich low-pitched sounds to the front of the outer frame 2 (towards the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, allowing the player to hear deep low-pitched sounds.

When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the sealing member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 on the main frame 4, and prevents sound from inside the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 from leaking out from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of this embodiment, the air vibrations emitted from the main frame speaker 622 to the outside from the inner space 40a of the fascia board can be directed by the inclined vane portions 46b through the lower cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 diagonally upward and forward, into the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is housed. As a result, when a player inserts his or her fingers inside the handle cover 295 (front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the device for striking the game ball B), the main frame speaker 622 can be vibrated to send air into the front tube portion 291a, surprising the player and providing an unprecedented performance.

In addition, because the port member 47 is open toward the front, a portion of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the multiple blades 46b of the grill member 46 is emitted forward, so that the sound effects emitted from the port member 47 can be heard by players seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players wandering around the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. This also attracts the attention of players, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the port member 47 is provided in the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 provided in the main frame 4 can be increased, allowing for a deeper bass sound to be output, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 21. Fig. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame when disassembled and viewed from above the front, and Fig. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) when viewed from below the front. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinged and rotatable. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, a locking member 52 attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, and a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 includes an upper fixing portion 51a that is a flat plate extending horizontally and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, a flat forward extension portion 51b that extends forward from the front edge of the upper fixing portion 51a, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right edge of the forward extension portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, a flat horizontal fixing portion 51d that extends downward from the left edge of the upper fixing portion 51a, and a flat edge wall portion 51e that extends downward from the edge of the left edge of the forward extension portion 51b around the front edge to the part where the bearing groove 51c opens and is continuous with the horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 (described later) of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 within the bearing groove 51c.

The locking member 52 comprises a band-shaped locking body 52a extending forward and backward, an operating piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the locking body 52a, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic part 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the locking body 52a and then diagonally forward to the left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the locking body 52a. The locking member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extension part 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 at a position rearward of the bearing groove 51c by means of mounting screws 53.

When the locking member 52 is attached to the upper hinge member 51, the locking body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end extends forward so that it can abut against the portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c in the edge wall portion 51e of the upper hinge member 51. In addition, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the locking body 52a abuts against the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the upper hinge member 51. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward around the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the locking body 52a of the locking member 52 abuts against the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the upper body frame hinge pin 512 of the upper body frame hinge member 510 is formed in the bearing groove 51c in a portion forward of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operating piece 52b of this locking member 52, the locking body 52a can be rotated against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operating piece 52b to rotate the locking body 52a in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, the locking body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be fully opened. This makes it possible to insert the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c or remove the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 from within the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Lower outer frame hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 18. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 includes a flat horizontal portion 60a extending horizontally, a flat rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a rearward of the center in the front-rear direction, a lower outer frame hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating the horizontal portion 60a from top to bottom and large enough for only one game ball B to pass through. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower outer frame hinge pin 60c is cylindrical and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the vertical center. This lower outer frame hinge pin 60c is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to contact the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-to-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. This discharge hole 60d is formed to be approximately the same size as the first discharge opening 44b of the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear of the horizontal section 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is placed on the mounting section 44a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and is fixed to the rear panel member 43 with screws (not shown). The rising section 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11, forward of the bulging section 11b, with screws (not shown). By inserting the lower outer frame hinge pin 60c into the lower outer frame hinge hole 521a in the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4, the lower outer frame hinge member 60 can cooperate with the upper outer frame hinge member 51 to attach the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge opening 44b of the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. This allows the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a to fall (discharge) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge opening 44b. In more detail, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 rolls to the rear side where the gap is wider, as the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 gradually narrows as the main frame 4 is closed, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. In this case, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 in a state where it is assembled into the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, game balls B that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling rearward beyond the main frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 60d, and game balls B are less likely to become trapped in the area of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 30. Figure 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, Figure 23 is a rear view of the door frame, Figure 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and Figure 25 is a right side view of the door frame. Figure 26 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the right front, Figure 27 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front, and Figure 28 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the rear. Figure 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and Figure 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components and seen from the rear.

The door frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, with approximately the same size as the interior of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the interior of the outer frame 2 via the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front. The door frame 3 closes the play area 5a of the play board 5 into which the game balls B are dropped so that it can be seen from the front, stores the game balls B to be dropped into the play area 5a, and is equipped with a handle 195 that the player operates to drop the stored game balls B into the play area 5a. The door frame 3 also decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 comprises a door frame base unit 100, which has a rectangular, vertically extending outer shape when viewed from the front, a glass unit 160 that is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and closes the play area 5a of the play board 5 attached to the main frame 4 so that it can be seen from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear, a handle unit 180 that is attached to the front right corner of the door frame base unit 100, and a handle that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180. It comprises a cover unit 290, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, a left side unit 420 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 200, a right side unit 430 attached to the right front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, and a top unit 450 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the left side unit 420 and the right side unit 430.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed into a vertically extending square (rectangle) in front view and penetrates from front to back, a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner as seen from the rear, a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end as seen from the rear, a door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left of the door frame main relay board 104 as seen from the rear, a handle rear relay board 106 attached to the left of the door frame sub-relay board 105 as seen from the rear, a door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 from the rear, a handle rear relay board cover 108 that covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear, and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear of the door frame base 101, an upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and a lower door frame hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a ball supply unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from behind.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide it with rigidity. The upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and the lower door frame hinge member 125 are used to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 to be used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and for locking and opening the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

The ball supply unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 is for guiding the game balls B (foul balls) that have been launched by the ball launching device 540 and have not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and for guiding the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 has a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player, and the handle unit 180 is used to play a game in which the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540 by operating the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. Figure 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Figure 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 is hingedly attached to the main frame 4 on the left side when viewed from the front, closing the front of the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, while allowing the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 attached to the main frame 4 to be visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 is equipped with a flat door frame base 101 with a rectangular shape that extends vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner when viewed from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view, a door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left of the door frame main relay board 104 in rear view in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, a handle rear relay board 106 attached to the left of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in rear view in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 further comprises a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, an upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and a lower door frame hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a ball supply unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from behind.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 attached to the lower front corners, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 420 attached to the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) with an outer shape extending vertically in front view. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates from front to back and has an inner periphery shape extending vertically in front view. The upper side and both left and right sides that form the inner periphery of the door window 101a are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side that forms the inner periphery is located at about 1/3 height in the vertical direction from the lower end of the door frame base 101. In this way, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a that penetrates from front to back. This door frame base 101 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is provided with a handle mounting surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) formed in the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward more than the right end side, a cylinder insertion hole 101d that penetrates from front to back between the handle mounting surface 101b and the door window 101a and into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted, and a ball feeding opening 101e that penetrates from front to front on the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting surface 101b when viewed from the front and allows the entrance 141a and ball removal opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 to be exposed forward.

The door frame base 101 also has a lower tray ball passage port 101f that penetrates from front to back at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction and at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, allowing the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward, an upper tray ball passage port 101g that penetrates from front to back adjacent to the lower edge of the door window 101a near the left end when viewed from the front, allowing the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward, and a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the door window 101a, into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

The door frame base 101 also has multiple vertical slits 101i formed in the lower left corner when viewed from the front (below the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray) that penetrate from front to back. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the multiple slits 101i. When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the multiple slits 101i have the speaker opening 211b of the tray unit base 211 in the tray unit 200 located in front of them, and the main body frame speaker 622 in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 located behind them, allowing sound from the main body frame speaker 622 to be emitted forward.

Furthermore, the door frame base 101 has a through hole 101j that penetrates from front to back below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. This through hole 101j is for inserting a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side, and is formed to match the through hole 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. This allows the sound emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 to be guided forward without being diffused, and can be well guided to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the player) through the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the speaker port 211b in the plate unit base 211 of the plate unit 200.

The speaker duct 103 also has a cable holder 103a on the rear surface below the cylindrical section, which holds the connection cable 503. The cable holder 103a is located to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and holds the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 so that it extends to the left end of the door frame 3.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 has an outer shape that extends vertically and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and a part of the connection cable 503 (see Figures 82 and 83) extending from the main body frame 4 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an inverted L-shape with a top part of a vertically extending rectangle joined to the right side of the top part when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the vertically extending part is adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is for relaying the connection between the handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the main frame 4, and the remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the main frame 4 is connected to it.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude toward the rear. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts of the door frame sub-relay board 105 that extend up and down are covered at the rear by the door frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining parts of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are covered at the rear by the fall cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay board 106 has an external shape formed in a rectangle extending left and right, and is attached to the rear of the handle mounting surface 101b below the ball feed opening 101e at the rear of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay board 106 is used to relay the connection between the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194 of the handle unit 180, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the rear side of the handle rear relay board 106 is covered by the handle rear relay board cover 108.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the handle rear relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 31 to 33. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to cover the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 (parts extending up and down in an inverted L-shape). The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and left sides open when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the open left side and connected to those terminals.

The handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 in the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and is intended to cover the wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball dispensing operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape that extends left and right, and has openings near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cable through.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and provide rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 comprises a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 which extend vertically and are arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right sides, an upper reinforcement frame 113 which extends horizontally and connects the upper ends of the left reinforcement frame 111 and the right reinforcement frame 112, an intermediate reinforcement frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcement frame 111 and extends to the right near the right reinforcement frame 112, a cylinder mounting frame 115 which connects the right end of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 to the right reinforcement frame 112, and hook hook members 116 which are attached to the rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112 at a distance from each other on the left and right sides and to which door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 are hooked.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically for a length approximately equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 has multiple insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the up-down direction and extends horizontally for a length approximately equal to the left-to-right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcement frame 114 extends left and right with a width wider than the width of the upper reinforcement frame 113. The intermediate reinforcement frame 114 has a rectangular cutout 114a cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a through-hole 114b that penetrates from front to back near the right end. The cutout 114a is formed at a position that coincides with the upper tray ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through-hole 114b is formed at a position that coincides with the through-hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is provided with a pair of rear pieces arranged at a distance from the left and right and formed as rectangular flat plates extending up and down when viewed from the front, a pair of side pieces extending forward in a flat plate shape from each of the opposing edges of the pair of rear pieces, and a flat front piece connecting the front end edges of the pair of forward extending pieces. This cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed into a convex shape that protrudes forward when viewed from above. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of this cylinder mounting frame 115.

The hook members 116 are attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at the locations of the insertion holes that penetrate from front to rear. These hook members 116 are hooked by the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

The left reinforcement frame 111, right reinforcement frame 112, upper reinforcement frame 113, middle reinforcement frame 114, cylinder mounting frame 115, and hook member 116 that make up the door frame reinforcement unit 110 are formed by punching and bending metal plates using press molding. They are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is assembled so that the left reinforcement frame 111, the right reinforcement frame 112, and the top reinforcement frame 113 are aligned along the left, right, and top edges of the door frame base 101, and the middle reinforcement frame 114 is positioned below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a number of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, and the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 of the door-frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door-frame reinforcement unit 110 when viewed from the front. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinged and rotatable in cooperation with the lower door-frame hinge member 125. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door-frame reinforcement unit 110, a door-frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the up-down direction, a flange member 123 attached to the door-frame upper hinge pin 122, and a lock spring 124 that biases the door-frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 has a flat mounting piece 121a that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and flat protruding pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The mounting piece 121a of the hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The upper door frame hinge pin 122 is a cylindrical metal rod bent into an L-shape. When assembled to the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, the portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 that extends vertically penetrates from below near the front ends of a pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, with the upper end extending upward beyond the upper protruding piece 121b, and the portion that extends horizontally abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the upper door frame hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 in the upper body frame hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The flange member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 that extends upward and downward between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123.

In the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, the upper door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 121b, restricting further upward movement. In this state, the upper end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 protrudes a predetermined amount above the top surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 from below, and remove it downward. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be supported so as to be hinged and rotatable relative to the main body frame 4.

In addition, the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 has a portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 that extends vertically and is positioned coaxially with the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 described below. This allows the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 to hinge rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in a favorable condition.

[3-1g. Door frame bottom hinge parts]
The door-frame bottom hinge member 125 of the door-frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door-frame bottom hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door-frame reinforcement unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door-frame bottom hinge member 125 cooperates with the door-frame upper hinge assembly 120 to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so as to be hinged and rotatable thereabout.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110 and has a flat mounting piece 125a that is rectangular when viewed from the front, a flat protruding piece 125b that extends forward from the bottom edge of the mounting piece 125a, and a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see Figure 22, etc.) that protrudes downward from the underside near the front end of the protruding piece 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and protruding piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The lower door frame hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal bar with a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, this lower door frame hinge pin 126 is attached to a portion of the protruding piece 125b that is coaxial with the portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 that extends vertically.

This door frame lower hinge member 125 can support the door frame 3 to be hingedly rotatable relative to the main frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main frame lower hinge assembly 520.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 34 to 36. Figure 34(a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the rear front, (c) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in a conventional pachinko machine seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the rear. Figure 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) seen from the rear. Figure 36(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) from the front, (b) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 comprises a cylindrical cylinder body 131 that extends forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a rotation transmission member 133 that is provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131 and rotates together with the rotation of a regular key inserted in the keyhole 132.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear and has its rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear, and has a pair of notches cut from the rear end toward the front at positions opposite each other across the central axis. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be inserted from the rear, and the rotation of the rotation transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate it by inserting a pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches.

In more detail, the cylinder lock 130 is provided with a first cam member 134 that is provided at the rear end of the cylinder body 131 and rotates together with the rotation of a regular key inserted in the keyhole 132; a second cam member 135 that is rotatably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 at a position below the cylinder body 131 around an axis in the front-to-rear direction; a band-shaped first arm 136 that is rotatably attached at its upper end to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 and at its lower end to the right of the center of rotation of the second cam member 135; and a band-shaped second arm 137 that is rotatably attached at its upper end to the lower position below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 and at its lower end to the lower position below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135.

The cylinder lock 130 also includes a rear cover 138 attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear, excluding the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133), and rivets 139 that rotatably attach the upper and lower ends of each of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively.

The first cam member 134 has the upper end side of the first arm 136 attached to the rear side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and a rotation transmission member 133 is attached to the rear side across the front side of the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to be able to rotate integrally with it. The second cam member 135 has the lower end side of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 attached to the front side forward of the first arm 136.

In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion where the first arm 136 is attached and the portion where the second arm 137 is attached are separated by an angle of 90 degrees around the respective rotation axes. In addition, in each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion where the first arm 136 is attached is located farther from the center of rotation than the portion where the second arm 137 is attached.

The rear cover 138 is detachably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 at its upper end with a screw (not shown), with the shaft 138a, which protrudes outward in a cylindrical shape from the lower end of both the left and right sides, engaged with the L-shaped engagement slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115.

This cylinder lock 130 has a cylinder mounting frame 115, a cylinder body 131, a rotation transmission member 133, a first cam member 134, a second cam member 135, a first arm 136, and a second arm 137, all of which are made of metal.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is approximately aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side unit 430.

Here, we will explain the conventional cylinder lock 130A. As shown in Figures 34(c) and (d), the conventional cylinder lock 130A has a cylinder body 131 that penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and has its rear end attached to the front piece. This cylinder lock 130A has a rotation transmission member 133 provided on the axis of the cylinder body 131.

Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be described. In a conventional cylinder lock 130, as shown in Figures 34(c) and (d), a rotation transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas in the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 34(a) and (b), the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In the normal state of this cylinder lock 130, as shown in FIG. 36(a), both upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 are attached to the right of the rotation center of each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, and both upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the lower of the rotation center of each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135. With the use of a regular key, the cylinder body 131 can be rotated by 90 degrees in both the clockwise and counterclockwise directions from the normal state.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 with the key inserted in the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, a large force acts on the first arm 136 to rotate the second cam member 135 counterclockwise, whereas since the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, almost no force acts on the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 counterclockwise.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly via the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate counterclockwise, and the rotation transmission member 133 to rotate together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward due to the counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is proportional to the left-right distance between the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force acting upward in the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force acting upward in the second arm 137 becomes larger.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force acting upward on the second arm 137 becomes greater than that on the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the counterclockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated in the counterclockwise direction up to an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state (see Figure 36 (b)).

When using the key to rotate the key counterclockwise 90 degrees from the normal state and then clockwise 90 degrees to return it to the normal state, the action is reversed.

On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise from the normal state via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted in the keyhole 132, the first arm 136, the upper end of which is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, moves downward, and the second arm 137, the upper end of which is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, moves upward. At this time, since the upper end of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, a large force acts on the first arm 136 to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction, whereas since the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, almost no force acts on the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly via the first arm 136, the second cam member 135 rotates clockwise, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is proportional to the left-right distance between the part where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force of the first arm 136 that tries to rotate the second cam member 135 decreases, whereas the force of the second arm 137 that tries to rotate the second cam member 135 increases.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force tending to rotate the second cam member 135 from the second arm 137 becomes greater than that from the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated in the clockwise direction up to an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(c)).

When using the key to rotate the lock 90 degrees clockwise from its normal state to return it to its normal state by rotating it 90 degrees clockwise, the action is reversed.

In this way, according to the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are connected by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 that are attached at a 90 degree angle from each other to transmit rotation, so that no matter what rotation position the first cam member 134 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) is in, rotation can be transmitted by at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133), allowing for good locking and unlocking of the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

In addition, according to the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the axis of the rotation transmission member 133 (the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4) can be set at a different position relative to the axis of the cylinder body 131 by transmitting rotation using the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as a rotation transmission mechanism. This makes it possible to change the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 to any position without changing the locking unit 650. This allows the cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) to be located in a position that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a highly decorative door frame 3.

In addition, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, there is no need to change the locking unit 650 in the body frame 4, so the locking unit 650 can be reused, and the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

However, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131, so that a fraudster who knows this configuration may insert a tool from the front to the rear of the cylinder body 131 and use the tool to fraudulently rotate the rotation transmission member 133, opening the door frame 3 and committing a fraudulent act. In contrast, in the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131. Therefore, even if a tool is inserted at the rear of the cylinder body 131 to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 is not present at that position, and fraudulent acts by opening the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, etc. can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects portions of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 that are spaced apart by a rotational angle of 90 degrees relative to the first arm 136. Therefore, even if the portions of either the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are positioned on a line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the portions that are furthest from the line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Therefore, even if the rotation from the first cam member 134 cannot be transmitted to the second cam member 135 by positioning one of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 at the dead center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the rotation from the first cam member 134 can be transmitted to the second cam member 135 by the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137. This means that there is no significant resistance to the rotation of the first cam member 134, and the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated smoothly, making it easy to lock and unlock, and also preventing the key inserted in the keyhole from being forcibly rotated, which prevents damage to the key.

In addition, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133, which is located at an eccentric position, by two arms, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137. Therefore, even if one arm is damaged for some reason, the rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a highly reliable cylinder lock 130.

In addition, the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133, which is located at an eccentric position, by the smooth rod-shaped (strip-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137. If the rotation were transmitted by a gear, there would be a risk that the gear would rotate and rotate the rotation transmission member 133 by catching the tip of a tool on the teeth of the gear. However, by making the first arm 136 and second arm 137 into a rod-shaped arm with a smooth surface, it is possible to prevent the tip of a tool from getting caught on the first arm 136 or second arm 137. This makes it possible to prevent the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated by moving the first arm 136 or second arm 137. This reliably prevents the door frame 3 or main frame 4 from being unlocked by unauthorized operation of the locking unit 650.

In the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as a rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. However, this is not limited to this, and other mechanisms may be used, such as a rotation transmission mechanism using multiple gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and rack gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using sprockets and chains, or a rotation transmission mechanism using pulleys and belts.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 37 and 38. Figure 37(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. Figure 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back with the rear case and the anti-tampering member removed. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main frame 4, and can extract the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball extraction button 222.

The ball supply unit 140 comprises a box-shaped front cover 141 having an entrance 141a penetrating in the front-to-rear direction through which the game balls B are supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200, and a ball ejection port 141b opening below the entrance 141a, and a rear cover 142 that closes the rear end of the front cover 141 and is box-shaped with an open front and has a ball supply port 142a for supplying the game balls B that enter through the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-to-rear direction to the ball launching device 540; The ball removal member 143 is supported rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front covers 141 and has a partition 143a that separates the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b at the rear of the front covers 141; a ball delivery member 144 is supported rotatably around an axis extending in the up-down direction between the front covers 141 and the rear covers 142 and delivers the game balls B on the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one to the ball supply port 142a of the rear cover 142; and a ball delivery solenoid 145 that rotates the ball delivery member 144.

As shown in the figure, when viewed from the front, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 disposed to the right of the entrance 141a, a ball extracting member 143 disposed to the left of the ball feeding member 144, and a ball feeding solenoid 145 disposed to the right of the ball feeding member 144.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 to the left of the ball extracting opening 141b when viewed from the front, and the operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 described later extends forward from this slit 141c. In addition, the upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and is formed so that when the door frame 3 is assembled, the rear side closes the rear-open portion of the ball feeding guide path 241b and the upstream end of the ball extracting guide path 241c of the rear base 241 in the upper tray ball extracting unit 240.

The ball removal member 143 comprises a partition section 143a which is located below the entrance 141a between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, a pivoting rod section 143b which extends downward from the end of the partition section 143a opposite the ball feeding member 144 and is bent in an L-shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball removal opening 141b, with its lower end supported for rotation around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c which protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod section 143b, and a weight section 143d which protrudes from the side of the rotating rod section 143b below the operating rod 143c in the opposite direction to the partition section 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37(a)). The operating rod 143c abuts against the upper end (upper surface) of the operating transmission part 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, which moves downward by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 through the ball feed opening 101e of the door frame base 101.

The ball feeding member 144 has a cutoff portion 144a that is fan-shaped in plan view and is centered on the rotation axis, which extends vertically toward the entrance 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143, a ball holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end of the cutoff portion 144a toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped shaft portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The cutoff portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b in the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of approximately 180° centered on the rotation axis. In addition, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is sized to be able to hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the shaft portion 144c, which is positioned eccentrically to the rotation axis, is moved left and right by the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145.

This ball feeding member 144 is adapted to rotate between a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces in a direction communicating with the ball supply port 142a, and a holding position in which the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the ball supply port 142a, and the game ball B that has entered the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a is prevented from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the ball supply port 142a, and only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

The ball feeding unit 140 also includes a ball feeding actuating rod 146 whose tip swings up and down when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (energized), and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction due to the movement of the tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 swinging up and down, and which rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operating rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a of the ball feeding operating rod 146 is pulled toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 rotates upward around the right end. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, rotating the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 downward around the right end, returning to the original state. As a result, the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is caused to swing up and down at its left end (tip) closest to the ball feeding crank 147 by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball delivery crank 147 is equipped with an engagement portion 147a that extends in the left-right direction and can engage with the tip of the ball delivery operating rod 146 that moves up and down, an axle portion 147b that is located on the opposite side of the engagement portion 147a that engages with the ball delivery operating rod 146 and is rotatably supported around an axis that extends in the front-to-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a transmission portion 147c that extends upward from the axle portion 147b and engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see Figure 38 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball delivery member 144.

This ball feeding unit 140 can rotate the ball feeding crank 147 around an axis extending forward and backward via the ball feeding actuating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normally), the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward, and in this state, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned in the feeding position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position. In other words, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is deactivated (OFF state), the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540 side. The drive of the ball delivery solenoid 145 in this ball delivery unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the delivery solenoid 542 by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 203) of the payout control board 633.

The ball feeding unit 140 is also configured to apply a moment of rotation in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the ball removal member 143, which is rotatably supported by a pivot, or the weight portion 143d. However, the rotation of the ball removal member 143 is restricted by the actuation rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 coming into contact with the upper end of the actuation transmission portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, which is operated by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200. Therefore, under normal conditions, the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b to separate them, and the game ball B does not enter the ball removal opening 141b side.

When the player presses the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 downward, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the actuation transmission part 242b, and the actuation rod 143c also moves downward relatively as the actuation transmission part 242b moves downward. When the actuation rod 143c moves downward together with the actuation transmission part 242b, the ball removal member 143 rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition part 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b to release the partition. As a result, the game ball B that entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball removal opening 141b side, and is discharged from the ball removal opening 141b to the ball removal guide path 241c of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 in the tray unit 200, and can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply opening 211c.

The upper tray ball removal slider 242, which is formed with the actuation transmission part 242b against which the actuation rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 abuts, is biased upward by a spring. Therefore, even if a game ball B is supplied forcefully onto the partition part 143a, the impact can be absorbed by the spring via the actuation rod 143c, preventing damage to the ball removal member 143 etc., and preventing the game ball B from bouncing off the partition part 143a.

The ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38(b), etc.) that is recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from behind the ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and an anti-tampering member 148 is attached within the mounting recess 142b. The anti-tampering member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed from a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is attached removably from the rear side within the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142.

The anti-tampering member 148 has an outer shape in a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front, and is provided with an upper piece 148a and a lower piece 148b that are separated vertically at approximately the center in the vertical direction a certain distance to the left from the right side, and an inclined portion 148c that is formed in a C-chamfered shape at the tip side (right end side when viewed from the front) of the opposing sides of the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. The upper piece 148a of the anti-tampering member 148 is bent so that the right end when viewed from the front protrudes backward with respect to the general surface of the anti-tampering member 148. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the anti-tampering member 148. As a result, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right when viewed from the top.

When the tamper-proof member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b is in communication with the inside of the ball supply port 142a.

According to this fraud prevention member 148, when a fraudulent game ball B with a string attached is shot from the upper tray into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 540 via the ball feeding unit 140, and the string attached to the fraudulent game ball B is manipulated to move the fraudulent game ball B into or out of the first lower starting hole 2003 or the first upper starting hole 2004, etc., the momentum of the fraudulent game ball B shot (shot) by the ball launcher 540 causes the string attached to the fraudulent game ball B to be inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then cut by the narrow V-shaped portion formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, thereby preventing fraudulent activities using the fraudulent game ball B with a string attached.

[3-1j. Foul Cover Unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 39 and 40. Figure 39(a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit seen from the back. Also, Figure 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game ball B that has been paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the fall cover unit 150 comprises a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and open at the front, and a flat cover member 152 attached to the front of the unit body 151.

The foul cover unit 150 has a through ball passage 150a that penetrates from front to back at the upper left corner when viewed from the front and connects the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main frame 4 to the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200, and a full ball receiving port 150b that opens toward the rear on the lower right side when viewed from the front of the through ball passage 150a and can connect to the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main frame 4.

The foul cover unit 150 also has a foul ball receiving port 150c that opens upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front and receives game balls B (foul balls) that have been launched by the ball launcher 540 of the main frame 4 but have not reached the play area 5a, and a ball discharge port 150d that opens forward near the lower right corner when viewed from the front and discharges game balls B received in the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c forward and is connected to the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit 200.

Furthermore, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with a storage passage 150e that is formed by the unit body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and has a width sufficient to store a predetermined amount of game balls B.

The through ball passage 150a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152.

The fall cover unit 150 also includes a flat movable piece 153 that forms part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e and has a lower end that is rotatably attached to the unit body 151 and the cover member 152, a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects the rotation of the movable piece 153 in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is filled with game balls B and game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower tray 202 side, this foul cover unit 150 can store a certain number of game balls B in the storage passage 150e. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the movable piece 153 to rotate so that the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155, and this rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower tray 202 is full, any further payout of game balls B is stopped and the fact is notified to the player or the attendant of the game hall, and the player can be prompted to clear the full tank of the lower tray 202.

The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear of the unit body 151 below the through ball passage 150a, and is provided with a door opening/closing abutment 150f against which the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4 (described later) can abut (see FIG. 90). The door opening/closing abutment 150f is inclined so that it moves forward as the rear surface faces downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against this door opening/closing abutment 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 can be rotated to open the downstream ends (front openings) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The glass unit 160 is inserted from the rear into the glass unit mounting portion 101h and removably mounted so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, this glass unit 160 makes the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front) and closes the front of the playing area 5a.

The glass unit 160 comprises a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner circumference of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, two transparent glass plates 162 that close the inside of the glass frame 161 and have their outer circumferences attached to the glass frame 161, and a pair of glass unit attachment members 163 that are rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101.

The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat shape from a position lower than the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band-shaped locking piece 161b protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower edge. The mounting pieces 161a of the glass frame 161 can abut against the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 (see Figure 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front and rear ends of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and rear so that a space is formed between them (see Figure 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably attached around an axis that extends forward and backward on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion 163b that protrudes from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of rotation. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the two upper corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first rotate the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, insert the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and then abut the front end of the glass frame 161 against the rear surface of the glass unit attachment portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Then, rotate the glass unit attachment member 163 so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and abut the protruding portion 163b against the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. This allows the glass unit 160 to be attached to the door frame base 101.

To remove the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the above steps can be reversed. This allows the glass unit 160 to be attached and detached to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protrusion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in a rotational position located below the base 163a, the protrusion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protrusion 163b will not rotate to a position where it is above the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 will not be released naturally, and the glass unit 160 will not come off the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Crime prevention cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed into a predetermined shape, a flat rear projection 172 that protrudes rearward along the outer periphery of the body portion 171, and a pair of locking pieces 173 that are spaced apart on the left and right, protrude forward beyond the body portion 171, and are capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that its lower end protrudes downward below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. The upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape that conforms to the lower end of the play area 5a of the play board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. In more detail, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape that conforms to a part of the inner rail 1002, the out guide portion 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the component 1000 described below, and is formed so as not to protrude into the play area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 172 is formed around almost the entire outer periphery of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed by the main body 171 and the rear protrusion 172 into a shallow box shape that is open to the rear, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 that is different from the outer periphery of the main body 171. The rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to fit along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in the area located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5. As a result, game ball B (game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170, and does not hinder the shooting of game ball B into the game area 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). This allows the security cover 170 to be easily attached and detached to the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts against the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the rear projection 172, excluding the portion projecting rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 171, is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the component 1000. In addition, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projection 172 projecting rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 171 projects rearward beyond the front surface of the component 1000 so as to contact the bottom surface of the component 1000. As a result, the area between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a through the gap between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 41 to 47. Figure 41(a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. Figure 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Figure 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Figure 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-I in Figure 41(a). Figure 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Figure 1. Note that Figure 46 shows a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3, with the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 omitted.

The handle unit 180 of this embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the tray unit 200 together with a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and can be operated by the player to shoot the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181, the rear end of which is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover base 291 of a handle cover unit 290 described later, a handle 195 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by the handle cover base 291 described later, a disk-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195, a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and a handle front lens 185 attached to the cover base 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184.

The handle unit 180 also includes an inner base 186 that is attached to the front of the handle base 181 behind the handle 195, a shaft member 187 that has the handle 195 attached to its front end and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 and has a drive gear portion 187a on its outer periphery, a transmission gear 188 that meshes with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that has a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188 and is sandwiched between the handle base 181 and the inner base 186.

The handle unit 180 further includes a handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end of which is attached to the handle 195, biasing the handle 195 to return to its initial rotation position (the end of rotation in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front), and an auxiliary spring 191, one end of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to the transmission gear 188, biasing the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front via the transmission gear 188.

The handle unit 180 also includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, a single button 193 whose tip end protrudes outward from the left side of the outer circumferential surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front and whose base end is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward, and a single button operation sensor 194 attached to the handle base 181 and detects the pressing operation of the single button 193.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and three grooves 181c recessed from the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical base 181a and extending axially, and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylinder 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. The three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291 described later. Therefore, with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, the base 181a can be inserted into the rear cylinder 291c of the handle cover base 291, and by inserting the protrusions 291d into the three grooves 181c, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 is equipped with a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, multiple (three in this example) spoke portions 195b extending radially outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the multiple spoke portions 195b, two slits 195d extending in an arc around the rotation axis (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction, and a locking protrusion 195e protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slits 195d and locking the other end of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the general outer surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

When the handle 195 is in a free state (not rotating), the three spoke parts 195b of the handle 195 extend horizontally to the left from the central hub part 195a, and two spoke parts 195b extend from the center in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions at angles of 120 degrees each. The three spoke parts 195b extend to such a length that a gap is formed between the central hub part 195a and the outer ring part 195c into which the player's fingers can be inserted.

The outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer ring portion 195c is formed in a circular ring shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the U-shaped radius side facing forward.

The handle 195 is formed to be entirely translucent, and is partially plated with an electrically continuous plating from the central hub portion 195a to the outer circumferential ring portion 195c. This allows the handle touch sensor 192 to detect the touch of the handle 195 even when only the outer circumferential ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be shot in by turning the outer circumferential ring portion 195c.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that opens toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends from the front end of the guide portion 196a toward the center. The three handle guides 196 have the mounting stay 196b attached to the rear side of the spoke portion 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portion 196a is located behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. The handle guide 196 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by inserting a guide piece 291g of the handle cover base 291 (described later) into the inside of the guide portion 196a.

The cover base 183 is formed in a disk shape with a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and has three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slits 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting bosses 183a of the cover base 183 penetrate the slits 195d of the handle 195, the mounting bosses 183a come into contact with the circumferential ends of the slits 195d, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of approximately 120 degrees.

The handle decoration board 184 is equipped with a total of 10 LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) in a triple concentric arrangement: one in the center, three at regular intervals around the circumference in the middle, and six at regular intervals around the circumference. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two at the top left of the circumference, two at the top right of the circumference, and two at the bottom of the circumference (see Figure 72). This handle decoration board 184 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 184b with a unique address for illuminating each LED 184a. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls a total of 15 systems, with three systems for each group, so that the 10 LEDs 184a divided into five groups can each be illuminated in full color.

Although not shown, this handle decoration board 184 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one of which is a ground line) that supply power to drive the LEDs 184a and LED driver 184b, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 184b of this handle decoration board 184 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can cause the 10 LEDs 184a, divided into five groups, to emit light with the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

As such, since this handle decoration board 184 has an LED driver 184b, it is possible to individually (here, by group) control the light emission of a greater number of LEDs 184a than the number of wires that make up the connected wiring cable, thereby reducing the number of wires and simplifying the configuration related to the electrical wiring.

The front surface of the handle front lens 185 bulges forward in a round shape and is translucent. Inside the handle front lens 185, a lens member is provided that is three-dimensionally formed from a transparent material. This handle front lens 185 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately illuminating the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of this detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 described later changes according to that internal resistance, and the game ball B can be shot into the game area 5a with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player touches the handle 195, it detects the static electricity acting from the player and detects the player's contact with the handle 195. Then, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's contact and the handle 195 is rotated, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the drive of the launch solenoid 542 is controlled with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195, allowing the game ball B to be shot into the ball.

Therefore, even if a player tries to rotate the handle 195 in some way to shoot game ball B into the game area 5a without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact, so the launch solenoid 542 is not driven and game ball B cannot be shot into the game area 5a. This makes it possible to prevent players from playing by rotating the handle 195 in a way that is different from the intended way, and reduces the burden (stress) placed on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing of the single-shot button 193 by the player. When the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops the operation of the firing solenoid 542. Therefore, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation of the handle 195, and by releasing the pressing of the single-shot button 193, the game ball B can be shot into the game area 5a again with the same hitting strength before the single-shot button 193 was operated.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 includes a handle cover base 291 that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 behind the handle 195 and has its rear end attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, an inner 292 that covers the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291 and has its rear end attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200, a ring-shaped handle cover decorative board 293 that is provided on the front side of the inner 292 and has multiple LEDs 293a mounted on the front side, a ring-shaped board cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative board 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and has its rear end attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200.

The handle cover base 291 is provided with a cylindrical front tube portion 291a that extends forward and backward with an inner diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, a middle wall portion 291b that extends from the rear end of the front tube portion 291a so that the inner diameter decreases as it extends forward, a cylindrical rear tube portion 291c that penetrates the middle wall portion 291b and extends forward and backward with an inner diameter that allows the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 to be inserted, and multiple (here, three) ridges 291d that protrude inward from the inner circumference of the rear tube portion 291c and extend forward and backward, and are provided at positions corresponding to the groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

The handle cover base 291 also includes a flange portion 291e that extends outward from a portion rearward of the front end of the outer periphery of the front tube portion 291a, a cylindrical outer tube portion 291f that protrudes forward from the middle of the flange portion 291e to the same position as the front end of the front tube portion 291a, a guide piece 291g that protrudes outward from the front tube portion 291a between the front end of the front tube portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, and an opening 291h that penetrates the lower portion of the front tube portion 291a.

The middle wall 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends from the rear end of the front tube 291a to the center of the front-rear direction in a circular arc shape with a cross section that bulges outward. The rear end of the rear tube 291c is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. This rear tube 291c is formed to the same length as the base 181a of the handle base 181, and the base 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted inside. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and by inserting them into the grooves 181c, the handle base 181 can be made non-rotatable relative to the flange 291e. The outer tube 291f extends forward from a position outside the center of the flange 291e in the radial direction. This handle cover base 291 has multiple triangular ribs in the circumferential direction that connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer periphery of the front tube portion 291a from the center between the outer periphery of the front tube portion 291a and the inner periphery of the outer tube portion 291f to a position close to the front tube portion 291a. The guide piece 291g extends in the circumferential direction over a length in the range of approximately 110 degrees, and three guide pieces are provided in the circumferential direction at intervals of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 rearward of the guide piece 291g through between the guide pieces 291g and rotating the handle 195, the guide piece 291g can be positioned within the U-shaped guide portion 196a, and the movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction can be restricted.

The opening 291h penetrates the front tubular portion 291a with a length in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front tubular portion 291a to near the flange portion 291e and a size in the circumferential direction within an angle range of approximately 90 degrees.

The inner 292 has an annular base 292a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tube 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange 291e, a leg 292b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the base 292a, and a plurality of (four in this case) notches 292c cut out from the rear end of the leg 292b to the vicinity of the base 292a and spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The front tube 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted into the base 292a from the front, and the base 292a is positioned behind the flange 291e. The leg 292b extends in a curved shape that bulges outward, and its rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The notches 292c are provided at the top and bottom and the left and right parts of the leg 292b.

The handle cover decorative board 293 is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange part 291e. The handle cover decorative board 293 is equipped with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b with a unique address for illuminating each LED 293a. The 12 LEDs 293a (full color LEDs) are arranged in a row with intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into six groups, two on the lower left, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, two on the right, and two on the lower right from the center (see Figure 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and controls a total of 18 systems, with three systems for each group, so that the 6 groups of 10 LEDs 293a can each be illuminated in full color.

Although not shown, this handle cover decorative board 293 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires: two power lines (one of which is a ground line) that supply power to drive the LEDs 293a and the LED driver 293b, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 293b of this handle cover decorative board 293 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can make the 12 LEDs 293a, divided into six groups, emit light with the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

The board cover 294 has an annular front plate 294a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter approximately the same as the outer diameter of the base 292a of the inner 292, and a cylindrical side plate 294b with the outer peripheral edge of the front plate 294a extending rearward. The front plate 294a of this board cover 294 is located between the flange 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative board 293, and the side plate 294b extends to the base 292a of the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a at its front end with an inner shape the same as the outer diameter of the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291, and is formed in a spindle-shaped (snow-hollow or bowl-shaped, etc.) cylinder that bulges toward the rear, and has multiple (four in this case) notched openings 295b cut from the rear end toward the front in the circumferential direction. The handle cover 295 is formed to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and the multiple notched openings 295b are formed to match the notches 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 via the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71 (a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

As shown in FIG. 46 etc., when the handle unit 180 and handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment are assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the part of the handle unit 180 rearward of the handle 195 is inserted inside the front tube part 291a of the handle cover base 291, and the handle 195 and the handle front lens 185 are positioned forward of the handle cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 with the part closing the rear end of the rear tube part 291c of the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290 sandwiched between them.

The handle 195 of the handle unit 180 has a central hub portion 195a rotatably supported by the handle base 181. The handle 195 is also rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 via a handle guide 196 attached to the rear side of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the central hub portion 195a. The rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 is inserted (locked) between the front cylinder portion 291a and the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291, and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g, and is rotatably supported with movement in the front-rear direction (axial direction) restricted.

The handle 195, and the handle cover base 291, inner 292, board cover 294, and handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed to be translucent, and by illuminating the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293, the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated and decorated, and the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front tube portion 291a), the handle cover 295, etc. can also be illuminated and decorated.

The handle cover unit 290 has matching notched openings 295b and notched portions 292c in the handle cover 295 and inner 292, so when viewed from the outside, it appears as if there are holes on both the left and right sides and on the bottom that communicate with the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291. This can ease the player's mental anxiety about sticking their hand (fingers) into the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

The upper cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (upper cutout 292c of the inner cover 292) is closed by the right plate decorative unit 275 and the right door frame unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted is connected to the lower cutout portion 292c and cutout opening 295b of the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 through the opening 291h (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if liquid such as a drink or game ball B enters the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer circumferential ring portion 195c of the handle 195, it can be discharged downward of the handle cover unit 290 through the lower opening 291h, the cutout portion 292c, and the cutout opening 295b.

In addition, if liquid or game balls B enter the cutout openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, they can be discharged downward from the lower cutout opening 295b through the gap between the front tube portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292.

As shown in Fig. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the lower cutout 292c of the inner 292, and the lower cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 are provided on an extension line of the inclination direction of the blades 46b of the grill member 46 in the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. This allows the wind (wind pressure) discharged diagonally upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blades 46b due to vibration of the main frame speaker 622 to enter the front tube portion 291a through the opening 291h, the cutout 292c, and the cutout opening 295b. Therefore, when a player inserts his or her fingers inside the handle cover 295 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the device for striking the game ball B), the main frame speaker 622 vibrates to send air into the front cylinder portion 291a, surprising the player and providing an unprecedented performance.

Furthermore, because the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the right cutout opening 295b can be hooked with a finger and pulled, and can be used as a handle when opening the door frame 3, etc.

In addition, because the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and the game ball B can be shot even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched.

In addition, because the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be easily fixed by gripping the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and the cutout opening 295b with the fingers, and the game ball B can be continuously shot into the game area 5a with a constant force even without continuously twisting the hand. In this way, the handle 195 can be rotated in a variety of ways to shoot the game ball B, so a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that allows the player to select a shooting operation that is suitable for the player.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end is located further back than the left end in a plan view, and faces outward (toward the open side). Therefore, the handle unit 180 attached via the handle cover base 291 is also inclined outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). This makes it easy for the player to grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, and allows the player to rotate the handle without any discomfort.

In this way, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, a handle 195 having a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, multiple spoke portions 195b protruding radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the multiple spoke portions 195b is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3, which is provided so as to be openable and closable around the left side as an axis and which closes the play area 5a of the play board 5 so as to be visible from the front. The handle 195 has a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, multiple spoke portions 195b protruding radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the multiple spoke portions 195b. A cylindrical handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Because the handle cover unit 290 is provided, a handle 195 and handle cover unit 290 of a never-before-seen form can be seen in the area where the handle is provided in conventional pachinko machines, making a strong impact on the player and strongly attracting the player's interest, while also increasing the player's desire to play with this pachinko machine 1, making it easier for players wandering around the game hall in which this pachinko machine 1 is installed to select this pachinko machine as the pachinko machine to play on.

In addition, the player's fingers can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. When the player operates the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B into the play area 5a, the player grasps the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and the player's fingers are inserted into the handle cover unit 290. This gives the player a different sensation when operating the handle 195 than the handles of conventional pachinko machines, and the player can be entertained by the new sensation of shooting the game ball B, preventing a decline in interest.

When the player operates the handle 195 and causes a sound effect to be output from the main frame speaker 622 mounted on the speaker unit 620a in the base unit 620A of the main frame 4, the vibration of the main frame speaker 622 causes the air in the enclosure 624 formed by the speaker box 623 to vibrate, and the vibration of the air in the enclosure 624 is released forward as sound pressure (sound wind) through the fascia internal space 40a and port member 47 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 which is connected to the enclosure 624. At this time, the multiple blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47 can guide the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main frame speaker 622 into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, and the sound pressure can stimulate the fingers of the player who is operating the handle 195 with their fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Therefore, by supplying sound pressure from the port member 47 through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h to the player's fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 according to the game status in the game area 5a, it is possible to surprise the player, give them a sense of an upcoming opportunity, or change the amount of handle operation, which not only entertains the player but also prevents them from becoming bored and reduces a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, sound pressure (sound wind) from the main frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h, making it possible to cool the inside of the handle cover unit 290 and making the environment around the player's fingers operating the handle 195 more comfortable, thereby relieving stress on the player and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

As described above, the sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, which is different from the door frame 3 in which the handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290 are provided, is guided by the multiple blades 46b of the grill member 46 to stimulate the fingers of the player who is operating the handle 195 with his/her fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c. Therefore, compared to a case in which a vibration device is provided in the handle 195, there is no damage to the various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194, etc.) and bearing mechanism provided in the handle 195, and it is possible to make the handle unit 180 less likely to be damaged, and it is possible to avoid causing discomfort to the player due to damage to the handle unit 180, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, because the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance similar to that of a steering wheel of an automobile, and therefore, even though the appearance is significantly different from that of the handles of conventional pachinko machines, it is possible for the player to intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of conventional pachinko machines. Therefore, even a player who has seen this pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of this pachinko machine 1 without confusion, making it easier for the player to select this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play without hesitation.

In addition, the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h are provided on the downward facing portion of the outer circumferential surface of the handle cover unit 290, where the player can insert his/her fingers between the central hub portion 195a and the outer circumferential ring portion 195c of the handle 195. When looking inside the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) from the front, the lower portion of the handle cover unit 290 can be seen through the opening 291h and the lower cutout opening 295b. This gives the cylindrical handle cover unit 290 a sense of openness, reducing the player's anxiety about inserting his/her fingers into the handle cover unit 290, and allowing the player to operate the handle 195 without hesitation.

In addition, the handle cover unit 290 has a through-hole cutout opening 295b and an opening 291h on the outer peripheral surface facing downward, and the port member 47 of the outer frame 2 (lower outer frame assembly 40) is opened toward the front. Therefore, even if liquid such as a drink or game balls B enters the handle cover unit 290, it can be discharged downward from the lower cutout opening 295b and opening 291h, and liquid discharged downward from the cutout opening 295b and opening 291h is less likely to enter the port member 47.

Furthermore, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and multiple cutout openings 295b are provided in the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290, whose front end has the same diameter as the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. This allows the handle to be grasped and operated by hand using the central hub portion 195a in the same way as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, operated using only the spoke portions 195b, operated like a steering wheel of a car using the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, operated by placing fingers on the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the cutout openings 295b, or operated by pinching the inside and outside of the handle cover unit 290 with fingers across the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that allows a variety of operations to be performed to shoot game balls B (handle operations). Therefore, depending on the game status and the player's condition, the player can shoot the game ball B into the game area 5a in a way that is easy for the player to operate, making it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored and allowing the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the game ball B, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed by gripping the outer circumferential ring portion 195c and the cutout opening 295b of the handle 195 with fingers, or by straddling the outer circumferential ring portion 195c and pinching the inside and outside of the handle cover unit 290 with fingers. Therefore, in addition to handle operations similar to those of conventional pachinko machines, handle operations that are not possible with conventional pachinko machines can also be performed, providing the player with a variety of handle operations that make handle operation enjoyable and less likely to bore the player.

In addition, because the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, giving the appearance that the handle cover unit 290 is integrated with the handle 195, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that looks good and is capable of attracting the attention of players.

In addition, because the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary, and by preventing the handle cover unit 290 from compressing the play area 5a (door window 101a) upward, it is possible to prevent the play area 5a from becoming narrower, allowing the play area 5a to be relatively larger, and the large play area 5a makes the pachinko machine 1 stand out, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and strongly attracts the attention of players.

Furthermore, by appropriately illuminating the LEDs 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293, the handle cover unit 290 (the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated and decorated. Therefore, even when the player is operating the handle 195, the illuminated decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is not blocked by the player's hand, making the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c stand out, and providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the player's attention.

In addition, the handle 195 is provided in the lower right corner of the door frame 3 on the side opposite the hinge side, and the cutout opening 295b is provided in the part of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side, so that the cutout opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, there is no need to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that would make it look unattractive, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

The handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer circumferential ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so that it can rotate in the circumferential direction, and has a flange portion 291e and a guide piece 291g that restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Even if the outer circumferential ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the guide piece 291g etc. can restrict the forward movement of the outer circumferential ring portion 195c. Therefore, the outer circumferential ring portion 195c and the spoke portion 195b connecting the outer circumferential ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and damage to the handle 195 can be prevented.

In addition, the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195, and then accepts the operation of the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B can be shot even if the handle 195 is operated while touching only the spoke portion 195b or the outer ring portion 195c. This allows the pachinko machine 1 to perform a variety of shooting operations (handle operations) as described above, and also prevents the game ball B from being shot when the player is not touching the handle 195. This prevents the handle from being operated using tools, and reduces the burden on the game hall.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the plate unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. Figure 48 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame, and Figure 49 is a perspective view of the dish unit from behind. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 200 includes an upper dish 201 for storing game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and a lower dish 202 arranged below the upper dish 201 and capable of storing game balls B supplied from the upper dish 201 and the foul cover unit 150.

The plate unit 200 comprises a plate base unit 210 having an upper plate 201 and attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a plate decoration unit 250 having a lower plate 202 attached to the front of the plate base unit 210, and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 comprises a flat dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish main body 212 attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201, a mounting base (not shown) attached to the right of the upper dish main body 212 and protruding forward, a dish unit relay board (not shown) attached to the right of the mounting base, a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the top surface of the mounting base, an upper dish pre-ball removal unit (not shown) attached below the mounting base, and an upper dish post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear of the upper dish pre-ball removal unit.

The dish decoration unit 250 comprises a lower dish body 251 which is attached to the lower front part of the dish unit base 211 and has a lower dish 202, a dish unit body 252 which is attached to the front part of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 which is attached to the underside of the lower dish body 251, and a left dish decoration unit 270 and a right dish decoration unit 275 which are attached to the upper front part of the dish unit body 252, spaced apart from each other on the left and right.

The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player, which includes a touch operation section 302 that can be operated by the player through touch and a press operation section 303 that can be operated by the player through pressing. The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a performance operation section cover unit 310 with a spherical outer surface, an operation section base 315 that is housed within the performance operation section cover unit 310 and attached to the front of the plate decoration unit 250, a circular performance operation section outer periphery decoration board 320 attached to the top surface of the operation section base 315, an outer periphery board cover 325 that covers the top of the performance operation section outer periphery decoration board 320, and an operation section relay board unit 330 attached to the rear side of the operation section base 315.

The performance operation unit 300 also includes a performance operation unit unit 350 that can protrude upward from the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and is provided with a performance operation unit 301, a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 that is attached to the operation unit base 315 and supports the performance operation unit unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered, and a protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward protruding force of the performance operation unit unit 350 by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

The tray unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, with the performance operation unit 300 positioned in the left-right center so that the top surface of the performance operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward, with the upper tray 201 positioned to the left of the performance operation unit 300 on the top surface, the ball lending operation unit 220 positioned to the right of the performance operation unit 300, and the lower tray 202 positioned below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the performance operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The upper tray 201 is formed by a tray unit base 211 and an upper tray main body 212. The upper tray 201 (upper tray body 212) is formed in a container shape with a large bulge forward from the center to the left and open upward. The upper tray 201 is bulged most forward at about 1/3 of the area to the right. As the upper tray 201 moves from the most bulging area to the right as viewed from the front, the front end of the upper tray 201 is recessed backward. The upper tray 201 has a guide passage portion 201a (see FIG. 73) that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The upper tray 201 has a bottom surface including the guide passage portion 201a that is inclined so that the right end side is lower. The right end side of the guide passage portion 201a when viewed from the front is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When assembled to the tray unit 200, the upper tray 201 has a bottom surface that is inclined downward from a position lower than the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 to a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B relative to the upper end of the upper tray ball feed port (not shown). This allows the game ball B released forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a to be received and stored within the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be supplied from the right end side of the guide passage section 201a through the upper tray ball feed port to the ball feed unit 140 side.

The induction passage section 201a is equipped with a metal earth fitting that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact with it (rolls), the static electricity charged to the game ball B can be removed.

[3-5b. Bottom plate]
The lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 50. Figure 50(a) shows the main part of the door frame cut horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port. FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the conventional door frame taken along the same line as in FIG. 1A, and FIG. 1C is a cross-sectional view showing the bottom plate of the conventional door frame taken along the same line as in FIG. 11 is a table comparing the number of game balls stored in the tray unit 200 and the number of game balls stored in the tray unit 200. The lower tray 202 is disposed below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower tray 202 is formed of a lower tray body 251 and a tray unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing game balls B, and has a bottom wall that penetrates vertically and receives game balls B. It is provided with a lower dish ball removal hole 202a through which B can be discharged. The lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed and openable by the lower tray ball removal cover 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260.

The lower tray 202 is formed into a roughly rectangular shape that extends left and right when viewed from above, with the front end on the left side protruding further forward than the right side from the center in the left-right direction. The lower tray 202 has a lower tray ball removal hole 202a that penetrates from top to bottom, located near the front end near the right end. The lower tray 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface is lower toward the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. When assembled into the tray unit 200, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is located below the performance operation unit 300, to the left of the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

When the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed, the lower tray 202 can store the game ball B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and by opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a, the stored game ball B can be discharged below the tray unit 200 (e.g., to a cash box). Also, when the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is positioned in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, so that the game ball B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be quickly discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in a conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. 50(b), a lower tray ball ejection hole 202b of the lower tray 202 is provided in front of the central axis of the lower tray ball supply port 211j of the tray unit base 211 in the tray base unit 210, which is connected to the ball ejection port 150d of the far cover unit 150. The lower tray ball supply port 211j is cylindrical and extends straight forward so that the game ball B released forward from the ball ejection port 150d goes straight toward the lower tray ball ejection hole 202b. This allows the game ball B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211j to be quickly discharged downward from the lower tray ball ejection hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

However, if the lower tray ball supply port 211j is used to guide the game ball B straight toward the lower tray ball removal hole 202b, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202b is closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265, there is a risk that the game balls B will be concentrated in the area to the right of the center in the lower tray 202, since the lower tray ball removal hole 202b and the lower tray ball supply port 211j are located near the right end of the lower tray 202. If the game balls B concentrated in the right area in the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B will no longer be released from the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 to the lower tray 202 side, which may activate the full tank detection sensor 154 and determine that the lower tray 202 is full, even though there is still room in the left area of the lower tray 202.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the left side wall (ball guide portion 213) of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is inclined so that it extends diagonally forward to the left, as will be described in detail later. In more detail, the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is inclined diagonally forward to the left at the location directly behind the lower tray ball removal hole 202a, so that the distance between the left side wall and the front of the tray unit base 211 is a distance that allows at least one game ball B to circulate.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is moved to the left of the central axis (line shown by the dashed dotted line) of the rear end of the lower tray ball supply port 211c (ball release port 150d).

As a result, by moving the lower tray ball removal hole 202a to the left, the lowest part of the lower tray 202 (the part of the lower tray ball removal hole 202a) moves to the left, thereby reducing the concentration and accumulation of game ball B on the right side of the lower tray 202 when the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed. Furthermore, even if multiple game balls B are stored in the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball removal hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front of the tray unit base 211), the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c extends diagonally to form a gap between the rear end of the lower tray 202 and the rear end of the lower tray 202 through which game balls B can flow. Therefore, game balls B released from the foul cover unit 150 (ball release port 150d) or the upper tray ball removal unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) toward the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be guided along the diagonally extending left side wall to the left side of the lower tray 202 and released, allowing game balls B to be properly stored throughout the entire lower tray 202.

This prevents the full tank detection sensor 154 from activating and reporting a full tank even when there is sufficient space remaining in the lower tray 202 to store game balls B, allowing more game balls B to be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish base unit 210 comprises a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, an upper dish main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201, and a dish unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

The dish base unit 210 also includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211, an upper dish pre-ball removal unit (not shown) attached to the front part of the dish unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220, and an upper dish post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the upper dish pre-ball removal unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in a flat plate shape (a shallow box shape with an open rear) extending left and right across the entire width of the door frame base 101.

The dish unit base 211 is provided with an upper dish ball supply port 211a that penetrates from front to back near the upper left corner when viewed from the front and extends cylindrically to the rear, a speaker port 211b that penetrates from front to back below the upper dish ball supply port 211a and has a punched metal attached to the front, a lower dish ball supply port 211c that penetrates from front to back at the lower part toward the left of the center when viewed from the front and extends cylindrically to the rear, a notch 211d that is cut out in the right wall of the part that extends cylindrically to the rear of the lower dish ball supply port 211c to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and an upper dish ball delivery port (not shown) that penetrates from front to front on the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front and extends vertically, with the upper part located at the right end of the upper dish main body 212.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has a front end that opens into the rear wall of the upper tray 201, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the upper tray ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101 from the front and connects to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. This allows the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 to be supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens into the rear wall of the lower tray 202, and a cylindrical rear end that penetrates the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side and connects to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. In addition, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is connected to the cutout portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. As a result, by operating the upper tray ball removal button 222, the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 is discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 via the upper tray ball supply port, the entrance 141a and ball removal port 141b of the ball supply unit 140, the ball supply guide path 241b and ball removal guide path 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240, and the cutout portion 211d.

When assembled to the tray base unit 210, the upper tray ball supply port 211a is located in front of the ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is supplied from the ball receiving port of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball supply guide path 241b.

In addition, the dish unit base 211 of this embodiment has a ball guide section 213 that guides the game ball B supplied into the lower dish 202 to a position far from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The ball guide section 213 guides the game ball B guided from the upper dish 201 by the ball removal guide path 241c to a position far from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (the left part of the lower dish 202). As shown in FIG. 50 (a), this ball guide section 213 forms a part of the inner wall of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. In detail, the ball guide section 213 forms a left inner wall that faces the right inner wall where the ball removal guide path 241c opens in the inner wall of the cylindrically formed lower dish ball supply port 211c, and is inclined so as to move leftward as it moves from the rear end side to the front end side. Due to the inclination of the left inner wall (ball guide section 213), a distance (gap) is formed between the front surface of the dish unit base 211 (rear end of the lower dish 202) of the dish unit base 211 at the portion directly behind the lower dish ball removal hole 202a, allowing at least one game ball B to pass through. As a result, when the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guide section 241c from the upper dish 201 abuts against the ball guide section 213 from the right, it is guided to the left front by the inclination of the ball guide section 213, and the game ball B can be guided to the left end side of the lower dish 202, away from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a in the lower dish 202. In other words, the ball guide section 213 can guide the game ball B to a position far from the lowest portion of the lower dish 202 (lower dish ball removal hole 202a).

However, as shown in Figure 50 (b), the lower tray ball supply port 211j in a conventional pachinko machine (also referred to as a conventional product) extends straight in the front-to-rear direction, so when the game ball B guided by the ball removal guide path 241c abuts against the left inner wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, it bounces to the right and rolls forward, and is not sent to a position far from the lower tray ball removal hole 202b in the lower tray 202, but is instead stored in the right-hand area of the lower tray 202 where the lower tray ball removal hole 202b is located. Therefore, in conventional products, game balls B (shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 50 (b)) tend to accumulate in the area to the right of the center in the lower tray 202. If game balls B concentrated in the right area of the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, game balls B will no longer be released from the storage passage 150e of the fall cover unit 150 toward the lower tray 202, which may activate the full tank detection sensor 154 and result in the lower tray 202 being determined to be full even though there is still room in the area to the left of the lower tray 202.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, since it has the ball guide section 213, the game ball B that has circulated through the ball removal guide section 241c can be guided to the left area in the lower tray 202. Also, even if multiple game balls B are stored in the lower tray 202 from the area of the lower tray ball removal hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front of the tray unit base 211), the game ball B released from the foul cover unit 150 (ball release port 150d) or the upper tray ball removal unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) to the lower tray ball supply port 211c side can be guided to the left side in the lower tray 202 through the space between the left side wall (ball guide section 213) of the lower tray ball supply port 211c and the rear end of the lower tray 202, and the game balls B can be stored throughout the entire lower tray 202. Therefore, even if there is sufficient space remaining in the lower tray 202 to store game balls B, it is possible to avoid the full tank detection sensor 154 being activated and reporting that the tank is full, and more game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

And, to support the above-mentioned effects, the inventors of the present application counted the number of game balls B stored in each lower tray 202 when the full tank detection sensor 154 was activated for the product of this embodiment and the conventional product. The game balls B were counted 10 times for each. The results, as shown in the table of FIG. 50(c), showed that in every count, the lower tray 202 of this embodiment (the product of this embodiment) stored a significantly larger number of game balls B than the conventional product, and it was confirmed that, on average, it was possible to store approximately 40% more game balls B than the conventional product.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper tray body 212 of the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The upper tray body 212 is attached to the front of the tray unit base 211 and cooperates with the tray unit base 211 to form the upper tray 201. The upper tray body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with an open top and rear. The upper tray body 212 extends left and right, and the left side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper tray body 212 retreats backward from the most forward bulging part toward the right side when viewed from the front, and the depth in the front-to-rear direction is formed to a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the upper tray body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper part of the upper tray body 212 near the right end is closed.

When the upper tray body 212 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the section that is closed at the top near the right end is attached so that it fits under the ball lending operation unit 220. In addition, the upper tray body 212 has a performance operation unit attachment section 212a formed in the middle of the upper part in the left-right direction, and a part of the performance operation unit 300 is attached to this performance operation unit attachment section 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 is intended to relay the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100 and the dish left decorative board 273, dish right decorative board 278, and operation unit relay board 332. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner of the rear surface of the dish unit base 211. When attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface of this dish unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball lending operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the tray base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a plan view showing an enlarged portion of the ball lending operation unit in the tray unit of the door frame. This ball lending operation unit 220 is for discharging game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, lending a predetermined number of game balls B to the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, displaying the remaining amount of cash or a prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine, returning the cash or a prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine minus the amount of the lent game balls B, adjusting the volume, and adjusting the amount of light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 comprises a base section 221 attached to the upper front part of the tray unit base 211, an upper tray ball removal button 222 located near the left end of the top surface of the base section 221, a translucent disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 located to the right of the upper tray ball removal button 222 on the top surface of the base section 221, a ball lending button 224 located on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, a return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, a ball lending display section 226 located on the lower rear part of the ball lending operation base 223, a volume adjustment button 227 located in front of the ball lending button 224 on the outside of the base section 221, and a light intensity adjustment button 228 located to the left of the volume adjustment button 227.

The upper tray ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the top surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward when the player presses it. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, with the character "ball" (ball) printed on the top surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display portion 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one bullet-shaped LED, and can be clearly seen by the player through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 when illuminated.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can eject game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222. In addition, when cash or a prepaid card with a remaining balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is returned minus the amount of the lent game balls B. The ball lending display unit 226 displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. In addition, the ball lending display unit 226 displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume adjustment button 227 is for adjusting the volume of music, voice, sound effects, and other sound effects output from the top center speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4. This volume adjustment button 227 is shaped like a gourd, with two circles combined. The volume adjustment button 227 has the letter "+" in the center of one (upper) circle and the letter "-" in the center of the other (lower) circle, and the area between the two circles has a design that looks like sound is coming from a speaker. The volume adjustment button 227 is shaped so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of this volume adjustment button 227 increases the volume, and pressing the "-" side decreases the volume.

The light intensity adjustment button 228 is used to adjust the light intensity of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, and the brightness of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. This light intensity adjustment button 228 is shaped like a gourd with two circles combined. The light intensity adjustment button 228 has the letter "+" in the center of one (upper) circle and the letter "-" in the center of the other (lower) circle, and there is an image of a light bulb between the two circles. The light intensity adjustment button 228 is shaped so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of this light intensity adjustment button 228 makes it brighter, and pressing the "-" side makes it darker.

The volume control button 227 and the light control button 228 are different colors (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light control button 228 is black) to make it difficult for players to confuse them.

When adjusting the volume or light intensity using the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 301, when a player-participation performance that requires the operation of the performance operation unit 301 is not being performed, the performance operation unit 301 is operated appropriately to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume or light intensity on the performance display device 1600, and an item to be adjusted is selected, and then the contact operation unit 302 is operated to change the volume or brightness of the light intensity, etc., which takes time and effort to adjust the volume or light intensity. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 can be operated to directly adjust the volume or light intensity, and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that simplifies the effort required for adjusting the volume or light intensity and allows adjustments to be made in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Upper tray ball removal unit]
The upper tray pre-ball removal unit and the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 49. The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 cooperates with the ball delivery unit 140 to discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed.

The upper tray ball removal unit 240 comprises a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball supply port from the rear, an upper tray ball removal slider 242 attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be able to slide vertically, a spring (not shown) that biases the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241.

The rear base 241 is equipped with a ball receiving opening (not shown) that protrudes upward from the portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens toward the front, through which the game ball B can pass, a ball feed guide path 241b that guides the game ball B received in the ball receiving opening downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then backward, and a ball removal guide path 241c that guides the game ball B downward from a position lower than the ball feed guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it to the right when viewed from behind.

When assembled to the tray base unit 210, the ball receiving port is formed at the downstream end (right end when viewed from the front) of the guide passage section 201a of the upper tray 201 in a position that opens forward through the upper tray ball supply port of the tray unit base 211. When assembled to the door frame 3, the ball supply guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball supply unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part. This allows the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 to enter the entrance 141a of the ball supply unit 140 through the ball receiving port and ball supply guide path 241b.

The left and right extending portion of the ball removal guideway 241c protrudes further to the right as viewed from the rear than the portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached, is inclined so that the right end as viewed from the rear is lower, and opens to the right side as viewed from the rear. The rear side of the left and right extending portion of the ball removal guideway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. When assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball supply guideway 241b is located in front of the ball removal opening 141b of the ball supply unit 140, and is formed so that the right end as viewed from the rear of the portion extending left and right is connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower tray ball supply opening 211c in the tray unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is released into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball ejection guide path 241c and the notch portion 211d.

The upper plate ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is equipped with an actuation receiving part (not shown) that protrudes forward from the upper left corner, and an actuation transmission part 242b that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the actuation receiving part. The actuation receiving part has a flat upper surface. The actuation transmission part 242b is inclined so that its upper surface is positioned downward as it moves rearward, and its lower surface extends horizontally to connect with the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the actuation receiving part protrudes forward through the tray unit base 211 from the rear side, and the lower end of the upper tray ball removal button 222 abuts against the upper surface of the actuation receiving part. In addition, when the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the actuation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the actuation rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 abuts against the upper surface.

The spring has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper tray ball removal slider 242, and biases the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper end of its movement due to the biasing force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

The upper tray ball removal unit 240 positions the upper tray ball removal slider 242 at its upper end of movement due to the spring force, and positions the upper tray ball removal button 222 at its upper end of movement via the actuation receiving part of the upper tray ball removal slider 242. In addition, because the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at its upper end of movement due to the spring force, the actuation rod 143c abutting the upper surface of the actuation transmission part 242b is prevented from moving downward, and the partition part 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, separating the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the game ball B sent from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving port can be sent from the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144 through the ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the spring force, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves downward, and the operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the operating transmission part 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, can move downward, and the ball removal member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight part 143d of the ball removal member 143, and the partition part 143a retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b. As a result, the game ball B that entered the entrance 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball receiving opening and the ball delivery guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball removal opening 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball discharge port 141b passes through the ball discharge guide path 241c and is guided from the notch 211d into the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and is then released from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202.

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the spring force, the upper tray ball removal button 222 rises, and the ball removal member 143 rotates due to the operating rod 143c abutting the operating transmission part 242b, so that the partition part 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, returning to the original state.

In this way, the upper tray ball removal unit 240 can feed the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140, or discharge it to the lower tray 202.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 48. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front of the plate base unit 210, and the performance operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the left-right direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire plate unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 comprises a lower plate body 251 attached to the lower front part of the plate unit base 211 and working together with the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202, a plate unit body 252 attached to the front part of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251, a lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the underside of the lower plate body 251, and a left plate decoration unit 270 and a right plate decoration unit 275 attached to the upper front part of the plate unit body 252, spaced apart from each other on the left and right.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower dish body 251 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 50. The lower dish body 251 cooperates with the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 to form the lower dish 202. The lower dish body 251 extends left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with an open top and rear. This lower dish body 251 is attached to the left side of the center in the left and right direction at the bottom of the front of the dish unit base 211 so that the open rear is closed.

The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a generally rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from above, with the front end on the left side protruding further forward than the right side from the center in the left-right direction. A lower dish ball removal hole 202a that penetrates vertically is formed near the front end of the right end of the lower dish main body 251 when viewed from above. The bottom surface of the lower dish main body 251 is inclined so that it is lower toward the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal cover 265 of the lower dish ball removal unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

When the lower dish body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the outer periphery and part of the bottom surface are covered by the dish unit body 252. Furthermore, when the lower dish body is assembled to the dish unit 200, the bottom surface is located lower than the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is located in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. This allows the game balls B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c to be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges out so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward at the upper side, and bulges out so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward at the lower side. The dish unit main body 252 is also curved such that the top surface is lowest at the center in the left-right direction. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The plate unit body 252 has upper side bulges 252a that bulge forward from both the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart on the left and right, and a lower front decorative part 252b that bulges forward on the left side of the center in the left-right direction at the bottom to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251.

The left and right upper side bulges 252a have a left plate decorative unit 270 and a right plate decorative unit 275 attached to their front faces.

The dish unit main body 252 has a lower dish opening 252d that penetrates from front to back between the upper left side bulge 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower dish opening 252d is large enough for the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that it becomes wider from top to bottom as it moves to the left. The lower dish opening 252d is formed into a cylindrical shape that extends from front to back by the lower dish main body 251 and the underside of the upper left side bulge 252a.

Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, the dish unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a in the left-right center and is equipped with a performance operation unit mounting portion to which the performance operation unit 300 is attached. The performance operation unit mounting portion is formed with a width of approximately 1/3 of the left-right width of the dish unit main body 252.

When assembled to the dish unit 200, the dish unit main body 252 is formed to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210, with the speaker port 211b facing forward through the lower dish opening 252d.

[3-5d-3. Bottom tray ball removal unit]
The lower tray ball removal unit 260 in the tray decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 27 and 50. The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is attached to the underside of the lower tray body 251, and is for storing game balls B in the lower tray 202 and discharging game balls B from the lower tray 202 by opening and closing the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is equipped with a lower tray ball removal button 263 and a lower tray ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by operating the lower tray ball removal button 263.

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the tray decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decorative part 252b of the tray unit main body 252, and the lower tray ball removal lid 265 closes the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball removal lid 265, and game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

In the normal state, when the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pressed backward, the lower tray ball removal cover 265 moves and the lower tray ball removal hole 202a opens, allowing the game ball B in the lower tray 202 to be ejected below the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

When the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is moved by pressing the lower tray ball removal button 263, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains in the moved position, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open position, and the game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

To close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is set back from the front of the lower front decorative part 252b, backward and then release the pressure, and the lower tray ball removal cover 265 returns to its normal position, closing the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. This allows the game ball B to be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5d-4. Left plate decorative unit and right plate decorative unit]
The left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 in the dish decorative unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 48 etc. The left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 are disposed on the upper part of the dish unit 200 and decorate both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 300.

The left dish decorative unit 270 comprises a semi-cylindrical left dish decorative body 271 that extends left and right and is translucent, a left dish decorative lens 272 that is translucent and passes through the left dish decorative body 271, and a left dish decorative board 273 that is provided behind the left dish decorative lens 272 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape, moving forward and downward as it moves from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the top of the upper left side bulge 252a. The left decorative body 271 is formed in a shape resembling a twisted semicylinder, with a semicircular arc that bulges forward and whose central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end and from left to right at the right end. This left decorative body 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The left dish decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction, coinciding with the front surface of the left dish decorative body 271. The multiple LEDs mounted on the left dish decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and when illuminated, can illuminate and decorate the left dish decorative body 271.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the left end of the left decorative unit 270 is continuous with the bottom end of the door frame left side unit 420. Since the left decorative unit 270 does not have ribs along the length of the left decorative body 271, when the multiple LEDs on the left decorative board 273 are illuminated, the entire front of the left decorative body 271 can be illuminated and decorated in a generally uniform manner, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lights.

The right-hand plate decorative unit 275 comprises a translucent right-hand plate decorative body 276 that is semi-cylindrical and extends to the left and right, a translucent right-hand plate decorative lens 277 that passes through the right-hand plate decorative body 276, and a right-hand plate decorative board 278 that is provided behind the right-hand plate decorative lens 277 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The right plate decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape, moving forward and downward as it moves from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the top of the upper right side bulge 252a. The right plate decorative body 276 is formed as a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, giving it the shape of a twisted semicylinder. This right plate decorative body 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The right-hand decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction of the right-hand decorative body 276, coinciding with the front surface of the right-hand decorative body 276. The multiple LEDs mounted on the right-hand decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs, and when illuminated, can illuminate and decorate the right-hand decorative body 276.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the right end of the plate right decorative unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the plate right decorative unit 275 does not have ribs in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the plate right decorative body 276, when the multiple LEDs on the plate right decorative board 278 are illuminated, the entire front of the plate right decorative body 276 can be illuminated and decorated in an approximately uniform manner, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lights.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 protrude upward from the front end of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decorative unit 250, forming a step between the upper side bulge 252a and the left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275. This allows the player to hook his/her fingers using the step between the left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulge 252a, and can be used as a finger rest when leveling the game balls B in the upper dish 201 or operating the performance operation unit 301 described later. In addition, the step between the left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulge 252a can prevent the game balls B on the upper side bulge 252a from leaking forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 52 to 56. Fig. 52(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of (a) seen from the back. Fig. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into main components and seen from the front above, and Fig. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into main components and seen from the front below. Fig. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lift spring lower holding member is at the upper end of the movement, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit has moved from the state of (a) to the upper position. Fig. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lift spring lower holding member is at the lower end of the movement.

The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, and serves to decorate the plate unit 200. When a player-participation performance is executed, the player can operate the performance operation unit 300 to participate in the performance. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The presentation operation unit 300 is equipped with a presentation operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The presentation operation section 301 is composed of a touch operation section 302 that can be operated by the player through touch, and a pressure operation section 303 that can be operated by the player through pressing, and can accept operations by the player and move (vibrate) the presentation operation section 301, allowing the player to participate not only in the operation of shooting the game ball B, but also in the presentation during the game. The presentation operation section 301 has the touch operation section 302 provided above the pressing operation section 303. The presentation operation section 301 has the touch operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 formed in a circular shape with a diameter that is approximately 5/8 the outer diameter of the presentation operation unit 300.

The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a spherical performance operation cover unit 310 that is provided on the front of the dish unit 200 in the center of the left-right direction, an operation unit base 315 to which the performance operation cover unit 310 is attached on the outside and which is attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, a performance operation outer peripheral decoration board 320 that is provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and is equipped with multiple LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part of the performance operation cover unit 310 (unit upper cover 312), an outer peripheral board cover 325 that is attached to the operation unit base 315 so as to cover the performance operation outer peripheral decoration board 320 from above, and an operation unit relay board unit 330 that is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315.

The performance operation unit 300 also includes a performance operation unit unit 350 having a performance operation unit 301, a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 that raises and lowers the performance operation unit unit 350, and a protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the protruding force of the performance operation unit unit 350. The performance operation unit unit 350 is arranged so that it can advance and retreat upward from the top surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Production operation section cover unit]
The performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 53 to 56. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the performance operation unit 300 (the periphery of the performance operation unit 350) at the center of the left-right direction of the dish unit 200.

The performance operation unit cover unit 310 comprises a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is open upward and backward, and a circular unit upper cover 312 that is provided above the unit lower cover 311 and has an insertion opening 312a through which the performance operation unit 301 is inserted. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and bottom of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. In other words, the performance operation unit cover unit 310 has an outer surface that is formed in a roughly spherical shape. Incidentally, the performance operation unit cover unit 310 in this embodiment is spherical in shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The performance operation section cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it moves upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of approximately 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 becomes the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is approximately 1/2 the overall width of the door frame base 101 in the left-right direction.

At least the unit top cover 312 of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 is translucent, and can be illuminated and decorated by the illumination of multiple LEDs on the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 described below.

When assembled to the tray unit 200, the front end of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 protrudes further forward than the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 is also connected so that the left tray decorative body 271 and the right tray decorative body 276 extend outward from both the left and right sides of the unit bottom cover 311. This makes the performance operation unit 300 stand out, and the integrated decoration gives it a good appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 212a of the upper tray body 212 in the tray base unit 210. The front and bottom of the operation unit base 315 are covered by the unit bottom cover 311, and the top is covered by the unit top cover 312 and the performance operation unit 301. The operation unit base 315 is formed in the shape of a container with an open top.

The operation unit base 315 comprises a main body 315a, which is a roughly cubic box-shaped body with an open top, and a flange 315b, which extends outward from the top end of the main body and has a circular outer periphery. The main body 315a houses the performance operation unit 350. The main body 315a also has a pair of guide shafts 362 and the lower end of a central shaft 366 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in the performance operation unit 350, which will be described later, attached to its bottom wall. The main body 315a also rotatably supports the lower end of an adjustment screw 384 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 on the upper surface of its bottom wall. Furthermore, the board base 331 of the operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body 315a.

The performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 is placed on the upper surface of the flange portion 315b. In addition, a circular outer peripheral board cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320. The unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the performance operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is positioned approximately flush with the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 330 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 53 to 56. The operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. The operation unit relay board unit 330 includes a board base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a in the operation unit base 315, an operation unit relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and a board cover 333 attached to the board base 331 so as to cover the operation unit relay board 332 from the rear.

The operation unit relay board 332 relays the connection between the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320 (front decorative board 321 and rear decorative board 322), the button outer decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the contact detection sensor main body 358, the button middle decorative board 364, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the lifting detection sensor 374, the protruding force detection sensor 375, and the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 and the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The performance operation unit 350 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The performance operation unit 350 is provided so as to face the outside from the insertion opening 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the performance operation cover unit 310, and can function as the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303.

The performance operation unit 350 comprises a bottomed, cylindrical button body 351 with a closed top end, a disk-shaped contact detector 352 attached to the top of the button body 351, a cylindrical button sleeve 353 inserted into the button body 351 from below, a disk-shaped button base 354 attached to the bottom end of the button sleeve 353 and supported by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 so that it can be raised and lowered, and a circular outer button decorative board 355 located above the button base 354 and with multiple LEDs 355a mounted on its top surface.

The performance operation unit 350 also includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 that attaches the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection sensor body 358 that is connected to the contact detection body 352 and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is formed entirely transparent. The button body 351 has a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that curves to bulge upward, a cylindrical tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer periphery of the upper surface portion 351a, and a locking portion 351c that protrudes downward from the lower end of the tubular portion 351b. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape that constitutes a part of a sphere having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. This upper surface portion 351a is decorated with a circular shape that is formed with a diameter of about 1/2 the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (tubular portion 351b) is about 5/8 of the diameter of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. The length (height) of the tubular portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals around the circumference of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portions 351c are locked to the button base 354. In this embodiment, the button body 351 has a diameter of approximately 127 mm.

The contact detector 352 has a circular outer circumference and is formed in a dish shape with a certain width inside bulging upward from the outer circumference. The contact detector 352 is formed below the circular decoration on the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, bulging obliquely upward and with a flat inner surface. This makes the contact detector 352 look like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 has a flat downward extension piece 352a that extends downward from both left and right ends of the outer circumference and the rear end. The contact detector 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal. The capacitance of the contact detector 352 relative to the entire area is suppressed by the multiple holes in the punching metal, preventing erroneous detection. In addition, because the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, light from the LED 364a on the button interior decorative substrate 364 located below can be transmitted upward, allowing the center of the top surface 351a of the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated in good condition.

The contact detector 352 is connected to an external electrode terminal of the connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. This allows the contact detector 352 to function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, and to detect contact or approach of a detectable object (a player's hand) with the top or side surface of the button main body 351. In other words, the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 allow the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation unit 302.

The button sleeve 353 has a cylindrical sleeve body 353a that extends vertically, and an annular flange portion 353b that extends outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is formed to be transparent throughout. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353a is approximately 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351, and its length is approximately the same as the length of the cylindrical portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 allows light from the multiple LEDs 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 to pass upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 is disk-shaped with a diameter approximately equal to the outer diameter of the button body 351, and is attached to the bottom end of the button body 351 so as to close the open bottom end of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a that penetrate vertically at positions symmetrical with respect to the center, a central hole 354b that penetrates vertically at the center, and a pair of guide pins 354c that protrude from the inner surface of the central hole toward the center. The guide shafts 362 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a. The central hole 354b is formed with an inner diameter large enough to allow the lifting cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same axis and are attached rotatably around the axis.

The button base 354 extends downward and further has a flat detection piece 354d that is detected by a pressure detection sensor 373 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360. The button base 354 has the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 locked to its outer circumferential surface. The button base 354 is guided so that it can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362 being inserted into a pair of guide holes 354a. The button base 354 is also moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the lifting cam member 371. The upper ends of a pair of lifting springs 365 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 abut against the bottom surface of the button base 354, and the button base is biased upward by the pair of lifting springs 365.

The button exterior decorative substrate 355 has multiple LEDs 355a mounted on its top surface. The multiple LEDs 355a are arranged in a row on two concentric circles. In more detail, the multiple LEDs 355a are provided in a portion slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and in a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 355a of the button exterior decorative substrate 355, the portion on the top surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detector 352 and the side (circumferential surface) of the button body 351 can be illuminated and decorated.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to its rotation shaft, and can generate vibrations by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation shaft extends in a direction perpendicular to the forward and backward movement direction of the performance operation unit 301. The vibration motor 356 is also provided on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the performance operation unit 301 (performance operation unit 350) in the up-down direction. This allows the vibrations from the vibration motor 356 to be transmitted well to the performance operation unit 301. The vibrations caused by the vibration motor 356 can also reduce the impact on the pair of guide holes 354a (pair of guide shafts 362).

The contact detection sensor body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor body 358 has a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, etc., an output circuit, a constant voltage circuit that supplies power to the sensor IC and the output circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connection connector. The contact detection sensor body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrode inside. In addition, the connection connector of the contact detection sensor body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352. In other words, the contact detection sensor body 358 can make the contact detection body 352 function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor body 358 detects the capacitance with the sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance set by an external resistor. In this embodiment, the contact detection sensor body 358 outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance, but it may also output a signal in multiple stages depending on the magnitude of the capacitance.

In the present embodiment, the performance operation unit 350 is provided with a contact detector 352 on the underside of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, which is made to function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by the contact detection sensor body 358, and can detect the contact or approach of a detectable object (a player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 through the contact detector 352. In addition, the contact detector 352 of the performance operation unit 350 has a plurality of downward extension pieces 352a extending downward, so that it can detect the contact or approach of a detectable object (a player's hand) to the side of the button body 351 with the performance operation unit 350 protruding upward. For this reason, the performance operation unit 350 can make the button body 351 function as a contact operation unit 302 with the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358.

This performance operation unit 350 is supported by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 so that it can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the performance operation unit cover unit 310, making the performance operation unit 300 look like a single sphere. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and can function as the pressing operation unit 303 by pressing downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In more detail, when the performance operation unit 350 is in the state where it has been moved to the lowest position (normal state), it will not move any further downward even if it is pressed, and it is in a state where pressing operations cannot be performed. In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressing detection sensor 373 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360. Then, when the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 leaves the pressing detection sensor 373 and becomes undetectable. Then, when the upper surface of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the performance operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower end of movement against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressing detection sensor 373. This detects the pressing operation of the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303).

In addition, the performance operation unit 350 covers the upper side of the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal with the button body 351, so that when operating the contact operation unit 302, the player touches the smooth, spherical upper surface of the button body 351, and the player does not directly touch the surface of the punched metal with the unevenness caused by the multiple holes, allowing the player to smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302. In addition, because the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, it is possible to give the contact operation unit 302 any tactile sensation by forming fine unevenness or multiple streaks on the surface (top surface) of the button body 351, which increases the design freedom for the contact operation unit 302 and provides a pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to players.

In the above, the button body 351 is transparent, but this is not limiting, and the button body 351 may be opaque or semi-transparent, so that the lower side is difficult to see through. This makes it difficult to see the contact detector 352 made of punched metal through the button body 351, improving the appearance of the performance operation unit 350. Furthermore, if the button body 351 is opaque, it is preferable that it be translucent. This allows the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated by light from the LED 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decorative board 364 provided below, and the player can be entertained by the illumination of the button body 351.

[3-5e-5. Performance operation unit lifting mechanism]
The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315 and can lift and lower the performance operation unit 350. The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 comprises a lifting mechanism base 361 having an approximately circular outer periphery and attached within the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the performance operation unit 350; a pair of cylindrical guide shafts 362 arranged symmetrically about the central axis of the lifting mechanism base 361, with their lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and their upper ends extending upward through the operation unit base 315 and the button base 354; a disk-shaped upper base 363 connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and having an outer periphery smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353; and a button decorative board 364 attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 and equipped with a plurality of LEDs 364a capable of emitting light upward.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a pair of lifting springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted, respectively, and which urge the button base 354 upward, and a central shaft 366 that passes vertically through the center of the lifting mechanism base 361 and the button base 354, with its lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a and its upper end attached to the upper base 363.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 further comprises an operation button lifting drive motor 367 attached to the underside of the lifting mechanism base 361 so that its rotation shaft protrudes upward, a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, a spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 meshing with the lifting drive gear 368 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a lifting cam member 371, the lower end of which is connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 and the central shaft 366 is inserted through which the lifting cam member 371 is rotatably attached, and which lifts and lowers the button base 354 by rotating, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a pressure detection sensor 373 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, a lifting detection sensor 374 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the lifting of the performance operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the lifting cam drive gear member 370 (lifting cam member 371), and a protruding force detection sensor 375 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the lifting of the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 to detect the protruding force of the performance operation unit 350.

The lifting mechanism base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of through holes 361c penetrating the base body 361a and through which the lifting spring 365 can pass together with the pair of guide shafts 362. The base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body 315a in the operation unit base 315. The base body 361a has a driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressing detection sensor 373, and a protruding force detection sensor 375 attached to its upper surface. The base body 361a also has an operation button lifting drive motor 367, a lifting detection sensor 374, and a protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to its lower surface. The lower ends of the legs 361b of the lifting mechanism base 361 are attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315. This forms a space in which the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is disposed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base main body 361a forward and backward from the center.

The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through holes 361c provided at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and backward in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 have their respective lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, and their respective upper ends attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed from metal rods.

The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower protrusion that protrudes downward. By abutting the lower protrusion of the upper base 363 against the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372, a space capable of accommodating the lifting cam member 371 can be formed between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361.

The button middle decorative board 364 has multiple LEDs 364a mounted on the top surface that are full-color LEDs. The button middle decorative board 364 can illuminate and decorate the center of the top surface of the button body 351 by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 364a.

The pair of lift springs 365 are coil springs, and each has a guide shaft 362 inserted therethrough. The lower ends of the pair of lift springs 365 abut against the lift spring lower holding member 385 of the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the upper ends abut against the button base 354.

The lifting/lowering cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the lifting/lowering cam member 371, and a lifting/lowering detection piece 370c that protrudes downward from the gear portion 370a in a cylindrical shape and has two opposing notches that are detected by the lifting/lowering detection sensor 374. The lifting/lowering cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The lifting cam member 371 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The lifting cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372, and is provided between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361. The lifting cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer periphery and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending perpendicular to the axis near the bottom end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, a second cam 371d extending upward parallel to the axis from one end of the first cam 371b, and a third cam 371e extending upward in a spiral shape from the end of the first cam 371b opposite the second cam 371d (see FIG. 55, etc.). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and adjacent cam portions 371a are spaced apart by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The lifting cam member 371 also has a connected portion 371f at its lower end that connects to the connecting portion 370b of the lifting cam drive gear member 370.

The lifting/lowering cam member 371 is formed so that the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the lifting/lowering cam member 371 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view. By rotating, the lifting/lowering cam member 371 can guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 with the cam portion 371a, and can raise and lower the button base 354 (performance operation unit 350) that is biased upward by the lifting spring 365.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lift spring 365 and the lift cam member 371 can pass. The gear cover 372 also has an upper protrusion that protrudes upward at a location facing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363. By abutting the upper protrusion against the lower end of the lower protrusion of the upper base 363, the gear cover 372 can form a space between the upper base 363 and the lift mechanism base 361 that can accommodate the lift cam member 371.

The pressure detection sensor 373 detects the pressure operation of the performance operation unit 350 (pressure operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the performance operation unit 350. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the pressure detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 from the normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated, and this pressure detection sensor 373 becomes non-detecting. When the top surface of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the performance operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower end of its travel against the force of the lift spring 365, the pressure detection sensor 373 detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 and can detect the pressing operation of the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303).

The lifting/lowering detection sensor 374 detects the lifting/lowering detection piece 370c of the lifting/lowering cam drive gear member 370, thereby detecting the rotational position of the lifting/lowering cam member 371 via the connected part 371f, which is connected to the connecting part 370b of the lifting/lowering cam drive gear member 370.

The protruding force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the lift spring lower holding member 385 in the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can support the performance operation unit unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered via the button base 354 using a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in front and behind, and can urge the performance operation unit unit 350 upward via the button base 354 using a pair of lifting springs 365. In addition, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can raise and lower the performance operation unit unit 350 (performance operation unit 301) relative to the performance operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the lifting cam member 371 using the operation button lifting drive motor 367. In addition, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can appropriately illuminate multiple LEDs 364a mounted on the button middle decorative board 364, thereby illuminating and decorating the central part of the upper surface of the button body 351.

In the normal state, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is engaged with the engaging portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the lifting cam member 371 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 (see FIG. 55(a)). In this normal state, the performance operation unit 350 is located at the downward movement end via the button base 354, and even if the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the performance operation unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected. Also, in the normal state, the surface (top surface) of the unit upper cover 312 in the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and the top surface of the button body 351 in the performance operation unit 350 are aligned, and the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and the button body 351 form a single sphere.

In the normal state (when the performance operation unit 350 is in the lowered position), when the operation button lift drive motor 367 rotates the lift drive gear 368 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view, the lift cam drive gear member 370 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view via the driven gear 369 meshing with the lift drive gear 368, and the lift cam member 371 connected to the lift cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the lift cam member 371 rotates in a counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a visible from the front in FIG. 55(a) moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 rolls from the locking portion 371c to the left of the locking portion 371c on the first cam 371b, and the button base 354 moves slightly downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

When the guide pin 354c, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the lifting cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second cam 371d extends upward perpendicularly to the first cam 371b, so that the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button base 354 rises together with the guide pin 354c, and the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, so that the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detecting state.

The lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, to which the lower end of the lifting spring 365 abuts, can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, as will be described in detail later. The amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 can be changed depending on the vertical position of the lifting spring lower holding member 385, so that the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded to the raised position with a protruding force according to the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365.

When the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. In this state, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 abuts against the lower surface of the upper base 363, restricting further upward movement of the button base 354. Also, when the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire performance operation unit 350 (performance operation unit 301) moves upward, and the upper surface 351a of the button main body 351 protrudes upward beyond the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312.

When the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the force of the lifting spring 365, the performance operation unit 350 moves downward against the force of the lifting spring 365, and the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 moves to the lowered position, and together with the button base 354, the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) also moves to the lowered position.

In this way, when the button base 354 abuts against the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373, and the pressure on the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the performance operation unit is detected.

To return the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view. In FIG. 55(b), the third cam 371e that abuts against the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves to the right (towards the guide pin 354c). As a result, the guide pin 354c is pressed downward by the third cam 371e, and the button base 354 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

When returning the performance operation unit 350 to the lowered position, the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward by the thrust force adjustment drive motor 381 of the thrust force adjustment mechanism 380 to reduce the compression of the lift spring 365 (see FIG. 56). This weakens the force of the lift spring 365 that urges the performance operation unit 350 upward, and the force acting on the third cam 371e of the lift cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is also weakened, reducing the load on the operation button lift drive motor 367 that rotates the lift cam member 371 and reducing damage (breakage) of the operation button lift drive motor 367. In addition, an inexpensive motor with low torque can be used as the operation button lift drive motor 367.

When the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the lift cam member 371 rotates, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops and the guide pin 354c rolls along the first cam 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c halfway along the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the upwardly recessed locking portion 371c by the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the operation button lift drive motor 367 is stopped, and the performance operation unit 350 returns to its original lowered position.

In the above, an example was described in which the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise in the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 to move the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, causing the button base 354 (button body 351) to protrude from the lowered position to the raised position in one go. However, in the normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 may rotate the lifting cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in a plan view. Incidentally, the lifting distance of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in this embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the lifting cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in the normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the guide pin 354c moves upward along the third cam 371e due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. Then, when the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is stopped when the guide pin 354c is in a position halfway along the third cam 371e, the upward protrusion of the button body 351 can be stopped at any position between the lowered position and the raised position. Then, by protruding the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, it becomes possible to press the button body 351 downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button body 351 can function as the pressing operation unit 303.

When the third cam 371e is used to protrude the button body 351 upward, it is desirable to move the lift spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 downward to weaken the biasing force of the lift spring 365. This reduces the load on the rotation of the lift cam member 371 (operation button lift drive motor 367) and makes the button body 351 feel lighter when pressed.

In this way, the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be changed depending on the rotational position of the lifting cam member 371, so by varying the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 depending on the game status (for example, depending on the lottery result of the special pattern that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first lower starting hole 2003, the first upper starting hole 2004, or the second starting hole 2005), it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game.

In addition, at least one shallow recess in which the guide pin 354c can be engaged may be provided midway on the third cam 371e of the lifting cam member 371. This allows the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) to be stably protruded to a position with the same protrusion amount, preventing variation in the amount of protrusion. Furthermore, if a recess is provided at least at one location midway on the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c can be engaged in the recess, eliminating the need to keep the lifting cam member 371 stopped rotating by the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and reducing the load on the operation button lifting drive motor 367.

[3-5e-6. Ejection force adjustment mechanism]
The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is a lifting spring 365 that urges the performance operation unit 350 upward. By changing the amount of compression of the operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303), the force (projecting force) with which the operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) projects upward can be changed. It is provided between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the lift mechanism base 361 and the base main body 361 a of the lift mechanism base 361 .

The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 includes a protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the underside of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 382 attached to the rotating shaft of the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, a transmission gear 383 meshed with the pinion gear 382 and rotatably attached to the underside of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a meshed with the transmission gear 383, and a screw portion 384b extending downward from the gear portion 384a in a cylindrical shape and having a spiral groove formed on the outer periphery, an adjustment screw 384 through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported, and a lifting spring lower holding member 385 meshed with the screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384, through which a pair of guide shafts 362 pass and against which the lower ends of a pair of lifting springs 365 abut.

The protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the underside of the base body 361a so that a gap is formed between the motor and the underside of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 has a rotating shaft that protrudes into the gap between the motor and the base body 361a.

The adjustment screw 384 is formed to a length that extends from the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation unit base 315 to the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The lift spring lower holding member 385 has a main body portion 385a extending forward and backward, a screw hole 385b that penetrates the center of the main body portion 385a vertically and screws into the screw portion 384b, spring holding recesses 385c that are provided at both the front and rear ends of the main body portion 385a and are recessed downward to accommodate the lower end of the lift spring 365, and a flat detection piece 385d that extends upward from the front end of the main body portion 385a. The lift spring lower holding member 385 has a guide shaft 362 that penetrates each of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c at the center. The detection piece 385d is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

When the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a. Then, by rotating the adjustment screw 384 by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can move the lifting spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction by the screw hole 385b that meshes with the screw portion 384b.

When the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves upward, and the amount of compression of the lift spring 365 increases. On the other hand, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, and the amount of compression of the lift spring 365 decreases (see FIG. 56). In other words, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the biasing force of the lift spring 365 biasing the performance operation unit 350 upward can be increased, and when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the biasing force of the lift spring 365 biasing the performance operation unit 350 upward can be decreased. This allows the upward protruding force of the performance operation unit 350 to be adjusted by the lift force adjustment mechanism 380.

The detection piece 385d of the lift spring lower holding member 385 is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is raised to the highest position. In other words, the detection piece 385d is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 when the lift spring 365 is in the state where the amount of compression is greatest. As a result, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is being moved upward by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, if the protruding force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d, the upward movement of the lift spring lower holding member 385 by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 is stopped, thereby preventing further compression of the lift spring 365 and preventing damage to the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380.

As described above, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the protruding force of the performance operation unit 350, so that when the performance operation unit 350 is in the lowered position and the contact detector 352 detects contact or approach of a detected object (for example, a player's finger, etc.) to the button body 351, and the performance operation unit lift mechanism 360 is used to protrude the performance operation unit 350 to abut against the detected object, the vertical position of the lift spring lower holding member 385 can be appropriately selected to vary the protruding force of the button body 351. This makes it possible to vary the strength of the force exerted on the player's finger, etc. when the button body 351 protrudes upward, so that when the button body 351 strongly abuts, the player can be made to think that something good is going to happen, and the player's expectations for the game can be increased. Therefore, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can make the protruding force of the button body 351 stronger or weaker depending on the game status (for example, depending on the lottery result of the special pattern that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first lower starting hole 2003, the first upper starting hole 2004, or the second starting hole 2005), thereby indicating to the player the degree of expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method of changing the spring's biasing force, it is possible to change the biasing force by applying a twist to the spring. However, in order to protrude the performance operation unit 350, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring), and if the biasing force is changed by applying a twist to the compression coil spring, an excessive stress different from that in the original use acts on the compression coil spring, which may cause the internal structure to deteriorate early and be damaged. In contrast, in the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 of this embodiment, the protruding force (bias) of the performance operation unit 350 is adjusted by changing the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 by moving the lifting spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction, so that excessive stress is not applied to the lifting spring 365, and the early deterioration of the lifting spring 365 can be reduced, and the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded stably for a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Function of the Production Operation Unit]
Next, the operation of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 57 and FIG. 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board, the button outer decorative board, and the button inner decorative board in a plan view of the performance operation unit seen from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 58(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the performance operation unit unit is in the raised position. The performance operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The performance operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by contact or approach of the player's hand, etc., and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed. The contact operation unit 302 is provided on the upper part of the pressing operation unit 303 (button body 351).

The performance operation unit 300 is assembled to the tray unit 200 with the protruding direction of the pressing operation part 303 (performance operation part unit 350) that can protrude upward tilted so that the upper part is located forward with respect to the vertical direction. In other words, the center of the performance operation part 301 is located forward of the apex of the spherical performance operation unit 300. This makes it easier for a player seated in front of this pachinko machine 1 to see the performance operation part 301.

In the normal state, the performance operation unit 300 has the pressing operation section 303 (performance operation unit 350) in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350 coincides with the spherical surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. In addition, in the normal state, even if the pressing operation section 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation section 303 (performance operation unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the performance operation unit 300 appears to the player as simply a spherical decorative object, making it difficult for the player to recognize that it is operable.

As shown in FIG. 57, the performance operation unit 300 has the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 arranged under the unit upper cover 312 that surrounds the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 303 (performance operation unit 350), and the annular button outer decorative board 355 arranged inside the outer edge of the pressing operation unit 303, and the button middle decorative board 364 arranged further inside. The performance operation unit 300 is arranged outward from the button middle decorative board 364 in the order of the button outer decorative board 355 and the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320. The button middle decorative board 364 and the LED 355a inside the button outer decorative board 355 are arranged under the contact detector 352, but the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal and has translucency, so the light from them can be transmitted upward (to the player side) well.

The performance operation unit 300 can illuminate and decorate the annular unit upper cover 312 using the LEDs 320a on the performance operation outer peripheral decorative board 320. In addition, the LEDs 355a on the button outer decorative board 355 can illuminate and decorate the periphery and outer peripheral surface of the top surface of the button body 351. Furthermore, the LEDs 364a on the button middle decorative board 364 can illuminate and decorate the central part of the top surface of the button body 351.

The multiple LEDs 320a on the outer decorative board 320 of the effect operation unit, the multiple LEDs 355a on the outer decorative board 355 of the button, and the multiple LEDs 364a on the inner decorative board 364 of the button are each arranged in a row on a circumference, so that by sequentially emitting light in the circumferential direction, the player can see a light-emitting effect in which light rotates around the center of the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, the multiple LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 364a are arranged in a concentric circle, so that the player can see a light-emitting effect in which light spreads from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside, or a light-emitting effect in which light converges from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303.

In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the presentation operation unit 300 is in a lowered position with the pressing operation unit 303 (presentation operation unit 350) flush with its upper surface against the surface of the unit upper cover 312. In this state, pressing the pressing operation unit 303 is not possible. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can allow contact operations depending on the player participation type presentation being executed.

In the normal state where the pressing operation unit 303 (operation operation unit 350) is not protruding, the performance (player participation type performance) may be, for example, to display a performance image on the performance display device 1600 encouraging the player to touch the top surface of the performance operation unit 300, or to output voice or sound effects. Then, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the performance proceeds to the next stage. When contact is detected, the button body 351 is illuminated and decorated by the LED 355a on the button outer decorative board 355 or the LED 364a on the button inner decorative board 364, so that the player can recognize that the touch operation has been accepted, and a feeling of operation of the touch operation unit 302 may be given. At this time, the light color, light emission brightness, light emission pattern, etc. of the button body 351 may be used to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game (for example, the occurrence of a favorable game state in which the player has an advantage, such as a "jackpot" game).

Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or proximity) with the button body 351, the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351. This provides a sense of operation to the contact operation unit 302, making the player more aware that the contact operation has been accepted. At this time, the vibration motor 356 may be caused to give strong vibrations, weak vibrations, or vibrations with a predetermined rhythm, to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game.

In addition, in the normal presentation (player participation presentation), a presentation image encouraging the player to touch the top surface of the presentation operation unit 300 is displayed on the presentation display device 1600, and voice, sound effects, etc. are output, and then when the contact detector 352 detects contact of the player (hand or fingers) with the top surface of the button body 351, the presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350) to protrude upward (pop up) due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. In more detail, when the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view in a normal state, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 comes off the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b), and the force of the pair of lifting springs 365 causes the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351, pressing operation unit 303) together with the button base 354 to vigorously protrude upward and reach the raised position (see FIG. 55(b)). In this raised position state, the upper surface of the button body 351 is located significantly above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 protrudes upward. And, by the button body 351 protruding upward as described above, the fingers touching the button body 351 are pushed upward together with the button body 351, which can greatly surprise the player and strongly attract the player's interest.

Then, the presentation transitions to one in which the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed, and the player enjoys pressing the pressing operation unit 303. In more detail, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and the button body 351 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350) moves downward, and the top surface of the button body 351 becomes flush with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373. This detects the pressing of the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303), and the presentation is changed in response to the pressing operation, allowing the player to enjoy a player-participation presentation.

During the above-mentioned performance, the protruding force (momentum) of the button body 351 may be increased or decreased by using the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the strength of the protruding force may suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game. In addition, when the button body 351 pops up or is pressed, the button body 351 may be vibrated by the vibration motor 356.

In a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 is protruded, the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) may be protruded upward when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers, etc. have approached within the movement range (protruding range) of the upwardly protruding button body 351. This causes the button body 351 to come into contact with the player's fingers, etc., causing an impact, which can surprise the player and strongly attract the player's interest. Even in this case, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can be used to increase or decrease the protruding force of the button body 351, so that the strength of the protruding force can suggest to the player how much he or she is looking forward to the game.

In addition, in a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 is protruded, when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers, etc., have approached within a predetermined distance of the protruding button body 351, outside the protruding range of the upwardly protruding button body 351, the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) may be protruded upward. This allows the wind pressure generated by the protruding button body 351 to hit the player's fingers, etc., surprising the player and strongly attracting the player's interest. Even in this case, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the protruding force of the button body 351, so that the strength of the wind pressure hitting the player's fingers, etc., may suggest to the player how much he or she is looking forward to the game.

Furthermore, as an effect of protruding the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be protruded upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detector 352. In this case, if the button body 351 is protruded with a strong protruding force by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes forcefully and generates a sound (protruding sound), so that the protruding sound can surprise the player. Also, if the button body 351 is protruded with a weak protruding force by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes quietly, making it difficult for the player to notice the protrusion of the button body 351, and the player can be surprised by the button body 351 protruding without his realizing it.

As an effect after the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is protruded, the force of the lifting spring 365 may be weakened by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect may be executed in which the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed in the same way as a general press button. Alternatively, the force of the lifting spring 365 may be increased by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect may be executed in which the player is forced to press the button body 351 with a strong force.

In addition, after the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is protruded, a performance may be executed in which the protruding button body 351 is touched. At this time, since the contact detector 352 has a downward extension piece 352a that extends downward, the side of the button body 351 may be touched. At this time, it is also preferable to increase the biasing force of the lift spring 365 by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the protruding button body 351 can be made difficult to move and the button body 351 (touch operation unit 302) can be easily touched.

In the above, an example of the effect of protruding the effect operation unit 350 is shown in which the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise using the operation button lifting drive motor 367, moving the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, causing the button base 354 (button body 351) to protrude from the lowered position to the raised position in one go, but this is not limiting.

For example, in the normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is engaged with the engagement portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the lifting cam member 371 can be rotated clockwise in a plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 to move the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 can be stopped midway through the third cam 371e, so that the button body 351 stops protruding upward at a position between the lowered position and the raised position. At this time, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In this way, even if the third cam 371e of the lift-down cam member 371 causes the button body 351 to protrude partway, the button body 351 can be pressed and can function as the pressing operation unit 303, allowing the player to enjoy a player-participation type presentation. In this case, the amount by which the button body 351 protrudes upward can be varied depending on the rotational position of the lift-down cam member 371, so that the degree of expectation for the game can be suggested depending on the amount by which the button body 351 protrudes, entertaining the player.

Furthermore, as a performance in which the protruding performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is pressed, after the performance operation unit 350 is protruding, the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward to minimize the compression of the lift spring 365. As a result, the force of the lift spring 365 is in the weakest state, so that the performance operation unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, improving the operability of the pressing operation and making the pressing operation enjoyable. Also, as a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is pressed, the lift spring lower holding member 385 may be placed at an appropriate position in the vertical direction to set the force of the lift spring 365 to any strength between the strongest and the weakest, depending on the result of the lottery for the special pattern drawn. This allows the player to press the performance operation unit 350 firmly or lightly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operating force of the performance operation unit 350, and a wider variety of performances can be presented, making it less likely that the player will become bored.

In addition, as a presentation using the presentation operation unit 300, multiple threshold levels may be set according to the capacitance of the contact detector 352 so that contact of the player's fingers, etc. with the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected at multiple contact stages (approach stages), and the presentation may be changed according to each stage. In other words, focusing on the fact that the capacitance of the contact detector 352 increases as the player's fingers, etc. approach the button body 351 (contact detector 352), multiple threshold levels may be set for the magnitude of the capacitance to detect it in multiple stages and to use it in the presentation. Specifically, for example, by dividing the stage into a stage where the player's fingers are more than a predetermined distance away from the button body 351, a stage where the player's fingers are not touching the button body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button body 351, and a stage where the player's fingers are touching the button body 351, and changing the presentation according to each stage, it is possible to present a variety of presentations to the player with just one contact detection sensor body 358, making it less likely for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, the normal state of the performance operation unit 300 is shown as shown in FIG. 55(a) with the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) in the lowered position and the lift spring lower holding member 385 moved upward. However, this is not limited to this, and the performance operation unit 350 may be in the lowered position and the lift spring lower holding member 385 moved downward as shown in FIG. 56(a). As a result, in the normal state, the lift spring 365 is not strongly compressed, so that early deterioration (fatigue) of the lift spring 365 can be suppressed. In addition, the biasing force of the strongly compressed lift spring 365 can suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the lift spring lower holding member 385.

In this way, the presentation operation unit 300 of this embodiment can be used for various patterns of player participation presentations, allowing players to enjoy a wide variety of presentations, preventing players from becoming bored and reducing a decline in interest.

The performance operation unit 300 has a circular (two arcs combined) performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 on the top of the spherical performance operation unit cover unit 310, and a contact detection sensor body 358 is provided on the performance operation unit unit 350, which rises and falls inside the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320. In addition, a button middle decorative board 364, which is fixed in position, is provided inside the button sleeve 353 of the performance operation unit 350. Since this contact detection sensor body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, when the performance operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor body 358 (sensor electrode) approaches the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 and the button middle decorative board 364, and the capacitance of the sensor electrode changes due to the approach of the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 and the button middle decorative board 364, which may cause the contact detection sensor body 358 to make a false detection.

Therefore, a conductive shield (e.g., punched metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) connected to ground (GND) may be provided between the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the button inner decorative board 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. As a result, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 or the button inner decorative board 364 changes by moving the performance operation unit unit 350 up and down, the shield connected to ground (GND) does not change the distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 or the button inner decorative board 364, and can reduce the effect of the change in capacitance due to the approach of the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 or the button inner decorative board 364, and can prevent erroneous detection in the contact detection sensor main body 358.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the plate unit]
Next, the plate unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 59 to 61. Fig. 59 is a plan view of a performance operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are provided in the performance operation unit of the performance operation unit. Fig. 60(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a switching unit is provided between the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detection bodies in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, and the performance operation unit of the plate unit are made movable in the forward and backward directions and contact detection bodies are provided on the front and rear sides of the performance operation unit. Fig. 61(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a contact detection body having decorative properties, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing another embodiment of the performance operation unit. Note that in Figs. 59 to 61, the same components as those described above are given the same reference numerals.

59, the contact detector 352 is divided into a left contact detector 390L and a right contact detector 390R on the lower side of the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, and the left contact detector 391L and the right contact detector 390R are connected to the left contact detector 390L and the right contact detector 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, when a player moves his/her finger from the left side to the right side on the upper surface of the button body 351, when the player's finger is positioned on the left side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detector 390L changes and the left contact detector 391L becomes detected, while the capacitance of the right contact detector 390R does not change and the right contact detector 391R remains undetected. When the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitance of both the left contact detector 390L and the right contact detector 390R changes, causing both the left contact detector body 391L and the right contact detector body 391R to detect. Furthermore, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detector 390L returns to its original state, causing the left contact detector body 391L to become undetectable, while the capacitance of the right contact detector 390R changes, causing the right contact detector body 391R to remain detected.

In this way, the movement of the player's fingers, etc. can be detected by the combination of detection/non-detection by the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R of the left contact detection sensor main body 391L and the right contact detection sensor main body 391R, and the pattern of changes. This makes it possible to detect a wider variety of contact operations, and to present the player with a player-participation presentation that allows a wider variety of contact operations to be performed on the contact operation unit 302, while also making the player-participation presentation of operating the contact operation unit 302 even more enjoyable. Furthermore, by adding more contact detection bodies, it becomes possible to detect even more complex movements.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60(a) is an example in which multiple contact detectors 393 are connected to one contact detector sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, with multiple contact detectors 393 provided at multiple different locations, one contact detector sensor main body 392 can detect contact with a human body or the like at any of the contact detectors 393.

For example, by distributing multiple contact detectors 393 on the inside (underside) of the button body 351, when the player's fingers or the like touch any part of the surface of the button body 351, the contact can be detected by any of the contact detectors 393, thereby improving the detection accuracy of contact with the contact operation unit 302.

In addition, multiple contact detectors 393 may be provided in areas of the pachinko machine 1 that should not be touched by the player (for example, areas where the player may be injured, areas where other players may be inconvenienced, areas where fraudulent activity may occur, etc.), and when any of the contact detectors 393 detects a human body or the like, a warning or alert may be issued.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60(b) is an example in which a switching unit 394 is provided between one contact detection sensor main body 392 and multiple contact detection bodies 393, which connects only one of the contact detection bodies 393 to the contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, the switching unit 394 switches the connection to one of the multiple contact detection bodies 352, making it possible to detect contact with a human body or the like only at the desired location (contact detection body 352). Examples of the switching unit 394 include "one that switches using a switching circuit using a relay or transistor," "one that switches using other electronic circuits," and "one that switches in response to the movement of a movable member (for example, the movable left plate decoration unit 270, right plate decoration unit 275, and performance operation unit 300 as shown in FIG. 60(c))."

For example, in the presentation operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302), multiple contact detectors 393 may be distributed and when a player participation type presentation is performed in which the player touches the parts detected by each contact detector 393 in order, the contact detectors 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 may be switched in the touch order by the switching unit 394 to detect whether or not the player's fingers or the like have made contact with the contact detector 393. This makes it possible to present the player with a highly game-like player participation type presentation using multiple contact detectors 393, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Also, as shown in FIG. 60(c), if the left plate decorative unit 270, the right plate decorative unit 275, and the performance operation unit 300 are made capable of moving forward and backward, a first contact detector 393a may be provided on the front side of the performance operation unit 300, and a second contact detector 393b may be provided on the rear side of the left plate decorative unit 270, the right plate decorative unit 275, and the performance operation unit 300, and when the performance operation unit 300 etc. is to be protruded forward, the first contact detector 393a may be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 by the switching unit 394, and when the performance operation unit 300 etc. is to be retreated, the switching unit 394 may be switched to connect the second contact detector 393b to the contact detection sensor main body 392.

As a result, when the performance operation unit 300 etc. is protruded (moved) forward, the first contact detector 393a detects contact or approach of the player and stops the forward movement of the performance operation unit 300 etc. This makes it possible to prevent the performance operation unit 300 etc. from unnecessarily pressing on the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and to avoid causing discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, when the performance operation unit 300 etc. is projected forward, a gap may be formed on the rear side of the performance operation unit 300 etc., and if the performance operation unit 300 etc. is moved back to the initial position with the player's fingers etc. inserted in the gap, the player's fingers etc. may be pinched and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the performance operation unit 300 etc. that has been moved forward is moved backward, the switching unit 394 switches so that the second contact detection body 393b is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Then, when the second contact detection body 393b detects the player's fingers etc., the performance operation unit 300 etc. is stopped moving backward, and the player is notified of the instruction to remove the fingers etc. from the rear side of the performance operation unit 300 etc., and the performance operation unit 300 etc. is moved backward only when the second contact detection body 393b is not detected, and the performance operation unit 300 etc. is returned to the initial state. This prevents players from being injured due to gaps behind the performance operation unit 300, etc., and improves the safety of the pachinko machine 1.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(a), the contact detector 395 that detects contact with the player's fingers or the like has a star-shaped outer shape to provide decorativeness (design). The shape of the decorative contact detector 395 is not limited to a star shape, but may be a circle, a polygon, a geometric pattern, a shape imitating a specific character, a shape imitating a specific item, a shape imitating a specific logo, a picture frame, or the like. As a result, the contact detector 395 visible through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), so the contact detector 395 itself can improve the appearance of the button body 351 and therefore the pachinko machine 1, and a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players can be provided.

In addition, while the above embodiment shows the contact detector 352 formed from punched metal, this is not limited to this, and the contact detector may be formed from metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, etc., and the same effects as those described above can be achieved. It is preferable that the contact detector is provided on the back side of a transparent surface member so that it is not directly touched by the player's fingers, etc. This prevents wear on the contact detector and also makes the surface member smooth to the touch.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a button-inside decorative board 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact detector 352, but this is not limited to the above. As shown in FIG. 61(b), a contact detector 397 may be provided below a transparent surface member 396, and a decorative body 398 may be provided below that. This allows the decorative body 398 to be visible through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397, thereby enhancing the decorativeness of the performance operation unit on which the surface member 396 is provided, and improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In the embodiment of FIG. 61(b), the contact detector 397 is formed by metal deposition, and under normal conditions, the metallic luster of the contact detector 397 makes the decorative body 398 below it invisible. However, when contact with the surface member 396 is detected, the decorative body 398 is illuminated by an LED provided below the contact detector 397, so that the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397.

The contact detector 352 may be formed so as to be unnoticeable to the player. Examples of unnoticeable contact detectors include "those formed from transparent materials" and "those formed so as to be seen as one with the decoration of the surface member of the button body, etc." As a result, the performance operation unit 301 in which the contact detector 352 is provided cannot recognize the contact detector 352, and the player is given the illusion that the contact detector 352 does not detect or operate the contact of fingers, etc. For example, when a predetermined player participation performance is executed and the player's fingers, etc., contact or approach the button body 351, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the button body 351 to protrude upward, and the player is first aware of the presence of the contact detector 352 (contact operation unit 302), which greatly surprises the player and entertains the player, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 62 to 65. Figure 62(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. Figure 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and Figure 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. Figure 65 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line U-U in Figure 62(a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the play area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 420 comprises a door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 and having a plurality of first LEDs 422a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, and a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 and having a plurality of first LEDs 423a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface. The door frame includes a lower left side decorative board 423 attached to the left side of the door frame, an upper left side reflector 424 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, a lower left side reflector 425 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and a left side decorative body 426 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front sides of the upper left side reflector 424 and the lower left side reflector 425.

The door frame left side unit 420 also includes an upper left side light guiding member 427 that guides light forward from the first LED 422a on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, a middle left side light guiding member 428 that guides forward light from the first LED 423a above the vertical center on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and a lower left side light guiding member 429 that guides forward light from the first LED 423a below the vertical center on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame.

The door frame left side base 421 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). In detail, the door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded from two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295 described above, and a circular or radial pattern is formed by a part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. In other words, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the door frame upper left side decorative board 422, multiple first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 422b are mounted two by two, vertically aligned, between the first LEDs 422a. In addition, the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 422c with a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b.

This door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is equipped with a total of 12 full-color LEDs, including four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a, which has second LEDs 422b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) of the second LEDs 422b. At least the second LEDs 422b are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light within a 130-degree angle range centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the decorative board 422 on the upper left side of the door frame, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets, the top two and the remaining two. The eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets, the top two, the third to fifth three from the top, and the sixth to eighth three from the top. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and controls the two sets of four first LEDs 422a and the three sets of eight second LEDs 422b with three systems per set, for a total of 15 systems, so that they can each emit full color light.

Although not shown, this door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 422c of this door frame upper left side decorative board 422 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can make the four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups emit light with the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, with the right side formed unevenly. On the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, multiple first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 423b are mounted two by two, vertically lined up between the first LEDs 423a. In addition, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 423c with a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b.

This door frame lower left side decorative board 423 is equipped with a total of 18 full color LEDs, including six first LEDs 423a and 12 second LEDs 423b. The first LED 423a, which has second LEDs 423b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) of the second LEDs 423b. At least the second LEDs 423b are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Fig. 72, in the door frame lower left side decorative board 423, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three groups, with two in each group starting from the top. The twelve second LEDs 423b are divided into four groups: the first to third three from the top, the fourth to sixth three from the top, the seventh to ninth three from the top, and the tenth to twelfth three from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and controls the three groups of six first LEDs 423a and the four groups of twelve second LEDs 423b with three systems per group, for a total of 21 systems, so that they can each emit full color light.

Although not shown, this door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 423c of this door frame left side lower decorative board 423 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can make the six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups emit light with the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

The upper left side reflector 424 has a through hole 424a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, and a cylindrical retaining tube 424b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 422a. The upper left side reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts against the front surface of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, and the periphery of the front side of the through hole 424a is formed in a dish shape that widens toward the front. This allows the light from the second LED 422b to be diffused widely forward.

The retaining tube 424b of the upper left side reflector 424 holds the cylindrical light guide shaft 427a of the upper left side light guide member 427 described later in a straight line in the front-rear direction. This retaining tube 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft 427a of the upper left side light guide member 427 that protrudes forward through the retaining tube 424b, light from the second LED 422b of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame that is exposed from the through holes 424a on both the top and bottom sides is irradiated with an equal amount of light from both the top and bottom sides to the light guide shaft 427a, thereby preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft 427a from being cast on the back side of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame.

The upper left side reflector 424 also has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a for mounting to the left side door frame base 421. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being projected onto the back side of the left side door frame decorative body 426.

The left side lower reflector 425 has a through hole 425a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and a cylindrical retaining tube 425b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 423a. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts against the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the periphery of the front side of the through hole 425a is formed in a dish shape that widens toward the front. This allows the light from the second LED 423b to be diffused widely forward.

The retaining tube 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425 is inserted with the cylindrical light guide shaft 428a of the left-side middle light guide member 428 and the cylindrical light guide shaft 429a of the left-side lower light guide member 429, which will be described later, to hold the light guide shaft 428a and the light guide shaft 429a straight in the front-rear direction. This retaining tube 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, which protrude forward through the retaining tube 425b, the light from the second LED 423b of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 facing through the through holes 425a on both the top and bottom sides is irradiated with an equal amount of light from both the top and bottom sides onto the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a, preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from being cast on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The lower left side reflector 425 also has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a for mounting to the left side door frame base 421. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being projected onto the back side of the left side door frame decorative body 426.

The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a milky white color with translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a shape in which a semicircular arc bulges forward and extends up and down. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a semitubular shape that is open to the rear. This door frame left side decorative body 426 has multiple openings 426a that penetrate forward and backward at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left and right direction. The multiple openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the retaining tube 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the retaining tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. The respective tips of the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are inserted from the rear into these openings 426a. This door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed from a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further has a decorative part 426b that is recessed in an arc shape to avoid the multiple openings 426a and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction.

The left-side upper light guide member 427 has four cylindrical light guide shafts 427a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 427b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 427a, and is made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 427a are provided at regular intervals up and down to correspond to the four retaining tubes 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424. The light guide shafts 427a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 424b. Each light guide shaft 427a penetrates the retaining tube 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the left-side door frame decoration 426, so that the tip surface is in a state of being aligned with the surface of the left-side door frame decoration 426. This left side upper light guide member 427 can guide light from the first LED 422a on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 forward using the light guide shaft 427a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 to be brightly illuminated.

The left side center light guide member 428 has three cylindrical light guide shafts 428a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 428b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shafts 428a, and is made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 428a are provided at regular intervals up and down to correspond to the three upper retaining tubes 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. In addition, the light guide shafts 428a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately the same as the inner diameter of the retaining tube 425b. Each light guide shaft 428a penetrates the retaining tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip surface is in a state of being aligned with the surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. This left side center light guide member 428 can guide light from the first LED 423a on the left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame forward through the light guide shaft 428a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 426a of the left side door frame decorative body 426 to be brightly illuminated.

The left-side lower light guide member 429 has three cylindrical light guide shafts 429a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shafts 429a, and is made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 429a are provided at regular intervals vertically to correspond to the three retaining tubes 425b on the lower side of the left-side lower reflector 425. In addition, the light guide shafts 429a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately the same as the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 425b. Each light guide shaft 429a penetrates the retaining tube 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip surface is in a state of being aligned with the surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. This left-side lower light-guiding member 429 can guide light from the first LED 423a on the left-side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame forward through the light-guiding shaft 429a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 426a of the left-side door frame decorative body 426 to be brightly illuminated.

In this embodiment, the door frame left side unit 420 has the circular or radial patterned parts of the door frame left side base 421 formed in the same color as the circular or radial patterned parts of the handle cover 295, and the parts outside the circular or radial pattern of the door frame left side base 421 formed in the same color as the parts outside the circular or radial pattern of the handle cover 295.

In this embodiment, the portion of the door frame left side unit 420 above the center in the vertical direction protrudes slightly forward more than the portion below, and the lower end is gently curved to the right. The upper end of this door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and the lower end is located below the door window 101a and above the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The upper part of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, making it look like a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded in it.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are provided at a position some distance behind the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread out and is irradiated onto the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426, allowing the door frame left side decorative body 426 to be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

In addition, the light from the first LED 422a on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame and the first LED 423a on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, which are located away from the front surface of the left side decorative body 426 toward the rear, can be guided (guided) forward by the light guiding shaft 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428, and the light guiding shaft 429a of the lower left side light guiding member 429, so that the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame can be illuminated in a spot-like manner more brightly than other areas.

In addition, the first LED 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the light guiding shaft portion 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft portion 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428 and the light guiding shaft portion 429a of the lower left side light guiding member 429 are arranged in the center between two adjacent second LEDs 422b and second LEDs 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with an even amount of light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b on both sides, so even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected from behind onto the door frame left side decorative body 426, the shadows become difficult to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be illuminated and decorated in an even, planar manner.

Furthermore, the door frame left side decorative body 426 has a decorative part 426b that extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the multiple openings 426a. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a are projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b, the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a can be made less noticeable because the decorative part 426b is located at the location where the shadows are projected, and the appearance of the luminous decoration of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 66 to 70. Figure 66(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. Figure 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and Figure 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. Figure 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-E in Figure 66(a). Figure 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along line O-O in Figure 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the play area 5a when viewed from the front.

The right-side door frame unit 430 includes a right-side door frame base 431 attached to the right outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, an upper right-side door frame decorative board 432 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the right-side door frame base 431 and having a plurality of first LEDs 432a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, a lower right-side door frame decorative board 433 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the right-side door frame base 431 and having a plurality of first LEDs 433a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, a right-side door frame reflector 434 attached to the right-side door frame base 431 so as to cover the front sides of the upper right-side door frame decorative board 432 and the lower right-side door frame decorative board 433, and a right-side door frame decorative body 435 attached to the right-side door frame base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right-side door frame reflector 434.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 is equipped with an upper right side light guiding member 436 that guides light forward from the first LED 423a on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, and a lower right side light guiding member 437 that guides light forward from the first LED 433a on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 is provided with a door frame right side left side decorative body 438 that is attached to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 431 and has multiple decorative holes 438a that penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape, a right side left lens 439 that is provided between the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side base 431 and has a translucent decorative part 439a that is fitted to close the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, a door frame right side right side decorative body 440 that is attached to cover the right side of the door frame right side base 431 and has multiple decorative holes 440a that penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape, and a right side right lens 441 that is provided between the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the door frame right side base 431 and has a translucent decorative part 441a that is fitted to close the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440.

The door frame right side base 431 extends vertically with a generally constant width on both sides. The rear end of the door frame right side base 431 extends vertically over its entire height, and the front end extends downward from the top end in a generally straight line to near the center in the vertical direction, where it curves rearward and extends diagonally backward, then curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom end.

The door frame right side base 431 has a number of reflector parts 431a recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extending forward to the front end at the height where the decorative hole 438a of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the decorative hole 440a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame (decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441) are provided. These reflector parts 431a have their rear ends inclined toward the side surfaces, which are inside the decorative parts 439a and 441a, and their bottom surfaces are curved.

The door frame right side base 431 has a reflector portion 431a that corresponds to the decorative hole 438a and decorative hole 440a (decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) provided rearward of the center in the fore-and-aft direction in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and the front portion excluding the portion inside the decorative portion 439a and decorative portion 441a penetrates in the left-right direction (it is recessed from the left and right side surfaces and connected to each other).

These reflector parts 431a of the door frame right side base 431 reflect the light irradiated rearward from the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, described below, in the left and right directions, causing the decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441 to emit light and be decorated (see Figure 70, etc.).

The door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, multiple first LEDs 432a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 432b are mounted two by two between the first LEDs 432a. In addition, on the rear surface of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, multiple third LEDs 432c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 432d with a unique address for illuminating the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, and third LED 432c.

This door frame upper right side decorative board 432 is equipped with a total of 16 full-color LEDs: four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. The first LED 432a, which has second LEDs 432b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) the second LEDs 432b. At least the second LED 432b and third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the decorative board 432 on the upper right side of the door frame, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the top two and the remaining two. The eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets, the top two, the three from the third to fifth from the top, and the three from the sixth to eighth from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the top two and the remaining two.

The door frame upper right side decorative board 432 is divided into two sets of first LEDs 432a, three sets of second LEDs 432b, and two sets of third LEDs 432c, so that each of the first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c is illuminated in full color, for a total of 21 systems, with three systems per set. In contrast, the LED driver 432d of the door frame upper right side decorative board 432 can control up to 24 systems, so in addition to the 21 systems mentioned above, it controls a total of 24 systems, including the upper set of three third LEDs 433c, which are divided into two sets on the door frame lower right side decorative board 433, which will be described later.

Although not shown in the figure, a wiring cable consisting of four wires is connected to this decorative board 432 on the upper right side of the door frame. The wiring cable consists of two power lines (one of which is an earth line) that supply power to drive the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, the two third LEDs 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and the LED driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 432d of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to that address via a control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board), it can, in response to that command, cause the four first LEDs 432a divided into two groups, the eight second LEDs 432b divided into three groups, the four third LEDs 432c divided into two groups, and the two third LEDs 433c in the upper group of the two groups on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame to emit light of the appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, multiple first LEDs 433a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 433b are mounted two by two between the first LEDs 433a. In addition, on the rear surface of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, multiple third LEDs 433c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for illuminating the first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and third LED 433c.

This door frame lower right side decorative board 433 is equipped with a total of 22 full-color LEDs: six first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and four third LEDs 433c. The first LED 433a, which has second LEDs 433b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) the second LEDs 433b. At least the second LED 433b and third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the door frame right lower decorative board 433, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three groups, with two in each group starting from the top. The twelve second LEDs 433b are divided into four groups: the first to third LEDs from the top, three from the fourth to sixth LEDs from the top, three from the seventh to ninth LEDs from the top, and three from the tenth to twelfth LEDs from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two groups, the top two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of the first LED 433a, four sets of the second LED 433b, and two sets of the third LED 433c, so that each of the first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and third LED 433c is illuminated in full color, for a total of 27 systems, with three systems per set. In contrast, the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 can only control a maximum of 24 systems, so in the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the upper set of three systems of the third LED 433c, which is divided into two sets, is controlled by the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the front first LED 433a and second LED 433b, and the lower two of the rear third LED 433c) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. This helps prevent an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown, this door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the two lower third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the LED driver 433d of this door frame right side lower decorative board 433 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can make the six first LEDs 433a divided into three groups, the twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four groups, and the two third LEDs 433c in the lower group of the two groups emit light with appropriate colors and intensities for each group in response to the command.

The right side reflector 434 has a through hole 434a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and has a cylindrical retaining tube 434b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a abuts against the front of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and the periphery of the front side of the through hole 434a is formed in a dish shape that widens toward the front. This allows the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b to be diffused widely forward.

The holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 holds the light guide shaft 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 (described later) straight in the front-rear direction by inserting them. This holding tube 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a that protrude forward through the retaining tube 434b, the light from the second LED 432b on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame that are exposed through the through holes 434a on both the top and bottom sides is irradiated with an equal amount of light from both the top and bottom sides onto the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from being cast on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The right side reflector 434 also has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a for mounting to the door frame right side base 431. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being projected onto the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a milky white color with translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a shape in which a semicircular arc bulges forward and extends up and down. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. This door frame right side decorative body 435 has multiple openings 435a that penetrate forward and backward at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The multiple openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the retaining tube 434b of the right side reflector 434. The respective tips of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted from the rear into these openings 435a. This door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decorative body 426. In addition, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative part 435b that is recessed in a circular arc shape to avoid the multiple openings 435a and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction.

The right-side upper light guide member 436 has four cylindrical light guide shafts 436a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 436a, and is made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 436a are provided at regular intervals from the top of the right-side reflector 434 to correspond to the four retaining tubes 434b. The light guide shafts 436a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tube 434b. Each light guide shaft 436a penetrates the retaining tube 434b of the right-side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right-side decorative body 435, so that the tip surface is in a state of being flush with the surface of the door frame right-side decorative body 435. This right-side upper light-guiding member 436 can guide light from the first LED 432a on the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 forward through the light-guiding shaft 436a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 435a of the door frame right-side decorative body 435 to be brightly illuminated.

The right side lower light guide member 437 has six cylindrical light guide shafts 437a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shafts 437a, and is made of a transparent material. The six light guide shafts 437a are provided at regular intervals from the bottom of the right side reflector 434 to correspond to the six retaining tubes 434b. The light guide shafts 437a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 434b. Each light guide shaft 437a penetrates the retaining tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, so that the tip surface is in a state of being flush with the surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. This right-side lower light-guiding member 437 can guide light from the first LED 433a on the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433 forward through the light-guiding shaft 437a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 435a of the door frame right-side decorative body 435 to be brightly illuminated.

The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has multiple decorative holes 438a penetrating in the left-right direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a shape whose front end side follows the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is two-color molded with synthetic resins of different colors and translucency (light transmittance). In detail, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the above-mentioned handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular and radial patterns that appear on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71 (a)). When molding the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right-side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right) surface of the door frame right-side left side decorative body 438, and has a decorative part 439a that protrudes to the left and fits into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right-side left side decorative body 438 from the inside (right side). When fitted into the decorative hole 438a, the surface of the decorative part 439a matches the outer (left) surface of the door frame right-side left side decorative body 438 (see Figure 70). This right-side left lens 439 is formed of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the door frame right-side left side decorative body 438. The decorative part 439a of the right-side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector part 431a in the door frame right-side base 431, and can be illuminated and decorated with light from the third LED 432c of the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433.

The right side left lens 439 is also formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative part 439a exposed through the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 looks the same as the radial pattern part molded in two colors in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, making it difficult to distinguish from the part of the decorative part 439a that is illuminated and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has multiple decorative holes 440a that penetrate in the left-right direction in a specific shape (radial pattern shape). The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame also has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical part having a keyhole 132 at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed so that the vertical direction is approximately the same as the overall height of the door frame 3. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame also has a shape that follows the rear end of the right side decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame, from the top end to the cylinder insertion opening 440b.

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). In detail, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71 (a)). When molding the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right lens 441 on the right side is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, and has a decorative part 441a that protrudes to the right and fits into the decorative hole 440a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame from the inside (left side). When fitted into the decorative hole 440a, the surface of the decorative part 441a matches the outer (right) surface of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame (see Figure 70). This right lens 441 on the right side is formed of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. The decorative part 441a of the right lens 441 on the right side of the door frame is located to the right of the reflector part 431a on the right side base 431 of the door frame, and can be illuminated and decorated with light from the third LED 432c on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the third LED 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame.

The right lens 441 on the right side is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative part 441a exposed through the decorative hole 440a on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame looks the same as the part with the radial pattern molded in two colors on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, making it difficult to distinguish from the part of the decorative part 441a that is illuminated and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In this embodiment, the door frame right side unit 430 has the circular or radial patterned parts on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame formed in the same color as the circular or radial patterned parts on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame, and the outer parts of the circular or radial pattern on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame formed in the same color as the outer parts of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame.

In this embodiment, the portion of the right door frame unit 430 above the vertical center protrudes further forward than the portion of the left door frame unit 420 on the opposite side at the same height. This right door frame unit 430 is formed at approximately the same height as the door frame 3 from its top to its bottom. The upper portion of the right door frame unit 430 is located on the outer right side of the door frame top unit 450.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 430 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 appears to have a cylindrical fluorescent lamp embedded in it.

The door frame right side unit 430 protrudes forward from the top to about half its height, forming a screen. This makes it difficult for players seated in front of the pachinko machine installed adjacent to the right side of the island equipment in the gaming hall to see inside the door window 101a (play area 5a). Therefore, because the door frame right side unit 430 is formed like a screen, it can block the line of sight of nearby players, making it difficult for other players to see the entire play area 5a, and by making it difficult for players to feel like they are being watched by other players, other players can play without feeling embarrassed.

According to the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are provided at a position some distance behind the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435, so that the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread out and is irradiated onto the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435, allowing the door frame right side decorative body 435 to be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

The door frame right side unit 430 also guides (guides) light forward from the first LED 432a on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame and the first LED 433a on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, which are located away from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435 toward the rear, by the light guiding shaft portion 436a of the upper right side light guiding member 436 and the light guiding shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guiding member 437, allowing the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 to emit light in a spot-like manner that is brighter than other areas.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 can illuminate the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and can illuminate and decorate the decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 fitted in the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441 fitted in the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 through the reflector part 431a of the door frame right side base 431. In addition, since it is possible to illuminate and decorate a part of the left and right sides of the screen-shaped door frame right side unit 430 (the parts of the decorative part 439a and the decorative part 441a), it is possible to make the present pachinko machine 1 stand out to other players, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 435 at the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c on the rear side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 illuminate and decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 435 behind the door frame right side decorative body 435. 8 and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame are illuminated, so that the presence of the upper decoration board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decoration board 433 on the right side of the door frame can prevent the light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b from illuminating the left side decoration 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame on the rear side, and from illuminating the right side decoration 435 on the front side of the door frame. This allows the right side decoration 435 of the door frame and the left side decoration 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame on the rear side to be illuminated and decorated completely independently, so that a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that can present a more effective illumination performance to the player.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 has the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, located in the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 432b and second LEDs 433b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with an equal amount of light from the second LEDs 432b and second LEDs 433b on both sides, so that even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portions 436a and 437a are projected from behind onto the door frame right side decorative body 435, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be illuminated in a uniform, planar manner.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 is configured so that the door frame right side decorative body 435 has a decorative part 435b that extends along the center of the left-right width so as to connect the multiple openings 435a. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft parts 436a and 437a are projected onto the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b, the shadows of the light guide shaft parts 436a and 437a can be made less noticeable because the decorative part 435b is located at the location where the shadows are projected, and the appearance of the luminous decoration of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be improved.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the left and right side units 420, 430.

The door frame top unit 450 comprises a door frame top base 451 that is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a top upper cover 452 that is attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides and the upper front surface of the door frame top base 451, a door frame top decorative body 453 that is attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) that connects the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 to the lower end of the door frame top base 451.

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a door frame top central decorative board 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface, a door frame top left decorative board 456 that is attached to the left of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (see Figure 72).

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front of the door frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers (not shown) provided on both the left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers, a box-shaped speaker box in which the top center speaker and the top side speaker are attached diagonally downward and forward, a top lower cover 465 attached to the underside of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speaker, a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end of the front of the door frame top base 451, and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451.

The door frame top base 451 extends left and right with a length that is approximately the same as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top upper cover 452 protrudes forward in a semicircular arc shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is cut out significantly from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by the door frame top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color with translucency. In a plan view, the door frame top decorative body 453 extends left and right in a semicircular arc shape along the front end of the top upper cover 452. The door frame top decorative body 453 is also formed with a semicircular arc shape on the front side so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top central decorative board 455 has multiple LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface, which are full-color LEDs. This door frame top central decorative board 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 455a.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top left decorative board 456 has multiple LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface, which are full-color LEDs. This door frame top left decorative board 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 456a.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top right decorative board 457 has multiple LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface, which are full-color LEDs. This door frame top right decorative board 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 457a.

The pair of top center speakers are spaced apart on the left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers that output sounds such as voice and music over a wide frequency range. The pair of top side speakers are tweeters that output high-frequency sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of a punched metal plate with numerous through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker and top side speakers is emitted forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board is intended to relay the connection between the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, the top center speaker, and the top side speaker and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452, and its front end is engaged with the top upper cover 452 while its rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The door frame top unit 450 is connected so that both the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 sink from the front to a position rearward of the inside of the upper part of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame top unit 450 can also output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 28 and Figure 71. Figure 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame in an opaque state, and (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the outer layer in (a) in a transparent state while leaving the inner layer as it is. As shown in the figures, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically in the center when viewed from the front, which is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160. The door frame 3 has its outer periphery surrounded by the left dish decorative body 271 and right dish decorative body 276 of the dish unit 200, the unit top cover 312 and button body 351 of the performance operation unit 300, the left door frame decorative body 426 of the left door frame side unit 420, the right door frame decorative body 435 of the right door frame unit 430, and the top door frame decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

The left dish decoration 271, right dish decoration 276, left door frame decoration 426, right door frame decoration 435, and top door frame decoration 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, are formed in a semi-tubular shape, allowing the player to see a decoration that looks as if the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the left dish decorative board 273, the right dish decorative board 278, the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320, the upper left door frame decorative board 422 and the lower left door frame decorative board 423, the upper right door frame decorative board 432 and the lower right door frame decorative board 433, the central door frame top decorative board 455, the top left door frame decorative board 456, and the top right door frame decorative board 457 are arranged behind or below the left dish decorative body 271, the right dish decorative body 276, the unit top cover 312, the left door frame decorative body 426, the right door frame decorative body 435, and the top door frame decorative body 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs of these decorative boards, it is possible to illuminate the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a, or to show the player an illuminated performance as light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

A spherical performance operation unit 300 with a diameter larger than the front-to-back distance of the upper tray 201 is attached to the left-right center of the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3. This increases the visual impact of the large spherical performance operation unit 300 being located in the center of the tray unit 200, and makes the performance operation section 301 (the touch operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303) of the performance operation unit 300 stand out.

In addition, in the normal state, the top surface of the button body 351 serving as the performance operation unit 301 is flush with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to form a single sphere, making it difficult for the player to recognize that the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) is operable, and the performance operation unit 300 consisting of a giant sphere makes it possible for the player to recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines, strongly attracting the player's interest and increasing the appeal to the player, making it easier for the player to select this pachinko machine 1 as the machine to play.

In addition, in the dish unit 200, the center (centre) of the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is positioned forward of the apex of the spherical performance operation unit 300, so that the top surface of the performance operation section 301 (the touch operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303) faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, for a player who recognizes that the giant sphere located in the center of the dish unit 200 is the performance operation section 301, the entirety of the performance operation section 301 can be easily seen, making the performance operation section 301 appear larger. In addition, the player can be made to strongly desire to operate the giant spherical presentation operation unit 301, which can heighten the player's anticipation for the execution of a player-participation type presentation in which the player operates the presentation operation unit 301, and when a player-participation type presentation is executed, the player can be made to actively operate the presentation operation unit 301, which can allow the player to enjoy the player-participation type presentation by operating the presentation operation unit 301, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

Next, as shown in Figures 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 in this embodiment has multiple circular and radial patterns on its outer surface. In Figure 71, the door frame right side unit 430 is shown as an example of part of the exterior of the door frame 3.

More specifically, the multiple circular and radial patterns on the exterior surface of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding using two types of synthetic resin with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is two-color molded using two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and the circular and radial patterns are formed by part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface.

For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in Figure 71 (a), if a honeycomb pattern is applied to the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the honeycomb pattern of the inner layer 3a will be visible in the circular pattern areas, and the opaque outer layer 3b will be visible in areas other than the pattern, resulting in an exterior appearance that emphasizes the circular and radial patterns.

In contrast, as shown in Figure 71 (b), if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a becomes visible through the outer layer 3b, and the circular and radial patterns become relatively difficult to see. In other words, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In FIG. 71, the decorative part 441a fitted into the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, which is molded in two colors as part of the exterior, is a part of the right lens 441 on the right side and is a separate member from the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, so even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative part 441a) does not change.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the main components that make up the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, so by appropriately selecting and combining the colors and light transmittance of the materials (synthetic resins) used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, the appearance can be greatly changed without changing the shape.

Therefore, for example, when making minor changes, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed at no cost by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen.

Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b can be changed for each production lot, and pachinko machines 1 from different lots can be shipped to the same gaming hall and installed in the island equipment, giving them a colorful feel and increasing their appeal to players.

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but this is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may also be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, a two-color molded right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is combined with a right lens 441 on the right side to form the exterior, but three-color molding may be used in which the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame and the right lens 441 on the right side are integrally formed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, circular and radial patterns are shown, but this is not limited to this and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

In this way, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the decorative bodies such as the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, which are provided on the outside of the door window 101a through which the play area 5a in the door frame 3 faces forward, are two-color molded (multi-color molded) using two synthetic resins with different light transmittances, and the polka dot decoration is applied by this two-color molding. Therefore, the decorative body is formed into the desired shape and the desired decoration is applied to the decorative body at the same time, so there is no need to form the decorative body into the desired shape and then apply the desired decoration by painting, etc., as with the decorative bodies of conventional pachinko machines, and this eliminates the effort required for decoration and suppresses increases in costs.

In addition, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (outer appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. In detail, when forming a polka dot decoration by two-color molding, if the inner layer 3a constituting the inside of the polka dot circle and the outer layer 3b constituting the outside of the circle are formed with the same color but with different light transmittance, the polka dot circle becomes difficult to see because the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are the same color, and the appearance looks as if the polka dot decoration is not applied. On the other hand, if the inner layer 3a constituting the inside of the polka dot circle is white and the outer layer 3b constituting the outside of the circle is pink, the polka dot circle becomes clearly visible due to the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and the appearance looks like a white polka dot decoration on a pink background. In this way, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used when forming the decorative body, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed, and the cost of changing the appearance can be suppressed.

As described above, when forming the decorative body, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used. Therefore, if the combination of synthetic resins used is changed for each production lot and different lots of this pachinko machine 1 are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a row in an island facility, the island facility can be made to have a colorful feel, which can make a strong impact on players wandering around the game hall, and a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can attract players can be provided.

Furthermore, the handle cover 295, which has decorations molded in two colors from multiple synthetic resins with different light transmittances, the left side base 421 of the door frame, the left side decoration 438 on the right side of the door frame, and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame are provided on the outer side of the door window 101a, which faces forward into the play area 5a of the door frame 3, so that the outside of the door window 101a can be decorated with these decorations to improve its appearance.

In addition, the outer layer 3b of the two-color molded decorative body is made of a synthetic resin with a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, making it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. In comparison, the boundaries of the decoration (polka dot pattern) made up of the inner layer 3a become clearly visible, making the decoration clearly visible.

In addition, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. Therefore, in the initial model, the outer layer 3b has a low light transmittance so that the inner layer 3a cannot be seen through from the outside, and when changing the model, a synthetic resin with a high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through, which can greatly change the way the decoration of the decorative body is viewed, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decorative body.

As described above, the outer layer 3b has a low light transmittance, making it difficult to see the inner layer 3a. Therefore, a pattern (a pattern based on the shape, or a pattern based on painting, printing, sticker application, etc.) is applied to the surface of the inner layer 3a. In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b has a low light transmittance, making it impossible for the pattern of the inner layer 3a to be seen through the outer layer 3b. When a model change is made, a transparent synthetic resin is used for the outer layer 3b, making it possible to make the pattern of the inner layer 3a visible through the outer layer. This allows the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body to be significantly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body, and helps to prevent increases in costs associated with model changes.

Furthermore, the third LED 432c on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the third LED 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame that can emit light are provided on the inside of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, and the inner layer 3a is formed of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the others, so that the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided on the inside of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame are illuminated. This allows the inner layer 3a (polka dot area) of the decorations formed on the surface of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame to be brightly illuminated, and by illuminating the outside of the door window 101a overlooking the play area 5a, it is possible to improve the appearance and allow the player to enjoy the illuminated decorations of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, preventing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be illuminated and decorated by the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c that is irradiated onto the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a, so that the entire left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame can be illuminated and decorated, making the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame look beautiful and creating a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the interest of players.

As described above, the decorations of the left side decoration 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame are formed by two-color molding (multicolor molding) of multiple synthetic resins with different light transmittances, so that the decorations visible when the LEDs (light-emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c are not lit can be made different from the decorations visible when the LEDs are lit, depending on the number of layers to the surface and the difference in light transmittance of the synthetic resins used, and the change in decoration can strongly attract the interest of the player. In more detail, for example, if a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in the part of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, only the part exposed to the surface of the inner layer 3a can be seen when the LEDs are not lit. On the other hand, when the LED is illuminated, the light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion where the hole is formed in the inner layer 3a, so that the shape of the hole in the inner layer 3a is visible on the surface of the outer layer 3b, and the portion exposed on the surface of the inner layer 3a and the portion of the hole are visible, and the decoration is different from when the LED is not illuminated. Alternatively, for example, if the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED is illuminated in yellow, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is illuminated. On the other hand, when the LED is illuminated in green (or white), both the portion of the inner layer 3a and the portion of the outer layer 3b on the surface are illuminated, so that the portion of the decorative body that is illuminated and decorated can be changed depending on the color of the light emitted by the LED. In this way, the decoration of the decorative body can be changed by the illumination of the LED, which strongly attracts the interest of the player and entertains the player. Furthermore, by making the LEDs light up depending on the game status, the changes in the decoration of the ornamental body can suggest to the player the arrival of an opportunity or a change in the hitting operation (for example, "hit to the right"), etc., providing a pachinko machine 1 capable of a variety of presentations.

In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, which are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (play area 5a), have different amounts of protrusion in the front-to-rear direction, so that the impression (appearance) of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front left and the front right can be made to differ. Therefore, even if a player wanders around the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed passes in front of the pachinko machine 1 once, when he approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the other side, the appearance will be different from when he last wandered around, which will attract the interest of the pachinko machine 1. This makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, capable of attracting players wandering around the game hall to choose a pachinko machine 1 to play.

[3-10. LED placement and system on door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 72 and Fig. 73. Fig. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and Fig. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the part of the performance operation unit of the door frame. As shown in Fig. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, which the player rotates to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5. This handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b extending outward from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b, and has an appearance similar to that of a steering wheel of an automobile.

The front side of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 is covered by the handle front lens 185, and a handle decoration board 184 with multiple LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. In addition, a handle cover decoration board 293 with multiple LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface is provided behind the outer circumferential ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

The handle decoration board 184 has a total of 10 LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) mounted in triple concentric circles: one in the center, three at regular intervals around the circumference in the middle, and six at regular intervals around the outer periphery. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle connected by dashed lines in FIG. 72, and two at the top left of the outer periphery, two at the top right of the outer periphery, and two at the bottom of the outer periphery, all connected by dashed lines. These five groups of LEDs 184a are controlled by an LED driver 184b in 15 systems, and each group of LEDs 184a can emit full color light of the appropriate color.

On the other hand, 12 LEDs 293a are arranged in a row on the handle cover decorative board 293 with intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into six groups, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72, with two at the bottom left, two on the left, two at the top left, two at the top right, two on the right, and two at the bottom right. These six groups of LEDs 293a are controlled by an LED driver 293b in 18 systems, and each group of LEDs 293a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

In this way, because the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, the player can see light-emitting effects such as light rotating around the handle 195, light-emitting effects concentrating toward the center of the handle 195, and light-emitting effects spreading toward the outside of the handle 195. In addition, the LEDs 293a of the handle cover decoration board 293 can be used to illuminate and decorate the outside and inside of the handle cover 295.

As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a generally rectangular door window 101a extending vertically in the center when viewed from the front, which is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160. The door frame 3 has the door window 101a surrounded all around by the left dish decorative body 271 and right dish decorative body 276 of the dish unit 200, the performance operation unit 300, the left door frame decorative body 426 of the left door frame unit 420, the right door frame decorative body 435 of the right door frame unit 430, and the top door frame decorative body 453 of the top door frame unit 450.

The left dish decoration 271, right dish decoration 276, left door frame decoration 426, right door frame decoration 435, and top door frame decoration 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, are formed in a semi-tubular shape, allowing the player to see a decoration that looks as if the door window 101a is surrounded almost entirely by fluorescent lights.

As shown in Figure 72, in this door frame 3, the left decorative board 273 behind the left decorative body 271 that surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the right decorative board 278 behind the right decorative body 276, the upper left decorative board 422 and the lower left decorative board 423 behind the left side decorative body 426, the upper right decorative board 432 and the lower right decorative board 433 behind the right side decorative body 435, the central door frame top decorative board 455, the top left decorative board 456 and the top right decorative board 457 behind the top decorative body 453 are arranged facing forward.

In more detail, the left dish decorative board 273 is equipped with four LEDs 273a mounted on the front in a row in the left-right direction, and an LED driver (not shown) for illuminating the LEDs 273a and the LEDs 273a on the right dish decorative board 278 described below. These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a dashed line in Figure 72. These two sets of LEDs 273a are controlled by an LED driver in six systems, and each set of LEDs 273a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The right plate decorative board 278 is equipped with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front in a row running left to right. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by the dashed line in Figure 72. These two sets of LEDs 278a are controlled by the LED driver of the left plate decorative board 273 in six systems, and each set of LEDs 278a can emit light in the full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is equipped with four first LEDs 422a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, eight second LEDs 422b mounted in pairs vertically between the first LEDs 422a, and an LED driver 422c for illuminating the total of 12 first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a on the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 are divided into two sets of the top two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets of the top two, the three from the third to the fifth from the top, and the three from the sixth to the eighth from the top, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. 72. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by an LED driver 422c in 15 systems, and each group of the first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is equipped with six first LEDs 423a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, twelve second LEDs 423b mounted in pairs between the first LEDs 423a, and an LED driver 423c for emitting light from a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b. The first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted on the front. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three groups, two in each group from the top, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. The twelve second LEDs 423b are divided into four groups, three from the first to third from the top, three from the fourth to sixth from the top, three from the seventh to ninth from the top, and three from the tenth to twelfth from the top, as shown by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 72. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled by an LED driver 423c in 21 systems, and the first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b of each group can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is equipped with four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, eight second LEDs 432b mounted on the front surface in a row between the first LEDs 432a, and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. The door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is also equipped with an LED driver 432d for emitting light from a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c, and two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three groups, the top two, the third to fifth three, and the sixth to eighth three, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 72. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two groups, the top two and the remaining two, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 72. The two groups of first LEDs 432a, the three groups of second LEDs 432b, the two groups of third LEDs 432c, and the upper group of the two groups of third LEDs 433c on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame are controlled by the LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and each group of the first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, third LEDs 432c, and third LEDs 433c can emit light in full color in an appropriate color.

The door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is equipped with six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, twelve second LEDs 433b mounted on the front surface in pairs vertically aligned between the first LEDs 433a, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, and an LED driver 433d for illuminating the first LEDs 433a, the second LEDs 433b, and the two lower third LEDs 433c. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three groups, with two in each group starting from the top, as connected by a two-dot chain line in Figure 72. Also, the 12 second LEDs 433b are divided into 4 groups, as shown by dashed lines in FIG. 72, consisting of 3 LEDs from the top, 1st to 3rd, 3 LEDs from the top, 4th to 6th, 3 LEDs from the top, 7th to 9th, and 3 LEDs from the top, 10th to 12th. Furthermore, the 4 rear third LEDs 433c are divided into 2 groups, consisting of the top 2 LEDs and the remaining 2 LEDs, as shown by dashed lines in FIG. 72. The 3 groups of 6 first LEDs 433a, the 4 groups of 12 second LEDs 433b, and the lower group of 2 third LEDs 433c are controlled by the LED driver 433d in 24 systems, and the first LEDs 433a, second LEDs 433b, and third LEDs 433c of each group can emit light in full color in an appropriate color.

In this embodiment, the upper left side decorative board 422 and the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the upper right side decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame provided on the right side of the door window 101a are formed in an asymmetric shape with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as the boundary. In addition, the upper left side decorative board 422 and the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame and the upper right side decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 have different shapes in the front-to-back direction.

The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 and lower left side decorative board 423, and the door frame upper right side decorative board 432 and lower right side decorative board 433 have the same number of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b, and first LEDs 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, second LED 433b mounted on their respective front surfaces, and are arranged symmetrically (the systems connected by dashed lines and double-dashed lines in Figure 72). This makes it easy to create data for the lighting patterns of the LEDs to create light-emitting effects.

The door frame top center decorative board 455 is equipped with six LEDs 455a mounted on the front with spaces between them in the left-right direction, and an LED driver (not shown) for illuminating the LEDs 455a, the LEDs 456a on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LEDs 457a on the door frame top right decorative board 457. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two from the left, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled by the LED driver in nine systems, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 has four LEDs 456a mounted on the front, spaced apart in the left and right directions. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by the dashed line in Figure 72. The two sets of four LEDs 456a are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decorative board 455, and each set of LEDs 456a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 has four LEDs 457a mounted on the front, spaced apart in the left and right directions. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by the dashed line in Figure 72. The two sets of four LEDs 457a are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decorative board 455, and each set of LEDs 457a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

According to the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the light from the first LED 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 432a on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the first LED 433a on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is guided by the light guiding shaft portion 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft portion 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428, the light guiding shaft portion 429a of the lower left side light guiding member 429, the light guiding shaft portion 436a of the upper right side light guiding member 436, and the light guiding shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guiding member 437 to the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame, and is irradiated outward (forward). This allows the player to see a bright, dot-like light emission effect on the front of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435, and the player can be taken aback by the dot-like, sparkling light emission effect that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the left dish decorative board 273, the LED 278a of the right dish decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, the second LED 423b of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, the second LED 432b of the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, the second LED 433b of the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, the LED 455a of the top center decorative board 455 of the door frame, the LED 456a of the top left decorative board 456 of the door frame, and the LED 457a of the top right decorative board 457 of the door frame can be appropriately illuminated to illuminate the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a, or the player can be shown a light-emitting effect as light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In other words, in the door frame 3, the LED system connected by the two-dot chain line in Figure 72 can be used to create a lighting effect that emits spot light on the front of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the LED system connected by the one-dot chain line in Figure 72 can be used to create a lighting effect in which the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit light in a planar manner (surface emission).

In addition, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided by the light guiding shaft portion 427a, the light guiding shaft portion 428a, the light guiding shaft portion 429a, the light guiding shaft portion 436a, and the light guiding shaft portion 437a to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame, and is irradiated forward from there, so that the areas of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be brightly spot-lit with high luminance compared to the general surfaces of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame. In this case, since the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are positioned outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, even if the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435 are illuminated with high brightness, the glare does not make it difficult to see inside the game area 5a as seen through the door window 101a, and the game ball B, performance images, decorations, etc. in the game area 5a can be clearly seen through the door window 101a.

In addition, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are protruded forward from the door window 101a (play area 5a), and the openings 426a and 435a that emit high-intensity spot light are provided at the ridges (on the vertical line connecting the front ends that protrude forward in an arc shape in a plan view) of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 that protrude forward, so the spot light is not irradiated to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot light emitted from the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 is reflected toward the player by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and the inside of the play area 5a behind the door window 101a is not difficult to see, and the high-intensity spot light can attract the attention of other players to this pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, the spot light emitting portion is provided on the left side door frame decoration 426 and the right side door frame decoration 435, which protrude forward outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3, so that the spot light emitting portion is located at approximately the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the player will not block the spot light because the spot light emitting portion is located outside the player. As a result, when the left side door frame decoration 426 and the right side door frame decoration 435 are made to emit spot light, the high-brightness spot light is visible to other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, so the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, which can strongly attract the interest of players, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing, capable of attracting players who are wandering around the game hall to choose a pachinko machine to play.

It is preferable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) on both sides of the spot LED (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for spot-illuminating the front of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 belong to the same system. As a result, the surface LEDs on both sides of the light guide pin (light guide shaft 427a, light guide shaft 428a, light guide shaft 429a, light guide shaft 436a, and light guide shaft 437a) that guides the light of the spot LEDs are in the same lighting state, so that the same amount of light is irradiated from both sides of the light guide pin at the same time, making it even more difficult to see the shadow of the light guide pin on the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the touch operation section 302 in the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, and is equipped with a circular performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 with 31 LEDs 320a mounted on the upper surface. This performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is equipped with two LED drivers for illuminating the 31 LEDs 320a. The performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is divided into two parts, a front decorative board 321 and a rear decorative board 322.

Eighteen of the 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decorative board 321 of the outer decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit. Of the 18 LEDs 320a on the front decorative board 321, six are spaced apart on a circumference close to the inner circumference, three are spaced apart on a circumference midway between the inner and outer circumferences, and the remaining nine are spaced apart on a circumference close to the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decorative board 322 of the outer decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit. Of the 13 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative board 322, four are provided with twos spaced apart near both ends of the arc on a circumference close to the inner circumference, three are provided with twos spaced apart on a circumference midway between the inner and outer circumferences, and the remaining six are provided with threes spaced apart near both ends of the arc on a circumference close to the outer circumference.

The 18 LEDs 320a on the front decorative board 321 are divided into a total of nine groups, as shown by the dashed lines in Fig. 73: six on the inner circumference are divided into three groups of two in the circumferential direction, three on the middle circumference are divided into three groups of one each, and nine on the outer circumference are divided into three groups of three in the circumferential direction. The 18 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative board 322 are divided into a total of seven groups, as shown by the dashed lines in Fig. 73: four on the inner circumference are divided into two groups of two near both ends, three on the middle circumference are divided into three groups of one each, and nine on the outer circumference are divided into two groups of three near both ends. In other words, in the performance operation unit outer circumference decorative board 320, the 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 groups. These 16 groups of LEDs 320a are controlled by two LED drivers in 48 systems, and each group of LEDs 320a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

With this decorative board 320 around the outer periphery of the effect operation unit, the 31 LEDs 320a (48 systems) can be appropriately illuminated to show the player light-emitting effects such as rotating light in the effect operation unit 301, light-emitting effects where light is concentrated in the center, and light-emitting effects where light spreads outward.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided on the outside of one side and the other side of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, which extend up and down along the door window 101a so that the amount of protrusion in the front-to-rear direction differs from each other. Behind each of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, there is a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted, a door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted, and A door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a number of first LEDs 432a and second LEDs 432b are mounted, and a door frame right side lower decorative board 433 on which a number of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b are mounted are provided. In addition, a light guide shaft portion 427a of a left side upper light guide member 427, a light guide shaft portion 428a of a left side middle light guide member 428, a light guide shaft portion 429a of a left side lower light guide member 429, and a light guide shaft portion 436 of a right side upper light guide member 436 are provided, which guide the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 and irradiate it forward. Since the first LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the left side upper decorative board 422, the left side lower decorative board 423, the right side upper decorative board 432, and the right side lower decorative board 433 are provided, the left side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435 can be illuminated in a planar manner (surface illumination) by illuminating the first LED 422a, the first LED 422b, and the second LED 422c of the left side upper decorative board 422, the left side lower decorative board 423, the right side upper decorative board 432, and the right side lower decorative board 433. 3a, when the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a are illuminated, the light irradiated forward is guided by the columnar light guiding shaft 427a, light guiding shaft 428a, light guiding shaft 429a, light guiding shaft 436a, and light guiding shaft 437a to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, and then radiated forward from their front ends (front end faces), allowing the areas corresponding to the tips of the light guiding shaft 427a, light guiding shaft 428a, light guiding shaft 429a, light guiding shaft 436a, and light guiding shaft 437a on the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to be illuminated in a dot-like manner (spot illumination).

Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame which are provided outside the play area 5a (door window 101a) can be illuminated. The entire right side decorative body 435 can be decorated with a surface-like light, parts of the left side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435 can be decorated with point-like light, or the entire left side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435 can be decorated with a surface-like light while parts of them can be decorated with point-like light, allowing players to see a variety of light-emitting effects, preventing players from getting bored and keeping them entertained, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In this case, the system in which the multiple first LEDs 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, and second LED 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are separated is symmetrical to the system in which the multiple first LEDs 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are separated, and the multiple first LEDs 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a and the multiple second LEDs 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b are in different systems, so that the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b on the door frame left side decorative body 426 side and the first LED 432a on the door frame right side decorative body 435 side are in different systems. When creating data for the lighting patterns of D432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b, for example, it is possible to reuse data for the left side door frame decoration 426 as data for the right side door frame decoration 435, or to make the data flow similar for the left side door frame decoration 426 and the right side door frame decoration 435. This makes it possible to simplify the work required to create lighting pattern data, and makes it easier to build more complex lighting pattern data (with the same creation time). This allows players to see a variety of lighting patterns and a variety of lighting effects with high performance effects, and provides a pachinko machine 1 that can provide sufficient performance effects for the lighting effects in the left side door frame decoration 426 and the right side door frame decoration 435 on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a.

In addition, the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b arranged between the first LED 422a, 423a, 432a, and 433a are in the same system, so that the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b arranged to sandwich the first LED 422a, 423a, 432a, and 433a (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, light guide shaft portion 437a) are always lit at the same time, and therefore the light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 436a, light guide shaft portion 437a, light guide shaft portion 436 ... By irradiating light from both sides of the light axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a, the shadows of the light guide axis portion 427a, the light guide axis portion 428a, the light guide axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a caused by the light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b become lighter and less visible, making it possible to make the shadows of the light guide axis portion 427a, the light guide axis portion 428a, the light guide axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 less visible, allowing the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to be illuminated and decorated in a uniform, planar manner.

The left door frame decoration 426 and the right door frame decoration 435, which are illuminated and decorated in a surface by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, can illuminate and decorate the areas corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a in a point-like manner by the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a. This allows players to see illumination effects that could not be seen in previous pachinko machines, such as surface illumination and partial point illumination, and can strongly attract the interest of players with illumination effects that emit bright point illumination, and can startle players with illumination effects that emit bright point illumination, which have not been seen in previous pachinko machines. This makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 and lower left side decorative board 423 on one side (left side) in the left-right direction and the door frame upper right side decorative board 432 and lower right side decorative board 433 on the other side (right side) are asymmetrical with respect to each other, so that the door frame upper left side decorative board 422, the door frame lower left side decorative board 423, the door frame upper right side decorative board 432, and the door frame lower right side decorative board 433 can be distinguished at a glance, which makes it possible to avoid making mistakes when assembling the door frame upper left side decorative board 422, the door frame lower left side decorative board 423, the door frame upper right side decorative board 432, and the door frame lower right side decorative board 433 during the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1, thereby improving the ease of assembly and suppressing increases in costs.

[3-11. Identification of decorative substrate]
Next, the identification of various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted in this pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Fig. 74, using the door frame 3 as an example. Fig. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative board provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the following boards provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 are described in detail, taking as examples the left dish decorative board 273, the right dish decorative board 278, the upper left door frame decorative board 422, the lower left door frame decorative board 423, the upper right door frame decorative board 432, the lower right door frame decorative board 433, the top center door frame decorative board 455, the top left door frame decorative board 456, and the top right door frame decorative board 457.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a white board is used for the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted, and the non-white LED drivers and connection connectors that are mounted on the decorative board are mounted on the rear side of the board. This allows the light from the LEDs mounted on the front side of the decorative board to be reflected forward, making the front decorations more brightly illuminated and decorative, while also making the decorative board less noticeable from the front (player side).

The white decorative board may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the board material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative boards, a different identification section 7 is provided on the rear surface of each decorative board to make it easy to identify each one (see Figure 74). This identification section 7 has a character identification section 7a with characters such as kanji, kana, alphabet, symbols, numbers, model numbers, etc., and a color identification section 7b with different colors (shown in Figure 74 with shading of different shades).

In more detail, the character identification section 7a has the characters "lower left" on the left side decorative board 273, "lower right" on the right side decorative board 278, "upper left" on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, "lower left" on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, "upper right" on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, "lower right" on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, "upper middle" on the top center decorative board 455 of the door frame, "upper left" on the top left decorative board 456 of the door frame, and "upper right" on the top right decorative board 457 of the door frame.

The color identification portion 7b is a different color for each decorative board and is applied across almost the entire front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification portion 7b is applied partially, not across the entire rear surface, so as not to interfere with the soldering of LEDs and other components mounted on the decorative board.

The identification portion 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silkscreen printing), attaching a sticker, applying paint, etc.

In the above, the decorative board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 has been described as an example, but identification units 7 such as character identification unit 7a and color identification unit 7b may also be provided on various decorative boards provided on the handle unit 180, the performance operation unit 300, the game board 5, etc.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the identification unit 7 is shown to have both the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b, but this is not limited to this, and it may be the character identification unit 7a only, or the color identification unit 7b only.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted is provided with an identification section 7 (character identification section 7a and color identification section 7b), so decorative boards of similar shapes can be easily distinguished, preventing the wrong decorative board from being installed during assembly work and improving the workability of assembly.

In addition, with the pachinko machine 1, the identification unit 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, so the front side of the decorative board can be made as white as possible, and the light from the LEDs mounted on the front side of the decorative board can be reflected forward by the front side of the decorative board, allowing the decorative objects in front to be more brightly illuminated and decorated, while also making the decorative board less noticeable from the front (player's side), improving its appearance.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the color identification portion 7b as the identification portion 7 is applied over almost the entire decorative board, so that it is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative board is the desired one (desired color) just by looking at a part of the decorative board. Therefore, even if multiple types of decorative boards are overlapping during assembly, etc., the desired decorative board can be easily found as long as a part of the decorative board is visible, and the effort required for assembly can be simplified.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, the color of the color identification portion 7b is different for each decorative board, so that when preparing the decorative boards required for one pachinko machine 1 during assembly, if there is a decorative board with the same color identification portion 7b, it is easy to recognize that the same decorative board has been prepared in duplicate. Or, if there is not enough color in the color identification portion 7b of the prepared decorative board, it is easy to recognize that there is a decorative board that has not been prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative boards required for the assembly of the pachinko machine 1, it is easy to recognize that an excess decorative board has been prepared or that the prepared decorative board is insufficient, so that it is possible to reliably prepare only the necessary amount of decorative boards, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to set up during assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed smoothly, and the time required for assembly can be shortened to suppress an increase in costs.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, the rear surface of the decorative board is provided with a character identification section 7a as an identification section 7 for distinguishing it from other boards, so that an operator can easily tell which part the decorative board belongs to by reading the characters on the character identification section 7a, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the front and rear of each decorative board are white, and an identification part 7 is provided on the rear, so that even if the decorative body provided in front of the decorative board is highly transparent, the decorative board is less noticeable from the front (player's side), improving the appearance of the decorative body, and the white front of the decorative board makes it possible to reflect the light from the LED forward, allowing the decorative body to emit light more brightly, and the highly effective light-emitting effect entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, functional components such as LED drivers are provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate and are not visible from the front (player side), which makes it possible to avoid the poor appearance caused by the functional components being visible through the decorative body, and improves the appearance of the decorative body (gaming machine). Furthermore, since the functional components are not visible by being provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, there is no need to color the functional components white (or yellow) so that they are not noticeable, and the functional components can be used as is, which eliminates the effort of coloring the functional components and suppresses increases in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

[3-12. Function and effect of door frame]
According to this embodiment, the switching unit 394 is used to switch between a contact detection body 393 provided at a desired location where it is desired to detect the approach or contact of a player and the contact detection sensor main body 392, for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different locations in the pachinko machine 1. When a player approaches or touches the contact detection body 393 at the desired location, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes, and the change in capacitance can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393. As a result, the approach or contact of the player to the desired location can be detected, and predetermined control can be executed by control means such as the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control unit 1511, and performance display control unit 1512 in response to detection by the contact detection sensor main body 392. On the other hand, when the switching unit 394 connects the contact detection body 393 at the desired location to the contact detection sensor main body 392, the connection between the contact detection body 393 at other locations and the contact detection sensor main body 392 is cut off. Therefore, even if the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 at other locations changes when the player approaches or touches the other locations, the change in capacitance of the contact detection body 393 is not detected because the contact detection body 393 has been cut off by the switching unit 394, and only the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 at the desired location can be reliably detected, preventing erroneous detection.

In this way, the contact detector 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 for multiple contact detectors 393 installed at different positions, so that it is possible to detect the capacitance of multiple contact detectors 393 with one contact detection sensor main body 392, and the number of channels required for detecting the approach or contact of the player in the control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the performance display control unit 1512 can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for performance can be relatively increased. Therefore, since it is possible to control more performance means (for example, movable decorations, luminous decorations, performance display devices, etc.) by the control means, a more diverse performance can be presented to the player by increasing the number of performance means, making it less likely for the player to get bored and allowing the player to fully enjoy the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, by providing contact detectors 393 at multiple locations on the pachinko machine 1 that should not be touched by the player, and by connecting the contact detectors 393 provided at the desired locations to the contact detection sensor body 392 by a switching unit 394 depending on the game status, it is possible to detect the player's approach to or contact with the desired location and to cause the control means, such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the performance display control unit 1512, to issue a specified warning or alarm. This makes it possible to monitor a wide area of the pachinko machine 1 with one contact detection sensor body 392 while relatively increasing the number of channels that can be used for performance, and to achieve the same effect as described above.

In addition, since the capacitance of multiple contact detectors 393 is detected by one contact detection sensor body 392, each contact detector 393 and the contact detection sensor body 392 are located apart, so the sensor body containing electronic components such as a sensor IC and output circuit can be located in a location that is difficult for players to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing its appeal to players.

Furthermore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with connection terminals for electrically connecting multiple contact detection bodies 393, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392, which simplifies the process of assembling the pachinko machine 1 and suppresses any increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal in advance, and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be connected simply by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392. This reduces the number of parts compared to when a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detection body 393 via the conductive member, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and eliminating the need to design the layout of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detection body 393. This increases the freedom of arrangement of the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, a switching unit 394 is provided for switching the contact detector 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the contact detector 393 to be detected can be selected by the switching unit 394. For example, when a player-participation type presentation is performed in which multiple contact detectors 393 are distributed and the multiple distributed contact detectors 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the switching unit 394 switches the contact detector 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 at the timing when the player touches the contact detectors 393 in order, so that it is possible to detect whether the player touched the contact detectors 393 in the correct order. This makes it possible to realize a highly game-like player-participation type presentation with a single contact detection sensor main body 392, and a pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to players can be provided.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the presentation operation unit 300 in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, when the player's fingers approach or come into contact with the button body 351 in the presentation operation unit 350 that can be operated by the player by pressing it, the player approaches the contact detector 352 made of a punched metal plate whose player side is covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detector 352 changes. Since the capacitance of this contact detector 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, it is possible to detect the change in capacitance of the contact detector 352, and therefore it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350) via the contact detector 352.

In this way, when the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350 is detected using the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, a predetermined performance is output to the player side through the contact detector 352 and the button main body 351 by the performance means such as the button outer decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inner decorative board 364, and the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the player can be entertained by the performance and the decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. At this time, when the player approaches or contacts the performance operation unit 350, a predetermined performance is output, so that the performance operation unit 350 can function as a non-contact operation unit or a contact operation unit by the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. Furthermore, because the presentation operation unit 350, which functions as a non-contact operation unit and a contact operation unit, can be pressed by the player when it is extended, a variety of presentation operations such as non-contact operations, contact operations, and pressing operations can be performed with the presentation operation unit 350, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 with an appearance that differs from conventional pachinko machines equipped with operation buttons that can only be pressed, and by differentiating it from other pachinko machines, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, a predetermined effect is output to the player in response to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detector 352 by the contact sensor main body 358. Since the capacitance differs depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button main body 351) and the player, it is possible to set multiple capacitance thresholds and output different effects for each threshold. Therefore, it is possible to detect the time (distance) from when the player approaches the button main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) to when the player makes contact in multiple stages, and by outputting effects according to each stage, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it less likely for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is located away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor main body 358, which has electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit, can be located in a part of the performance operation unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing its appeal to players.

In addition, as described above, the operation unit can perform a variety of presentation operations such as non-contact operations, contact operations, and pressing operations. By implementing a player-participation type presentation that allows the player to operate the presentation, it is possible to allow the player to enjoy a variety of presentation operations, making it less likely for the player to become bored, and allowing the player to enjoy the player-participation type presentation, which can prevent the player's interest in the game from declining.

Furthermore, since the contact detector 352, whose capacitance is detected by the contact sensor main body 358, is a punched metal made of a metal plate with multiple holes formed therein, the multiple holes can reduce the capacitance of the contact detector 352 when the player is not approaching or touching the button main body 351, thereby preventing erroneous detection by the contact sensor main body 358. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the multiple holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detector 352 while suppressing an increase in capacitance, and therefore the range in which the contact detector 352 detects the approach or contact of the player to the button main body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be widened. This allows the contact detector 352 to be enlarged to widen the detection range, so if the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) that the player can press is enlarged as in the above embodiment, and the contact detector 352 is made the same size as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, when the player is required to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) due to the execution of a player-participation type performance, the contact detector 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, so the movement distance for the player's fingers to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 is shortened, and the performance operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, making it difficult to miss the operation timing in the player-participation type performance and allowing the player to reliably participate in the player-participation type performance, and the performance can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, because the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, the light emission effects from the LEDs 364a of the button decorative board 364, which acts as an effect means and is provided on the opposite side of the contact detector 352 from the player side, can be output to the player side through multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352, ensuring that the player can enjoy the light emission effects and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the touch detector 352 is provided on the presentation operation unit 350 (button body 351) that can be operated by pressing, the presentation operation unit 350 can be reinforced by the touch detector 352 made of punched metal, which is a metal plate with a certain degree of strength and rigidity, and the presentation operation unit 350 is less likely to deform or break even if the player presses or hits the presentation operation unit 350 (button body 351) hard when performing a pressing operation. Therefore, since the touch detector 352 makes it difficult to damage the presentation operation unit 350, the player can press the presentation operation unit 350 without any worries, and the player can enjoy the player-participation type presentation in which the presentation operation unit 350 is operated, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, and compared to a case in which the contact detector 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate of the same thickness, the thickness of the contact detector 352 can be made thinner. This makes it easier to secure space for the contact detector 352, makes it easier to install the contact detector 352, and increases the degree of freedom in design, making it easier to design a pachinko machine 1 that is more appealing to players.

In addition, because the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, the plate thickness is consistent compared to expanded metal, making it easy to process the contact detector 352 into a desired three-dimensional shape by pressing. This makes it easier to make the contact detector 352 into an optimal shape for detecting the player's approach to or contact with the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350), and ensures the realization of the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, in the performance operation unit 350, the button body 351 covers the player side of the contact detector 352, so the button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact detector 352, which is made of punched metal with multiple holes formed therein. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when touching the contact detector 352 with multiple holes formed therein, and allows the button body 351 to be operated without feeling strange in player participation performances that use the button body 351 as the operation unit, allowing the player to enjoy the performance and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the player side of the contact detector 352 made of punched metal is covered by the button body 351, the multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352 do not become contaminated with dust, food, drink, or other contaminants, making cleaning much easier and reducing the burden on the gaming hall that installs the pachinko machine 1 as an easy-to-clean pachinko machine 1.

In addition, presentation means such as the button outer decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360, button inner decorative board 364, and protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 are provided on the opposite side of the contact detector 352 from the player side, making it possible to output a specified presentation to the player side through the contact detector 352 and the button body 351.When the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350), a specified presentation is output through the multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352 and the transparent button body 351, so that the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the presentation operation unit 350, and the presentation output through (via) the presentation operation unit 350 can be enjoyed reliably, preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the presentation means such as the button outer decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360, button inner decorative board 364, and protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detector 352 from the player side, so that the presentation means is covered by the contact detector 352, and the contact detector 352 (presentation operation unit 350) and presentation means can be compactly arranged. This makes it easier to arrange the presentation operation unit 350 and presentation means that achieve the above-mentioned effects in the desired location on the pachinko machine 1, making it easier to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is appealing and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when a player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) that is provided in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 so as to be movable up and down, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 of the performance operation unit 350 changes, so that the capacitance of the contact detector 352 can be detected by the contact detection sensor body 358 to detect the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350. When the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350, the performance operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360. Therefore, when the performance operation unit 350 protrudes when the player is not in contact with the performance operation unit 350, it abuts (collides) with the player, and when the performance operation unit 350 protrudes when the player is in contact with the performance operation unit 350, a performance by a physical force such as pushing the player can be presented to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make a strong impact on the player with a performance that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines, strongly drawing the player's attention to the performance operation unit 350 and ensuring that the player notices the protrusion of the performance operation unit 350.

When the performance operation unit 350 is protruded, if the lift spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved in the direction (upward) toward the upper end side of the lift spring 365, the compression of the lift spring 365 becomes stronger and the biasing force can be increased, and if it is moved in the direction (downward) away from the upper end side of the lift spring 365, the compression of the lift spring 365 becomes weaker and the biasing force can be reduced. By moving the lift spring lower holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the biasing force of the performance operation unit 350 by the lift spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded with various protruding forces, the variety of performances by physical forces can be increased, the player can be less likely to get bored, and the player can enjoy the performance by the protrusion of the performance operation unit 350, which can suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the thrust force of the presentation operation unit 350 is changed according to the game state, so that when a player approaches or touches the presentation operation unit 350 with a strong force, a strong impact is given to the player, making the player strongly believe that something good is about to happen (for example, the occurrence of a favorable game state that gives the player an advantage), increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the performance operation unit 350 is a pressing operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing, when a player-participation type performance is executed, the player can be made to press the performance operation unit 350, thereby making it possible for the player to participate in the player-participation type performance, and thus making the player enjoy pressing the performance operation unit 350 and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the performance operation unit 350 can be operated by pressing, for a player who places his/her fingers on the performance operation unit 350 (the upper surface of the button body 351) so that he/she can press it at any time, when a player-participation performance is executed in which the performance operation unit 350 is pressed, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the performance operation unit 350 to protrude, allowing the player to quickly recognize the start of the player-participation performance without being notified of the start of the player-participation performance by performance images, sounds, etc., and this increases the player's desire to press the performance operation unit 350, making the player-participation performance even more enjoyable.

Furthermore, because the performance operation unit 350 is protruded by the force of the lifting spring 365 in the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded easily and forcefully compared to a case in which the performance operation unit 350 is protruded using a drive motor, making it easier to achieve the above-mentioned effects.

The contact sensor body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detector 352 to detect the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 varies depending on the distance between the performance operation unit 350 and the player, multiple capacitance thresholds can be set, and the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded with a different protruding force for each threshold. Therefore, the contact sensor body 358 can detect the distance from the approach of the player's fingers to the performance operation unit 350 in multiple stages, and by protruding with a protruding force according to each stage, a more diverse performance can be presented to the player, making it less likely for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350, which is arranged to be movable forward and backward by popping up the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 by executing a player participation type performance, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 that the player touches on the performance operation unit 350 changes. On the other hand, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided away from the contact detector 352 on the performance operation unit 350 detects the capacitance of the contact detector 352, and can capture the change in capacitance of the contact detector 352 due to the approach or contact of the player, so that it can detect the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the player by capacitance. Then, when the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the movement of the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward (pressing) by the player, a predetermined performance is executed by the performance means such as the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inner decorative board 364, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, and the performance display device 1600. In other words, a predetermined performance is executed when the player moves the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward or approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350, so that the player can be entertained by the performance and the decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350, a performance is executed, so that the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) can be made to function like a performance operation unit (non-contact operation unit, contact operation unit). On the other hand, when the player moves the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward (presses), a performance is executed, so that the performance operation unit 350 can be made to function like a performance operation unit (pressing operation unit). As a result, the player can perform a variety of performance operations, so by executing a player-participation type performance that allows the player to operate the performance, it is possible to enjoy a variety of performance operations, making it difficult for the player to become bored, and it is possible to allow the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance, which can suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

The player is detected by the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided near the part of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 that the player touches (below the upper surface 351a). The capacitance of the contact detector 352 varies depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button body 351) and the player, so it is possible to provide multiple capacitance thresholds for executing a predetermined effect and execute a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, it is possible to detect the distance from the approach of the player's fingers to the effect operation unit 350 to contact in multiple stages, so that by presenting effects according to each stage, a wider variety of effects can be presented to the player, making it less likely for the player to get bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, a predetermined effect is executed when the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 detect the player, so that the effect can impart a sense of operation to the effect operation (non-contact operation, contact operation) using the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, allowing the player to enjoy the effect operation even more.

Furthermore, since the device is equipped with a performance operation unit 350 that can be advanced and retreated (pressed) by the player, and a contact detector 352 and a contact detection sensor main body 358 that can detect the player's approach or contact with the performance operation unit 350, it is possible to request the player to perform a variety of operations in a player-participation type performance, such as an operation to advance and retreat the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation) or an operation to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 with a finger (non-contact operation, contact operation). The various operations can increase the player's motivation to participate in the player-participation type performance, making it easier for the player to participate in the player-participation type performance. And, when the player participates in the player-participation type performance, the various operations using the performance operation unit 350, the contact detector 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can prevent the player from getting bored, and can enjoy the player-participation type performance, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the performance operation unit 350 can be locked so that it cannot move forward or backward by engaging the locking portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 in the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, so that the performance operation unit 350 can be prevented from moving or swinging on its own by keeping the performance operation unit 350 unable to move forward or backward using the guide pin 354c and the lifting cam member 371 until a performance is performed that moves the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the player feeling distrustful or uneasy due to the performance operation unit 350 moving or swinging on its own, and to make the performance by the performance operation unit 350 more enjoyable.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 350, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is arranged at a position away from the contact detector 352, so that the contact detection sensor main body 358, which contains electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit, can be arranged in a location that is difficult for the player to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the contact detector 352 for detecting capacitance and the contact sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC and output circuit that detects the capacitance of the contact detector 352 are separate, the shape and material of the contact detector 352 can be selected appropriately regardless of the contact sensor main body 358. This allows the contact detector 352 to be made to optimally correspond to the shape, form, and specifications of the button main body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, and ensures the realization of a pachinko machine 1 that provides the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, when a player approaches or touches the button body 351 or surface member 396 covering the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398 with his/her fingers, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 provided between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398 changes, and in response to this change, a predetermined performance is executed in which light is irradiated toward the player by the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398. Therefore, the light irradiated toward the player can strongly attract the player's attention to the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398, and the executed performance can entertain the player. In this case, the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 provided between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the outer button decorative substrate 355 or inner button decorative substrate 364 or decorative body 398 is formed to conform to the decorative portion provided on the button body 351 or surface member 396, giving the player the illusion that the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is part of the decorative portion, making it impossible for the player to recognize that the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is intended to detect the player.

In this way, since the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 cannot be recognized by the player, even if the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 blocks part of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decoration 398 (effect), the player will not be bothered by the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397, and even if the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is placed in front of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decoration 398, the presence of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 will not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the effect of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decoration 398 can be shown to the player in good condition, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like to the button body 351 or surface member 396 by the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397, an effect is executed in which light is irradiated towards the player from the button outer decorative substrate 355, button inner decorative substrate 364 or decorative body 398, which are covered by the button body 351 or surface member 396. This makes it possible to make the button body 351 or surface member 396 function like the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), and gives the player the feeling of operating through light. Therefore, for example, when a player participation type performance is executed, the player's fingers or the like approach or contact the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and when the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 detects the approach or contact of the fingers or the like, a performance is executed by the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398, allowing the player to participate in the player participation type performance and to enjoy the player participation type performance.

Furthermore, since the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 detects the player's approach to or contact with the button body 351 or surface member 396, it is possible to vary the presentation provided by the button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364, or decoration 398 depending on the distance between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the player's fingers, etc., so that the presentation provided by the button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364, or decoration 398 can be changed according to the movement (position) of the player's fingers, etc., allowing the player to see a more diverse presentation, which makes it less likely for the player to become bored, and prevents the player's interest from declining.

In addition, the change in capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is detected, and when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 or surface member 396, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 located between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364, or decorative body 398 changes, so that the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc. to the button body 351 or surface member 396 can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 that provides the above-mentioned effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, since the change in capacitance is detected by the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 can be made of a conductive material. For example, if the contact detector 397 is made of a metal vapor deposition film, the vapor deposition film can be made thin to make it transparent, and if the vapor deposition film is made thick to give it a metallic luster, it can be made to look like part of the decoration. Alternatively, if the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 are made of punching metal with a decorative shape such as a star or heart shape, the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 can be made to look like part of the decoration. In this way, the contact detector 352, the contact detector 395, and the contact detector 397 can be made unrecognizable to the player, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the capacitance changes when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the transparent button body 351 covering the upper side (surface side), and this change causes the contact detector 395 etc. (including contact detector 352, left contact detector 390L, right contact detector 390R, contact detector 393, contact detector 397, etc.) to present a predetermined performance by the performance presentation means such as the button outer decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, button inner decorative board 364, protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and performance display device 1600, to be formed into a predetermined outer peripheral shape with a design, so that the contact detector 395 itself can decorate the pachinko machine 1, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that looks good and has a high appeal to players. In addition, the front side of the contact detector 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, and a predetermined effect is presented by the effect presenting means through the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc. in response to a change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 etc. due to the approach of the player's finger etc. to the contact detector 395, so that the button body 351 can function as the effect operation unit 301. And, since the contact detector 395 etc. visible through the button body 351 have design, the effect operation unit 301 appears to have design, so that the pachinko machine 1 can have a strong impact on the player as the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the effect operation unit 301 not found in previous pachinko machines, and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Also, as mentioned above, the design of the contact detector 395 etc. can make a strong impact on the player, which can make the player take a strong interest in the contact detector 395 etc. (button body 351) and heighten the player's anticipation for operating the button body 351 (performance operation unit 301). In addition, when a player-participation performance in which the player operates the button body 351 is executed, the player can enjoy operating the button body 351, and the player's interest can be prevented from declining.

In addition, the contact detector 395, etc., which detects the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., to the button body 351, is formed into an outer circumferential shape with a design, so that at first glance, some players may not notice the presence of the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) for presenting a performance by the performance presentation means. Therefore, when a player-participation type performance in which the performance operation unit 301 is operated is executed, the player is prompted to approach or touch the button body 351, and it is possible to make the player realize for the first time that the button body 351 is the performance operation unit 301 by the contact detector 395, etc., which gives the player an element of surprise and makes the player-participation type performance more enjoyable. Alternatively, when a player-participation type effect is executed by operating the effect operation unit 301, if the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with a finger or the like without knowing that it is the effect operation unit 301, the capacitance of the contact detector 395, etc. changes and an effect is presented by the effect presentation means, which can surprise the player and entertain the player with the presented effect, preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the effects are presented by the effect presentation means in response to changes in capacitance in the contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to easily detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395, etc., and it is easy to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects. Also, because the effects are presented in response to changes in capacitance in the contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to detect the time (distance) from when the player's fingers, etc., approach to the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395, etc., to when they make contact in multiple stages, so by presenting effects according to each stage, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it less likely for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, because the outer periphery of the contact detector 395, etc. is formed into a predetermined shape, even if inorganic materials such as punched metal, expanded metal, or wire mesh are used as the conductive contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to impart design to the contact detector 395, etc., prevent the contact detector 395, etc. from deteriorating the appearance, and make the contact detector 395, etc. stand out, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, because the outer periphery of the contact detector 395 and the like is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a design that has a unique design without forming the contact detector 395 and the like into a three-dimensional shape. Therefore, the contact detector 395 and the like can be formed into a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the manufacturing costs of the contact detector 395 and the like can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink does not adhere to the contact detector 395, etc., and the effort required for cleaning can be reduced. In more detail, since the contact detector 395, etc. is made of uneven material such as punched metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the unevenness, and cleaning the dirt is time-consuming. However, since the surface side of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the button body 351, even if the contact detector 395, etc. is made of uneven material such as punched metal, the button body 351 can prevent dirt from adhering, and the easy cleaning reduces the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, the surface side of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 395, etc. Therefore, if a material that enhances the design, such as a metal deposition film or foil stamping, is used as the contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to prevent early wear due to the player's touch, and the durability of the contact detector 395, etc. can be increased.

Furthermore, the surface side of the contact detector 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, and as described above, the transparent button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact detector 395 etc., making it possible to use contact detectors 395 etc. that are unpleasant to the touch or that may cause discomfort to the player. This increases the freedom in the materials used for the contact detector 395 etc., and allows the contact detector 395 etc. to be formed from materials suited to needs.

In addition, when the capacitance of the contact detector 395 etc. is changed by bringing the player's finger etc. close to or into contact with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 etc., a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc., and the effect presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc. allows the player to intuitively recognize that the player has brought the finger etc. close to or into contact with the button body 351, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the finger etc.

In addition, effects are presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, etc., and effects presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, etc. are executed when the player's fingers, etc. approach or touch the button body 351, which covers the contact detector 395, etc., so that the button body 351 can function like a touch operation unit, and the presented effects can give the player a sense of operation, allowing the player to enjoy operations using the button body 351 (player-participation effects).

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, which is capable of multiple operations, the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with his/her fingers, etc., and when the contact detector 352 (contact detection sensor body 358) detects the entry of the fingers, etc. into the detection area, a light emission effect is executed in which light is irradiated to the player through the button body 351 by the emission of the multiple LEDs 355a on the button outer decorative board 355 and the multiple LEDs 364a on the button inner decorative board 364, an effect in which the player's fingers, etc. that are in contact through (via) the button body 351 by the vibration motor 356, an effect in which the button body 351 is protruded upward by the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, and an effect in which an impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. are applied to the player through (via) the button body 351, etc. are executed, so that the button body 351 can function as the contact operation unit 302, and the player can be entertained. At this time, effects such as light, vibration, impact, pushing up, and wind pressure are given to the player through the button body 351, so that the effects can surprise and entertain the player, increasing the player's motivation to operate the button body 351. Then, when the player's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303 by appropriately moving the fingers or the like to press the button body 351 downward, so that the player can enjoy a variety of performance operations through the contact operation by the contact detector 352 detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like and the pressing operation of the button body 351, making it difficult for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

The detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., is composed of the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detector 352 is provided near the back surface of the top surface 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358, which is provided with a detection circuit, is placed on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353, away from the top surface 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detector 352 can detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., on the top surface 351a of the button main body 351, and the same effect as above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., is configured with the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358, which is provided with a detection circuit, can be positioned on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the top surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button main body 351, so that the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be positioned in an inconspicuous location, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the back (bottom) of the button body 351 is provided with an outer button decorative board 355, an inner button decorative board 364, and a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, which makes it easier for the player to experience effects such as light, vibration, impact, upward pressure, and wind pressure through the button body 351, achieving the same effects as those described above.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 81. Figure 75 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and Figure 76 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. Figure 77 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the right front, Figure 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the left front, and Figure 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. Figure 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members as seen from the front, and Figure 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members as seen from the rear.

The main frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a play area 5a where a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and is used to pay out the game ball B to the player and to eject the game balls B used in the game to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is removably stored inside from the front. The main frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3 is attached so that the open front side can be closed.

The main body frame 4 is provided with a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, a main body frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached, and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 attached to the lower end of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached.

The main frame 4 also includes a main frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, a ball launching device 540 attached to the lower front side of the main frame base unit 500 for shooting game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides of the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, a payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the payout base unit 550 for paying out game balls B to the player, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear side of the main frame base unit 500, a back cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 so as to be openable and closable, and covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 attached to the right side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, for locking the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

The main frame base unit 500 includes a main frame base 501 that is formed into a vertically extending rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, a connection cable guide member 502 that guides a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side, and a game board lock member 505 that detachably holds the game board 5.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551, a box-shaped tank that extends left and right and is open upward, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extends leftward in a groove-like shape that is open upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left when viewed from the front, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, a payout device 580 that pays out the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or the board unit 620.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main frame base 501, a number of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the door frame 3, a number of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 up and down, a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hooks 652 downward and the outer frame hooks 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hooks 653 downward.

[4-1. Main frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 83. Figure 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame when the door frame is opened relative to the main body frame. Figure 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened or closed relative to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear portion inserted into the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main frame base unit 500 is equipped with a main frame base 501 that is formed into a vertically extending rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, a connection cable guide member 502 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main frame base 501 and guides the connection cable 503, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower front surface of the main frame base 501 around an axis that extends forward and backward and that detachably holds the game board 5.

The main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 is equipped with a base main body 501a that is formed into a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a game board insertion opening 501b that penetrates the base main body 501a from a position slightly below the top end to a height of about 3/4 of the total height and through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front, a game board placement section 501c that forms the bottom edge of the game board insertion opening 501b and on which the game board 5 is placed, and a game board restriction section 501d that protrudes upward from the left-right center of the game board placement section 501c and restricts the left-right and rearward movement of the bottom end of the game board 5.

The main frame base 501 also has a launcher attachment section 501e, which is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board placement section 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, for attaching the ball launcher 540; a cylinder insertion opening 501f, which penetrates the launcher attachment section 501e from front to back on the right side of the game board placement section 501e when viewed from front, through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted; a circular speaker opening 501g, which penetrates the game board placement section 501c from front to back on the lower left side of the game board placement section 501c when viewed from front, and which allows the main frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the board unit 620 to face forward; a cable attachment recess 501h, which is recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extends left and right, and in which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i, which penetrates the cable attachment recess 501h from front to front at the upper right end when viewed from front.

The main body frame base 501 further includes a plate-like extension extending rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a rear extension portion 501j to the rear end of which the rear cover 640 is rotatably attached, and an upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l are formed near both the upper and lower ends of the left end when viewed from the front on the rear surface of the base main body 501a, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520.

In addition, the main frame base 501 is provided with a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, which is attached to the front surface of the base body 501a below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) relative to the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch is released and the opening of the door frame 3 can be detected. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. In addition, the main frame base 501 is provided with a main frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, which is attached to the rear surface of the base body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch is attached. When the main frame 4 is opened (opened) relative to the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch is released and the opening of the main frame 4 can be detected. The detection signal from the main frame open switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633.

A game board locking member 505 is attached to the main frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward, below the game board placement portion 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board locking member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b, thereby making it possible to attach and detach the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position below the portion where the game board locking member 505 is attached, to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed to a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached to it so that it can rotate around an axis that extends vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame base unit 500 comprises a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, a pair of band-shaped frame pieces 502b that protrude forward from both the upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extend further to the right than the right end of the guide body 502a, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a number of through holes 502d that penetrate the guide body 502a from front to back at both the upper and lower ends and are arranged in a row in the left and right direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a left-right length that is slightly shorter than the left-right length of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and is formed to a size that can be accommodated within the cable mounting recess 501h. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that the mounting shaft 502c can rotate around an axis that extends vertically near the right end within the cable mounting recess 501h. This allows the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate (hinge rotate) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is made up of multiple wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the opposite end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3.

Next, the effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 etc., the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the main frame base 501 so that its end (right end) opposite the side (left side) where the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction is rotatable around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is attached to the guide body 502a by being fastened together with the guide body 502a by a cable tie 504 inserted through a pair of through holes 502d at the same left-right position out of the multiple through holes 502d formed on both the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, with the side connected to the interface board 635 abutting against the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is located behind the main relay board 104 and the sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and closed against the main frame 4 (see FIG. 83(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, then bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and extends into the door frame relay board cover 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is positioned to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hingedly rotated so as to open relative to the main frame 4, the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 that is attached to the door frame 3, and the connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the attachment shaft 502c at the right end. In this case, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is formed to satisfy α/2 ≧ β (preferably α/3 ≧ β) (see FIG. 83(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but once the opening angle α exceeds a certain value (e.g., approximately 90 degrees), the increase stops. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the opening angle β is set to less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501. As a result, the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, and the connection cable 503 can be prevented from dangling between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When closing the open door frame 3, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively backward, so that the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 is pressed backward by the connection cable 503, and the connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the attachment shaft 502c so that the left end moves backward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is open at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly. In addition, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and it is possible to prevent malfunctions of the connection cable 503.

When the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, so that the folded back portion of the connection cable 503 can be given a fold. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the 180 degree folded portion of the connection cable 503 changes to open, the fold acts on the connection cable 503 to close it. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the fold prevents the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and also guides the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) in the closing direction, allowing the door frame 3 to be closed smoothly.

Furthermore, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis core) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a can pull the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the central axis (axis core) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126.

In addition, in this embodiment, the angle between the tangent to a circle passing through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502, centered on the central axis (axis) of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126, and the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the speaker duct 103 from the cable holder 103a, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is configured to be 45 degrees or less. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts against the connection cable 503, so that the tip side of the open connection cable guide member 502 can be pressed in the closing direction via the connection cable 503, and therefore the connection cable guide member 502 can be closed smoothly as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed reliably. In addition, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502, which rotates (opens and closes) in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door frame 3, can be set to 45 degrees or less, so that when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, achieving the same effect as described above.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and also rotatably attaches the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3.

The main frame upper hinge member 510 comprises an upper hinge body 511, which is a horizontally extending flat plate material with its rear portion bent downward into an L-shape, and a main frame upper hinge pin 512 which protrudes upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511 in a cylindrical shape and is journaled by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates the main frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and which journals the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

The upper hinge member 510 of the main frame is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 by bending the upper hinge body 511 downward and extending vertically. The upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 is inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 of the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and journaled. The upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame allows the upper hinge pin 122 of the upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 to be rotatably inserted from below into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge body 511.

This upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame cooperates with the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame to allow the main body frame 4 to be hingedly rotatably attached to the outer frame 2, and also allows the door frame 3 to be hingedly rotatably attached to the main body frame 4.

[4-3. Main body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to a lower hinge attachment portion 501l in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and has the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached thereto.

The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a lower hinge first body 521, which is a horizontally extending flat plate material with its rear portion bent upward into an L-shape, and a lower hinge second body 522, which is disposed above the lower hinge first body 521 and is a horizontally extending flat plate material with its rear portion bent upward into an L-shape. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 disposed at a distance above the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, and a vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521.

The lower hinge first body 521 has an outer frame lower hinge hole 521a that penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion and into which the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

The second lower hinge body 522 is provided with a lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame that penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion and into which the lower hinge pin 126 of the lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above, and a restricting piece 522b that extends upward from a position rearward of the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and restricts the rotation range of the door frame 3. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge body 511 of the upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame.

The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main frame upper hinge member 510 to mount the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinged rotatable, and also mount the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so as to be hinged rotatable.

[4-4. Main body reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view that is U-shaped with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is formed from an extruded metal profile.

The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 has two left position restriction members 531 attached to the rear of the section extending rightward from the front end, spaced apart vertically, to restrict the forward and vertical movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501.

The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 has a groove 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side, which is formed in a U-shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed on the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcement frame 111 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into this groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcement frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 and the left reinforcement frame 111 becomes serpentine in a plan view, which prevents an illegal tool from being inserted inside from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and prevents an illegal tool from being inserted into the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side through the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84(a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame seen from the front, and FIG. 84(b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower front part of the main body frame base unit 500, and is for shooting the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. The ball launcher 540 can shoot the game ball B with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is equipped with a flat launching base 541 attached to the launching device mounting portion 501e of the main frame base 501 in the main frame base unit 500, a launching solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid attached to the rear surface of the right part of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front and whose rotation axis extends forward through the launching base 541, a striking hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the launching solenoid 542, and a launching rail 544 attached to the front surface of the launching base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left from near the tip of the striking hammer 543 and along which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is designed so that game ball B is supplied from the ball supply unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launching rail 544. When the handle 195 is rotated while game ball B is being supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launching rail 544, the launch solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the angle of rotation, and the game ball B is hit by the striking mallet 543. The game ball B hit by the striking mallet 543 is guided through the launching rail 544 to the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is hit into the play area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the play area 5a due to factors such as the hitting strength of the game ball B, it will fall between the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, pass through the foul cover unit 150, and be discharged into the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Payment base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 85. Figure 85 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit seen from the rear. The dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L-shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The dispensing base unit 550 is equipped with a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501 in the main frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-to-rear direction, a left side plate portion 551b extending long downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a as viewed from the front with a width substantially the same as that of the top plate portion, a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a as viewed from the front with a width substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a left side plate portion 551b extending long downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a as viewed from the front with a width substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a. The base 551 is provided with a left back plate 551e extending from a position forward of the rear edge of the left back plate 551b to the right at a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the bottom end, an inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right edge of the left back plate 551e to the same position as the rear edge of the left side plate 551b, a bottom plate 551g extending rightward from the front of the lower edge of the left side plate 551b to the same position as the right edge of the left back plate 551e, and a connecting plate 551h connecting the right edge of the bottom plate 551g and the lower edge of the inner plate 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate 551a that extends left and right with a length approximately equal to the left-right width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main frame base 501, and a left side plate 551b that extends up and down with a length approximately equal to the up-down height of the game board insertion opening 501b. The front ends of the top plate 551a, left side plate 551b, and right side plate 551c of the payout base 551 are attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501.

The dispensing base 551 also has a shallow recessed portion that is open to the rear and extends vertically, and is formed by the left side plate portion 551b, the left back plate portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, to which the dispensing unit 560 is attached. The dispensing base 551 also has a rear cover attachment portion 551i that protrudes to the right at the top of the right side of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and to which the rear cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 comprises a ball tank 552 which is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, is box-shaped and opens upward, and is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 above the part of the payout base 551 which extends left and right, and is a tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 above the part which extends left and right, and is a groove-like shape which is open upward and extends to the left.

The dispensing base unit 550 also includes a first rail cover 554 attached midway in the left-right direction at the top end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the top end of the tank rail 553 at a distance to the left of the first rail cover 554 when viewed from the front and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the top end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the bottom end of the tank rail 553 near the left end when viewed from the front.

The ball tank 552 is formed with a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the left-right width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-to-rear direction that is shorter than the front-to-rear depth of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position toward the right in the left-to-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end is lower. The left end of the ball tank 552 is connected to the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 is formed in a shape in a plan view that extends diagonally from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and rear so that the depth in the front-to-rear direction changes from a depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B to a depth of approximately one, and then extends straight to the left with a depth in the front-to-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

The upper end of the tank rail 553, which extends straight to the left, is inclined at a steeper angle to the horizontal than the bottom so that the left end is lower at a height slightly greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left roughly coincides with the rear edge of the top plate 551a. The tank rail 553 also has a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball straightening member 556, and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are intended to prevent the front-to-rear depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553.

The ball straightening member 556 is attached between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, with the end on the first rail cover 554 side rotatable around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction. The ball straightening member 556 is equipped with a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-to-right direction (see FIG. 91). This straightening piece 556a slows down the flow of game balls B on the upper tier of game balls B circulating in two tiers, and straightens them so that they flow in a single tier on the downstream side, preventing balls from clogging even if the height inside the tank rail 553 becomes low.

The ball stopping member 557 is attached to the underside of the tank rail 553 near the left end when viewed from the front, so that it can slide left and right. By sliding it left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, preventing game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit.

The payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal board 558 attached to the left of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes an earth connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main frame base 501. An earth wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the earth connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of the dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. Figure 86(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as seen from the rear. Figure 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back panel left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, a payout device 580 that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and pays out the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or the board unit 620.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Under normal conditions, the payout device 580 releases game balls B from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side based on instructions from the payout control board 633, and releases game balls B from the ball removal passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit 600 side when the ball removal lever 593 is operated.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides downward the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball removal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and guides the game balls B released from the ball removal passage 580b to the base unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball Guidance Unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and serves to receive the game ball B from the tank rail 553 and guide the game ball B to the payout device 580.

The ball guide unit 570 is equipped with a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open to the front and has a meandering guide passage 570a through which game balls B can flow, a flat guide passage front cover 572 that closes the front side of the guide unit base 571, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by game balls B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a ball out detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of game balls B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573 (see Figure 91).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a vertically extending rectangular shape in front view of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front cover 572. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the center of the height of the guidance unit base 571, then bends to the right, and extends downward in a serpentine manner while repeatedly folding back between the left and right width of the guidance unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guidance unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed so that its depth in the front, back and right directions and its width in the left and right directions are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game balls B in the direction in which the game balls B flow, allowing the game balls B to be guided in a single line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top so that it can move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. More specifically, the upper part of the movable piece member 573 is attached so that it can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward at the outer right part of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and is formed so that a part of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. When the game ball B abuts against the part of this movable piece member 573 that protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a to a state where it no longer protrudes.

The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and detects the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when a game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when a game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570a is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570a is connected to the upstream end of the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580. Since the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B extends in a serpentine shape, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many game balls B can be stored in the guide passage 570a. In addition, the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of game balls B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, and can detect the presence or absence of game balls B in the ball tank 552 via the guide passage 570a.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 to 89. Figure 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-to-rear direction. Figure 89(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-to-rear direction when the ball removal movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in (a). The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the underside of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout device 580 is equipped with a payout device main body 581 that is box-shaped and open to the rear, has a payout passage 580a through which game balls B can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a, a flat payout device rear cover 582 that closes the payout device main body 581 from the rear, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front cover 583 that is attached to the front of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear.

The dispensing device 580 also includes a dispensing motor 584 attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and having a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached to the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 meshing with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and a second transmission gear 588. The device is equipped with a dispensing gear member 588 having a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a meshing with the delivery gear 587 and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a, which is rotatably attached between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, a dispensing blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 and protrude into the dispensing passage 580a, and a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the dispensing device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

The payout device 580 further includes a payout detection sensor 591 that detects the game ball B and is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, a ball removal movable piece 592 that is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 at the location where it branches off from the payout passage 580a so as to be capable of opening and closing the ball removal passage 580b, and a ball removal lever 593 that is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so as to be capable of being held in a position where the ball removal movable piece 592 closes the ball removal passage 580b and is slidable in the vertical direction.

The payout device 580 is shaped like a rectangle extending vertically in a plan view. The payout device 580 is shaped so that its left-right width is greater to the right when viewed from the front than the left-right width of the ball guiding unit 570.

As shown in Fig. 88, the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 opens upward at a position toward the left of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear, and the downstream end opens downward at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. The dispensing passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top for about 1/3 of the total height, gradually moving leftward as it moves downward from the upstream end, then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right, and then bends at about 1/3 of the left-right width and extends downward approximately vertically toward the center (rotation axis) of the dispensing blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, it bends to the right when viewed from behind at a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, then extends downward in an arc concentric with the payout blade 589 so that a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is formed between it and the outer periphery of the payout blade 589, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the payout blade 589 when viewed from behind.

In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is located below the dispensing blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball removal passage 580b extends diagonally downward from the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a, branches off at a point where it bends to the right, extends vertically along the left edge as viewed from the rear to the bottom end, and opens downward near the left end of the bottom surface as viewed from the rear.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are provided with a main body guide wall 581a and a rear cover guide wall 582a, which are formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the payout path 580a and the ball removal path 580b in the rear view, and which face each other and protrude backward and forward from the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout path 580a and the ball removal path 580b branch off, and which are formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the payout path 580a and the ball removal path 580b in the rear view. The main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a are formed at a position on the left side of the part in the rear view that branches off from the ball removal path 580b in the payout path 580a and extends to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. The main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are formed mainly to constitute the side walls of the ball removal path 580b. The ball removal movable piece 592 rotates between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the payout passage 580a in the payout device main body 581 when viewed from the rear, at the point where it extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, first transmission gear 586, second transmission gear 587, and payout gear member 588 are disposed in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the payout device front cover 583. The payout gear member 588 has three flat detection pieces 588b extending outward, spaced circumferentially at angular intervals of 120 degrees.

The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape, spaced at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade pieces 589a extend from the top of the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extend to the right when viewed from the rear, and protrude into the payout passage 580a so that the distance between the blade pieces 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The payout blade 589 is provided with a ball storage section 589b between the three blade pieces 589a, which is recessed toward the center in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B. This ball storage section 589b is capable of storing only one game ball B. As a result, the vane 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the vane 589 by using the vane piece 589a, and can move the game ball B contained in the ball container 589b downstream by rotating in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear.

The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are attached to the dispensing device rear cover 582 and the dispensing device front cover 583 so that they can rotate together on the same axis. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is located to the left of the rotation axis of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588, which rotates together with the dispensing blade 589, to detect the rotation of the dispensing blade 589.

The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached rotatably around an axis extending forward and backward at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is bent in an L-shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces into the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is formed so that its depth in the forward and backward directions is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and it can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retract out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so that it can slide up and down on the left side when viewed from the rear near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. A part of the ball removal lever 593 protrudes rearward through the payout device rear cover 582, and it can be slid by operating the protruding part. When the ball removal lever 593 is positioned at the lower end, the lower part can abut against the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear can be restricted, and the ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. When the ball removal lever 593 is positioned at the upper end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated outside the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. 89).

When the ball removal lever 593 is raised to make the ball removal movable piece 592 rotatable, the game balls B that were strung together upstream of the ball removal movable piece 592 will flow over the ball removal movable piece 592 and down the ball removal passage 580b. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends in a straight line from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game balls B that have flowed down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a will flow straight down the ball removal passage 580b, and since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b is connected to the island equipment side, there is nothing to suppress the flow of the game balls B, such as the payout vane 589, so the game balls B will flow down faster than the payout passage 580a.

In this way, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down the ball removal passage 580b at a high speed, so that the game ball B hits the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b with great force. However, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can move outside the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b through between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves outside the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of the hit. Therefore, the ball removal movable piece 592 is not pinched between the wall surface of the ball removal passage 580b and the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from applying a strong force to the ball removal movable piece 592, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in durability or damage to the ball removal movable piece 592 due to the collision of the game ball B.

As a result, the ball removal movable piece 592 is less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island equipment downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, which reduces the time required for replacement and maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 and reduces the burden on the game hall.

In addition, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, which is spaced narrower than the game ball B. Therefore, when the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b and the ball removal movable piece 592 moves outward through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, even if the game ball B moves to the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, which is spaced narrower than the game ball B.

The game ball B is prevented from moving outward between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a, causing the game ball B to separate from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent movement of the ball removal movable piece 592 is due to inertial force, so no strong force acts on the ball removal movable piece 592, making it less likely to be damaged, and the game ball B will not fly out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a, ensuring that the game ball B can flow downstream of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the rear lower part of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610. The upper full ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full tank ball path unit 600 comprises a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, a box-shaped upper full tank cover 602 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and has an open front side, and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached near the top end of the upper full tank cover 602 and can press the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes to the right from the right edge when viewed from the front, and has a rear cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the rear cover.

In addition, the upper full ball path unit 600 is made up of an upper payout ball receiving passage 600a that opens upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height, an upper ball storage passage 600b that is connected to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right side when viewed from the front by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height, and a lower ball storage passage 600b that is connected to the upper ball receiving passage 600a and extends to the right side when viewed from the front by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. It is equipped with an upper normal dispensing passage 600c that extends toward the upper side and opens downward at the bottom surface, an upper full tank dispensing passage 600d that is adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c, extends downward from the right side as viewed from the front from the center of the left-right direction of the upper ball storage passage 600b, and opens downward at the bottom surface, and an upper ball removal passage 600e that opens upward near the right end as viewed from the front on the top surface, extends downward approximately vertically, and then opens downward near the right end of the bottom surface (see Figure 91).

On the underside of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side when viewed from the front, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are lined up in order and open downward. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upstream end of the upper ball removal passage 600e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and is released downward from either the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. In addition, the game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball removal passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the base unit 620 side. The lower full ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 is equipped with a lower full base 611 having a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full payout path 610b, and a lower ball removal path 610c, extending in the front-to-rear direction and opening upward, a lower full cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611, a payout path opening/closing door 613 attached rotatably around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction to the front end of the lower full base 611 and capable of opening and closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout path 610a and the lower full payout path 610b, and a closing spring 614 that biases the payout path opening/closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout path 610a and the lower full payout path 610b.

The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 has, on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end, the lower normal dispensing path 610a, the lower full-tank dispensing path 610b, and the lower ball removal path 610c, lined up from the left when viewed from the front, with their upstream ends opening upward. The lower normal dispensing path 610a and the lower full-tank dispensing path 610b extend forward lined up side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full-tank ball path unit 610. The lower full-tank dispensing path 610b extends forward slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing path 610a. The lower ball removal path 610c extends forward along the right side of the lower full-tank dispensing path 610b when viewed from the front, and opens to the right halfway in the fore-and-aft direction.

The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b. This dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614, and in the normal state, it closes the front end openings (downstream end openings) of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. This operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to abut against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f of the fall cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which open upward at the upper rear end, are located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600, respectively. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d flows through the lower full payout passage 610b, and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball removal passage 600e flows through the lower ball removal passage 610c.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b open immediately after the through ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. The downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c opens to face the ball removal guide section 627 that opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main body frame 4), the lower full ball path unit 610 rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front against the biasing force of the closing spring 614 as the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f of the fall cover unit 150. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and are connected to the through ball passage 150a and full ball receiving port 150b of the fall cover unit 150.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 moves away from the door opening/closing abutment 150f of the fall cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 rotates in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front due to the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b can no longer move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, the game balls B will not spill out of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game ball B in the payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. When the payout unit 560 is assembled to the main body frame 4, it is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551. In the normal state, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball removal path 580b branching off from the payout path 580a is closed at the branching portion. In addition, in the lower full ball path unit 610, the payout path opening and closing door 613 is in the open state.

The ball tank 552, which is open upward, is supplied with a predetermined number of game balls B from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on detection of ball exhaustion by the ball exhaustion detection sensor 574 of the ball guide unit 570. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent, aligned in a row by the tank rail 553, through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout blade 589, and multiple game balls B are retained upstream of the payout blade 589.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. This indicates that the game ball B is stored at least in the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout motor 584 rotates the payout blade 589 in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, the game ball B stored in the ball storage section 589b moves in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, and is released downstream of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580a. The game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball storage section 589b) is then detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and is then sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball passage unit 600.

Under normal conditions, the game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 flows through the upper ball storage passage 600b and down to the upper normal payout passage 600c located directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. The game ball B that flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c then passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and is released into the upper tray 201 from the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 in the tray unit 200.

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 becomes full of game balls B, it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 become stuck in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and as more game balls B are paid out, they also become stuck in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600, which is connected upstream to the lower normal payout passage 610a. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with game balls B and more game balls B are paid out, the game balls B begin to accumulate in the upper ball storage passage 600b, which is connected to the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side, and begin to flow down the upper full payout passage 600d, which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

The game ball B that flows down to the upper full payout passage 600d passes through the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 and is received by the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. The game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b is then released into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball release port 150d, and the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. This allows the game ball B to be automatically paid out to the lower tray 202 when the upper tray 201 is full of game balls B and more game balls B are paid out.

When the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B and further game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, if more game balls B are dispensed, the game balls B will be retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 upstream of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the player is informed by voice (e.g., "Please remove the balls!") that the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are full of game balls B, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is no longer in detection mode.

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are to be discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is slid upward from the lower end position to the upper end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, and the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a and is pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. This allows the game ball B to enter the ball removal passage 580b branching off from the payout passage 580a, and the game balls B on the upstream side are released downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the area of the ball removal movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down hits the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball removal movable piece 592, making the ball removal movable piece 592 less likely to be damaged.

The game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and is released from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide section 627 of the base unit 620, and then passes through the discharged ball receiving section 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 92 to 96. Fig. 92(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and Fig. 92(b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear. Fig. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear and below. Fig. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the front, with each main component disassembled, and Fig. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear, with each main component disassembled. Fig. 96 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower part of the pachinko machine cut in the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 below the game board placement section 501c, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker unit 620a from behind, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d from behind.

The speaker unit 620a comprises a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 in the main frame base unit 500 below the game board placement section 501c, a main frame speaker 622 attached facing forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main frame speaker 622 and open forward.

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and is equipped with a circular speaker mounting portion 621a that is formed of multiple slits that penetrate from front to back near the left end when viewed from the front and extend up and down, a front recessed portion for space 621b that is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front, and a connection portion 621c that protrudes downward from the underside of the front recessed portion for space 621b, extends in the left-right direction, and opens diagonally downward toward the rear.

The main frame speaker 622 is attached from the rear side to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 facing forward. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that its lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. The main frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs low-pitched sounds.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that is open to the front, with the part behind the main frame speaker 622 protruding rearwards the most, and is formed so that the protrusion rearwards becomes smaller in a stepped manner as it moves to the right as viewed from the front. This ensures that there is sufficient space behind the speaker box 623 to the right of the center as viewed from the front, allowing the base unit 620b, power supply unit 620c, etc. to be placed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface except for the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621.

The speaker unit 620a, together with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623, forms part of an enclosure 624 that contains the sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622. This enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting part 621a in the front view of the speaker cover 621, so even though the speaker box 623 is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount of protrusion rearward decreases as it moves to the right, a sufficiently large space is secured to the right of the main frame speaker 622.

When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a has the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 connected to the connection tube portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and the space behind the main frame speaker 622 is connected to the inner space 40a of the curtain board of the outer frame 2. Therefore, a large enclosure 624 can be formed behind the main frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, speaker box 623, curtain board front member 42, and curtain board rear member 43, and sound outputted to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 can be outputted (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain board front member 42.

In more detail, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right when viewed from the front with a relatively wide depth and is connected to the lower frame assembly 40 via the connection part 621c and the connection tube part 43a. Therefore, the sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622 can be transmitted to the lower frame assembly 40 without attenuating the low-frequency range in particular, and the transmitted low-frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42.

In this case, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 is radiated in an inverted phase, so that it resonates to amplify the sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200, and a loud sound with deep bass can be output even if the diameter of the main frame speaker 622 is small.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, allowing the player to hear deep bass sounds. This allows the player to hear a rich bass sound from the sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the platter unit 200, and the sound output from the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2.

The speaker unit 620a has a through hole 621d formed in the speaker cover 621, penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower part of the speaker mounting part 621a and the front recess for space 621b, and a through tube 623a formed in the speaker box 623, which extends cylindrically and penetrates in the front-rear direction, communicating with the through hole 621d. When assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 that is attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a portion of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a rear base 626 that is attached to the rear side of the front base 625 and has a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface.

The base unit 620b is formed by the front base 625 and the rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and includes a ball removal guide section 627 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full-ball path unit 610 and guides it to the right when viewed from the front, a discharged ball receiving section 628 that opens upward to the right when viewed from the front downstream of the ball removal guide section 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5, and a ball discharge port 629 that discharges the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guide section 627 and the discharged ball receiving section 628 downward.

The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens to the left at the top of the left side when viewed from the front, and the downstream end opens to the left end side of the discharged ball receiving section 628. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball removal guide section 627 faces so that the opening of the upstream end coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and can receive the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c and guide it to the discharged ball receiving section 628.

The discharged ball receiving section 628 is open upward and extends left and right. The bottom surface of the discharged ball receiving section 628 is connected to the bottom surface of the ball removal guide section 627 at the left end when viewed from the front, and is inclined so that it becomes lower as it goes to the right.

The base unit 620b guides game balls B removed from the ball tank 552 and game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right as viewed from the front using the ball removal guide section 627 and discharged ball receiving section 628, and then discharges them downward from the ball discharge port 629, making it easier to ensure a wider space to the left of the center as viewed from the front. This makes it possible to make the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a wider, allowing the player to hear a sound with richer bass than conventional pachinko machines.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover 631 attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 96) housed in the payout control board box 632. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 or the like, by pressing the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200, or the like. The payout control board box 632 is formed so that it leaves a trace of opening and closing. This makes it possible to detect any illegal modifications to the payout control board 633, thereby enhancing the deterrent effect against illegal acts.

The interface unit 620e includes a board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 so as to cover the rear side of the interface board 635.

The board base 634 is attached to the rear of the speaker box 623 at the part that protrudes furthest to the rear, behind the main frame speaker 622. One end (main frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 is connected to the interface board 635. The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, etc., and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the board base 634 (interface board 635) when viewed from the front, so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The rear cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 81. The rear cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The right side of the rear cover 640 in a front view is attached to the rear end extending vertically of the rear extension part 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and the left side is attached to the rear cover attachment part 551i of the payout base 551 and the rear cover attachment part 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The rear cover 640 is formed in a shape such that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front, and is formed so that when assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear surface is positioned approximately on the same plane as the rear surface of the upper part 551d of the back plate of the payout base 551. The rear cover 640 has multiple slits 641 formed therein that penetrate from front to back and extend vertically. In this embodiment, the rear cover 640 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be seen from the rear of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 97. Fig. 97(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 is equipped with a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side of the rear extension 501j of the main frame base 501 and extends vertically, a number of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the door frame 3, a number of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the outer frame 2, and a transfer cylinder 654 that protrudes forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 and moves the door frame hooks 652 or outer frame hooks 653 up and down depending on the direction of rotation.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from a position above the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651 and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main frame 4, the multiple (three) door frame hooks 652, the transmission cylinder 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 protrude forward from the front surface of the main frame base 501. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 against the main frame 4, the front end of the transmission cylinder 654 engages with the rotation transmission member 133 of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

The locking unit 650 has multiple (three) door frame hooks 652 that engage with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and multiple (two) outer frame hooks 653 that engage with the upper hooking member 24 and lower hooking member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key that corresponds to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front, the multiple door frame hooks 652 move upward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the main frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the multiple outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4, sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the multiple outer frame hooks 653 to move downward, and the main frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. In this way, the lock between the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, or between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2, can be unlocked.

When locking between the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, or between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the hooks for the door frame 652 and the hooks for the outer frame 653 are inclined so that the tips become thinner, so that when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, or the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the hooks for the door frame 652 and the hooks for the outer frame 653 move downward or upward to overcome the hooking member 116, the upper hooking member 24, and the lower hooking member 25, and then are locked by the biasing force of the locking spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 98 to 105. Figure 98(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line B-B in (a). Figure 99 is an enlarged view of the upper part of the main body frame in a perspective view seen from the rear. Figure 100(a) is a perspective view seen from the front and above in a state in which the ball tank is assembled with the tank rail, etc., and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front and below. Figure 101 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of Figure 100(a). Figure 102 is an explanatory diagram showing the area through which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame flow. Figure 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. Figure 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. Figure 105 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view seen from the rear of the hinge side of the main body frame.

As described above, the main body frame 4 is made up of a frame-shaped main body frame base 501 whose rear portion can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and which is detachably and hinge-rotatably attached to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; an inverted L-shaped payout base 551 attached along the upper and left edges of the rear side of the main body frame base 501 when viewed from the front; a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551, which is box-shaped (container-shaped) and extends left and right, and is open upward; and a tank 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552, which is groove-shaped and opens upward, and extends leftward. The tank rail 553 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to a portion of the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, spaced to the left of the first rail cover 554 when viewed from the front, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 for paying out game balls B to the player.

The ball tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a that is shaped like a rectangle extending in the left-right direction when viewed from the top, with the left side slanted lower when viewed from the front, a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c that extend upward from the front and rear edges of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e that extend upward from the left and right edges of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed like a container with an open top. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from island facilities such as an amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The spherical tank 552 also has an overflow section 552f that is cut out from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer periphery upper edge. This overflow section 552f is formed over a length of approximately 3/4 of the left-right length of the front wall 552b, from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b to the end side on the opposite side (the right side wall 552e side).

The right end (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the inside of the ball tank 552 in front view, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide section 553a that extends from the upstream area to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B. The main guide section 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower as it approaches the left side when viewed from the front. In addition, the main guide section 553a is formed in a crank shape that extends from the right end side to a position that is about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in a plan view, parallel to the axis extending from the right end side to the left in the left-right direction, and then extends diagonally from the right end to a position that is about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it moves to the left, and then extends from there to the left end in a parallel manner to the axis extending in the left-right direction. In the main guide section 553a, the tank rail 553 has a section that extends parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction, and extends to the upper end with the same width, and the upper end of this section is closed by attaching the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 to the upper end. In addition, in the section where the upper side is closed, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end), and at the downstream end, it is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) that allows only one game ball B to flow.

The tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed above the main guide section 553a, and has a bulging section 553b that bulges out wider than the width of the main guide section 553a so that multiple game balls B are lined up in a width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game balls B, and narrows in width from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guide section 553a. This bulging section 553b allows multiple game balls B that were wide in the width direction on the upstream side to be aligned so that the width becomes the width of one game ball B as they move downstream. The bulging section 553b is also formed so that the width becomes narrower as it moves from the upper end side to the lower main guide section 553a. As a result, the tank rail 553 can align multiple game balls B flowing through the bulging section 553b in a line in the width direction as they move downstream and downward.

The bulge 553b of the tank rail 553 has a three-dimensional curved shape with the center of curvature located on the inner side. The bulge 553b has a curved center located above the main guide 553a, so that the tank rail 553 has a slightly chamfered corner at the boundary between the main guide 553a and the bulge 553b. The bulge 553b is also curved with a larger curvature downstream than upstream. For this reason, the game ball B circulating through the three-dimensionally curved bulge 553b has a reaction force acting in various directions depending on the position of the abutting bulge 553b, which suppresses the occurrence of ball jamming in the bulge 553b. In more detail, if the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends in a constant direction, a reaction force always acts on the game ball B circulating inside the bulging portion 553b from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b in a constant direction, and the reaction force is difficult to disperse, so the game ball B inside is always pushed in a constant direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and making it easier for ball jamming to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B, and the pushing direction of the multiple game balls B circulating inside is dispersed, making it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape and making it easier for ball jamming to occur.

The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if ball jamming occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location of the ball jam can be quickly identified. Therefore, ball jamming in the tank rail 553 can be quickly resolved, so that the interruption of play due to ball jamming can be shortened as much as possible, and the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of play can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 can be seen from the rear through the tank rail 553, so when a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit of the game board 5, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, and belts can be confirmed with the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4, and the same effect as above can be achieved.

The main frame 4 is provided in front of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and extends outward (leftward) from the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side when viewed from the front). It is equipped with an overflow surface portion 501m whose rear end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and inclined so that the front end side is higher in order to return the game balls B that have overflowed forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, and a bypass passage 552g that extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulge portion 553b whose upper side is open on the tank rail 553, inclined so that the rear end side is lower, and inclined so that the side away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction (left side) is lower, and guides some of the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m.

The main frame 4 is provided with a discharge section 551j, which is provided on the opposite side of the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both the left and right outer sides of the bypass passage 552g, with a width in the left and right direction greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B and a bottom surface lower than the upper open portion of the tank rail 553, an external terminal board 558, which is provided on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge section 551j and at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m, and has multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and a terminal cover 551k which covers the upper side of the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558) and has an upper surface extending horizontally at a position higher than the overflow surface portion 501m.

The overflow surface 501m is formed on the main frame base 501. The overflow surface 501m extends rearward in a flat plate shape from a low position at a distance of 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper edge of the rear surface of the base main body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The overflow surface 501m is formed with a left-right length of about 1/3 of the left-right length of the main frame base 501, and the left end when viewed from the front is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction from the left end of the main frame base 501. The overflow surface 501m is formed with a height from the front end to the rear end of about 1/2 the outer diameter of the game ball B. When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface 501m and the outer frame upper member 30.

The main frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m, and has flat left and right step portions 501n and 501o that extend approximately horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface 501m, and a plurality of ribs 501p that extend in the front-rear direction on both the left and right outer sides of the left and right step portions 501n and 501o with their upper ends higher than the left and right step portions 501n and 501o, and are arranged in a row in the left and right direction at intervals narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The left step portion 501n is formed so that its left-right length is shorter than its front-rear length. The left step portion 501n is also inclined so that its rear right corner is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front. The right step portion 501o is formed so that its left-right length is longer than its front-rear length. The right step portion 501o is also inclined so that its rear left corner is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front.

The multiple ribs 501p of the main frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the gap between the outer frame 2 and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main frame base 501 is assembled to the main frame 4, in a front view, the right end of the overflow surface 501m is aligned left-right with the right end of the overflow section 552f of the spherical tank 552, the left end of the overflow surface 501m is aligned left-right with the left end of the bypass passage 552g, and the right end of the right step 501o is aligned left-right with the right side wall 552e of the spherical tank 552.

The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the spherical tank 552. In the following, the container-like area surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as the spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g has a passage surface 552h that extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 in a flat plate shape, with the front end at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end inclined so as to be lower, and a weir portion that extends upward from the end edge of the passage surface 552h opposite the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end edge of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g in a front view extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the spherical tank 552, and extends obliquely so as to move forward from the left end side toward the right end side. Note that the left-right inclination of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may be horizontal.

When assembled to the main frame 4, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends along the front end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in a crank-like shape in the left-right direction and that extends diagonally to the left-right direction. In other words, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends diagonally to the left-right direction. As a result, the flow direction of the game ball B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g changes from the diagonal rear end to a direction perpendicular to the diagonal rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends approximately parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction approximately perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g can be received at the wide portion of the tank rail 553. In addition, the game balls B are supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction approximately perpendicular (perpendicular) to the flow direction of the game balls B, which makes it difficult for the game balls B from the bypass passage 552g to cause ball clogging in the tank rail 553.

The bypass passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so that its rear end moves rearward as it approaches the downstream side of the tank rail 553. Therefore, when the game ball B is released from the bypass passage 552g toward the tank rail 553, the rear end that extends diagonally allows the game ball B to be released toward the upstream side, where the tank rail 553 is wider, rather than the downstream side, where the tank rail 553 is narrower. By releasing the game ball B into the wider area, it is possible to prevent ball jamming inside the tank rail 553.

In addition, the portion of the tank rail 553 where the game balls B are guided by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the rear of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left portion of the rear wall 552c when viewed from the front. Game balls B that pass under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flow through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the bypass passage 552g on the tank rail 553, the height of multiple game balls B stacked vertically does not exceed the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). Therefore, a space (empty space) can be secured downstream of the ball tank 552 on the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, allowing game balls B to be stacked upwards, so that game balls B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and game balls B will not spill rearward from the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 has a flat guide surface portion 552j that extends downward to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left wall 552d. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j is formed in such a shape that, in a front view, the right edge extends obliquely rearward from a position at about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position at about 1/9 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position at about 1/2 of the total length of the front-to-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, and from there extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position at about 1/3 of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-to-right direction.

The spherical tank 552 has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate the area surrounded by the right end edge of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-mentioned shape in a plan view and the straight line connecting the end of the right end edge on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The spherical tank 552 also has flat flange portions 552l extending outward in the left-right direction and in the up-down direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b at the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. The upper edge of the part of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l are formed higher than the upper edges of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the upper surfaces of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o of the main body frame base 501).

When the spherical tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end (the right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the spherical tank 552. In addition, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends left and right in a crank shape in a plan view, and the portion extending straight left and right to the left of that portion are located (protruding) rearward from the spherical tank 552. The rear end edge of the left bypass passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends left and right in a crank shape in a plan view.

The discharge section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge section 551j extends rearward from the rear side of the flange section 552l on the left side of the spherical tank 552 as viewed from the front to the tank rail 553, so that the discharge section 551j lowers in a stepped manner from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the spherical tank 552, and then extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (a position near the center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555), and then extends rearward.

The external terminal board 558 has a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a attached to the rear surface in a state where they are lined up in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal whose gripping portion opens by operating a lever to grip the tip of an electric wiring. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the external terminal board 558 is disposed in front of the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at approximately the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, as shown by the white arrows in FIG. 102, the overflow surface 501m, the left step 501n, the right step 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are inclined so that the rear ends of the overflow surface 501m and the bypass passage 552g are lower, and the rear right corner of the left step 501n and the rear left corner of the right step 501o are lower. In addition, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide section 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end is lower when viewed from the front. In addition, the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side opposite the bottom wall 552a is lower.

And when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to supply from the island equipment, they can first flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552 over the overflow section 552f, which is the lowest part of the outer periphery upper edge, and the game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface section 501m, and the game balls B that flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface section 501m can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface section 501m (see Figure 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent any further increase in the game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from pressing against each other strongly in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure), and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball jamming) due to the game balls B interlocking with each other in the ball tank 552.

In addition, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. This makes it possible to avoid the game balls B that have accumulated on the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and prevents the game balls B from clogging in the ball tank 552. In addition, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to prevent the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m from spilling outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a malfunction in which the game balls B that have spilled outside the main body frame 4 are pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, making it impossible to open or close the main body frame 4.

Furthermore, some of the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 onto the overflow surface 501m can be guided downstream of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position along the left side away from the ball tank 552. This allows the flow (pressure) of the game balls B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g to be directed downstream of the tank rail 553, preventing the game balls B from pushing against each other too strongly inside the tank rail 553 and preventing the game balls B from clogging.

In addition, at the outer circumferential upper edge of the ball tank 552, the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow section 552f is made higher than the overflow section 552f, so that the upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is higher than the overflow section 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface section 501m. As a result, the game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 over the overflow section 552f and overflow into the overflow surface section 501m and flow from the overflow surface section 501m to the bypass passage 552g are blocked by the left side wall 552d on one side of the ball tank 552, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls B on the bypass passage 552g side from returning to the ball tank 552 side from the bypass passage 552g, and it is possible to prevent the game balls B from clogging in the ball tank 552 by pressing the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is higher than the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g), so that the game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 into the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. This prevents the game ball B from flowing in from the side (ball tank 552) into the bypass passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g can be made to flow in a constant direction from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the tank rail 553 on the rear end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be in a constant direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pushed against each other and getting caught in the tank rail 553 due to the pressure being applied to the game balls B being in different directions, and it is possible to prevent the game balls B from becoming clogged.

In addition, the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guide section 553a that extends to the downstream end, so that when the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide section 553a, they are lined up in a row in the left-right direction, so that the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the downstream payout device 580. In addition, the tank rail 553 has a wide bulge section 553b in which multiple game balls B can be lined up in the open upper portion, so that the game balls B released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion closed at the top, and narrows in width from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guide portion 553a, so that as the multiple game balls B move downstream in the bulging portion 553b, they can be aligned in a line in the width direction. In addition, the portion closed at the top of the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow decreases toward the downstream end, so that the multiple game balls B that were stacked in multiple layers in the height direction on the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) can be aligned in a line by circulating them downstream through the portion closed at the top of the tank rail 553. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the multiple game balls B in a line aligned in a line to the downstream side (payout device 580 side).

Furthermore, since it is equipped with the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and since the tank rail 553 is equipped with the bulge portion 553b, the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, so that in combination with the ball tank 552, more game balls B can be stored.

In addition, on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge section 551j in between, there is an external terminal board 558 with multiple wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the multiple wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558). Therefore, the wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game balls B supplied from the island equipment bounce or are supplied with force at the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface section 501m, it is difficult for them to reach (contact) the wire connection terminals 558a, etc., and there is no problem such as a short circuit or disconnection of the electrical wiring due to the game balls B contacting them.

In addition, since the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a face rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface 501m, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces off the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it is difficult for it to land on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. Even if the game ball B does land on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it is difficult for it to fall from the rear side, making it easier to avoid the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Furthermore, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 103) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing downstream against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and makes it possible to prevent clogging of the game ball B in the ball tank 552.

In addition, even if the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island equipment bounces off the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m and lands on the left step 501n or right step 501o on both sides of the overflow surface 501m, as shown in Figure 103, the slope of these parts can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface 501m or the bypass passage 552g, preventing malfunctions caused by the game ball B spilling outside the main frame 4.

In addition, because the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j when they flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553, the guide surface portion 552j can regulate the amount (height) of game balls B stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 so that it does not exceed the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) on the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, space (empty space) can be secured in which game balls B can be stacked on the upper side, and game balls B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are positioned in front of the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B will not be received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B inside the tank rail 553 and causing a malfunction.

[4-12-1. Second embodiment of tank rail etc.]
Next, the second embodiment of the tank rail 553 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 106 to 110. Fig. 106 is a perspective view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail when a pachinko machine equipped with the tank rail of the second embodiment is viewed from the rear. Fig. 107(a) is a plan view showing the tank rail of Fig. 106 assembled together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail of (a) viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the tank rail of (a) viewed from the rear. Fig. 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail of Fig. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail of Fig. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. Fig. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail of Fig. 107(a) cut along the kerk line. Fig. 110 is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the tank rail of Fig. 107 in cross section. A second embodiment of a tank rail 553A, which is different from the above, has, in addition to the tank rail 553A, a first rail cover 554A, a second rail cover 555A, and a ball straightening member 556A, which differ from the tank rail 553, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, and ball straightening member 556 of the above embodiment, and similar configurations are described using the same symbols.

The tank rail 553A in this embodiment straightens the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers them to the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560. This tank rail 553A extends to the left in the shape of a groove that is open upward. A first rail cover 554A is attached to the tank rail 553A so as to close the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A is provided to the left of the first rail cover 554A when viewed from the front, and a ball straightening member 556A is provided on the upper side of the second rail cover 555A. A ball stopper member 557 capable of preventing the flow of game balls B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107(a) and other figures, the tank rail 553A has a serpentine portion 553c that snakes back and forth downstream of the bulge portion 553b. This serpentine portion 553c can suppress the flow speed of the game balls B. The first rail cover 554A is attached upstream of the serpentine portion 553c (toward the ball tank 552).

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the serpentine portion 553c at the open upper end side of the tank rail 553A. The second rail cover 555A has a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A, a pair of protective walls 555b that extend upward from both front and rear ends upstream of the left-right center of the cover portion 555a, and an opening 555c that penetrates the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a serpentine shape following the serpentine portion 553c at the portion where the serpentine portion 553c of the tank rail 553A is provided. The rectifying piece 556a of the spherical rectifying member 556A described later is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

The ball straightening member 556A has an upstream end that extends forward and backward and is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis. The ball straightening member 556A is provided between a pair of protective walls 555b above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A, and has a flat straightening piece 556a that penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A and protrudes into the tank rail 553A. This ball straightening member 556A abuts from above against the game balls B stacked in multiple layers in the tank rail 553A, making it easier to break up the layers of game balls B and align them in a row, and also prevents the uppermost game ball B from moving quickly downstream, preventing ball biting on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 553A of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball straightening member 556A is located between a pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A and below the upper end of the protective wall 555b. This prevents the electric wire (shown by a broken line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 provided on the front upper side of the part where the ball straightening member 556A is attached in the tank rail 553A from contacting the ball straightening member 556A from above. However, if the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a contacts the ball straightening member 556A from above, the weight of the electric wire may prevent the ball straightening member 556A from rotating upward even if the game ball B abuts against the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556A, and the ball straightening member 556A may not be able to fully exert its straightening effect on the game ball B. In contrast, in this embodiment, a pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball straightening member 556A, so that when a game ball B comes into contact with the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556A, the ball straightening member 556A can rotate upward, fully exerting the straightening effect and preventing ball jamming or ball clogging within the tank rail 553A.

In addition, since the tank rail 553A is provided with a serpentine portion 553c, the flow speed of the game balls B can be suppressed by the serpentine portion 553c. However, in the tank rail 553A, where the height narrows toward the downstream side, if the upper game balls B among the game balls B stacked in multiple layers move downstream first, ball biting is likely to occur. In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the flow speed of the game balls B can be suppressed by the serpentine portion 553c, so that the upper game balls B can be prevented from moving downstream first, and the occurrence of ball biting can be reduced.

As described above, the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents the electric wires from coming into contact with the ball straightening member 556A, preventing ball clogging. This allows the tank rail 553A to be positioned near a terminal board (e.g., external terminal board 558) or control board to which many electric wires are connected, or the terminal board or control board to which many electric wires are connected to be positioned near the tank rail 553A, providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in the positioning of the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), terminal board, etc.

[4-12-2. Third embodiment of tank rail etc.]
Next, the third embodiment of the tank rail 553 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 111 to 118. Fig. 111 is a perspective view showing an enlarged view of the tank rail portion of the main body frame equipped with the tank rail of the third embodiment as viewed from the right rear. Fig. 112 is a perspective view showing an enlarged view of the tank rail portion of the main body frame equipped with the tank rail of the third embodiment as viewed from the left rear. Fig. 113(a) is a rear view of the main body frame showing an enlarged view of the external terminal board portion, and Fig. 113(b) is a left side view of the main body frame showing an enlarged view of the upper portion. Fig. 114(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line D-D in Fig. 113(b), and Fig. 114(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in Fig. 113(a). Fig. 115 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in Fig. 114(b). Fig. 116(a) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of the third embodiment as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) as seen from the upper right rear, and (c) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) as seen from the lower right rear. Fig. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. of Fig. 116 as seen from the front, and Fig. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. of Fig. 116 as seen from the rear.

The tank rail etc. of the third embodiment is the same as the tank rail etc. of the first embodiment described above (ball tank 552, tank rail 553, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, ball straightening member 556, and ball stopping member 557), with the addition of a protective cover 559 that covers the ball straightening member 556 from above. Components similar to those described above will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rails etc. of this embodiment include a ball tank 552 that is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, is box-shaped and extends left and right, and is open upward, and a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 above the part of the dispensing base 551 that extends left and right, is open upward, and extends leftward in a groove shape.

The ball tank 552 is formed with a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the left-right width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-to-rear direction that is shorter than the front-to-rear depth of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position toward the right in the left-to-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end is lower. The left end of the ball tank 552 is connected to the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 is formed in a shape in a plan view that extends diagonally from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and rear so that the depth in the front-to-rear direction changes from a depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B to a depth of approximately one, and then extends straight to the left with a depth in the front-to-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

The upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left is inclined at a steeper angle to the horizontal than the bottom surface so that the left end is lower at a height slightly greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion that extends straight to the left roughly coincides with the rear edge of the top plate portion 551a.

In the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, a portion extending straight to the left (a portion in which the height decreases toward the downstream side) is formed with a plurality of openings 553d through which garbage, dust, etc. in the tank rail 553 can be dropped. These openings 553d are provided in the portions below the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 described later. The openings 553d open toward the bottom and rear of the tank rail 553, extend to the left and right, and are formed to a size that does not allow the game ball B to pass through. When the game ball B is present in the tank rail 553, a part of the game ball B can be directly seen from the rear through the openings 553d. In addition, the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be touched through the openings 553d with the operator's fingers or a thin stick. This allows ball clogging that occurs in the portion to be eliminated through the openings 553d. In addition, through the opening 553d, the ball straightening member 556 can be lifted via the game ball B in that area, allowing the operation of the ball straightening member 556 to be confirmed.

The tank rail, etc., further includes a first rail cover 554 that is to the left of the ball tank 552 and closes a predetermined range of the upper part of the tank rail 553 from the right end to the left of the part that extends leftward at a substantially constant depth in the front-to-rear direction of the tank rail 553; a second rail cover 555 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 553 from a part spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left end; a ball straightening member 556 that is provided in a part between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553; a ball stopper member 557 that is provided near the left end of the underside of the tank rail 553; and a protective cover 559 that covers the upper part from midway in the left-right direction of the first rail cover 554 to midway in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555, straddling the ball straightening member 556.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the front-to-rear depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553.

The spherical straightening member 556 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 so that the end on the first rail cover 554 side can rotate about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The spherical straightening member 556 has a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(a) etc.).

In the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked vertically are aligned in one layer, but when the number of stacked game balls B is reduced from two layers to one layer, if the game balls B in the upper layer try to overtake the game balls B in the lower layer, the game balls B may become interlocked with each other and become stuck (so-called ball jamming). In contrast, in the ball straightening member 556 of this embodiment, when the game balls B flow in two layers, upper and lower, inside the tank rail 553, the game balls B on the upper layer abut against the straightening piece 556a, slowing down the flow of the game balls B and preventing them from overtaking the game balls B on the lower layer. As a result, the game balls B on the lower layer move downstream first, and the game balls B on the upper layer move behind them, allowing the game balls B to be aligned in one layer. At this time, the game ball B on the upper level presses against the straightening piece 556a from below, causing the ball straightening member 556 to move so that the straightening piece 556a moves upward, and its own weight presses the game ball B on the upper level downward. The vertical swing of the ball straightening member 556 (straightening piece 556a) encourages the game ball B on the upper level to move downward, and prevents ball clogging in that area of the tank rail 553 (the area that becomes lower in height the further downstream).

The ball stopping member 557 is attached to the underside of the tank rail 553 near the left end when viewed from the front, so that it can slide left and right. By sliding it left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, preventing game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit.

The protective cover 559 has a band-shaped top plate portion 559a extending left and right, a flat rear plate portion 559b extending downward from a part of the rear edge of the top plate portion 559a, a flat front plate portion 559c extending downward from the front and left edges of the top plate portion 559a, and a flat guide plate portion 559d extending forward from the front plate portion 559c. The top plate portion 559a and the guide plate portion 559d are inclined so that the left end side is lower. The guide plate portion 559d is formed so that the left side of the top plate portion 559a wraps around from the front side to the left, and the rear end of this portion coincides with the rear end of the top plate portion 559a in the front-to-rear direction.

When this protective cover 559 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the top plate portion 559a is positioned to cover the upper part from the middle of the first rail cover 554 in the left-right direction to the middle of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction, forming a space between it and the ball straightening member 556, allowing the ball straightening member 556 to swing up and down. The rear plate portion 559b extends to a position lower than the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to cover the rear of the ball straightening member 556.

The right end of the front plate portion 559c extends further to the right than the top plate portion 559a, and extends along the tank rail 553 to the ball tank 552. The guide plate portion 559d protrudes forward from the front plate portion 559c at a length greater than the diameter of the game ball B at the portion forward of the top plate portion 559a, and is formed so as to be able to guide the game ball B to the left. The guide plate portion 559d is inclined more gently than the upper end of the tank rail 553. The front end of the guide plate portion 559d forms a small gap between the rear surface of the payout base 551 and the guide plate portion 559d, into which the game ball B cannot enter.

When the protective cover 559 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, it can prevent contact with the ball straightening member 556 from the outside. The operation of the ball straightening member 556 can be checked by inserting a thin rod into the opening 553d of the tank rail 553 to make contact from below, or by pushing the game ball B in the tank rail 553 upwards through the opening 553d with an operator's finger or the like, thereby lifting it up via the game ball B.

In addition, the protective cover 559 has a guide plate portion 559d that can guide a game ball B that, for some reason, has entered the rear of the external terminal plate 558 to the left and eject it outside from the left side of the main body frame 4.

In this embodiment, the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, ball straightening member 556, and protective cover 559 are made of transparent materials, so that the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside.

In addition, the upper part of the tank rail 553 is covered with the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, which prevents dirt, dust, and the like from entering the tank rail 553 from above.

In addition, since the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559 cover the top of the tank rail 553, it is not possible to touch the ball straightening member 556 or the game ball B from above. Therefore, if dirt or dust is attached to the game ball B, etc., it is necessary to remove the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, etc., but in this embodiment, it is meaningful to provide multiple openings 553d at the bottom of the tank rail 553. In more detail, if dirt or dust is attached to the ball straightening member 556 or the game ball B in the tank rail 553, it is possible to touch the game ball B inside through the opening 553d and shake the ball straightening member 556 through the game ball B, so that the dirt or dust attached to the game ball B, etc. can be dropped. Then, the dirt or dust dropped from the game ball B, etc. can be discharged to the outside through the opening 553d.

However, in the main frame 4, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends to the left at a substantially constant depth in the fore-and-aft direction is provided behind the external terminal board 558. Therefore, when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 contacts the ball straightening member 556 from above, the weight of the electric wire may prevent the ball straightening member 556 from rotating upwards even if the game ball B abuts against the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556, and there is a risk that the ball straightening member 556 will not be able to fully exert its straightening effect on the game ball B.

In addition, since the wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 is connected to an electric wire with the coating stripped from the tip, if a game ball B remains behind the external terminal board 558 for some reason, there is a risk that a short circuit will occur due to the remaining game ball B if the electric wire is not connected (inserted) properly into the wire connection terminal 558a.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the protective cover 559 covers the top of the ball straightening member 556, so that the protective cover 559 can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball straightening member 556. As a result, when a game ball B comes into contact with the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556, the ball straightening member 556 can rotate upward, allowing the straightening effect to be fully exerted, and preventing the occurrence of ball jamming or ball clogging within the tank rail 553.

However, if the electric wire comes off the external terminal board 558 for some reason and the tip of the wire comes into contact with the game ball B behind the external terminal board 558, a short circuit occurs and the game hall computer cannot receive the necessary information, which causes an error in the counting at the game hall. In contrast, according to this embodiment, since the guide plate portion 559d is provided on the protective cover 559, the game ball B that has entered the rear of the external terminal board 558 for some reason can be guided to the left and discharged outside from the left side surface of the main body frame 4. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball B from remaining behind the external terminal board 558, and therefore it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a short circuit caused by the remaining game ball B. Therefore, by preventing a short circuit of the electric wire, it is possible to reliably allow the game hall computer (hall computer) to receive the necessary information, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress the occurrence of counting errors at the game hall.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559 causes the game ball B to be discharged to the left side of the main body frame 4, which prevents the game ball B from coming into contact with the various electric wires and wiring provided on the rear side of the main body frame 4, causing problems such as disconnection or short circuit.

[4-13. Another embodiment of the board unit]
Next, a board unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 119 to 124. Fig. 119(a) is a front view of the board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the right front, and (c) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the left front. Fig. 120(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of Fig. 119(a) seen from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of Fig. 119(a) seen from the lower right rear. Fig. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Fig. 119(a) seen from the front, and Fig. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Fig. 119(a) seen from the rear. Fig. 123(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Ki-Ki line in Fig. 119(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Cou-K line in Fig. 119(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Ke-Ke line in Fig. 119(a). Figure 124 is a bottom view showing the area behind the door frame in a pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of Figure 119(a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment replaces the board unit 620 described above and is attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base unit 500. In the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 described above. Here, the same reference numerals are used for configurations similar to those of the board unit 620 described above, and detailed explanations are omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 below the game board placement section 501c, a base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker unit 620a from behind, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d from behind.

The base unit 660 includes a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, a rear base 662 attached to the rear side of the front base 661 and having a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface, an out-ball passage 663 provided between the front base 661 and the rear base 662, through which game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5 flow, an out sensor 664 for detecting game balls B flowing through the out-ball passage 663 one by one, a ball removal guide section 627 that receives game balls B discharged from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guides them to the right when viewed from the front, a ball removal discharge passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662, through which game balls B guided by the ball removal guide section 627 flow, and a passage wall member 666 attached to the rear base 662 to close the rear side of the ball removal discharge passage 665.

The front base 661 is formed in a box shape that is long from side to side and open to the front. The rear base 662 has a flat partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a roughly constant height in the vertical direction, with an out ball passage 663 and a ball removal guide portion 627 formed in front of the partition wall portion 662a, and a ball removal discharge passage 665 formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear on the side rear of the partition wall portion 662a.

The base unit 660 has a front base 661, a rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666 formed from transparent materials. Therefore, the ball removal guide section 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 are also formed transparent. Therefore, the inside of the ball removal guide section 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 can be clearly seen from the top and bottom of the base unit 660, making it easy to check for ball blockages, etc.

The out ball passage 663 is formed in front of a flat partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction of the rear base 662, with the front end open, and the open front end is closed by the front base 661.

The out-ball passage 663 has a ball discharge receiving section 663a that opens upward at approximately the center of the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1 and extends left-right, an out-ball straightening section 663b that straightens the game balls B received by the ball discharge receiving section 663a into a line while causing them to snake widely left-right, a downward guide section 663c that guides the game balls B straightened into a line by the out-ball straightening section 663b downward, and an out-ball discharge port 663d that opens downward at the lower end of the downward guide section 663c and discharges the game balls B downward from the underside of the base unit 660. The out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 124).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that its depth in the front-to-rear direction is approximately 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end is lower.

The out ball straightening section 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a toward the bottom of the ball discharge receiving section 663a so that the left end is lower. In addition, the depth of the out ball straightening section 663b in the front-to-back direction narrows as it moves downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving section 663a, the depth is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. In addition, the part of the out ball straightening section 663b to the left of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a becomes lower in height as it moves downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end, the height is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. This allows the game balls B to be aligned in a row in the out ball straightening section 663b.

The lower guide portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball straightening portion 663b, which is below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and is curved in a small crank shape backward in the middle of the vertical direction so that the front wall is on the same plane as the rear wall (partition wall portion). As a result, the downstream end of the lower guide portion 663c (out-ball discharge port 663d) is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. The out sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of the lower guide portion 663c. The cranked portion of the lower guide portion 663c is curved so that it does not have a portion extending horizontally, so that even if the game ball B passes through the out sensor 664 and hits the cranked portion, it does not jump up to the upper out sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long lifespan, since the game ball B passes through it frequently.

The ball removal guide section 627 is located to the left of the ball discharge receiving section 663a in the out ball passage 663. The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens to the left at the top of the left side when viewed from the front, and the downstream side bends backward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall section 662a of the rear base 662, and is connected to the upstream end of the ball removal and discharge passage 665 (see Figure 123 (a) etc.).

The ball ejection passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. The ball ejection passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state where it is open to the rear, and its rear end side is closed by a passage wall member 666. The rear end of this ball ejection passage 665 is located about one outer diameter of a game ball B forward of the rear end of the rear base 662. In other words, a gap of at least one game ball B is formed between the ball ejection passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

The upstream end (left end) of this ball removal and discharge passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball removal and guide section 627, and has a horizontal guide section 665a that extends to the right of the ball discharge receiving section 663a at the same inclination as the ball discharge receiving section 663a of the out ball passage 663, a vertical guide section 665b that extends vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the horizontal guide section 665a to the underside of the rear base 662, and a ball removal and discharge port 665c that opens downward at the downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide section 665b. The ball removal and discharge port 665c is located slightly rearward of the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see Figure 124).

The ball ejection passage 665 also has multiple protrusions 665d that protrude inward alternately at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide section 665b. The ball ejection passage 665 allows the game ball B flowing through the vertical guide section 665b, which extends vertically downward, to alternately come into contact with the multiple protrusions 665d, thereby causing the game ball B to flow down in a zigzag pattern, thereby suppressing an increase in its flow speed, and suppressing the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection outlet 665c.

This ball removal and discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage consisting of a horizontal guide section 665a and a vertical guide section 665b, so that when the ball removal lever 593 is operated to discharge the game balls B in the ball tank 552, many game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B that is shot into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then detected by the out sensor 664 and discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (remove) the game ball B in the ball tank 552, etc., the game ball B discharged to the ball removal passage 580b side by operating the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall through the ball removal guide portion 627 and the ball removal discharge passage 665, which are separate and independent from the out ball passage 663. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately counted. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can calculate an accurate payout rate (ball payout rate) of game balls B based on the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664.

The number of game balls B (number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is the sum of the number of game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a and received by the general winning opening 2001, the first lower starting opening 2003, the first upper starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first large winning opening 2006, the second large winning opening 2007 (V winning opening 2008, losing opening 2009), etc., and that have been discharged from the game board 5, and the number of game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a and then received by the out opening 2020 or the sub-out opening 2021 without being received by any of the winning openings, and that is the number of game balls B shot into the game area 5a (number of shot balls).

Note that the payout rate (ball output rate) changes depending on the game status, so the payout rate within a specified period (for example, per unit time, per specified time, per day, etc.) is calculated as follows: "Number of payouts within a specified period ÷ Number of balls out within a specified period = Payout rate within a specified period."

In addition, according to this embodiment, the base unit 620A of the main frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with an out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, and the game ball B flowing through the out ball passage 663 is detected by an out sensor 664. Since the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected, there is no need to provide an out ball detection unit on the game board 5 that detects "out balls," and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified to reduce costs.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the rear end of the ball ejection passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. This means that the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 are located away from the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, etc., and this reduces the impact on the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, etc., of electrical noise caused by static electricity and induced currents generated by the flow of many game balls B through the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to malfunction due to the flow of game balls B.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the game ball B, whose flow speed has been suppressed by the out ball straightening section 663b of the out ball passage 663, is detected by the out sensor 664. This makes it possible to weaken the impact on the out sensor 664 caused by the flow of the game ball B, thereby reducing the risk of the out sensor 664 being worn out and damaged early.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, the player will want many game balls B to be paid out, so if the displayed payout rate is high, the player will immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out many game balls B, making it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to play on. Also, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, if a player commits a fraudulent act that pays out many game balls B, the displayed payout rate will be higher than normal, making it easier for other players and staff at the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to notice the fraudulent act, which will make the player hesitate to commit the fraudulent act, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that is not visible to the player, amusement hall staff can see it and detect fraudulent activity for the same reasons as above. Also, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, this may be due to a malfunction within the pachinko machine 1 (e.g., obstructing nails, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay board, connectors, wiring cables, various sensors, etc.), making it possible to respond to the malfunction early and reducing the burden on the amusement hall.

Furthermore, since an out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, there is no need to provide a structure (e.g., an out ball detection unit) for detecting game ball B discharged to the game board 5, which reduces the cost of the game board 5 and makes it possible to secure space on the game board 5 for the structure for detecting the game ball B being discharged. By providing a presentation device in the secured space, a pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be made that provides more entertainment for players.

In addition, since the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide section 665b with multiple protrusions 665d protruding alternately, the speed at which the game balls B flow through the vertical guide section 665b can be reduced, thereby preventing damage to the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 caused by the impact of the circulating game balls B, and damage to the island equipment of the game hall that receives the game balls B discharged from the ball ejection/discharge passage 665.

In addition, a meandering out-ball straightening section 663b is provided in the out-ball passage 663, and a vertical guide section 665b with multiple protrusions 665d is provided in the ball removal and discharge passage 665, which can suppress the circulation speed of the game balls B, thereby reducing the electrical noise emitted from the game balls B circulating in the out-ball passage 663 and the ball removal and discharge passage 665. This reduces the impact on the power supply board 630 and payout control board 633, which are located nearby, and allows the pachinko machine 1 to malfunction less due to the circulation of game balls B.

In addition, because the out ball outlet 663d and the ball outlet 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 are open downward, the game balls B are ejected downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665, so that the game balls B are less likely to collide with other pachinko machines or walls installed behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment, and damage to the other pachinko machines or walls can be avoided. In addition, because the game balls B are ejected downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665, the ejected game balls B are less likely to scatter, and it is possible to easily collect the game balls B ejected from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 on the island equipment side.

Furthermore, a base unit 660 having a ball ejection passage 665 and an out ball passage 663 is provided below the portion of the main frame 4 where the game board 5 is attached. This means that the game ball B that has been shot into the game area 5a on the game board 5 can be delivered to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660 simply by ejecting it downward. This allows the configuration for ejecting the game ball B on the game board 5 to be simple (easy) and reduces the cost of the game board 5.

In addition, since the ball ejection/discharge opening 665c of the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 and the out-ball ejection opening 663d of the out-ball passage 663 are located behind the outer frame 2, it is possible to prevent the game balls B discharged from the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 or the out-ball passage 663 from colliding with the outer frame 2. This prevents the game balls B flowing with force through the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 or the out-ball passage 663 from colliding with the outer frame 2, which would damage the outer frame 2, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to be damaged.

In addition, since the ball ejection/discharge opening 665c of the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection opening 663d of the out ball passage 663 are located behind the outer frame 2, there is no need to advance the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) that collects the game balls B on the island equipment side to a position overlapping with the outer frame 2, which reduces the effort required to install the pachinko machine 1 and the effort required to move the pachinko machine 1.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball ejection in the base unit]
Next, another embodiment of the ball discharge in the above-mentioned substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to Figures 125 and 126. Figure 125 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out-ball discharge port of the out-ball passage. Figure 126(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is removable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in (a) with the out sensor removed.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 125 has a guide piece 667 for guiding the game ball B rearward provided at the out ball outlet 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. In more detail, in this embodiment, near the downstream end of the out ball passage 663, there is a junction 663e that joins with the ball removal and discharge passage 665. The junction 663e opens downward, and its open end serves as the out ball outlet 663d (ball removal and discharge outlet 665c). The guide piece 667 protrudes rearward a short distance from the front wall of the out ball outlet 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d abuts against the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally downward and rearward. As a result, when the present pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of an amusement hall, the game ball B can be easily released toward the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B that is located behind the front of the island equipment (within the island equipment), and the game ball B can be reliably collected on the island equipment side.

In addition, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, since the induction piece 667 can direct the release direction of the game ball B diagonally downward toward the rear, even if the out-ball outlet 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is located close to the position directly below the play area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 (close to the front side of the island equipment), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island equipment. Therefore, since it is possible to arrange the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball outlet 663d) as far forward as possible, the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4 can be made wider, and since the out-ball passage 663 is farther away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., the influence of electrical noise due to static electricity and induced currents generated by the flow of many game balls B through the out-ball passage 663 on the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633 can be reduced, and a pachinko machine 1 with fewer malfunctions due to the flow of game balls B can be obtained.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, the out sensor 664 is detachably attached from below to the out ball discharge port 663d in the out ball passage 663. In this embodiment, there is a sensor mounting recess 663f formed at the downstream end of the downward guide section 663c in the out ball passage 663, which is open downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and a sensor cover 668 that restricts the downward movement of the out sensor 664 accommodated in the sensor mounting recess 663f.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end of the lower guide section 663c, which is connected to the downstream end of the out-ball straightening section 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. In this embodiment, the base unit 660 is also formed from a transparent material, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be seen from the top and bottom of the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 has a main body 668a that extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and has its base end rotatably attached to the base unit 660, a through hole 668b that passes through the game ball B at a position that coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body 668a, and a resiliently deformable locking claw portion 668c that is provided on the opposite side of the base end of the main body 668a.

The base end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the outer side of the sensor mounting recess 663f on the base unit 660, opposite the out ball straightening section 663b. The locking claw section 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to a locking section 663g provided on the outer side of the out ball straightening section 663b side relative to the sensor mounting recess 663f on the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 is rotated so that the locking claw portion 668c moves upward with the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 coincides with the out ball passage 663, and the locking claw portion 668c is locked with the locking portion 663g to close the sensor cover 668. The main body portion 668a abuts against the underside of the out sensor 664, restricting the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and the out sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 126 (a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and the game ball B that has flowed through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664 and then discharged downward through the through hole 668b. The through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663.

When replacing (removing) the out sensor 664, the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw portion 668c and release it from the locking portion 663g. Then, the sensor cover 668 is rotated around the base end side of the main body portion 668a so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward, and the main body portion 668a of the sensor cover 668 moves away from the underside of the out sensor 664, and the out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 126(b)).

As shown in FIG. 126(b), in this embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is rotated open, a certain amount of gap is created between the bottom end of the sensor cover 668 and the top end of the object at risk of contact, as indicated by the two-dot chain line (e.g., the top surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2, the top end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43, etc.), or between the sensor cover 668 and the bottom end of the main body frame 4. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 is opened or closed relative to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with the object at risk of contact, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, the out sensor 664 detects all game balls B that are inserted into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and so there is a risk that the out sensor 664 will wear out quickly and become damaged as many game balls B are circulated. However, as described above, the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, so that the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced.

In addition, according to this embodiment, even if the main frame 4 is opened and closed relative to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with objects that may come into contact with the outer frame 2 or the like, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. In detail, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, there is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 will come off due to vibrations caused by the contact of many game balls B, causing the sensor cover 668 to open. If the sensor cover 668 opens during play and the out sensor 664 falls downward, the out sensor 664 will no longer detect the game ball B even though the game ball B has been shot into the play area 5a, and the occurrence of an abnormality will be reported by the main control board 1310, etc. When this abnormality is reported, the game hall staff will open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2 to check for the abnormality, but because there is a gap between the bottom end of the open sensor cover 668 and objects that may come into contact with it, such as the outer frame 2, the main frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with objects that may come into contact with it, preventing damage to the sensor cover 668.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment of FIG. 126, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at the outer portion opposite the out ball straightening portion 663b in the sensor mounting recess 663f, and since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be clearly seen from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664. Therefore, when the game ball B becomes stuck in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be seen from the outside, so that the location where the game ball B is stuck can be identified at a glance, and the jam of the game ball B can be quickly resolved.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and stood upright, and it is easy to replace the out sensor 664 by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and to check inside the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal and discharge passage 665 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660, etc.

In addition, according to this embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so that a game that was interrupted due to damage to the out sensor 664 can be resumed early, which reduces the player's frustration caused by the interruption of the game and prevents a decline in interest. It also prevents a decline in the operating rate of this pachinko machine 1, and reduces the burden on the game hall.

Furthermore, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when replacing the out sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 remains suspended from the base unit 660 and will not fall off, thereby preventing the sensor cover 668 from being lost.

In addition, the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below is attached rotatably around an axis in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction) at an outer portion near the out ball passage 663 through which many game balls B flow in the base unit 660. Therefore, the distribution of the downward force applied to the sensor cover 668 through the out sensor 664 due to the flow of the game balls B is large on the side (one end side) that is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, and relatively small on the side (other end side) of the locking claw portion 668c that is locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, even if a downward force acts on the sensor cover 668 through the out sensor 664 as many game balls B pass through the out sensor 664, most of it can be received on the one end side that is rotatably attached, so that the locking at the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side is less likely to be released, and the sensor cover 668 can be reduced from opening and causing the out sensor 664 to fall off.

[4-14. Third embodiment of substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 700 of the third embodiment, which is different from the above, will be described in detail with reference to Figures 127 to 136. Figure 127(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, with the power supply unit, the dispensing control unit, and the interface unit omitted, as seen from the right front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the left front. Figure 128(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of Figure 127 as seen from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the lower right rear. Figure 129(a) is a plan view of the board unit of Figure 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line C-C-C in (a), (c) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line S-S-C in (a), and Figure 130 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line C-S-C in Figure 129(a).

Figure 131 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Figure 127 when disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 132 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Figure 127 when disassembled and viewed from the rear. Figure 133 (a) is an oblique view of the ball path member of the board unit of Figure 127 when viewed from the front, and (b) is an oblique view of the ball path member of the board unit of Figure 127 when viewed from the rear. Figure 134 is an explanatory diagram showing the elimination of ball jams in the board unit of Figure 127. Figure 135 is an explanatory diagram showing the prevention of the intrusion of linear illegal tools in the board unit of Figure 127. Figure 136 is an explanatory diagram showing the removal of debris in the board unit of Figure 127.

The board unit 700 of the third embodiment differs from the board unit 620 and board unit 620A described above only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and is otherwise identical in configuration. Therefore, here, the same components as those of the board unit 620 and board unit 620A described above are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions are omitted. Also, in Figures 127 to 136, the power supply unit 620c, dispensing control unit 620d, and interface unit 620e are not shown.

The board unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 or board unit 620A. The board unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 below the game board placement section 501c, a base unit 710 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 710, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d from the rear.

This board unit 700 is equipped with a first ball path 701 through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow, a second ball path 702 that is provided behind the first ball path 701 and through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow, a first ball sensor 703 that detects game balls B flowing through the first ball path 701, a second ball sensor 704 that detects game balls B flowing through the second ball path 702, and a ball removal path 705 through which game balls B released from the lower ball removal path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 flow. The first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 each have an entrance that opens upward, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 detect game balls B one by one and then discharge them downward.

In this embodiment, the game ball B received in the out port 2020 or the sub-out port 2021 on the game board 5 is configured to circulate through the first ball path 701, and the game ball B received in the general prize port 2001, the first lower start port 2003, the first upper start port 2004, the second start port 2005, the first large prize port 2006, and the second large prize port 2007 (V prize port 2008, loss port 2009) on the game board 5 is configured to circulate through the second ball path 702. In other words, the out balls are configured to circulate through the first ball path 701, and the safe balls are configured to circulate through the second ball path 702, so that the first ball sensor 703 can count the number of all out balls, and the second ball sensor 704 can count the number of all safe balls. As a result, if fraudulent activity is committed against a winning hole (winning hole sensor) such as the general winning hole 2001, the first lower starting hole 2003, the first upper starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, the first large winning hole 2006, the second large winning hole 2007 (V winning hole 2008, losing hole 2009) on the game board 5, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side and the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704 will differ, making it possible to detect fraudulent activity against a winning hole.

In further detail, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 comprises a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a portion of the speaker box 623 from the rear, a rear base 712 attached to the rear side of the front base 711 and having a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface and a ball removal passage 705, a ball path member 713 provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 and having a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702, a security cover 714 provided on the front base 711 and the rear base 712 in an openable and closable manner to eliminate clogging of the game ball B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and to prevent the intrusion of illegal tools, a passage wall member 715 attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closing the rear end side of the ball removal passage 705, and a frame relay board 716 attached to the rear side of the rear base 712. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, rear base 712, ball path member 713, and passage wall member 715 are made transparent.

The front base 711 is formed in a box shape that is long from side to side and open to the rear and upward. The ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711 from the rear. The front base 711 closes the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 with the front wall. The front base 711 has a ball receiving opening 711a that opens long in the left-right direction in the upper peripheral wall portion, and a resolution opening 711b that opens at a position from the left-right center to the right of the lower peripheral wall portion. When the front base 711 houses the ball path member 713 inside, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball receiving opening 711a. In addition, the front base 711 supports the security cover 714 on the front end side of the resolution opening 711b so that it can rotate around an axis extending in the left-right direction.

The rear base 712 is formed in a box shape that is long from side to side and open to the rear. The rear base 712 closes the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 with its front wall. The rear base 712 has a ball removal path 705 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, guides it to the right when viewed from the front, and then guides it downward and discharges it. The ball removal path 705 is provided in the box-shaped rear base 712 and is entirely open to the rear. The rear end side of the ball removal path 705 is closed by the path wall member 715. The part of the ball removal path 705 of the rear base 712 that is located above the speaker box 623 (the part on the left end side when viewed from the front) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711 and the rear side is closed by the path wall member 715.

The rear base 712 also has a first discharge guide section 712a that receives the game ball B that has flowed through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward, and a second discharge guide section 712b that receives the game ball B that has flowed through the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward. The inlet sides of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b protrude forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the inlet of the first discharge guide section 712a opens forward, while the inlet of the second discharge guide section 712b opens upward. The outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b are provided at the same position in the front-to-rear direction. The rear side of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b is open backward from the front wall, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 715.

In the rear base 712, the outlets of the ball removal passage 705, the first discharge guide section 712a, and the second discharge guide section 712b are located to the left of the release opening 711b of the front base 711 when viewed from the front, and are arranged in order from left to right. The outlet of the ball removal passage 705 is wider forward at the front end and narrower rearward at the rear end than the outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b (see FIG. 128(b)). In other words, the outlet of the ball removal passage 705 is larger (wider) in the front-to-rear direction than the outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted from the rear into the box-shaped front base 711 and housed therein. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702. The ball path member 713 has a left wall portion 713a extending vertically downward from the upper end at the right end, an upper left shelf portion 713b sloping downward from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a toward the right, a stepped wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, an upper right shelf portion 713d sloping downward from the lower end of the stepped wall portion 713c toward the right, a straightening wall portion 713e extending diagonally downward to the left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a straightening wall portion 713e extending diagonally downward to the right from the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e. It has a lower shelf 713f that rises to the right from a position separated to the right of the upper right shelf 713d and extends further to the right than the upper right shelf 713d, a right wall 713g that extends vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf 713f to approximately the same height as the upper end of the left wall 713a, an upper wall 713h that extends leftward from the upper end of the right wall 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf 713d, and a U-shaped groove wall 713i that is connected to the left end of the upper wall 713h and opens upward. The left end of the groove wall 713i is located to the right of the center of the upper right shelf 713d in the left-right direction.

The ball path member 713 also has an upper lower wall portion 713j extending leftward from the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e, a middle wall portion 713k extending vertically upward from the left end of the upper lower wall portion 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b, a eaves portion 713l extending leftward from the middle of the left side of the middle wall portion 713k, a hanging wall portion 713m extending vertically downward from near the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, and a lower lower wall portion 713n extending leftward from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713m in parallel with the upper lower wall portion 713j. The portion of the lower lower wall portion 713n located below between the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is cut out at the top and bottom to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 has a plurality of blocking ribs 713o that extend downward from the undersides of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h and are spaced apart in the left-right direction. The ball path member 713 also has a flat partition wall portion 713p that divides the space surrounded by the left wall portion 713a, the upper left shelf portion 713b, the step wall portion 713c, the upper right shelf portion 713d, the straightening wall portion 713e, the lower shelf portion 713f, the right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the upper lower wall portion 713j, the middle wall portion 713k, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower lower wall portion 713n into front and rear portions.

The ball path member 713 also has a number of notches 713q in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f, which are recessed from the front and rear ends of each of the notches 713q toward the partition wall portion 713p. Each of the notches 713q is arranged so that when assembled to the board unit 700, a gap smaller in the front-to-rear direction than the radius of the game ball B is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712, and dirt and dust in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through the gap.

The ball path member 713 is provided in the area between the flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has multiple guide protrusions 713r extending to the left and right.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 has a front sensor accommodating section 713s that is surrounded by the upper lower wall section 713j, the hanging wall section 713m, and the lower lower wall section 713n in front of the partition wall section 713p and accommodates the first ball sensor 703, and a rear sensor accommodating section 713t that is surrounded by the upper lower wall section 713j, the hanging wall section 713m, and the lower lower wall section 713n in rear of the partition wall section 713p and accommodates the second ball sensor 704.

The first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are accommodated in the front sensor housing 713s and the rear sensor housing 713t so that the detection holes of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are located below the area between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, that is, with the detection holes facing right. Although not shown in the figure, the wiring cables extending from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 extend leftward from the front sensor housing 713s and the rear sensor housing 713t beyond the middle wall portion 713k.

The ball path member 713 has a first ball guide section 713u that is provided on the underside of the lower wall section 713n at a position forward of the partition wall section 713p, and that protrudes downward and is open to the rear. When the first ball guide section 713u is assembled to the board unit 700, the right half of the rear end side is closed by the front face of the rear base 712, and the left half faces the inlet side of the first discharge guide section 712a of the rear base 712. The first ball guide section 713u can guide the game ball B that flows downward from between the straightening wall section 713e and the lower shelf section 713f in front of the partition wall section 713p to the right and then to the rear, and deliver it to the first discharge guide section 712a of the rear base 712.

On the other hand, behind the partition wall 713p in the ball path member 713, below the portion of the lower wall 713n that opens downward (the portion of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing 713t), there is an inlet that opens upward to the second discharge guide section 712b of the rear base 712. This allows the game ball B that flows downward from between the straightening wall section 713e and the lower shelf section 713f behind the partition wall section 713p to be handed over to the second discharge guide section 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the resolution opening 711b in the front base 711. The right end of the upper right shelf 713d is located to the right of the right end of the resolution opening 711b in the front base 711. The left end of the lower shelf 713f is located to the left of the left end of the resolution opening 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, the upper part directly above the resolution opening 711b of the front base 711 is covered by the straightening wall 713e. The upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f are inclined in a straight line. On the other hand, the straightening wall 713e is inclined in a curved line, and is curved so that the left end side faces vertically downward. The distance (height) between the flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined to become narrower toward the left so that the left end is at a height that allows one game ball B to pass through. The flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f can straighten multiple game balls B in a line and guide them downward.

As described above, the gap between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is formed so that the vertical dimension narrows as it moves to the left (the downstream direction of the flow of the game balls B). Therefore, depending on the amount of game balls B in circulation, there is a risk that multiple game balls B may get caught between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, causing ball jamming (see FIG. 134). Since the straightening wall portion 713e is located above the release port 711b, if ball jamming occurs between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened to open the release port 711b, and a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f from below through the release port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f, and the tool can be used to poke the game balls B that have gotten caught to release the ball jamming.

The lower shelf 713f is provided with a notch 713q for clearing jammed balls and allowing dirt and dust to fall downward, so there is a risk that a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire or a catheter could be inserted from below through the notch 713q into the upper part of the lower shelf 713f (the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702), and the tip of the illegal tool could be extended upward from the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702), allowing illegal acts to be committed against the game board 5 located above. The insertion of such illegal tools is not limited to the lower shelf 713f, and there is a similar risk in the upper left shelf 713b and upper right shelf 713d, which are also provided with the notch 713q.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the lower surface of the upper wall portion 713h are provided with a plurality of flat blocking ribs 713o spaced apart in the left-right direction and extending downward, so that even if the tip of a linear illegal tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it abuts against the blocking rib 713o and can prevent the tip from moving, thereby preventing further insertion of the illegal tool (see FIG. 135). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of illegal acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall where the present pachinko machine 1 is installed, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

In addition, in the areas to the right of the middle wall 713k in the upper right shelf 713d and the upper left shelf 713b, the lower and left and right sides are closed off by the flow straightening wall 713e, the lower wall upper 713j, and the middle wall 713k, which do not have the notch 713q. Therefore, unauthorized tools cannot be inserted from below through the notch 713q in the corresponding areas of the upper right shelf 713d and the upper left shelf 713b, and unauthorized acts cannot be performed through the notch 713q in those areas.

As described above, the ball path member 713 has multiple notches 713q on the upper left shelf 713b, upper right shelf 713d, and lower shelf 713f, so that dirt and dust can be discharged downward through the notches 713q (see FIG. 136). Dirt and dust discharged downward through the notches 713q located above the front sensor housing 713s and rear sensor housing 713t in the upper left shelf 713b is contained in the space surrounded by the straightening wall 713e, the upper lower wall 713j, and the middle wall 713k. This prevents dirt and dust from adhering to the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 contained in the front sensor housing 713s and rear sensor housing 713t.

In addition, a wiring cable is connected by a connector to the left end side of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing section 713s and the rear sensor housing section 713t, and the wiring cable and the connector protrude to the left from the front sensor housing section 713s and the rear sensor housing section 713t. In other words, the wiring cable and the connector of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 protrude to the left beyond the middle wall section 713k. In this middle wall portion 713k, the eaves portion 713l extends to the left from the upper portion of the front sensor housing portion 713s and the rear sensor housing portion 713t on the left side surface, so that dirt and dust that falls downward through the cutout portion 713q formed in the upper left shelf portion 713b is guided to the left by the inclination of the eaves portion 713l and is prevented from falling onto the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, which protrude leftward beyond the middle wall portion 713k, thereby avoiding the occurrence of problems caused by dirt, etc.

The base unit 710 forms a first ball path 701 by the left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i, first ball guide portion 713u on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, and the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712, and forms a second ball path 702 by the left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, and the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The security cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape, and is attached near the front end of the resolution opening 711b of the front base 711 in a state in which the front end side can rotate around an axis in the left-right direction. The security cover 714 also has an elastic locking part 714a at the rear end side that is locked to the rear base 712. As shown in FIG. 130, when the security cover 714 is locked to the rear base 712 with the elastic locking part 714a locked horizontally, the resolution opening 711b is closed, and when the security cover 714 is unlocked and rotated so that the rear end side is positioned downward and is locked vertically, the resolution opening 711b is opened. In other words, the security cover 714 can open and close the resolution opening 711b.

The security cover 714 can close the elimination opening 711b of the front base 711 by closing it, so that it is possible to prevent a linear illegal tool from being inserted into the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702) through the elimination opening 711b. In addition, when a ball jam occurs between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713, the security cover 714 can open the elimination opening 711b of the front base 711 by opening it, so that a rod-shaped tool can be inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f from below through the elimination opening 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f to eliminate the ball jam of the game ball B. This ball jam elimination work is performed with the main body frame 4 open forward relative to the outer frame 2.

When the release opening 711b is open (vertical), the lower end (the end on the elastic locking portion 714a side) of this security cover 714 is located below the height (here, the height shown by the dashed line in FIG. 130) of the object at risk of contact (here, the connecting tube portion 43a of the back panel member 43 in the outer frame 2). Therefore, even if the main frame 4 is opened forward relative to the outer frame 2 to release the ball jam of the game ball B in the ball path member 713 and then the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 with the security cover 714 open, the open security cover 714 abuts against the object at risk of contact (the connecting tube portion 43a of the back panel member 43), and the main frame 4 cannot be closed. This makes it possible to avoid forgetting to close the security cover 714, and ensures that the security cover 714 is closed, thereby enabling the security cover 714 to exert its security function.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the security cover 714 opens for some reason while the main body frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, opening the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 in this state will cause an object that may be in danger of coming into contact with the open security cover 714 from the front. However, since the front end of the security cover 714 is attached so as to be rotatable about an axis in the left-right direction, when an object that may be in danger of coming into contact with the security cover 714 comes into contact with the security cover 714 from the front, the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction. This allows the main body frame 4 to be opened without the security cover 714 getting caught on an object that may be in danger of coming into contact, thereby preventing damage to the security cover 714 or the object that may be in danger of coming into contact.

In addition, in this embodiment, the security cover 714 is designed to remain closed because it is rare for game balls B to become stuck between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f. Therefore, the elastic locking portion 714a is set to lock tightly so that the security cover is difficult to open.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712, and closes the rear end side of the ball removal passage 705, which is open to the rear. The passage wall member 715 also closes the portion of the rear base 712 that is open to the rear at the outlet side of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b, and can discharge the game balls B that have circulated through the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b downward. Furthermore, the passage wall member 715 and the rear base 712 sandwich the frame relay board 716, and cover the rear side of the frame relay board 716.

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715. The frame relay board 716 is for relaying the connection between the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704 of the door frame 3 and the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 129(a), the base unit 710 of this embodiment has the upper left shelf 713b and a part of the upper right shelf 713d of the ball path member 713 facing upward from the ball receiving port 711a of the front base 711, and can receive all game balls B released downward from the game board 5. The game balls B that fall to the upper left shelf 713b or the upper right shelf 713d through the ball receiving port 711a roll to the right and flow down from the right end of the upper right shelf 713d onto the lower shelf 713f. The game balls B that flow down to the lower shelf 713f roll to the left on the lower shelf 713f. At this time, if multiple game balls B are stacked up and down on the lower shelf 713f, they are broken up by the upper straightening wall 713e so that they are lined up as they move to the left.

The game ball B that rolls to the left on the lower shelf 713f falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf 713f, and if it is forward of the partition wall 713p, it is detected by the first ball sensor 703 housed in the front sensor housing 713s, passes through the first ball guide 713u, and is discharged downward through the first discharge guide 712a of the rear base 712. On the other hand, if it is behind the partition wall 713p, it is detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing 713t, and is discharged downward through the second discharge guide 712b of the rear base 712.

In this way, in the base unit 710 of this embodiment, the game ball B flows through separate paths in front of and behind the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 and is discharged downward, with the first ball path 701 being the side in front of the partition wall portion 713p and the second ball path 702 being the side behind the partition wall portion 713p. Therefore, the game ball B that falls forward of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 from the game board 5 flows through the first ball path 701 and can be discharged downward after being detected by the first ball sensor 703. On the other hand, the game ball B that falls backward of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 from the game board 5 flows through the second ball path 702 and can be discharged downward after being detected by the second ball sensor 704.

The base unit 710 can also discharge game balls B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 to remove game balls B from the ball tank 552, etc., downward through the ball removal passage 705 of the rear base 712. Game balls B discharged downward from the first discharge guide section 712a (first ball path 701), second discharge guide section 712b (second ball path 702), and ball removal passage 705 of the base unit 710 are delivered to a section (out receiving section, bucket, etc.) on the island equipment side that collects game balls B.

According to the base unit 710 in the board unit 700 of this embodiment, multiple notches 713q are provided in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f, so that dirt and dust can fall through the notches 713q and be removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, thereby preventing dirt and the like from interfering with the flow of the game ball B and suppressing the occurrence of ball clogging, etc.

In addition, since the front base 711, rear base 712, ball path member 713, and passage wall member 715 are formed transparently, by opening the door frame 3 forward relative to the main body frame 4 and removing the game board 5 from the main body frame 4, it is possible to easily check from above the base unit 710 (substrate unit 700) whether or not game ball B is stuck in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702). Furthermore, in the area where the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713 align the game balls B in a row, a notch portion 713q is provided in the lower shelf portion 713f. Therefore, if balls become jammed between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, by opening the main body frame 4 forward relative to the outer frame 2 and opening the security cover 714, a rod-shaped tool can be inserted from below between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the release opening 711b and the notch portion 713q, and the ball jam can be released using the tool.

Furthermore, a downwardly opening release port 711b is provided below the straightening wall portion 713e in the lower shelf portion 713f, and a security cover 714 is provided to close the release port 711b. As a result, the ball jam can be released through the release port 711b as described above. In addition, by keeping the release port 711b closed by the security cover 714 under normal conditions, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools from being inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 from the release port 711b, and a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against illegal activities can be provided.

In addition, the security cover 714, which opens and closes the release opening 711b, is opened and closed by rotating it around a left-right axis at the front end. Therefore, if an attempt is made to close the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 while forgetting to close the security cover 714, the security cover 714 will come into contact with an object that may be in danger of contact (the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43), making it impossible to close the main frame 4. This makes it possible to make the user aware that the security cover 714 has been left closed, and allows the security cover 714 to be closed reliably, thereby enabling the security cover 714 to exert its security function.

Furthermore, the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the lower surface of the upper wall portion 713h are provided with a plurality of flat blocking ribs 713o spaced apart in the left-right direction and extending downward, so that even if the tip of a linear illegal tool attempts to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it abuts against the blocking rib 713o and the tip movement is prevented, and further insertion of the illegal tool can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of illegal acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall where the present pachinko machine 1 is installed, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

In addition, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are configured to form a complex distribution path that meanders and cranks due to the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713, so that even if a linear illegal tool is inserted from the exit side of the first discharge guide portion 712a or the second discharge guide portion 712b, the intrusion can be prevented by the complex path, and the intrusion of the illegal tool into the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be prevented.

In addition, since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can detect (count) all game balls B released from the game board 5, there is no need to provide a structure (e.g., an out ball detection unit) for detecting game balls B discharged onto the game board 5, which reduces the cost of the game board 5 and makes it possible to secure space on the game board 5 for the structure for detecting the game balls B being discharged. By providing a presentation device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be made more entertaining to players.

In addition, because out balls circulate along the first ball path 701 and safe balls circulate along the second ball path 702, by comparing the number of safe balls counted on the game board 5 with the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704, it is possible to determine whether or not fraudulent activity is occurring on the game board 5, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, the player will want many game balls B to be paid out, so if the displayed payout rate is high, the player will immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out many game balls B, making it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to play on. Also, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, if a player commits a fraudulent act that pays out many game balls B, the displayed payout rate will be higher than normal, making it easier for other players and staff at the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to notice the fraudulent act, which will make the player hesitate to commit the fraudulent act, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that is not visible to the player, amusement hall staff can see it and detect fraudulent activity for the same reasons as above. Also, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, this may be due to a malfunction within the pachinko machine 1 (e.g., obstructing nails, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay board, connectors, wiring cables, various sensors, etc.), making it possible to respond to the malfunction early and reducing the burden on the amusement hall.

In addition, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separate from the ball removal passage 705 for discharging the game balls B in the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 do not count the game balls B that have been removed. Therefore, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can accurately count only the game balls B that have been released from the game board 5.

In the above embodiment, out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, but this is not limited to the above. Safe balls may flow through the first ball path 701 and out balls may flow through the second ball path 702, or game ball B discharged from the game board 5 may flow through either the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 regardless of whether it is a safe ball or an out ball.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the release opening 711b is opened and closed by rotating the security cover 714, but this is not limited to this, and the release opening 711b may be opened and closed by sliding it back and forth or left and right.

In the above embodiment, a single partition wall portion 713p is used to separate the game ball B released downward from the game board 5, so that it is discharged through one of two ball paths separated at the front and rear of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to have three or more ball paths separated at the front and rear by multiple partition wall portions, and to discharge the game ball B released from the game board 5 downward through one of the ball paths.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall structure of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 137 to 145. Fig. 137 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine with the center gadget and the like made opaque. Fig. 138 is a perspective view of the game board in Fig. 137 seen from the right front, Fig. 139 is a perspective view of the game board in Fig. 137 seen from the left front, and Fig. 140 is a perspective view of the game board in Fig. 137 seen from the back. Fig. 141 is a front view of the game board showing the inside of the game area in which the game balls circulate, with the front unit cut parallel to the face of the game panel. Fig. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components as seen from the front, and Fig. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components as seen from the back. Fig. 144 is a cross-sectional view cut along the soot line in Fig. 137, and Fig. 145 is a cross-sectional view cut along the soot line in Fig. 137.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is inserted by a player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. The game area 5a is provided with a general winning port 2001, a gate 2002, a first lower starting port 2003, a first upper starting port 2004, a second starting port 2005, a first large winning port 2006, a second large winning port 2007, and a V winning port 2008, which provide a player with a predetermined privilege (e.g., the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) by receiving or passing a game ball B. This game board 5 is for playing an entertaining game in which the handle 195 is operated to strike the ball and the ball B circulates within the game area 5a so that the ball B is received by or passes through the general winning opening 2001, the gate 2002, the first lower starting opening 2003, the first upper starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first large winning opening 2006, and the second large winning opening 2007, etc., within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 (see FIG. 203) that detect magnetic fields acting illegally within the game area 5a, and a vibration sensor 1040 (see FIG. 203, etc.) that detects vibrations acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1). A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 also includes a rear cell 1130 that is provided behind the transparent game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) and decorates the game area 5a, a cell fixing piece 1140 that supports the rear cell 1130 on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, a board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit 1300 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and has a main control board 1310 (see Figure 203, etc.) that controls the game content that is played by shooting a game ball B into the game area 5a.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, a peripheral control unit 1500 that is located on the rear side of the game panel 1100, a performance display device 1600 that is located in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined performance image, a panel relay board (not shown) that is located on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a rear unit 3000 that is attached to the rear of the game panel 1100.

The performance display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the rear unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear side of the performance display device 1600.

The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can receive the game ball B that has been shot into the game area 5a, a gate 2002 that is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, a first lower starting opening 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and is always open and can receive the game ball B, a first upper starting opening 2004 that receives the game ball B that has been sorted by the center sorting unit 2520 through the upper warp passage 2513, and a gate 2002 that detects the passage of the game ball B. The game board 5 is provided with a second starting opening 2005 that can receive the game ball B depending on the result of the lottery of the normal pattern drawn by the first starting opening 2005, a first large prize winning opening 2006 or a second large prize winning opening 2007 that can receive the game ball B depending on the result of the lottery of the first special pattern drawn by the game ball B being received into the first lower starting opening 2003 or the first upper starting opening 2004 or the second special pattern drawn by the game ball B being received into the second starting opening 2005, and a V prize winning opening 2008 that receives the game ball B received into the second large prize winning opening 2007 and allocated by the V allocation unit 2660. The game board 5 is also provided with a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 (see FIG. 203) that detect magnetic fields acting illegally within the game area 5a.

The front unit 2000 is provided with an outlet 2020, which is provided at the most downstream position in the play area 5a and is always open to receive the game ball B, and discharges the received game ball B outside the play area 5a without returning it, and a sub-outlet 2021, which is provided upstream of the outlet 2020 in the play area 5a and is always open to receive the game ball B, and discharges the received game ball B outside the play area 5a without returning it. The outlet 2020 is composed of two outlets, a left outlet 2020a and a right outlet 2020b, with the first lower starting port 2003 in between. The sub-outlet 2021 is composed of two outlets, a left sub-outlet 2021a provided to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the play area 5a, and a right sub-outlet 2021b provided to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the play area 5a.

The front unit 2000 further includes a start port unit 2100 that is attached directly above the bottom end of the play area 5a in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first lower start port 2003 and an out port 2020, a side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning ports 2001 and a left sub-out port 2021a, an upper left side unit 2300 that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, and a frame-shaped center device 2500 that is provided slightly above the center of the play area 5a when viewed from the front and has one general winning port 2001, a gate 2002, a first upper start port 2004, a second start port 2005, a first large winning port 2006, a second large winning port 2007, a V winning port 2008, and a right sub-out port 2021b.

The center gadget 2500 is equipped with a frame-shaped main unit 2510 having a gate 2002 and a first upper starting opening 2004, and an attacca unit 2600 located at the lower right of the main unit 2510 and having one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2005, a first large winning opening 2006, a second large winning opening 2007, a V winning opening 2008, and a right sub-out opening 2021b.

The rear unit 3000 includes a vibration sensor 1040 that detects vibrations acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1), a rear box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, a lock slider 3020 that detachably attaches the performance display device 1600 to the rear wall of the rear box 3010, and a rear board unit 3040 that is located behind the performance display device 1600 and attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010.

The rear unit 3000 also includes a rear ball guide unit 3100 that is provided at the bottom near the front end of the rear box 3010 and through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulates; a rear front upper performance unit 3200 that is provided along the top edge near the front end of the rear box 3010; a rear front left performance unit 3300 that is provided along the left edge near the front end of the rear box 3010; a rear right performance unit 3400 that is provided along the right edge slightly behind the front end of the rear box 3010; a rear rear left performance unit 3500 that is provided in the upper left corner near the rear end of the rear box 3010 behind the rear front left performance unit 3300; and a rear rear performance unit 3600 that is provided near the rear end of the rear box 3010.

Furthermore, the rear unit 3000 is provided with a plurality of mounting supports 3050 for mounting the rear performance unit 3600 to the rear box 3010, and a mounting supporter 3060 for mounting the rear right performance unit 3400 to the rear box 3010.

[5-1. Previous constituent members]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 142 and 143. The front component 1000 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The front component 1000 has an outer shape of a substantially square in front view, an inner shape of a substantially circular shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side of the center in the front view to the upper right diagonal direction in the clockwise circumferential direction, passing the upper end of the center in the front view to the upper right diagonal direction, an inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the front view to the upper left diagonal direction in the front view, and an out guide portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the game area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in the front view and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

The component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 when viewed from the front to near the right side of the component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the lower right rail 1004 along the right side of the component 1000 to below the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with the upper part curved inward of the component 1000; and a collision stop section 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and comes into contact with the game ball B that rolls along the outer rail 1001.

The component 1000 is also provided with a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and can rotate only between a closed position in which it extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap with the outer rail 1001, and an open position in which it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is provided with an outlet 1008 that penetrates from front to back at the rear end of the out guide section 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front within the frame. This outlet 1008 is closed from the front by the starting port unit 2100.

In addition, the front component 1000 is provided with security recesses 1009 recessed rearward from the front end at the outside of the areas near the bottom ends of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extend approximately vertically, the underside of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, the security recesses 1009 are inserted into the rear protruding pieces 172 of the security cover 170 on the door frame 3 that protrude rearward. As a result, the area between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a through the gap between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

The component 1000 also has a notch 1010 that is cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 penetrate the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 and face forward.

Furthermore, the component 1000 is provided with a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a stamp attachment portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner.

Also, the front component 1000 is almost entirely transparent, allowing the game panel 1100 and rear unit 3000 located at the rear to be viewed from the front.

[5-2. Game Panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 142 and 143. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 are attached to it. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel board 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and made of transparent synthetic resin, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110, is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and has the rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed from a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is set to the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that is sufficient to hold obstacle nails planted on the front and the front unit 2000 attached. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position within the play area 5a, and the position corresponding to the outlet 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the bottom end. The panel plate 1110 also has multiple openings 1112 that penetrate from front to back and are used to attach the front unit 2000.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a number of positioning holes formed as round holes and short long holes penetrating from front to back, and a number of engagement steps formed with a thin plate thickness and spaced apart in the left-right direction at the upper and lower edges. The positioning holes are for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting protruding pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement steps are for removably attaching to the panel holder 1120 by engaging with the engagement claws (not shown) or engagement pieces (not shown) of the panel holder 1120.

The panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center device 2500, which is offset above the center when viewed from the front. This makes the panel plate 1110 frame-shaped, and the width perpendicular to the flow direction of the game balls B (circumferential direction of the frame) when viewed from the front is wide enough to line up multiple game balls B on the left, right, and lower sides, excluding the area above the center, and narrow enough that multiple game balls B cannot be lined up on the upper side.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has an external shape that is roughly rectangular and large enough to encompass the panel plate 1110, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (approximately 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (e.g., thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step (not shown) that is roughly the same size as the panel plate 1110 and recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a through hole 1121 that penetrates the holding step in the front-to-rear direction and is roughly the same size as the game area 5a.

The panel holder 1120 also has a notch 1122 cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the previous component 1000, so that when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 penetrate the notch 1010 and the notch to face forward.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The out recess 1123 has an upper portion that communicates with the out port 1008.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of protruding pins that protrude forward from the holding step and are inserted into a plurality of positioning holes in the panel plate 1110, three engagement claws that are disposed outside the holding step and elastically engage with engagement steps at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and a pair of engagement pieces that protrude upward from the lower outer side of the holding step and respectively engage with two engagement steps at the lower edge of the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 can detachably attach the panel plate 1110 in a state where it is housed in the holding step by engaging the engagement steps at the lower edge of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement pieces from the front diagonally above, and then moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 backward to elastically engage the engagement steps at the upper and lower left inclined portions with the engagement claws. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position relative to the panel holder 1120.

This game panel 1100, together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, is formed transparent, so when assembled to the game board 5, the boundaries of the game area 5a are less clearly visible, giving the player a sense of openness, and although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a appears larger (wider) to the player.

In addition, because the game panel 1100, along with the front component 1000, is made transparent, the light from the performance display device 1600, front unit 2000, rear unit 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (towards the player) to appear as if it is emitting light, further enhancing the overall decorativeness of the game board 5.

[5-3. Rear cell]
The rear cell 1130 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 146 to 148. Fig. 146 is an explanatory diagram showing the positions of the rear cell and the cell fixing piece from the front of the game board. Fig. 147(a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear cell and the cell fixing piece disassembled from the front component and the game panel, and Fig. 147(b) is an exploded perspective view of the rear cell and the cell fixing piece disassembled from the front component and the game panel, and Fig. 148(a) is a four-sided view of the cell fixing piece, and Fig. 148(b) is a perspective view of the cell fixing piece seen from the front, and Fig. 148(c) is a perspective view of the cell fixing piece seen from the rear. The rear cell 1130 is provided so as to be visible from the front through the transparent game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and is intended to decorate the game area 5a.

The game board 5 of this embodiment is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and includes a film-like rear cell 1130 with a predetermined pattern, and a cell fixing piece 1140 that supports (attaches) the rear cell 1130 so that it can move freely within a predetermined range relative to the panel plate 1110.

As shown by the hatching in FIG. 146, the rear cell 1130 is provided in the game area 5a (within the frame of the frame-shaped front component 1000 when viewed from the front) behind the area where the game ball B circulates. Specifically, the rear cell 1130 is provided behind three areas: the area between the inner rail 1002 and the center device 2500, the area from the middle of the upper right guide passage group 2541 in the vertical direction to the middle of the lower right guide passage group 2542 in the vertical direction in the center device 2500, and the area from the left of the general winning port 2001 of the attacca unit 2600 in the center device 2500 to below it.

The rear cell 1130 has a portion that protrudes into the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110. Specifically, the rear cell 1130 provided near the gate 2002 has a portion that protrudes into the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 when viewed from the front, and this portion decorates the lower right guide passage group 2542 of the center role piece 2500 from behind.

The rear cell 1130 has multiple support holes 1131, each of which is a round hole with a diameter larger than the width of a semicircular hole at the center of both longitudinal ends. The rear cell 1130 is supported by the panel board 1110 by attaching a cell fixing piece 1140 to the panel board 1110 from the rear through the support holes 1131. The rear cell 1130 also has an opening 1132 at a predetermined position through which a sensor, game ball B, etc. can pass.

The support holes 1131 of the rear cells 1130 are located in a position that is difficult to see from the front when assembled to the game board 5. Specifically, they are located at the rear near the peripheral wall 2511a of the center gimmick 2500. As a result, even if the panel board 1110 and the center gimmick 2500 are transparent, the presence of the peripheral wall 2511a makes it difficult to see the rear, making it possible to make the support holes 1131 and cell fixing pieces 1140 difficult to see, improving the appearance of the game area 5a.

As shown in FIG. 148, the cell fixing piece 1140 has a rectangular, flat body piece 1141, a protrusion 1142 that protrudes in a short cylindrical shape from the center of the body piece 1141, an attachment hole 1143 that penetrates the protrusion 1142 and the body piece 1141, and a pair of positioning pins 1144 that protrude in a cylindrical shape from both sides of the protrusion 1142 on the body piece 1141. The cell fixing piece 1140 is made transparent so that it is not noticeable when assembled to the game board 5.

The main body piece 1141 of the cell fixing piece 1140 is formed to a size that almost covers the support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130. The protrusion 1142 has a diameter half that of the central round hole in the support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130, and protrudes slightly longer than the thickness of the rear cell 1130.

The mounting hole 1143 of the cell fixing piece 1140 is provided coaxially with the protrusion 1142, and has a countersunk seat on the opposite side to the protrusion 1142. This mounting hole 1143 is for mounting the cell fixing piece 1140 to the panel board 1110, and a countersunk mounting screw is inserted through it. The positioning pin 1144 protrudes from the main body piece 1141 in the same direction as the protrusion 1142, and longer than the protrusion 1142. The positioning pin 1144 can be inserted into the positioning hole 1110b provided in the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 to position the cell fixing piece 1140 in a predetermined position.

With the rear cell 1130 placed at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, a pair of positioning pins 1144 of the cell fixing piece 1140 are inserted from the rear through the support holes 1131 into the corresponding positioning holes 1110b of the panel plate 1110. This positions the cell fixing piece 1140 at a predetermined position on the panel plate 1110, and positions the mounting hole 1143 of the cell fixing piece 1140 coaxially with the mounting hole 1110a of the panel plate 1110. In this state, the cell fixing piece 1140 can be attached to the panel plate 1110 by screwing a mounting screw (not shown) into the mounting hole 1110a of the panel plate 1110 through the mounting hole 1143 from the rear of the cell fixing piece 1140 and tightening it.

The rear cell 1130 is a synthetic resin film with a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm, on which a predetermined pattern is printed. Examples of materials for the rear cell 1130 include "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", "polyethylene resin", "polystyrene resin", "high impact polystyrene resin", "polyvinyl chloride", etc.

When the cell fixing piece 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110, a gap larger than the thickness of the rear cell 1130 is formed between the main body piece 1141 and the panel plate 1110 by the protrusion 1142. A gap is also formed between the inner circumference of the support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130 and the protrusion 1142 and the pair of positioning pins 1144 (see Figures 147 and 148, etc.). Therefore, the rear cell 1130 is supported behind the panel plate 1110 so as to be movable within a predetermined range. In other words, the rear cell 1130 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 with a predetermined amount of wobble. This makes it possible to simplify the work involved in attaching the rear cell 1130, and to reduce the amount of the rear cell 1130 used, thereby suppressing the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1, compared to when the rear cell 1130 is attached to the entire surface of the panel plate 1110.

In addition, because the rear cells 1130 are provided as part of the panel plate 1110, a greater number of rear cells 1130 can be taken from the resin sheet compared to conventional cells that are attached to the panel plate, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because the rear cell 1130 is attached to the panel plate 1110 via the cell fixing piece 1140 in a loose state, even if the rear cell 1130 expands or contracts due to changes in temperature, humidity, etc., the difference in expansion and contraction with the panel plate 1110 can be absorbed by the looseness. This makes it possible to prevent the rear cell 1130 from wrinkling or cracking even if the rear cell 1130 shrinks relative to the panel plate 1110, and allows the decorative effect of the pattern on the rear cell 1130 to be maintained.

Furthermore, because the rear cell 1130 is attached to the panel plate 1110 by mounting screws via the cell fixing piece 1140, the rear cell 1130 can be easily attached and detached from the panel plate 1110. Therefore, by replacing the rear cell 1130 with one with a different design, it is possible to easily respond to changes in the specifications, model, or design of the pachinko machine 1, thereby suppressing increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1, and by replacing the rear cell 1130 with one with a more decorative design, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, because the rear cell 1130 is provided behind the transparent panel board 1110, the distance from the player to the rear cell 1130 is greater than if it were provided in front of the panel board 1110, reducing the sense of pressure felt by the player.

It is also desirable to make the rear cell 1130 translucent, so that the light from the LEDs provided at the rear of the panel board 1110 (rear cell 1130) can illuminate the image on the rear cell 1130, improving the appearance within the play area 5a. The illuminated decoration of the rear cell 1130 can also strongly attract the player's attention, enhancing the appeal of the pachinko machine 1.

In the above embodiment, the rear cell 1130 is attached to the panel plate 1110 using mounting screws via the cell fixing piece 1140, but this is not limited to this. For example, the rear cell 1130 may be attached by sandwiching it between the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120.

[5-4. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 142 and 143. The board holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 has an ejection part 1201 that is cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the bottom and rear, and the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge section 1201 is located directly above the discharged ball receiving section 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. This allows it to receive all game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 2020 and the sub-out port 2021, and game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000, and discharge them from the discharge section 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharged ball receiving section 628 below or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 123). The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-5. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 140, 142, 143, etc. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see Figure 203) that controls the game content and the payout of game balls B, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. The main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized modification has been performed, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is installed) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. In addition, the main control board box 1320 has multiple sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320, and traces of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be detected, enhancing the deterrent effect against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, etc. The main control board 1310 is also connected to the function display unit 1400, the general winning port sensor 3001, the first lower starting port sensor 2101, the first upper starting port sensor 2524, the gate sensor 2501, the second starting port sensor 2601, the first large winning port sensor 3002, the second large winning port sensor 2602, the V winning port sensor 2603, the losing port sensor 2604, the starting port solenoid 2632, the first attacca solenoid 2642, the second attacca solenoid 2652, the V distribution solenoid 2662, the center distribution drive motor 2525, the magnetic sensor 1030, the vibration sensor 1040, etc.

[5-6. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137 etc. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. This function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game status (game situation), the lottery results for normal symbols, the lottery results for special symbols, etc.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that display the game status, a normal pattern display consisting of two LEDs that display the lottery results of the normal pattern drawn when game ball B is received by gate 2002, and a normal hold display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holds related to the reception of game ball B by gate 2002.

The function display unit 1400 also includes a first special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of the drawing of the first special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004, a first special reserved number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of the game ball B into the first lower starting port 2003 and the first upper starting port 2004, a second special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of the drawing of the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the second starting port 2005, and a second special reserved number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of the game ball B into the second starting port 2005.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a round display consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of times (number of rounds) that the opening and closing pattern of the first large winning opening 2006 and the second large winning opening 2007 is repeated when the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern is a "win" or the like.

This functional display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, designs, etc., by turning on, off, blinking, etc. the LEDs provided as appropriate.

[5-7. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the performance display device 1600 provided behind the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 203) that controls the performance presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission performance, sound performance, movable performance, etc., and a performance display control unit 1512 for controlling performance images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the performance operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the performance display device 1600, etc. (see Figure 203).

The peripheral control unit 1500, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the rear of the performance display device 1600. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled to the game board 5, the rear face of the peripheral control board box 1520 protrudes rearward beyond the cable ties CT fastened to the wiring fastening parts 1603 and wiring fastening parts 3011.

[5-8. Performance display device]
The performance display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 142 and the like. The performance display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is disposed behind the game panel 1100. It is attached via the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The performance display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the rear box 3010 at approximately the center thereof, as will be described in detail later. When the game board 5 is assembled, the performance display device 1600 can be viewed from the front (player's side) through the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame of the frame-shaped center device 2500.

The performance display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color LCD display device with white LEDs as a backlight, and is installed in a landscape orientation. The performance display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display specified still images and videos.

The performance display device 1600 is equipped with two upper fixed pieces 1601 protruding upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixed piece 1602 protruding downward from the lower end surface. With the LCD screen facing forward, the performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear box 3010 by inserting the two upper fixed pieces 1601 from the diagonal rear of the rear box 3010 into two fixing grooves 3010c opening into the upper inner surface of the opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 described later, moving the lower fixed piece 1602 side forward, inserting the lower fixed piece 1602 into the opening of the lock slider 3020, and sliding the lock slider 3020 to the left when viewed from behind.

The performance display device 1600 also has a number of wiring locking parts 1603 provided on the rear surface. The wiring locking parts 1603 protrude rearward from the rear surface of the member (unit base) that forms the rear surface of the performance display device 1600, and then extend left and right along the rear surface, forming an L-shaped shape. The wiring locking parts 1603 have a claw-shaped hook part 1603a that protrudes toward the rear side of the unit base at the tip, and a protrusion part 1603b that protrudes short forward from each of the two longitudinal sides (see FIG. 172). The tip of the wiring locking part 1603 is formed at an angle so that the surface (front surface) facing the rear side of the unit base, including the hook part 1603a, is positioned further back as it approaches the tip. This makes it easier to insert the wiring EC from the tip side of the wiring locking part 1603 between the wiring locking part 1603 and the rear surface of the unit base. In addition, the wiring locking portion 1603 has a U-shaped cross section due to the two protrusions 1603b, which increases its strength and rigidity. In this embodiment, the member (rear case) in which the wiring locking portion 1603 is provided in the performance display device 1600 is formed to be transparent. Therefore, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the like are also transparent.

The multiple wiring fastening parts 1603 in the performance display device 1600 are provided on both the left and right sides of the area where the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, with two on the left side (right side when viewed from the rear) spaced apart vertically, and one on the right side (left side when viewed from the rear). Each wiring fastening part 1603 is arranged to extend outward in the left-right direction.

The performance display device 1600 also has a through-hole 1604 that penetrates from front to back at the portion of the unit base where the wiring locking portion 1603 is provided (see FIG. 172). This through-hole 1604 allows the wiring EC to bend within the through-hole 1604 when the wiring EC is locked between the wiring locking portion 1603 and the rear surface of the unit base, allowing the pressure applied to the wiring EC from the wiring locking portion 1603 to be released.

[5-9. Overall structure of the table unit]
The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 142 and 143. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, with its front end protruding forward beyond the front surface of the game panel 1100 and its rear end protruding into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100.

The front unit 2000 includes a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B that has been shot into the game area 5a, a gate 2002 that is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, a first lower starting opening 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and is always open to receive the game ball B, a first upper starting opening 2004 that enters the upper warp passage 2513 of the center device 2500 and receives the game ball B that has been allocated by the center allocation unit 2520, and a gate 2002 that detects the passage of the game ball B. a second starting port 2005 that can receive a game ball B depending on the result of a lottery for a normal pattern drawn by the lottery; a first large prize winning port 2006 and a second large prize winning port 2007 that can receive a game ball B depending on a first special pattern drawn by receiving a game ball B into the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004 or a second special pattern drawn by receiving a game ball B into the second starting port 2005; and a V prize winning port 2008 and a losing port 2009 into which the game ball B received into the second large prize winning port 2007 is sorted by a V sorting unit 2660 and received.

The front unit 2000 further includes an outlet 2020 and a sub-outlet 2021 that discharge the game ball B that is shot into the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The outlet 2020 and the sub-outlet 2021 are always open so that they can receive the game ball B. The outlet 2020 is provided at the downstream end of the game area 5a.

The front unit 2000 also includes a gate sensor 2501 that detects the game ball B passing through the gate 2002, a first lower start port sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first lower start port 2003, a first upper start port sensor 2524 that detects the game ball B received in the first upper start port 2004, a second start port sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2005, a second large prize port sensor 2602 that detects the game ball B received in the second large prize port 2007, a V prize port sensor 2603 that detects the game ball B received in the V prize port 2008, a loss port sensor 2604 that detects the game ball B received in the loss port 2009, and a magnetic sensor 1030 that detects unauthorized magnetism acting within the game area 5a.

The multiple (four in this example) general winning holes 2001 are arranged three on the left side and one on the right side of the horizontal center in the lower part of the play area 5a. The gate 2002 is arranged near the right end of the play area 5a when viewed from the front, and above the vertical center. The first lower start opening 2003 is arranged between the two outlets 2020 in the horizontal center of the play area 5a. The first upper start opening 2004 is arranged in the frame of the frame-shaped center gimmick 2500 to the upper right of the first lower start opening 2003. The second start opening 2005 is arranged below the vertical center near the right end of the play area 5a. The first large winning opening 2006 is arranged to the right of the first lower start opening 2003 and below the first upper start opening 2004 in the play area 5a. The second large winning opening 2007 is arranged to the upper right of the first large winning opening 2006 and below the second start opening 2005. The V winning hole 2008 and the losing hole 2009 are located below the second large winning hole 2007. The V winning hole 2008 and the losing hole 2009 are lined up on the left and right.

The outlet 2020 is composed of two parts, a left outlet 2020a and a right outlet 2020b, and is located below both the left and right sides of the first lower starting outlet 2003 at the downstream end of the game area 5a. The sub-outlet 2021 is composed of two parts, a left sub-outlet 2021a and a right sub-outlet 2021b, with the left sub-outlet 2021a being located to the left of the three general winning outlets 2001 on the left side, and the right sub-outlet 2021b being located below and to the right of the general winning outlet 2001 on the right side.

The front unit 2000 comprises a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the bottom end of the play area 5a in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first lower start port 2003 and an outlet port 2020, a side unit 2200 which is provided along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning ports 2001 and a left sub-out port 2021a, and an upper left side unit 2300 which is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front.

The front unit 2000 is located in the game area 5a, approximately in the center and slightly above it when viewed from the front, and further includes a frame-shaped center gadget 2500 having a gate 2002, a first upper start port 2004, a second start port 2005, a first large prize port 2006, a second large prize port 2007, a V prize port 2008, a losing port 2009, and a right sub-out port 2021b.

[5-9a. Starting unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 137 to 139 and Figure 141. The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed directly above the outlet 1008 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first lower start port 2003 that is always open upward with a width that can receive only one game ball B, and an outlet 2020 that is always open to receive the game ball B and discharges the received game ball B outside the game area 5a without returning it. The start port unit 2100 also has a first lower start port sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first lower start port 2003 (see Figure 203).

The outlet 2020 is located at a lower position than the first lower starting port 2003. The outlet 2020 of the starting port unit 2100 has a left outlet 2020a located to the left of the first lower starting port 2003 and a right outlet 2020b located to the right of the first lower starting port 2003. The left outlet 2020a and the right outlet 2020b are located at symmetrical positions with the first lower starting port 2003 in between. The first lower starting port 2003 opens upward with a width that allows one game ball B to pass through. The left outlet 2020a and the right outlet 2020b each open upward with a width equivalent to two game balls B, and are located at the lowest position within the game area 5a.

The starting port unit 2100 is arranged so that the height difference between the first lower starting port 2003 and the outlet port 2020 is smaller (lower) than the height difference between the first starting port and the outlet port in a conventional pachinko machine. This gives the player the illusion that the first lower starting port 2003 is located lower than the conventional first starting port, making the playing area 5a appear relatively larger.

The start port unit 2100 is provided below the first lower start port 2003 and has a start port display section 2110 capable of displaying a predetermined pattern. The start port display section 2110 is composed of a single 7-segment LED. This start port display section 2110 can display a predetermined pattern (including numbers) according to the progress of the game. When the start port unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, the start port display section 2110 closes the outlet 1008 from the front, making the outlet 1008 invisible to the player. This allows the player to recognize that the outlet 2020 is the lowest end of the game area 5a.

When the start port unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, the first lower start port 2003 is located directly below the central release section 2514a on the stage 2514 of the center device 2500, and can receive the game ball B released from the central release section 2514a with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first lower start port 2003 is detected by the first lower start port sensor 2101, guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and handed over to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, where it is discharged downward.

The game ball B received in the outlet 2020 (left outlet 2020a and right outlet 2020b) is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then discharged downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100.

[5-9b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 137 to 139 and 141. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning ports 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B, and one sub-out port 2021 (left sub-out port 2021a) that is always open to receive the game ball B.

The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002, with the openings located higher toward the left. Each general winning opening 2001 opens to the size (width) of one game ball B. A sub-out opening 2021 (left sub-out opening 2021a) is provided to the left of the leftmost general winning opening 2001. The left sub-out opening 2021a opens to the size (width) of one game ball B.

The side unit 2200 also has a shelf 2201 to the right of the rightmost general winning port 2001, which slopes downward as it goes to the right. The shelf 2201 extends to the right, up to near the right end of the left outlet 2020a in the starting port unit 2100. In other words, when the game ball B rolls down the shelf 2201, it is received by the left outlet 2020a.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the three general winning openings 2001 and the left sub-out opening 2021a protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged downward.

The side unit 2200 can also guide the game ball B received in the left sub-out port 2021a to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is discharged downward.

[5-9c. Upper left side unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 137 to 139 and 141. The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 to the left of the side unit 2200 within the gaming area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to be lower to the right.

When the upper left side unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The upper left side unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center device 2500 to the right side below the center device 2500 by the shelf portion 2301.

[5-9d. Center role]
Next, the center role 2500 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 137 to 139, 141 to 145, and 149 to 171. Figure 149(a) is a perspective view of the crane in the center distribution unit of the center role seen from the front, (b) is a plan view of the crane in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line So-So in (b). Figure 150(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a part of the center distribution unit in the center role of the game board in a partial perspective view, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a part of the center distribution unit in the center role of the game board in a partial plan view. Figure 151(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a crane of an embodiment different from that of Figure 149, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a crane of a further different embodiment, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a distribution unit of a further different embodiment.

The center device 2500 of the front unit 2000 is located in the game area 5a, above the starting unit 2100, and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center device 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape.

The center device 2500, which will be described in detail later, includes one general winning opening 2001 that is always open to receive the game ball B, a gate 2002 through which the game ball B can pass, a first upper starting opening 2004 that is always open to receive the game ball B, a second starting opening 2005 that opens and closes to receive the game ball B depending on the result of the lottery for the normal pattern drawn by the passage of the game ball B through the gate 2002, a first large winning opening 2006 and a second large winning opening 2007 that open and close to receive the game ball B depending on the result of the lottery for the first special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first lower starting opening 2003 or the first upper starting opening 2004 and the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2005, and a V winning opening 2008 that can only receive the game ball B received into the second large winning opening 2007.

The center device 2500 also includes a losing port 2009 that receives game balls B that have been received by the second large winning port 2007 but not the V winning port 2008, and a right sub-out port 2021b (sub-out port 2021) that is always open to receive game balls B within the game area 5a and that discharges game balls B outside the game area 5a without granting any specified bonus upon receiving the game balls B.

The center gamble 2500 comprises a main unit 2510 formed in a frame shape, and an attacca unit 2600 attached to the lower right outer side of the main unit 2510. The main unit 2510 has a gate 2002 and a first upper starting port 2004. The attacca unit 2600 has one general winning port 2001, a second starting port 2005, a first large winning port 2006, a second large winning port 2007, a V winning port 2008, a losing port 2009, and a right sub-out port 2021b.

The center piece 2500 also has a number of bundling bases 2550 that can be attached to the main unit 2510 or the attacca unit 2600. The bundling base 2550 will be described in detail later, but the bundling base 2550 has a ring-shaped band holding portion 2552, and by bundling a number of wiring EC with a cable tie CT that is passed through the band holding portion 2552, the number of wiring EC can be supported (held) by the center piece 2500 in a bundled state.

[5-9d-1. Main unit]
The main unit 2510 of the center role 2500 will be described in detail. The main unit 2510 has a gate 2002 and a first upper starting port 2004. The main unit 2510 comprises a transparent frame-shaped center base 2511 attached to the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), a lower warp passage 2512 and an upper warp passage 2513 each capable of guiding a game ball B from the outside of the center base 2511 to the inside of the frame, a stage 2514 provided at the lower edge within the frame of the center base 2511 for rolling the game ball B that has flowed through the lower warp passage 2512 in the left-right direction and then releasing it into the game area 5a, and a center distribution unit 2520 provided above the stage 2514 within the frame of the center base 2511 for distributing the game ball B that has flowed through the upper warp passage 2513 to either the first upper starting port 2004 or a distributed ball discharge port 2526 (not shown).

The center base 2511 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2511a extending in the front-rear direction, a flat flange portion 2511b protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2511a and abutting the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a flat support portion 2511c protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2511a. When assembled to the game board 5, the peripheral wall portion 2511a extends rearward to a position where its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In addition, when assembled to the game board 5, the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2511a, excluding the lower edge portion of the frame shape (annular shape), protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In other words, at the bottom edge of the frame of the center base 2511, the flange portion 2511b extends outward from the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2511a. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball B from entering the frame from the outside of the center gadget 2500 by the peripheral wall portion 2511a when assembled to the game board 5.

The thickness of the flange portion 2511b and the support portion 2511c is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2511b and the support portion 2511c protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2511a at the same position in the front-to-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2511c (flange portion 2511b) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2511a is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

The support portions 2511c are provided partially on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2511a. The support portions 2511c are also provided on the peripheral wall portion 2511a where the flange portion 2511b does not protrude, reinforcing the peripheral wall portion 2511a. The end edges of the support portions 2511c protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2511a are formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2511a or in a straight line, making the support portions 2511c less noticeable. The amount of protrusion of the support portions 2511c from the peripheral wall portion 2511a is within the range from the thickness of the support portions 2511c to the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), making it difficult for players to notice the support portions 2511c while still providing a reinforcing effect.

The lower warp passage 2512 is open to allow the game ball B in the game area 5a to enter, at a location on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2511a when viewed from the front, ahead of the front surface (flange portion 2511b) of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). The lower warp passage 2512 can guide the game ball B that has entered to the stage 2514.

The upper warp passage 2513 is open at a position forward of the flange portion 2511b on the peripheral wall portion 2511a and above the lower warp passage 2512, allowing the game ball B in the game area 5a to enter. The upper warp passage 2513 can guide the game ball B that has entered to the center distribution unit 2520.

The stage 2514 is curved with a recessed central side in the left-right direction, and is formed in a wavy (W-shape) such that the position corresponding to directly above the first lower starting hole 2003 of the starting hole unit 2100, that is, the approximate central position in the left-right direction when the center gimmick 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, is slightly higher than the left and right sides. This stage 2514 is inclined so that the part (central release part 2514a) that is slightly higher than the left and right sides in the left-right center and the lowest part on both sides (side release part 2514b) are lower toward the front, and game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from these parts.

When the stage 2514 is assembled to the game board 5, its elevated central portion in the left-right direction (central release section 2514a) is located directly above the first lower starting port 2003 of the starting port unit 2100. As a result, when a game ball B is released from the central release section 2514a in the center of the stage 2514, it is received by the first lower starting port 2003 with an extremely high probability.

The center distribution unit 2520 has a dish-shaped crane 2530 that rotates the game ball B guided by the upper warp passage 2513 and then releases it downward, a first guideway 2521 that guides the game ball B released from the crane 2530 to the right, a distribution ball outlet 2526 that is concave downward to the right of the first guideway 2521, a second guideway 2522 that guides the game ball B to the right to the right of the distribution ball outlet 2526 and has a first upper starting port 2004 opening at its right end (downstream end), and a flat center distribution piece 2523 that is arranged above the distribution ball outlet 2526 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the forward and backward directions and can guide the game ball B from the first guideway 2521 to the second guideway 2522 by moving forward.

The center distribution unit 2520 can distribute the game ball B that enters the upper warp passage 2513 to either the first upper starting port 2004 or the distribution ball discharge port 2526.

As shown in FIG. 141, the main unit 2510 has an upper right guide passage group 2541, which is provided on the right outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2511a and is made up of multiple (here, two) passages through which the game ball B can flow, and a lower right guide passage group 2542, which is provided below the upper right guide passage group 2541 and is made up of multiple (here, two) passages through which the game ball B can flow. Between the upper right guide passage group 2541 and the lower right guide passage group 2542, there is a portion where the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) is exposed, and a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in the portion.

The upper right guide passage group 2541 is provided on the outer side of the peripheral wall 2511a at the upper right corner of the center role 2500, and is composed of the upper right first guide passage 2541a, which is away from the peripheral wall 2511a, and the upper right second guide passage 2541b, which is provided to the right of the upper right first guide passage 2541a. The upper right second guide passage 2541b has a left wall formed by a part of the peripheral wall 2511a. The entrance of the upper right first guide passage 2541a and the entrance of the upper right second guide passage 2541b are separated left and right. In addition, the exit of the upper right first guide passage 2541a and the exit of the upper right second guide passage 2541b are adjacent left and right at the same height. The upper right first guide passage 2541a and the upper right second guide passage 2541b extend downward with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B. In this upper right guide passage group 2541, the upper right second guide passage 2541b is longer than the upper right first guide passage 2541a.

The lower right guide passage group 2542 is provided below the upper right guide passage group 2541, and is composed of a lower right first guide passage 2542a that is separated from the peripheral wall portion 2511a, and a lower right second guide passage 2542b that is provided to the left of the lower right first guide passage 2542a. The lower right second guide passage 2542b has a left side wall formed by a part of the peripheral wall portion 2511a. The entrances of the lower right first guide passage 2542a and the lower right second guide passage 2542b are provided adjacent to each other on the left and right.

The entrance of the lower right first guide passage 2542a is formed with a width in the left-right direction that is more than twice the diameter of the game ball B, and the gate 2002 is provided so as to contact the left wall. In other words, the lower right first guide passage 2542a has two entrances, one that passes through the left gate 2002 and one that does not pass through the right gate 2002, and the gate 2002, which is one entrance of the lower right first guide passage 2542a, is provided directly below between the exit of the upper right first guide passage 2541a and the exit of the upper right second guide passage 2541b. The width of the lower right first guide passage 2542a in the left-right direction narrows below the gate 2002, and it extends downward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B.

The entrance of the lower right second guide passage 2542b is located adjacent to the left of the gate 2002, and is formed with a width in the left-right direction that is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. The lower right second guide passage 2542b extends downward with a roughly constant width. The exits of the lower right first guide passage 2542a and the lower right second guide passage 2542b are located adjacent to each other on the left and right at the same height.

When the center device 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the upper right guide passage group 2541 extends downward from near the upper end of the game area 5a to a height of approximately 4/5 of the total height of the game area 5a. The lower right guide passage group 2542 extends downward from a position slightly higher than 2/3 of the total height of the game area 5a to a position slightly lower than 1/2 of the total height of the game area 5a. The upper right guide passage group 2541 and the lower right guide passage group 2542 are formed so that their right ends run along the right rail 1005.

The right end of the entrance of the first upper right guide passage 2541a of the upper right guide passage group 2541 is located directly below the lower end of the impact stopper 1006 of the previous component 1000, and is formed so that most of the game balls B that come into contact with the impact stopper 1006 enter the first upper right guide passage 2541a. Game balls B that have flowed through the first upper right guide passage 2541a are more likely to enter the first lower right guide passage 2542a of the lower right guide passage group 2542 than game balls B that have flowed through the second upper right guide passage 2541b.

The exit of the lower right guide passage group 2542 is offset to the left of the right rail 1005. A game ball B that flows through the lower right first guide passage 2542a of the lower right guide passage group 2542 is likely to flow down onto the attacca upper shelf 2612 of the attacca unit 2600. A game ball B that flows through the lower right second guide passage 2542b of the lower right guide passage group 2542 is likely to be released into the central opening 2605 and right opening 2606 located to the right of the attacca upper shelf 2612 of the attacca unit 2600.

The main unit 2510, details of which will be described later, has one binding base 2550 attached to the rear side of the center base 2511 (see Figures 166 to 170, etc.). The binding base 2550 has a ring-shaped band holding portion 2552, and by bundling multiple wirings EC with a cable tie CT passed through the band holding portion 2552, the multiple wirings EC can be supported by the center base 2511 in a bundled state.

[5-9d-1a. Center distribution unit]
The center distribution unit 2520 in the main unit 2510 of the center role 2500 will be described in more detail mainly with reference to Figures 149 and 150. The center distribution unit 2520 has a plate-shaped crane 2530 that rotates the game ball B guided by the upper warp passage 2513 and then releases it downward, a first guideway 2521 that guides the game ball B released from the crane 2530 to the right, a distribution ball outlet 2526 that is recessed downward to the right of the first guideway 2521, a second guideway 2522 that guides the game ball B to the right to the right of the distribution ball outlet 2526 and has a first upper starting port 2004 opening at its right end (downstream end), and a flat-shaped center distribution piece 2523 that is provided above the distribution ball outlet 2526 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction and can guide the game ball B from the first guideway 2521 to the second guideway 2522 by advancing.

The ball distribution outlet 2526 and the center distribution piece 2523 of the center distribution unit 2520 are located directly above the stage 2514 (approximately in the center in the left-right direction), and are formed with a left-right length of 60 mm to 70 mm (65 mm in this case). The center distribution piece 2523 of the center distribution unit 2520 advances and retreats in a predetermined pattern by the center distribution drive motor 2525 (see FIG. 203). The center distribution piece 2523 is inclined from the front end to the rear by a predetermined width, so that the lower surface moves upward as it moves forward. In other words, it is tapered so that the front end becomes thinner. This makes it difficult for the front end of the center distribution piece 2523 to bite the game ball B when the center distribution piece 2523 moves forward, and even if it does bite, the friction is reduced to minimize biting.

As shown in FIG. 150(b), the center distribution unit 2520 also has a distribution ball entrance sensor 2527 that detects a game ball B that has entered the upper warp passage 2513, a first upper starting port sensor 2524 that detects a game ball B that has been guided to the right by the center distribution piece 2523 and passed through the second guide path 2522 and received at the first upper starting port 2004, and a distribution ball discharge sensor 2528 that detects a game ball B that cannot be guided to the second guide path 2522 by the center distribution piece 2523 and is received at the distribution ball discharge port 2526. The distribution ball entrance sensor 2527 and the distribution ball discharge sensor 2528 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 203).

This center distribution unit 2520 can distribute the game ball B that circulates through the upper warp passage 2513, is detected by the distribution ball entry sensor 2527, and is released from the crane 2530 to the second guideway 2522 side with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2), and the game ball B distributed to the second guideway 2522 is accepted by the first upper starting port 2004. The game ball B accepted by the first upper starting port 2004 is detected by the first upper starting port sensor 2524 (see Figures 150 (b) and 203), and is then handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward via the back ball guiding unit 3100. This makes it possible for the player to feel anxious and excited depending on whether the game ball B that has entered the upper warp passage 2513 from within the game area 5a is distributed to the second guideway 2522 (first upper starting gate 2004) by the center distribution piece 2523 that moves back and forth at a constant rhythm. At this time, the game ball B rotates to a certain extent in the crane 2530 that is provided upstream of the center distribution piece 2523 before being released to the first guideway 2521. Therefore, the player can feel anxious and excited depending on whether the game ball B is released from the crane 2530 at a timing when the center distribution piece 2523, which appears to be moving back and forth, can protrude forward and guide (distribute) the game ball B to the first upper starting gate 2004, and the player can be entertained at multiple stages.

Meanwhile, in the center distribution unit 2520, the game ball B that falls into the distribution ball outlet 2526 is detected by the distribution ball discharge sensor 2528 and then handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is discharged downward via the back ball guiding unit 3100.

The crown 2530 of the center distribution unit 2520 is formed to be transparent. This crown 2530 has a dish-shaped rolling surface portion 2531 that is recessed so that the center is lowered and into which the game balls B that have circulated through the upper warp passage 2513 are supplied, a passage opening 2532 that penetrates the center of the rolling surface portion 2531 and is large enough to allow only one game ball B to pass through, and a peripheral wall portion 2533 that extends upward from the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531.

The rolling surface portion 2531 of the crane 2530 is composed of a central surface portion 2531a that extends outward from the center so as to become higher, and a peripheral surface portion 2531b that extends outward from the outer periphery of the central surface portion 2531a so as to become higher and has a larger angle from the horizontal than the central surface portion 2531a. In this embodiment, the central surface portion 2531a of the rolling surface portion 2531 is inclined at an angle of 4 degrees from the horizontal. On the other hand, the peripheral surface portion 2531b is inclined at an angle of 20 degrees from the horizontal.

The rolling surface portion 2531 is formed such that the boundary between the central surface portion 2531a and the peripheral surface portion 2531b creates a predetermined amount of gap between the game ball B and the peripheral wall portion 2533 when the game ball B is in contact with both the central surface portion 2531a and the peripheral surface portion 2531b (see FIG. 149(c)). In other words, the boundary between the central surface portion 2531a and the peripheral surface portion 2531b is located at a distance from the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2533 toward the center that is longer than the radius of the game ball B. It is preferable that the distance (horizontal distance) from the boundary between the central surface portion 2531a and the peripheral surface portion 2531b to the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2533 be within a range of 3/5 to 5/5 of the diameter of the game ball B.

As shown in FIG. 149, the passage opening 2532 of the crown 2530 has an inner periphery that is square, i.e., non-circular. This passage opening 2532 penetrates a square inscribed circle that is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. The passage opening 2532 is provided so that its diagonal line extends in the front-to-rear direction. In addition, the passage opening 2532 is formed so that it becomes smaller as it goes downward, making it easier to release the game ball B straight down.

The peripheral wall portion 2533 extends upward higher than the diameter of the game ball B. This prevents the game ball B supplied to the rolling surface portion 2531 from flying outward from the rolling surface portion 2531.

In this embodiment, the game ball B that has flowed through the upper warp passage 2513 is supplied from left to right near the outer periphery of the rear of the rolling surface portion 2531. The momentum of the game ball B supplied to the rolling surface portion 2530 causes it to rotate in a clockwise direction while contacting the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2533 on the peripheral surface portion 2531b of the rolling surface portion 2531, and as the rolling speed decreases, the centrifugal force acting on the game ball B decreases, so that the turning radius gradually decreases as the ball descends the peripheral surface portion 2531b and moves away from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2533 toward the center.

When the rotating game ball B reaches the central surface 2531a from the peripheral surface 2531b, the inclination angle of the central surface 2531a is sufficiently gentler (smaller) than the inclination angle of the peripheral surface 2531b, so that the game ball B rotates for a while in contact with both the central surface 2531a and the peripheral surface 2531b due to the centrifugal force acting on the rolling speed of the game ball B. After that, as the rolling speed of the game ball B further decreases, the centrifugal force acting on the game ball B further decreases, so that the turning radius gradually decreases as the game ball descends the central surface 2531a, enters the passage opening 2532 provided in the center of the central surface 2531a, and falls into the first guideway 2521 below.

In more detail, the game ball B supplied to the crown 2530 does not rotate multiple times while in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2533 because the inclination angle of the peripheral surface portion 2531b is large and steep, but rather rotates while in contact with both the central surface portion 2531a and the peripheral surface portion 2531b without touching the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2533. At this time, because the crown 2530 (peripheral wall portion 2533) is transparent, it is possible to make the game ball B appear to be rotating while in contact with the peripheral wall portion 2533, and this does not cause discomfort to players who are accustomed to the crowns of conventional pachinko machines.

However, in the case of the Kruun in conventional pachinko machines, game ball B rotates while contacting the peripheral wall, so that if the pachinko machine is struck and a force is applied in the forward or backward direction, it is possible to change the rolling direction of game ball B from the rotating direction to the direction of the central passage opening via the peripheral wall. This creates the problem of fraudulent activity of game ball B entering the passage opening at the desired timing, specifically, at the timing when the central distribution piece 2523 can protrude forward and distribute game ball B to the first upper starting opening 2004, because the player can see the central distribution piece 2523 moving back and forth. In contrast, with the Kruun 2530 of this embodiment, the inclination of the peripheral surface 2531b of the rolling surface 2531 allows the game ball B to rotate at a position away from the peripheral wall 2533, so that even if the pachinko machine 1 is struck or shaken to cause abnormal vibrations or impacts at the timing when the center distribution piece 2523, which appears to move back and forth, can protrude forward and distribute the game ball B to the first upper starting hole 2004, the abnormal vibrations or impacts are not transmitted to the game ball B via the peripheral wall 2533, and the rolling direction of the game ball B can be prevented from changing toward the passage hole 2532.

In addition, abnormal vibrations and impacts caused by hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1 will also act on the rolling surface portion 2531. However, since the point of contact between the game ball B and the rolling surface portion 2531 (peripheral surface portion 2531b) is located sufficiently below the center of gravity of the game ball B, the force acting from the abnormal vibrations and impacts will cause the peripheral surface portion 2531b to move relative to the game ball B so that it slides under it, and the rolling direction of the game ball B will not change even via the peripheral surface portion 2531b.

As a result, it is possible to prevent abnormal vibrations or impacts caused by hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1 from acting on the game ball B rolling on the rolling surface portion 2531 via the peripheral surface portion 2531b and changing its rolling direction. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is hit or shaken to cause abnormal vibrations or impacts at a timing when the center distribution piece 2523, which can be seen moving back and forth, can protrude forward and distribute the game ball B to the first upper starting hole 2004, the abnormal vibrations or impacts will cause the game ball B to roll in the direction of the passage hole 2532, preventing fraudulent acts such as illegally entering the passage hole 2532 and reducing the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, the Kruun 2530 of this embodiment has a non-circular square inner periphery shape of the passage opening 2532 provided in the center (center) of the rolling surface portion 2531, and therefore can achieve the following excellent effects. In detail, if the inner periphery shape of the passage opening in the Kruun is made circular, as in conventional pachinko machines, the game ball B may spin around the edge of the passage opening more than necessary depending on the rolling direction and rolling speed of the game ball B relative to the passage opening. Then, while the game ball B is spinning around the edge of the passage opening, it is possible to delay or speed up the entry of the game ball B into the passage opening by hitting or shaking the pachinko machine to apply abnormal vibrations or impacts. For this reason, there is a risk that, at the timing when the game ball B is guided to the second guideway 2522 (first upper starting opening 2004) by the center distribution piece 2523, which can be seen moving back and forth, the pachinko machine 1 may be struck or shaken to cause abnormal vibrations or shocks, causing the game ball B to enter the passage opening, thereby achieving fraud. Note that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility in an amusement hall, the front of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed from the island facility, so it is easier for the player in front of the pachinko machine 1 to apply force to the pachinko machine 1 backward (front-back) rather than left-right or up-down. Therefore, the fraudulent abnormal vibrations and shocks caused by striking or shaking the game machine mainly act in the front-back direction.

In response to the above problems, in this embodiment, the inner periphery of the passage opening 2532 of the crane 2530 is a square that is a non-circular shape, and the diagonal line is arranged to extend in the front-rear direction, so that the game ball B, which is rotating on the rolling surface portion 2531 while gradually decreasing the turning radius, first comes into contact with one of the four corners of the passage opening 2532, and the rolling speed of the game ball B can be greatly attenuated by the contact with the corner, so that the game ball B can quickly enter the passage opening 2532. In addition, since the inner periphery of the passage opening 2532 is a square, even if the game ball B rolls along one side of the passage opening 2532, the end of the side abuts against the next side that has a different extension direction by 90 degrees, so a reaction force acts on the game ball B in the opposite direction to the rolling direction, and the game ball B does not spin around on the edge of the passage opening 2532. For this reason, even if the pachinko machine 1 is struck or shaken to cause abnormal vibrations or shocks to cause the game ball B to illegally enter the passage opening 2532 at the timing when the center distribution piece 2523, which can be seen moving back and forth, can protrude forward and distribute the game ball B to the first upper starting opening 2004, as soon as the game ball B comes into contact with the passage opening 2532, it will immediately enter the passage opening 2532, making it difficult to time the fraudulent act and preventing the fraudulent act from being committed.

In addition, since the diagonal of the passage opening 2532 faces the front-rear direction, each side constituting the periphery of the passage opening 2532 extends in a direction intersecting (diagonally) with the left-right direction. Compared to when the edge (side) of the passage opening extends in the left-right direction, the relative movement distance between the game ball B and the edge (side) of the passage opening 2532 caused by abnormal vibrations or impacts in the front-rear direction caused by hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1 can be shortened, and the influence of abnormal vibrations or impacts can be reduced. Therefore, even if the timing of the game ball B entering the passage opening 2532 is delayed or advanced by hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1 to apply abnormal vibrations or impacts when the game ball B tries to enter the passage opening 2532, the influence of the abnormal vibrations or impacts on the game ball B can be reduced, and the achievement of fraudulent acts can be prevented.

In addition, since the diagonal of the square passage opening 2532 in the crown 2530 faces the front-rear direction, the shape of the passage opening 2532 can be more easily seen when viewed from a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the crown 2530 (rolling surface portion 2531) having the passage opening 2532, which is a non-circular shape that has never been seen in a pachinko machine 1 so far, can be seen by the player, so that a strong impact can be made on the player, and a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players can be provided, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the gaming machine to be played, making playing with the pachinko machine 1 enjoyable and suppressing a decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, the peripheral surface portion 2531b of the rolling surface portion 2531 is shown to be inclined linearly in cross section, but this is not limited thereto, and it may be inclined in an arc shape with a radius larger than the radius of the game ball B, or may be inclined in a broken line shape. This can also achieve the same effect as above.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the peripheral surface portion 2531b is provided at an inclination angle different from the central surface portion 2531a so that the game ball B rolls on the rolling surface portion 2531 in a state where it is difficult for the game ball B to come into contact with the peripheral wall portion 2533. However, this is not limited to this, and a protrusion portion that protrudes from the rolling surface portion 2531 at a height that the game ball B can climb over may be provided, a step portion that is formed in a stepped shape so that the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531 is higher may be provided, or a groove portion that is recessed so that the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531 is higher may be provided. This also provides the same effect as above.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the non-circular passage opening 2532 of the kuruan 2530 has a square inner periphery, but this is not limited to this, and the inner periphery of the passage opening 2532 may be star-shaped as shown in FIG. 151(a). This can achieve the same effect as above, and also shows the player the present pachinko machine 1 with the passage opening 2532 having a star-shaped kuruan 2530, which has never been seen in a pachinko machine before, and can give a strong impact to the player, and can increase the expectation for the game ball B circulating through the kuruan 2530, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in the game. In addition, the inner periphery of the passage opening 2532 may be a non-circular shape such as a "triangle shape", a "square shape", a "pentagon shape", a "hexagon shape", a "polygon shape", a "ellipse shape", a "diamond shape", a "heart shape", a "clover shape", a "spade shape", an "irregular shape", etc.

In the above embodiment, only one passage opening 2532 is provided on the rolling surface 2531 of the crane 2530, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 151(b), multiple (four in this case) passage openings 2532 may be provided on the rolling surface 2531. When multiple passage openings 2532 are provided, different benefits may be given to the player depending on the passage opening 2532 through which the game ball B enters. In the embodiment of FIG. 151(b), the inner peripheral shapes of the four passage openings 2532 are different from each other, such as a diamond shape, a heart shape, a clover shape, and a spade shape. This can achieve the same effect as above, and can make the player nervous and excited depending on whether the game ball B enters the desired shape of the passage opening 2532, which can entertain the player and prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a non-circular passing port 2532 is provided on the dish-shaped wheel 2530 in the center sorting unit 2520, but this is not limited to this, and non-circular winning and losing ports may be provided on the flat rolling surface portion of the sorting unit 2800 as shown in Figure 151 (c). In more detail, the distribution unit 2800 has a flat rolling surface portion 2803 that is inclined so as to be lower toward the front and has losing holes 2802 on both the left and right sides of a single winning hole 2801 near its front end, a guide surface portion 2804 that guides the game ball B released forward from the front end of the rolling surface portion 2803 to the outside in either the left or right direction, side surface portions 2805 that are provided on both the left and right outsides of the guide surface portion 2804 and the rolling surface portion 2803, and whose rear ends coincide with the rear end of the rolling surface portion 2803 and are inclined so that their front ends are located lower than the downstream end of the guide surface portion 2804, a central rotating body 2806 provided near the rear end of the rolling surface portion 2803, and lateral rotating bodies 2807 provided near the front ends of the side surface portions 2805.

The sorting unit 2800 also has a dam portion 2808 that protrudes low upward from both the left and right sides of the rolling surface portion 2803, and a peripheral wall portion 2809 that extends upward from the periphery of the area formed by the rolling surface portion 2803, the guide surface portion 2804, and the two side surface portions 2805 to a height higher than the diameter of the game ball B. The dam portion 2808 prevents the game ball B from entering or exiting from both the left and right sides of the rolling surface portion 2803. The peripheral wall portion 2809 also prevents the game ball B from falling out of the sorting unit 2800.

The peripheral wall portion 2809 has an outer shape in a plan view that is semicircular at the rear end and is formed in a bullet shape with a length in the front-rear direction approximately equal to the diameter of the semicircular arc. The length in the front-rear direction of the peripheral wall portion 2809 is 2.5 times the diameter of the central rotating body 2806. In other words, the diameter of the central rotating body 2806 is 0.4 times the length in the front-rear direction of the peripheral wall portion 2809. The diameter of the central rotating body 2806 is approximately 4 times the diameter of the game ball B (e.g., 11 mm), and the length in the front-rear direction of the peripheral wall portion 2809 is approximately 10.5 times the diameter of the game ball B. The length in the left-right direction (width) of the rolling surface portion 2803 is approximately 5 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the length in the front-rear direction (depth) is 5 to 7 times the diameter of the game ball B.

The rolling surface portion 2803 is formed in a generally rectangular shape with a length in the front-rear direction slightly longer than the diameter of the central rotating body 2806 and a length in the left-right direction longer than the length in the front-rear direction. The rear end of the rolling surface portion 2803 extends to a position forward of the center of the central rotating body 2806, and both left and right sides are bent diagonally toward the central rotating body 2806. The rolling surface portion 2803 is only inclined in the front-rear direction, but is horizontal in the left-right direction. Near the front end of this rolling surface portion 2803, losing holes 2802 are opened on both the left and right sides, with a winning hole 2801 in the center in the left-right direction between them. The winning hole 2801 and losing hole 2802 are rectangular holes of the same size with a square inner circumference, and the diagonal line extends in the front-rear direction.

The central rotor 2806 is disk-shaped and has multiple protrusions that protrude upward. This central rotor 2806 constantly rotates at a constant speed in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from above.

The horizontal rotating body 2807 constantly rotates at a speed faster than the central rotating body 2806. The horizontal rotating body 2807 has one protrusion protruding perpendicular to the axial direction, which allows the game ball B to be hit into the rear end of the side surface portion 2805. The left horizontal rotating body 2807 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and the right horizontal rotating body 2807 is rotated in a clockwise direction in a plan view.

In the sorting unit 2800 of this embodiment, the central rotor 2806 rotates at a speed of 16.7 rpm, and the horizontal rotor 2807 rotates at a speed of 625 rpm, which is much faster than the central rotor 2806. As described above, since the horizontal rotor 2807 rotates at a high speed, even if a detection piece is provided on the horizontal rotor 2807 to detect the presence or absence of rotation, the sensor may not be able to reliably detect the detection piece. In detail, since the sensor that detects the detection piece operates at regular intervals to detect the detection piece, for example, if the detection piece, the rotation period, and the detection period of the sensor are the same, the detection piece may not be detected at all, so the detection period of the sensor must be sufficiently shorter than the rotation period of the detection piece. And if the rotation of the detection piece is fast and the rotation period is even shorter, the detection period of the sensor must also be even shorter, but if the detection period of the sensor is shortened, signals must be exchanged frequently between the sensor and the control unit, which increases the load on the control unit and increases the risk of runaway or malfunction due to overload.

In contrast, this embodiment has a detection reduction gear (not shown) to which the rotation from the rotation axis of the horizontal rotor 2807 is transmitted at a reduced speed (e.g., reduced to 250 rpm), and a detection piece is provided on the detection reduction gear to detect the rotation with a sensor. This slows down the rotation speed of the detection piece for detecting the rotation of the horizontal rotor 2807, so that the sensor can reliably detect the rotation and determine whether the horizontal rotor 2807 is rotating or not. In addition, because the rotation speed of the detection piece is slowed down, there is no need to unnecessarily shorten the detection cycle of the sensor, and the detection cycle can be made appropriate, making it possible to suppress an increase in the load on the main control board 1310.

In this distribution unit 2800, for example, a game ball B received in a predetermined variable winning port is supplied to the vicinity of the right end of the guide surface portion 2804. The game ball B supplied to the vicinity of the right end of the guide surface portion 2804 rolls to the vicinity of the front end of the right side surface portion 2805, and is then bounced backward by the horizontal rotating body 2807 rotating near the front end of the side surface portion 2805. The game ball B bounced backward then enters the rolling surface portion 2803 from the rear end side of the side surface portion 2805 through the central rotating body 2806, and rolls forward due to the inclination of the rolling surface portion 2803. Then, the game ball B is received by either the winning port 2801 or the losing port 2802 provided near the front end of the rolling surface portion 2803, or passes beside them to enter the guide surface portion 2804. The game ball B that enters the guiding surface portion 2804 from the rolling surface portion 2803 will roll to either the left or right side surface portion 2805 depending on the part that it entered. In addition, the game ball B that rolls from the guiding surface portion 2804 to the left side surface portion 2805 will be bounced off the rotating horizontal rotating body 2807 and will enter the rolling surface portion 2803 from the rear end side of the side surface portion 2805 through the central rotating body 2806, similar to the movement of the game ball B on the right side of the side surface portion 2805.

In this way, in the distribution unit 2800, the basic flow of the game ball B supplied to the rolling surface portion 2803 is that it rolls from either the left or right side surface portion 2805, passes through the central rotating body 2806, rolls on the rolling surface portion 2803, and is then sent to either the left or right side surface portion 2805 by the guide surface portion 2804, and this is repeated until the game ball B is received by either the winning port 2801 or the losing port 2802.

When the inside shape of the winning hole 2801 and the losing hole 2802 as the passing hole provided on the rolling surface portion 2803 is circular, depending on the rolling direction and rolling speed of the game ball B relative to the passing hole, the game ball B may be kicked into the passing hole (lip-out in golf terminology) and roll in a direction away from the passing hole. Then, the game ball B kicked into the passing hole (winning hole 2801) may enter another passing hole (losing hole 2802), and just when the game ball B thought it had entered the winning hole 2801, it may be kicked by the winning hole 2801 and enter the adjacent losing hole 2802, which may disappoint the player and reduce his interest. Furthermore, this phenomenon can lead to greater variation in the probability of game ball B being received by winning port 2801 (winning probability) on rolling surface portion 2803 (sorting unit 2800), making the probability of receiving ball B by winning port 2801 unstable, which can lead to players feeling distrustful or make it difficult to provide pachinko machines with the same performance.

In this embodiment, the inner periphery of the winning hole 2801 and the losing hole 2802 are made into a square shape, which is a non-circular shape. Therefore, when the game ball B comes into contact with the edge of the winning hole 2801 or the losing hole 2802, it is quickly accepted into the winning hole 2801 or the losing hole 2802 that the game ball B has come into contact with, and the game ball B is not kicked into the winning hole 2801 or the losing hole 2802 and accepted into another losing hole 2802 or winning hole 2801. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being kicked and accepted into the adjacent winning hole 2801 or the losing hole 2802, it is possible to reduce the game ball B from unnecessarily entering the losing hole 2802, which disappoints the player, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. In addition, by preventing the game ball B from being received by the winning opening 2801 when it is not scheduled, the variation in the probability of receiving the game ball B into the winning opening 2801 can be reduced, which can prevent players from feeling distrustful and ensure the provision of a pachinko machine 1 with the same performance in terms of the probability of receiving the game ball into the winning opening 2801.

In addition, the inner periphery of winning opening 2801 and losing opening 2802 is a non-circular square with its diagonal extending in the front-to-back direction, so that each side constituting the periphery of winning opening 2801 and losing opening 2802 extends in a direction intersecting the left-to-right direction (diagonal direction). As a result, compared to when the edges (sides) of winning opening 2801 and losing opening 2802 extend in the left-to-right direction, the relative movement distance between game ball B and the edges (sides) of winning opening 2801 or losing opening 2802 caused by abnormal vibrations or impacts in the front-to-back direction caused by hitting or shaking pachinko machine 1 can be shortened, and the effects of abnormal vibrations and impacts can be reduced. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is struck or shaken, causing abnormal vibrations or impacts when game ball B enters the winning hole 2801, the effects of the abnormal vibrations or impacts can be reduced, and the achievement of fraudulent acts such as illegally causing game ball B to enter the winning hole 2801 can be prevented.

Furthermore, the dam portion 2808 provided along both the left and right sides of the rolling surface portion 2803 protrudes upward shorter than the radius of the game ball B. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is struck or shaken to cause abnormal vibrations or impacts in the left-right direction when the game ball B is in contact with the dam portion 2808 on the rolling surface portion 2803, the contact point between the game ball B and the dam portion 2808 is located sufficiently below the center of gravity of the game ball B, and therefore the force acting due to the abnormal vibrations or impacts causes the dam portion 2808 to move relative to the game ball B so as to slip under it, and the rolling direction of the game ball B is not changed from the forward direction to the left-right direction via the dam portion 2808. This prevents abnormal vibrations or impacts caused by hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1 from acting on the game ball B rolling on the rolling surface 2803 through the dam 2808 and changing its rolling direction, preventing the game ball B from rolling toward the winning hole 2801 due to the abnormal vibrations or impacts, preventing fraudulent acts such as the game ball B being illegally accepted into the winning hole 2801, and reducing the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, since the diagonals of the squares of the winning hole 2801 and the losing hole 2802 extend in the front-to-rear direction, the shapes of the winning hole 2801 and the losing hole 2802 can be more easily seen when viewed from a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the player can see the sorting unit 2800 having the rolling surface portion 2803 in which the winning hole 2801 and the losing hole 2802 are provided, which are non-circular squares (appearing as diamonds in this case) that have never been seen in pachinko machines 1 before, and this can make a strong impact on the player, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players, and it is possible to make it easier for players to select this pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine to play, and it is possible to enjoy playing with this pachinko machine 1 and suppress a decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, the non-circular winning opening 2801 and losing opening 2802 are shown to have the same shape, but this is not limited to the above. The inner periphery shapes of the winning opening 2801 and losing opening 2802 may be different from each other, making the winning opening 2801 more noticeable.

[5-9d-2. Attacker Unit]
The attacca unit 2600 of the center role 2500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 152 to 164. Fig. 152(a) is an exploded perspective view of the attacca unit of the center role disassembled from the front, and Fig. 152(b) is an exploded perspective view of the attacca unit of the center role disassembled from the back. Fig. 153 is an exploded perspective view of the attacca unit of the center role disassembled from the front, and Fig. 154 is an exploded perspective view of the attacca unit of the center role disassembled from the back. Fig. 155(a) is an oblique view of the second start opening opening unit, the first large winning opening opening unit, the second large winning opening opening unit, and the V distribution unit in the attacca unit seen from the front, and Fig. 155(b) is an oblique view of the second start opening opening unit, the first large winning opening opening unit, the second large winning opening opening unit, and the V distribution unit in the attacca unit seen from the back.

Figure 156 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the second starting port opening/closing unit in the attacca unit of the center role piece, disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the second starting port opening/closing unit, disassembled and viewed from the back. Figure 157 (a) is an oblique view of the second starting port opening/closing unit when the second starting port is closed, (b) is an oblique view of the second starting port opening/closing unit when the second starting port is open, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of each component of the second starting port opening/closing unit when the second starting port is closed, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of each component of the second starting port opening/closing unit when the second starting port is open.

Figure 158(a) is an exploded perspective view of the first main prize opening opening/closing unit in the attacca unit of the center role-playing device, seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the first main prize opening opening/closing unit, seen from the back. Figure 159(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of each component of the first main prize opening opening/closing unit when the first main prize opening is closed, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of each component of the first main prize opening opening/closing unit when the first main prize opening is open.

Figure 160 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the second large winning opening opening unit in the attacca unit of the center role from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the second large winning opening opening unit from the rear. Figure 161 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the V distribution unit in the attacca unit of the center role from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the V distribution unit from the rear. Figure 162 (a) is an oblique view showing the relationship between the V distribution unit, the V winning opening sensor, the losing opening sensor, and the center lower right ball path, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of (a) disassembled. Figure 163 (a) is an oblique view showing the installation state of the opening and closing unit of a different embodiment, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of (a) disassembled.

The attacca unit 2600 of the center device 2500 has one general winning hole 2001, a second starting hole 2005, a first large winning hole 2006, a second large winning hole 2007, a V winning hole 2008, a losing hole 2009, and a right sub-out hole 2021b. The attacca unit 2600 has a second starting hole sensor 2601 that detects a game ball B received in the second starting hole 2005, a second large winning hole sensor 2602 that detects a game ball B received in the second large winning hole 2007, a V winning hole sensor 2603 that detects a game ball B received in the V winning hole 2008, and a losing hole sensor 2604 that detects a game ball B received in the losing hole 2009.

The attacca unit 2600 is attached to the center base 2511 of the main unit 2510 and includes a flat attacca base plate 2610 attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and an attacca front plate 2620 provided at the front side of the attacca base plate 2610 and forming a second start port 2005, a first large prize port 2006, a second large prize port 2007, a V prize port 2008, a loss port 2009, a right sub-out port 2021b, and a flow path for the game ball B, and holding the front end side of the second start port sensor 2601, the second large prize port sensor 2602, the V prize port sensor 2603, and the loss port sensor 2604.

The attacca units 2600 are each attached to the rear side of the attacca base plate 2610 and include a second start opening/closing unit 2630 that opens and closes the second start opening 2005, a first large prize opening opening/closing unit 2640 that opens and closes the first large prize opening 2006, a second large prize opening opening/closing unit 2650 that opens and closes the second large prize opening 2007, and a V distribution unit 2660 that distributes the game ball B received in the second large prize opening 2007 to either the V prize opening 2008 or the losing opening 2009.

The attacca unit 2600 is held in front of the attacca base plate 2610 and behind the attacca front plate 2620, and includes a second starting opening decorative board 2671 on the upper surface of which are mounted a plurality of LEDs for illuminating and decorating the second starting opening 2005, a first large winning opening decorative board 2672 on the upper surface of which are mounted a plurality of LEDs for illuminating and decorating the first large winning opening 2006, a second large winning opening decorative board 2673 on the upper surface of which are mounted a plurality of LEDs for illuminating and decorating the second large winning opening 2007, and a V winning opening decorative board 2674 on the upper surface of which are mounted a plurality of LEDs for illuminating and decorating the V winning opening 2008 and the losing opening 2009.

The attacca unit 2600 further includes a center upper right ball path 2675 that is attached to the rear side of the attacca base plate 2610 and guides the game ball B received in the second starting hole 2005 downward, and a center lower right ball path 2676 that is attached to the rear side of the attacca base plate 2610 and guides the game ball B received in the V winning hole 2008 and the losing hole 2009 backward, and holds the rear end side of the V winning hole sensor 2603 and the losing hole sensor 2604.

The center upper right ball path 2675 of the attacca unit 2600 is used by the game ball B that is received by the second starting port 2005 and detected by the second starting port sensor 2601 on the front side of the attacca base plate 2610, and then guided rearward by the attacca front plate 2620 and passes through the first opening 2611a of the attacca base plate 2610. The game ball B that enters the center upper right ball path 2675 is guided downward, then guided rearward by the first gutter section 2615 of the attacca base plate 2610 and handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, from which it is discharged downward.

The center lower right ball path 2676 of the attacker unit 2600 has two passage sections 2676a that extend in the front-rear direction and are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and a sensor abutment section 2676b that is provided above the two passage sections 2676a and can be abutted by the V winning port sensor 2603 and the losing port sensor 2604. The two passage sections 2676a are inclined so that the rear end side is lower. The sensor abutment section 2676b can be abutted against the rear parts of the V winning port sensor 2603 and the losing port sensor 2604 to restrict the left-right, downward, and backward movement of the V winning port sensor 2603 and the losing port sensor 2604.

The center lower right ball path 2676 also has a ring-shaped band holding portion 2676c, which protrudes rearward and can be inserted with a cable tie CT, behind the sensor abutment portion 2676b. By using this band holding portion 2676c and the cable tie CT, it is possible to bundle and hold multiple wiring EC connected to the V winning hole sensor 2603, the losing hole sensor 2604, etc.

The center lower right ball path 2676 cooperates with the unit case 2665 of the V distribution unit 2660 to sandwich the V winning hole sensor 2603 and the losing hole sensor 2604 from above and below (see FIG. 162). The center lower right ball path 2676 is attached to the rear side of the attacca base plate 2610 when assembled to the game board 5, and the front ends of the two passage sections 2676a face the seventh opening 2611g of the attacca base plate 2610. The passage section 2676a of this center lower right ball path 2676 is entered by the game ball B that is received by the second large winning hole 2007 and distributed by the V distribution unit 2660 to either the V winning hole 2008 or the losing hole 2009, and is guided backward by the attacca front plate 2620 and passes through the seventh opening 2611g of the attacca base plate 2610. The game ball B that enters the passage 2676a is guided backward by the inclination, and is delivered from the rear end to the rear ball guide unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 and discharged downward.

The attacca unit also includes a board base 2677 attached to the rear of the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630, an attacca relay board 2678 attached to the rear of the board base 2677, a board cover 2679 attached to the board base 2677 so as to cover the rear of the attacca relay board 2678, and a magnetic sensor holder 2680 attached to the rear of the attacca base plate 2610 for holding the magnetic sensor 1030.

The attacca unit 2600 also has a bundling base 2550 attached to the rear side of the attacca base plate 2610 (see Figures 166 to 170, etc.), as will be described in detail later. The bundling base 2550 has a ring-shaped band holding portion 2552, and by bundling multiple wiring EC with a cable tie CT passed through the band holding portion 2552, the multiple wiring EC can be supported by the attacca base plate 2610 in a bundled state.

[5-9b-2a. Attacca base plate]
The attacca base plate 2610, as shown in Figures 152 to 154, has a flat base plate body 2611. The base plate body 2611 has a first opening 2611a which penetrates from front to back at the top, through which the second starting hole sensor 2601 and the second starting hole door body 2631 which opens and closes the second starting hole 2005 are inserted and through which the game ball B received in the second starting hole 2005 passes, a second opening 2611b which penetrates from front to back below the first opening 2611a and through which wiring connected to the second starting hole decorative board 2671 is inserted, and a second large winning hole door body 2631 which penetrates from front to back below the second opening 2611b and opens and closes the second large winning hole 2007. a third opening 2611c through which the wire 2651 is inserted; a fourth opening 2611d through which the wire connected to the second large prize opening decorative board 2673 is inserted, a fifth opening 2611e through which the V prize opening door body 2661 for opening and closing the V prize opening 2008 is inserted, a sixth opening 2611f through which the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 passes, and a sixth opening 2611g through which the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 passes. a seventh opening 2611g penetrating from front to back below the seventh opening 2611g, through which the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 are inserted and through which the game ball B received in the V winning opening 2008 or the losing opening 2009 passes; an eighth opening 2611h penetrating from front to back below the seventh opening 2611g, through which wiring connected to the V winning opening decorative board 2674 is inserted; and an eighth opening 2611h penetrating from front to back to the left of the eighth opening 2611h and the seventh opening 2611g, through which the game ball B received in the right sub-out opening 2021b passes. the first large prize opening 2006 decorative board 2672 is inserted through; an eleventh opening 2611k which penetrates front to back above and to the left of the tenth opening 2611j and through which a first large prize opening door body 2641 which opens and closes the first large prize opening 2006 is inserted; and a twelfth opening 2611l which penetrates front to back below the eleventh opening 2611k and through which a game ball B received in the first large prize opening 2006 passes.

The attacca base plate 2610 also has a flat attacca upper shelf portion 2612 that extends to the left and right above the first opening 2611a on the front surface of the base plate body 2611 with the left end lower and protrudes forward, and a sensor holding recess 2613 that is recessed rearward below the third opening 2611c on the front surface of the base plate body 2611 and to the left of the fourth opening 2611d, into which the rear end of the second large prize opening sensor 2602 is inserted.

The Attacca base plate 2610 further has a number of mounting bosses 2614 that protrude cylindrically rearward from the rear surface of the base plate body 2611, a first gutter section 2615 that guides rearward the game ball B that is received by the second starting port 2005, passes through the first opening 2611a, and is guided by the center upper right ball path 2675, a second gutter section 2616 that guides rearward the game ball B that is received by the general winning port 2001 and passes through the sixth opening 2611f, and a third gutter section 2617 that guides rearward the game ball B that is received by the right sub-out port 2021b and passes through the ninth opening 2611i.

[5-9d-2b. Attacca front plate]
The attacca front panel 2620 is formed to be transparent. The attacca front panel 2620 has a flat front panel body 2621 and a wall forming part 2622 extending rearward in a plate shape from the rear surface of the front panel body 2621. A central opening 2605 and a right opening 2606 are formed by the wall forming part 2622 of the attacca front panel 2620.

The wall forming portion 2622 of the attacca front panel 2620 also forms, in addition to the general winning port 2001, the first large winning port 2006, the second large winning port 2007, the V winning port 2008, the losing port 2009, the right sub-out port 2021b, the passage for the game ball B, etc., a sensor holding portion 2623 which holds the front end side of the second starting port sensor 2601, the second large winning port sensor 2602, the V winning port sensor 2603, and the losing port sensor 2604, a board holding portion 2624 which holds the second starting port decorative board 2671, the first large winning port decorative board 2672, the second large winning port decorative board 2673, the V winning port decorative board 2674, etc.

Furthermore, the attacca front panel 2620 has an attacca right guide passage 2625 that guides the game ball B guided by the attacca upper shelf portion 2612. This attacca right guide passage 2625 can guide the game ball B to the left of the second starting hole 2005 and the second large winning hole 2007.

[5-9d-2c. Second starting port opening and closing unit]
As shown in Figures 156 and 157, the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 of the attacca unit 2600 has a flat second starting port door body 2631 that penetrates the attacca base plate 2610 and is provided to be able to move forward and backward, a starting port solenoid 2632 (see Figure 203) for moving the second starting port door body 2631 forward and backward according to the normal pattern drawn by the passage of the game ball B through the gate 2002, and a unit case 2635 that holds the second starting port door body 2631 and the starting port solenoid 2632 and is composed of a first case part 2633 and a second case part 2634. The second starting port 2005 opens to the right, and the flat second starting port door body 2631 is provided to the right of the second starting port 2005 (second starting port sensor 2601) in a state of extending forward and backward and up and down.

The second starting hole opening/closing unit 2630 has a flat guide piece 2636 that moves back and forth in the opposite direction to the forward and backward movement of the second starting hole door body 2631, and can guide the game ball B to the second starting hole 2005 (second starting hole sensor 2601) by penetrating the attacca base plate 2610 and protruding forward. The guide piece 2636 is held (supported) by the unit case 2635 so that it can move forward and backward. The flat guide piece 2636 extends to the right from near the bottom of the second starting hole door body 2631. The guide piece 2636 is inclined so that the right end side is lower. In FIG. 155, the second starting hole door body 2631 of the second starting hole opening/closing unit 2630 protrudes (advances) forward, so the guide piece 2636, which moves in the opposite direction, is retracted, and the state when the second starting hole 2005 is closed is shown.

The second starting port opening/closing unit 2630, which is not shown in the figure, is arranged inside the unit case 2635 so as to be rotatable around an axis in the vertical direction, and has an opening/closing link 2637 that transmits the advancement and retreat of the plunger 2632a of the starting port solenoid 2632 to the second starting port door body 2631 and the guide piece 2636, thereby advancing and retreating the second starting port door body 2631 and the guide piece 2636.

The second starting port door body 2631 of the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 has a door piece 2631a that is long from front to back and is provided with its plate surface facing left to right, a flat base 2631b that extends rearward from the rear of the lower end of the door piece 2631a, and an opening/closing pin 2631c that protrudes upward from the base 2631b in a cylindrical shape. The door piece 2631a of the second starting port door body 2631 is inclined so that its front end edge moves rearward as it moves downward. In addition, the door piece 2631a is inclined near the front end of the right side surface so that it moves leftward as it moves forward, and its thickness becomes thinner as it moves forward.

The second starting opening door body 2631 is inclined from the front end rearward by a specified width, with the right side moving leftward as it moves forward. In other words, it is tapered so that the front end becomes narrower. This makes it difficult for the game ball B to get caught between the front plate body 2621 of the attacca front plate 2620 and the front end of the second starting opening door body 2631 when the second starting opening door body 2631 moves forward, and even if it does get caught, friction is reduced to minimize the chance of it getting caught.

The second starting port door 2631 has a base 2631b supported by the door support part of the second case part 2644 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and the door piece 2631a can protrude forward through the door slit 2634c of the second case part 2644. The opening/closing pin 2631c of the second starting port door 2631 is slidably inserted into the first slit 2637e of the opening/closing link 2637.

The starting port solenoid 2632 is held in the unit case 2635 so that the plunger 2632a can move left and right (to the right). The starting port solenoid 2632 is arranged so as to overlap (in a plan view) with the second starting port door body 2631 and the guide piece 2636. The starting port solenoid 2632 is biased in the protruding direction by a spring (not shown) so that the advancing and retreating plunger 2632a of the starting port solenoid 2632 moves forward and backward. Therefore, when the starting port solenoid 2632 is not energized, the plunger 2632a protrudes due to the biasing force of the spring, and the opening and closing link 2637, which transmits the advancement and retreat of the plunger 2632a, causes the second starting port door body 2631 to protrude forward to close the second starting port 2005, and the guide piece 2636 to retract into the unit case 2635, making it impossible to guide the game ball B to the second starting port 2005 side.

The unit case 2635 is composed of two members, a first case part 2633 and a second case part 2634. The first case part 2633 is formed in a box shape that is open in the front, left and right directions, and below. On the other hand, the second case part 2634 is formed in a box shape that is open at the top and back. As a result, by combining the first case part 2633 and the second case part 2634 with each other, the respective open parts are closed. The first case part 2633 has a shaft part 2633a that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape and rotatably supports the opening/closing link 2637.

The second case portion 2634 of the unit case 2635 has a door body support portion 2634a extending in the front-rear direction to support the second starting opening door body 2631 so that it can slide in the front-rear direction, a guide piece support portion 2634b extending in the front-rear direction to support the guide piece 2636 so that it can slide in the front-rear direction, a door body slit 2634c that penetrates in the front-rear direction so that the door piece 2631a of the second starting opening door body 2631 can be inserted, and a guide piece slit 2634d that penetrates in the front-rear direction so that the guide piece main body 2636a of the guide piece 2636 can be inserted.

The door support portion 2634a of the second case portion 2634 is formed in a U-shape with an upwardly open cross section, into which the base portion 2631b of the second starting opening door body 2631 is inserted so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The guide piece support portion 2634b is formed in a U-shape with a cross section, and a pair of guide piece support portions 2634b are provided spaced apart in the left-right direction so that their open portions face each other. The left and right side ends of the guide piece body 2636a of the guide piece 2636 are inserted into the pair of guide piece support portions 2634b so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, respectively.

The guide piece 2636 has a flat guide piece body 2636a that is long in the left-right and front-back directions, a notch 2636b that is cut forward from the rear edge of the guide piece body 2636a, and an opening/closing pin 2636c that protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a portion of the guide piece body 2636a to the right of the notch 2636b. The guide piece body 2636a of the guide piece 2636 has rear portions on both left and right ends inserted into a pair of guide piece support portions 2634b of the second case portion 2634 and is supported so as to be slidable in the front-back direction. In addition, the front end side of the guide piece body 2636a can protrude forward through a guide piece slit 2634d of the second case portion 2634.

The guide piece 2636 is inclined from the front end to the rear by a specified width so that the underside moves upward as it moves forward. In other words, it is tapered so that the front end becomes narrower. This makes it difficult for the game ball B to get caught between the front plate body 2621 of the attacca front plate 2620 and the guide piece 2636 when the guide piece 2636 moves forward, and even if it does get caught, friction is reduced to minimize the chance of it getting caught.

As shown in FIG. 157, the cutout 2636b of the guide piece 2636 is cut in a U-shape from the rear edge to the front. This cutout 2636b is formed so that when the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 is assembled, the opening/closing link 2637 is positioned therein and does not come into contact with the opening/closing link 2637. Details will be described later, but the presence of the cutout 2636b of the guide piece 2636 allows the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 to be compact. The opening/closing pin 2636c of the guide piece 2636 is slidably inserted into the second slit 2637g of the opening/closing link 2637.

The opening/closing link 2637 has a cylindrical base 2637a extending vertically and supported by the unit case 2635 so as to be rotatable around a vertical axis, a lower arm 2637b extending outward from the lower end of the base 2637a, a pair of transmission pins 2637c extending cylindrically downward at a predetermined interval from the tip of the lower arm, a first arm 2637d extending from the upper end of the base 2637a in a direction perpendicular to the lower arm 2637b, a first slit 2637e cut from the tip of the first arm 2637d toward the base 2637a, a second arm 2637f extending from the upper end of the base 2637a in the opposite direction to the first arm 2637d, and a second slit 2637g cut from the tip of the second arm 2637f toward the base 2637a.

The cylindrical base 2637a is held rotatably around the vertical axis by inserting the shaft 2633a of the first case part 2633. The lower arm 2637b extends forward from the lower end of the base 2637a in a flat plate shape. The tip of the disk-shaped plunger 2632a of the starting port solenoid 2632 is inserted between the pair of transmission pins 2637c. The first arm 2637d extends leftward from the upper end of the base 2637a longer than the lower arm 2637b. The first slit 2637e extends from the tip of the first arm 2637d to near the center of the first arm 2637d in the longitudinal direction, and the opening/closing pin 2631c of the second starting port door body 2631 is slidably inserted therein. The second arm 2637f extends rightward from the upper end of the base 2637a with the same length as the first arm 2637d. The second slit 2637g extends from the tip of the second arm 2637f to near the center of the second arm 2637f in the longitudinal direction, and the opening/closing pin 2636c of the guide piece 2636 is slidably inserted into the second slit 2637g.

When assembled to the game board 5, the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 has a unit case 2635 attached to the rear side of the attacca base plate 2610, and is configured so that the second starting opening door body 2631 and guide piece 2636 can advance and retreat forward of the front surface of the attacca base plate 2610 through the first opening 2611a of the base plate body 2611. The second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 is configured so that the second starting opening door body 2631 and guide piece 2636 are colored a predetermined color (e.g., red, black, blue, etc.) to make them stand out. The second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 has a transparent unit case 2635, which allows the inside to be seen from the outside and allows light to pass through.

As shown in Figures 157 (c) and (d), when the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 is assembled, the starting port solenoid 2632 is oriented in the left-right direction so that the plunger 2632a protrudes to the right. The second starting port door body 2631 is provided above the starting port solenoid 2632. The guide piece 2636 is provided between the second starting port door body 2631 and the starting port solenoid 2632. The opening/closing link 2637 is provided so that the lower end of the base 2637a is located below the guide piece 2636 and the upper end of the base 2637a is located above the base 2631b of the second starting port door body 2631.

The opening/closing link 2637 is arranged so that its central axis is located slightly forward of the rear end of the starting port solenoid 2632, within the range in which the tip of the plunger 2632a in the starting port solenoid 2632 moves forward and backward. A second starting port door body 2631 is provided to the left of the base 2637a of the opening/closing link 2637, and a guide piece 2636 is provided so that the base 2637a of the opening/closing link 2637 is inserted into the cutout 2636b. This cutout 2636b is formed so that the opening/closing link 2637 (base 2637a) does not come into contact with it.

The second starting opening door body 2631 has its base 2631b inserted into the door body support part 2634a which is open upward in the second case part 2634, and the first arm 2637d of the opening/closing link 2637 is positioned above the base 2631b, with the opening/closing pin 2631c inserted into the first slit 2637e. As a result, the second starting opening door body 2631 is restricted in its movement in the up-down and left-right directions by the door body support part 2634a and the first arm 2637d.

The left and right ends of the guide piece 2636's guide piece body 2636a are inserted into the guide piece support parts 2634b of the second case part 2634, and the guide piece support parts 2634b restrict the guide piece 2636's movement in the up-down and left-right directions. The opening/closing pin 2636c of the guide piece 2636 is inserted into the second slit 2637g of the opening/closing link 2637.

In the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630, in the normal state (when the starting port solenoid 2632 is not energized), as shown in FIG. 157(a) and (c), the plunger 2632a protrudes to the right due to the biasing force of the spring (not shown) of the starting port solenoid 2632. In this state, the tip of the plunger 2632a is located to the right of the central axis of the base 2637a of the opening/closing link 2637, so that the lower arm 2637b extends to the right front relative to the central axis of the base 2637a by a pair of transmission pins 2637c between which the disk-shaped portion of the tip of the plunger 2632a is inserted. Therefore, the tip of the first arm 2637d extending at a right angle to the lower arm 2637b is located forward of the central axis of the base 2637a, and the tip of the second arm 2637f is located rearward of the central axis of the base 2637a. The opening/closing pin 2631c of the second starting port door body 2631 is inserted into the first slit 2637e of the first arm 2637d, and the opening/closing pin 2636c of the guide piece 2636 is inserted into the second slit 2637g of the second arm 2637f, so that the second starting port door body 2631 moves forward and the guide piece 2636 moves backward.

As a result, the front end of the second starting port door body 2631 protrudes forward from the front surface of the attacca base plate 2610, and the front end of the guide piece 2636 is located rearward from the front surface of the attacca base plate 2610. In this state, the guide piece 2636 does not guide the game ball B toward the second starting port 2005, and even if the game ball B moves toward the second starting port 2005 for some reason, it is blocked by the second starting port door body 2631 and will not be accepted by the second starting port 2005.

On the other hand, when current is applied to the start port solenoid 2632 in a predetermined pattern according to the normal symbol drawn by the passage of the game ball B through the gate 2002 (the normal symbol is a "normal win"), the tip of the plunger 2632a moves to the left so as to sink against the spring force. In this state, the tip of the plunger 2632a is located to the left of the central axis of the base 2637a of the opening/closing link 2637. Therefore, when current is applied to the start port solenoid 2632 and the plunger 2632a sinks, the opening/closing link 2637 rotates in a clockwise direction about the central axis of the base 2637a via a pair of transmission pins 2637c between which the disk-shaped portion of the tip of the plunger 2632a is inserted. This rotation causes the tip of the first arm 2637d of the opening/closing link 2637 to be positioned rearward of the central axis of the base 2637a, and the tip of the second arm 2637f to be positioned forward of the central axis of the base 2637a. The opening/closing pin 2631c of the second starting opening door body 2631 is inserted into the first slit 2637e of the first arm 2637d, and the opening/closing pin 2636c of the guide piece 2636 is inserted into the second slit 2637g of the second arm 2637f, so that the second starting opening door body 2631 moves backward and the guide piece 2636 moves forward.

As a result, the front end of the second starting port door body 2631 is positioned rearward of the front surface of the attacca base plate 2610, and the front end of the guide piece 2636 protrudes forward of the front surface of the attacca base plate 2610. In this state, when the game ball B flows down onto the upper surface of the guide piece 2636, the game ball B is guided by the guide piece 2636 and rolls to the left, and is received by the second starting port 2005 located to the left of the guide piece 2636.

After being detected by the second starting port sensor 2601, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005 is guided backward by the attacca front plate 2620 and enters the center upper right ball path 2675. The game ball B that entered the center upper right ball path 2675 is then guided backward by the first gutter 2615 of the attacca base plate 2610 and handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is then discharged downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100.

In addition, in the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630, when the guide piece 2636 is protruding forward, the front end of the cutout portion 2636b of the guide piece 2636 is located rearward of the front surface of the unit case 2635, so that the cutout portion 2636b does not impede the flow of the game ball B and the cutout portion 2636b is difficult for the player to see.

Furthermore, the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 has, in the unit case 2635, a sensor holding recess 2635a recessed rearward from the front and capable of holding the rear portion of the second starting port sensor 2601, a magnetic sensor holding portion 2635b capable of detachably holding the magnetic sensor 1030, a band holding portion 2635c protruding rearward from the rear in a ring shape and through which the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT can be inserted, a wiring locking portion 2635d provided below the band holding portion 2635c on the rear, and a through portion 2635e that penetrates the unit case 2635 at the location of the wiring locking portion 2635d. The sensor holding recess 2635a is provided to the left of the second starting port door body 2631.

The sensor holding recess 2635a of the unit case 2635 can hold the second starting hole sensor 2601 with its detection hole facing left and right, and can hold it in a tilted state so that the axis of the detection hole is lower to the left. The unit case 2635 can hold the rear part of the second starting hole sensor 2601 detachably from the outside by the sensor holding recess 2635a. In addition, the sensor holding recess 2635a can hold the second starting hole sensor 2601 so that the lower end of its detection hole is slightly lower than the extension line of the upper surface of the guide piece 2636. This allows the game ball B guided by the guide piece 2636 to pass through the detection hole of the second starting hole sensor 2601 reliably and be detected.

The band holding portion 2635c of the unit case 2635 has an annular opening facing left and right. This allows the wiring EC to be extended in the vertical direction when the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT is passed through the band holding portion 2635c and fastened (tied) together with the wiring EC.

The wiring locking portion 2635d protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the unit case 2635, and then extends to the right along the rear surface in rear view, forming an L-shape. The tip of this wiring locking portion 2635d is formed into a hook shape toward the rear surface side of the unit case 2635, and the surface facing the unit case 2635 side, including the hook-shaped portion, is inclined so that it gets farther away from the unit case 2635 as it approaches the tip. This allows the wiring locking portion 2635d to insert the wiring EC extending up and down from the right side in rear view, and the hook-shaped portion at the tip can prevent the wiring EC from coming loose (falling off).

The through-hole 2635e allows the wiring EC to pass between the inside and outside of the unit case 2635, and when the wiring EC is inserted and locked between the wiring locking portion 2635d and the outer surface of the unit case 2635, the wiring EC is bent inside the through-hole 2635e, allowing the pressure applied to the wiring EC to be released from the wiring locking portion 2635d.

The band holding portion 2635c and the wiring locking portion 2635d of this unit case 2635 allow the wiring EC held in the band holding portion 2635c by the cable tie CT to be locked at its lower end to the wiring locking portion 2635d, so that the wiring EC can be aligned along the rear surface of the unit case 2635.

Examples of the wiring EC held by the band holding portion 2635c and the wiring locking portion 2635d include wiring EC connected to the magnetic sensor held by the magnetic sensor holding portion 2635b, the second starting port sensor 2601, the starting port solenoid 2632, and the second starting port decorative board 2671, etc., but other wiring EC may also be held.

According to the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 of this embodiment, the starting port solenoid 2632 is arranged so that the plunger 2632a moves back and forth in the left-right direction, and is arranged so as to overlap the second starting port door body 2631 and the guide piece 2636 vertically (in a plan view), so that the dimension in the front-to-rear direction of the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 can be made as small as possible. In addition, the guide piece 2636 is provided with a notch 2636b into which a part of the opening/closing link 2637 for moving the second starting port door body 2631 and the guide piece 2636 back and forth is inserted, so that the area of the region formed by the guide piece 2636 and the opening/closing link 2637 in a plan view can be made as small as possible, and the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 can be made compact. Therefore, by making the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 smaller, it is easier to secure space at the rear, so that the rear props and decorations can be made larger, or new props and decorations can be placed at the rear, making the pachinko machine 1 more noticeable and strongly attracting the player's attention, while also providing more entertainment for the player with the props at the rear, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the unit case 2635 of the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 is attached behind the attacca base plate 2610, the attacca base plate 2610 makes it possible to make the unit case 2635 (starting port solenoid 2632) less visible to the player, which reduces the poor appearance caused by the starting port solenoid 2632 being visible, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that looks good.

Furthermore, since the unit case 2635 holding the second starting port door body 2631 and the starting port solenoid 2632 is composed of two parts, the first case part 2633 and the second case part 2634, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of parts of the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the unit case 2635 is composed of two parts, the first case part 2633 and the second case part 2634, it is possible to hold the second starting port door body 2631 and the starting port solenoid 2632 by sandwiching them between the first case part 2633 and the second case part 2634, simplifying the effort required for assembly.

In addition, the unit case 2635 of the second start opening/closing unit 2630 is provided with a sensor holding recess 2635a into which the rear end of the second start opening sensor 2601 is inserted, and the second start opening sensor 2601 is in contact with the outer surface of the unit case 2635. This allows the unit case 2635 to restrict movement of the second start opening sensor 2601 in a predetermined direction, making it possible to position the second start opening sensor 2601 at a predetermined position. In addition, when assembling the game board 5, the second start opening sensor 2601 can be guided by the sensor holding recess 2635a of the unit case 2635, making the assembly work easier.

[5-9d-2d. First prize opening and closing unit]
As shown in Figures 158 and 159, the first large prize opening opening opening unit 2640 of the attacca unit 2600 has a flat first large prize opening door body 2641 that penetrates the attacca base plate 2610 and is movable forward and backward, a first attacca solenoid 2642 for moving the first large prize opening door body 2641 forward and backward in response to the first special pattern or second special pattern (for example, ``large prize opening,'' ``medium prize opening,'' ``small prize opening,'' etc.) drawn by the acceptance of a game ball B into the first lower starting opening 2003 or the first upper starting opening 2004 or the acceptance of a game ball B into the second starting opening 2005, or in response to the acceptance of a game ball B into the V prize opening 2008, and a unit case 2645 that holds the first large prize opening door body 2641 and the first attacca solenoid 2642 and is composed of two cases, a first case portion 2643 and a second case portion 2644.

The flat first large prize opening door body 2641 extends in the left-right direction above the first large prize opening 2006, which opens upward, with the left end lower.

The first large prize opening opening/closing unit 2640 also has a plunger head 2646 attached to the plunger 2642a of the first attacker solenoid 2642, and an opening/closing link 2647 that is rotatably supported by the unit case 2645 around a vertical axis and rotates as the plunger head 2646 moves forward and backward, thereby moving the first large prize opening door body 2641 forward and backward.

The first large prize opening door body 2641 of the first large prize opening opening opening unit 2640 has a door piece 2641a that is long and flat from side to side and inclined so that the left end is lower, a notch 2641b that is cut forward from the rear edge of the door piece 2641a, and a link slit 2641c that is long from side to side and penetrates vertically near the rear end of the door piece 2641a to the right of the notch 2641b. The door piece 2641a is bent in a stepped shape so that the part to the right of the center of the front edge is located rearward, and the rear edge is bent in a stepped shape so that the part to the left of the center is located forward. In other words, the door piece 2641a is formed in a shape in plan view that is long from side to side with another long rectangle overlapping the upper right corner of a long rectangle from side to side.

The first large prize opening door body 2641 is inclined from the front end to the rear by a specified width, so that the underside moves upward as it moves forward. In other words, it is tapered so that the front end becomes narrower. This makes it difficult for the game ball B to get caught between the front plate body 2621 of the attacca front plate 2620 and the front end of the first large prize opening door body 2641 when the first large prize opening door body 2641 moves forward, and even if it does get caught, friction is reduced to minimize the chance of it getting caught.

As shown in FIG. 159, the cutout 2641b of the first large prize opening door body 2641 is provided in a portion of the rear edge of the door piece 2641a that is located forward and to the left of the center. The cutout 2641b is cut into a trapezoidal shape that narrows toward the front, and its right edge extends straight in the front-to-rear direction so that the portion that extends in the front-to-rear direction near the center of the rear edge of the door piece 2641a is extended forward. The link slit 2641c is slidably inserted with the opening/closing pin 2647d of the opening/closing link 2647. This first large prize opening door body 2641 is supported by the unit case 2645 so that it can slide in the front-to-rear direction.

The first attacca solenoid 2642 is held in the unit case 2645 so that the plunger 2642a can move back and forth in the left-right direction (to the left). The first attacca solenoid 2642 is arranged so as to overlap the first large prize opening door body 2641 vertically (in a plan view). The first attacca solenoid 2642 is biased in a protruding direction by a spring (not shown) so that the advancing and retreating plunger 2642a of the first attacca solenoid 2642 moves forward and backward. Therefore, when the first attacca solenoid 2642 is not energized, the plunger 2642a protrudes due to the biasing force of the spring, and the first large prize opening door body 2641 protrudes forward via the plunger head 2646 and the opening and closing link 2647 attached to the plunger 2642a. By this first large prize opening door body 2641 protruding forward, the upper part of the first large prize opening 2006 can be closed to make it impossible to receive the game ball B.

The unit case 2645 is provided so that the first case part 2643 and the second case part 2644 are separated vertically. Between the first case part 2643 and the second case part 2644, the first large prize winning opening door body 2641 is held so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The unit case 2645 has a ball passage 2645a through which the game ball B can flow. The upstream end of the ball passage 2645a opens forward at the front of the unit case 2645 below the first large prize winning opening door body 2641, and the downstream end opens downward at the rear of the unit case 2645. The ball passage 2645a in this embodiment allows the game ball B received in the first large prize winning opening 2006 to flow. In addition, the first case part 2643 extends downward in a cylindrical shape and has an axis part (not shown) that rotatably supports the opening and closing link 2647.

The plunger head 2646 has a connection part 2646a that is attached to the plunger 2642a by inserting the disk-shaped part at the tip of the plunger 2642a of the first attacker solenoid 2642, a protrusion 2646b that protrudes upward from the upper end of the connection part 2646a and to the left, and a transmission slit 2646c that penetrates the protrusion 2646b from top to bottom and is long from front to back. The transmission pin of the opening/closing link 2647 is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 2646c. With the connection part 2646a attached to the plunger 2642a, the plunger head 2646 moves forward and backward together with the plunger 2642a in the left-right direction.

The opening/closing link 2647 has a cylindrical base 2647a that extends vertically and is supported by the unit case 2645 so as to be rotatable around a vertical axis, a flat extension piece 2647b that extends in a triangular shape so as to spread outward from the base 2647a, a transmission pin 2647c that extends cylindrically downward from one tip of the extension piece 2647b, and an opening/closing pin 2647d that extends cylindrically downward from the remaining tip of the extension piece 2647b.

The cylindrical base 2647a is held rotatably around the vertical axis by inserting the shaft portion (not shown) of the first case portion 2643. The extension piece 2647b extends forward from the lower end of the base 2647a so as to spread out in a triangular shape. The extension piece 2647b is formed in a triangular shape with the base 2647a as one apex, and one apex that is the tip is located to the left of the central axis of the base 2647a and close to the base 2647a, while the remaining apex that is the tip is located to the right of the central axis of the base 2647a and far from the base 2647a. The transmission pin 2647c extends downward from the apex (tip) of the extension piece 2647b that is close to the base 2647a, and is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 2646c of the plunger head 2646. The opening/closing pin 2647d extends downward from the apex (tip) of the extension piece 2647b that is farthest from the base 2647a, and is slidably inserted into the link slit 2641c of the first large prize opening door body 2641.

When assembled to the game board 5, the first large prize opening opening unit 2640 has a unit case 2645 attached to the rear side of the attacca base plate 2610, and the first large prize opening door body 2641 is configured to be able to advance and retreat forward of the front surface of the attacca base plate 2610 through the eleventh opening 2611k of the base plate body 2611. In addition, the upstream end of the ball passage 2645a of the unit case 2645 is located behind the twelfth opening 2611l of the attacca base plate 2610. In addition, the first large prize opening opening opening unit 2640 is configured so that the first large prize opening door body 2641 is colored a predetermined color (e.g., red, black, blue, etc.) to make it stand out. In addition, the first large prize opening opening opening unit 2640 has a transparent unit case 2645, which allows the inside to be seen from the outside and allows light to pass through.

As shown in FIG. 159(a) and the like, in the assembled state, the first attacca solenoid 2642 of the first large prize opening opening unit 2640 is oriented in the left-right direction so that the plunger 2642a protrudes to the left. The plunger head 2646 is attached to the tip of the plunger 2642a of the first attacca solenoid 2642 so that it extends upward. The first large prize opening door body 2641 is provided above the first attacca solenoid 2642 so that the protrusion 2646b of the plunger head 2646 is located within the cutout 2641b, and the upper end of the protrusion 2646b of the plunger head 2646 protrudes above the door piece 2641a (cutout 2641b) of the first large prize opening door body 2641. The cutout 2641b is formed so that the plunger head 2646 (protrusion 2646b) does not come into contact with it. In addition, the first large prize opening door body 2641 is supported by the unit case 2645 so that both left and right ends of the door piece 2641a can slide forward and backward.

The opening/closing link 2637 has a base 2637a located above the door piece 2641a (notch 2641b) of the first large prize opening door body 2641. The opening/closing link 2647 is arranged so that its central axis is located slightly forward of the rear end of the first attacca solenoid 2642, within the range of movement of the transmission slit 2646c of the plunger head 2646, which moves back and forth together with the plunger 2642a in the first attacca solenoid 2642. The transmission pin 2647c of the opening/closing link 2647 is inserted into the transmission slit 2646c of the plunger head 2646, and the opening/closing pin 2647d is inserted into the link slit 2641c of the first large prize opening door body 2641.

In the normal state, the first large prize opening opening unit 2640 has its plunger 2642a protruding to the left due to the biasing force of the spring (not shown) of the first attacker solenoid 2642, and the plunger head 2646, which moves forward and backward together with the plunger 2642a, is located at the left end of its movement. In this state, the transmission slit 2646c of the plunger head 2646 is located to the left of the central axis of the base 2647a of the opening and closing link 2647, so that the transmission pin 2647c of the opening and closing link 2647 is also located to the left of the central axis of the base 2647a. Also, in this state, the opening and closing pin 2647d of the opening and closing link 2647 is located forward of the central axis of the base 2647a. The first large prize opening door body 2641, which has a link slit 2641c into which the opening/closing pin 2647d of the opening/closing link 2647 is inserted, has its front end protruding forward beyond the front surface of the attacca base plate 2610, making it impossible to receive a game ball B into the first large prize opening 2006. In other words, the first large prize opening 2006 is closed.

On the other hand, when the first attacca solenoid 2642 is energized in a predetermined pattern according to the first special pattern or the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004 or the reception of the game ball B into the second starting port 2005 (for example, "big win", "medium win", "small win", etc.), or according to the reception of the game ball B into the V winning port 2008, the tip of the plunger 2642a moves to the right against the spring force so that the plunger 2642a sinks, and the plunger head 2646 also moves to the right together with the plunger 2642a. When this plunger head 2646 moves to the right, the transmission slit 2646c moves to the right of the central axis of the base 2647a of the opening/closing link 2647, so that the opening/closing link 2647 rotates in a counterclockwise direction via the transmission pin 2647c inserted into the transmission slit 2646c. This rotation causes the opening/closing pin 2647d of the opening/closing link 2647 to move rearward from the central axis of the base 2647a, causing the first large prize opening door body 2641 to slide rearward via the link slit 2641c into which the opening/closing pin 2647d is inserted.

As a result, the front end of the first large winning opening door body 2641 is positioned behind the front surface of the attacca base plate 2610, and the first large winning opening 2006 is opened and can receive the game ball B. In this state, as shown in FIG. 152(a), the front end of the cutout portion 2641b of the first large winning opening door body 2641 is positioned forward of the front surface of the attacca base plate 2610 and can be seen from the front. At this time, the cutout portion 2641b of the first large winning opening door body 2641 protrudes from the front surface of the attacca base plate 2610 by a distance shorter than the radius of the game ball B, so the game ball B does not come into contact with the cutout portion 2641b and does not impede the circulation of the game ball B.

The game ball B received in the first large winning opening 2006 is guided rearward by the attacca front plate 2620, passes through the twelfth opening 2611l of the attacca base plate 2610, and enters the ball passage 2645a of the unit case 2645. The game ball B that entered the ball passage 2645a is then handed over from the downstream end to the rear ball guidance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, and is detected by the first large winning opening sensor 3002 (see Figure 203) before being discharged downward.

According to the first large prize opening opening unit 2640 of this embodiment, the first attacca solenoid 2642 is arranged so that the plunger moves back and forth in the left-right direction, and is arranged so as to overlap the first large prize opening door body 2641 vertically (in a plan view), so that the dimension in the front-rear direction of the first large prize opening opening unit 2640 can be made as small as possible. In addition, the first large prize opening door body 2641 is provided with a cutout portion 2641b into which a part of the plunger head 2646 for moving the first large prize opening door body 2641 back and forth is inserted, so that the area of the area formed by the first large prize opening door body 2641, the plunger head 2646, and the opening/closing link 2647 in a plan view can be made as small as possible, and the first large prize opening opening opening unit 2640 can be made compact. Therefore, by making the first large prize opening/closing unit 2640 smaller, it is easier to secure space at the rear, so that the rear props and decorations can be made larger, or new props and decorations can be placed at the rear, making the pachinko machine 1 more noticeable and strongly attracting the player's attention. At the same time, the props at the rear can entertain the player more, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the unit case 2645 of the first large prize opening opening unit 2640 is attached behind the attacca base plate 2610, the attacca base plate 2610 makes it possible to make the unit case 2645 (first attacca solenoid 2642) less visible to the player, which reduces the loss of appearance due to the first attacca solenoid 2642 being visible, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that looks good.

Furthermore, since the unit case 2645 holding the first large prize opening door body 2641 and the first attacker solenoid 2642 is composed of two parts, the first case part 2643 and the second case part 2644, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of parts of the first large prize opening opening opening unit 2640, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because the unit case 2645 is composed of two parts, the first case part 2643 and the second case part 2644, it is possible to hold the first large prize opening door body 2641 and the first attacca solenoid 2642 in a sandwiched manner between the first case part 2643 and the second case part 2644, simplifying the effort required for assembly.

In addition, in the first large prize opening opening opening unit 2640, when the first large prize opening 2006 is closed by the first large prize opening door body 2641, a part of the cutout portion 2641b of the first large prize opening door body 2641 protrudes forward from the front surface of the attacca base plate 2610, and a first large prize opening decorative board 2672 is provided on which an LED capable of irradiating light upward to the first large prize opening 2006 is mounted, so that the LED of the first large prize opening decorative board 2672 emits light to illuminate the game ball B rolling on the first large prize opening door body 2641 from below through the cutout portion 2641b. This allows the player to see a performance in which the game ball B rolling on the first large prize opening door body 2641 is illuminated, which has never been seen in a pachinko machine before, and can strongly attract the player's interest and entertain the player, thereby suppressing a decline in interest in the game.

[5-9d-2e. Second prize opening and closing unit]
As shown in FIG. 160, the second large prize opening opening opening unit 2650 of the attacca unit 2600 includes a flat second large prize opening door body 2651 that penetrates the attacca base plate 2610 and is capable of moving forward and backward, a second attacca solenoid 2652 for moving the second large prize opening door body 2651 forward and backward in response to the first special pattern or the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B at the first lower starting hole 2003, the first upper starting hole 2004, and the second starting hole 2005, and a second attacca solenoid 2652 for moving the second large prize opening door body 2651 forward and backward in response to the first special pattern or the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B at the first lower starting hole 2003, the first upper starting hole 2004, and the second starting hole 2005. The second attacca solenoid 2652 has a unit case 2655 which holds the solenoid 2652 and is composed of a first case part 2653 and a second case part 2654, a plunger head 2656 attached to the plunger 2652a of the second attacca solenoid 2652 which moves back and forth, and an opening/closing link 2657 which is supported by the unit case 2655 so as to be rotatable about a vertical axis and which rotates as the plunger head 2656 moves back and forth, thereby moving the second large prize opening door body 2651 back and forth.

The second large prize opening door body 2651 of the second large prize opening opening opening unit 2650 has a door piece 2651a that is long and flat in the left-right direction and inclined so that the left end is lower, a base 2651b that extends rearward from the left-right center at the rear end of the door piece 2651a, and a link slit 2651c that is long in the left-right direction and penetrates the base 2651b from top to bottom. This second large prize opening door body 2651 is supported on the top surface of the unit case 2655 (first case part 2653) so that it can slide in the front-rear direction. The opening/closing pin 2657e of the opening/closing link 2657 is slidably inserted into the link slit 2651c.

The second large prize opening door body 2651 is inclined from the front end to the rear by a specified width, so that the underside moves upward as it moves forward. In other words, it is tapered so that the front end becomes narrower. This makes it difficult for the game ball B to get caught between the front plate body 2621 of the attacca front plate 2620 and the front end of the second large prize opening door body 2651 when the second large prize opening door body 2651 moves forward, and even if it does get caught, friction is reduced to minimize the chance of it getting caught.

The second attacca solenoid 2652 is held in the unit case 2655 with the plunger 2652a, which moves back and forth when current is applied, projecting to the left. The second attacca solenoid 2652 is arranged to overlap (in a plan view) the second large prize opening door body 2651 vertically. The second attacca solenoid 2652 has a spring (not shown), which biases the plunger 2652a in the projecting direction. The tip of the plunger 2652a is formed in a disk shape.

The unit case 2655 is attached to the rear side of the attacca base plate 2610. The unit case 2655 is composed of a first case part 2653 and a second case part 2654, which are separated into upper and lower parts. The unit case 2655 holds (supports) the second large prize opening door body 2651 on the top surface so that it can slide back and forth. The unit case 2655 also holds the second attacca solenoid 2652, plunger head 2656, and opening/closing link 2657 inside.

The first case part 2653 of the unit case 2655 has four slide retaining pieces 2653a protruding upward from the top surface in an inverted L-shape. The two slide retaining pieces 2653a are provided at both the left and right ends of the first case part 2653 so that the tips of the parts extending horizontally at the top end face each other. These two slide retaining pieces 2653a can slidably retain (support) both the left and right ends of the door piece 2651a in the second large prize opening door body 2651. The remaining two slide retaining pieces 2653a are provided at the rear near the center in the left-right direction on the top surface of the first case part 2653, spaced apart from each other on the left and right so that the tips of the parts extending horizontally at the top end face each other. These two slide retaining pieces 2653a can slidably retain (support) both the left and right ends of the base part 2651b in the second large prize opening door body 2651.

The first case portion 2653 of the unit case 2655 has a through hole 2653b with a fan-shaped inner periphery that penetrates vertically in the area between the two slide retaining pieces 2653a in the left-right center. The opening/closing pin 2657e of the opening/closing link 2657 is inserted from below into this through hole 2653b.

The second case part 2654 of the unit case 2655 is formed in a box shape that is long from side to side and open upward, and has a shaft part 2654a that extends upward in a cylindrical shape from near the left end of the bottom wall. The shaft part 2654a of the second case part 2654 is for rotatably supporting the opening/closing link 2657.

The plunger head 2656 has a connection part 2656a that is attached to the plunger 2652a by inserting the disk-shaped part at the tip of the plunger 2652a of the second attacker solenoid 2652, an extension part 2656b that extends leftward from the connection part 2656a, and a transmission part 2656c that is provided at the tip of the extension part 2656b. The transmission part 2656c is formed in a U-shape that opens forward in a plan view, and the transmission pin 2657c of the opening/closing link 2657 is slidably inserted inside it. With the connection part 2656a attached to the plunger 2652a, the plunger head 2656 advances and retreats in the left-right direction together with the plunger 2652a.

The opening/closing link 2657 has a cylindrical base 2657a extending vertically and supported by the unit case 2655 so as to be rotatable about a vertical axis, a first arm 2657b extending outward from the base 2657a, a transmission pin 2657c extending cylindrically upward from the tip of the first arm 2657b, a second arm 2657d extending outward from the base 2657a in a direction different from that of the first arm 2657b and longer than the first arm 2657b, and an opening/closing pin 2657e extending cylindrically upward from the tip of the second arm 2657d.

The cylindrical base 2657a is held rotatably around the vertical axis by inserting the shaft 2654a of the second case part 2654. The first arm 2657b extends forward from the lower end of the base 2657a. The transmission pin 2657c is slidably inserted into the U-shaped transmission part 2656c of the plunger head 2656. The second arm 2657d extends rightward from the upper end of the base 2657a. The second arm 2657d extends in a direction that is 90 degrees different from the first arm 2657b, and extends twice as long as the first arm 2657b. The opening/closing pin 2657e is slidably inserted into the link slit 2651c of the second large prize opening door body 2651 through the through hole 2653b of the first case part 2653 of the unit case 2655.

When assembled to the game board 5, the second large prize opening opening unit 2650 has a unit case 2655 attached to the rear side of the attacca base plate 2610, and is configured so that the second large prize opening door body 2651 can advance and retreat forward of the front surface of the attacca base plate 2610 through the third opening 2611c of the base plate body 2611. The second large prize opening opening opening unit 2650 is also configured so that the second large prize opening door body 2651 is colored a predetermined color (e.g., red, black, blue, etc.) to make it stand out. The second large prize opening opening opening unit 2650 has a transparent unit case 2655, which allows the inside to be seen from the outside and allows light to pass through.

In the normal state, the second large prize opening opening/closing unit 2650 has the second large prize opening door body 2651 move forward due to the spring force of the second attacca solenoid 2652, and its front end protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the attacca base plate 2610, making it impossible for game ball B to be received in the second large prize opening 2007. In other words, the second large prize opening 2007 is closed.

On the other hand, when the second attacca solenoid 2652 is energized in a predetermined pattern according to the first special pattern or the second special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004 or by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2005 (for example, the drawn special pattern is "big win", "medium win", "small win", etc.), the plunger 2652a is retracted against the spring force, and the opening/closing link 2657 rotates via the plunger head 2656 attached to the tip of the plunger 2652a. This rotation of the opening/closing link 2657 causes the second large winning port door body 2651 to move back, and the front end is positioned behind the front surface of the attacca base plate 2610. This opens the second large winning port 2007 and makes it possible to receive the game ball B.

The game ball B received by the second large prize opening 2007 is detected by the second large prize opening sensor 2602, which is provided below the second large prize opening 2007 and in front of the attacca base plate 2610, and is then guided further downward by the attacca front plate 2620. Below (downstream from) the second large prize opening sensor 2602 are the V prize opening 2008 and the losing opening 2009, and the game ball B detected by the second large prize opening sensor 2602 is distributed by the V distribution unit 2660 to either the V prize opening 2008 or the losing opening 2009.

After the game ball B allocated to the V winning hole 2008 is detected by the V winning hole sensor 2603 on the front side of the attacca table 2610, it is guided backward by the attacca front plate 2620 and enters the center lower right ball path 2676 through the seventh opening 2611g of the attacca table 2610. On the other hand, after the game ball B allocated to the losing hole 2009 is detected by the losing hole sensor 2604 on the front side of the attacca table 2610, it is guided backward by the attacca front plate 2620 and enters the passage portion 2676a of the center lower right ball path 2676 through the seventh opening 2611g of the attacca table 2610. Then, the game ball B that enters the passage 2676a of the center lower right ball path 2676 is handed over from its downstream end (rear end) to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is discharged downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100.

According to the second large prize opening opening unit 2650 of this embodiment, the second attacca solenoid 2652 is arranged so that the plunger 2652a moves back and forth in the left-right direction, and is arranged so as to overlap the second large prize opening door body 2651 vertically (in a plan view), so the front-to-rear dimension of the second large prize opening opening unit 2650 can be made as small as possible. Therefore, by making the second large prize opening opening unit 2650 smaller, it is easier to secure space at the rear, so that the rear role-playing device and decoration can be made larger, or new role-playing device and decoration can be placed at the rear, making the pachinko machine 1 more noticeable, which can strongly attract the player's attention, and can also entertain the player more with the role-playing device and the like at the rear, preventing the player's interest in the game from declining.

In addition, since the unit case 2655 of the second large prize opening opening unit 2650 is attached behind the attacca base plate 2610, the attacca base plate 2610 makes it possible to make the unit case 2655 (second attacca solenoid 2652) less visible to the player, which reduces the loss of appearance due to the second attacca solenoid 2652 being visible, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that looks good.

Furthermore, since the unit case 2655 holding the second large prize opening door body 2651 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 is composed of two parts, the first case part 2653 and the second case part 2654, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of parts of the second large prize opening opening opening unit 2650, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the unit case 2655 is composed of two parts, the first case part 2653 and the second case part 2654, it is possible to hold the second attacca solenoid 2652 by sandwiching it between the first case part 2653 and the second case part 2654, which simplifies the assembly process.

[5-9d-2f. V distribution unit]
As shown in FIG. 161, the V distribution unit 2660 of the attacca unit 2600 has a flat V prize opening door body 2661 which penetrates the attacca base plate 2610 and is arranged to be able to move forward and backward, a V distribution solenoid 2662 for moving the V prize opening door body 2661 forward and backward, a unit case 2665 which holds the V prize opening door body 2661 and the V distribution solenoid 2662 and is composed of a first case part 2663 and a second case part 2664, a plunger head 2666 attached to the plunger 2662a which moves forward and backward of the V distribution solenoid 2662, and an opening and closing link 2667 which is supported by the unit case 2665 so as to be rotatable about the vertical axis and which rotates as the plunger head 2666 moves forward and backward, thereby moving the V prize opening door body 2661 forward and backward.

The V winning port door body 2661 of the V distribution unit 2660 has a door piece 2661a that is flat and slightly longer than one game ball B on both sides and inclined so that the right end is lower, a base 2661b that extends rearward from the rear end of the door piece 2661a, and a link slit 2661c that is provided at the rear end of the base 2661b, penetrates vertically, and is long horizontally. This V winning port door body 2661 is supported within the unit case 2665 so that it can slide forward and backward. The opening and closing pin 2667e of the opening and closing link 2667 is slidably inserted into the link slit 2661c.

The V winning opening door body 2661 is inclined from the front end to the rear by a specified width, so that the underside moves upward as it moves forward. In other words, it is tapered so that the front end becomes narrower. This makes it difficult for the game ball B to get caught between the front plate body 2621 of the attacca front plate 2620 and the front end of the V winning opening door body 2661 when the V winning opening door body 2661 moves forward, and even if it does get caught, friction is reduced to minimize the chance of it getting caught.

The V-distribution solenoid 2662 is held in the unit case 2665 with the plunger 2662a, which moves back and forth when electricity is applied, protruding to the left. The V-distribution solenoid 2662 is arranged so as to overlap (in a plan view) the V-winning port door body 2661 vertically. The V-distribution solenoid 2662 has a spring (not shown), which urges the plunger 2662a in the protruding direction. The plunger 2662a has a disk-shaped tip.

The unit case 2665 is attached to the rear side of the attacca base plate 2610. The unit case 2665 is composed of a first case part 2663 and a second case part 2664, which are separated into upper and lower parts. The unit case 2665 holds (supports) the V winning port door body 2661 on the top surface of the second case part 2664, which is the interior, so that it can slide back and forth. The unit case 2665 also holds the V distribution solenoid 2662, plunger head 2666, and opening/closing link 2667 inside.

The first case section 2663 of the unit case 2665 is formed in a box shape that is long from side to side and open downward. The second case section 2664 is formed in a box shape that is long from side to side and open upward. The second case section 2664 has two slide retaining pieces 2664a that protrude upward in an inverted L shape from the top surface of the bottom wall. The two slide retaining pieces 2664a are arranged so that the tips of the horizontally extending parts at the upper ends face each other, centered on a part slightly to the left of the left-right center of the first case section 2663. These two slide retaining pieces 2653a can slidably retain (support) both the left and right ends of the base 2661b of the V-winning opening door body 2661.

In addition, the second case part 2664 has a shaft part 2664b that extends upward in a cylindrical shape from near the rear end to the left of the two slide holding pieces 2664a on the bottom wall. The shaft part 2664b of the second case part 2664 is for rotatably supporting the opening/closing link 2667.

This unit case 2665 has a sensor abutment 2665a on the underside of the outer surface against which a part of the V winning hole sensor 2603 and the losing hole sensor 2604 abut. By abutting the V winning hole sensor 2603 and the losing hole sensor 2604 against the sensor abutment 2665a, the movement of the V winning hole sensor 2603 and the losing hole sensor 2604 in a specified direction can be restricted. In more detail, the sensor abutment 2665a is formed in a stepped shape with the right side higher than the left side, so that the V winning hole sensor 2603 can be restricted from moving upward, and the losing hole sensor 2604 can be restricted from moving upward and to the left.

The plunger head 2666 has a connection part 2666a that is attached to the plunger 2662a by inserting the disk-shaped portion at the tip of the plunger 2662a of the V-distribution solenoid 2662, an extension part 2666b that extends leftward from the connection part 2666a, and a transmission pin 2666c that protrudes cylindrically downward from the tip of the extension part 2666b. The transmission pin 2666c is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 2667c of the opening/closing link 2667. With the connection part 2666a attached to the plunger 2662a, the plunger head 2666 advances and retreats together with the plunger 2662a in the left-right direction.

The opening/closing link 2667 has a cylindrical base 2667a extending vertically and supported by the unit case 2665 so as to be rotatable about a vertical axis, a first arm 2667b extending outward from the base 2667a, a long hole-shaped transmission slit 2667c penetrating the first arm 2667b vertically and extending in the longitudinal direction of the first arm 2667b, a second arm 2667d extending outward from the base 2667a in a direction different from that of the first arm 2667b and longer than the first arm 2667b, and an opening/closing pin 2667e extending downward in a cylindrical shape from the tip of the second arm 2667d.

The cylindrical base 2667a is held rotatably around the vertical axis by inserting the shaft 2664b of the second case 2664. The first arm 2667b extends forward from the upper end of the base 2667a. The transmission pin 2666c of the plunger head 2666 is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 2667c. The second arm 2667d extends rightward from the upper end of the base 2667a. The second arm 2667d extends in a direction that is 90 degrees different from the first arm 2667b, and extends twice as long as the first arm 2667b. The opening/closing pin 2667e is slidably inserted into the link slit 2661c of the V-winning port door body 2661.

When assembled to the game board 5, this V distribution unit 2660 has a unit case 2665 attached to the rear side of the attacca base plate 2610, and is configured so that the V winning opening door body 2661 can advance and retreat forward of the front of the attacca base plate 2610 through the fifth opening 2611e of the base plate body 2611. The V distribution unit 2660 is also configured so that the V winning opening door body 2661 is colored a predetermined color (e.g., red, black, blue, etc.) to make it stand out. The V distribution unit 2660 also has a transparent unit case 2665, which allows the inside to be seen from the outside and allows light to pass through.

Furthermore, the V distribution unit 2660 has a V winning hole sensor 2603 and a losing hole sensor 2604 abutting against the sensor abutment 2665a on the underside of the unit case 2665. The V winning hole sensor 2603 and the losing hole sensor 2604 are abutted by the sensor abutment 2676b of the center lower right ball path 2676 from the left and right, below, and behind. In other words, the V winning hole sensor 2603 and the losing hole sensor 2604 are sandwiched between the V distribution unit 2660 and the center lower right ball path 2676, and movement up and down, backward, and left and right is restricted (see Figure 162).

When the V distribution unit 2660 is not energized with the V distribution solenoid 2662, the spring force of the V distribution solenoid 2662 causes the V winning port door body 2661 to move forward, and the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the attacca base plate 2610, making it impossible for the V winning port 2008 to receive the game ball B. In other words, the V winning port 2008 is closed. As a result, the game ball B that has been received by the second large winning port 2007 and flowed down toward the V winning port 2008 can be guided to the losing port 2009 on the right by the inclination of the V winning port door body 2661, and the game ball B can be distributed to the losing port 2009.

The game ball B that has been allocated (accepted) to the losing port 2009 is detected by the losing port sensor 2604 on the front side of the attacca base plate 2610, and is guided rearward by the attacca front plate 2620, and enters the passage section 2676a of the center lower right ball path 2676 through the seventh opening 2611g of the attacca base plate 2610. The game ball B that has entered the passage section 2676a of the center lower right ball path 2676 is then handed over from its downstream end (rear end) to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is discharged downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100.

On the other hand, when the V distribution solenoid 2662 is energized, the plunger 2662a retracts against the force of the spring, and the opening/closing link 2667 rotates via the plunger head 2666 attached to the tip of the plunger 2662a. This rotation of the opening/closing link 2667 causes the V winning port door body 2661 to move back, with its front end positioned behind the front surface of the attacca base plate 2610. This opens the V winning port 2008, making it capable of receiving the game ball B. In this state, when the game ball B received in the second large winning port 2007 flows down, it is received in the V winning port 2008. In other words, it is distributed to the V winning port 2008.

The V-distribution solenoid 2662 may be energized at a constant cycle regardless of the progress of the game, or may be energized in a predetermined pattern according to the first special symbol or the second special symbol drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004, or the reception of the game ball B into the second start port 2005.

The game ball B that has been allocated (accepted) to the V winning port 2008 is detected by the V winning port sensor 2603 on the front side of the attacca base plate 2610, and then guided rearward by the attacca front plate 2620 and enters the passage section 2676a of the center lower right ball path 2676 through the seventh opening 2611g of the attacca base plate 2610. The game ball B that has entered the passage section 2676a of the center lower right ball path 2676 is then handed over from its downstream end (rear end) to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is discharged downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100.

According to the V-distribution unit 2660 of this embodiment, the V-distribution solenoid 2662 is arranged so that the plunger 2662a moves back and forth in the left-right direction, and is arranged so as to overlap the V-winning port door body 2661 vertically (in a plan view), so the front-to-rear dimension of the V-distribution unit 2660 can be made as small as possible. Therefore, by making the V-distribution unit 2660 smaller, it is easier to secure space at the rear, so that the rear reels and decorations can be made larger, or new reels and decorations can be placed at the rear, making the pachinko machine 1 more noticeable, which can strongly attract the player's attention, and the rear reels and the like can entertain the player more, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, because the unit case 2665 of the V-distribution unit 2660 is attached behind the attacca base plate 2610, the attacca base plate 2610 makes it possible to make the unit case 2665 (V-distribution solenoid 2662) less visible to the player, preventing the poor appearance caused by the V-distribution solenoid 2662 being visible, and providing a pachinko machine 1 with a good appearance.

Furthermore, since the unit case 2665 holding the V winning port door body 2661 and the V distribution solenoid 2662 is composed of two parts, the first case part 2663 and the second case part 2664, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of parts of the V distribution unit 2660, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the unit case 2665 is composed of two parts, the first case part 2663 and the second case part 2664, it is possible to hold the V winning port door body 2661 and the V distribution solenoid 2662 in a sandwiched manner between the first case part 2663 and the second case part 2664, simplifying the effort required for assembly.

In addition, a sensor abutment portion 2665a is provided on the outer surface of the unit case 2665 of the V sorting unit 2660, and the V winning port sensor 2603 and the losing port sensor 2604 abut against the outer surface of the unit case 2665. This allows the unit case 2665 to restrict the movement of the V winning port sensor 2603 and the losing port sensor 2604 in a predetermined direction, making it possible to position the V winning port sensor 2603 and the losing port sensor 2604 in a predetermined position. In addition, when assembling the game board 5, the sensor abutment portion 2665a of the unit case 2665 can guide the V winning port sensor 2603 and the losing port sensor 2604, making the assembly work easier.

[5-9d-2g. Second embodiment of opening/closing unit]
Next, an opening/closing unit 2700 of an embodiment different from the second start opening/closing unit 2630, the first large prize opening opening/closing unit 2640, the second large prize opening opening/closing unit 2650, and the V-distribution unit 2660 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 163. Fig. 163 is a perspective view seen from the lower rear. This opening/closing unit 2700 is attached to the rear side of a flat base plate 2710.

The opening/closing unit 2700 includes a flat door body 2701 that penetrates the base plate 2710 and is movable back and forth, a solenoid 2702 as a drive means for moving the door body 2701 back and forth, and a unit case 2705 that holds the door body 2701 and the solenoid 2702 and is composed of a first case part 2703 and a second case part 2704.

The door body 2701 of the opening/closing unit 2700 is inclined from the front end to the rear by a specified width, so that the underside moves upward as it moves forward. In other words, it is tapered so that the front end becomes narrower. This makes it difficult for the game ball B to get caught between the front plate (not shown) and the front end of the door body 2701 when the door body 2701 moves forward, and even if it does get caught, friction is reduced to minimize the chance of it getting caught.

The solenoid 2702 is held in the unit case 2705 with the plunger 2702a, which moves back and forth when current is applied, projecting to the right. The solenoid 2702 has a spring (not shown), which biases the plunger 2702a in the projecting direction. The tip of the plunger 2702a is formed in a disk shape.

When the solenoid 2702 of this opening/closing unit 2700 is not energized, the plunger 2702a protrudes due to the force of the spring, and the door body 2701 is retracted by an opening/closing link (not shown) connected to the plunger 2702a so that its front end is positioned rearward of the front surface of the base plate 2710. As a result, the door body 2701 cannot guide the game ball B to a receiving opening (not shown), making it impossible for the game ball B to be received by the receiving opening.

When the solenoid 2702 is energized to cause the plunger 2702a to retract against the spring force, the opening/closing unit 2700 advances the door body 2701 by an opening/closing link (not shown), and the front end of the door body 2701 protrudes forward from the front surface through the first opening 2710a of the base plate 2710. Since the door body 2701 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, the game ball B can be guided toward the ball sensor 2711, whose detection hole protrudes forward from the front surface of the base plate 2710 through the second opening 2710b on the left side of the door body 2701. Therefore, when the game ball B flows down onto the door body 2701 in a protruding state, the game ball B can be guided toward the ball sensor 2711 by the upper surface of the door body 2701, and the game ball B can be detected by passing through the detection hole of the ball sensor 2711. In other words, it is possible to receive the game ball B into the receiving opening.

The opening/closing unit 2700 also has an annular band holding portion 2706 provided on the outer surface of the unit case 2705, an attachment portion 2707 provided on the unit case 2705 for attaching the opening/closing unit 2700 to the attachment boss 2710c of the base plate 2710, and a sensor abutment portion 2708 provided on the unit case 2705 and capable of abutting against the ball sensor 2711 held by the sensor holding portion 2710d of the base plate 2710.

As shown in the figure, a plurality of band holding portions 2706 are provided at different positions on the outer surface of the unit case 2705. Specifically, two band holding portions 2706 are provided on the left side surface 2705L of the unit case 2705, and one is provided on the right side surface of the unit case 2705. Each band holding portion 2706 has an annular opening facing in the vertical direction. The band holding portion 2706 is intended to hold the wiring EC connected to the solenoid 2702, ball sensor 2711, etc. to the unit case 2705 by fastening (tying) the wiring EC together with the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT, with the band portion CTa passing through the annular portion.

Two mounting portions 2707 are provided, each protruding outward in a flange-like shape from the left and right side surfaces of the unit case 2705. The sensor holding portion 2710d is provided integrally with the mounting portion 2707 protruding from the left side surface 2705L of the unit case 2705. This sensor holding portion 2710d closes a part of the rearward open portion of the U-shaped sensor holding portion 2710d that can accommodate a part of the ball sensor 2711 on the base plate 2710. This makes it possible to restrict the rearward movement of the ball sensor 2711 held in the sensor holding portion 2710d. Note that the open U-shaped portion of the sensor holding portion 2710d faces rightward (towards the unit case 2705).

In the opening/closing unit 2700 of this embodiment, when assembled to the game board 5, the two mounting parts 2707 are attached with their front faces abutting the rear end of the mounting boss 2710c of the base plate 2710. The front part of the ball sensor 2711, which has a detection hole through the second opening 2710b from the rear of the base plate 2710, protrudes forward from the front face of the base plate 2710, and the rear part is housed in the U-shaped sensor holding part 2710d. A part of the rear end of the ball sensor 2711 abuts against the sensor abutment part 2708, and a part of the peripheral side surface of the rear part of the ball sensor 2711 abuts against the left side surface 2705L of the unit case 2705.

The front end of the ball sensor 2711 abuts against a front plate (not shown) provided in front of the base plate 2710. This positions the ball sensor 2711 at a predetermined position. As described above, the left side surface 2705L on the outer surface of the unit case 2705 abuts against a part of the ball sensor 2711, and therefore the unit case 2705 has the function of restricting the movement of the ball sensor 2711 in a predetermined direction by this part.

In this embodiment, the wiring EC connected to the solenoid 2702 extends outward from the rear of the left side surface 2705L of the unit case 2705, and the wiring EC connected to the rear end of the ball sensor 2711 provided on the left side of the unit case 2705 extends rearward. These wiring EC extend to the right along the bottom surface of the unit case 2705 and are fastened by a cable tie CT to a band holder 2706 provided at the lower rear end on the right side surface of the unit case 2705. Details of the cable tie CT are described in the chapter [5-9a-1. Wiring locking portion] below.

At this time, the wiring EC connected to the solenoid 2702 is tightened with little slack, and the wiring EC connected to the ball sensor 2711 is tightened with a lot of slack. As a result, when the unit case 2705 is removed from the base plate 2710, the ball sensor 2711 is not pulled backward by the wiring EC until the unit case 2705 is some distance away from the base plate 2710. In other words, while the ball sensor 2711 is still held by the sensor holding portion 2710d, the opening/closing unit 2700 can be moved some distance away from the base plate 2710, and the opening/closing unit 2700 can be checked (maintenance performed).

In addition, the wiring EC connected to the ball sensor 2711 is held in the band holding portion 2706 by a cable tie CT, so that even if the opening/closing unit 2700 is removed from the base plate 2710 together with the ball sensor 2711, the opening/closing unit 2700 and the ball sensor 2711 are connected by the wiring EC, preventing the ball sensor 2711 from being lost.

According to the opening/closing unit 2700 of this embodiment, the solenoid 2702 is provided so that the plunger 2702a moves back and forth in the left-right direction, so that the front-rear dimension of the opening/closing unit 2700 can be made as small as possible. Therefore, by making the opening/closing unit 2700 smaller, it is easier to secure space at the rear, so that the rear reels and decorations can be made larger, or new reels and decorations can be placed at the rear, making the pachinko machine 1 more noticeable, which can strongly attract the player's attention, and can also entertain the player more with the reels and the like at the rear, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, because the unit case 2705 of the opening/closing unit 2700 is attached to the rear of the base plate 2710, the base plate 2710 makes it possible to make the unit case 2705 (solenoid 2702) less visible to the player, preventing the poor appearance caused by the solenoid 2702 being visible, and providing a pachinko machine 1 with a good appearance.

Furthermore, since the unit case 2705 that holds the door body 2701 and the solenoid 2702 is composed of two parts, the first case part 2703 and the second case part 2704, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of parts of the opening/closing unit 2700, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the unit case 2705 is composed of two parts, the first case part 2703 and the second case part 2704, it is possible to hold the door body 2701 and the solenoid 2702 by sandwiching them between the first case part 2703 and the second case part 2704, which simplifies the effort required for assembly.

In addition, a sensor abutment portion 2708 is provided on the outer surface of the unit case 2705 of the opening/closing unit 2700, and the ball sensor 2711 abuts against the outer surface of the unit case 2705, so that the unit case 2705 can restrict the movement of the ball sensor 2711 in a predetermined direction, making it possible to position the ball sensor 2711 at a predetermined position. In addition, when assembling the game board 5, the ball sensor 2711 can be guided by the sensor abutment portion 2708 of the unit case 2705, making the assembly work easier.

Furthermore, the unit case 2705 of the opening/closing unit 2700 is provided with multiple annular band holding portions 2706. By passing the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT through the band holding portion 2706 and tightening it together with the wiring EC, the wiring EC can be held in the unit case 2705, and by bundling the wiring EC, it is possible to make the wiring EC less visible to the player.

In addition, since multiple band holding parts 2706 are provided, the necessary band holding part 2706 can be used depending on the routing direction of the wiring EC. Therefore, even if the mounting position of the opening/closing unit 2700 is changed due to model or design changes, etc., and the direction of the wiring EC changes, it can be accommodated by using any of the band holding parts 2706, making it possible to make the opening/closing unit 2700 highly versatile, and by being able to reuse the opening/closing unit 2700, it is possible to suppress increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the unit case 2705 is provided with a band holding section 2706, the wiring EC of the ball sensor 2711, which is separate from the opening/closing unit 2700, can be held in the band holding section 2706 with a cable tie CT before assembling the game board 5, thereby preventing the ball sensor 2711 from being forgotten to be attached during assembly.

Furthermore, the unit case 2705 is provided with a sensor abutment portion 2708 that abuts against the rear end of the ball sensor 2711. When the opening/closing unit 2700 is attached to the base plate 2710 with the ball sensor 2711 held by the sensor holding portion 2710d of the base plate 2710, the sensor abutment portion 2708 restricts the ball sensor 2711 from moving rearward, allowing the ball sensor 2711 to be attached. Therefore, there is no need to attach the ball sensor 2711 separately from the opening/closing unit 2700, making it easier to assemble the game board 5.

[5-9d-2h. Installation of sensors in the Attacka unit]
Next, the installation of sensors (here, the second start opening sensor 2601, the second large winning opening sensor 2602, the V winning opening sensor 2603, and the losing opening sensor 2604) in the attacca unit 2600 of the center role 2500 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 152 to 154, 162, and 164. Figure 164 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the attacca front plate, the second start opening sensor, the second large winning opening sensor, the V winning opening sensor, the losing opening sensor, the attacca base plate, and the center lower right ball passage in the attacca unit of the center role in a perspective view. Note that in Figure 153, in order to make the installation state of the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 easier to understand, the positional relationship between them and the center lower right ball passage 2676 is described in a state where they are not disassembled.

First, the outer shape of the sensors (ball sensors) such as the second start hole sensor 2601, the second big winning hole sensor 2602, the V winning hole sensor 2603, and the losing hole sensor 2604 will be described. The ball sensor has a detection hole through which the game ball B can pass in order to detect the game ball B. When viewed from the axial direction of the detection hole for detecting the game ball B, the ball sensor is formed into a rectangle whose outer shape is the size of two squares lined up, and the detection hole is provided on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction of the rectangle. In addition, a C-chamfer is provided at one corner of the rectangle that is closest to the detection hole. In addition, the ball sensor is formed so that the axial direction of the detection hole is about half the thickness of the diameter of the detection hole. Therefore, the ball sensor is formed in a shape of a thin flat plate with a detection hole provided on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction. And, the ball sensor has a board and a connector housed inside the ball sensor on the opposite side of the detection hole from the center in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, a connector to which external wiring EC is connected is provided on the end face of the spherical sensor farthest from the detection hole. In the following description, the side of the spherical sensor on which the detection hole is provided, which is closer to the center of the sensor in the longitudinal direction, is referred to as the detection side, and the opposite side is referred to as the connector side.

The installation of the second start hole sensor 2601 in the attacca unit 2600 will be described. The second start hole sensor 2601 is for detecting the game ball B received in the second start hole 2005. The second start hole sensor 2601 is oriented so that the detection side is located forward of the center in the longitudinal direction. The detection side of this second start hole sensor 2601 is housed in a sensor holding portion 2623 that is open to the rear of the attacca front plate 2620. As a result, the second start hole sensor 2601 is restricted from moving forward, up and down, and left and right by the attacca front plate 2620. In addition, the second start hole sensor 2601 is held by the sensor holding portion 2623 of the attacca front plate 2620 in a state in which the axis of the detection hole is inclined so that the right side is higher when viewed from the front than the horizontal direction. In other words, the second start hole sensor 2601 is positioned by the attacca front plate 2620 in a state in which the axis of the detection hole is inclined.

This second starting hole sensor 2601 detects game ball B flowing to the left, and since the positioning of the axial core of the detection hole must be particularly precise, the sensor holding portion 2623 of the attacca front plate 2620 that houses the front end side (detection side) of the second starting hole sensor 2601 is formed in a U-shape to surround the periphery of the detection side of the second starting hole sensor 2601. This allows the second starting hole sensor 2601 to be positioned at the desired position with high precision, so that the game ball B guided to the left by the guide piece 2636 of the second starting hole opening/closing unit 2630 can be smoothly passed through the detection hole and detected, and stagnation or backing up of the game ball B on the guide piece 2636 can be suppressed.

The connector side of the second starting port sensor 2601 passes through the first opening 2611a of the attacca base plate 2610 from the front and protrudes to the rear of the base plate body 2611. The connector side of this second starting port sensor 2601 is inserted into the sensor holding recess 2635a provided on the outer surface of the unit case 2635 in the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630. As a result, the connector side of the second starting port sensor 2601 is restricted from moving rearward, up/down, and left/right by the sensor holding recess 2635a. Therefore, the second starting port sensor 2601 is installed in a state where it is sandwiched between the attacca front plate 2620 and the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 (unit case 2635) from the front to the rear.

Next, the installation of the second large prize opening sensor 2602 in the attacca unit 2600 will be described. The second large prize opening sensor 2602 is for detecting the game ball B received in the second large prize opening 2007. The second large prize opening sensor 2602 is arranged with the detection side and the connector side lined up in the left-right direction, with the detection hole facing up and down. Specifically, the second large prize opening sensor 2602 is arranged horizontally with the longitudinal direction facing left and right so that the connector side is located to the right of the detection side when viewed from the front. Most of this second large prize opening sensor 2602 is housed within the sensor holding portion 2623 of the attacca front panel 2620. As a result, the second large prize opening sensor 2602 is restricted in its forward, up-down, and left-right movement by the attacca front panel 2620 (sensor holding portion 2623).

The second large prize opening sensor 2602 has a portion (rear end) that protrudes rearward beyond the sensor holding portion 2623 of the attacca front plate 2620, which is accommodated in the sensor holding recess 2613 of the attacca base plate 2610. In other words, the rear end of the second large prize opening sensor 2602 abuts against the front surface of the attacca base plate 2610, and rearward movement is restricted by the attacca base plate 2610. Therefore, the second large prize opening sensor 2602 is provided in front of the base plate body 2611 of the attacca base plate 2610, and is attached in a state sandwiched between the attacca base plate 2610 and the attacca front plate 2620.

When installing the second large prize opening sensor 2602, most of it is housed in the sensor holding portion 2623 of the attacca front panel 2620, so compared to when half is held by two parts, it is less susceptible to the effects of manufacturing errors and assembly errors in the two parts, making it easier to position the second large prize opening sensor 2602 in the desired position. Therefore, the position of the detection hole of the second large prize opening sensor 2602 is less likely to shift, so that the game ball B received in the second large prize opening 2007 can be reliably passed through the detection hole, making it less likely that game ball B will stagnate, get stuck, or get jammed.

Next, the installation of the V winning hole sensor 2603 and the losing hole sensor 2604 of the attacca unit 2600 will be explained. The V winning hole sensor 2603 is for detecting the game ball B received (distributed) into the V winning hole 2008, and the losing hole sensor 2604 is for detecting the game ball B received into the losing hole 2009. The V winning hole sensor 2603 and the losing hole sensor 2604 are oriented so that the detection side is located forward of the center in the longitudinal direction when the detection hole is horizontally oriented in the vertical direction. The V winning hole sensor 2603 and the losing hole sensor 2604 are housed in a sensor holding portion 2623 whose detection side is open to the rear of the attacca front panel 2620. As a result, the V winning port sensor 2603 and the losing port sensor 2604 are restricted from moving forward, up and down, and left and right by the attacker front panel 2620.

The connector side of the V winning hole sensor 2603 and the losing hole sensor 2604 passes through the seventh opening 2611g of the attacca base plate 2610 from the front and protrudes to the rear of the base plate body 2611. The connector side of the V winning hole sensor 2603 and the losing hole sensor 2604 is sandwiched between the unit case 2665 of the V distribution unit 2660 and the center right lower ball path 2676. The lower surface of the unit case 2665 of the V distribution unit 2660 is provided with a sensor abutment part 2665a that can abut with the V winning hole sensor 2603 and the losing hole sensor 2604. The center right lower ball path 2676 is provided with a sensor abutment part 2676b that is open to the front and upward and can abut with the V winning hole sensor 2603 and the losing hole sensor 2604 (can accommodate a part of it).

In more detail, the connector side of the V winning port sensor 2603 abuts against a portion to the left of the stepped portion of the sensor abutment portion 2665a of the unit case 2665 of the V distribution unit 2660. In addition, the left side, bottom, and rear of the connector side of the V winning port sensor 2603 abut against the sensor abutment portion 2676b of the center lower right ball path 2676. As a result, the connector side of the V winning port sensor 2603 is restricted from moving upward by the sensor abutment portion 2665a of the unit case 2665, and is restricted from moving leftward, downward, and backward by the sensor abutment portion 2676b of the center lower right ball path 2676. This V winning port sensor 2603 is not restricted from moving to the right on the connector side, but is restricted from moving to the right by the sensor holder 2623 on the detection side, so it can be positioned sufficiently at the desired position.

On the other hand, the upper surface of the connector side of the miss opening sensor 2604 abuts against a portion to the right of the stepped portion of the sensor abutment portion 2665a of the unit case 2665 of the V-sorting unit 2660, and the left side surface abuts against the stepped portion (vertically extending portion) of the sensor abutment portion 2665a. In addition, the right side surface, lower surface, and rear surface of the connector side of the miss opening sensor 2604 abut against the sensor abutment portion 2676b of the center lower right ball path 2676. As a result, the connector side of the miss opening sensor 2604 is restricted from moving upward and leftward by the sensor abutment portion 2665a of the unit case 2665, and is restricted from moving rightward, downward, and rearward by the sensor abutment portion 2676b of the center lower right ball path 2676.

In this way, the V winning hole sensor 2603 and the losing hole sensor 2604 are attached in a sandwiched state between three components: the attacca front plate 2620, the V distribution unit 2660 (unit case 2665), and the center lower right ball path 2676. The detection side of the front end is housed in the sensor holding portion 2623 of the attacca front plate 2620, so that the detection hole can be positioned at the desired position with high precision in the same manner as above, and the same effect as above can be achieved.

In addition, since the center lower right ball path 2676 is provided with a ring-shaped band holding portion 2676c, the band holding portion 2676c and the cable tie CT may be used to bundle and hold the multiple wiring EC connected to the V winning hole sensor 2603 and the losing hole sensor 2604.

[5-9d-2i. Second embodiment of door body in opening/closing unit]
Next, the door body 2720 of an embodiment different from the guide piece 2636 of the second start opening opening/closing unit 2630, the first large winning opening door body 2641 of the first large winning opening opening opening unit 2640, the second large winning opening door body 2651 of the second large winning opening opening opening unit 2650, the V winning opening door body 2661 of the V distribution unit 2660, and the door body 2701 of the opening/closing unit 2700 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a side cross section of a door body of a different embodiment applied to the first large winning opening opening opening unit in the attacca unit of the center role, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing (a) in a plan view. Here, the door body 2701 is applied to the first large winning opening opening opening unit 2640 in the attacca unit 2600 (replaced with the first large winning opening door body 2641) and described, and the same reference numerals are given to the same components, and detailed explanations are omitted.

The first large prize opening opening/closing unit 2640 as an opening/closing unit has a flat plate-shaped door body 2720 that penetrates the attacca base plate 2610 and is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat forward. This door body 2720 is provided between the base plate body 2611 of the attacca base plate 2610 and the front plate body 2621 of the attacca front plate 2620, and is capable of closing the first large prize opening 2006 that opens upward by advancing and retreating back and forth. The door body 2720 opens the first large prize opening 2006 by sliding backwards in response to the first special pattern or the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first lower start opening 2003 or the first upper start opening 2004 or the reception of the game ball B into the second start opening 2005 (for example, "big win", "medium win", "small win", etc.), or in response to the reception of the game ball B into the V win opening 2008.

In the Attacca unit 2600, a first large prize opening decorative board 2672 is provided below the first large prize opening 2006. The first large prize opening decorative board 2672 is equipped with an LED that can radiate light upward. The LED on the first large prize opening decorative board 2672 can illuminate and decorate the first large prize opening 2006.

The door body 2720 is opaque and colored a predetermined color (e.g., red, black, blue, etc.) so as to be easily noticeable. As shown in FIG. 165, this door body 2720 has multiple openings 2721 that penetrate vertically in a portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the attacca base plate 2610. The openings 2721 are provided in a portion away from the rolling area 2722 of the game ball B, shown by cross-hatching in FIG. 165(b), when the first large winning opening 2006 is closed. This ensures that the multiple openings 2721 do not come into contact with the game ball B and do not impede the circulation of the game ball B.

In the conventional pachinko machine, which has a door body that opens and closes by moving the large prize opening and the accessory prize opening back and forth, additives are added to the door body for reasons such as increasing wear resistance because many game balls B pass over the door body, and the additives make the door body almost opaque. Therefore, even if light is irradiated from below when the large prize opening and the like are closed, the light is blocked by the door body, so there is a problem that the game balls B rolling on the door body look dark. In response to this, it has been proposed to provide an LED that irradiates light forward above and behind the door body to illuminate the game balls B on the door body from behind. However, when providing an LED above and behind the door body, it is difficult to brightly illuminate the large prize opening below the door body with the light from the LED, so it is necessary to provide an LED that illuminates the large prize opening separately from the LED, which increases the cost of the pachinko machine.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the flat door body 2720, which can open and close the first large winning opening 2006 by moving back and forth, is provided with multiple openings 2721 that penetrate vertically. Therefore, when the door body 2720 is moved forward to close the first large winning opening 2006, the LED of the first large winning opening decorative board 2672 provided below the first large winning opening 2006 is illuminated. The light emitted upward from the LED can illuminate the inside of the first large winning opening 2006 and can also illuminate the game ball B rolling on the door body 2720 from below through the openings 2721. This allows the player to see an illumination effect in which the game ball B rolling on the door body 2720 is illuminated from below, which has never been seen in previous pachinko machines, and can strongly attract the player's interest and entertain the player, thereby suppressing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, the multiple openings 2721 in the door body 2720 allow the game ball B on the door body 2720 to be illuminated by light from the LEDs on the first large winning opening decorative board 2672 provided below the first large winning opening 2006. This eliminates the need to provide LEDs (decorative boards) above and below the door body as in conventional pachinko machines. Instead, the inside of the first large winning opening 2006 and the game ball B on the door body 2720 can be illuminated and decorated by a single first large winning opening decorative board 2672, thereby suppressing increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because the light from the LEDs on the first large winning opening decorative board 2672 is directed to shine on the game ball B from below through the multiple openings 2721 in the door body 2720, it is possible to prevent the light from the LEDs from reaching the player's eyes directly, and reduce the glare, compared to conventional pachinko machines in which the game ball B is illuminated from behind. It is also possible to prevent the light from the LEDs from reaching the player's eyes directly, making the game ball B appear glare and making it harder to see, and it is possible to make the game ball B easier to see.

Furthermore, since the door body 2720 has a plurality of openings 2721 penetrating vertically, dust, debris, etc. that falls onto the door body 2720 can be discharged downward through the openings 2721, and it is possible to prevent dust, debris, etc. on the door body 2720 from impeding the flow of the game ball B or the movement of the door body 2720 forward and backward.

In the above embodiment, the door 2720 that opens and closes the first large prize opening 2006 is provided with multiple openings 2721, but this is not limited to this, and openings may be provided in the door that opens and closes the second start opening 2005, the second large prize opening 2007, the V prize opening 2008, etc.

[5-9d-3. Binding base]
Next, the binding base 2550 in the center role 2500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 166 to 171. Figure 166(a) shows the state where the wiring is omitted near the attacca unit in the center role. FIG. 167 is a perspective view seen from the rear, and FIG. 167 is an exploded perspective view showing the binding base in FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a perspective view showing the binding base in FIG. Fig. 169(a) is a perspective view of the binding base seen from the top front, and Fig. 169(b) is a perspective view of the binding base seen from the top front. 170(a) is a perspective view of the base as seen from the top rear, and (c) is a perspective view of the binding base as seen from the bottom front. 1 is an enlarged perspective view showing the main parts of the accessory, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the binding base in a separated state from FIG. FIG. 171(a) is a perspective view showing a binding base of a different embodiment from the binding base of FIG. 168, and (b) is a perspective view showing a binding base of a further different embodiment.

The binding base 2550 of the center part 2500 is used to hold (support) multiple wiring EC in a bundled state on the center part 2500 by using a cable tie CT. The binding base 2550 has a flat body part 2551 that is attached to the center base 2511 or the attacca base plate 2610, a ring-shaped band holding part 2552 that protrudes from the body part 2551, and a mounting hole 2553 that penetrates the body part 2551.

As shown in FIG. 168, in front view, the binding base 2550 has a main body 2551 shaped like a vertically long rectangle with the top right corner chamfered at a 45 degree angle (C-chamfer), and a band holding part 2552 is provided in the upper left part relative to the center of the main body 2551, and an attachment hole 2553 is provided below the band holding part 2552 in the center in the left-right direction. The annular band holding part 2552 is provided so that its annular opening faces the left-right direction relative to the main body 2551. The annular opening of the band holding part 2552 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in side view.

The binding base 2550 has a peripheral wall portion 2554 protruding from the main body portion 2551 in the opposite direction to the band holding portion 2552. The peripheral wall portion 2554 has a left wall portion 2554a extending along the left side of the main body portion 2551, an upper wall portion 2554b continuing with the left wall portion 2554a and extending along the upper side of the main body portion 2551, a C-chamfered wall portion 2554c continuing with the upper wall portion 2554b and extending along the C-chamfered side of the main body portion 2551, a right wall portion 2554d continuing with the C-chamfered wall portion 2554c and extending along the right side at a position spaced a certain width from the right side of the main body portion 2551, a lower wall portion 2554e continuing with the right wall portion 2554d and the left wall portion 2554a and extending along the lower side at a position spaced a certain width from the lower side of the main body portion 2551, and a concave curved wall portion 2554f that is concave in a semi-cylindrical shape around the axis of the mounting hole 2553 in the lower wall portion 2554e.

The left wall portion 2554a of the peripheral wall portion 2554 is recessed at a certain width from the left side of the main body portion 2551 near the portion connected to the lower wall portion 2554e. The distance at which the left wall portion 2554a is recessed from the left side of the main body portion 2551 is the same as the distance at which the right wall portion 2554d is recessed from the right side of the main body portion 2551 (the distance from the right side of the main body portion 2551 to the right wall portion 2554d). The distance at which the lower wall portion 2554e is recessed from the bottom side of the main body portion 2551 is longer than the distance from the right side of the main body portion 2551 to the right wall portion 2554d. More specifically, the distance at which the lower wall portion 2554e is recessed from the bottom side of the main body portion 2551 is approximately the same as the distance from the bottom side of the main body portion 2551 to the position where the mounting hole 2553 contacts the side of the main body portion 2551 closer to the bottom side.

The recessed portion of the left wall portion 2554a of the binding base 2550, the right wall portion 2554d, and the lower wall portion 2554e are capable of abutting against a wall-like or rib-like side surface extending in a straight line. The binding base 2550 can be mounted so as not to rotate by abutting the wall-like or rib-like side surface against the recessed portion of the left wall portion 2554a, the right wall portion 2554d, and the lower wall portion 2554e. In addition, a cylindrical or semi-cylindrical mounting boss is inserted into the space formed by the concave curved wall portion 2554f of the binding base 2550.

In this embodiment, the binding base 2550 is attached to the mounting boss 2515 that protrudes cylindrically from the rear surface of the center base 2511 in the main unit 2510 of the center role 2500. The mounting boss 2515 to which the binding base 2550 is attached protrudes rearward from the center base 2511 and is provided so as to overlap a portion of the rib 2516 that extends linearly in the left-right direction. Therefore, the binding base 2550 is attached to the center base 2511 with the outer periphery of the mounting boss 2515 surrounded by the concave curved wall portion 2554f and the lower wall portion 2554e aligned with the upper side surface of the rib 2516. Although detailed illustration is omitted, there is a certain amount of gap between the lower wall portion 2554e and the rib 2516, so that the binding base 2550 can rotate around the axis of the mounting hole 2553 within the range of the gap. The center base 2511 has extra mounting bosses 2515 pre-installed in various locations. Therefore, some of the multiple mounting bosses 2515 are used and some are not, depending on the model, etc.

In the attacca unit 2600, the attacca base plate 2610 is attached to a mounting boss 2614 that protrudes cylindrically from the rear surface of the attacca base plate 2610. The mounting boss 2614 to which the binding base 2550 is attached protrudes rearward from the attacca base plate 2610 and is provided so as to overlap a portion of the rib 2618 that extends linearly in the left-right direction. Therefore, the binding base 2550 is attached to the attacca base plate 2610 with the outer periphery of the mounting boss 2614 surrounded by the concave curved wall portion 2554f and the lower wall portion 2554e abutting against the upper surface of the rib 2618. The attacca unit 2600 has extra mounting bosses 2614 provided in advance in various locations. Therefore, the multiple mounting bosses 2614 are mixed in places where they are used and places where they are not used depending on the model, etc.

The two binding bases 2550 of the center role piece 2500 are located at the boundary between the main unit 2510 and the attacca unit 2600, close to the inner circumference of the frame of the frame-shaped center base 2511. The two binding bases 2550 are located relatively close to each other, and each band holder 2552 is attached with its annular opening facing left and right.

The two binding bases 2550 of the center role 2500 are formed in the same color (transparent in this case) as the center base 2511 of the main unit 2510 and the attacca base plate 2610 of the attacca unit 2600. This makes the binding bases 2550 less noticeable when assembled onto the game board 5.

As shown in FIG. 170, the binding base 2550 of this embodiment can be attached to the center gadget 2500 (center base 2511 and attacca base plate 2610) in a bundled state by passing the band portion CTa of the binding band CT through the annular band holding portion 2552 and tightening it together with the multiple wiring EC. This prevents the multiple wiring EC from becoming loose and protruding into the frame of the center gadget 2500, which would cause the wiring EC to be visible to the player, resulting in a poor appearance.

In addition, according to the binding base 2550 of this embodiment, the wiring EC bundled with the cable tie CT is attached to the center base 2511 and the attacca base plate 2610 of the center role 2500 via the binding base 2550, so model changes and design changes can be accommodated more easily than when a band holding portion is directly provided on the center base 2511 or the attacca base plate 2610, and increases in costs for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. In addition, when it is necessary to move the wiring EC away from the center role 2500 for maintenance or the like, the multiple wiring EC can be moved away while still bundled by removing the binding base 2550 without cutting the cable tie CT, improving the workability of maintenance, etc.

In more detail, by removing the bundling base 2550 while keeping the multiple wirings EC bundled with the cable tie CT, it is possible to move the multiple wirings EC bundled from the fixed position (the mounting position of the bundling base 2550). This can provide the following effects. In other words, in the past, when checking the installation status of the components behind the multiple wirings EC, it was necessary to cut the cable tie CT of the multiple wirings EC that were bundled with the cable tie CT at the fixed position to unbind them one by one, and then, after checking, to return the unbundled wirings EC to their fixed positions so that they are bundled with new cable tie CT. However, according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned trouble is eliminated by simply attaching and detaching the bundling base 2550, and it is easy to check the installation status of the components behind the multiple wirings EC.

Furthermore, when assembling the game board 5, by bundling the multiple wiring EC together with the band holding portion 2552 with the cable tie CT and holding them in the binding base 2550 in advance, the wiring EC is less likely to get in the way of assembly, making the assembly work easier and suppressing increases in costs.

In addition, since the multiple bundling bases 2550 are attached relatively close to each other and the band holding parts 2552 are arranged so that they are not positioned on the axis perpendicular to the annular opening, the multiple wiring EC held by the multiple (series) bundling bases 2550 are bent in an S-shape between the two bundling bases 2550. As a result, compared to when the multiple wiring EC are held in a straight line between the two bundling bases 2550, the multiple wiring EC are given a surplus in length, so that even if the wiring EC expands or contracts due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity, the expansion and contraction of the wiring EC can be absorbed by the surplus in length, and the occurrence of defects such as breakage can be suppressed.

In addition, by bending the wiring EC in an S-shape between the two binding bases 2550, the length of the wiring EC can be made longer. Therefore, when performing maintenance, it is not necessary to remove all of the binding bases 2550. By removing one binding base 2550, the component to which the wiring EC is connected can be moved some distance away from the center feature 2500, making it easier to perform maintenance.

Furthermore, by attaching the binding base 2550 so that the rib 2516 of the center base 2511 and the rib 2618 of the attacca base plate 2610 abut against the peripheral wall portion 2554, the binding base 2550 can be prevented from rotating around the axis of the mounting hole 2553, and the direction of the wiring EC held by the cable tie CT in the band holding portion 2552 can be prevented from changing, and the wiring EC can be maintained in the desired position, making the wiring EC less visible to the player and improving the appearance.

In this embodiment, the binding base 2550 is attached to the center gimmick 2500, but this is not limited to this. The binding base 2550 may be attached to the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, the attacca, etc., and the wiring EC may be held via the cable tie CT.

[5-9d-3a. Another embodiment of the binding base]
Next, binding bases 2560 and 2570, which are different embodiments from the binding base 2550 described above, will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 171. First, the binding base 2560 shown in Fig. 171(a) has a main body 2561 having a rectangular shape that is long vertically when viewed from the front, a plurality of band holding portions 2562 protruding in an annular shape from the main body 2561, and an attachment hole 2563 penetrating the main body 2561.

The main body 2561 is formed in a block shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. Two of the band holders 2562 are provided on the front surface of the main body 2561, which is the front side, and one each on the left and right side surfaces of the main body 2561. More specifically, of the two band holders 2562 on the front surface of the main body 2561, one is provided at the top with an annular opening facing the up-down direction, and the remaining one is provided below it with an annular opening facing the left-right direction. These two band holders 2562 are provided on an axis whose center passes through the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the main body 2561. The band holders 2562 on the left and right side surfaces are provided at the same height as the lower band holder 2562 on the front surface of the main body 2561, with an annular opening facing the front-rear direction. The mounting hole 2563 is located in the left-right center of the front surface of the main body 2561, below the lower band holder 2562 on the front surface of the main body 2561.

Although detailed illustrations of this binding base 2560 are omitted, the lower surface of the block-shaped main body 2561 is recessed upward at a fixed height at the rear side, which is a specified distance behind the front surface, and the center in the left-right direction is recessed upward in a semi-cylindrical shape centered on the axis of the mounting hole 2563. In other words, it is formed in the same shape as the lower wall portion 2554e and the concave curved wall portion 2554f of the binding base 2550 of the first embodiment.

When the wiring EC is fastened and bundled together with the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT through the lower band holding portion 2562 on the front side and the band holding portions 2562 on the left and right sides of this binding base 2560, the wiring EC can be held in a state where it extends in the vertical direction. On the other hand, when the wiring EC is fastened and bundled together with the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT through the upper band holding portion 2562 on the front side, the wiring EC can be held in a state where it extends in the horizontal direction.

In addition to the same effects as the binding base 2550 described above, the binding base 2560 of this embodiment has a single main body 2561 with multiple band holding parts 2562 of different orientations and positions, so that it is only necessary to use the band holding part 2562 according to the position and direction of wiring EC, thereby further increasing the versatility of the binding base 2560 and allowing it to be used in a variety of situations.

Next, the binding base 2570 shown in FIG. 171(b) has a main body 2571 extending long in a predetermined direction, two band holding parts 2572 protruding in the same direction in an annular shape near both longitudinal ends of the main body 2571, and two mounting holes 2573 penetrating the main body 2571 on the longitudinal outer side of the band holding parts 2572 near both longitudinal ends of the main body 2571.

This binding base 2570 has two band holding parts 2572 with annular openings facing perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the main body part 2571. This allows the same wiring EC to be fastened to each band holding part 2572 with a cable tie CT, so that the wiring EC can be arranged along the main body part 2571.

The binding base 2570 of this embodiment not only achieves the same effect as the binding base 2550 and binding base 2560 described above, but also holds the wiring EC along the main body 2571, and by hiding the wiring EC with the main body 2571, the wiring EC can be made less visible to the player.

In the above embodiment, the band holding portion 2572 is provided near both ends of the main body portion 2571 in the longitudinal direction, but this is not limited to the above. In addition to being provided near both ends of the main body portion 2571 in the longitudinal direction, the band holding portion 2572 may also be provided at a location midway along the longitudinal direction.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the main body portion 2571 extends in a straight line, but this is not limited to this, and the main body portion 2571 may extend in an L-shape or a curved line.

In the above embodiment, the band holding parts such as band holding part 2552, band holding part 2562, band holding part 2572, band holding part 2635c, band holding part 2676c, and band holding part 2706 are shown to have a closed ring shape, but this is not limited thereto, and they may also have an open shape like wiring locking part 1603. When the band holding part has a closed shape, it is necessary to fix it with a cable tie CT or the like, but the cable tie CT will not come out of the band holding part, and the wiring EC can be reliably tied. On the other hand, when the band holding part has an open shape, the cable tie CT can be easily inserted from the open part, improving workability.

[5-9e. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the play area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 141 etc. When assembled on the play board 5, the center role 2500 is provided in the approximate center of the play area 5a. In the play area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on both the left and right outer parts and the lower part of the center role 2500. In addition, a windmill that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided on the left side of the center role 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300.

On the left side of the center device 2500, there are a number of obstacle nails planted in a specified gauge arrangement between the inner rail 1002. On the left side of the center device 2500 in the play area 5a, near the center in the vertical direction of the peripheral wall portion 2511a of the center base 2511, the entrance to the upper warp passage 2513 opens facing upward and left. Also, below and to the right of the entrance to the upper warp passage 2513, the entrance to the lower warp passage 2512 opens facing slightly upward from the left. And a windmill is provided between the lower warp passage 2512 and the shelf portion 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300.

The game ball B shot into the left side of the center role 2500 enters the upper warp passage 2513 or the lower warp passage 2512 with a certain probability. The game ball B that entered the upper warp passage 2513 is supplied to the crane 2530 of the center distribution unit 2520 provided within the frame of the center role 2500. The game ball B supplied to the crane 2530 rotates in the dish-shaped crane 2530 and is released to the first guideway 2521 below, rolls to the right along the slope of the first guideway 2521, and is distributed to either the first upper starting port 2004 or the distribution ball discharge port 2526 by the center distribution piece 2523 that moves forward and backward at a predetermined rhythm. In the center distribution unit 2520, the game ball B that circulated through the upper warp passage 2513 is distributed to the first upper starting port 2004 with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2).

The game ball B received in the first upper start port 2004 is detected by the first upper start port sensor 2524 located downstream, and then handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged downward via the back ball guiding unit 3100. When the game ball B is detected by the first upper start port sensor 2524, a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded, and a lottery is executed for a first special symbol that allows the occurrence of a favorable game state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of reserved first special symbols is less than four).

The game ball B that enters the lower warp passage 2512 is supplied to the stage 2514 provided within the frame of the center role 2500, rolls left and right on the stage 2514, and is released from either the central release section 2514a or the side release section 2514b so as to flow back into the game area 5a. The central release section 2514a of the stage 2514 is provided directly above the first lower starting opening 2003 in the left and right center of the game area 5a, so the game ball B released from the central release section 2514a is accepted by the first lower starting opening 2003 with a high probability. The game ball B released from the side release sections 2514b on both the left and right sides of the central release section 2514a is accepted by the first lower starting opening 2003 with a certain degree of probability.

The game ball B received in the first lower start port 2003 is detected by the first lower start port sensor 2101 of the start port unit 2100, guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, handed over to the rear ball guiding unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, and discharged downward from the rear ball guiding unit 3100. When the game ball B is detected by the first lower start port sensor 2101, a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded, and a lottery is executed for a first special symbol that allows the occurrence of a favorable game state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of reserved first special symbols is less than four).

The game ball B that is released from the stage 2514 and is not received by the first lower starting port 2003 is received by the outlet 2020 (left outlet 2020a and right outlet 2020b) and discharged outside the game area 5a. The game ball B received by the outlet 2020 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then discharged downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100.

When a game ball B is shot into the left outer side of the center device 2500 and does not enter the upper warp passage 2513 or the lower warp passage 2512, if it flows to the right of the center of the windmill, there is a high probability that it will flow down to the right along the multiple obstacle nails that are lined up diagonally along the bottom edge of the center device 2500. A game ball B that flows to the right of the center of the windmill may be accepted by the first lower starting port 2003 or the general winning port 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. A game ball B that is not accepted by the first lower starting port 2003 or the general winning port 2001 is accepted by the outlet 2020 (left outlet 2020a and right outlet 2020b) and discharged outside the game area 5a.

The game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then handed over to the rear ball guiding unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, where it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged downward. When the general winning opening sensor 3001 detects the game ball B, a bonus is awarded in which a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

On the other hand, if the ball B flows to the left of the center of the windmill, it flows down onto the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and then flows down the shelf 2301 to the right. The game ball B that flows to the left of the center of the windmill may be received by the general winning opening 2001 and the left sub-outlet 2021a provided in the side unit 2200. The game ball B received by the left sub-outlet 2021a is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then handed over to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged downward from the back ball guide unit 3100. The game ball B that is not received by the general winning opening 2001 or the left sub-outlet 2021a is received by the left outlet 2020a and discharged outside the game area 5a.

Next, on the right side of the center gimmick 2500, there are arranged, in order from top to bottom, an upper right guide passage group 2541, a gate 2002, a lower right guide passage group 2542, a second start opening 2005, a second large prize opening 2007, a general prize opening 2001, a first large prize opening 2006, and a right sub-out opening 2021b. A number of obstacle nails are planted between the upper right guide passage group 2541 and the lower right guide passage group 2542, and to the left of the general prize opening 2001 between the second large prize opening 2007 and the first large prize opening 2006.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, when the game ball B is hit with enough strength to enter the upper part of the part of the upper edge of the peripheral wall part 2511a of the center role 2500 that becomes lower from near the center in the left-right direction toward the right, the game ball B flows through either the upper right first guide passage 2541a or the upper right second guide passage 2541b of the upper right guide passage group 2541.

A game ball B that is hit relatively hard toward the right side of the center role 2500 hits the impact stop 1006 and enters the first upper right guide passage 2541a of the upper right guide passage group 2541. On the other hand, a game ball B that is hit relatively weakly toward the right side of the center role 2500 rolls to the right on the upper surface of the upper end of the peripheral wall portion 2511a of the center role 2500 and enters the second upper right guide passage 2541b of the upper right guide passage group 2541.

The game ball B that circulates through the upper right guide passage group 2541 passes through the gate 2002 with a certain probability. The gate 2002 is provided with a gate sensor 2501 that detects the passage of the game ball B, and when the gate sensor 2501 detects the passage of the game ball B, a lottery is executed for a normal symbol that opens or closes the second start opening 2005.

The game ball B that has flowed through the upper right guide passage group 2541 flows through either the lower right first guide passage 2542a or the lower right second guide passage 2542b of the lower right guide passage group 2542 provided downstream. The game ball B that has flowed through the lower right second guide passage 2542b flows down onto the attacca upper shelf 2612 of the attacca unit 2600, enters the attacca upper shelf 2612 from the attacca right guide passage 2625, and is guided downstream of the second starting hole 2005 and the second large winning hole 2007 by the attacca right guide passage 2625. In other words, the game ball B that has flowed through the lower right second guide passage 2542b will not be accepted by the second starting hole 2005 or the second large winning hole 2007 even if they are open.

In addition, game ball B that has flowed through the lower right second guide passage 2542b may not flow down onto the attacca upper shelf 2612. Conversely, game ball B that has flowed through the lower right first guide passage 2542a may flow down onto the attacca upper shelf 2612.

The game ball B that has flowed through the lower right first guide passage 2542a (the game ball B that has not flowed down onto the attacca upper shelf 2612) will, with a certain probability, enter the central opening 2605 provided to the right of the attacca upper shelf 2612 and pass in front of the retracted guide piece 2636 in the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630. Therefore, in accordance with the normal pattern drawn by the passage of the game ball B through the gate 2002 (the normal pattern is a "normal win"), when the guide piece 2636 is moving forward and the second starting opening door body 2631 is moving backward, if the game ball B flows down onto the guide piece 2636, it will be guided to the left by the guide piece 2636 and accepted into the second starting opening 2005.

After being detected by the second start port sensor 2601, the game ball B received in the second start port 2005 is guided backward by the attacca front plate 2620 and enters the center upper right ball path 2675. The game ball B that entered the center upper right ball path 2675 is guided backward by the first gutter 2615 of the attacca base plate 2610 and is delivered to the rear ball guide unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, and is discharged downward from the rear ball guide unit 3100. When the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2601, a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B is given, and a lottery is performed for a second special symbol that allows the occurrence of a favorable game state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of reserved second special symbols is less than 4).

Game balls B that circulate through the lower right guide passage group 2542, enter the central opening 2605 and are not accepted by the second starting opening 2005, and game balls B that enter the right opening 2606 flow down onto the second large prize opening door body 2651 that closes the second large prize opening 2007. Game balls B that flow down onto the second large prize opening door body 2651 roll to the left due to their inclination, and are released to the left from the left end. Therefore, depending on the first special pattern drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into the first lower starting opening 2003 and the first upper starting opening 2004, and the second special pattern drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into the second starting opening 2005 (for example, when the special pattern drawn is a "big win", a "medium win", a "small win", etc.), when the second large prize opening door body 2651 retracts and the second large prize opening 2007 is open, if game ball B passes in front of the second large prize opening door body 2651, the game ball B is accepted into the second large prize opening 2007.

The game ball B received in the second large winning hole 2007 is detected by the second large winning hole sensor 2602 located downstream, then guided downward and sorted by the V sorting unit 2660 to either the V winning hole 2008 or the losing hole 2009, and detected by the V winning hole sensor 2603 or the losing hole sensor 2604. After that, the game ball B is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and is handed over to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward.

When the second large winning hole sensor 2602 detects a game ball B, a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded. When the V winning hole sensor 2603 detects a game ball B, a bonus of a game state (e.g., a "jackpot" game) in which the first large winning hole 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern is awarded, in which the player is given an advantage. When the losing hole sensor 2604 detects a game ball B, a bonus such as a predetermined number of game balls B is not awarded. When the losing hole sensor 2604 detects a game ball B, a bonus different from the case in which the V winning hole sensor 2603 detects a game ball B may be awarded. In this embodiment, the consistency of whether or not the sum of the number of game balls B detected by the V winning hole sensor 2603 and the losing hole sensor 2604 matches the number of game balls B detected by the second large winning hole sensor 2602 is checked to monitor for fraudulent behavior.

A game ball B that flows down from the lower right guide passage group 2542 to the Attacca upper shelf section 2612 and circulates through the Attacca right guide passage 2625, or that enters the central entrance 2605 or right entrance 2606 and is released to the left from above the second large winning entrance door body 2651, flows downward while abutting against multiple obstacle nails planted to the left of the general winning entrance 2001 of the Attacca unit 2600. It may then be accepted by the general winning entrance 2001 or the right sub-out entrance 2021b of the Attacca unit 2600.

The game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, where it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded. In addition, the game ball B received by the right sub-out opening 2021b is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, where it is discharged downward.

A game ball B that is not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 and the right sub-outlet 2021b of the attacca unit 2600 rolls to the left on the top surface of the first large winning opening door body 2641 that closes the first large winning opening 2006 located on the left, and is accepted from its left end into the right outlet 2020b located on the left, and is discharged outside the game area 5a.

At this time, depending on the first special pattern drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into the first lower starting opening 2003 and the first upper starting opening 2004, and the second special pattern drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into the second starting opening 2005 (for example, when the special pattern drawn is a "big win", a "medium win", a "small win", etc.), when the first large prize opening door body 2641 is moved back and the first large prize opening 2006 is open, if game ball B flows down above the first large prize opening 2006, the game ball B is accepted into the first large prize opening 2006.

The game ball B received by the first large prize opening 2006 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and handed over to the rear ball guide unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, and is then detected by the first large prize opening sensor 3002 and discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the first large prize opening sensor 3002, a bonus is awarded in which a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

In this embodiment, in the lottery for the first special pattern or the second special pattern that creates a favorable game state in which the player has an advantage, the first lower start gate 2003 and the first upper start gate 2004 are always open to receive the game ball B, whereas the second start gate 2005 is only able to receive the game ball B in a predetermined pattern when the normal lottery drawn by the passage of the game ball B through the gate 2002 is a "normal win". This makes it more likely that the first lower start gate 2003 and the first upper start gate 2004 will receive the game ball B than the second start gate 2005.

For this reason, under normal conditions, the player can perform an operation to shoot game ball B so that game ball B flows down the left side of the center device 2500 so that game ball B can be accepted by the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004. By showing the movement of game ball B being guided by multiple obstacle pins, the player can enjoy the original gameplay of the pachinko machine 1 with game ball B, and can heighten the anticipation of game ball B being accepted by the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004.

In games aimed at the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004, in games aimed at the first upper starting port 2004 (upper warp passage 2513), the game ball B that enters the upper warp passage 2513 is received by the first upper starting port 2004 via the crane 2530 and the center distribution piece 2523 of the center distribution unit 2520, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B in the crane 2530, and can also enjoy whether or not the game ball B is released from the crane 2530 at the timing when the game ball B is distributed to the first upper starting port 2004 by the center distribution piece 2523.

When game ball B is accepted into the first lower start opening 2003 or the first upper start opening 2004, and a "win" (for example, a "small win", "medium win", "big win", etc.) is selected as the lottery result for the first special pattern, the first large prize opening 2006 or the second large prize opening 2007 opens and closes, allowing the player to enjoy the operation of hitting game ball B aimed at the right side of the center device 2500 (so-called "right hit") so that game ball B can be accepted into the first large prize opening 2006 or the second large prize opening 2007, and increasing the anticipation of game ball B being accepted into the first large prize opening 2006 or the second large prize opening 2007.

When hitting the game ball B to the right side of the center device 2500, the right side of the center device 2500 is provided with a top right guide passage group 2541 consisting of the top right first guide passage 2541a and the top right second guide passage 2541b, a gate 2002, and a bottom right guide passage group 2542 consisting of the bottom right first guide passage 2542a and the bottom right second guide passage 2542b. Since the right side of the center device 2500 has a variety of flow paths, the hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B flows through the desired flow path, allowing the player to enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball B.

In addition, a gate 2002 is provided on the right side of the center device 2500, and a normal lottery is held in which passing through the gate 2002 opens the second starting hole 2005, so the player can enjoy not only whether or not the game ball B shot into the right side passes through the gate 2002, but also whether or not the game ball B can be received by the second starting hole 2005 when the second starting hole 2005 becomes open.

Furthermore, since the game ball B received at the second large winning port 2007 is allocated to either the V winning port 2008 or the losing port 2009, the player can be kept on edge and excited depending on whether the game ball B received at the second large winning port 2007 is allocated to the V winning port 2008 or not, which can make the player even more entertained.

[5-10. Overall configuration of the rear unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 142 and 143. The back unit 3000 includes a vibration sensor 1040 (see Figures 173 and 174) that detects vibration acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1), a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and a first large winning opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received by the first large winning opening 2006 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first large winning opening sensor 3002 are provided in the back ball guide unit 3100.

The rear unit 3000 is equipped with a rear box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, a lock slider 3020 that is slidable left and right on the rear wall of the rear box 3010 for attaching and detaching the performance display device 1600, and a rear board unit 3040 that is hingedly attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010.

The rear board unit 3040 comprises a board box 3041 that is L-shaped when viewed from the front and thin from front to back, and a panel relay board and a performance drive board (not shown) housed within the board box 3041. The board box 3041 has two shafts 3041a on the outer edge of the part extending up and down in the L shape that are rotatably supported by the shaft support part 3010f of the rear box 3010. The board box 3041 also has a locking claw 3041b at the tip of the part extending left and right in the L shape that locks into the locking part 3010g of the rear box 3010.

The rear unit 3000 (rear box 3010) also has a functional surface portion 3015 that can be used when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The functional surface portion 3015 is provided on the rear box 3010, and can be used to attach other components such as presentation units (here, the rear ball guide unit 3100, the rear front upper presentation unit 3200, the rear front left presentation unit 3300, the rear right presentation unit 3400, etc.) to the rear box 3010, to place the rear unit 3000 face down with the front side facing downward, or to place the rear unit 3000 face up with the rear side facing upward, etc.

The rear unit 3000 also includes a number of mounting supporters 3050 for mounting the rear performance unit 3600 to the rear box 3010, and a mounting supporter 3060 for mounting the rear right performance unit 3400 to the rear box 3010, as will be described in detail later.

The rear unit 3000 further includes a rear ball guide unit 3100 that is provided at the bottom near the front end of the rear box 3010 and through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 flows, a rear front upper performance unit 3200 that is provided along the upper edge near the front end of the rear box 3010, a rear front left performance unit 3300 that is provided along the left edge near the front end of the rear box 3010, a rear right performance unit 3400 that is provided along the right edge slightly behind the front end of the rear box 3010, a rear rear left performance unit 3500 that is provided in the upper left corner near the rear end of the rear box 3010 behind the rear front left performance unit 3300, and a rear rear performance unit 3600 that is provided near the rear end of the rear box 3010 and to which the rear rear left performance unit 3500 is attached.

The back ball guiding unit 3100, the back front upper performance unit 3200, and the back front left performance unit 3300 are attached directly to the back box 3010. The back right performance unit 3400 is attached to the front of the back rear performance unit 3600, and a portion of it is attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3060. The back rear performance unit 3600 is attached to the back box 3010, and a portion of it is attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3050.

The back front upper performance unit 3200, back front left performance unit 3300, back right performance unit 3400, back left performance unit 3500, and back rear performance unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 can show the player predetermined moving performances and light-emitting performances depending on the progress of the game.

[5-10a. Back box]
Next, the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 172 to 174. Fig. 172 is an explanatory perspective view showing the use state of the wiring locking part on the rear surface of the game board. Fig. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit of the game board disassembled into the performance unit, mounting supporter, and rear box as seen from the front, and Fig. 174 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit of the game board disassembled into the performance unit, mounting supporter, and rear box as seen from the back.

The rear box 3010 is attached to the rear of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120), and the presentation unit is attached inside the box-like shape, while the presentation display device 1600 and rear board unit 3040 are attached to the rear. The rear box 3010 is made transparent. This allows the inside to be seen from the outside even when assembled to the game board 5.

The rear box 3010 is box-shaped with an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, a mounting surface 3010b provided at the bottom of the opening 3010a on which the performance display device 1600 is placed, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame at the top of the opening 3010a, and a locking mechanism 3010d provided below near the center of the mounting surface 3010b in the left-right direction, to which a lock slider 3020 is attached so that it can slide left and right.

The opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 is formed in a rectangular shape with an aspect ratio of 3:4 when viewed from the front. The opening 3010a is formed to be approximately the same size in the left-right direction as the left-right direction of the rear wall of the rear box 3010. In addition, the opening 3010a is provided in a position that is offset (eccentric) upward from the center of the rear box 3010 in the up-down direction. The opening 3010a is formed to be the same size as a 19-inch liquid crystal display device (performance display device 1600).

The upper fixed piece 1601 of the performance display device 1600 is inserted from below into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the rear box 3010. In addition, the lower fixed piece 1602 of the performance display device 1600 can be inserted from the rear into the lock mechanism part 3010d of the rear box 3010 with the lock slider 3020 slid to the left in rear view. With the lower fixed piece 1602 of the performance display device 1600 inserted into the lock mechanism part 3010d, if the lock slider 3020 is slid to the right in rear view, the lock slider 3020 will prevent the lower fixed piece 1602 from moving backwards, allowing the performance display device 1600 to be attached.

The rear box 3010 also has a flat fixed piece 3010e that extends outward from the front end. This fixed piece 3010e is attached to the gaming panel 1100 with its front surface abutting against the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100.

Furthermore, the rear box 3010 is provided with a pair of pivot supports 3010f on the rear surface that can rotatably support the shaft 3041a of the rear substrate unit 3040 around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and a locking portion 3010g that is provided on the rear surface on the opposite side in the left-right direction from the pair of pivot supports 3010f and that locks the locking claw 3041b of the rear substrate unit 3040.

The rear box 3010 can straddle the opening 3010a (performance display device 1600) and mount the rear board unit 3040 to the rear side using a pair of pivot supports 3010f and locking members 3010g. When assembled to the game board 5, the L-shaped portion of the rear board unit 3040 that extends vertically is located to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 when viewed from the rear. In addition, the L-shaped portion of the rear board unit 3040 that extends horizontally is located below the peripheral control unit 1500.

When the rear box 3010 is assembled to the game board 5, the rear of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear box 3010 can be opened by releasing the locking claw 3041b of the rear board unit 3040 that is locked to the locking portion 3010g and rotating the locking claw 3041b so that it moves rearward around the axis portion 3041a, and the performance display device 1600 can be attached and detached without removing the rear board unit 3040 from the rear box 3010.

The rear box 3010 also has a number of wiring locking sections 3011 on the rear surface for locking the wiring EC, and through-holes 3012 that penetrate from front to back at the locations where the wiring locking sections 3011 are provided. The through-holes 3012 of the rear box 3010 allow the wiring EC to pass between the inside and outside of the rear box 3010, and when the wiring EC is locked between the wiring locking sections 3011 and the rear surface of the rear box 3010, the wiring EC bends inside the through-holes 3012, allowing pressure applied to the wiring EC from the wiring locking sections 3011 to be released.

The rear box 3010 also has a number of functional hole sections 3013, each consisting of a set of two through holes aligned vertically or horizontally, provided on the surface facing the front-rear direction excluding the fixed piece section 3010e, and a functional surface section 3015 that can be used when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The two through holes of the functional hole section 3013 have the same diameter. The functional hole section 3013 is for attaching the performance unit to the rear box 3010 directly or via the attachment supporter 3050 or attachment supporter 3060.

[5-10a-1. Wiring locking part]
Next, a detailed description will be given of the wire locking portions 3011 of the rear box 3010. A plurality of wire locking portions 3011 are provided on the rear surface of the rear box 3010. As shown in FIG. 174 etc., the wiring locking portion 3011 is of a straight type having a gap in the front through which the wiring EC can pass and extending flush with the rear surface of the rear box 3010. The wiring locking portion 3011A of the rear box 3010 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rear box 3010 and then extends parallel to the surface of the rear box 3010. The wiring locking portion 3011B of the rear box 3010 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rear box 3010 and then extends parallel to the surface of the rear box 3010. A crank-type wiring locking portion 3011C extends parallel to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 after protruding, and is bent in a direction approaching the rear surface of the rear box 3010. After that, an M-shaped wiring locking portion 3011D extends parallel to the surface of the rear box 3010 and has a tip that approaches the rear surface of the rear box 3010 and then bends away from it, and an L-shaped wiring locking portion There are also opposed-type wiring retaining portions 3011 which are provided facing each other.

The straight-line type wiring locking portions 3011A are provided near both left and right ends of the area above the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the rear box 3010, and below the opening 3010a to the left of the locking mechanism portion 3010d when viewed from the rear. The wiring locking portions 3011A above the opening 3010a are provided so that their tips extend toward the center in the left-right direction. There are three wiring locking portions 3011A below the opening 3010a, lined up on the left and right, with the two wiring locking portions 3011A at both the left and right ends extending upward, and the central wiring locking portion 3011A extending downward.

The L-shaped wiring locking portions 3011B are provided near both the left and right ends below the opening 3010a, with one on the left side when viewed from the rear and two on the right side. The wiring locking portion 3011B on the left side when viewed from the rear is provided with its tip extending to the right. Of the two wiring locking portions 3011B provided on the right side when viewed from the rear, one wiring locking portion 3011B is provided with its tip extending to the right, and the remaining wiring locking portion 3011B is provided with its tip extending downward to the left of the wiring locking portion 3011B whose tip extends to the right.

The crank-type wiring retainer 3011C is located below the opening 3010a, toward the left of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear. The tip of this wiring retainer 3011C extends downward.

A total of four M-shaped wiring locking portions 3011D are provided below the opening 3010a, two on each side with the crank-type wiring locking portion 3011C in between. Each wiring locking portion 3011D is provided at the same height as the wiring locking portion 3011C, with its tip extending downward. The four wiring locking portions 3011D and one wiring locking portion 3011C are provided at regular intervals in the left-right direction.

The opposing type wiring locking portion 3011E is provided so that the gap between the opposing tips is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction. This wiring locking portion 3011E is provided below the straight type wiring locking portion 3011A, which is provided above the opening 3010a and near the left end when viewed from the rear. The longitudinal direction of the wiring locking portion 3011E is oriented in the left-right direction.

The wiring locking portion 3011 has a claw-shaped hook portion 3011a at its tip that protrudes toward the rear side (forward) of the rear box 3010, and protrusions 3011b that protrude short toward the rear side (forward) from each of the two longitudinal sides. The tip of the wiring locking portion 3011 is formed at an angle so that the surface (front surface) facing the rear side of the rear box 3010, including the hook portion 3011a, is positioned further back as it approaches the tip. This makes it easier to insert the wiring EC from the tip side of the wiring locking portion 3011 between the wiring locking portion 3011 and the rear surface of the rear box 3010. In addition, the two protrusions 3011b give the wiring locking portion 3011 a U-shaped cross section, which increases its strength and rigidity.

The ends of these wiring locking parts 3011 extend in the opposite direction to the direction in which the wiring EC will move when the wiring EC is pulled while it is locked and routed. As a result, even if the wiring EC is pulled or tugged during assembly or maintenance of the game board 5, the wiring EC will move in the opposite direction to the end in the wiring locking parts 3011, and the wiring EC will not come loose from the wiring locking parts 3011.

Next, an example of how to use the wiring locking portion 3011 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 172. As shown in the figure, when assembled on the game board 5, a harness WH1 consisting of multiple wiring EC connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510) is locked to the wiring locking portion 1603 on the upper right side of the rear surface of the performance display device 1600 when viewed from the rear, and then locked to the wiring locking portion 3011 on the right side of the rear surface above the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the rear box 3010 when viewed from the rear, and extends upward.

The wiring locking portion 3011 of the rear box 3010 is provided to the left of the wiring locking portion 1603 of the performance display device 1600 when viewed from the rear. In addition, the tip of the wiring locking portion 3011 of the rear box 3010 extends to the left when viewed from the rear, whereas the tip of the wiring locking portion 1603 of the performance display device 1600 extends to the right when viewed from the rear. Therefore, when both ends (connector sides) of the harness WH1 (multiple wiring EC) locked to the wiring locking portion 3011 and the wiring locking portion 1603 are pulled, the harness WH1 moves in the opposite direction to the direction in which the tips of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 extend, and the harness WH1 does not come off the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring locking portion 3011.

Also, as shown in FIG. 172, a harness WH2 consisting of a small number of wires EC (two wires EC in this case) is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 so that it extends downward. This harness WH2 is engaged with a wire engaging portion 1603 at the bottom right when viewed from behind on the rear surface of the performance display device 1600, and is routed so that it passes under the harness WH1 that is bent upward between the two wire engaging portions 1603. This gives the harness WH2 that extends downward some slack in length while preventing it from sagging.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 172, the harness WH1 and harness WH2 engaged with the wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011 are fastened and bundled together with the wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011 by a cable tie CT. At this time, the harness WH1 and harness WH2 are fastened with a strength that allows them to slide together with the cable tie CT in the longitudinal direction in which the wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011 extend. Note that, since the hook portion 1603a and hook portion 3011a are provided at the tip of the wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011, the cable tie CT will not come off from the tip of the wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011 together with the harness WH1 and harness WH2.

Here, the cable tie CT has a band part CTa that is belt-shaped and has multiple ridges or grooves at regular intervals in the longitudinal direction, and a block-shaped lock part CTb to which the base end of the band part CTa is connected and through which the tip side of the band part CTa can be inserted and which uses the ridges to prevent the band part CTa from retracting. The cable tie CT can make the band part CTa into a loop (ring) by inserting the tip of the band part CTa into the inside from the bottom surface near the part where the base end of the band part CTa is connected in the lock part CTb, and the diameter of the loop by the band part CTa can be reduced by pulling the tip of the band part CTa protruding from the top surface of the lock part CTb. At this time, although not shown in the figure, a lock mechanism is provided inside the lock part CTb to prevent the band part CTa from moving in the direction of coming out of the lock part CTb, and the band part CTa inserted through the lock part CTb does not return (retract).

Therefore, by inserting the tip of the band portion CTa into the lock portion CTb and pulling it so that the band holding portion 2706 and the wiring EC are positioned within the loop of the band portion CTa, the band holding portion 2706 and the wiring EC can be tightened and kept tied by the band portion CTa. After tightening with the cable tie CT, the portion of the band portion CTa protruding from the lock portion CTb is cut off from the lock portion CTb by an appropriate length (for example, 0.5 mm to 2 mm). This prevents the band portion CTa from immediately coming out of the lock portion CTb even if the band portion CTa moves in a direction that causes it to come out of the lock portion CTb for some reason, thereby suppressing the occurrence of malfunctions.

The cable ties CT of this embodiment are formed in a milky white color that is light-transmitting. The cable ties CT may be made to have different colors depending on the part to which they are attached, the worker, etc. For example, if the color of the cable ties CT is different for each worker or cooperating company, it can be easier to find missed tasks in later processes.

In the above description, the cable tie CT is shown as one in which the band portion CTa cannot be detached from the lock portion CTb, but this is not limiting and the band portion CTa may be detachable. If the cable tie CT is detachable, it can be reused after removal, reducing the amount of waste.

At the rear of the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 172, the cable tie CT is attached with the locking portion CTb in contact with the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011. The locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT abuts against the portion of the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 opposite the harness WH1 or harness WH2. In other words, the cable tie CT is attached so that the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 are located between the harness WH1 or harness WH2 and the locking portion CTb. As a result, since the locking portion CTb faces rearward, it is possible to easily perform the tying operation using the cable tie CT, check the tying, etc. Furthermore, it is possible to easily cut the cable tie CT. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, contact of the locking portion CTb with the harness WH1 or harness WH2 can be avoided, so that the harness WH1 or harness WH2 tied with the cable tie CT can be protected by the wiring locking portion 1603 or wiring locking portion 3011.

As shown in FIG. 172, the component (rear case) in which the wiring fastening portion 1603 of the performance display device 1600 is formed, and the rear box 3010 are formed transparently, so that the parts of the wiring fastening portion 1603 and the wiring fastening portion 3011 that are supported by the wiring fastening portion 1603 and the wiring fastening portion 3011 can be seen from the outside (rear) through the wiring fastening portion 1603 and the wiring fastening portion 3011. This makes it easy to check whether all the wiring EC that makes up the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bundled with cable ties CT, and also makes it easier to perform the bundling work using the cable ties CT.

Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the cable tie CT is attached so that (the band portion CTa of) the cable tie CT contacts the harness WH1 or harness WH2 at an angle. This makes it possible to increase the contact area compared to when the cable tie CT contacts the harness WH1 or harness WH2 in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, and to increase the frictional resistance, making it difficult to move (slide).

As shown in the figure, the cable tie CT that binds the harness WH1 to the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 is attached so that the longitudinal direction of the band portion CTa extends obliquely with respect to a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011. In other words, the cable tie CT is attached in a cross-body manner. As a result, when the harness WH1 is bound to the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring locking portion 3011 by the cable tie CT, tilting the cable tie CT so that the longitudinal direction of the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT approaches a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring locking portion 3011 can loosen the tightening by the band portion CTa, making it easier to slide the harness WH1 together with the cable tie CT in the longitudinal direction of the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring locking portion 3011. Also, after sliding, returning the cable tie CT to its tilted state can tighten the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring locking portion 3011 and return it to its original state where it is difficult to slide.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the rear surface of the peripheral control board box 1520 of the peripheral control unit 1500 protrudes rearward from the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT that binds the harness WH1 and harness WH2 to the wiring retaining portion 1603 and wiring retaining portion 3011. As a result, even if the game board 5 is placed on a workbench with its rear side facing down during assembly work of the game board 5, the peripheral control board box 1520 abuts against the workbench, so the workbench does not abut against the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT. Alternatively, even if multiple game boards 5 are transported stacked during transport work of the game board 5, the other game boards 5 abut against the peripheral control board box 1520, so the other game boards 5 do not abut against the locking portion CTb. For this reason, the presence of the peripheral control board box 1520 makes it possible to prevent the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT from coming into contact with other components such as the workbench or game board 5 and being crushed, and prevents malfunctions caused by the harness WH1 and harness WH2 coming off the wiring retaining portion 1603 and wiring retaining portion 3011 due to damage to the locking portion CTb.

Although not shown, when the game board 5 of this embodiment is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear of the game board 5 is covered by the back cover 640 of the main frame 4. This allows the back cover 640 to prevent other components, such as the wiring EC connecting the pachinko machine 1 to the game hall side, the game ball B, and other components, from contacting (abutting) with the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT in the island equipment of the game hall, and prevents the harness WH1 and harness WH2 from coming off the wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011 due to the release of the fastening of the band portion CTa by the locking portion CTb due to contact with other components, thereby preventing the occurrence of malfunctions caused by the cable tie CT. In addition, since the back cover 640 can prevent the fastening from loosening or being released due to contact with other components to the locking portion CTb, a cable tie CT of a type in which the band portion CTa can be attached and detached from the locking portion CTb can be used.

In the above embodiment, the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 are shown as being transparent, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be translucent or opaque, but have light transmittance that allows the wiring EC to be seen through. Alternatively, the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 may be opaque and not have light transmittance.

Although not shown, the harness WH1 may be tied up in a portion away from the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011 (for example, the portion between the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011) with a special cable tie. This allows the harness WH1 to be tied up with a special cable tie even in a portion between the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011, so that the multiple wires EC constituting the harness WH1 are prevented from becoming separated one by one over the entire length of the harness WH1. Here, the special cable tie has a different name from the cable tie CT described above, but it clearly indicates the difference in use and has the same configuration (structure) as the cable tie CT.

In this way, the wiring locking portion 1603, the wiring locking portion 3011, and the cable tie CT of this embodiment can provide the following excellent operational effects. In detail, first, in a conventional pachinko machine, a harness consisting of multiple wiring EC is exposed on the rear surface of the rear box. Since there is a risk of malfunction due to the exposed harness coming into contact with other components, multiple harness support portions are provided to support the harness so that it fits along the rear surface of the rear box. The harness support portion of such a conventional pachinko machine is a rod-shaped or strip-shaped member that extends along the rear surface of the rear box and has one end as a free end, and the harness is supported by being inserted between the rear box and the harness support portion from the free end side. However, with the conventional harness support portion, the harness or the wiring EC that constitutes the harness may come off, which may cause malfunction.

In this embodiment, to address this problem, the harness WH1 and harness WH2, which are made up of multiple wiring EC, are fastened and bundled together with a cable tie CT at the wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011. This prevents the wiring EC from coming loose one by one from the harness WH1 and harness WH2 at the wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011, and prevents some of the loose wiring EC from coming loose from the wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011. This also prevents the wiring EC from coming loose from the wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011, making it easier for the wiring EC to break.

In addition, the harness WH1 and harness WH2, which are made up of multiple wiring EC, can be slid in the longitudinal direction of the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 while still bundled with the cable tie CT. This allows multiple wiring EC (harness WH1 and harness WH2) to be slid at once when checking components hidden by the harness WH1 or harness WH2, whereas in the past, when the wiring EC was not bundled with the cable tie CT, the work had to be done by moving (sliding) each wire EC from the harness one by one. This makes it easier to check the wiring EC and reduces the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, since the tips of the wiring engaging portion 1603 and the wiring engaging portion 3011 for supporting the harness WH1 are free ends, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be easily inserted from the open free end sides of the wiring engaging portion 1603 and the wiring engaging portion 3011, thereby improving workability. At this time, hooks 1603a and 3011a are provided at the tips of wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011, protruding toward performance display device 1600 and rear box 3010. When harness WH1 and harness WH2 are fastened and bundled together with wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011 by cable tie CT, even if cable tie CT slides toward the free end of wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011 together with harness WH1 and harness WH2, further sliding is prevented by abutting hooks 1603a and 3011a. This prevents harness WH1 and harness WH2 from slipping out of the tips of wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011 together with cable tie CT, and provides a pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, since the cable tie CT is composed of a band portion CTa and a locking portion CTb that prevents the band portion CTa from retracting, i.e., it can only be inserted in one direction, by simply inserting the tip of the band portion CTa wrapped around the wiring engaging portion 1603, the wiring engaging portion 3011, and the harness WH1 or WH2 into the locking portion CTb and pulling it, the wiring engaging portion 1603, the wiring engaging portion 3011, and the harness WH1 or WH2 can be locked in a tightened state, thereby improving the workability of bundling the harness WH1 or WH2. At this time, because the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is in contact with the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011, even if a force acts on the cable tie CT to rotate around the axis of the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 for some reason, the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is in contact with the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011, so that the cable tie CT can be prevented from rotating around the axis of the harness WH1 or the harness WH2. This prevents the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT and the tip of the band portion CTa extending from the locking portion CTb from coming into contact with other components, preventing malfunctions.

Furthermore, since the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is abutted against the side of the wiring engagement portion 1603 or the wiring engagement portion 3011 opposite the harness WH1 or harness WH2, the following excellent operational effects can be achieved. In more detail, if the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is abutted against the side of the wiring engagement portion 1603 or the wiring engagement portion 3011 that is in contact with the harness WH1 or harness WH2, the tip of the band portion CTa protruding from the locking portion CTb needs to be pulled in the direction of the performance display device 1600 or the rear box 3010, and the performance display device 1600 or the rear box 3010 gets in the way, making the tying work difficult. In response to this, the locking portion CTb is abutted against the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 on the side opposite the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, so that when the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bundled with the cable tie CT, the locking portion CTb faces the worker, and by pulling the tip of the band portion CTa protruding from the locking portion CTb in a direction away from the performance display device 1600 and the rear box 3010, the wiring retaining portion 1603, the wiring retaining portion 3011, and the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be tightened, further improving workability.

In addition, since the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is abutted against the portion of the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 opposite the harness WH1 and harness WH2, as described above, the locking portion CTb faces the worker, making it easy to check whether the tip of the band portion CTa is inserted into the locking portion CTb, and providing a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to check the work.

Furthermore, because the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is abutted against the portion of the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011 on the opposite side from the harness WH1 or WH2, the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011 is interposed between the harness WH1 or WH2 and the locking portion CTb, and the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011 can function as a barrier that prevents the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT from coming into contact with the harness WH1 or WH2. This provides the following excellent operational effects. In detail, when the tip of the band portion CTa is inserted into the lock portion CTb of the cable tie CT and the tip of the band portion CTa is pulled to bundle the cables, if the wiring EC of the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 abuts against the lock portion CTb, part of the wiring EC will be pulled into the lock portion CTb together with the band portion CTa that is being pulled, which may cause the insulating coating of the wiring EC to be torn. In contrast, the locking portion CTb is abutted against the side of the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011 opposite the harness WH1 or WH2. In other words, the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011 is interposed between the harness WH1 or WH2 and the locking portion CTb. Therefore, the harness WH1 or WH2 (wiring EC) does not abut against the locking portion CTb. Even if the tip of the band portion CTa through which the locking portion CTb is inserted is pulled, a part of the wiring EC is not pulled into the locking portion CTb together with the band portion CTa. This prevents the insulating coating of the wiring EC from breaking, and protects the harness WH1 or WH2 tied together with the cable tie CT.

In addition, because the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is abutted against the portion of the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011 opposite the harness WH1 or harness WH2, the cable tie CT (band portion CTa) can be easily cut when removing the harness WH1 or harness WH2 from the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011 for maintenance or disassembly of the pachinko machine 1. In more detail, as described above, because the block-shaped locking portion CTb faces the worker, by guiding a cutting tool such as pliers along the locking portion CTb, the band portion CTa can be easily cut without damaging other portions.

In addition, since the rear cover 640 of the main frame 4 and the peripheral control board box 1520 protruding rearward from the cable tie CT are provided as protective parts for protecting the cable tie CT, the locking part CTb of the cable tie CT can be protected, and therefore, under various circumstances such as assembly, transportation, installation, and installation in the game hall of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), it is possible to prevent other members from coming into contact with the cable tie CT for some reason, and it is possible to prevent damage to the cable tie CT (locking part CTb) and prevent the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from coming off the wiring locking part 1603 and the wiring locking part 3011. In addition, since the rear cover 640 of the main frame 4 and the peripheral control board box 1520 can protect the cable tie CT from coming into contact with other members, it is possible to avoid damage to other members due to the cable tie CT coming into contact, and the occurrence of malfunctions can be reduced.

Furthermore, the rear cover 640 of the main frame 4 can reliably prevent other components from coming into contact with the cable tie CT, preventing other components from coming into contact with the cable tie CT (locking portion CTb) for some reason and damaging it, and preventing the harness WH1 and harness WH2 from coming off the wiring retaining portion 1603 and wiring retaining portion 3011 due to damage to the locking portion CTb. Also, the rear cover 640 of the main frame 4 can prevent other components from coming into contact with the cable tie CT, preventing other components from being damaged by the cable tie CT coming into contact with it, reducing the occurrence of malfunctions.

In addition, when the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear of the game board 5 is covered by the back cover 640 of the main frame 4, so that the back cover 640 can prevent other components in the island equipment of the game hall, such as the wiring EC connecting the pachinko machine 1 to the game hall side, the game balls B, and other components from contacting (abutting) with the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT. This can prevent the harness WH1 and harness WH2 from coming off the wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011 due to the release of the fastening of the band portion CTa by the locking portion CTb due to contact with other components, and can prevent the occurrence of malfunctions caused by the cable tie CT. In addition, since the back cover 640 can prevent the fastening from loosening or being released due to contact with other components with the locking portion CTb, a type of cable tie CT in which the band portion CTa can be attached and detached from the locking portion CTb can be used.

In addition, since the peripheral control board box 1520 protruding from the cable tie CT is provided as a protective part for protecting the cable tie CT, when another member moves from the rear toward the rear box 3010 on which the wiring locking part 1603 and the wiring locking part 3011 are provided, the other member abuts against the peripheral control board box 1520 as a protective part before contacting the cable tie CT, and the other member can be prevented from moving further toward the cable tie CT, and the other member can be prevented from contacting the cable tie CT. Therefore, since the contact (abutment) of the other member with the cable tie CT (locking part CTb) can be avoided, the restriction on the movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 by the cable tie CT is not released due to contact with the other member, and the occurrence of a malfunction caused by the cable tie CT can be prevented. In addition, since a peripheral control board box 1520 is provided as a protective part to protect the cable tie CT, even if for some reason another component approaches the game board 5 from behind beyond the rear cover 640 of the main body frame 4, as described above, the peripheral control board box 1520 that protects the cable tie CT is also present, so the cable tie CT can be doubly protected.

In addition, as a protective section for protecting the cable ties CT, a peripheral control board box 1520 is provided on the rear surface of the game board 5 where the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 is provided, protruding rearward from the cable ties CT. Therefore, even if the game board 5 is placed on a workbench with its rear surface facing down during assembly work of the game board 5, the peripheral control board box 1520 abuts against the workbench, so the workbench does not abut against the locking section CTb of the cable ties CT. Alternatively, even if multiple game boards 5 are transported stacked during transport work of the game board 5, the other game boards 5 abut against the peripheral control board box 1520, so the other game boards 5 do not abut against the locking section CTb. For this reason, the presence of the peripheral control board box 1520 makes it possible to prevent the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT from coming into contact with other components such as the workbench or game board 5 and being crushed, and prevents malfunctions caused by the harness WH1 and harness WH2 coming off the wiring retaining portion 1603 and wiring retaining portion 3011 due to damage to the locking portion CTb.

Furthermore, the rear surface and rear box 3010 of the performance display device 1600 are made transparent, and the harnesses WH1 and WH2 are supported visibly by the wiring retaining portion 1603 and wiring retaining portion 3011. This allows the harnesses WH1 and WH2 supported by the wiring retaining portion 1603 and wiring retaining portion 3011 to be seen from the outside. This makes it easy to check whether all of the wiring EC that makes up the harnesses WH1 and WH2 is bundled with cable ties CT and their movement is restricted. This prevents the shipment of defective products with some of the wiring EC loose, and also makes it easier to check the cable ties CT during maintenance, etc.

In addition, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be seen through the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011, the task of bundling the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 with the cable tie CT can be easily performed, improving workability.

In addition, the harness WH1 and harness WH2 can be seen through the transparent wiring retaining portion 1603 and wiring retaining portion 3011, and the cable tie CT is milky white with low light transmittance and is a different color (e.g., gray, yellow, white, black, blue, red, green, etc.) from the multiple wirings EC that constitute the harness WH1 and harness WH2. Therefore, when the harness WH1 and harness WH2 (multiple wirings EC) and the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT are seen through the wiring retaining portion 1603 and wiring retaining portion 3011, it is clearly visible that the band portion CTa is straddling the harness WH1 and harness WH2. This allows the harness WH1 and harness WH2 to be reliably confirmed to be tied by the cable tie CT, and makes it easy to tie the wiring retaining portion 1603, wiring retaining portion 3011, and harness WH1 and harness WH2 by the cable tie CT.

Furthermore, because the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT is in contact with the harness WH1 or WH2 at an angle to the longitudinal direction, the contact area can be made larger and the frictional resistance between the cable tie CT (band portion CTa) and the harness WH1 or WH2 can be made larger compared to when the cable tie CT is in contact with the harness WH1 or WH2 in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. Therefore, the movement of the harness WH1 or WH2 by the cable tie CT can be sufficiently restricted, and the harness WH1 or WH2 or the wiring EC can be prevented from coming off the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011, thereby avoiding the occurrence of malfunctions.

In addition, since the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT is in contact with the harness WH1 or WH2 at an angle, the following excellent effects can be achieved. In detail, when the harness WH1 or WH2 is tightened and tied with the cable tie CT, a force is applied from the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT to the harness WH1 or WH2 (wiring EC), and depending on the strength of the force, the insulating coating film covering the wiring EC may deteriorate early, and defects such as leakage and short circuits may easily occur. In contrast, when the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT is in contact with the harness WH1 or WH2 at an angle, the contact area between the band portion CTa and the harness WH1 or WH2 (wiring EC) can be made larger than when the band portion CTa is wrapped around the harness WH1 or WH2 in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the harness WH1 or WH2. Therefore, even if the cable tie CT is tightened to the same strength, by making contact at an angle to increase the contact area, the force acting when tightening can be widely dispersed and relatively small, which can prevent premature deterioration of the insulating coating and prevent problems such as electrical leakage and short circuits from occurring.

In addition, since the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 extend in a strip-like shape, when the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bundled together with the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 using the cable tie CT, since the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 have width, the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT can automatically come into contact at an angle with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, and a pachinko machine 1 that provides the above-mentioned effects can be reliably provided.

Furthermore, the harness WH1 and harness WH2, which are made up of multiple wiring EC, are individually bound with a specific cable tie at a location away from the wiring retaining portion 1603 and wiring retaining portion 3011, so that the multiple wiring EC constituting the harness WH1 and harness WH2 can be prevented from coming apart one by one over the entire length of the harness WH1 and harness WH2, and the loose wiring EC can be prevented from coming into contact with other components, thereby preventing malfunctions.

In addition, since the harness WH1 and harness WH2 are bundled and tied together at a location away from the wiring retaining portion 1603 and wiring retaining portion 3011 using the special cable tie, if the harness WH1 or harness WH2 is pulled in its longitudinal direction for some reason, as the harness WH1 or harness WH2 moves, the locking portion of the special cable tie comes into contact with the wiring retaining portion 1603 or wiring retaining portion 3011 and the cable tie CT, and the special cable tie can prevent the harness WH1 or harness WH2 from moving any further.

Furthermore, since the harness WH1 and harness WH2, which are made up of multiple wiring EC, are tied with a special cable tie at a location away from the wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011, the multiple wiring EC are gathered so that the outer circumference of the harness WH1 and harness WH2 approaches a circle, and the band portion of the special cable tie extends in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the harness WH1 and harness WH2. As a result, the harness WH1 and harness WH2 can be bundled compactly at the location of the special cable tie, making it easier to check the components located behind the harness WH1 and harness WH2.

In addition, in the portion of the specific cable tie provided away from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the band portion of the specific cable tie extends in a direction perpendicular to the (longitudinal direction of) the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. On the other hand, in the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT is made to contact the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 at an angle, so that the direction in which the band portion CTa and the band portion extend relative to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be made different between the portion of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 and the portion of the bundling portion. As a result, in the work of bundling the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, by checking the position and number of the band portion CTa and the direction in which the band portion extends, it is easy to check whether the work is being performed according to the work manual. In this case, the cable ties CT of the wiring fastening parts 1603 and 3011 may be different colors from the specific cable ties, making it easier to check the fastening work.

In addition, since the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 extend in a flat or band-like shape, the contact area between the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 and the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be made larger than when the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 are rod-shaped, and the frictional resistance can be increased. This makes it easier to exert the effect of the cable tie CT as a movement restriction means, and the movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be reliably restricted to further prevent malfunctions.

Furthermore, since the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are configured to extend in a flat or strip-like shape, the multiple wirings EC constituting the harnesses WH1 and WH2 tend to spread out in a line along the surface of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, making it easier to dissipate heat from the wiring EC. At this time, the harnesses WH1 and WH2 can be visually confirmed through the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, making it easier to check the multiple wirings EC constituting the harnesses WH1 and WH2 one by one through the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011.

As shown in the enlarged cross-sectional view of the main part in Fig. 172, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are provided with the protrusions 1603b and 3011b protruding forward from two sides extending in the longitudinal direction, so that the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 come into contact with the protrusions 1603b and 3011b. In other words, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are provided with recesses that prevent contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. This prevents force from acting on the harness WH1 and harness WH2 from the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT across the entire width of the wiring retaining portion 1603 and wiring retaining portion 3011 when the cable tie CT is tightened and tied, making it possible to adjust the force acting on the harness WH1 and harness WH2 and suppress premature deterioration of the insulating coating on the wiring EC.

In addition, since the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 are provided with the protrusion portion 1603b and the protrusion portion 3011b, when the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are fastened with the cable tie CT, the insulating coating of the wiring EC constituting the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 is likely to bite into the corners of the protrusion portion 1603b and the protrusion portion 3011b. This makes it possible to provide resistance to the longitudinal movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, making it difficult for the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 to move in the longitudinal direction.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a through-hole 1604 is provided at the rear of the performance display device 1600 at a portion facing the wiring locking portion 1603, and a through-hole 3012 is provided at a portion facing the wiring locking portion 3011 in the rear box 3010, which penetrates from front to back. In other words, in the main body (here, the performance display device 1600 and the rear box 3010) in which a harness support portion for locking the wiring EC and harness WH1, such as the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, is provided, a contact avoidance portion (corresponding to the through-hole 1604 and the through-hole 3012 in this embodiment) is provided at a portion facing the portion of the harness support portion in the main body that extends along the surface of the main body, which prevents the cable tie CT that bundles the wiring EC and harness WH1, etc. together with the harness support portion from contacting the main body.

In this way, a contact avoidance portion that avoids contact with the cable tie CT is provided in the portion of the main body that faces the harness support portion, such as the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, making it easier to insert multiple wiring EC, harness WH1, and cable tie CT between the main body and the harness support portion, improving workability. In addition, the cable tie CT that binds the harness WH1, etc. to the harness support portion is prevented from contacting the surface of the main body portion, in other words, the cable tie CT does not contact the main body portion, reducing defects to the harness WH1 and the harness support portion.

In more detail, when the cable tie CT abuts against the main body, a force is constantly applied to the harness support part in a direction away from the main body via the wiring EC, harness WH1, etc., and the cable tie CT. Therefore, the force acting from the main body to the harness support part may cause the harness support part to fatigue early and break. In addition, since the force acting from the main body to the harness support part also acts on the wiring EC, harness WH1, etc., the constant force acting on the insulating coating of the wiring EC may cause the insulating coating to deteriorate early, and there is a risk of leakage or short circuit. In response to such problems, in this embodiment, a contact avoidance part is provided on the main body, so that no force is applied from the main body to the harness support part or the harness WH1, etc., which are bundled by the cable tie CT. Therefore, it is possible to reduce defects such as early damage to the harness support part and leakage or short circuit in the harness WH1, etc.

In this embodiment, the contact avoidance portion is shown as penetrating the surface of the main body (the rear surface of the performance display device 1600 or the rear surface of the rear box 3010), but this is not limited to this and may be recessed from the surface of the main body.

In the above embodiment, the harness WH1 and harness WH2 are tied together with a cable tie CT at the wiring fastening portion 1603 provided on the rear cover of the performance display device 1600 and the wiring fastening portion 3011 of the rear box 3010, but this is not limited to this, and the wiring EC and harness may also be tied together with a cable tie CT at a wiring fastening portion provided on a performance unit having a decorative body or a movable decorative body.

In the above embodiment, a cable tie CT is wrapped around and fastened (tied) a harness such as harness WH1 or harness WH2 around a harness support such as wiring retaining portion 1603 or wiring retaining portion 3011 to prevent the harness from coming off the harness support, but this is not limited to this, and a hook-and-loop fastener band, a vinyl tie, a harness clip, a spiral tube, a high friction resistance portion, or an adhesive portion may be provided on the harness support.

[5-10a-2. Functional surface]
Next, the functional surface portion 3015 of the rear box 3010 will be described in detail. The functional surface portion 3015 is also used when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5). The functional surface portion 3015 is provided on the front side and on the rear side of the fixing piece portion 3010e for attaching the rear box 3010 to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). The rear surface side is formed on a surface parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. The functional surface portion 3015 is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit 3000 when viewed from the front.

Since the front and rear sides of the functional surface portion 3015 can be abutted against a specific member, for example, the upper end of an intermediate member protruding from a specific member such as a workbench or a placement table may be abutted against the front side of the functional surface portion 3015. In this case, the intermediate member protrudes longer (higher) than the distance from the functional surface portion 3015 to the front of the back unit 3000 (here, the back ball guide unit 3100, the back front upper performance unit 3200, and the back front left performance unit 3300). As a result, when assembling the game board 5, if it is desired to place the back unit 3000 on a specific member with the front side facing downward (laying face down), the back unit 3000 can be placed on the specific member with the front side of the back unit 3000 facing downward by abutting the upper end of the intermediate member protruding from the specific member against the front of the functional surface portion 3015.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the front surface of the back unit 3000 from being scratched due to contact with the specified member, and it is possible to maintain the back unit 3000 in good condition, prevent the occurrence of defective products (faulty products) due to scratches, and suppress increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1. The intermediate member may be a separate member from the specified member.

As described above, the functional surface portion 3015 can prevent contact between the front surface of the rear unit 3000 and certain components, so that the rear unit 3000 (rear box 3010) holding the performance unit can be placed face down and other components, such as the performance display device 1600 and rear board unit 3040, can be attached and wired to the rear side of the rear box 3010.

Furthermore, since the rear box 3010 is provided with a functional surface portion 3015, the rear box 3010 can be laid face down even when not holding a performance unit, compared to when the functional surface portion 3015 is provided on a performance unit such as the rear front upper performance unit 3200 or the rear front left performance unit 3300. Therefore, the rear box 3010 (rear unit 3000) can be laid face down even during assembly, making it possible to accommodate a variety of work conditions (work modes).

In addition, since the functional surface portion 3015 can abut a predetermined member against its front side or rear side, for example, the upper end of an intermediate member protruding from a predetermined member such as a workbench or a placement table may be abutted against the rear side of the functional surface portion 3015. In this case, the intermediate member protrudes longer (higher) than the distance from the functional surface portion 3015 to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000. As a result, when assembling the game board 5, if it is desired to place the rear unit 3000 on a predetermined member with its rear side facing down (upside down), the rear unit 3000 can be placed on the predetermined member with its rear side facing down by abutting the upper end of the intermediate member protruding from the predetermined member against the rear surface of the functional surface portion 3015.

Therefore, by abutting the upper surface of the intermediate member against the rear surface of the functional surface portion 3015, the rear unit 3000 can be placed upright on a specified member while avoiding contact of the specified member with the rear surface of the rear unit 3000. This allows the rear unit 3000 (rear box 3010) to be stabilized in an upright position during assembly, making it easier to perform assembly work from the front end side of the rear box 3010.

In addition, since the functional surface portion 3015 is provided in a portion recessed rearward from the front surface of the rear box 3010, at least a portion of the periphery of the functional surface portion 3015 has a portion protruding forward or rearward (e.g., the side wall of the rear box 3010), which can restrict the relative movement of the functional surface portion 3015 and the intermediate member or the upper surface of the intermediate member in a direction along the surface of a specific member. This makes it possible to make the rear unit 3000 (rear box 3010) less likely to move when placed face down or face up via the functional surface portion 3015, making it easier to perform assembly work, etc.

Furthermore, since the functional surface portion 3015 is provided with a portion of the multiple functional hole portions 3013, by providing the intermediate member with a positioning pin that can be inserted into the through hole of the functional hole portion 3013, the positioning pin can restrict the movement of the rear unit 3000 (rear box 3010) placed face down or up via the functional surface portion 3015 in a direction along the surface of a specified member, thereby achieving the same effect as described above.

In addition, since the functional surface portion 3015 is arranged to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit 3000 when viewed from the front, when the rear unit 3000 is placed face down or face up on a specified component such as a workbench or a stand via an intermediate component, the rear unit 3000 can be kept in a stable state, and it is possible to prevent the rear unit 3000 from tilting and causing the front surface of the performance unit to come into contact with the specified component.

Furthermore, since the functional surface portion 3015 is located behind the front surface of the rear box 3010, when the rear box 3010 is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 (panel holder 1120), the functional surface portion 3015 does not come into contact with the gaming panel 1100, and the rear box 3010 (rear unit 3000) can be attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 without any problems.

In the above embodiment, the functional surface portion 3015 is shown as a flat surface parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100, but is not limited thereto. For example, the functional surface portion may be a "curved surface portion recessed backward in a conical or frustum shape", a "multi-sided portion recessed backward in a polygonal pyramid or frustum shape", a "curved surface portion protruding forward in a conical or frustum shape", a "multi-sided portion protruding forward in a polygonal pyramid or frustum shape", etc. When the functional surface portion is a curved surface portion or multi-sided portion as described above, it is desirable to give the upper end surface of the intermediate member a shape that imitates the functional surface portion. This makes it possible to restrict the relative movement of the functional surface portion (rear box 3010) and the intermediate member in a direction along the surface of a specified member.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the functional surface portion 3015 is provided on the rear box 3010, but this is not limited to this, and the functional surface portion 3015 may be provided on a presentation unit attached to the rear box 3010 or on a ball guide member that guides the game ball B. For example, the end surface of the drive motor or solenoid of the presentation unit, the tip surface of the ball guide member, etc. may be the functional surface portion.

[5-10b. Mounting support]
Next, the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 in the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 173 to 177. Fig. 175(a) is a six-sided view of the mounting supporter in the rear unit, (b) is a perspective view of the mounting supporter in (a) seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the mounting supporter in (a) seen from the back. Fig. 176(a) is a perspective view of a mounting supporter of an embodiment different from the mounting supporter in Fig. 175, (b) is an explanatory view showing a perspective view of the main part of the mounting supporter in (a) having a different shape of the main body, and (c) is an explanatory view showing a perspective view of the main part of the mounting supporter of an embodiment different from the mounting supporter in (a) seen from the back. Figure 177 (a) is an oblique view of a mounting supporter having a different shape from that of Figure 175, seen from the front left, (b) is a front view of the mounting supporter of (a), (c) is an oblique view of the mounting supporter of (a) seen from the front right, and (d) is an oblique view of the mounting supporter of (a) seen from the rear.

Figure 178 shows an enlarged view of the mounting supporter portion as a key part with the rear box made transparent, and is an oblique view of the rear unit as viewed from behind. Figure 179 (a) is a photograph of the mounting supporter portion of the rear unit in Figure 175 as viewed from behind, and (b) is a photograph of the mounting supporter portion of the rear unit in Figure 177 as viewed from behind. In Figure 178, the rear box 3010 is shown with a dashed line, and mounting supporter 3050 and mounting supporter 3060 are shaded in the enlarged view of the key parts.

In this embodiment, the rear performance unit 3600 is attached to the rear box 3010 by the attachment supporter 3050, and the rear right performance unit 3400 is attached to the rear box 3010 by the attachment supporter 3060.

First, the mounting supporter 3050 will be described. As shown in FIG. 175 etc., the mounting supporter 3050 has a block-shaped main body 3051, a first mounting hole 3052 penetrating the main body 3051, a protruding pin 3053 spaced apart from the first mounting hole 3052 and protruding cylindrically rearward from the main body 3051, a boss 3054 protruding cylindrically forward from the main body 3051, and a second mounting hole 3055 penetrating the boss 3054. This mounting supporter 3050 is colored a different color (black in this case) from the rear box 3010.

The main body 3051 of the mounting supporter 3050 is formed in a semicircular shape in front view, with the left side of a rectangular shape that is long from left to right and the left side touching the top and bottom sides. The main body 3051 is formed so that the length in the front-rear direction is shorter on the right side from near the left-right center than on the left side. The rear surface of the main body 3051 is formed flat, while the front surface is formed in a stepped shape so that the right side from near the left-right center is recessed backwards. This main body 3051 has a piece 3051a to the right of the left-right center that is thinner than the left side. In addition, the base part of the protruding pin 3053 in the main body 3051 is recessed so as to surround the outer periphery of the protruding pin 3053 (has a ring-shaped groove).

The first mounting hole 3052 is located coaxially with the center of the semicircular arc on the left side of the main body 3051 when viewed from the front, and penetrates the main body 3051 in the front-rear direction. This first mounting hole 3052 is located with a diameter slightly smaller than the diameter of the hole of the functional hole 3013 in the rear box 3010.

The protruding pin 3053 protrudes backward in a cylindrical shape from a portion of the body 3051 that is rearward of the piece 3051a. The tip of the protruding pin 3053 is formed in a hemispherical shape. The distance between the axis of the protruding pin 3053 and the axis of the first mounting hole 3052 is the same as the distance between the axes of the two through holes in the rear box 3010. In addition, the diameter of the cylinder of the protruding pin 3053 is the same as the diameter of the hole of the functional hole portion 3013 in the rear box 3010, and the protruding pin 3053 can be inserted (or pressed) into the functional hole portion 3013.

The boss portion 3054 protrudes (extends) forward in a cylindrical shape from a portion of the main body portion 3051 that is toward the right of the center in the left-right direction (the portion closer to the protruding pin 3053). The front surface of the boss portion 3054 is shorter than the diameter of the boss portion 3054, and protrudes forward further than the front surface of the main body portion 3051. The diameter of the cylinder of the boss portion 3054 is the same as the distance from the upper edge to the lower edge of the main body portion 3051. Therefore, the boss portion 3054 is in contact with the upper edge and the lower edge of the main body portion 3051.

The second mounting hole 3055 penetrates from the center of the cylinder of the boss portion 3054 to the boss portion 3054 and the main body portion 3051 in the front-rear direction. The diameter of the second mounting hole 3055 is the same as the diameter of the first mounting hole 3052.

This mounting supporter 3050 is attached to the rear box 3010 by inserting the protruding pin 3053 from the front into one of the two through holes that make up the functional hole 3013 of the rear box 3010, and screwing a mounting screw into the first mounting hole 3052 through the through hole from the rear of the rear box 3010 and tightening it while positioning the first mounting hole 3052 coaxially with the remaining through hole. Note that the main body 3051 of the mounting supporter 3050 has a flat piece 3051a in the area in front of the protruding pin 3053, so that when inserting the protruding pin 3053 of the mounting supporter 3050 into the functional hole 3013, the worker can easily insert the protruding pin 3053 into the functional hole 3013 by pressing the piece 3051a with a finger or the like.

Then, the base of the performance unit is abutted against the tip of the boss portion 3054 of the mounting supporter 3050 attached to the rear box 3010, and a mounting screw is screwed into the second mounting hole 3055 through the base from the front, allowing the performance unit to be attached to the rear box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3050.

Specifically, the rear box 3010 is provided with multiple functional hole sections 3013 consisting of two through holes. The rear performance unit 3600 that is attached inside the rear box 3010 has a square frame-shaped unit base 3601, and mounting holes are provided at the upper and lower edges of the frame-shaped unit base 3601. An attachment supporter 3050 is attached from the front to the functional hole section 3013 at a position corresponding to the mounting hole of the unit base 3601, among the multiple functional hole sections 3013 provided in the rear box 3010.

Once the mounting supporter 3050 is attached to the rear box 3010, the rear performance unit 3600 is inserted into the rear box 3010, and the mounting hole of the unit base 3601 is aligned with the second mounting hole 3055 of the mounting supporter 3050. In this embodiment, a recess is formed at the mounting hole in the unit base 3601 where the mounting supporter 3050 is attached, into which the tip of the boss portion 3054 of the mounting supporter 3050 can be inserted, and by inserting the tip of the boss portion 3054 into the recess, the mounting hole of the unit base 3601 can be easily aligned with the second mounting hole 3055 of the mounting supporter 3050.

After aligning the mounting hole of the unit base 3601 of the rear performance unit 3600 with the second mounting hole 3055 of the mounting supporter 3050, screw the mounting screw into the second mounting hole 3055 from the front of the unit base 3601 and tighten it. This allows the rear performance unit 3600 to be mounted inside the rear box 3010.

In the above, an example is shown in which the mounting supporter 3050 is attached to the rear box 3010 and then the rear performance unit 3600 is attached to the mounting supporter 3050, but this is not limited to this example. The mounting supporter 3050 may be attached to the unit base 3601 of the rear performance unit 3600 and then the mounting supporter 3050 may be attached to the rear box 3010.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the mounting supporter 3050 is attached to the functional hole portion 3013 that is provided in advance in the rear box 3010, but this is not limited to the above. When assembling the game board 5, two through holes for mounting the mounting supporter 3050 may be drilled at predetermined positions in the rear box 3010, and the mounting supporter 3050 may be attached to the through holes.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the boss portion 3054 of the mounting supporter 3050 protrudes from the front surface of the main body portion 3051 by a distance shorter than the diameter of the boss portion 3054, but this is not limited thereto, and the boss portion 3054 may protrude (extend) forward a long distance, as in the mounting supporter 3050 shown in FIG. 176. In this way, by preparing mounting supports 3050 having boss portions 3054 of various lengths in advance, it is possible to respond to various design changes and model changes, and a performance unit, etc. provided near the front end of the rear box 3010 can also be attached to the rear box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3050.

As shown in FIG. 176(b), the mounting supporter 3050 may be enlarged by enlarging the main body 3051 to increase the contact area with the rear box 3010 (functional hole 3013). Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 176(c), another first mounting hole 3052 may be added instead of the protruding pin 3053, and the two first mounting holes 3052 may be used to mount the mounting supporter 3050 to the rear box 3010 (functional hole 3013). By doing so, even if the force acting on the mounting portion of the mounting supporter 3050 to the rear box 3010 (functional hole 3013) increases by mounting a heavy performance unit or protruding the boss 3054 longer, the performance unit can be mounted in good condition. In other words, it is possible to accommodate heavy performance units, or performance units that require a long boss 3054 by being located away from the functional hole 3013.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the mounting supporter 3050 is attached to the rear box 3010, but this is not limited to this, and it may be attached to the game panel 1100, the front unit 2000, etc.

In this way, according to the mounting supporter 3050 of this embodiment, even if the rear box 3010 does not have a mounting boss for mounting a performance unit such as the rear rear performance unit 3600, it is possible to provide a mounting boss for mounting a performance unit, etc. at a desired position on the rear box 3010 by simply attaching the mounting supporter 3050. In other words, by providing multiple functional hole portions 3013 consisting of two through holes in the rear box 3010 in advance, and attaching the mounting supporter 3050 to the functional hole portions 3013 at locations corresponding to the mounting holes of a performance unit such as the rear rear performance unit 3600, a mounting boss for mounting the performance unit can be provided on the rear box 3010. Therefore, even if the location where the presentation unit, etc. is attached to the rear box 3010 changes due to a design change or model change, the presentation unit, etc. can be attached by simply changing the location where the attachment supporter 3050 is attached without having to remake the rear box 3010, so design changes and model changes can be easily accommodated and the rear box 3010 can be reused, preventing increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the mounting supporter 3050 in this embodiment is colored a different color from the rear box 3010, it becomes noticeable when attached to the rear box 3010. This allows the worker to easily recognize the position of the mounting supporter 3050 inside the rear box 3010 when assembling the game board 5. Since the position of the mounting supporter 3050 (mounting boss) is easy to understand, it is possible to easily perform the installation work of a performance unit such as the rear rear performance unit 3600. In this embodiment, since the rear box 3010 is transparent, the mounting supporter 3050 can be seen from the outside of the rear box 3010 (see Figures 178 and 179 (a)).

In addition, because a performance unit such as the rear performance unit 3600 is attached inside the rear box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3050, a certain amount of gap can be formed between the performance unit and the rear box 3010, which makes it easier for heat to escape.In addition, because a performance unit is attached to the rear box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3050, the attachment supporter 3050 makes it possible to reduce the transmission of vibration between the performance unit and the rear box 3010.

Furthermore, since a performance unit such as the rear performance unit 3600 is attached to the rear box 3010 via an attachment supporter 3050 having a boss portion 3054, there is no need to provide a rearward-protruding attachment boss on the unit base of the performance unit, etc. for attachment to the rear box 3010, making it possible to make the thickness of the unit base in the front-to-rear direction relatively thin, and the depth of the engraving in the mold for molding the unit base can be made shallow, thereby reducing the cost of the unit base.

However, when the mounting supporter 3050 of this embodiment is formed by injection molding or the like, it becomes easy for the base of the protruding pin 3053 to have a radius, which makes the base of the protruding pin 3053 thicker. If an attempt is made to insert the protruding pin 3053 with a radius at its base into the functional hole 3013 of the rear box 3010, the thickened part at the base cannot enter the functional hole 3013, and the insertion of the protruding pin 3053 stops midway, and the mounting supporter 3050 may be attached to the rear box 3010 with the protruding pin 3053 not fully inserted. If the protruding pin 3053 is not fully inserted, the positioning effect of the rear performance unit 3600 attached by the mounting supporter 3050 may not be fully exerted, and the above-mentioned action and effect may not be obtained.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a groove is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the protruding pin 3053 in the main body 3051 of the mounting supporter 3050, so that the base of the protruding pin 3053 becomes the bottom of the groove forward of the rear surface of the main body 3051, and even if the base of the protruding pin 3053 has an R, the part of the protruding pin 3053 rearward of the rear surface of the main body 3051 does not become thicker, so the thickness (diameter) of the effective range of the protruding pin 3053 can be made uniform, and the protruding pin 3053 can be fully inserted into the functional hole 3013 until the front surface of the rear box 3010 abuts against the rear surface of the main body 3051. Even if a burr occurs on the front edge of the functional hole 3013 of the rear box 3010, the burr is accommodated in the groove, so that it is possible to prevent the burr from being pinched between the rear box 3010 and the main body 3051, and the protruding pin 3053 can be fully inserted into the functional hole 3013. This allows the protruding pin 3053 to reliably achieve the positioning effect when the rear performance unit 3600 is attached, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-mentioned effects.

Even if the protruding pin 3053 has an R at its base, the thickened portion due to the R can be moved forward from the rear surface of the main body 3051 due to the presence of the groove, so that the thickened portion at the base of the protruding pin 3053 will not cause a gap between the rear box 3010 and the main body 3051 due to incomplete insertion into the functional hole 3013. Also, since the burrs on the front edge of the functional hole 3013 can be accommodated in the groove, the burrs will not cause a gap between the rear box 3010 and the main body 3051 at the first mounting hole 3052 of the main body 3051. Therefore, the mounting supporter 3050 will not be attached to the rear box 3010 when a gap is generated between the rear box 3010 and the main body 3051, and the performance units such as the rear rear performance unit 3600 attached to the rear box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3050 will not rattle.

Furthermore, a groove is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the protruding pin 3053 on the rear surface of the main body 3051, so that during injection molding of the mounting supporter 3050, the difference in plate thickness caused by the presence of the protruding pin 3053 in the main body 3051 can be prevented from causing sink marks in the front side of the main body 3051 when the molten resin hardens.

Next, the mounting supporter 3060 will be described. As shown in FIG. 177 etc., the mounting supporter 3060 has a main body 3061 of a predetermined length, a first mounting hole 3062 penetrating the main body 3061 from front to rear near both ends of the main body 3061 in the longitudinal direction, two protruding pins 3063 spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the main body 3061 and protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape from the rear surface of the main body 3061, and a second mounting hole 3064 penetrating the main body 3061 from front to rear near both ends of the main body 3061 in the longitudinal direction. This mounting supporter 3060 is colored a different color (black in this case) from the rear box 3010.

The main body 3061 of the mounting supporter 3060 has two block-shaped heads 3061a provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction, a strip-shaped back connecting piece 3061b connecting the rear ends of the two heads 3061a, a strip-shaped side connecting piece 3061c extending forward along one long side of the back connecting piece 3061b and connecting the two heads 3061a, and a plurality of (four in this case) triangular rib pieces 3061d provided at intervals in the longitudinal direction and connecting the back connecting piece 3061b and the side connecting piece 3061c. The side connecting piece 3061c is provided along the left side of the back connecting piece 3061b when viewed from the front. The main body 3061 is formed with a back connecting piece 3061b and a side connecting piece 3061c, so that the cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal direction is L-shaped, and it has multiple triangular rib pieces 3061d, which increases its strength and rigidity and makes it less likely to bend.

The two first mounting holes 3062 are provided near the end of the head portion 3061a on the back connecting piece 3061b side, which is provided at both ends of the main body portion 3061 in the longitudinal direction, and are provided at a position closer to the side connecting piece 3061c (to the right) from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The two first mounting holes 3062 are provided on the same straight line parallel to the longitudinal axis of the main body portion 3061. The first mounting hole 3062 is provided with a diameter slightly smaller than the diameter of the hole of the functional hole portion 3013 in the back box 3010. The distance between the two first mounting holes 3062 is the same as the distance between the through holes on the closer sides of the two outer functional hole portions 3013 in the back box 3010, for the four functional hole portions 3013 that are arranged in a row at equal intervals in the direction in which the two through holes are separated across the main body portion 3061.

The two protruding pins 3063 protrude backward in a cylindrical shape from the rear surface of the back connecting piece 3061b in the main body 3061. The protruding pins 3063 have a truncated cone-shaped tip. The diameter of the cylinder of the protruding pin 3063 is the same as the diameter of the hole of the functional hole 3013 in the rear box 3010, and the protruding pins 3063 can be inserted (or pressed) into the functional hole 3013. The two protruding pins 3063 are provided on the same straight line connecting the two first mounting holes 3062. The distance between the two protruding pins 3063 is the same as the distance between the through holes on the far side of the two functional hole parts 3013 closest to the center among the four functional hole parts 3013 straddled by the main body 3061 in the rear box 3010.

The two second mounting holes 3064 are provided at both ends of the body 3061 in the longitudinal direction, at positions outside the first mounting hole 3062, and are provided in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The second mounting holes 3064 penetrate the head portion 3061a of the body 3061 in the front-rear direction. The diameter of the second mounting holes 3064 is the same as the diameter of the first mounting hole 3062.

This mounting supporter 3060 is attached to a functional hole 3013 at a location where four or more functional holes 3013 are arranged in a row at equal intervals in the direction in which the two through holes are spaced apart from each other, out of the multiple functional holes 3013 provided in the rear box 3010.

The mounting supporter 3060 inserts two protruding pins 3063 from the front into two through holes on the far side of the two functional holes 3013 closest to the center of the four functional holes 3013 arranged in a row in the rear box 3010. At this time, the main body 3061 of the mounting supporter 3060 has a flat back connecting piece 3061b in the area in front of the protruding pins 3063, so that when inserting the protruding pins 3063 of the mounting supporter 3060 into the functional holes 3013, the worker can easily insert the protruding pins 3063 into the functional holes 3013 by pressing the back connecting piece 3061b with a finger or the like.

When the two protruding pins 3063 of this mounting supporter 3060 are inserted into the through holes of the two functional holes 3013, the two first mounting holes 3062 are aligned with the through holes of the functional holes 3013 at both ends of the four functional holes 3013. Therefore, the mounting supporter 3060 can be attached to the rear box 3010 by screwing and tightening a mounting screw from the rear of the rear box 3010 into the first mounting hole 3062 that is aligned with the through hole.

Then, the base of the performance unit is abutted against the front end of the head portion 3061a of the main body portion 3061 of the mounting supporter 3060 attached to the rear box 3010, and a mounting screw is screwed from the front through the base into the second mounting hole 3064, allowing the performance unit to be attached to the rear box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3060.

Specifically, the rear box 3010 is provided with multiple functional hole sections 3013 consisting of two through holes, and near both left and right ends, the two through holes are vertically spaced apart, and multiple (here, four or more) functional hole sections 3013 are provided at equal intervals in the direction in which the two through holes are spaced apart (vertical direction). The rear right performance unit 3400 also has a unit base 3401 made of a metal plate. This unit base 3401 has a flange section 3401a that is bent forward from the left side and then bent to the right at the front end, and a mounting hole is provided that penetrates the flange section 3401a from front to back. Then, the mounting supporter 3060 is attached from the front to the four functional hole sections 3013 that are lined up vertically along the right side of the rear box 3010 when viewed from the front.

After the mounting supporter 3060 is attached to the rear box 3010, the flange portion 3401a of the unit base 3401 of the rear right performance unit 3400 is abutted against the front surface of the mounting supporter 3060 (main body portion 3061) from the front. Then, with the mounting hole of the flange portion 3401a aligned with the second mounting hole 3064 of the mounting supporter 3060, a mounting screw is screwed through the mounting hole from the front into the second mounting hole 3064 and tightened. This allows the flange portion 3401a of the unit base 3401 of the rear right performance unit 3400 to be attached to the rear box 3010.

In the above, an example was shown in which the mounting supporter 3060 is attached to the rear box 3010 and then the flange portion 3401a of the unit base 3401 in the rear right performance unit 3400 is attached to the mounting supporter 3060, but this is not limited to this, and the mounting supporter 3060 may be attached to the flange portion 3401a of the unit base 3401 in the rear right performance unit 3400 and then the mounting supporter 3060 may be attached to the rear box 3010.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the mounting supporter 3060 was attached to the functional hole portion 3013 that was already provided in the rear box 3010, but this is not limited to this. When assembling the game board 5, a through hole for mounting the mounting supporter 3060 may be drilled at a predetermined position in the rear box 3010, and the mounting supporter 3060 may be attached to the through hole.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the mounting supporter 3060 has a main body 3061 that extends in a straight line, but this is not limited to this, and the main body 3061 may extend in an L-shape, a frame shape, an arc shape, a curved shape, etc.

In this embodiment, the mounting supporter 3060 is attached to the rear box 3010 using multiple functional hole portions 3013, each of which consists of two through holes, and each functional hole portion 3013 used uses only one of the two through holes. In other words, in a functional hole portion 3013 consisting of two through holes, one through hole is not used. For this reason, in the above embodiment, the functional hole portion 3013 is shown as consisting of two through holes, but this is not limited to this, and the functional hole portion 3013 may consist of one through hole.

In this way, according to the mounting supporter 3060 of this embodiment, even if the rear box 3010 does not have a mounting boss for mounting a performance unit such as the rear right performance unit 3400, it is possible to provide a mounting boss for mounting a performance unit, etc., at a desired position on the rear box 3010 by simply attaching the mounting supporter 3060. In other words, by providing multiple functional hole portions 3013 consisting of two through holes in the rear box 3010 in advance, and attaching the mounting supporter 3060 to the multiple functional hole portions 3013 at positions corresponding to the mounting holes of a performance unit such as the rear right performance unit 3400, it is possible to provide the rear box 3010 with a mounting boss for mounting the performance unit. Therefore, even if the location where the presentation unit, etc. is attached to the rear box 3010 changes due to a design change or model change, the presentation unit, etc. can be attached by simply changing the location where the attachment supporter 3060 is attached without having to remake the rear box 3010, so design changes and model changes can be easily accommodated and the rear box 3010 can be reused, suppressing increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the mounting supporter 3060 in this embodiment is colored a different color from the rear box 3010, it becomes noticeable when attached to the rear box 3010. This allows the worker to easily recognize the position of the mounting supporter 3060 inside the rear box 3010 when assembling the game board 5. Since the position of the mounting supporter 3060 (mounting boss) is easy to understand, it is possible to easily perform the installation work of performance units such as the rear right performance unit 3400. In this embodiment, since the rear box 3010 is transparent, the mounting supporter 3060 can be seen from the outside of the rear box 3010 (see Figures 178 and 179 (b)).

In addition, because a performance unit such as the rear right performance unit 3400 is attached inside the rear box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3060, a certain amount of gap can be formed between the performance unit and the rear box 3010, which makes it easier for heat to escape.In addition, because a performance unit is attached to the rear box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3060, the attachment supporter 3060 makes it possible to reduce the transmission of vibration between the performance unit and the rear box 3010.

Furthermore, since the mounting supporter 3060 is attached to the rear box 3010 so as to span multiple functional holes 3013, the mounting supporter 3060 can reinforce the rear box 3010 (or the unit base 3401 of the rear right performance unit 3400).

The mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 may be provided with a ring-shaped protruding band holding portion or a rod-shaped or strip-shaped wiring locking portion for holding the wiring EC. In this case, as described above, the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 form a certain amount of gap between the performance unit and the back box 3010, and by placing the wiring EC in this gap, it becomes possible to handle the wiring EC smoothly.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 are shown with the first mounting hole 3052 and the second mounting hole 3055, and the first mounting hole 3062 and the second mounting hole 3064 provided at different positions from each other, but this is not limited to this, and the first mounting hole 3052 and the second mounting hole 3055, and the first mounting hole 3062 and the second mounting hole 3064 may be provided on the same axis. This allows the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 to be made smaller and simpler.

In addition, in the above embodiment of the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060, the axis of the first mounting hole 3052 and the axis of the second mounting hole 3055, and the axis of the first mounting hole 3062 and the axis of the second mounting hole 3064 are shown to extend in the same direction (parallel), but this is not limited to this, and the axis of the second mounting hole may face in a different direction relative to the axis of the first mounting hole. This makes it possible to attach the performance unit to the mounting supporter from a wider variety of directions.

[5-10c. Back front upper performance unit]
Next, the back front upper performance unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 180 and 181. Figure 180 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit of the game board disassembled into each unit and viewed from the front, and Figure 181 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit of the game board disassembled into each unit and viewed from the back. The back front upper performance unit 3200 is provided along the upper edge near the front end of the back box 3010. The back front upper performance unit 3200 has three transparent decorative plates, the back front upper first decorative plate 3201, the back front upper second decorative plate 3202, and the back front upper third decorative plate 3203, which are arranged at intervals in the front-to-rear direction (see Figure 144). The three decorative plates are provided in front of the back rear upper decorative body 3650 in the retreat position in the back rear performance unit 3600 described later, and the back rear upper decorative body 3650 can be seen from the front through each decorative plate.

The three decorative plates, the first upper back front decorative plate 3201, the second upper back front decorative plate 3202, and the third upper back front decorative plate 3203, are flat plates that are long from side to side and are provided with their plate surfaces facing the front-to-back direction. The rear surface of each decorative plate is engraved with the same logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The same logo is also provided on the upper back front decorative body of the upper back rear performance unit 3600, and the third upper back front decorative plate 3203 is provided with a logo of the same size as the logo on the upper back front decorative body 3650. The second upper back front decorative plate 3202 is provided with a logo that is larger than the logo on the third upper back front decorative plate 3203. Furthermore, the first upper back front decorative plate 3201 is provided with a logo that is larger than the logo on the second upper back front decorative plate 3202. This allows the player to see a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of perspective, with the letters of the logo getting larger from the back to the front (see Figure 197).

The rear front upper performance unit 3200 further includes a unit base 3204 that supports the rear front upper first decorative plate 3201, the rear front upper second decorative plate 3202, and the rear front upper third decorative plate 3203 and is attached to the rear box 3010, and a rear front upper decorative board 3205 that is provided on the unit base 3204 and has multiple LEDs mounted thereon that can irradiate light toward the upper end surfaces of each of the rear front upper first decorative plate 3201, the rear front upper second decorative plate 3202, and the rear front upper third decorative plate 3203.

The back-front-upper performance unit 3200 appropriately illuminates multiple LEDs mounted on the back-front-upper decorative board 3205, so that the light entering the interior from the upper end surfaces of the back-front-upper first decorative plate 3201, the back-front-upper second decorative plate 3202, and the back-front-upper third decorative plate 3203 is diffusely reflected at the areas of the engraved logo on each of them, causing the logo to glow.

Although not shown in the figure, the engraved areas forming specific characters in the logos applied to the first back-front upper decorative plate 3201, the second back-front upper decorative plate 3202, and the third back-front upper decorative plate 3203 are colored from behind using an inkjet printer, and the light from the LED on the back-front upper decorative substrate 3205 gives them a glossy shine.

[5-10d. Back front left production unit]
Next, the back front left performance unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 180 to 184. Figure 182 (a) is a front view of the back front left performance unit in the back unit, (b) is a perspective view of the back front left performance unit seen from the front, (c) is a perspective view of the back front left performance unit seen from the back, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the back front left performance unit cut by the sa-sa line in (a). Figure 183 is an exploded perspective view of the back front left performance unit in the back unit seen from the front, and Figure 184 is an exploded perspective view of the back front left performance unit in the back unit seen from the back. The back front left performance unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is provided along the left side near the front end in the back box 3010.

The rear front left performance unit 3300 comprises a rear front left decorative body 3301, which is a three-dimensionally formed sheet-like material with a predetermined character pattern in accordance with the concept of the game board 5, a transparent decorative body cover 3302 provided in front of the rear front left decorative body 3301 and formed to fit the surface of the rear front left decorative body 3301, a transparent inner lens 3303 provided behind the rear front left decorative body 3301 and formed to fit the surface of the rear front left decorative body 3301, a unit base 3304 that supports the rear front left decorative body 3301, decorative body cover 3302, and inner lens 3303 and is attached to the rear box 3010, and the unit base 3304. The unit has a front left main decorative board 3305 that is mounted between the inner lens 3303 and has multiple LEDs that can irradiate light forward, a front left sub decorative board 3306 that is mounted to the left of the decorative body cover 3302 and has multiple LEDs that can irradiate light onto the left side of the decorative body cover 3302, a board base 3307 that attaches the front left sub decorative board 3306 to the unit base 3304, a front left back decorative sheet 3308 that is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3304 and has a specified character on the rear surface, and a magnetic sensor 1030 that is attached to the unit base 3304. The magnetic sensor 1030 of the front left performance unit 3300 is for detecting unauthorized magnetism acting near the entrances to the lower warp passage 2512 and the upper warp passage 2513 in the center role 2500.

The back front left decorative body 3301 is translucent. The back front left decorative body 3301 is made of a sheet of thermoplastic resin such as polyethylene terephthalate resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, AES resin, PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin, polypropylene resin, polyethylene resin, polystyrene resin, high impact polystyrene resin, or polyvinyl chloride, on which a colored pattern of predetermined characters is printed by silk printing, offset printing, inkjet printing, or the like, and then three-dimensionally formed by compressed air molding or vacuum molding.

The decorative body cover 3302 has a groove 3302a on the back surface that is carved in a line along the outline of the character on the back front left decorative body 3301. When light from the multiple LEDs on the back front left sub decorative board 3306 is irradiated onto the left side of the decorative body cover 3302 and enters the interior, the light guided inside can be diffused forward at the groove 3302a, causing the groove 3302a to emit light. This allows the player to see a light-emitting effect in which the outline of a specific character on the back front left decorative body 3301 emits light. This decorative body cover 3302 is thicker than the material (sheet) of the back front left decorative body 3301, and is formed by injection molding a transparent synthetic resin.

The inner lens 3303 is formed to have a predetermined thickness and conform to the three-dimensional shape of the back front left decorative body 3301. Therefore, the light from the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front left main decorative board 3305 provided at the rear can be refracted in an appropriate direction according to its shape, so that the rear surface of the back front left decorative body 3301 can be irradiated with light having a shade (shade) corresponding to the character. As a result, when the back front left decorative body 3301 is illuminated and decorated by the multiple LEDs of the back front left main decorative board 3305 at the rear, the inner lens 3303 irradiates light with a shade, so that the three-dimensional effect of the pattern (character) of the back front left decorative body 3301 can be further enhanced. In addition, the gap in the appearance of the back front left decorative body 3301 depending on whether or not the LEDs of the back front left main decorative board 3305 are illuminated can be increased, and the performance effect of the light-emitting performance can be further enhanced, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. The inner lens 3303 is made by injection molding a transparent synthetic resin, just like the decorative body cover 3302.

The unit base 3304 has a flat rear surface and an opening 3304a that penetrates from front to back. This opening 3304a allows the operator to press the front-left decorative sheet 3308 backwards through the opening 3304a from the front with a finger or the like when peeling off the front-left decorative sheet 3308 attached to the rear surface, making it easy to peel off the front-left decorative sheet 3308 without using tools. In addition, when the front-left decorative sheet 3308 is not attached due to differences in model, the opening 3304a allows heat from the front-left main decorative board 3305 to escape backwards. This unit base 3304 is made of a transparent synthetic resin.

The back-front-left main decorative board 3305 is composed of two boards, a first board 3305a and a second board 3305b. Multiple full-color LEDs are mounted on the front of each of the first board 3305a and the second board 3305b. When the multiple LEDs mounted on the back-front-left main decorative board 3305 are illuminated, the back-front-left decorative body 3301 can be illuminated and decorated through the inner lens 3303.

The back-front-left sub-decorative board 3306 is composed of three boards: an upper board 3306a, a middle board 3306b, and a lower board 3306c. Each of the upper board 3306a, the middle board 3306b, and the lower board 3306c is equipped with multiple full-color LEDs capable of emitting light to the right. When the multiple LEDs on the back-front-left sub-decorative board 3306 are illuminated, the groove 3302a on the decorative body cover 3302 can be illuminated, and the outline of the character on the back-front-left decorative body 3301 that corresponds to the groove 3302a can be illuminated and decorated.

The back side of the back front left decorative sheet 3308 has a pattern printed on it that is different from the pattern on the back front left decorative body 3301. In other words, the pattern on the back front left decorative sheet 3308 faces backwards and is not visible within the projection range of the back front left performance unit 3300 when viewed from the front.

In this embodiment, when assembled to the game board 5, the rear surface of the rear front left decorative sheet 3300 (rear front left decorative sheet 3308) is located at a predetermined distance forward near the left end of the display screen of the performance display device 1600 (see Figures 145 and 197, etc.). Therefore, when viewed from the front, the pattern on the rear surface of the rear front left decorative sheet 3308 is reflected and seen on the display screen of the performance display device 1600 (the reflected pattern 3310 is visible), but when a predetermined performance image is displayed on the display screen of the performance display device 1600 and the display screen is bright, the reflection of the pattern is canceled by the brightness, and the reflected pattern 3310 is hardly visible. And, when the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is made dark to a certain extent, such as blackout, the pattern on the rear surface of the rear front left decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen of the performance display device 1600, and the reflected pattern 3310 becomes visible (see Figure 197). As a result, while a performance is being performed using a performance image by the performance display device 1600, the display screen can be darkened or intentionally darkened to show the player a performance in which the pattern on the back of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen and the reflected pattern 3310 is visible. This can surprise the player with the faintly visible reflected pattern 3310, strongly attracting the player's attention and making the player think that something good is going to happen, thereby increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the pattern on the back of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is different from the pattern on the back front left decorative body 3301, the following performance effects can be achieved. In more detail, in the normal state in which the performance image is displayed on the display screen of the performance display device 1600, only the character (pattern) with a predetermined expression on the back front left decorative body 3301 is visible, and the reflected pattern 3310 in which the character (pattern) with a different expression on the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen to the right of the back front left decorative body 3301 is not visible. And, when the display screen is darkened by blacking out or the like, the character on the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 with a different expression from the expression on the back front left decorative body 3301 is reflected on the right of the back front left decorative body 3301, and the reflected pattern 3310 is visible, so that a performance in which the back face of the character can be seen can be presented to the player, and the player can enjoy the gap in the character's expression. For example, if this effect is performed before a big win is played, the effect can make the player feel strongly that he or she may have lost, and then the big win can surprise the player and further increase the player's interest.

Furthermore, since the rear front left performance unit 3300 is provided behind the game panel 1100, it is possible to prevent light from entering the display screen (front) of the performance display device 1600 between the rear front left performance unit 3300 and the performance display device 1600. Therefore, when the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is darkened, the front of the performance display device 1600 can be made sufficiently dark, making it easier for the image on the rear front left back decorative sheet 3308 of the rear front left performance unit 3300 to be reflected, and making the reflected image (reflective image 3310) of the rear front left back decorative sheet 3308 easier to see from the player's side, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Also, as described above, when the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is darkened, the reflected pattern 3310 of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 of the back front left performance unit 3300 reflected on the display screen is faintly visible, so for example, by shortening the time for which the display screen is darkened, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen. In other words, depending on the player, it is possible to make the player notice the reflected pattern 3310 of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen. This makes the player grin or gasp when he or she notices that the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen, making the player feel like he or she has made a profit and entertaining the player.

Furthermore, as described above, when the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is darkened, the image on the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 provided on the rear surface of the back front left performance unit 3300 is reflected on the display screen, making the reflected image 3310 (decoration) of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, depending on the relative positions of the performance display device 1600 and the back front left performance unit 3300 (back front left back decorative sheet 3308), it is possible to make the reflected back front left back decorative sheet 3308 less visible to players seated in front of this pachinko machine 1, and to make the reflected image on the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 more visible to players seated in front of the adjacent pachinko machine or players in the vicinity of this pachinko machine 1. This makes it possible to appeal to other players about the pachinko machine 1, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players, and also making it easier for players to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play, making playing with the pachinko machine 1 enjoyable and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the back-front-left performance unit 3300 is located away from the center to the left of the performance display device 1600, it is possible to make it so that the image of the back-front-left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen is only visible to the right eye of the player sitting in front. As a result, when the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is darkened, the image of the back-front-left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen can only be seen by the right eye, making the reflected image of the back-front-left back decorative sheet 3308 appear uncertain, and it is possible to present the player with a performance that makes him/her feel as if he/she is seeing an illusion, while amplifying the sense of eerieness caused by the performance, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the rear front left performance unit 3300 is provided near the front end of the rear box 3000 and the performance display device 1600 is provided behind the rear box 3000, the front-to-rear distance between the rear surface of the rear front left performance unit 3300 (the rear front left back decorative sheet 3308) and the display screen of the performance display device 1600 can be made as long as possible, making it easier to see the image on the rear front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, players seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can be fully entertained by the performance that produces the above-mentioned effects, and a decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the image of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 of the back front left performance unit 3300 is reflected on the display screen of the performance display device 1600 to be shown to the player in front, but this is not limited to this. For example, a reflector made of a transparent sheet, transparent plate, magic mirror, etc. may be provided on the front of the performance display device 1600. As a result, when the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is darkened as described above, the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 provided on the rear surface of the back front left performance unit 3300 can be easily reflected on the reflector, making it easier to achieve the above-mentioned effect. In this case, the reflector may be tilted or curved to make the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the reflector easier to see from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

In the above embodiment, the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 on the rear of the back front left performance unit 3300 is reflected directly on the display screen of the performance display device 1600, but this is not limited to this, and a light emitting means 3320 such as an LED that can irradiate light from behind the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 provided on the rear of the back front left performance unit 3300 may be provided (see FIG. 197 (b)). In this way, when the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is darkened, the light emitting means 3320 is made to emit light to brighten the back front left back decorative sheet 3308, so that the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 can be reflected more brightly on the display screen, making the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen easier to see, and a pachinko machine 1 that can more effectively achieve the above-mentioned effects can be provided.

When using the liquid crystal display device 1600 as the effect display means as in this embodiment, a glossy liquid crystal is more preferable than a non-glare liquid crystal. By using a glossy liquid crystal, the reflected image 3310 can be made more visible, and a pachinko machine 1 that is more likely to achieve the above-mentioned effects can be provided.

[5-10e. Back right production unit]
Next, the back right performance unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 180 and 181. The back right performance unit 3400 is attached to the front of the back rear performance unit 3600, and a part of it is attached to the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3060. The back right performance unit 3400 has a unit base 3401 made of a long metal plate in the vertical direction, three back upper right decorative bodies 3402, back right middle decorative body 3403, and back right lower decorative body 3404 that are attached to the unit base 3401 and resemble lanterns, and a back right drive motor 3405 that is attached near the upper end of the unit base 3401 and moves the back upper right decorative body 3402, back right middle decorative body 3403, and back right lower decorative body 3404.

The unit base 3401 has a flange portion 3401a that extends forward from the vertical center of the right side and then has its tip bent to the right. The upper and lower ends of the unit base 3401 are each attached to the front of the rear performance unit 3600, and the flange portion 3401a is attached to the rear box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3060.

The back right upper right decorative body 3402, the back right middle decorative body 3403, and the back right lower decorative body 3404 are arranged in a vertical row, and are formed three-dimensionally to resemble lanterns, each of which is the same size. The back right middle decorative body 3403 is composed of two decorative bodies, the back right middle left decorative body 3403a and the back right middle right decorative body 3403b, with the center in the left-right direction as the boundary. Behind each of the back right upper right decorative body 3402, the back right middle left decorative body 3403a and the back right middle right decorative body 3403b of the back right middle decorative body 3403, and the back right lower decorative body 3404, there is a decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the rear right performance unit 3400 has an upper right arm whose lower end is supported rotatably around a front-to-rear axis near the center of the unit base 3401 in the vertical direction and extends upward, an upper connecting base supported rotatably around a front-to-rear axis at the upper end of the upper right arm, an upper left arm whose upper end is supported rotatably around a front-to-rear axis at a position to the left of the upper end of the upper right arm on the upper connecting base and extends downward, a lower right arm whose upper end is supported rotatably around a front-to-rear axis below the upper right arm and extends downward, a lower connecting base supported rotatably around a front-to-rear axis at the lower end of the lower right arm, a lower left arm whose lower end is supported rotatably around a front-to-rear axis at a position to the left of the lower end of the lower right arm on the lower connecting base and extends upward, and a middle connecting base that supports the lower ends of the upper left arm and the lower left arm rotatably around a front-to-rear axis while being spaced apart vertically from each other.

The upper right arm has an upper right lower gear provided at its lower end, and an upper right upper gear provided at its upper end. The upper left arm has an upper left upper gear provided at its upper end and meshing with the upper right upper gear of the upper right arm, and an upper left lower gear provided at its lower end. The lower right arm has a lower right upper gear provided at its upper end and meshing with the upper right lower gear of the upper right arm, and a lower right lower gear provided at its lower end. The lower left arm has a lower left lower gear provided at its lower end and meshing with the lower right lower gear of the lower right arm, and a lower left upper gear provided at its upper end and meshing with the upper left lower gear of the upper left arm. In this way, a pantograph-like link is formed by the unit base 3401, the upper right arm, the upper left arm, the lower right arm, the lower left arm, the upper connecting base, the lower connecting base, and the middle connecting base.

The back right upper decorative body 3402 is attached to the front of the upper connecting base, and the back right lower decorative body 3404 is attached to the front of the lower connecting base. The back right middle left decorative body 3403a of the back right middle decorative body 3403 is attached to the front of the middle connecting base, and the back right middle right decorative body 3403b is attached to the front of the unit base 3401 so as to cover the upper right lower gear and the lower right upper gear from the front.

In the normal state, this back-right performance unit 3400 has the back-right center-left decorative body 3403a and the back-right center-right decorative body 3403b in contact with each other in front of the unit base 3401, and the back-right upper right decorative body 3402, the back-right center decorative body 3403, and the back-right lower decorative body 3404 lined up in a straight line in the vertical direction.

When the upper end of the lower right arm of the back-right performance unit 3400 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front by the back-right drive motor 3405 from the normal state, the middle connecting base moves to the left, and the upper connecting base and the lower connecting base move up and down so as to approach each other while moving to the left. As a result, the back-right middle left decorative body 3403a of the back-right middle decorative body 3403 moves to the left, away from the back-right middle right decorative body 3403b, the back-right upper right decorative body 3402 moves to the left shorter than the back-right middle left decorative body 3403a and moves slightly downward, and the back-right lower decorative body 3404 moves to the left in the same way as the back-right upper right decorative body 3402 and moves slightly upward.

In this state, the upper right arm, upper left arm, lower right arm, and lower left arm each form a diamond shape with each arm as a side, with the back right upper decorative body 3402 and the back right lower decorative body 3404 located at the top and bottom vertices of the diamond, and the back right middle left decorative body 3403a and the back right middle right decorative body 3403b located at the left and right vertices of the diamond. As a result, the back right upper decorative body 3402, the back right middle left decorative body 3403a, and the back right lower decorative body 3404 appear in a position approaching the center of the play area 5a (performance display device 1600) (see Figure 198).

According to this back right performance unit 3400, when the back upper right decorative body 3402, the back right middle decorative body 3403, and the back right lower decorative body 3404 are moved from their normal storage positions to their appearance positions, these decorative bodies move (appear) near the center. At this time, the back upper right decorative body 3402, the back middle right decorative body 3403, and the back lower right decorative body 3404, which were arranged vertically in a straight line, are split into two parts, the back middle right decorative body 3403a and the back middle right decorative body 3403b, and the back upper right decorative body 3402, the back middle right decorative body 3403a, the back middle right decorative body 3403b, and the back lower right decorative body 3404 are transformed into a form arranged at the vertices of a diamond, which can surprise the player and strongly attract the player's attention to the decorative bodies, as well as making the player think that something good is going to happen with the appearance of the decorative bodies, thereby increasing expectations for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

[5-10f. Back left production unit]
Next, the left rear performance unit 3500 of the rear performance unit 3600 in the rear unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 180 to 181. The left rear performance unit 3500 is attached near the upper part of the part constituting the left side of the frame-shaped unit base 3601 of the rear performance unit 3600. The left rear performance unit 3500 has a translucent left rear decorative body 3501 that imitates the tip of a hatchet, a left rear base 3502 that is attached to the frame-shaped unit base 3601 of the rear performance unit 3600 and supports the left rear decorative body 3501, and a left rear drive motor 3503 that is attached to the left rear base 3502 and moves the left rear decorative body 3501.

Although not shown in detail, the rear left performance unit 3500 has a pivot base whose base end is pivotally attached to the rear left base around an axis in the front-to-rear direction, a link arm whose base end is pivotally attached to the pivot base around an axis in the front-to-rear direction at a position different from the pivot base and whose tip end is slidably attached to the pivot base in its longitudinal direction, a slide base that is slidably attached to the pivot base so that it protrudes outward from the tip of the pivot base by the sliding of the tip of the link arm, and whose tip has the rear left decorative body pivotally attached to it around a second axis parallel to the rotation surface of the pivot base, an inclined arm whose base end is pivotally attached to the pivot base around an axis parallel to the second axis and whose tip end is pivotally attached to the rear left decorative body 3501 around an axis parallel to the second axis, and a return spring that biases the rear left decorative body 3501 in a direction approaching the pivot base.

The pivot base is bent in an L-shape, and the base end side is rotated by the rear left drive motor 3503. The pivot base has a bent slit that is bent in an L-shape to fit its shape. The tip side of the link arm is slidably inserted into the bent slit. The slide base has a straight slit that extends parallel to the straight part near the base end side of the bent slit. The tip side of the link arm is slidably inserted into the straight slit. The slide base is attached to the end (near the right end in front view) of the rear left decorative body 3501, which imitates the tip of a hatchet, on the opposite side to the tip of the blade, so that it can pivot around the second axis. The inclined arm is provided so that the tip side extends in a direction away from the tip of the slide base with the base end side in between, and extends to the base end side of the pivot arm. The return spring is a coil spring, the base end of which is attached closer to the base end of the pivot arm than the part where the inclined arm is pivotally attached, and the tip end of which is attached to the back left decorative body 3501 so that it extends toward the tip end of the pivot arm.

In its normal state, the rear left performance unit 3500 is positioned so that the rotating base extends upward, and the rear left decorative body 3501 attached to the tip of the rotating base has its cutting edge facing downward. In this normal state (retracted position), the rear left decorative body 3501 is located behind the rear left front decorative body 3301 of the rear front left performance unit 3300, and the rear upper decorative body 3650 in the retracted position of the rear rear performance unit 3600, and is not visible from the front. In addition, the front surface of the rear left decorative body 3501 is parallel to the display screen of the performance display device 1600.

In the normal state, when the rotating base is rotated clockwise around the base end by the rear left drive motor 3503, the rear left decorative body 3501 at the tip side rotates to move to the right and downward. In addition, the clockwise rotation of the rotating base causes the tip of the link arm to slide along the curved slit and the straight slit toward the tip side to the curved part of the curved slit. In this state (first appearance position state), almost the entire rear left decorative body 3501 is located to the right of the rear left front decorative body 3301 and below the rear upper decorative body 3650, making it visible to the player, but part of the imitation blade tip is located behind the rear left front decorative body 3301 and below the rear upper decorative body 3650, making the overall shape unclear (see Figure 199). In other words, it is difficult to recognize the rear left decorative body 3501 as the tip of a hatchet. Even in this first appearance position, the front of the rear left decorative body 3501 is parallel to the display screen of the performance display device 1600, and the entire body is located behind the rear upper decorative body 3650.

Then, when the rotating base is rotated further clockwise, the tip of the link arm enters the curved tip side of the bent slit, but because the straight slit of the slide base into which the tip of the link arm is inserted is not bent, the tip of the link arm presses the slide base through the straight slit in the direction in which the bent tip side of the bent slit extends. This causes the slide base to slide so that its tip protrudes outward relative to the rotating base.

When the slide base moves so as to protrude outward from the tip of the pivot base, the left rear decorative body 3501 is attached to the slide base so as to be rotatable around the second axis, so that the left rear decorative body 3501 moves outward (here, to the right) from the tip of the pivot base together with the slide base. At this time, since the left rear decorative body 3501 is connected to the pivot base by an inclined arm, when the left rear decorative body 3501 moves to the right together with the slide base, the right end side (second axis) of the left rear decorative body 3501 moves away from the base end side of the inclined arm, so that the tip side of the inclined arm and the left end side of the left rear decorative body 3501 move forward against the biasing force of the return spring, so that the left rear decorative body 3501 rotates around the second axis. This causes the left end of the rear left decorative body 3501 to protrude forward to approximately the same position as the front left decorative body 3301, which is further forward than the rear upper decorative body 3650, and the entire body is in a second appearance position that is visible to the player (see Figure 200).

In this second appearance position, the front of the rear left decorative element 3501 is at an angle to the display screen of the performance display device 1600, and the tip of the machete blade that the rear left decorative element 3501 represents appears to be protruding diagonally forward from the display screen of the performance display device 1600.

According to this rear left performance unit 3500, the rear left decorative body 3501, which is normally invisible, becomes visible in two stages, making the player nervous and excited depending on how far the rear left decorative body 3501 appears, and entertaining the player. Then, when it moves to the second appearance position, the rear left decorative body 3501, which had been moving (rotating) parallel to the display screen of the performance display device 1600, moves so that the tip (left end) of its blade protrudes forward, allowing the player to see a moving performance that has never been seen in a pachinko machine before, which can make a strong impact on the player and make them strongly think that something good is going to happen, increasing their expectations for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

[5-10g. Backstage Production Unit]
Next, the back-back performance unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 185 to 196. Figure 185 is a front view of the back-back performance unit in the back unit. Figure 186 (a) is a perspective view of the back-back performance unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-back performance unit seen from the back. Figure 187 is an exploded perspective view of the back-back performance unit, showing the unit base side, the back-back upper decorative body, and the back-back lower decorative body disassembled from the front, and Figure 188 is an exploded perspective view of the back-back performance unit, showing the unit base side, the back-back upper decorative body, and the back-back lower decorative body disassembled from the back. Figure 189 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the lock mechanism of the back-back upper decorative body in the back-back performance unit disassembled from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the lock mechanism of the back-back upper decorative body disassembled from the back. Figure 190 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an oblique view of the locking mechanism in the locked position on the back upper decorative body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an oblique view of the locking mechanism in the unlocked position on the back upper decorative body.

Figure 191 is an exploded perspective view of the rear lower decorative body of the rear rear performance unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 192 is an exploded perspective view of the rear lower decorative body of the rear rear performance unit when disassembled and viewed from the rear. Figure 193 is an explanatory diagram showing the wiring arrangement on the rear surface of the rear lower decorative body of the rear rear performance unit. Figure 194 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the first rotating decorative body in the rear lower decorative body when disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the first rotating decorative body in the rear lower decorative body when disassembled and viewed from the rear. Figure 195 is a front view of the rear rear performance unit shown in a state where the rear upper decorative body has been moved to the drop position. Figure 196 is a front view of the rear rear performance unit shown in a state where the rear upper decorative body and the rear lower decorative body have been moved to the central position.

The rear performance unit 3600 of the rear unit 3000 is attached near the rear end inside the rear box 3010 via an attachment supporter 3050. The rear performance unit 3600 has a unit base 3601 in the shape of a square frame that is slightly smaller than the inner circumference of the rear box 3010, a pair of cylindrical guide shafts 3602 that are long vertically and are provided near both the left and right ends in front of the unit base 3601, a rear upper decorative body 3650 whose left and right ends are supported by the pair of guide shafts 3602 so that they can be raised and lowered, and a rear lower decorative body 3700 whose left and right ends are supported by the pair of guide shafts 3602 so that they can be raised and lowered below the rear upper decorative body 3650.

The rear performance unit 3600 also has a lock groove 3603 near the right end of the upper edge of the square frame-shaped unit base 3601, in which the upper lock claw 3661b of the lock latch 3661 in the lock mechanism 3660 of the rear upper decorative body 3650 is engaged. This lock groove 3603 has a square shape when viewed from the front and is recessed from the front to the rear. The lock groove 3603 is provided to the left of the right guide shaft 3602 (the right edge of the unit base 3601). Furthermore, the rear performance unit 3600 has a vibration sensor 1040 for detecting vibrations acting on the game board 5. The vibration sensor 1040 is provided in a position toward the right of the center in the left-right direction on the upper edge of the unit base 3601.

Furthermore, the rear performance unit 3600 has a rotation slit 3604 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction near the center of the left-to-right direction of the lower edge of the square frame-shaped unit base 3601 and extends long in the left-to-right direction. The other end of the unit arm 3788 of the rear lower decorative body 3700 described later is slidably inserted into this rotation slit 3604.

In addition, the rear performance unit 3600 has a right lifting mechanism 3610 provided on the right end side of the unit base 3601 for raising and lowering the rear upper decorative body 3650, and a left lifting mechanism 3630 provided on the left end side of the unit base 3601 for raising and lowering the rear lower decorative body 3700.

The right lifting mechanism 3610 includes a right spiral shaft 3611 that extends vertically over almost the entire height of the unit base 3601 and has a spiral groove formed thereon, a right lifting slider 3612 that is screwed onto the right spiral shaft 3611 and moves up and down as the right spiral shaft 3611 rotates, a rear right lower drive motor 3613 that is provided in the lower right corner of the unit base 3601 and rotates the right spiral shaft 3611 around its axis, and an auxiliary upper slider 3612 that is provided near the upper right corner of the unit base 3601 and is slidable within a predetermined range in the vertical direction. The right lift slider 3612 has a slider 3614, an auxiliary lower slider 3615 that is mounted below the auxiliary upper slider 3614 by the unit base 3601 so as to be able to slide up and down, an auxiliary spring 3616 that is engaged at both the top and bottom ends with the auxiliary upper slider 3614 and the auxiliary lower slider 3615 and biases the auxiliary upper slider 3614 and the auxiliary lower slider 3615 in a direction in which they approach each other, and a right lift first sensor 3617 and a right lift second sensor 3618 that are mounted vertically spaced apart on the unit base 3601 and detect the lift position of the right lift slider 3612.

The right lifting slider 3612 of the right lifting mechanism 3610 is capable of abutting from below against the right slide support portion 3652c in the decorative body base 3652 of the rear upper decorative body 3650, and is capable of abutting from above against the auxiliary lower slider 3615. This right lifting slider 3612 allows the rear upper decorative body 3650 to move (raise and lower) in the vertical direction. The auxiliary upper slider 3614 is capable of abutting from above against the right slide support portion 3652c of the rear upper decorative body 3650. The auxiliary lower slider 3615 is capable of abutting from below against the lower end of the auxiliary upper slider 3614, and is capable of abutting from below against the right slide support portion 3652c of the rear upper decorative body 3650. The auxiliary lower slider 3615 is arranged to be movable downward below the lower moving end of the right slide support portion 3652c of the rear upper decorative body 3650. The auxiliary spring 3616 is capable of biasing the right slide support portion 3652c of the rear upper decorative body 3650 downward via the auxiliary upper slider 3614, and is also capable of biasing the right slide support portion 3652c of the rear upper decorative body 3650 upward via the auxiliary lower slider 3615.

The right lifting mechanism 3610's first right lifting sensor 3617 is for detecting that the rear upper decorative body 3650 has moved to a retracted position via the right lifting slider 3612, and the right lifting sensor 3618 is for detecting that the rear upper decorative body 3650 has moved to a central position via the right lifting slider 3612.

The left lifting mechanism 3630 includes a left spiral shaft 3631 which extends vertically from near the bottom end of the unit base 3601 to near the center in the vertical direction and has a spiral groove formed therein;
It has a left lift slider 3632 that is screwed onto the left spiral shaft 3631 and rises and falls as the left spiral shaft 3631 rotates, a rear left lower drive motor 3633 that is provided in the lower left corner of the unit base 3601 and rotates the left spiral shaft 3631 around its axis, a left lift sensor 3634 that is provided on the unit base 3601 and detects the lift position of the left lift slider 3632, and a left rack gear 3635 that is provided on the unit base 3601 and extends up and down along the left spiral shaft 3631.

The left lifting mechanism 3630 has a left lifting slider 3632, the front of which is attached to the rear of the left slide base 3761 of the left unit 3760 in the back-lower decorative body 3700. This left lifting slider 3632 allows the back-lower decorative body 3700 to move (raise and lower) in the vertical direction. The left lifting sensor 3634 is for detecting that the back-lower decorative body 3700 has moved to a retracted position via the left lifting slider 3632. The left rack gear 3635 is provided with the tip of its gear teeth facing rightward, and meshes with the pinion gear 3768 of the left unit 3760 in the back-lower decorative body 3700. This left rack gear 3635 allows the first rotating decorative body 3710 of the back-lower decorative body 3700 to rotate via the pinion gear 3768.

[5-10g-1. Back upper decorative body]
Next, the rear upper decorative body 3650 of the rear performance unit 3600 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 189 and 190. The rear upper decorative body 3650 of the rear performance unit 3600 is supported above the rear lower decorative body 3700 by a pair of guide shafts 3602 so that it can move in the vertical direction. In addition, the rear upper decorative body 3650 can be moved in the vertical direction by the right lifting mechanism 3610. This rear upper decorative body 3650 can move downward (fall) and combine with the rear lower decorative body 3700 to form one large decorative body.

The upper rear decorative body 3650 has a upper rear decorative lens 3651 extending in the left-right direction, a decorative body base 3652 attached to the rear side of the upper rear decorative lens 3651, a decorative board 3653 provided between the upper rear decorative lens 3651 and the decorative body base 3652 and having multiple LEDs mounted thereon, a transparent flat diffusion lens (not shown) provided between the upper rear decorative lens 3651 and the upper rear decorative board 3653 for diffusing the light from the multiple LEDs mounted on the front side of the upper rear decorative board 3653 and irradiating it forward, and a locking mechanism 3660 provided on the rear side of the decorative body base 3652.

The upper rear decorative lens 3651 extends in the left-right direction at a length slightly shorter than the distance between the pair of guide shafts 3602, and is translucent. The upper rear decorative lens 3651 is formed in the shape of a hatchet, and a specified logo that matches the concept of the game board 5 is provided in relief.

The decorative body base 3652 has a transparent flat base body 3652a that covers the rear side of the rear upper decorative lens 3651 and whose lower edge extends downward beyond the rear upper decorative lens 3651, and a left slide support part 3652b and a right slide support part 3652c that protrude outward in the left-right direction beyond the rear upper decorative lens 3651 from both the left and right ends of the base body 3652a and into which the guide shaft 3602 is slidably inserted. The right slide support part 3652c of the decorative body base 3652 is capable of being abutted by the auxiliary upper slider 3614 from above and the right lift slider 3612 from below.

The decorative body base 3652 also has a receiving portion 3652d that extends rearward in a flat shape from a portion of a certain length in the left-right direction near the left-right center of the lower edge, a number of ribs 3652e that connect the upper surface of the receiving portion 3652d to the rear surface of the base body 3652a, and a locking mechanism mounting portion 3652f that is provided adjacent to the right slide support portion 3652c on the rear surface and to which the locking mechanism 3660 is attached. When the rear-rear upper decorative body 3650 falls from the retracted position, this receiving portion 3652d abuts against the shock absorbing portion 3781f provided on the upper surface of the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780 of the rear-rear lower decorative body 3700.

The decorative body base 3652 also has a plurality of light guide openings 3652g that penetrate the base body 3652a from front to back and into which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the rear upper decorative substrate 3653 are inserted. The inner surface of the light guide opening 3652g, which is closer to the outer edge of the base body 3652a on the inner circumferential surface, is formed in an arc shape. When assembled to the rear upper decorative body 3650, the light guide opening 3652g is formed so that light is irradiated from the LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the rear upper decorative substrate 3653 onto the arc-shaped inner circumferential surface, and the light is incident from the inner circumferential surface into the base body 3652a. The light incident into the base body 3652a is reflected forward at the outer edge of the base body 3652a and radiated forward from the front surface of the base body 3652a. This allows the outer periphery of the rear upper decorative body 3650 (rear upper decorative lens 3651) to be illuminated and decorated when the multiple LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the rear upper decorative substrate 3653 are illuminated.

Furthermore, the decorative body base 3652 has a plurality of openings 3652h penetrating the base body 3652a from front to back. The plurality of openings 3652h are arranged in a row in the left-right direction near the center in the up-down direction of the decorative body base 3652. The openings 3652h are formed in a rectangular shape larger than the light guide port 3652g, and can release heat from the rear upper decorative substrate 3653 to the rear.

The upper back decorative board 3653 has multiple side-view type full-color LEDs mounted on the front and rear. The upper back decorative board 3653 has white solder resist on the front and rear, and the name of the element and the identification number of the board are printed in yellow silk screen printing. This reflects light to make the upper back decorative lens 3651 brighter and more easily visible, and makes the upper back decorative board 3653 difficult to see from the front. The diffusion lens has multiple light guide ports into which the multiple LEDs mounted on the front of the upper back decorative board 3653 are inserted, and multiple pyramidal diffusion sections formed over almost the entire rear surface. When light enters the diffusion lens from the inner surface of the light guide port, the multiple diffusion sections diffuse the light and radiate it forward from the front, allowing the upper back decorative lens 3651 located in the front to be illuminated with uniform brightness.

The locking mechanism 3660 of the upper rear decorative body 3650 includes a locking latch 3661 that is arranged to be movable forward and backward in the locking mechanism mounting portion 3652f of the decorative body base 3652, a locking spring 3662 that biases the locking latch 3661 backward, an unlocking solenoid 3663 that is attached to the locking mechanism mounting portion 3652f of the decorative body base 3652 and that releases the locking by the locking latch 3661 against the biasing force of the locking spring 3662, and an unlocking solenoid 3664 that is attached to the locking mechanism mounting portion 3652f of the decorative body base 3652. It has a rear cover 3664 attached to the lock mechanism mounting portion 3652f of the decorative body base 3652 so as to cover the lock latch 3661 from behind, a lock link 3665 supported on the rear cover 3664 so as to be rotatable around an axis in the vertical direction and abutting the lock latch 3661 from behind, and a plunger head 3666 attached to the tip of the plunger 3663a of the unlocking solenoid 3663 and rotating the lock link 3665 by the advancement and retreat of the plunger 3663a.

The lock latch 3661 of the lock mechanism 3660 is provided adjacent to the left of the right slide support part 3652c. The lock latch 3661 has a main body part 3661a extending vertically, and an upper lock claw 3661b and a lower lock claw 3661c extending rearward from both the upper and lower ends of the main body part 3661a. The lock latch 3661 is inclined so that the upper surface of the upper lock claw 3661b becomes lower toward the rear, and the lower surface of the lower lock claw 3661c becomes higher toward the rear. The upper lock claw 3661b can be inserted into the lock groove 3603 of the unit base 3601, and the lower lock claw 3661c can be inserted into the lock groove 3781e of the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780 of the back lower decorative body 3700.

The unlocking solenoid 3663 is disposed to the left of the lock latch 3661 such that the advancing and retreating plunger 3663a protrudes to the right (towards the lock latch 3661). The lock link 3665 has a shaft portion 3665a supported by the rear cover 3664 so as to be rotatable about an axis in the vertical direction, a transmission portion 3665b extending forward from the shaft portion 3665a and having a tip slidably connected to the plunger head 3666, and a pressing portion 3665c extending rightward from the shaft portion 3665a and capable of abutting against the rear surface of the main body portion 3661a of the lock latch 3661. The lock link 3665 is formed in an L-shape in a plan view.

In the normal state where the unlocking solenoid 3663 is not energized, the locking mechanism 3660 has a plunger 3663a that moves forward and backward so as to protrude to the right of the unlocking solenoid 3663, protruding to the right end of its movement. In this state, the transmission part 3665b of the locking link 3665 extends in the front-rear direction via the plunger head 3666 attached to the tip of the plunger 3663a, and the pressing part 3665c extends in the left-right direction. The body part 3661a of the locking latch 3661 abuts against the pressing part 3665c of the locking link 3665 from the front due to the biasing force of the locking spring 3662. As a result, the upper locking claw 3661b and the lower locking claw 3661c of the locking latch 3661 protrude backward, and are in a lockable state (see FIG. 190(a)).

When the unit base 3601 abuts against the upper locking claw 3661b of the locking latch 3661 from above in a lockable state, the upper locking claw 3661b is pressed forward by its inclined upper surface, and the locking latch 3661 moves forward against the biasing force of the locking spring 3662. Then, when the upper locking claw 3661b reaches the locking groove 3603 of the unit base 3601, the forward pressure is eliminated, and the locking latch 3661 moves backward due to the biasing force of the locking spring 3662. As a result, the upper locking claw 3661b is inserted into the locking groove 3603, and the downward movement of the upper locking claw 3661b (the rear upper decorative body 3650) is restricted.

In the lockable state, on the other hand, when the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780 of the back rear lower decorative body 3700 abuts against the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661 from below, the lower lock claw 3661c is pressed forward by its inclined lower surface, and the lock latch 3661 moves forward against the biasing force of the lock spring 3662. Then, when the lower lock claw 3661c reaches the lock groove 3781e of the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780 of the back rear lower decorative body 3700, the forward pressure disappears, and the lock latch 3661 moves backward due to the biasing force of the lock spring 3662. As a result, the lower lock claw 3661c is inserted into the lock groove 3781e, and the upward movement of the lower lock claw 3661c (back rear upper decorative body 3650) from the back rear lower decorative body 3700 is restricted.

In this state, when the unlocking solenoid 3663 is energized, the plunger 3663a moves to the left so as to sink, and the plunger head 3666 attached to the tip of the plunger 3663a moves to the left. When the plunger head 3666 moves to the left, the lock link 3665 rotates clockwise in a plan view about the shaft 3665a via the transmission part 3665b connected to the plunger head 3666. When the lock link 3665 rotates clockwise, the tip of the pressing part 3665c of the lock link 3665 rotates so as to move forward, and the forward movement of the pressing part 3665c causes the lock latch 3661 to move forward against the biasing force of the lock spring 3662. As a result, the upper locking claw 3661b and the lower locking claw 3661c of the locking latch 3661 are retracted (retracted) forward, and the lock is released (see FIG. 190(b)). In this unlocked state, the upper locking claw 3661b and the lower locking claw 3661c are removed forward from the locking groove 3603 of the unit base 3601 and the locking groove 3781e of the rear rear lower decorative body 3700, so that the rear rear upper decorative body 3650 can move up and down relative to the locking groove 3603 and the locking groove 3781e.

This upper rear decorative body 3650 is provided with a locking mechanism 3660 having an unlocking solenoid 3663, which makes the upper rear decorative body 3650 heavier. This allows the player to see a heavy falling effect (moving effect) when the upper rear decorative body 3650 is dropped from the retracted position, creating a strong impact on the player.

[5-10g-2. Back decoration]
Next, the back-rear lower decorative body 3700 in the back-rear performance unit 3600 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 191 to 194. The back-rear lower decorative body 3700 of the back-rear performance unit 3600 is supported by a pair of guide shafts 3602 below the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. In addition, the back-rear lower decorative body 3700 is movable in the vertical direction by the left lifting mechanism 3630. This back-rear lower decorative body 3700 can receive the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 that has fallen from above, and can be combined with the fallen back-rear upper decorative body 3650 to form one large decorative body.

The rear lower decorative body 3700 is rotatable around an axis in the front-to-rear direction, and has a first rotating decorative body 3710, a second rotating decorative body 3720, a third rotating decorative body 3730, and a fourth rotating decorative body 3740, each of which is arranged in a row in the left-to-right direction, and a rear decorative body 3750 that is long in the left-to-right direction and is arranged behind the first rotating decorative body 3710, the second rotating decorative body 3720, the third rotating decorative body 3730, and the fourth rotating decorative body 3740.

The rear lower decorative body 3700 also has a left unit 3760 that supports the first rotating decorative body 3710 and moves up and down along the left guide shaft 3602 by the left lifting mechanism 3630, a right unit 3780 that supports the second rotating decorative body 3720, the third rotating decorative body 3730, the fourth rotating decorative body 3740, and the rear decorative body 3750 and can move up and down along the right guide shaft 3602, and a connecting guide 3790 that connects the left unit 3760 and the right unit 3780.

The first rotating decorative body 3710 of the rear lower decorative body 3700 has a first decorative lens 3711 with translucency that imitates a specific character (for example, the character "miserable"), a first base 3712 attached to the rear side of the first decorative lens 3711, a first rotating decorative body decorative board 3713 that is provided between the first decorative lens 3711 and the first base 3712 and has multiple LEDs mounted thereon, and a transparent flat diffusion lens (not shown) that is provided between the first decorative lens 3711 and the first rotating decorative body decorative board 3713 and diffuses and irradiates the light from the multiple LEDs mounted on the first rotating decorative body decorative board 3713 forward.

The first base 3712 of the first rotating decorative body 3710 has a cylindrical shaft tube portion 3712a that protrudes rearward. The shaft tube portion 3712a is supported rotatably around an axis in the front-to-rear direction by being inserted into the shaft support portion 3761c of the left slide base 3761 in the left unit 3760. In addition, the first decorative body gear 3762 of the left unit 3760 is attached to the rear end of the shaft tube portion 3712a. Wiring EC is connected from the rear to the first rotating decorative body decorative board 3713 through this shaft tube portion 3712a. The shaft tube portion 3712a of the first base 3712 is located approximately in the center of the character "殺" on the first decorative lens 3711.

The first rotating decorative body decorative board 3713 has multiple side-view type full-color LEDs mounted on the front surface. The first rotating decorative body decorative board 3713 has a white solder resist applied to the surface, and the name of the element and the identification number of the board are printed in yellow silk screen printing. This allows the first decorative lens 3711 to be illuminated brighter by reflecting light, and makes the first rotating decorative body decorative board 3713 difficult to see from the front. The diffusion lens has multiple light guide ports into which the multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface of the first rotating decorative body decorative board 3713 are inserted, and multiple pyramidal diffusion sections formed over almost the entire rear surface. When light enters the interior of this diffusion lens from the inner surface of the light guide port, the multiple diffusion sections diffuse the light and radiate it forward from the front surface, allowing the first decorative lens 3711 installed in the front to be illuminated and decorated with uniform brightness.

The second rotating decorative body 3720 has a second decorative lens 3721 with translucency that imitates a specific character (for example, the character "DRAMA"), a second base 3722 attached to the rear side of the second decorative lens 3721, a second rotating decorative body decorative board 3723 that is provided between the second decorative lens 3721 and the second base 3722 and has multiple LEDs mounted thereon, and a transparent flat diffusion lens (not shown) that is provided between the second decorative lens 3721 and the second rotating decorative body decorative board 3723 and diffuses and irradiates the light from the multiple LEDs mounted on the second rotating decorative body decorative board 3723 forward.

The second base 3722 of the second rotating decorative body 3720 has a cylindrical shaft tube portion 3722a that protrudes far to the rear. The shaft tube portion 3722a is supported rotatably around an axis in the front-to-rear direction by penetrating the rear decorative body 3750 and being inserted into the left shaft support tube 3781d of the three shaft support tubes 3781d in the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780. In addition, the second decorative body gear 3784 of the right unit 3780 is attached to the rear end of the shaft tube portion 3722a. Wiring EC is connected from the rear to the second rotating decorative body decorative board 3723 through this shaft tube portion 3722a. The shaft tube portion 3722a of the second base 3722 is located below the center of the character "劇" on the second decorative lens 3721.

The second rotating decorative body decorative board 3723 has multiple side-view type full-color LEDs mounted on the front surface. The second rotating decorative body decorative board 3723 has a white solder resist applied to the surface, and the name of the element and the identification number of the board are printed in yellow silk screen printing. This allows the second decorative lens 3721 to be illuminated brighter by reflecting light, and makes the second rotating decorative body decorative board 3723 difficult to see from the front. The diffusion lens has multiple light guide ports into which the multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface of the second rotating decorative body decorative board 3723 are inserted, and multiple pyramidal diffusion sections formed over almost the entire rear surface. When light enters the interior from the inner surface of the light guide port, the diffusion lens can be diffused by the multiple diffusion sections and radiated forward from the front surface, allowing the second decorative lens 3721 installed in the front to be illuminated with uniform brightness.

The third rotating decorative body 3730 has a third decorative lens 3731 with translucency that imitates a specific character (for example, the character "kai"), a third base 3732 attached to the rear side of the third decorative lens 3731, a third rotating decorative body decorative board 3733 that is provided between the third decorative lens 3731 and the third base 3732 and has multiple LEDs mounted thereon, and a transparent flat diffusion lens (not shown) that is provided between the third decorative lens 3731 and the third rotating decorative body decorative board 3733 and diffuses and irradiates the light from the multiple LEDs mounted on the third rotating decorative body decorative board 3733 forward.

The third base 3732 of the third rotating decorative body 3730 has a cylindrical shaft tube portion 3732a that protrudes far to the rear. The shaft tube portion 3732a penetrates the rear decorative body 3750 and is inserted into the central shaft support tube 3781d of the three shaft support tubes 3781d in the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780, so that it is supported rotatably around an axis in the front-to-rear direction. In addition, the third decorative body gear 3785 of the right unit 3780 is attached to the rear end of the shaft tube portion 3732a. Wiring EC is connected from the rear to the third rotating decorative body decorative board 3733 through this shaft tube portion 3732a. The shaft tube portion 3732a of the third base 3732 is located below the center of the character "kai" on the third decorative lens 3731.

The third rotating decorative body decorative board 3733 has multiple side-view type full-color LEDs mounted on the front surface. The third rotating decorative body decorative board 3733 has a white solder resist applied to the surface, and the name of the element and the identification number of the board are printed in yellow silk screen printing. This allows the third decorative lens 3731 to be illuminated brighter by reflecting light, and makes the third rotating decorative body decorative board 3733 difficult to see from the front. The diffusion lens has multiple light guide ports into which the multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface of the third rotating decorative body decorative board 3733 are inserted, and multiple pyramidal diffusion sections formed over almost the entire rear surface. When light enters the interior from the inner surface of the light guide port, the diffusion lens can be diffused by the multiple diffusion sections and radiated forward from the front surface, allowing the third decorative lens 3731 installed in the front to be illuminated and decorated with uniform brightness.

The fourth rotating decorative body 3740 has a fourth decorative lens 3741 with translucency that imitates a specific character (for example, the character "avoid"), a fourth base 3742 attached to the rear side of the fourth decorative lens 3741, a fourth rotating decorative body decorative board 3743 that is provided between the fourth decorative lens 3741 and the fourth base 3742 and has multiple LEDs mounted thereon, and a transparent flat diffusion lens (not shown) that is provided between the fourth decorative lens 3741 and the fourth rotating decorative body decorative board 3743 and diffuses and irradiates the light from the multiple LEDs mounted on the fourth rotating decorative body decorative board 3743 forward.

The fourth base 3742 of the fourth rotating decorative body 3740 has a cylindrical shaft tube portion 3742a that protrudes far to the rear. The shaft tube portion 3742a is supported rotatably around an axis in the front-to-rear direction by penetrating the rear decorative body 3750 and being inserted into the right shaft support tube 3781d of the three shaft support tubes 3781d in the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780. In addition, the fourth decorative body gear 3786 of the right unit 3780 is attached to the rear end of the shaft tube portion 3732a. Wiring EC is connected from the rear to the fourth rotating decorative body decorative board 3743 through this shaft tube portion 3732a. The shaft tube portion 3742a of the fourth base 3742 is located below the center of the character "Avoid" on the fourth decorative lens 3741.

The fourth rotating decorative body decorative board 3743 has multiple side-view type full-color LEDs mounted on the front surface. The fourth rotating decorative body decorative board 3743 has a white solder resist applied to the surface, and the name of the element and the identification number of the board are printed in yellow silk screen printing. This allows the fourth decorative lens 3741 to be illuminated brighter by reflecting light, and makes the fourth rotating decorative body decorative board 3743 difficult to see from the front. The diffusion lens has multiple light guide ports into which the multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface of the fourth rotating decorative body decorative board 3743 are inserted, and multiple pyramidal diffusion sections formed over almost the entire surface of the rear surface. When light enters the interior from the inner surface of the light guide port, the diffusion lens can be diffused by the multiple diffusion sections and radiated forward from the front surface, allowing the fourth decorative lens 3741 installed in the front to be illuminated and decorated with uniform brightness.

The rear decorative body 3750 has three circular passage openings 3750a that penetrate from front to back with a space between them in the left-right direction. The shaft support tube 3781d of the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780 described below is inserted from the rear into these passage openings 3750a. The rear decorative body 3750 has a rear decorative lens 3751 that extends in the left-right direction, a rear base 3752 that is attached to the rear side of the rear decorative lens 3751, and a rear decorative body decorative board 3753 that is provided between the rear decorative lens 3751 and the rear base 3752 and has multiple LEDs mounted on its rear surface.

The rear decorative lens 3751 (rear decorative body 3750) of the rear decorative body 3750 is formed in a shape that resembles a hatchet that is long from side to side. This rear decorative lens 3751 has approximately the same length in the left-right direction as the rear upper decorative lens 3651 of the rear upper decorative body 3650, and the shape of the upper edge is formed to match the shape of the lower edge of the rear upper decorative lens 3651. As a result, when the rear upper decorative body 3650 and the rear lower decorative body 3700 are combined, a small gap is formed between the rear upper decorative lens 3651 and the rear decorative lens 3751, and the rear upper decorative lens 3651 and the rear decorative lens 3751 can form one large hatchet decorative body.

The rear base 3752 is formed to be the same size as the rear decorative lens 3751. The rear base 3752 has a plurality of light guide ports that penetrate from front to back and into which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the rear decorative body decorative substrate 3753 are inserted, and a plurality of diffusion sections that are recessed in a quadrangular pyramid shape within a predetermined range above the lower edge of the front surface below the plurality of light guide ports. The plurality of light guide ports are provided in two rows, one above the other, in the left-right direction, with a horizontal line passing above the center in the vertical direction of the rear base 3752 between them, and the inner peripheral surface near the upper edge of the upper row and the inner peripheral surface near the lower edge of the lower row are each formed in an arc shape. This light guide port is formed so that light is irradiated from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the rear decorative body decorative substrate 3753 onto the arc-shaped inner peripheral surface, and light is incident into the rear base 3752 from the inner peripheral surface. The light that enters the rear base 3752 is reflected forward by the upper edge and multiple diffusion parts of the rear base 3752 and is emitted forward from the front surface of the rear base 3752. As a result, when the multiple LEDs mounted on the rear decorative body decorative substrate 3753 are illuminated, a range of a predetermined width upward from the upper edge and lower edge of the rear decorative body 3750 (rear decorative lens 3751) can be illuminated and decorated.

The rear decorative body decorative board 3753 has multiple side-view type full-color LEDs mounted on its rear surface. The rear decorative body decorative board 3753 has a white solder resist applied to its surface, and the names of the elements and the board identification number are printed in yellow silk screen printing. This allows the light to be reflected to make the rear decorative lens 3751 more brightly illuminated and decorative, while also making the rear decorative body decorative board 3753 difficult to see from the front. When the multiple LEDs mounted on the rear decorative body decorative board 3753 are illuminated, the rear decorative lens 3751 can be illuminated and decorated.

The left unit 3760 is supported by the left guide shaft 3602 so that it can slide vertically, and also rotatably supports the first rotating decorative body 3710. In addition, as the left unit 3760 slides vertically, it cooperates with the left rack gear 3635 of the left lifting mechanism 3630 to rotate the first rotating decorative body 3710 around an axis in the front-to-rear direction. Furthermore, the left unit 3760 can lift the left end side of the right unit 3780 upward via the connecting guide 3790.

As shown in FIG. 194, the left unit 3760 includes a left slide base 3761 that is supported by the left guide shaft 3602 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction and rotatably supports the shaft tube portion 3712a of the first base 3712 in the first rotating decorative body 3710, a spur gear-shaped first decorative body gear 3762 that is provided at the rear of the left slide base 3761 and attached to the rear end of the shaft tube portion 3712a of the first base 3712 that passes through the left slide base 3761, a first transmission gear 3763 that meshes with the first decorative body gear 3762 from the left and is rotatably supported by the left slide base 3761, a spur gear-shaped small diameter gear 3764a that meshes with the first transmission gear 3763 from the left, and a spur gear-shaped large diameter gear 3764b that rotates integrally with the small diameter gear 3764a. The left slide base 3761 has a speed change gear 3764 rotatably supported thereon, a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3765 meshing with the large diameter gear 3764b of the speed change gear 3764 from the left and rotatably supported thereon, a spur gear-shaped third transmission gear 3766 meshing with the second transmission gear 3765 from the left and rotatably supported thereon, a spur gear-shaped fourth transmission gear 3767 meshing with the third transmission gear 3766 from the left and rotatably supported thereon, and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 3768 meshing with the fourth transmission gear 3767 from the left, meshing with the left rack gear 3635 of the left lifting mechanism 3630 from the right, and rotatably supported thereon.

The left unit 3760 also has a gear cover 3769 attached to the rear side of the left slide base 3761 so as to cover the rear of the first decorative body gear 3762, the first transmission gear 3763, the speed change gear 3764, the second transmission gear 3765, the third transmission gear 3766, the fourth transmission gear 3767, and the pinion gear 3768, and a wiring cover 3770 attached to the rear side of the gear cover 3769 and covering from the rear a portion of the wiring EC connected to the first rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3713 of the first rotating decorative body 3710.

The left slide base 3761 has a base body 3761a formed in a shallow box shape in the front-rear direction with the rear open, a left slide support part 3761b provided on the left side of the base body 3761a and through which the left guide shaft 3602 is slidably inserted, and a shaft support part 3761c that penetrates the base body 3761a in the front-rear direction and rotatably supports the shaft tube part 3712a of the first base 3712 in the first rotating ornament 3710. The left slide base 3761 can rotatably support the first rotating ornament 3710 around an axis in the front-rear direction by inserting the shaft tube part 3712a of the first base 3712 into the shaft support part 3761c. The left slide base 3761 has the rear side of the left slide support part 3761b attached to the left lift slider 3632 of the left lift mechanism 3630.

The first decorative body gear 3762 is attached to the rear end of the cylindrical shaft tube portion 3712a of the first base 3712 of the first rotating decorative body 3710, and has a through hole that penetrates from front to back in the center. Multiple wiring EC can be connected to the first rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3713 of the first rotating decorative body 3710 through the through hole of the first decorative body gear 3762 and the cylindrical shaft tube portion 3712a. The pinion gear 3768 is arranged so that its left side protrudes leftward beyond the left end of the left slide base 3761 so as to mesh with the left rack gear 3635.

The gear cover 3769 has a left unit pin 3769a that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape from near the left end. This left unit pin 3769a is slidably inserted into the connection slit 3791 of the connection guide 3790.

When this left unit 3760 is assembled to the game board 5, the left slide base 3761 is attached to the left lift slider 3632 of the left lift mechanism 3630, and when the left spiral shaft 3631 is rotated in an appropriate direction by the rear left lower drive motor 3633, the left unit 3760 slides up and down together with the left lift slider 3632. Since the pinion gear 3768 protruding outward from the left end of the left slide base 3761 meshes with the left rack gear 3635, when the left unit 3760 slides up and down, the pinion gear 3768 rotates. When this pinion gear 3768 rotates, the rotation is transmitted to the first decorative body gear 3762 via the fourth transmission gear 3767, the third transmission gear 3766, the second transmission gear 3765, the speed change gear 3764, and the first transmission gear 3763, causing the first rotating decorative body 3710 to rotate together with the first decorative body gear 3762. In this embodiment, when the left unit 3760 slides from the lower moving end to the upper moving end, the first rotating decorative body 3710 rotates 360 degrees.

In addition, the left unit 3760 has a left unit pin 3769a slidably inserted into the connecting slit 3791 of the connecting guide 3790. Therefore, when the left unit 3760 is slid in the vertical direction, the left unit pin 3769a slides to the moving end of the connecting slit 3791, and then the connecting guide 3790 can be slid in the same direction via the left unit pin 3769a.

In the left unit 3760, multiple wirings EC are connected to the first rotating decoration decorative substrate 3713 of the first rotating decoration 3710 through the through holes of the first decorative body gear 3762. As described above, the first rotating decoration 3710 rotates 360 degrees around the front-to-rear axis, so the multiple wirings EC passing through the through holes of the first decorative body gear 3762 are twisted in advance by 180 degrees in the opposite direction to the rotation direction. This prevents the multiple wirings EC from twisting more than necessary even when the first rotating decoration 3710 is rotated (pivoted).

The right unit 3780 is supported by the right guide shaft 3602 so that it can slide vertically, and rotatably supports the second rotating ornament 3720, the third rotating ornament 3730, and the fourth rotating ornament 3740. In addition, as the right unit 3780 slides vertically, it can rotate the second rotating ornament 3720, the third rotating ornament 3730, and the fourth rotating ornament 3740 around their respective axes in the front-to-rear direction.

As shown in Figures 191 and 192, the right unit 3780 has a right slide base 3781 that is long in the left-right direction and whose right end is supported by the right guide shaft 3602 so that it can slide up and down, a slide rack 3782 that is supported on the rear side of the right slide base 3781 so that it can slide left and right within a predetermined range, and a rack spring 3783 whose left and right ends are attached to the right slide base 3781 and the slide rack 3782, respectively, and which urges the slide rack 3782 leftward.

The right unit 3780 also has a second decorative body gear 3784 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rear end of the shaft tube portion 3722a of the second base 3722 in the second rotating decorative body 3720 and rotated by the sliding of the slide rack 3782, a third decorative body gear 3785 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rear end of the shaft tube portion 3732a of the third base 3732 in the third rotating decorative body 3730 and rotated by the sliding of the slide rack 3782, and a fourth decorative body gear 3786 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rear end of the shaft tube portion 3742a of the fourth base 3742 in the fourth rotating decorative body 3740 and rotated by the sliding of the slide rack 3782.

The right unit 3780 further includes a gear cover 3787 attached to the rear side of the right slide base 3781 so as to cover the slide rack 3782 from behind, a unit arm 3788 having one end rotatably supported by the gear cover 3787 and the other end extending outward beyond the gear cover 3787 and slidably supported in the rotation slit 3604 of the unit base 3601, and a transmission gear 3789 rotatably supported by the gear cover 3787 and transmitting the rotation about one end of the unit arm 3788 to slide the slide rack 3782 in the left-right direction.

The right slide base 3781 has a box-shaped base body 3781a that is long from side to side and open to the rear, a right slide support part 3781b that is provided at the right end of the base body 3781a and through which the right guide shaft 3602 is slidably inserted, a pair of right unit slits 3781c that penetrate the left end of the base body 3781a from front to back and extend up and down and through which the connecting pins 3792 of the connecting guide 3790 are slidably inserted, and three shaft support tubes 3781d that protrude forward from the base body 3781a in a cylindrical shape and penetrate the interior of the tube from front to back.

The right slide base 3781 has the rear decorative body 3750 attached to the front of the base body 3781a. The three axle support tubes 3781d of the base body 3781a are each inserted from the rear into the passage opening 3750a of the rear decorative body 3750. In addition, the axle tube portion 3722a in the second base 3722 of the second rotating decorative body 3720, the axle tube portion 3732a in the third base 3732 of the third rotating decorative body 3730, and the axle tube portion 3742a in the fourth base 3742 of the fourth rotating decorative body 3740 are each inserted into the three axle support tubes 3781d, and each axle tube portion 3722a, axle tube portion 3732a, and axle tube portion 3742a can be rotatably supported.

The right slide base 3781 is arranged to protrude upward from the left vicinity of the right slide support portion 3781b on the base body 3781a, and has a lock groove 3781e in which the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661 in the lock mechanism 3660 of the rear upper decorative body 3650 is engaged. This lock groove 3781e has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front and is arranged to be recessed from the front to the rear.

Furthermore, the right slide base 3781 has multiple shock absorbing parts 3781f that are provided on the upper surface of the base body 3781a and can abut against the lower surface of the receiving part 3652d of the decorative body base 3652 in the rear upper decorative body 3650. The shock absorbing parts 3781f are formed from a high viscosity elastomer.

The slide rack 3782 has a left rack gear 3782a located near the left end with its teeth facing upward, a middle rack gear 3782b located to the right and above the left rack gear 3782a with its teeth facing downward, a right rack gear 3782c located to the right and below the middle rack gear 3782b with its teeth facing upward, and a rear rack gear 3782d located rearward and below between the middle rack gear 3782b and the right rack gear 3782c with its teeth facing upward. The left rack gear 3782a, middle rack gear 3782b, and right rack gear 3782c of the slide rack 3782 are located at the same position in the front-to-back direction and extend the same length in the left-to-right direction.

The second decorative body gear 3784 meshes from above with the left rack gear 3782a of the slide rack 3782. The third decorative body gear 3785 meshes from below with the middle rack gear 3782b. The fourth decorative body gear 3786 meshes from above with the right rack gear 3782c. The large diameter gear 3789b of the transmission gear 3789 meshes from above with the rear rack gear 3782d. As a result, when the slide rack 3782 slides left and right, the second decorative body gear 3784, the fourth decorative body gear 3786, and the transmission gear 3789 rotate in the same direction, and the third decorative body gear 3785 rotates in the opposite direction.

The second decorative body gear 3784, the third decorative body gear 3785, and the fourth decorative body gear 3786 each have a through hole that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction. Through this through hole, multiple wiring EC can be connected from the right unit 3780 side to the second rotating decorative body decorative board 3723 of the second rotating decorative body 3720, the third rotating decorative body decorative board 3733 of the third rotating decorative body 3730, and the fourth rotating decorative body decorative board 3743 of the fourth rotating decorative body 3740.

The gear cover 3787 has a plurality of opposing wiring locking parts 3787a, a straight-type wiring locking part 3787b, and a plurality of L-shaped wiring locking parts 3787c on the rear surface for supporting a plurality of wiring EC connected to the first rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3713 of the first rotating decorative body 3710. The opposing wiring locking parts 3787a are provided at intervals in the left-right direction near the upper edge of the gear cover 3787. The straight-type wiring locking part 3787b is provided to the left of the part that rotatably supports one end side of the unit arm 3788, and is provided with its free end (tip) facing upward. The L-shaped wiring locking parts 3787c are provided at intervals in the left-right direction to the left of the straight-type wiring locking part 3787b, extending upward and then forward.

The unit arm 3788 has a sector-shaped gear portion 3788a that is provided coaxially with the rotation axis at one end side that is rotatably supported by the gear cover 3787. This gear portion 3788a meshes with a small diameter gear 3789a of the transmission gear 3789. The other end side of the unit arm 3788 extends leftward from the one end side, and is slidably inserted into a rotation slit 3604 that is long in the left-right direction and provided on the lower side of the unit base 3601. In addition, the portion between one end and the other end of the unit arm 3788 is formed into a cylindrical shape, and multiple wiring EC is inserted inside.

The transmission gear 3789 has a small diameter gear 3789a in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the gear portion 3788a of the unit arm 3788, and a large diameter gear 3789b in the form of a spur gear that rotates integrally in front of the small diameter gear 3789a. The large diameter gear 3789b of the transmission gear 3789 meshes with the rear rack gear 3782d of the slide rack 3782 from above.

This right unit 3780 can become one with the rear upper decorative body 3650 by engaging the lower locking claw 3661c of the locking latch 3661 in the locking mechanism 3660 of the rear upper decorative body 3650 with the locking groove 3781e of the right slide base 3781, and can slide upward together so as to be lifted by the rear upper decorative body 3650.

In the normal state, the right unit 3780 has a unit arm 3788 extending to the left in parallel with the right slide base 3781. In this state, when the right unit 3780 slides upward, the other end of the unit arm 3788 is inserted into the rotation slit 3604 of the unit base 3601, so that the other end of the unit arm 3788 moves to the right along the rotation slit 3604 and rotates counterclockwise around one end as viewed from the front. Then, as the gear portion 3788a of the unit arm 3788 rotates counterclockwise, the transmission gear 3789 rotates clockwise via the small diameter gear 3789a meshed with the gear portion 3788a, and the slide rack 3782 slides to the left via the rear rack gear 3782d meshed with the large diameter gear 3789b of the transmission gear 3789. At this time, the slide rack 3782 is biased to the left by the rack spring 3783, so the slide rack 3782 slides to the left smoothly without resistance.

When the slide rack 3782 slides to the left, the second decorative body gear 3784 meshed with the left rack gear 3782a and the fourth decorative body gear 3786 meshed with the right rack gear 3782c each rotate in a clockwise direction, while the third decorative body gear 3785 meshed with the middle rack gear 3782b rotates in a counterclockwise direction. When the right unit 3780 is slid upward, the second rotating decorative body 3720 and the fourth rotating decorative body 3740 can be moved upward while rotating each in a clockwise direction and the third rotating decorative body 3730 in a counterclockwise direction. When the slide rack 3782 slides from the right moving end to the left moving end, the second rotating decorative body 3720, the third rotating decorative body 3730, and the fourth rotating decorative body 3740 each rotate 180 degrees.

The other end of the unit arm 3788 of the right unit 3780 is slidably connected to the rotation slit 3604 of the unit base 3601, so that multiple wiring EC connecting the first rotating decoration decorative board 3713, second rotating decoration decorative board 3723, third rotating decoration decorative board 3733, fourth rotating decoration decorative board 3743, and rear decoration decorative board 3753 of the rear lower decorative body 3700 to the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged along the rear side of the unit arm 3788. This makes it difficult to see the multiple wiring EC connected to the right unit 3780 (rear lower decorative body 3700) from the front.

In this right unit 3780, the wiring EC extends from the rear to the second rotating ornament 3720, the third rotating ornament 3730, and the fourth rotating ornament 3740 through the respective through holes of the second decorative body gear 3784, the third decorative body gear 3785, and the fourth decorative body gear 3786. As described above, the second rotating ornament 3720, the third rotating ornament 3730, and the fourth rotating ornament 3740 rotate 180 degrees around the axis in the front-to-back direction, so the wiring EC passing through the respective through holes of the second decorative body gear 3784, the third decorative body gear 3785, and the fourth decorative body gear 3786 is twisted 90 degrees in advance in the opposite direction to the rotation direction. This prevents the wiring EC from twisting more than necessary even when the second rotating ornament 3720, the third rotating ornament 3730, and the fourth rotating ornament 3740 are rotated (pivoted).

In the right unit 3780, as shown in FIG. 193, a plurality of wirings EC (harness WH3) arranged from the other end side of the unit arm 3788 toward one end side are bent to the right (left in front view) near the one end side and extended to the right along the gear cover 3787. This harness WH3 is inserted between the straight type wiring locking portion 3787b or the L-shaped type wiring locking portion 3787c and the rear surface of the gear cover 3787. In this right unit 3780, the harness WH3 is bound together with the wiring locking portion 3787b by tightening with a cable tie CT at the wiring locking portion 3787b provided at the position closest to the rotation axis of the unit arm 3788 (the portion where the harness WH3 is bent). At this time, the harness WH3 is tightened with a strength that allows it to slide together with the cable tie CT in the longitudinal direction in which the wiring locking portion 3787b extends. In addition, the tip of the wiring retaining portion 3787b is provided with a hook portion (not shown) that protrudes forward, so that the cable tie CT will not come off the tip of the wiring retaining portion 3787b together with the harness WH3.

In this way, the wiring locking portion 3787b closest to the pivot axis of the unit arm 3788 in the harness WH3 (the portion where the harness WH3 is bent) is fastened together with the wiring locking portion 3787b by the cable tie CT. Therefore, even if a force acts on the harness WH3 via the unit arm 3788 to move it by sliding the right unit 3780 (lower rear decorative body 3700) up and down, the cable tie CT will keep the harness WH3 from coming loose from the wiring locking portion 3787b, and it is possible to reliably prevent malfunctions caused by the harness WH3 coming loose.

In this right unit 3780, in the portion where the harness WH3 and the wiring retaining portion 3787b are tied together with the cable tie CT, the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is attached in a state of contact with the wiring retaining portion 3787b, similar to the above-mentioned wiring retaining portion 1603 and wiring retaining portion 3011. The locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT abuts against the portion of the wiring retaining portion 3787b opposite the harness WH3. In other words, the cable tie CT is attached so that the wiring retaining portion 3787b is located between the harness WH3 and the locking portion CTb. As a result, since the locking portion CTb faces rearward, it is possible to easily perform the tying operation using the cable tie CT, check the tying, and the like. It also makes it easy to cut the cable tie CT. Furthermore, since the locking portion CTb can be prevented from contacting the harness WH3, the harness WH3 tied with the cable tie CT can be protected by the wiring locking portion 3787b.

In addition, because the gear cover 3787 on which the wiring retaining portion 3787b is formed is made transparent, the portion of the harness WH3 supported by the wiring retaining portion 3787b can be seen from the outside (rear) through the wiring retaining portion 3787b. This makes it easy to check whether all of the wiring EC constituting the harness WH3 is bundled with the cable ties CT, and also makes it easier to perform the task of bundling with the cable ties CT.

Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the cable tie CT is attached so that (the band portion CTa of) the cable tie CT contacts the harness WH3 at an angle. This makes it possible to increase the contact area compared to when the cable tie CT contacts the harness WH3 in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, and to increase the frictional resistance, making it more difficult to move (slide).

As shown in the figure, the cable tie CT bundling the harness WH3 to the wiring retaining portion 3787b is attached so that the longitudinal direction of the band portion CTa extends obliquely relative to the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the wiring retaining portion 3787b. In other words, the cable tie CT is attached in a cross-body manner. With this, when the harness WH3 is bound to the wiring retaining portion 3787b by the cable tie CT, if the cable tie CT is tilted so that the longitudinal direction of the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT approaches the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the wiring retaining portion 3787b, the tightening by the band portion CTa can be loosened, and the harness WH3 can be easily slid in the longitudinal direction of the wiring retaining portion 3787b together with the cable tie CT. Furthermore, if the cable tie CT is returned to its tilted state after sliding, the wiring locking portion 3787b is tightened and returned to its original, less easily slidable state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 193, the portion of the harness WH3 that is bent horizontally to follow the unit arm 3788 is twisted as a whole, so that even if a force acts on the harness WH3 via the unit arm 3788 when the right unit 3780 (lower back decorative body 3700) slides up and down to rotate the unit arm 3788, the multiple wiring EC that make up the harness WH3 will not come apart.

The connecting guide 3790 connects the left unit 3760 and the right unit 3780 so that they can move relatively in the vertical direction. The connecting guide 3790 has a connecting slit 3791 that penetrates from front to back and extends vertically, into which the left unit pin 3769a of the gear cover 3769 in the left unit 3760 is slidably inserted, and a connecting pin 3792 that protrudes cylindrically backward to the right of the connecting slit 3791 and is slidably inserted into the right unit slit 3781c of the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780.

[5-10g-3. Operation of the backstage production unit]
Next, the operation (movable performance) of the back rear performance unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 185, 195, and 196. As described above, the back rear performance unit 3600 has a back rear upper decorative body 3650 and a back rear lower decorative body 3700 that are supported so as to be slidable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 3602 spaced apart from each other on the left and right. In the normal state of the back rear performance unit 3600, as shown in Figure 185, the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is located in a retracted position, which is the upper moving end of the back rear. When the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is in the retracted position, the upper locking claw 3661b of the locking latch 3661 in the locking mechanism 3660 is inserted into the locking groove 3603 of the unit base 3601, and the downward movement of the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is restricted (locked). In addition, the right lift slider 3612, which is screwed onto the right spiral shaft 3611 from below, abuts against the right slide support portion 3652c of the ornament base 3652 of the rear upper ornament 3650, and the downward movement of the rear upper ornament 3650 is also restricted by this right lift slider 3612. In other words, the lock mechanism 3660 and the right lift slider 3612 prevent the rear upper ornament 3650 from falling.

In addition, in the rear upper decorative body 3650, the auxiliary upper slider 3614 abuts from above against the right slide support portion 3652c of the decorative body base 3652, and the auxiliary lower slider 3615 abuts against the auxiliary upper slider 3614 due to the biasing force of the auxiliary spring 3616. In the right lifting mechanism 3610, the right lifting first sensor 3617 detects the right lifting slider 3612.

On the other hand, in the normal state, the rear lower decorative body 3700 is located in a retracted position, which is the end of its downward movement, as shown in FIG. 185. When the rear lower decorative body 3700 is in the retracted position, the character "殺" (misery) of the first rotating decorative body 3710 is tilted diagonally to the left, and the character "劇" (drama) of the second rotating decorative body 3720, the character "回" (turn) of the third rotating decorative body 3730, and the character "備" (avoidance) of the fourth rotating decorative body 3740 are each rotated 180 degrees. The first rotating decorative body 3710 and the third rotating decorative body 3730 are each provided at the same position in the front-to-back direction. The second rotating decorative body 3720, the fourth rotating decorative body 3740, and the left unit 3760 are each provided at the same position in the front-to-back direction, and are provided behind the first rotating decorative body 3710 and the third rotating decorative body 3730. Furthermore, a rear decorative body 3750 and a right unit 3780 are provided behind the second rotating decorative body 3720, the fourth rotating decorative body 3740, and the left unit 3760. A rear upper decorative body 3650 is provided above the rear decorative body 3750 and the right unit 3780.

When the rear lower decorative body 3700 is in the retracted position, the left unit pin 3769a of the gear cover 3769 in the left unit 3760 is located at the downward movement end (lower end) of the connection slit 3791 in the connection guide 3790. In addition, the connection pin 3792 of the connection guide 3790 is located at the downward movement end (lower end) of the right unit slit 3781c in the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780.

When the rear lower decorative body 3700 is in the retracted position, the pinion gear 3768, part of which protrudes to the left from the left unit 3760, meshes with the left rack gear 3635 of the left lifting mechanism 3630. The slide rack 3782 of the right unit 3780 is located at the end of its movement to the right, and the unit arm 3788 extends approximately horizontally in the left-right direction. The slide rack 3782 is biased to the left by a rack spring 3783. In the left lifting mechanism 3630, the left lifting sensor 3634 detects the left lifting slider 3632.

When performing a movable performance in which the back-upper decorative body 3650 is dropped from this normal state, first, the right lifting mechanism 3610 rotates the right spiral shaft 3611 by the back-right lower drive motor 3613 to move the right lifting slider 3612 to the lower moving end (a position near the right slide support part 3781b of the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780 in the back-lower decorative body 3700). When this right lifting slider 3612 moves downward, it abuts against the auxiliary lower slider 3615 on the way, and moves to the lower moving end together with the auxiliary lower slider 3615 against the biasing force of the auxiliary spring 3616. As a result, the auxiliary spring 3616 is stretched long, increasing its biasing force, and a strong biasing force acts downward on the right slide support part 3652c of the decorative body base 3652 via the auxiliary upper slider 3614. Even in this state (a state in which it can fall), the upper locking claw 3661b of the locking latch 3661 of the locking mechanism 3660 is inserted into and locked in the locking groove 3603 of the unit base 3601, so the upper back decorative body 3650 will not fall.

When the unlocking solenoid 3663 of the locking mechanism 3660 is energized, the locking latch 3661 moves forward against the biasing force of the locking spring 3662, and the upper locking claw 3661b comes out of the locking groove 3603, releasing the lock. This causes the rear upper decorative body 3650 to fall from the retracted position. At this time, the rear upper decorative body 3650 falls at an initial speed faster than a free fall because the biasing force of the auxiliary spring 3616, which strongly biases the right slide support part 3652c of the decorative body base 3652 downward via the auxiliary upper slider 3614, acts on the rear upper decorative body 3650. The auxiliary upper slider 3614 presses the right slide support part 3652c downward by the biasing force of the auxiliary spring 3616, and then stops moving at a position somewhat downward. Therefore, the auxiliary lower slider 3615 is biased upward by the auxiliary spring 3616.

When the rear upper decorative body 3650 falls onto the right unit 3780 of the rear lower decorative body 3700 provided below (moves to the emerging position), the lower surface of the receiving portion 3652d of the decorative body base 3652 abuts against multiple shock absorbing portions 3781f on the upper surface of the right slide base 3781 to absorb the impact of the fall, and the lower locking claw 3661c of the locking latch 3661 of the locking mechanism 3660 engages with the locking groove 3781e of the right slide base 3781, so that it does not bounce upwards on the upper surface of the right slide base 3781.

This allows the upper rear decorative body 3650 to fall at a speed faster than a free fall and does not bounce upwards after falling, so the player can see a moving effect (falling effect) that gives the impression of a heavy, heavy fall, creating a strong impact on the player.

When the rear upper decorative body 3650 is dropped and moved to the appearance position, as shown in FIG. 195, the rear upper decorative body 3650 and the rear decorative body 3750 of the rear lower decorative body 3700 are positioned so as to be in contact with each other, forming a decorative body resembling one large hatchet. Also, in this state, only a portion of the first rotating decorative body 3710 is positioned in front of the rear upper decorative body 3650, and the second rotating decorative body 3720, the third rotating decorative body 3730, and the fourth rotating decorative body 3740 are not positioned in front of the rear upper decorative body 3650.

When the rear upper decorative body 3650 is dropped from the retracted position and moved to the emergent position, the rear left lower drive motor 3633 rotates the left spiral shaft 3631 in the left lifting mechanism 3630, and the left lifting slider 3632 screwed to the left spiral shaft 3631 slides upward. The left unit 3760 slides upward together with the first rotating decorative body 3710 via the left slide base 3761 of the left unit 3760 of the rear lower decorative body 3700 attached to the left lifting slider 3632. At this time, since the pinion gear 3768 of the left unit 3760 is engaged with the left rack gear 3635, the pinion gear 3768 rotates as the left unit 3760 rises, and the first rotating decorative body 3710 rotates in the counterclockwise direction. Additionally, the left unit pin 3769a of the gear cover 3769 slides upward within the connection slit 3791 of the connection guide 3790.

When the left unit 3760 is initially raised via the left lift slider 3632, only the left unit 3760 (first rotating decorative body 3710) rises, and the right unit 3780 (second rotating decorative body 3720, third rotating decorative body 3730, fourth rotating decorative body 3740, and rear decorative body 3750) does not rise.

Then, when the left unit 3760 rises and the left unit pin 3769a of the gear cover 3769 reaches the upper end (top) of the connecting slit 3791 of the connecting guide 3790, the left unit pin 3769a lifts the connecting guide 3790 upward through the connecting slit 3791, and the connecting guide 3790 begins to rise. Even at this time, the pinion gear 3768 is engaged with the left rack gear 3635, so the first rotating decorative body 3710 continues to rotate in the counterclockwise direction. When the connecting guide 3790 begins to rise due to the left unit pin 3769a of the left unit 3760, the connecting pin 3792 of the connecting guide 3790 slides upward within the right unit slit 3781c of the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780.

As a result, when the connecting guide 3790 begins to rise due to the left unit pin 3769a of the rising left unit 3760, only the left unit 3760 (first rotating decorative body 3710) and the connecting guide 3790 rise, and the right unit 3780 (second rotating decorative body 3720, third rotating decorative body 3730, fourth rotating decorative body 3740, and rear decorative body 3750) do not rise.

The left lift slider 3632 causes the left unit 3760 to rise further while lifting the connecting guide 3790, and when the connecting pin 3792 of the connecting guide 3790 reaches the upper end (top) of the right unit slit 3781c of the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780, a force acts on the left end of the right unit 3780 via the connecting pin 3792 and the right unit slit 3781c, tending to lift it upward. Even at this time, the pinion gear 3768 is still engaged with the left rack gear 3635, so the first rotating decorative body 3710 continues to rotate in the counterclockwise direction.

At the same time, in the right lifting mechanism 3610, the right spiral shaft 3611 is rotated by the rear right lower drive motor 3613 to lift the meshed right lifting slider 3612, and the right lifting slider 3612 is brought into contact with the right slide support part 3652c of the ornament base 3652 of the rear upper ornament 3650 from below, moving the right slide support part 3652c upward. At this time, the right lifting slider 3612 is subjected to an upward biasing force by the auxiliary spring 3616 via the auxiliary lower slider 3615 that is in contact with it from below, reducing the load on the lifting slider.

When the decorative body base 3652 (rear upper decorative body 3650) is raised via the right slide support part 3652c by the right lifting slider 3612, the lower locking claw 3661c of the locking mechanism 3660 of the rear upper decorative body 3650 is engaged with the locking groove 3781e of the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780 of the rear lower decorative body 3700, so that a force acts on the right end side of the right unit 3780 to lift it upward via the lower locking claw 3661c and the locking groove 3781e.

In this way, a force acts to lift the right unit 3780 upward from the connecting pin 3792 of the connecting guide 3790 at the left end of the right unit 3780, and from the lower locking claw 3661c of the locking mechanism 3660 of the rear upper decorative body 3650 at the right end of the right unit 3780, so the right unit 3780 begins to rise for the first time. In this state, the right unit 3780 is lifted by the rear upper decorative body 3650, and the rear upper decorative body 3650 and the rear lower decorative body 3700 rise in a combined state.

When the right unit 3780 starts to rise, the second rotating ornament 3720, the third rotating ornament 3730, the fourth rotating ornament 3740, and the rear ornament 3750 supported by the right unit 3780 rise together. At this time, since the other end of the unit arm 3788 extending to the left at the bottom of the right unit 3780 is slidably inserted into the rotation slit 3604 of the unit base 3601, the unit arm 3788 rotates counterclockwise around one end, and the other end slides to the right within the rotation slit 3604.

When the unit arm 3788 of the right unit 3780 rotates counterclockwise, the slide rack 3782 slides leftward from its right end, and the sliding of the slide rack 3782 causes the second rotating ornament 3720 and the fourth rotating ornament 3740 to rotate clockwise, while the third rotating ornament 3730 rotates counterclockwise. At this time, the left unit 3760 is also raised, so the first rotating ornament 3710 rotates further counterclockwise due to the engagement of the pinion gear 3768 with the left rack gear 3635.

At this time, the slide rack 3782 is biased to the left by the rack spring 3783, which reduces the load on the counterclockwise rotation of the unit arm 3788 and also reduces the load on the rotation of the second rotating ornament 3720, the third rotating ornament 3730, and the fourth rotating ornament 3740.

In the right lifting mechanism 3610, when the right lifting second sensor 3618 detects the right lifting slider 3612, the rotation of the right spiral shaft 3611 and the left spiral shaft 3631 by the rear right lower drive motor 3613 and the rear left lower drive motor 3633 stops, and the lifting of the right lifting slider 3612 and the left lifting slider 3632 stops. In this state, the rear upper decorative body 3650 and the rear lower decorative body 3700 are located in a central position that is approximately centered in the vertical direction. In addition, the left lifting slider 3632 (left unit 3760) of the left lifting mechanism 3630 is located at the end of its upward movement.

In this central position, as shown in FIG. 196, the character "殺生" on the first rotating decorative body 3710 has rotated 360 degrees and is tilted diagonally to the left, just like in the retreat position, but has risen so that more than half of its vertical orientation is located in front of the rear upper decorative body 3650. In addition, the character "劇" on the second rotating decorative body 3720, the character "回" on the third rotating decorative body 3730, and the character "改变" on the fourth rotating decorative body have each rotated 180 degrees so that their vertical orientation is correct, and nearly half of their vertical orientation is located in front of the rear upper decorative body 3650. This forms a decorative body with the characters "avoid tragedy" in the vertical center of a large, left-right long machete composed of the rear upper decorative body 3650 and the rear decorative body 3750.

From this central position, in the lock mechanism 3660 of the rear upper decorative body 3650, the unlocking solenoid 3663 is energized to slide the lock latch 3661 forward, and the lower locking claw 3661c is removed from the locking groove 3781e of the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780 to release the lock. Then, the right spiral shaft 3611 is rotated by the rear lower right drive motor 3613 of the right lifting mechanism 3610 so that the right lifting slider 3612 rises, and the rear upper decorative body 3650 is moved upward via the right lifting slider 3612. With the lock released by the lock mechanism 3660, the rear upper decorative body 3650 is moved upward, and the rear upper decorative body 3650 is separated from the rear lower decorative body 3700, and only the rear upper decorative body 3650 rises.

At this time, the right lifting slider 3612 is biased upward by the auxiliary spring 3616 via the auxiliary lower slider 3615 that contacts it from below, reducing the load applied to the lift. In addition, the rear upper decorative body 3650 has a locking mechanism 3660 (unlock solenoid 3663) provided near the right slide support part 3652c supported by the right guide shaft 3602, so the rotational moment applied from the right slide support part 3652c to the guide shaft 3602 is suppressed, allowing the rear upper decorative body 3650 to rise smoothly.

When the right lift slider 3612 lifts the rear upper decorative body 3650 and the right lift slider 3612 is detected by the right lift first sensor 3617, the rotation of the right spiral shaft 3611 by the rear right lower drive motor 3613 stops, and the lift of the right lift slider 3612 (rear upper decorative body 3650) stops. This causes the rear upper decorative body 3650 to return to its normal state, which is the retracted position.

Meanwhile, when the rear lower decorative body 3700 is raised from the retracted position to the central position, the left lifting slider 3632 of the left lifting mechanism 3630 does not rise any further, so when the lock by the locking mechanism 3660 is released, the left spiral shaft 3631 in the left lifting mechanism 3630 rotates in the reverse direction so that the left lifting slider 3632 descends, and the rear lower decorative body 3700 descends. At this time, the first rotating decorative body 3710, the second rotating decorative body 3720, the third rotating decorative body 3730, and the fourth rotating decorative body 3740 descend while rotating in the opposite direction to when they rose.

When the left lifting slider 3632 is detected by the left lifting sensor 3634, the rotation of the left spiral shaft 3631 by the rear left lower drive motor 3633 stops, and the descent of the left lifting slider 3632 (rear lower decorative body 3700) stops. This causes the rear lower decorative body 3700 to return to its normal state, which is the retracted position.

[5-11. Game board effects]
Next, the performance by the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 197 to 202. Figure 197 (a) is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the display screen of the performance display device is blacked out, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic relationship between the display screen of the performance display device and the front left back decorative sheet of the front left back performance unit in the back unit. Figure 198 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back upper right decorative body, the back right middle decorative body, and the back right lower decorative body of the back right performance unit in the back unit are moved to the appearance position. Figure 199 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back left decorative body of the back left back performance unit in the back unit is moved to the first appearance position, and Figure 200 is a front view of the front view of the game board shown in a state where the back left decorative body of the back left back performance unit in the back unit is moved to the second appearance position. Figure 201 is a front view of the game board showing the rear upper decoration of the rear rear performance unit in the rear unit having been dropped from the retracted position to the appearing position, and Figure 202 is a front view of the game board showing the rear upper decoration and the rear lower decoration of the rear rear performance unit in the rear unit having been moved to the central position.

As shown in FIG. 137, the game board 5 of this embodiment has a transparent panel plate 1110 of a game panel 1100 with a game area 5a at the front, but a rear cell 1130 (see FIG. 146) with a predetermined pattern is provided behind the panel plate 1110, so that the rear unit 3000 and the display screen of the performance display device 1600 provided at the rear can be seen mainly through the frame of the center role device 2500.

In the normal state, the game board 5 has the first back front upper decorative plate 3201, the second back front upper decorative plate 3203, and the third back front upper decorative plate 3203 of the back front upper performance unit 3200 in the back unit 3000, and the back rear upper decorative body 3650 in the retracted position in the back rear performance unit 3600, visibly arranged near the top edge within the frame of the center gimmick 2500. The first back front upper decorative plate 3201, the second back front upper decorative plate 3202, the third back front upper decorative plate 3203, and the back rear upper decorative body 3650 are arranged at intervals in the front-to-back direction, and each has the same logo in line with the concept of the game board 5. The logos on the back front upper first decorative plate 3201, back front upper second decorative plate 3202, and back front upper third decorative plate 3203 are engraved in a lined pattern so that the letters get smaller as you move further back, and the logo on the back front upper third decorative plate 3203 and the logo on the back rear upper decorative body 3650 are made the same size. This allows the player to see a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of perspective, with the letters of the logo getting larger from the back to the front (see Figure 197).

In this normal state, three decorative plates, the first back-front upper decorative plate 3201, the second back-front upper decorative plate 3202, and the third back-front upper decorative plate 3203, are provided in front of the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 in the retracted position in the back-rear performance unit 3600. Although the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 can be seen through these, this can create the illusion that the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 is a decoration that hangs from the three decorative plates, making it difficult to recognize that the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 is movable.

In addition, in the normal state, the three-dimensionally formed back front left decorative body 3301 of the back front left performance unit 3300 can be seen along the left edge of the frame of the center role device 2500, and the back upper right decorative body 3402, back right middle decorative body 3403, and back right lower decorative body 3404 of the back right performance unit 3400 can be seen lined up one above the other along the right edge of the frame of the center role device 2500.

In addition, under normal conditions, the rear left decorative body 3501 of the rear left performance unit 3500 is located behind the rear left front decorative body 3301 of the rear front left performance unit 3300 and the rear upper decorative body 3650 in the retracted position of the rear rear performance unit 3600, and is therefore not visible from the front.

Furthermore, in the normal state, the center allocation unit 2520 is visible on the lower edge within the frame of the center gimmick 2500. Behind this center allocation unit 2520, the rear lower decorative body 3700 is located in a retracted position in the rear performance unit 3600, and the rear lower decorative body 3700 is barely visible from the front.

The rear front left performance unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 in the game board 5 of this embodiment can be used to perform a performance such as that shown in Figure 197. In the rear front left performance unit 3300, as shown in Figure 197 (b), a certain distance is provided between the rear front left back decorative sheet 3308 of the rear front left performance unit 3300 and the performance display device 1600, so that when, for example, the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is blacked out from the normal state, the image on the rear of the rear front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen of the performance display device 1600, and the reflected image 3310 becomes visible (see Figure 197 (a)). As a result, while a performance is being performed using a performance image by the performance display device 1600, the display screen can be darkened or intentionally darkened to show the player a performance in which the pattern on the back of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen and the reflected pattern 3310 is visible. This can surprise the player with the faintly visible reflected pattern 3310, strongly attracting the player's attention and making the player think that something good is going to happen, thereby increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the pattern on the back of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is different from the pattern on the back front left decorative body 3301, the following performance effects can be achieved. In more detail, in the normal state in which the performance image is displayed on the display screen of the performance display device 1600, only the character (pattern) with a predetermined expression on the back front left decorative body 3301 is visible, and the reflected pattern 3310 in which the character (pattern) with a different expression on the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen to the right of the back front left decorative body 3301 is not visible. And, when the display screen is darkened by blacking out or the like, the character on the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 with a different expression from the expression on the back front left decorative body 3301 is reflected on the right of the back front left decorative body 3301, and the reflected pattern 3310 is visible, so that a performance in which the back face of the character can be seen can be presented to the player, and the player can enjoy the gap in the character's expression. For example, if this effect is performed before a big win is played, the effect can make the player feel strongly that he or she may have lost, and then the big win can surprise the player and further increase the player's interest.

In addition, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 197(b), a light emitting means 3320 such as an LED capable of irradiating light from the rear toward the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 may be provided. In this way, when the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is darkened due to a blackout or the like, the light emitting means 3320 can be made to emit light, thereby brightening the image on the back front left back decorative sheet 3308, making the image easier to reflect on the display screen of the performance display device 1600 and making the reflected image 3310 easier to see.

Alternatively, although not shown in the figure, an LED capable of emitting light rearward can be mounted on the rear surface of the rear-front-left main decorative board 3305, and when the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is darkened by a blackout or the like, the LED on the rear surface of the rear-front-left main decorative board 3305 can be illuminated, thereby brightening the image on the rear-front-left rear decorative sheet 3308, making it easier for the image to be seen on the display screen of the performance display device 1600.

Next, the back right performance unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 can be used to perform a performance such as that shown in FIG. 198. In the back right performance unit 3400, when the back right upper decorative body 3402, the back right middle decorative body 3403, and the back right lower decorative body 3404 are moved from the normal state in which they are lined up vertically to the appearance position by driving the back right drive motor 3405, the back right middle decorative body 3403 splits left and right into two, the back right middle left decorative body 3403a and the back right middle right decorative body 3403b, and the back right upper decorative body 3402, the back right middle left decorative body 3403a, the back right middle right decorative body 3403b, and the back right lower decorative body 3404 are transformed into a form in which they are arranged at the vertices of a diamond. As a result, the rear upper right decorative body 3402, the rear middle right left decorative body 3403a, and the rear lower right decorative body 3404 are closer to the center of the game area 5a (performance display device 1600), surprising the player and strongly drawing the player's attention to those decorative bodies, while making the player think that something good is going to happen with the appearance of the decorative bodies, thereby increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Next, using the rear left performance unit 3500 in the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5, the performances shown in Figures 199 and 200 can be executed. In the rear left performance unit 3500, when the rear left decorative body 3501 is rotated to the right and downward (clockwise direction) by driving the rear left drive motor 3503 from the normal state in which it is not visible from the front, and moved to the first appearance position, as shown in Figure 199, almost the entire rear left decorative body 3501 is located to the right of the rear left front decorative body 3301 and below the rear upper decorative body 3650, making it visible to the player, but part of the simulated blade tip is located behind the rear left front decorative body 3301 and below the rear upper decorative body 3650, making the overall shape unclear.

As a result, when the back left decorative body 3501 moves from the retreat position to the first appearance position, the back left decorative body 3501 becomes visible, so the player's attention can be drawn to the back left decorative body 3501. At this time, since a part of the back left decorative body 3301 is hidden and the overall shape is unclear, it is difficult to recognize the back left decorative body 3501 as the tip of the machete, so the player can be excited by whether the back left decorative body 3501 moves to a position where it can be seen in its entirety. Then, when the back left decorative body 3501 is further rotated in a clockwise direction by the back left drive motor 3503 to move it to the second appearance position, as shown in FIG. 200, the back left decorative body 3501 becomes visible in its entirety and is inclined so that the left end side protrudes forward. As a result, the front of the rear left decorative element 3501 is at an angle to the display screen of the performance display device 1600, and the tip of the machete blade that the rear left decorative element 3501 imitates appears to be protruding diagonally forward from the display screen of the performance display device 1600, creating a strong impact on the player and making them think that something good is going to happen, increasing their anticipation for the game.

In this way, with the back left performance unit 3500, the back left decoration 3501, which is normally invisible, becomes visible in two stages, making the player nervous and excited depending on how far the back left decoration 3501 appears, and entertaining the player. Then, when it moves to the second appearance position, the back left decoration 3501, which had been moving (rotating) parallel to the display screen of the performance display device 1600, moves so that the tip (left end) of its blade protrudes forward, allowing the player to see a moving performance that has never been seen in a pachinko machine before, which can make a strong impact on the player and make them strongly think that something good is going to happen, increasing their expectations for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Next, the rear performance unit 3600 of the rear unit 3000 in the game board 5 can be used to perform the performances shown in Figures 201 and 202. In the rear performance unit 3600, after the right lifting slider 3612 is moved to the lower moving end by driving the rear right lower drive motor 3613 of the right lifting mechanism 3610, when the lock release solenoid 3663 of the lock mechanism 3660 in the rear upper decorative body 3650 is energized, the lock by the upper lock claw 3661b of the lock latch 3661 is released, and the rear upper decorative body 3650 falls and abuts from above against the rear lower decorative body 3700 provided below (see Figure 201). At this time, the rear upper decorative body 3650 is biased downward by the auxiliary spring 3616, so the rear upper decorative body 3650 falls at an initial speed faster than the free fall. In addition, when the rear upper decorative body 3650 falls and hits the rear lower decorative body 3700 in the lower retracted position, the shock is absorbed by the shock absorbing part 3781f, and the lower locking claw 3661c of the locking latch 3661 is engaged with the locking groove 3781e, preventing it from bouncing upward.

This allows the upper rear decorative body 3650 to fall at a speed faster than a free fall and does not bounce upwards after falling, so the player can see a moving effect (falling effect) that gives the impression of a heavy, heavy fall, creating a strong impact on the player.

Then, after the rear upper decorative body 3650 has fallen and moved to the appearance position, the right lifting slider 3612 is raised by the rear lower right drive motor 3613 of the right lifting mechanism 3610, and the left lifting slider 3632 is raised by the rear lower left drive motor 3633 of the left lifting mechanism 3630, and the rear upper decorative body 3650 and the rear lower decorative body 3700 are raised together to the central position while combined vertically. At this time, the first rotating decorative body 3710, the second rotating decorative body 3720, the third rotating decorative body 3730, and the fourth rotating decorative body 3740 of the rear lower decorative body 3700 rotate around the front-to-back axis while rising, and when they reach the central position, as shown in Figure 202, a large decorative body with the characters "殺" (tragedy) from the first rotating decorative body 3710, "劇" (drama) from the second rotating decorative body 3720, "回" (turn) from the third rotating decorative body 3730, and "防" (avoid) from the fourth rotating decorative body 3740 lined up on the left and right appears in the center of the display screen of the performance display device 1600 in the vertical center of the large, long machete composed of the rear upper decorative body 3650 and the rear decorative body 3750.

This makes a strong impact on the player, and the words "Avoid Tragedy" on the first rotating ornament 3710, the second rotating ornament 3720, the third rotating ornament 3730, and the fourth rotating ornament 3740 give the player a strong sense that a favorable gaming state will occur, such as a "jackpot," which will give the player an advantage, thereby increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, as a performance using the back-rear performance unit 3600, after dropping the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 to the appearance position, the lock mechanism 3660 can be used to release the lock with the lock groove 3781e of the back-rear lower decorative body 3700, and only the back-rear right lower drive motor 3613 of the right lifting mechanism 3610 can be driven without driving the back-rear left lower drive motor 3633 of the left lifting mechanism 3630, to lift only the back-rear upper decorative body 3650. This makes it possible to make the player nervous and excited depending on whether the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 rises in a state combined with the back-rear lower decorative body 3700 after the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 has fallen, which can entertain the player and also present a variety of combinations of performances to the player, making it less likely for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

6. Control Configuration
Next, the control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 203 and the like. FIG. 203 is a block diagram showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine in outline. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, as shown in the figure, and each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a performance display control unit 1512 that controls the display of performance images on the performance display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. The payout control board 633 is equipped with a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but includes a main control MPU, which is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands and a RAM that temporarily stores data, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit for driving various solenoids, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built into the main control MPU, a setting display for displaying setting values and errors, and a base monitor for displaying the number of game balls B collected by the out port 2020 and the sub-out port 2021 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also includes a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

In addition to its built-in RAM (hereafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and built-in ROM (hereafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), the main control MPU also has built-in watchdog timers (hereafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") that monitor its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The main control MPU also has built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU as a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) to identify the individual unit. Once this ID code is assigned, it cannot be rewritten even using an external device, as it is stored in the non-volatile RAM. The main control MPU is capable of retrieving the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and referencing it.

The main control MPU also has a built-in circuit that resets the main control MPU by hardware when it is affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a specified register of the main control MPU, and if the register changes to an inconsistent content, it resets the main control MPU as it has been affected by electrical noise. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be disabled by controlling it with a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forced to reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing described below, and it will again execute the main control side power on processing described below. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, as described below, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased (cleared). Furthermore, even if the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU does not output a reset signal to the dispensing control board 633, so only the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) is restarted, and the dispensing control board 633 remains in an activated state.

The main control MPU also has a built-in hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in hardware random number circuit") that uses hardware to update the jackpot determination random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state, among various random numbers related to gaming. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and is configured so that the predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (i.e., the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as the initial value, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU (a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the main control MPU), and when all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such rapid lottery selection, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time when it obtains a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as the random number for determining a jackpot.

The main control input circuit does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals, which are detection signals from the various sensors, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown). In other words, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit in which information based on detection signals from the various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by a main control system reset, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 detects the game ball B received in the first lower start opening 2003, the first upper start opening sensor 2524 detects the game ball B received in the first upper start opening 2004, the second start opening sensor 2601 detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2005, the general winning opening sensor 3001 detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2501 detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2002, the first large winning opening sensor 3002 detects the game ball B received in the first large winning opening 2006, the second large winning opening sensor 2601 detects the game ball B received in the first large winning opening 2007, the first large winning opening sensor 2602 detects the game ball B received in the first large winning opening 2008, the second large winning opening sensor 2603 detects the game ball B received in the first large winning opening 2009, the first large winning opening sensor 2604 detects the game ball B received in the first large winning opening 2001, the second large winning opening sensor 2605 detects the game ball B received in the first large winning opening 2002, the first large winning opening sensor 2606 detects the game ball B received in the first large winning opening 2003, the second large winning opening sensor 2606 detects the game ball B received in the first large winning opening 2004, the first large winning opening sensor 2601 detects the game ball B received in the first large winning opening 2005, the second large winning opening sensor 2602 detects the game ball B received in the first large winning opening 2006, the second large winning opening sensor 2603 detects the game ball B received in the first large winning opening 2006, the second large winning opening sensor 2604 detects the game ball B received in the first large winning opening 2007, the second large winning opening Detection signals from the second large winning port sensor 2602 that detects the game ball B received in the winning port 2007, the V winning port sensor 2603 that detects the game ball B received in the V winning port 2008, the losing port sensor 2604 that detects the game ball B received in the losing port 2009, the out sensor 664 that detects the game ball B discharged from the game board 5, the magnetic sensor 1030 that detects illegal magnetism within the game area 5a, and the vibration sensor 1040 that detects vibrations acting on the game board 5, etc. are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signals from the setting key switch and setting switching button provided on the setting change board are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

The detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main frame opening switch are input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633 (i.e., directly, without passing through the dispensing control input circuit and dispensing control output circuit described below), and are then input to the input terminals of the specified input ports of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first lower start gate sensor 2101, the first upper start gate sensor 2524, and the second start gate sensor 2601 are input directly to the main control board 1310 without going through other boards, and are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit. In contrast, the detection signals from the general winning gate sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2501, the first large winning gate sensor 3002, the second large winning gate sensor 2602, the V winning gate sensor 2603, the losing gate sensor 2604, the magnetic sensor 1030, and the vibration sensor 1040 are input indirectly to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board, and are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the output terminal of its specified output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the main control solenoid drive circuit outputs the respective drive signals to the starting port solenoid 2632, the first attacca solenoid 2642, the second attacca solenoid 2652, the V distribution solenoid 2662, and the center distribution drive motor 2525 via the panel relay board, i.e. indirectly, and outputs the respective drive signals from the output terminal of its specified output port to the status indicator, normal pattern indicator, normal hold indicator, first special pattern indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special pattern indicator, second special hold number indicator, and round indicator of the function display unit 1400 without going through other boards, i.e. directly. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU also outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of its specified output port to the setting change permission lamp of the setting change board.

The main control MPU outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the specified output port to the payout control board 633, outputs a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the specified output port to the power failure monitoring circuit, and outputs a launch permission signal that indicates that the launch of the game ball B is permitted to be output from the output terminal of the specified output port to the payout control board 633. The logic of the launch permission signal that indicates that the launch is permitted is set to the launch permission logic when the launch is permitted, and is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the launch permission logic when the launch is not permitted. The logic of the launch permission signal is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that it is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the launch permission logic as an initial value (default) from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power is restored) until the launch permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process described later is started.

In this embodiment, the first lower start gate sensor 2101, the first upper start gate sensor 2524, the second start gate sensor 2601, the gate sensor 2501, the first large prize entry gate sensor 3002, the second large prize entry gate sensor 2602, the V prize entry gate sensor 2603, the miss gate sensor 2604, and the out sensor 664 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches, whereas the general prize entry gate sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF operation mechanical switch. This is because game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first lower start gate 2003, the first upper start gate 2004, the second start gate 2005, and the gate 2002, so that the first lower start gate sensor 2101, the second start gate sensor 2601, and the gate sensor 2501 also frequently detect game ball B. For this reason, the first lower start port sensor 2101, the second start port sensor 2601, the first upper start port sensor 2524, and the gate sensor 2501 use proximity switches that are highly durable and have a long lifespan.

In addition, when a favorable game state (such as a "jackpot" game) occurs that is advantageous to the player, the first large winning hole 2006 is opened and the game ball B enters the hole frequently, so the first large winning hole sensor 3002 also frequently detects the game ball B. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the first large winning hole sensor 3002. In addition, since the game ball B shot into the game area 5a is collected in large quantities by the out hole 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, the out sensor 664 also frequently detects the game ball B. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the out sensor 664. In contrast, the general winning hole 2001, where the game ball B does not enter frequently, is not frequently detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001. For this reason, a mechanical switch with a shorter life than a proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001. Furthermore, regardless of whether game balls B frequently enter the general winning hole 2001, a highly durable and long-life proximity switch may be used.

The main control MPU also transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payouts to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Furthermore, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of game presentations and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. Note that, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, which will be described in detail later, it formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is equipped with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor allows the main control MPU to store various information in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. This stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the dispensing control board 633.

The main control board 1310 is also provided with a power outage monitoring circuit. This power outage monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and when these voltages fall below the power outage warning voltage, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the dispensing control board 633, etc.

[6-2. Dispense control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of game balls B, is equipped with a payout control unit 633a which performs various controls related to payout, a launch control unit 633b which controls launch using the launch solenoid 542 and also controls ball supply using the ball supply solenoid 145, an error LED indicator which displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch having a push operation unit for releasing an error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball removal switch which, during maintenance, discharges the game balls B in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guidance unit 570, and payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and initiates the ball removal operation.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The dispensing control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to dispensing in the dispensing control board 633, is equipped with a dispensing control MPU, which is a microprocessor with built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and RAM for temporarily storing data, a dispensing control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the dispensing control MPU is operating normally, a dispensing motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 584 of the dispensing device 580, and a dispensing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to dispensing are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the dispensing control MPU also has built-in functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payouts from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, and receives the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port. In addition, it also receives detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball out detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590.

The detection signals from the ball out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

In addition, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch, which detects the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the main frame opening switch, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are input to the dispensing control input circuit and input to the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control I/O port.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the fall cover unit 150, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310, and the error release signal from the error release switch are input to a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator to the error LED indicator via the payout control I/O port, transmits commands for indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, and outputs the number of game balls B actually paid out to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's play by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display that displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The error LED display may display and notify the user of the following: For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it notifies that it is "normal", when the number "0" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633), when the number "1" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "ball out" (specifically, that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580 based on a detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574), when the number "2" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "ball stuck" (specifically, that a game ball B is stuck between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589 based on a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, making it difficult for the payout blade 589 to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 59 When the number "5" is displayed, it indicates a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). When the number "6" is displayed, it indicates a "full" state (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the fault cover unit 150 based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it indicates a "CR not connected" state (the electrical connection has been cut somewhere between the payout control board 633 and the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it indicates a "stocking" state (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a preset number).

The ball loan request signal for game ball B from the ball loan button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be loaned in accordance with the ball loan request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls B loaned, and outputs a display signal of the remaining balance to the ball loan operation unit 220, and this signal is input to the ball loan display section 226 of the ball loan operation unit 220 and displayed.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on this clock signal, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a ball delivery solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball delivery solenoid 145 based on the launch reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are launched per minute toward the game area 5a and outputs it to the launch solenoid drive circuit, and generates a ball delivery reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the launch reference pulse and outputs it to the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the detection signals from the handle touch sensor 192, which detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and the single button operation sensor 194, which detects whether the player will forcibly stop shooting the game ball B, are input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the detection signals are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then to the launch timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310, which conveys permission to shoot the game ball B, is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. The signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the strength with which the game ball B is shot toward the play area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 195, is input to the launch solenoid drive circuit.

Unless launch condition 1 is met, that is, the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, launch condition 2 is met, that the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected based on a CR connection signal, and launch condition 3 is met, that the launch of game ball B is permitted based on a launch permission signal from the main control board 1310, the launch timing control circuit will not output a launch reference pulse to launch game ball B toward the play area 5a. For example, the launch solenoid drive circuit will not output a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 and game ball B cannot be launched.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current to the launch solenoid 542 to launch the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 195, triggered by the input of a launch reference pulse. On the other hand, the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball delivery solenoid 145, triggered by the input of a ball delivery reference pulse, to receive one game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 into the ball delivery unit 140, and sends the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 by stopping the output of the constant current, triggered by the end of the input of the ball delivery reference pulse. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit to the ball delivery solenoid 145 is controlled to be constant.

In this embodiment, the launch control unit 633b, which controls launch by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery by the ball delivery solenoid 145, is provided on the payout control board 633, but it may also be configured to be provided on the power supply board 630. In this case, the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board (not shown).

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 203, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a performance display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control unit 1511.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511 which controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510, although detailed illustration is omitted, is equipped with a peripheral control IC in which a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces are integrated onto a single semiconductor chip, a peripheral control ROM which stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC which produces high-quality sound, and a sound ROM which stores sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referenced by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control IC has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on a single semiconductor chip, and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC transmits game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands, and transmits game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate the various presentation units provided on the game board 5 from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5. The door side drive light emission data, which is composed of door side drive data for outputting drive signals to the vibration motor 356, operation button lift drive motor 367, and protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381, etc., provided on the door frame 3, and door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, control data (display commands) indicating the screen to be displayed on the performance display device 1600 is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the display control unit to the performance display control unit 1512, and a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the contact detection sensor body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the lift detection sensor 374, and the protrusion force detection sensor 375 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 indicating that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and monitors the operation of the performance display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and controls the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, etc., which are provided on the door frame 3 and main frame 4, so that music and sound effects corresponding to various performances are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch protruding backward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, by sending an audio signal (e.g., 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) as sound information to the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the peripheral control unit 1511 also has an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses the built-in WDT and the external WDT together to diagnose whether its own system is out of control.

The display commands output from the CPU of this peripheral control IC to the performance display control unit 1512 are sent via a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (the amount of data that can be sent per unit time) is set to 19.2 kilobits per second (bps). On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side light blinking command, game board side light blinking command, movable body drive command, etc., output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are sent via multiple serial input/output ports different from the display commands, and in this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

[6-3b. Display control unit]
The performance display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the performance display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and the like. A display control ROM for storing various data, a VDP (short for Video Display Processor) for controlling the display of the performance display device 1600, an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the performance display device 1600, and a display control ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the performance display device 1600. and an image RAM to which various data stored in the ROM is transferred and copied.

This display control MPU has built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the drawing of the performance display device 1600. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to inform the same. The display control MPU also receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of this execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores a variety of programs for generating screens to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, as well as schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the control data (display commands). The schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that specifies the screen configuration, and specifies the order in which the screens are drawn on the performance display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging non-resident area transfer data that specifies the order in which the various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data specifies the order in which the various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance for the screen data to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the display control ROM, starting from the first screen data, and outputs it to the VDP.

When the VDP receives screen data output from the display control MPU, it extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and outputs this generated drawing data to the performance display device 1600. When the performance display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to inform the display device 1600 of this. The VDP uses a line buffer system. This "line buffer system" is a system in which one line's worth of drawing data for drawing the left and right directions of the performance display device 1600 is stored in a line buffer, and the one line's worth of drawing data stored in the line buffer is output to the performance display device 1600.

The image ROM stores a large amount of sprite data, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and this affects the speed at which data is drawn on the performance display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is the base data, which is the data before the sprite is expanded into bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Now, to explain what a "sprite" is, a "sprite" is an image that is displayed as a unit on the performance display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the performance display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." As a result, when displaying multiple people on the performance display device 1600, multiple sprites are used. In addition to people, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be treated as a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the performance display device 1600 after their placement on the screen and their hierarchical relationship when sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as the "sprite overlapping order") are set.

A sprite is made up of multiple rectangular areas of 64 pixels each. The data used to draw these rectangular areas is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be represented using one sprite character, while relatively large sprites such as people can be represented using a total of six sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 x 3. Even larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using even more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be specified arbitrarily for each sprite.

The performance display device 1600 is driven by a main scan that sets the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels, from left to right when viewed from the front, and a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in a direction that intersects with the one direction. When the performance display device 1600 receives one line of drawing data output from the performance display control unit 1512, it outputs the data to each of the pixels in one line in a main scan from left to right when viewed from the front of the performance display device 1600. When the output of one line is completed, the performance display device 1600 moves to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and when the drawing data for the next line is input in the same way, it outputs the data to each of the pixels in one line in a main scan from left to right when viewed from the front of the performance display device 1600 based on the drawing data for the next line.

[6-3c. Vibration alarm processing]
The vibration notification process by the peripheral control board 1510 will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 204. Fig. 204 is a flowchart of the vibration notification process on the game board. The "vibration notification process" is a process of issuing an alarm to notify the user that a fraudulent act is being performed when the game ball B enters the center distribution unit 2520 through the upper warp passage 2513 of the center role 2500 as a role and satisfies a predetermined condition, and an illegal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 1040.

More specifically, in the "vibration alarm processing", first, the "game ball in-game device flag" in step S101 is another abbreviated flowchart, and judges the consistency between the detection of game ball B by the ball entry sensor 2527 on the IN side of the center distribution unit 2520 as a device, and the detection of game ball B by the first upper start port sensor 2524 and the ball discharge sensor 2528 on the OUT side, and sets a flag. Specifically,
Number of IN side > Number of OUT side ・・・・Flag ON
Number of IN side = Number of OUT side...Flag OFF
If the number on the IN side is smaller than the number on the OUT side, a flag is set to notify of a mismatch.

If the reel flag is not ON (flag OFF) in step S101, step S101 is repeated. If the reel flag is ON in step S101, the ON/OFF state of the "rear upper decorative body in operation flag" is determined in the next step S102. The operation flag turns ON when the rear upper decorative body 3650 moves (falls). If the operation flag is ON in step S102, return to step S101. If the operation flag is OFF in step S102, proceed to the next step S103.

In step S103, it is determined whether the "press operation performance in progress flag" is ON/OFF. The performance in progress flag is turned ON when a performance is performed by pressing the press operation section 303 in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame 3. In step S103, if the performance in progress flag is ON, the process returns to step S101, and if the performance in progress flag is OFF, the process proceeds to the next step S104.

In step S104, it is determined whether the "vibration alert flag" is ON or OFF. When vibration alert is executed, the alert flag is turned ON. In step S104, if the alert flag is ON, the process returns to step S101, and if the alert flag is OFF, the process proceeds to the next step S105.

In step S105, it is determined whether or not there is a "vibration detection command from the main control board." When the main control board 1310 detects vibration using the vibration sensor 1040, it transmits a vibration detection command to the peripheral control board 1510. In this step S105, if there is no vibration detection command, the process returns to step S101, and if there is a vibration detection command, the process proceeds to the next step S106.

In step S106, the "alarm process" is executed for a predetermined period of time, and then the normal state is restored. The "alarm process" in step S106 is executed in the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, for example, the words "vibration detected" are displayed in the center of the display screen of the performance display device 1600 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 minutes). In addition, the notification sound effect (siren) and the voice "vibration detected" are repeatedly output for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 90 seconds) from the top center speaker and top side speaker provided in the door frame top unit 450, the main frame speaker 622 provided in the main frame 4, etc. At this time, the volume is set to maximum. Furthermore, in the door frame 3, the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is illuminated in red, and the door frame left side decoration 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side decoration 435 of the door frame right side unit 430, and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are illuminated in flashing red and white. Then, the normal state is restored after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 minutes) has elapsed or when reset by a member of staff at the game hall.

In this way, when the pachinko machine 1 is struck or shaken to cause vibration so that the central distribution unit 2520 in the central device 2500 distributes the game ball B to the first upper starting hole 2004, an alarm is sounded by the vibration alarm processing, which makes players hesitate to commit fraudulent acts, and provides a pachinko machine 1 that is highly deterrent to fraudulent acts.

At this time, since the activation flag of the rear upper decorative body 3650 is checked in step S102, and the performance flag using the pressing operation unit 303 is checked in step S103, it is possible to avoid false detection of vibrations caused by the falling of the rear upper decorative body 3650 or vibrations caused by pressing the pressing operation unit 303, and thus to issue a warning, thereby preventing a false alarm from making the player uncomfortable and reducing their interest in the game.

As described above, in the center distribution unit 2520, the passage opening 2532 of the crane 2530 is non-circular, and the rolling surface portion 2531 is provided with a peripheral surface portion 2531b with a different angle, making it difficult for the game ball B to come into contact with the peripheral wall portion 2533. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is struck or shaken to cause abnormal vibrations, the abnormal vibrations will prevent the game ball B from changing its rolling direction and illegally entering the passage opening 2532. This, together with the vibration alarm processing, provides double protection against fraudulent activities, reliably preventing the achievement of fraudulent activities and providing a pachinko machine 1 with a higher deterrent effect against fraudulent activities.

[7. Game Contents]
The game contents of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 141 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the player rotates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3, and the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 is shot into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and a game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B shot into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the shooting strength. The shooting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the rotation amount of the handle 195, and the more it is rotated clockwise, the stronger the ball can be shot, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be shot continuously in one minute, that is, at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B hits the obstacle nails, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed and various movements are imparted to the game ball B, allowing the player to enjoy its movements. In addition to the obstacle nails, within the game area 5a, a windmill that rotates when the game ball B hits it is provided above the upper left side unit 2300 and to the left of the center role 2500.

When a game ball B is shot into the top of the center device 2500 and enters the left side of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center device 2500 when viewed from the front, it will flow on the left side of the center device 2500, that is, between the inner rail 1002 and the center device 2500, while abutting against multiple obstacle nails. On the left side of the center device 2500, the entrance to the upper warp passage 2513 and the entrance to the lower warp passage 2512 are always open to receive the game ball B.

The game ball B that enters the upper warp passage 2513 is supplied to the crane 2530 of the center distribution unit 2520 provided within the frame of the center role 2500. The game ball B supplied to the crane 2530 rotates within the dish-shaped crane 2530 and is then released to the first guideway 2521 below, where it rolls to the right along the slope of the first guideway 2521, and is distributed to either the first upper starting port 2004 or the distribution ball discharge port 2526 with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2) by the center distribution piece 2523, which moves forward and backward at a predetermined rhythm. The game ball B distributed to the first upper starting port 2004 is received by the first upper starting port 2004.

On the other hand, the game ball B that enters the lower warp passage 2512 is supplied to the stage 2514 provided within the frame of the center device 2500, rolls left and right on the stage 2514, and is released from either the central release section 2514a or the side release section 2514b so as to flow back into the game area 5a. The central release section 2514a of the stage 2514 is provided directly above the first lower starting opening 2003 in the left and right center of the game area 5a, so the game ball B released from the central release section 2514a is accepted by the first lower starting opening 2003 with a high probability. The game ball B released from the side release sections 2514b on both the left and right sides of the central release section 2514a may be accepted by the first lower starting opening 2003 with a certain degree of probability.

When game balls B are received in the first lower starting hole 2003 or the first upper starting hole 2004, a predetermined number (e.g., three balls) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the main control board 1310 draws a lottery for a first special symbol (e.g., "miss," "small hit," "2R jackpot," "5R jackpot," "15R jackpot," "probability change (probability change) hit," "time reduction (time reduction) hit," "probability change time reduction hit," "probability change without time reduction hit," "second jackpot," etc.). If the result of the lottery for the first special symbol drawn is anything other than "miss," a favorable game state in which the player is advantageous is generated. The result of the lottery for the first special symbol drawn is then suggested to the player over a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called the special change time).

In this embodiment, if a game ball B is received by the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004 during the period from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn (special variable time) due to the reception of a game ball B by the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004, the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol cannot be started, so the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn earlier is completed. The number of reserved lottery results of the first special symbol that are reserved is limited to four for the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004, and for any more than that, even if a game ball B is received by the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004, the lottery result of the first special symbol is not reserved but is discarded. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

If the game ball B that flows down to the left side of the center device 2500 does not enter the upper warp passage 2513 or the lower warp passage 2512, it may be pushed toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 or obstacle nails of the upper left side unit 2300, and may be accepted into the general winning opening 2001 or sub-out opening 2021 (left sub-out opening 2021a) of the side unit 2200, or the first lower starting opening 2003 of the starting opening unit 2100. When the game ball B is accepted into the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, when a game ball B that is shot into the upper part of the center device 2500 in the game area 5a enters to the right of the highest part of the peripheral wall portion 2511a of the center device 2500, it passes through either the upper right first guide passage 2541a or the upper right second guide passage 2541b of the upper right guide passage group 2541 of the center device 2500. The game ball B that has passed through the upper right guide passage group 2541 passes through either the lower right first guide passage 2542a or the lower right second guide passage 2542b of the lower right guide passage group 2542 that is provided with a gap below, and is released above the attacca unit 2600.

A number of obstacle nails are planted between the upper right guide passage group 2541 and the lower right guide passage group 2542. In addition, the lower right first guide passage 2542a of the lower right guide passage group 2542 has a large entrance, and a gate 2002 is provided in part of the entrance. Therefore, after circulating through the upper right guide passage group 2541, game ball B comes into contact with a number of obstacle nails and then passes through gate 2002 with a certain degree of probability. In addition, game ball B that passes through gate 2002 circulates through the lower right first guide passage 2542a.

When game ball B passes through this gate 2002 and is detected by the gate sensor 2501, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn is a "normal win," the second starting port 2005, which is closed by the second starting port door body 2631, opens for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 to 10 seconds), allowing game ball B to be received at the second starting port 2005.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery that is conducted when game ball B passes through gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the indication of the lottery result for the normal pattern (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also called the normal fluctuation time). This indication of the lottery result for the normal pattern is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting gate 2005 opens after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If game ball B passes through gate 2002 between the time when game ball B passes through gate 2002 and the time when the lottery result for the normal pattern is suggested, the suggestion of the lottery result for the normal pattern cannot begin, so the start of the suggestion of the lottery result for the normal pattern is reserved until the previous suggestion of the lottery result for the normal pattern has ended. Also, the number of reserved lottery results for the normal pattern is limited to four, and any more than this are discarded rather than reserved, even if game ball B passes through gate 2002. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

The game ball B that flows through the lower right guide passage group 2542 flows down to either the attacca upper shelf 2612, the central port 2605, or the right port 2606 in the attacca unit 2600. The game ball B that flows down to the attacca upper shelf 2612 is guided to the left and passes through the attacca right guide passage 2625, and is released to the left of the second large winning port 2007. Therefore, the game ball B that flows down onto the attacca upper shelf 2612 will not be accepted by the second starting port 2005 or the second large winning port 2007.

Downstream (below) of the central opening 2605 of the attacca unit 2600, the second large winning opening 2007 is provided, and the guide piece 2636 of the second starting opening opening unit 2630 is provided between the second large winning opening 2007 and the second starting opening opening 2007 so that it can move forward and backward. In other words, the second starting opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2007 are provided downstream of the central opening 2605. On the other hand, the downstream of the right opening 2606 merges with the central opening 2605 side at a location below the second starting opening 2005, and only the second large winning opening 2007 is provided. Therefore, the game ball B that flows down to the central opening 2605 may be received by the second starting opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2007, and the game ball B that flows down to the right opening 2606 may be received by the second large winning opening 2007.

In addition, of the lower right first guide passage 2542a and the lower right second guide passage 2542b of the lower right guide passage group 2542, the central opening 2605 of the attacca unit 2600 is provided below the lower right first guide passage 2542a, so there is a higher possibility that the air will be accepted by the central opening 2605, i.e., the second starting opening 2005, if it is circulated through the lower right first guide passage 2542a rather than the lower right second guide passage 2542b.

When a game ball B is received in the second starting port 2005 of the attacca unit 2600, a predetermined number (e.g., one) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the main control board 1310 draws a lottery for a second special symbol (e.g., "miss," "small hit," "2R jackpot," "5R jackpot," "15R jackpot," "probability change (changed probability) hit," "time-saving (time-saving) hit," "probability change time-saving hit," "probability change without time-saving hit," "second jackpot," etc.). If the result of the lottery for the drawn second special symbol is anything other than "miss," a favorable game state in which the player is at an advantage is created. The result of the lottery for the selected second special symbol is then suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as the special fluctuation time) that is longer than the special fluctuation time of the result of the lottery for the first special symbol.

In this embodiment, if a game ball B is received by the second starting port 2005 during the period from the start of the special lottery due to the reception of a game ball B by the second starting port 2005 until the lottery result of the drawn second special symbol is suggested (special fluctuation time), the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol cannot start, so the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previously drawn second special symbol is completed. The number of reserved lottery results of the second special symbol that are reserved is limited to four for each second starting port 2005, and for any more than this, the lottery result of the second special symbol is not reserved but discarded even if a game ball B is received by the second starting port 2005. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

The special variation time of the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the second starting hole 2005 is set longer than the special variation time of the lottery result of the first special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first lower starting hole 2003 or the first upper starting hole 2004. As a result, since it takes longer to consume the reserved number of the lottery result of the second special pattern, even if the number of game balls B received per unit time into the first lower starting hole 2003, the first upper starting hole 2004, and the second starting hole 2005 is the same, the number of lottery results of the second special pattern executed by the second starting hole 2005 is smaller. Therefore, even if the game ball B is shot into the right side of the center role 2500 in a normal state, there is a possibility that only the second starting hole 2005 will be accepted, and the frequency of the lottery result of the second special pattern being executed is low, so that the player can be actively made to perform a shooting operation that causes the game ball B to circulate on the left side of the center role 2500.

As described above, depending on the result of the drawing for the first special pattern or the result of the drawing for the second special pattern, which is drawn when game ball B is received in first lower start opening 2003, first upper start opening 2004, or second start opening 2005, first large prize opening 2006 or second large prize opening 2007 opens or closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, making it possible to receive game ball B.

Game ball B that flows down the central opening 2605 or the right opening 2606 of the Attacca unit 2600 and is not accepted by the second starting opening 2005 flows down onto the second large prize opening door body 2651 that closes the second large prize opening 2007, and is guided to the left by the second large prize opening door body 2651 and released into an area downstream of the Attacca right guide passage 2625.

When game ball B flows down at a timing when the second large winning opening 2007 is available for acceptance according to the lottery results of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, the game ball B is accepted by the second large winning opening 2007. When game ball B is accepted by the second large winning opening 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

In addition, the game ball B received by the second large winning opening 2007 is distributed to either the V winning opening 2008 or the losing opening 2009 by the V distribution unit 2660 provided downstream. Then, when the game ball B is distributed to the V winning opening 2008, a "big win" game is executed in which the first large winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern.

The game ball B that flows down to the attacca unit 2600 and circulates through the attacca right guide passage 2625, and the game ball B that is not accepted by either the second starting port 2005 or the second large prize port 2007, will flow down onto the first large prize port door body 2641 that closes the first large prize port 2006 with a high probability. On the way there, the general prize port 2001 of the attacca unit 2600 is provided, and there is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the general prize port 2001. In addition, to the right of the first large prize port 2006, a sub-out port 2021 (right sub-out port 2021b) is provided, which accepts the game ball B that is not accepted by the general prize port 2001 and does not flow down onto the first large prize port 2006 (first large prize port door body 2641). Furthermore, the game ball B that flows down onto the first large prize opening door body 2641 is released from the left end side of the first large prize opening door body 2641 and is received by the outlet 2020 (right outlet 2020b).

When game ball B flows down at a timing when the first large prize opening 2006 is available for acceptance according to the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the game ball B is accepted by the first large prize opening 2006. When game ball B is accepted by the second large prize opening 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

When the result of the drawing for the first special symbol or the result of the drawing for the second special symbol is a "jackpot", or when a game ball B is received by the V winning port 2008, if either a predetermined time (e.g., 20 to 40 seconds) has elapsed after the first large winning port 2006 has been opened to receive the game ball B, or a predetermined number of game balls B (e.g., 10) have been received by the first large winning port 2006, the opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is called one round) that closes the state to not receive the game ball B is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, if there is a "2R jackpot", this is repeated two rounds, if there is a "5R jackpot", five rounds, if there is a "15R jackpot", 15 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, after the jackpot game ends, there are "wins" that change the probability of drawing the first special symbol or the second special symbol of the "jackpot" ("probability win"), or change the display time of the presentation image suggesting the result of the drawing of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ("time-saving win").

If the result of the drawing for the first special symbol or the result of the drawing for the second special symbol (for example, the result of the drawing for the second special symbol) is a "second jackpot," the first big prize winning slot 2006 or the second big prize winning slot 2007 becomes capable of receiving the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, and then ST (Special Time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST maintains the state of special chance or time reduction for a specific number of predetermined fluctuations.

In this way, when the first large winning opening 2006 or the second large winning opening 2007 is able to accept the game ball B, the first large winning opening 2006 or the second large winning opening 2007 can accept the game ball B, thereby allowing a large number of game balls B to be paid out, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the lottery results for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the lottery results for the special symbols (the lottery results for the first special symbol and the lottery results for the second special symbol). The lottery results for the special symbols are suggested by the function display unit 1400 by repeatedly turning on and off multiple LEDs and flashing them for a predetermined period of time, and then the combination of lit LEDs suggests the lottery results for the special symbols.

On the other hand, the performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and the result of the lottery for the special symbol is suggested as a performance image. The performance image suggesting the result of the lottery for the special symbol on the performance display device 1600 displays three picture rows consisting of multiple pictures lined up in the left-right direction, and changes each picture row, sequentially stops and displays the picture rows that are displayed in a variable manner, and each picture row that is stopped and displayed is displayed so that the pictures of the three picture rows are a combination that corresponds to the lottery result of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is other than "miss", after the three picture rows stop and each picture is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and an advantageous game state (for example, "small win" game, "big win" game, etc.) according to the lottery result of the special symbol that was drawn is generated.

The time indicating the result of the special pattern lottery on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (special change time)) is different from the time indicating the result of the special pattern lottery on the performance display device 1600 (the time until the pattern row changes and the final image is displayed), and is set to a longer time on the function display unit 1400.

In addition to displaying a performance image to suggest the result of the lottery for the special symbol by the performance display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 can also perform a player participation type performance in which the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 301 in the performance operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 are operated according to the result of the lottery for the special symbol drawn. In the player participation type performance, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised and made more prominent by the operation button lift drive motor 367, and the player can enjoy the player participation type performance by operating the performance operation unit 301.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 can appropriately use the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, the performance display device 1600, the starting gate display unit 2110, the back front upper performance unit 3200, the back front left performance unit 3300, the back right performance unit 3400, the back rear left performance unit 3500, the back rear performance unit 3600, etc. to perform light-emitting performances and display performances, etc., and the player can be entertained by various performances, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be prevented.

Furthermore, in a player-participation presentation in which the player operates the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, if the player makes a mistake or fails to perform an operation that should be performed, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player so that the player can perform the correct operation.

[8. Second embodiment of door frame]
Next, the second embodiment of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 205 to 213. Fig. 205 is a front view of the door frame of the second embodiment, Fig. 206 is a rear view of the door frame of the second embodiment, Fig. 207 is a perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment seen from the right front, Fig. 208 is a perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment seen from the left front, and Fig. 209 is a perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment seen from the back. Fig. 210(a) is an exploded perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment disassembled into a door frame top add unit and others seen from the front, and Fig. 210(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the back. Fig. 211(a) is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top add unit disassembled into the front, and Fig. 212(b) is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top add unit disassembled into the back. Fig. 212(a) is a side cross-sectional view of the upper part of the door frame of the second embodiment, and Fig. 212(b) is an exploded side cross-sectional view of (a) disassembled into the door frame top add unit and others. Figure 213 (a) is an exploded oblique view of the key parts of the door frame of the second embodiment, viewed from behind, with the right side panel and right side decorative sheet disassembled from the door frame right side unit, and (b) is an oblique view of the right side panel viewed from the left rear.

The door frame 3 of the second embodiment is different from the door frame 3 of the first embodiment in that a door frame top add unit 490 is newly provided to the door frame top unit 450. In addition, the door frame 3 of the second embodiment has a different shape of the door frame right side base 431 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and the right side right lens 441 is eliminated, and a new right side panel 442 and right side decorative sheet 443 are added. In addition, the door frame 3 of the second embodiment has a new lock lever 444 added to the door frame base unit 100 to make the right side panel 442 detachable. The other parts are the same as those of the door frame 3 of the first embodiment, and parts with the same configuration are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations are omitted.

The door frame 3 of the second embodiment has a door frame top add unit 490 that can be attached to cover the door frame top unit 450 without removing the door frame top unit 450 to change the decoration of the upper part of the door frame 3, a transparent right side panel 442 that is removably attached to the right of the door frame right side base 431 of the door frame right side unit 430, a right side decorative sheet 443 that is provided between the right side panel 442 and the door frame right side base 431 and has a predetermined pattern on it, and a lock lever 444 that is provided on the door frame base unit 100 and can lock the right side panel 442 so that it cannot be removed.

[8-1. Door frame top add unit]
The door frame top add unit 490 in the door frame 3 of the second embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 210 to 212. The door frame top add unit 490 allows the decoration of the upper part of the door frame 3 to be changed without removing the door frame top unit 450. The door frame top add unit 490 has a door frame top add decoration 491 formed to cover the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 from the front and above, a flat top plate support plate 492 that can close the opening 491d that penetrates the door frame top add decoration 491 in the vertical direction, a top add top plate 493 that is slidable in the front-rear direction by the top plate support plate 492 and whose rear end is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100, two mounting screws 494 that slidably attach the top add top plate 493 to the top plate support plate 492, and a plurality of hand screws 495 for attaching the rear end side of the top add top plate 493 to the door frame base unit 100.

The top ad decorative body 491 is formed so that it can cover the door frame top decorative body 453 from the front, and has a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward in the vertical center and a curved left-right center that bulges forward, and a semi-tubular decorative body main body 491a that is open to the rear, a central decorative body 491b that is provided on the front of the decorative body main body 491a in the horizontal center and is formed in a predetermined shape (here, a shape that resembles a hatchet), a lid portion 491c that extends flatly from the upper end edge of the decorative body main body 491a to the rear, an opening 491d that penetrates vertically near the center of the lid portion 491c, and an engaging portion 491e that is provided on both the left and right outside of the opening 491d in the lid portion 491c and can be engaged with the engaging claws 493c of the top ad top plate 493.

The main body 491a of the top ad ornament 491 has a three-dimensional decoration on the front side that protrudes forward like broken glass, and is translucent. The central ornament 491b is formed in the shape of a hatchet, with the handle extending diagonally to the upper right and the blade piercing the main body 491a. The opening 491d is a rectangle that is long from side to side.

The top plate support plate 492 is formed so that the opening 491d of the top add decorative body 491 can be closed from above. The top plate support plate 492 is formed so that it does not fall downward when the opening 491d is closed. The top plate support plate 492 has a pair of bosses (not shown) that protrude downward from the underside in a cylindrical shape and are spaced apart on the left and right. By inserting these bosses into the slits 493b of the top add top plate 493, the top add top plate 493 can be supported so that it can slide in the front and back directions. In addition, a mounting screw 494 is screwed into the lower end of this boss, and the mounting screw 494 prevents the top add top plate 493 from falling off the top plate support plate 492.

The top add top plate 493 is formed to be the same size as the door frame top top plate 468 of the door frame top unit 450, and has a flat top plate body 493a capable of closing the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452, a pair of slits 493b that penetrate the top plate body 493a in the vertical direction and extend in the front-to-rear direction and into which the boss portion of the top plate support plate 492 is slidably inserted, a locking claw 493c that is provided outward in the left-right direction from the pair of slits 493b and can be locked with the locked portion 491e of the top add decorative body 491, and multiple (here, three) mounting pieces 493d that protrude rearward from the rear edge of the top plate body 493a and are provided at intervals in the left-right direction.

The three mounting pieces 493d of the top-add top plate 493 are inserted from above into the grooves 464a provided on the rear surface of the speaker box 464 in the door frame top unit 450. The speaker box 464 is provided between the door frame top base 451 and the door frame top decorative body 453, and is attached to the front surface of the door frame top base 451. A pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers are attached to this speaker box facing diagonally downward and forward, and the inside forms an enclosure that can amplify sound. The grooves 464a of the speaker box 464 are recessed from the rear surface so as to be open upward and backward, and when assembled to the door frame 3, a space is formed between the door frame base unit 100 and the mounting pieces 493d can be inserted.

When attaching the door frame top add unit 490 to the door frame 3, the top add top plate 493 is attached to the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452 in such a way that it replaces the existing door frame top top plate 468. The screw portion 495b of the hand screw 495 is screwed into the attachment piece portion 493d from the rear of the door frame base unit 100.

The top add tabletop 493 is provided near the center in the left-right direction on the rear edge of the tabletop body 493a, and further has a recess 493e that is curved forward. This recess 493e provides a finger rest when attaching and detaching the door frame top add unit 490 (top add tabletop 493) to and from the door frame 3, improving the ease of attachment and detachment.

The hand screw 495 has a head 495a that can be gripped by the operator's fingers and a threaded portion 495b that protrudes from the head 495a. The head 495a of the hand screw 495 has a cross-shaped groove, and can also be turned with a Phillips head screwdriver.

In the door frame top add unit 490 of this embodiment, the top add top plate 493 is located below the lid portion 491c of the top add decorative body 491. In other words, the lid portion 491c of the top add decorative body 491 is located between the top plate support plate 492 and the top add top plate 493. The door frame top add unit 490 is arranged so that the rear end of the top add top plate 493 is located further rearward than the rear end of the lid portion 491c of the top add decorative body 491. In a state in which the boss portion of the top plate support plate 492 is located at the rear end of the slit 493b of the top add top plate 493 (a state in which the top add top plate 493 is located at the forward moving end relative to the top plate support plate 492), the locking claw 493c of the top add top plate 493 is locked to the locked portion 491e of the top add decorative body 491. As a result, the boss portion and the slit 493b restrict the relative forward movement of the top add top plate 493, and the locked portion 491e and the locking claw 493c restrict the relative backward movement of the top add top plate 493. Therefore, when the locked portion 491e and the locking claw 493c are released from the lock, the top add top plate 493 can be pulled backward within the length of the slit 493b.

Next, the installation of the door frame top add unit 490 will be described. First, the door frame top top plate 468 (see FIG. 210(a)) of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 has three mounting pieces (not shown) that protrude rearward from the rear end edge and are spaced apart in the left-right direction. The three mounting pieces of the door frame top top plate 468 are provided in the same position as the three mounting pieces 493d of the top add top plate 493. The door frame top top plate 468 is attached by having its front end engaged with the front end of the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452 and its rear end mounting piece inserted into the groove 464a on the rear surface of the speaker box 464, and then the screw portion 495b of the hand screw 495 that penetrates the door frame base unit 100 from the rear is screwed in.

Therefore, the door frame top unit 450 of the door frame 3 can easily remove only the door frame top plate 468 by removing the hand screws 495 screwed from the rear at the top of the door frame base unit 100. By removing this door frame top plate 468, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, a pair of top center speakers, a pair of top side speakers, the door frame top relay board, and the wiring EC and connectors connected to them, which are provided inside the door frame top unit 450, can be confirmed through the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452. In other words, the door frame top plate 468 is a cover for an inspection hatch. Note that in FIG. 210 and the like, the speaker box 464 and the like provided inside are illustrated as opaque, but in reality they are transparent and the inside can be clearly seen.

To install the door frame top add unit 490, first remove the hand screw 495 from the rear of the door frame 3, then lift the rear end upward to remove it above the door frame top plate 468. At this time, a curved recess 101k recessed backwards is formed near the left-right center of the part of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 that faces the rear edge of the door frame top plate 468, so the door frame top plate 468 can be easily removed by using the recess 101k as a finger hook.

After removing the door frame top top plate 468, position the door frame top add unit 490 in front of the door frame top unit 450, tilt it so that the rear end side is located upward, and then cover the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 from the front with the decorative body 491a of the top add decorative body 491, then move the rear end side downward and insert the three mounting pieces 493d into the groove 464a on the rear surface of the speaker box 464. This results in the top add top plate 493 closing the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452. Then, from the rear of the door frame base unit 100, the screw part 495b of the hand screw 495 is passed forward and screwed into the mounting piece part 493d of the top add top plate 493 and tightened. This results in the door frame top add unit 490 being attached to the door frame 3.

With the door frame top add unit 490 attached, the LEDs mounted on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are illuminated to illuminate and decorate the door frame top decorative body 453, and the light is irradiated forward through the light guide shaft section 469 (see Figure 212), which allows the decorative body main body 491a of the translucent top add decorative body 491 to be illuminated and decorated, allowing the player to see a specified light-emitting performance.

The decorative body 491a of the top add decorative body 491 covers the semi-tube-shaped door frame top decorative body 453, but does not cover the top bottom cover 465, so the sound from the top center speaker and top side speaker attached to the internal speaker box 464 can be output to the outside through the top bottom cover 465 without attenuation.

According to the door frame top add unit 490 of this embodiment, the door frame top top plate 468, which is a maintenance cover for the door frame top unit 450, can be removed and the door frame top add unit 490 can be installed by replacing it with the door frame top top plate 468, so that the door frame top add unit 490 can be installed without removing the door frame top unit 450. At this time, the door frame top add unit 490 has a top add decoration 491 that covers the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 from the front, so the decoration of the door frame top decoration 453 can be hidden and the decoration of the top add decoration 491 can be newly shown to the player. For this reason, the decoration of the upper part of the door frame 3 can be changed by installing the door frame top add unit 490 without removing the door frame top unit 450 from the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the cost of changing the decoration of the upper part of the door frame 3 can be reduced. In other words, the door frame top add unit 490 allows the decoration of the upper part of the door frame 3 to be changed at low cost.

As described above, the decoration of the top of the door frame 3 can be easily changed by attaching the door frame top add unit 490, so when replacing the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 due to a change in specifications or model, it is possible to attach a door frame top add unit 490 that corresponds to the decoration (concept) of the game board 5. This allows the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 to be significantly changed at low cost, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, because the door frame top add unit 490 and the door frame top plate 468 are attached with hand screws 495, the door frame top add unit 490 and the door frame top plate 468 can be easily attached and removed without tools such as a screwdriver. Therefore, even in game halls where pachinko machines 1 are installed, the door frame top add unit 490 can be easily attached, reducing the burden on the game hall.

In addition, since the door frame top add unit 490 does not have electronic components such as a decorative board, there is no need to connect wiring EC when attaching it to the door frame 3, making it possible to simplify the installation process. In addition, since the door frame top add unit 490 does not have electronic components, even if it is damaged for some reason and the top add decoration 491 etc. comes off, the wiring EC and top add decoration 491 etc. will not sag.

In addition, the door frame top add unit 490 has a top add decoration 491 that covers the door frame top decoration 453 from the front, which is translucent, so by illuminating the door frame top decoration 453, the top add decoration 491 can be illuminated. Therefore, the illumination effects of the door frame top unit 450 before the door frame top add unit 490 is attached can be reused as is, allowing players to enjoy the same illumination effects as before the attachment. Also, there is no need to change the program for the illumination effects, which helps to suppress increases in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the door frame top add unit 490 is attached from the rear side of the door frame 3 with a hand screw 495, when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, the hand screw 495 cannot be operated from the outside, and unauthorized removal of the door frame top add unit 490 can be prevented. Also, when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, the front surface of the main frame base 501 is located behind the hand screw 495, so even if the hand screw 495 loosens due to vibrations acting on the pachinko machine 1, it will not fall off to the rear, and the attachment of the door frame top add unit 490 can be maintained.

Although not shown in the figures, the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4 has a recess formed therein into which the hand screw 495 is inserted when the door frame 3 is closed. This recess in the main frame base 501 may be made to abut against the outer periphery of the head 495a of the hand screw 495. This provides resistance to the hand screw 495 in the rotational direction, making it difficult for the hand screw 495 to loosen.

Although not shown, the door frame top add unit 490 may have a through hole penetrating from front to back at a position corresponding to the light guiding shaft 469. This allows the tip of the light guiding shaft 469 to be directly exposed forward through the through hole, so that even when the door frame top add unit 490 is attached, the player can see a highly luminous light-emitting effect using the light guiding shaft 469. In addition, the door frame top add unit 490 may have a light-guiding section that guides light from the light guiding shaft 469, etc., so that any position on the door frame top add unit 490 (for example, the central decorative body 491b that resembles a hatchet) can be illuminated and decorated by the light-guiding section.

Although not shown, the central decorative body 491b of the top ad decorative body 491 in the door frame top ad unit 490 is shaped to resemble a hatchet, so that the hatchet blade part of the central decorative body 491b is formed like a mirror, and when a player seated in front of this pachinko machine 1 looks into the central decorative body 491b (hatchet) from below, the game board 5 may be reflected in the mirror-like part (the part imitating the hatchet blade) of the central decorative body 491b. Specifically, for example, the pattern of the light guide plate of the back front upper first decorative body 3201 in the back front upper performance unit 3200, the performance image displayed in a specific part on the display screen of the performance display device 1600, etc. may be reflected and seen. When the performance image on the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is reflected, a mirror character may be displayed on the display screen, and it may be reflected in the hatchet blade part of the central decorative body 491b so that it can be read correctly. This can surprise the player, entertain the player, and prevent a decline in interest. In addition, to encourage the player to look at the central decorative body 491b from below, a guide to do so may be displayed or announced.

Furthermore, although not shown in the figures, a predetermined pattern may be applied to the underside of the part of the central decorative body 491b of the top add decorative body 491 in the door frame top add unit 490 that resembles a hatchet blade by printing or attaching a sticker. Specifically, for example, a pattern displayed on a light guide plate such as the back front upper first decorative body 3201 may be reflected and reflected on the part of the central decorative body 491b that resembles a hatchet blade. As a result, even though no pattern is displayed on the light guide plate of the game board 5, when the player looks up at the central decorative body 491b, the pattern on the light guide plate appears to be reflected on the part that resembles a blade, which can surprise and amuse the player, causing them to wonder and entertain them.

In addition, the underside of the part of the central decorative body 491b that resembles a machete blade may be decorated with a pattern of the eyes (face) of a specified character that is in line with the concept of the game board 5. This allows a player playing the pachinko machine 1 to feel as if he or she is always being watched by a specified character when he or she notices the pattern of eyes on the underside of the central decorative body 491b.

Although not shown in the figure, light from an LED mounted on the door frame top central decorative board 455 of the door frame top unit 450 can be guided to make the pattern on the underside of the part of the central decorative body 491b that resembles a hatchet blade glow.

Furthermore, a predetermined image (or video) may be projected from the game board 5 side or the door frame right side unit 430 side onto the underside of the part of the central decorative body 491b that resembles a hatchet blade, like a projector. In this case, the part of the central decorative body 491b that resembles a hatchet blade may be made to act as a mirror, so that the image projected onto the central decorative body 491b is reflected and projected onto the player's hands or feet, the upper tray 201, the performance operation unit 301, etc.

In addition, since the central decorative body 491c of the top ad decorative body 491 of the door frame top ad unit 490 of this embodiment protrudes significantly forward, it is desirable to provide a guide sign (e.g., a sticker) in a location visible to the player to alert the player to "watch above their head" or to provide a warning sign (e.g., a sticker) cautioning the player not to touch the central decorative body 491c, which resembles a hatchet blade.

[8-2. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 of the second embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 213 and the like. The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, as in the first embodiment, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. In the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 of the second embodiment, the right side surface of the door frame right side base 431 is formed as a flat surface without a reflector part 431a. Although not shown, the left side surface of the door frame right side base 431 is provided with a reflector part 431a that is recessed so as to be open to the front and left. In addition, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, which is decorated with a polka dot pattern by two-color molding or the like, is provided only near the lower part of the door frame right side unit 430 from the lower end to a predetermined height.

This door frame right side unit 430 has a transparent right side panel 442 that is removably attached to the right of the door frame right side base 431 behind the tubular door frame right side decorative body 435, a right side decorative sheet 443 that is attached between the right side panel 442 and the door frame right side base 431 and has a predetermined pattern on it, and a lock lever 444 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and locks the right side panel 442 so that it cannot be removed.

The door frame right side base 431 of the door frame right side unit 430 has multiple locking grooves 431b spaced apart in the vertical direction on the front and rear edges, and two protrusions 431c protruding from the top surface of the door frame right side base 431. The locking piece 442b and the locking piece 442c of the right side panel 442 are inserted into the locking grooves 431b of the door frame right side base 431. The protrusions 431c of the door frame right side base 431 are inserted into the slits 442e of the right side panel 442.

The right side panel 442 has a flat panel body 442a, a locking piece 442b extending flatly to the left from the upper part of the rear end edge of the panel body 442a, a locking piece 442c that is provided at a distance in the vertical direction between the front end edge and a portion of the rear end edge of the panel body 442a below the locking piece 442b and that extends flatly to the left shorter than the locking piece 442b, an upper wall portion 442d that extends flatly to the left from the upper end edge of the panel body 442a, and two slits 442e that penetrate the upper wall portion 442d.

The panel body 442a of the right side panel 442 is long in the vertical direction. The front end edge of the panel body 442a is formed to follow the rear end edge of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the rear end edge is formed to extend just ahead in the vertical direction so as to follow the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The lock piece 442b and the multiple engagement pieces 442c are provided at locations corresponding to the engagement groove 431b of the door frame right side base 431. The multiple engagement pieces 442c are formed in an inverted L shape with the tip bent downward.

The right side panel 442 can be fitted with the upper wall portion 442d positioned slightly above the protrusion 431c of the door frame right side base 431 by inserting the multiple locking pieces 442c into the locking grooves 431b of the door frame right side base 431 and abutting the panel body 442a against the right side surface of the door frame right side base 431 via the right side decorative sheet 443, and then sliding downward so that the protrusion 431c is inserted into the slit 442e, thereby locking the multiple locking pieces 442c into the locking grooves 431b.

The right side decorative sheet 443 is a synthetic resin film with a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm, on which a predetermined pattern is printed. The materials that can be used for the right side decorative sheet 443 include "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", "polyethylene resin", "polystyrene resin", "high impact polystyrene resin", "polyvinyl chloride", etc.

The lock lever 444 is provided at the upper right corner (upper left corner in rear view) of the rear surface of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and the lower end side is supported so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 213(a), in the locked state, the rear surface of this lock lever 444 stands vertically, and the lock can be released by rotating the upper end side so that it moves backward. Although not shown, the lock lever 444 has a lock protrusion that protrudes forward from near the upper end. When in the locked state, the lock protrusion abuts against the lock piece 442b of the right side panel 442 from above, restricting the upward sliding of the lock piece 442b (right side panel 442), and disabling (locking) the right side panel 442 from being attached or detached.

When the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment is assembled to the door frame 3, the multiple locking pieces 442c of the right side panel 442 are locked into the locking grooves 431b of the door frame right side base 431, and the protrusion 431c of the door frame right side base 431 is inserted into the slit 442e, restricting movement to the right. In addition, the locking protrusion of the lock lever 444 in the locked position abuts against the locking piece 442b of the right side panel 442 from above, restricting upward movement. This makes the right side panel 442 unremovable.

When removing the right side panel 442, the upper end of the lock lever 444 is pulled backward at the rear of the door frame 3 to tilt the lock lever 444. This causes the lock protrusion (not shown) to move away from the upper part of the lock piece 442b of the right side panel 442, and the restriction (lock) of the upward movement of the right side panel 442 is released. In this state, the right side panel 442 is slid upward to remove the protrusion piece 431c of the door frame right side base 431 from the slit 442e of the upper wall part 442d, and the engagement between the multiple lock pieces 442c and the lock groove 431b is released. Then, when the right side panel 442 is moved to the right, the lock piece 442c and the lock piece 442b are removed from the lock groove 431b, and the right side panel 442 is removed from the door frame right side base 431. By removing this right side panel 442, the right side decorative sheet 443 can also be removed.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the right side panel 442 and right side decorative sheet 443 of the door frame right side unit 430 can be removed by operating the lock lever 444 on the rear side of the door frame 3. Therefore, when replacing the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 due to a change in specifications or model, the right side panel 442 can be replaced with a right side panel with a decoration that corresponds to the decoration (concept) of the game board 5, or the right side decorative sheet 443 with a pattern, so that the door frame right side unit 430 of the door frame 3 can easily accommodate model changes, etc., making it easier to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, the right side panel 442 and right side decorative sheet 443, which form most of the right side of the door frame right side unit 430, can be easily replaced, so the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be significantly changed by simply replacing the right side decorative sheet 443 with one with a different pattern without having to replace the entire door frame right side unit 430, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is appealing at low cost.

In addition, the right side panel 442 and right side decorative sheet 443 can be easily removed simply by opening the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 and operating the lock lever 444 on the rear side of the door frame 3, which improves workability on the part of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and reduces the burden on the game hall.

Furthermore, because the lock lever 444 is located in the upper right corner on the rear side of the door frame 3, when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, the front surface of the main frame base 501 is located behind the lock lever 444, rendering the lock lever 444 unable to rotate. This prevents the lock provided by the lock lever 444 from being released accidentally due to vibrations acting on the pachinko machine 1, and prevents the lock lever 444 from being released by unauthorized operation.

[9. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiment]
The unit base 3601 of the rear performance unit 3600 on the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment corresponds to the fixed base of the present invention, the rear lower decorative body 3700 in this embodiment corresponds to the movable decorative body of the present invention, the first rotating decorative body decorative board 3713, the second rotating decorative body decorative board 3723, the third rotating decorative body decorative board 3733, the fourth rotating decorative body decorative board 3743, and the rear decorative body decorative board 3753 in this embodiment correspond to the electronic components of the present invention, the gear cover 3787 attached to the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780 in this embodiment corresponds to the movable base of the present invention, the wiring engagement portion 3787b in this embodiment corresponds to the harness support portion of the present invention, the unit arm 3788 in this embodiment corresponds to the arm of the present invention, the cable tie CT in this embodiment corresponds to the movement restricting means of the present invention, and the harness WH3 in this embodiment corresponds to the harness of the present invention.

[10. Characteristic Effects of the Present Embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the rear rear performance unit 3600 in the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5, the rear lower decorative body 3700 which moves according to the progress of the game, has a harness WH3 consisting of multiple wiring EC connected to the rear lower decorative body decorative board 3753 etc. provided on the rear lower decorative body 3700 supported by the wiring engaging portion 3787b provided on the rear surface of the gear cover 3787 of the right unit 3780, and then aligned with the unit arm 3788, one end of which is connected to the gear cover 3787 so as to extend outward from the gear cover 3787, and guided from the other end of the unit arm 3788 to the unit base 3601 side. Furthermore, when the rear lower decorative body 3700 is moved as the game progresses, the movement of the rear lower decorative body 3700 causes the unit arm 3788 to displace (rotate) relatively, so that the portion of the harness WH3 closest to one end of the unit arm 3788 moves the most due to the movement of the rear lower decorative body 3700, making it easier for the harness WH3 to come off at the wiring engagement portion 3787b close to one end of the unit arm 3788. At this time, the movement of the harness WH3 is restricted by bundling it with the cable tie CT at the wiring locking portion 3787b, so that even if tension or the like acts on the harness WH3 by moving the back lower decorative body 3700 according to the progress of the game, and the harness WH3 tries to move in the direction of coming off the wiring locking portion 3787b, the cable tie CT can suppress the movement of the harness WH3 along the wiring locking portion 3787b, and the harness WH3 can be prevented from coming off the wiring locking portion 3787b. In addition, since the cable tie CT restricts the movement of the harness WH3 consisting of a plurality of wirings EC within the wiring locking portion 3787b, the wirings EC do not come off one by one from the harness WH3 at the wiring locking portion 3787b, and it is possible to prevent some of the loose wirings EC from coming off the wiring locking portion 3787b, and it is possible to avoid the wiring EC coming off the wiring locking portion 3787b, which makes it easier to break the wiring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the harness WH3 from coming detached from the rear lower decorative body 3700, which would cause a malfunction and interruption to the game, and therefore the player will not feel uncomfortable.The player can reliably enjoy the presentation (movable presentation) provided by the rear lower decorative body 3700, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

As described above, the movement of the harness WH3 is restricted by the cable tie CT at the wiring locking portion 3787b close to one end of the unit arm 3788 where the harness WH3 is most likely to move due to the movement of the rear lower decorative body 3700. This effectively prevents the harness WH3 from coming off the wiring locking portion 3787b due to the movement of the rear lower decorative body 3700, and reliably prevents the harness WH3 from coming off the wiring locking portion 3787b, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, the movement of the harness WH3 is restricted by the cable tie CT at the wiring locking part 3787b near one end of the unit arm 3788 where the harness WH3 is most likely to move due to the movement of the rear lower decorative body 3700. Even if a force acts to move the harness WH3 due to the movement of the rear lower decorative body 3700, the force is blocked at the wiring locking part 3787b where the cable tie CT is provided, and it is possible to prevent the force from acting on the rear lower decorative body decorative board 3753, etc. side. This makes it possible to prevent the harness WH3 from coming off the rear lower decorative body decorative board 3753, etc. when the rear lower decorative body 3700 is moved, so that the rear lower decorative body decorative board 3753, etc. can be reliably operated, allowing the player to enjoy the performance by the rear lower decorative body 3700 in a good condition and preventing a decline in interest.

As described above, the cable tie CT at the wiring locking portion 3787b near one end of the unit arm 3788 can block the force that tries to move the harness WH3, making it difficult to move the area of the harness WH3 between the wiring locking portion 3787b and the rear decorative body decorative board 3753, etc. As a result, it is possible to omit the provision of the cable tie CT at the wiring locking portion 3787c provided between the wiring locking portion 3787b where the cable tie CT is provided and the rear decorative body decorative board 3753, etc., thereby simplifying the effort required to manufacture the pachinko machine 1 and suppressing increases in costs.

Furthermore, in the rear lower decorative body 3700, a wiring retaining portion 3787b is provided on the rear surface of the gear cover 3787 to allow the harness WH3 to run along it, and the harness WH3 extending outward from the gear cover 3787 is guided along the unit arm 3788 toward the unit base 3601. This allows the harness WH3 connected to the rear lower decorative body decorative board 3753 of the rear lower decorative body 3700 to be hidden and difficult to see from the front player side by the gear cover 3787 and unit arm 3788, improving the appearance of the rear lower decorative body 3700 and providing entertainment to the player.

In addition, since the tip of the wiring locking portion 3787b for supporting the harness WH3 is a free end, the harness WH3 can be easily inserted from the open free end side of the wiring locking portion 3787b, improving workability. At this time, since a hook portion (not shown) protruding toward the gear cover 3787 is provided at the tip of the wiring locking portion 3787b, when the harness WH3 is fastened and bundled together with the wiring locking portion 3787b by the cable tie CT, even if the cable tie CT slides together with the harness WH3 toward the free end of the wiring locking portion 3787b, further sliding is prevented by abutting against the hook portion, and the harness WH3 together with the cable tie CT can be prevented from coming off the tip of the wiring locking portion 3787b, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects can be provided.

Furthermore, the harness WH3 consisting of a plurality of wiring EC is bound to the wiring locking portion 3787b extending from the rear surface of the gear cover 3787 in the rear lower decorative body 3700 by tightening the cable tie CT together with the wiring locking portion 3787b, so that the sliding resistance between the harness WH3 and the wiring locking portion 3787b can be increased by tightening the cable tie CT, and the harness WH3 can be made difficult to come off from the wiring locking portion 3787b. In addition, since the harness WH3 consisting of a plurality of wiring EC is bound to the wiring locking portion 3787b by tightening the cable tie CT together with the wiring locking portion 3787b, the wiring EC will not come off one by one from the harness WH3 at the wiring locking portion 3787b, and it is possible to prevent some of the loose wiring EC from coming off the wiring locking portion 3787b, and to prevent the wiring EC from coming off the wiring locking portion 3787b, which makes it possible to avoid the wiring EC becoming easily broken.

In addition, since the harness WH3 consisting of multiple wiring EC is bound together with the wiring locking portion 3787b by tightening with the cable tie CT, the harness WH3 can be slid in the longitudinal direction of the wiring locking portion 3787b while being bound with the cable tie CT depending on the tightening force of the cable tie CT. As a result, when it is necessary to check the gear cover 3787 and the components in front of the gear cover 3787, which are hidden by the harness WH3, during maintenance of the rear lower decorative body 3700, in the conventional technology where the wiring EC is not bound with the cable tie CT, the work is performed by moving (sliding) each wire EC from the harness WH3, whereas in this embodiment, multiple wiring EC (harness WH3) can be slid at once, making the checking work easier and reducing the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, the cable tie CT is composed of a band portion CTa for bundling the harness WH3 and a locking portion CTb that prevents the band portion CTa from being retracted, i.e., can only be inserted in one direction. Therefore, by simply inserting the tip of the band portion CTa wrapped around the wiring retaining portion 3787b and the harness WH3 into the locking portion CTb and pulling it, the wiring retaining portion 3787b and the harness WH3 can be locked in a tightened state, thereby improving the workability of bundling the harness WH3. At this time, because the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is in contact with the wiring retaining portion 3787b, even if a force acts on the cable tie CT to rotate around the axis of the harness WH3 for some reason, the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is in contact with the wiring retaining portion 3787b, so the cable tie CT can be prevented from rotating around the axis of the harness WH3. This prevents the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT and the tip of the band portion CTa extending from the locking portion CTb from coming into contact with other components, preventing malfunctions.

Furthermore, since the harness WH3 supported through the wiring retaining portion 3787b can be visually confirmed from the rear of the lower rear decorative body 3700, it is possible to easily check whether the movement of all the wiring EC that constitutes the harness WH3 is restricted by the cable ties CT, which prevents the shipment of defective products in which some of the wiring EC has come loose, and also makes it easier to check the cable ties CT during maintenance, etc.

In addition, since the harness WH3 can be seen through the wiring retaining portion 3787b, it is easier to restrict the movement of the harness WH3 with the cable tie CT (tie-up work with the cable tie CT), improving workability.

Furthermore, since the harness WH3 can be seen through the wiring retaining portion 3787b, for example, if the cable tie CT has low light transmittance and is a different color from the multiple wirings EC that make up the harness WH3, when the harness WH3 (multiple wirings EC) and the band portion CTa are viewed through the wiring retaining portion 3787b, it is clearly visible that the band portion CTa is straddling the harness WH3, so that the binding of the harness WH3 with the cable tie CT can be reliably confirmed, and the task of binding the wiring retaining portion 3787b and the harness WH3 with the cable tie CT can be easily performed.

In addition, because the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT is made to contact the harness WH3 at an angle, the contact area can be made larger and the frictional resistance between the band portion CTa and the harness WH3 can be increased compared to when the band portion CTa is made to contact the harness WH3 in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. This allows the cable tie CT to adequately restrict the movement of the harness WH3, preventing the harness WH3 and the wiring EC from coming off the wiring retaining portion 3787b and avoiding malfunctions.

In addition, since the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT is in contact with the harness WH3 at an angle, the following excellent effects can be achieved. In detail, when the harness WH3 is tightened and tied with the cable tie CT, a force is applied from the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT to the harness WH3 (wiring EC), and depending on the strength of the force, the insulating coating film covering the wiring EC may deteriorate early, making it easier for defects such as leakage and short circuits to occur. In contrast, when the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT is in contact with the harness WH3 at an angle, the contact area between the band portion CTa and the harness WH3 (wiring EC) can be made larger than when the band portion CTa is wrapped around the harness WH3 in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. Therefore, even if the cable tie CT is tightened with the same strength, by making contact at an angle to increase the contact area, the force acting when tightening can be widely dispersed and relatively small, which can prevent early deterioration of the insulating coating and the occurrence of problems such as electrical leakage and short circuits.

In addition, the wiring retaining portion 3787b is extended from the gear cover 3787 in the opposite direction to the movement of the harness WH3 in the direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the harness WH3 when tension is applied to the harness WH3. Therefore, even if the harness WH3 is pulled or pulled when the rear lower decorative body 3700 is moved as the game progresses, or when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled or maintained, the harness WH3 moves in the opposite direction to the tip at the wiring retaining portion 3787b, and the harness WH3 will not come loose from the wiring retaining portion 3787b. This makes it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, if the multiple wiring EC (insulating coating) connected to the rear-lower decorative body decorative board 3753 of the rear-lower decorative body 3700 is a light but inconspicuous color such as white or gray, when a moving performance is performed using the rear-lower decorative body 3700, even if the part of the harness WH3 that is not supported by the wiring retaining portion 3787b protrudes outward beyond the front projection range of the rear-lower decorative body 3700, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the protrusion of the wiring EC (harness WH3), and a decrease in the performance effect of the moving performance using the rear-lower decorative body 3700 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the wiring retaining portion 3787b extends in a flat or band-like shape, the contact area between the wiring retaining portion 3787b and the harness WH3 can be made larger than when the wiring retaining portion 3787b is rod-shaped, and the frictional resistance can be increased. This makes it easier to exert the effect of the cable tie CT, and the movement of the harness WH3 can be reliably restricted to further prevent malfunctions.

In addition, because the wiring locking portion 3787b extends in a flat or strip-like shape, the multiple wirings EC that make up the harness WH3 tend to spread out so that they are aligned along the surface of the wiring locking portion 3787b. This makes it easier to dissipate heat from the wiring EC. In addition, in this case, the harness WH3 can be seen through the wiring locking portion 3787b, so the multiple wirings EC that make up the harness WH3 can be easily checked one by one through the wiring locking portion 3787b.

Furthermore, since the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is made to abut against the portion of the wiring engagement portion 3787b opposite the harness WH3 (the portion farther from the gear cover 3787), the following excellent operational effects can be achieved. In detail, if the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is made to abut against the side of the wiring engagement portion 3787b that is in contact with the harness WH3, the tip of the band portion CTa protruding from the locking portion CTb needs to be pulled in the direction of the gear cover 3787, and the gear cover 3787 gets in the way, making the tying work difficult. In contrast, in this embodiment, the locking portion CTb is abutted against the side of the wiring retaining portion 3787b opposite the harness WH3, so when the harness WH3 is bundled with the cable tie CT, the locking portion CTb faces the worker. Therefore, by pulling the tip of the band portion CTa protruding from the locking portion CTb in a direction away from the gear cover 3787, the wiring retaining portion 3787b and the harness WH3 can be tightened, further improving workability.

In addition, since the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is abutted against the portion of the wiring retaining portion 3787b opposite the harness WH3, as described above, the locking portion CTb faces the operator, making it easy to check whether the tip of the band portion CTa is inserted into the locking portion CTb, providing a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to check the operation of.

Furthermore, since the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is abutted against the portion of the wiring retaining portion 3787b opposite the harness WH3, the wiring retaining portion 3787b is interposed between the harness WH3 and the locking portion CTb, and the wiring retaining portion 3787b can be used as a barrier that prevents the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT from contacting the harness WH3. This can provide the following excellent effects. In more detail, when the tip of the band portion CTa is inserted into the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT and the tip of the band portion CTa is pulled to bundle the wires, if the wiring EC of the harness WH3 is in contact with the locking portion CTb, a part of the wiring EC is pulled into the locking portion CTb together with the pulled band portion CTa, and the insulating coating of the wiring EC may be torn. In contrast, in this embodiment, the locking portion CTb is abutted against the side of the wiring retaining portion 3787b opposite the harness WH3. In other words, the wiring retaining portion 3787b is interposed between the harness WH3 and the locking portion CTb. Since the harness WH3 (wiring EC) does not come into contact with the locking portion CTb, even if the tip of the band portion CTa through which the locking portion CTb is inserted is pulled, a part of the wiring EC is not pulled into the locking portion CTb together with the band portion CTa. This prevents the insulating coating of the wiring EC from breaking, and protects the harness WH3 tied with the cable tie CT.

In addition, because the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is abutted against the portion of the wiring retaining portion 3787b opposite the harness WH3, it is possible to easily cut the cable tie CT (band portion CTa) when removing the harness WH3 from the wiring retaining portion 3787b for maintenance or disassembly of the pachinko machine 1. In more detail, as described above, because the block-shaped locking portion CTb faces the worker, by guiding a cutting tool such as pliers along the locking portion CTb, the band portion CTa can be easily cut without damaging other portions.

In addition, because the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT is in contact with the harness WH3 at an angle, when the harness WH3 is bundled together with the flat or strip-shaped wiring fastening portion 3787b by the cable tie CT, the wiring fastening portion 3787b has width, so that the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT automatically comes into contact with the harness WH3 at an angle, and a pachinko machine 1 that provides the above-mentioned effects can be reliably provided.

In addition, since a hook portion is provided at the tip of the wiring locking portion 3787b, if the tip of the wiring locking portion 3787b, including the hook portion, is formed at an angle so that it moves away from the gear cover 3787 as it approaches the tip, it becomes easier to insert the harness WH3 and the cable tie CT between the wiring locking portion 3787b and the gear cover 3787 from the tip side of the wiring locking portion 3787b, thereby improving workability.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is first installed in a game hall, the door frame top unit 450 provided at the upper part of the outer periphery of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3 is used in a state where the entirety of the door frame top unit 450 is visible. In other words, the door frame top add unit 490 is not attached. In this initial state, if the multiple LEDs respectively mounted on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are appropriately illuminated, the door frame top decoration body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 can be illuminated and decorated, and the player can be entertained by the illumination performance of the door frame top unit 450. Then, for example, the door frame top add unit 490 is attached to the door frame top unit 450 in response to a change (model change) of the game board 5 provided on the main body frame 4, a full model change or minor change, a decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, holding of an event at the game hall, etc. Specifically, after opening the door frame 3 from the main frame 4, the hand screw 495 is rotated from the rear of the door frame 3 to remove the door frame top plate 468 of the door frame top unit 450 so that the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452 can be seen. Next, the top add plate 493 of the door frame top add unit 490 is fitted into the opening 452a, and the hand screw 495 is rotated from the rear of the door frame 3 to screw into the mounting piece portion 493d of the top add plate 493 to attach (fix) the top add plate 493. After that, the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4 to make the pachinko machine 1 with the door frame top add unit 490 attached. When removing the top add plate 493, it can be returned to the initial state by removing it in the reverse order to the above, and then attaching the door frame top plate 468 to the opening 452a. By attaching the door frame top add unit 490 to the door frame top unit 450 in this way, the decoration of the part where the door frame top add unit 490 is attached can be changed, so the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be significantly changed, and the changed appearance can strongly attract the interest of the player and increase the appeal to the player. In addition, when the door frame top add unit 490 is attached, if the multiple LEDs mounted on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 of the door frame top unit 450 are appropriately illuminated, the door frame top add unit 490 can be illuminated and decorated through the door frame top unit 450, and the light-emitting performance of the door frame top add unit 490 can entertain the player and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be significantly changed by simply attaching the door frame top add unit 490 to cover the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 from the front while leaving the door frame 3 and the door frame top unit 450 in their original state, so there is no need to remove the door frame 3 and the door frame top unit 450 and replace them with something else, reducing the cost of modifying the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, by attaching the door frame top add unit 490, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can increase its appeal to players at low cost.

Furthermore, the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452 of the door frame top unit 450 is provided on the opposite side of the center of the door window 101a on the periphery of the door frame top unit 450, that is, on the top surface of the door frame top unit 450. This makes it difficult for a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to see the opening 452a of the door frame top unit 450 (the door frame top plate 468 and the top add plate 493). Therefore, even if undecorated door frame top plates 468 and top add plate 493 are used, the appearance can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the decorative effect of the door frame top add unit 490 can be exhibited. At the same time, inexpensive undecorated door frame top plates 468 and top add plate 493 can be used, which suppresses the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, after removing the door frame top plate 468 from the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452 of the door frame top unit 450, the top add top plate 493 is fitted into the opening 452a and attached. This means that the rear end of the door frame top add unit 490 does not protrude beyond the outer periphery of the door frame 3, as compared to when the door frame top unit 450 and the door frame 3 are clamped from the front and rear to attach the door frame top add unit 490. This makes it look like the door frame top add unit 490 was attached to the pachinko machine 1 from the beginning, rather than being added later, which can avoid disappointing players, and also improves the appearance of the installed state of the door frame top add unit 490, allowing the decorative effect of the door frame top add unit 490 to be fully exerted, increasing its appeal to players.

In addition, the door frame top add unit 490 is attached so as to cover the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame top add unit 490 is illuminated and decorated via the door frame top unit 450. Therefore, no LED (decorative board) is provided for illuminating and decorating the door frame top add unit 490, and there is no need to connect wiring EC to the door frame top add unit 490. Therefore, even if the door frame top add unit 490 becomes detached from the door frame top unit 450 for some reason, the wiring EC will not cause the door frame top add unit 490 to sag, and only the decoration of the door frame top decoration 453 that was covered by the door frame top add unit 490 on the door frame top unit 450 will become visible, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 will not be impaired, and the use of this pachinko machine 1 can be continued without problems.

Furthermore, the door frame top add unit 490 can be attached and detached by rotating the hand screw 495 from the rear of the door frame 3. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4, the door frame top plate 468 of the door frame top unit 450 and the door frame top add unit 490 cannot be removed, which prevents mischief such as removing the door frame top plate 468 or the door frame top add unit 490, or fraudulent acts through the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452 that are revealed when the door frame top plate 468 or the door frame top add unit 490 are removed.

In addition, the door frame top plate 468 and the top add top plate 493 can be removed by rotating the hand screw 495 from the rear of the door frame 3, and the door frame top plate 468 and the top add top plate 493 cannot be removed from the front or from the up, down, left, or right directions, so that even if some force acts on the top add top plate 493, it is difficult to remove it from the door frame top unit 450. In addition, since the door frame top plate 468 and the top add top plate 493 are attached by the hand screw 495, the attachment strength of the door frame top add unit 490 can be increased compared to the case where they are attached by being locked. Therefore, even if some force acts on the top add top plate 493, it is difficult to remove it from the door frame top unit 450, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the door frame top plate 468 and the door frame top add unit 490 from coming off during play, which would interrupt the game and reduce the player's interest, and the player can enjoy playing with this pachinko machine 1 in good condition and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, because the door frame top add unit 490 is illuminated and decorated via the door frame top unit 450, the performance program for making the door frame top unit 450 perform the illumination performance can be used as is even when the door frame top add unit 490 is installed, thereby suppressing the increase in costs associated with changing the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the door frame top add unit 490 is illuminated and decorated via the door frame top unit 450, no LED (decorative substrate) is provided for illuminating and decorating the door frame top add unit 490, and therefore the cost of the door frame top add unit 490 can be reduced accordingly, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can increase appeal to players at low cost. Also, since no LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the door frame top add unit 490, there is no need to connect wiring EC when attaching the door frame top add unit 490, making it possible to simplify the effort required for attaching and detaching the door frame top add unit 490.

In addition, because the door frame top plate 468 and the top add plate 493 are attached using hand screws 495, the door frame top plate 468 and the top add plate 493 can be easily attached and detached without using tools such as a screwdriver or wrench, which simplifies the work involved in installing the door frame top add unit 490 and reduces the cost involved in changing the decoration of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the door frame top plate 468 and the top add plate 493 are attached by the hand screw 495, and the main frame 4 is provided with a recess that can accommodate the head 495a of the hand screw 495 when the door frame 3 is closed. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is in use with the door frame 3 closed to the main frame 4, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted from the outside to turn the hand screw 495, the head of the hand screw 495 is accommodated in the groove of the main frame 4, so that the illegal tool cannot reach the head of the hand screw 495. This prevents the door frame top plate 468 and the top add plate 493 from being removed by turning the hand screw 495, and also prevents illegal acts from being performed through the opening 452a from which the door frame top plate 468 and the top add plate 493 have been removed.

It is desirable to prevent the hand screws 495 from coming off the door frame 3 when attaching or detaching the door frame top plate 468 or the top add plate 493. This makes it possible to prevent the hand screws 495 coming off the door frame 3 from being lost or entering the main frame 4 and causing malfunctions when attaching or detaching the door frame top plate 468 or the top add plate 493.

It is also desirable to provide the main body frame 4 with a contact portion that comes into contact with the head 495a of the hand screw 495 when the door frame 3 is closed. With this, when the pachinko machine 1 is in use with the door frame 3 closed to the main body frame 4, even if a force acts on the hand screw 495 to rotate it due to vibration acting on the pachinko machine 1 or contact with an illegal tool, the contact portion comes into contact with the head 495a and is able to provide resistance to the rotation of the hand screw 495, preventing the hand screw 495 from rotating, preventing the hand screw 495 from coming off by itself, and resisting illegal acts of trying to turn the hand screw 495.

In addition, the door frame top add unit 490 may be provided with a light guide means capable of guiding light through the door frame top unit 450 or direct light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, respectively, so that the light guide means can illuminate and decorate a portion (for example, the central decorative body 491b) of the top add decorative body 491 in front of the portion in the door frame top add unit 490 where the door frame top unit 450 is illuminated and decorated. As a result, even if the door frame top add unit 490 is not provided with LEDs for illuminating and decorating, the light guide means can guide the light from the door frame top unit 450 to any portion that can enhance the decorative effect, so that a light-emitting performance that can entertain the player more can be presented, and a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of the player can be provided.

In addition, the door frame top plate 468 of the door frame top unit 450 can be removed by turning the hand screw 495 from the rear of the door frame 3. Therefore, for example, by preparing another door frame top plate 468 with a different decoration and replacing it with the door frame top plate 468, the decoration of the door frame top plate 468 part of the door frame top unit 450 can be easily changed. This also makes it possible to change the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 at low cost, and to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players by changing the appearance.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the rear cell 1130 provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) on the game board 5, when the cell fixing piece 1140 is attached through the support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130 provided at the rear of the center gimmick 2500 in the front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100, the rear cell 1130 is positioned between the game panel 1100 and the flat main body piece 1141 in the cell fixing piece 1140, and rearward movement is restricted by the main body piece 1141. At this time, since the outer shape of the protrusion 1142 protruding forward from the main body piece 1141 is made smaller than the inner shape of the support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130, a gap is formed between the inner circumference of the support hole 1131 and the outer circumference of the protrusion 1142, so that the rear cell 1130 can be moved in a direction along the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100 (up and down and left and right directions) within the range of the gap, and the relative contraction difference of the rear cell 1130 with respect to the gaming panel 1100 due to the environment such as temperature and humidity can be absorbed. Also, since the protrusion 1142 protruding forward from the main body piece 1141 protrudes longer than the thickness of the rear cell 1130, a gap larger than the thickness of the rear cell 1130 is formed between the gaming panel 1100 and the main body piece 1141, so that the rear cell 1130 can be moved in the front and back directions within the range of the gap, and even if the rear cell 1130 ripples in the front and back directions due to the environment such as temperature and humidity, the ripples can be absorbed by the gap. For this reason, even if the sheet-like rear cell 1130 provided behind the transparent game panel 1100 expands and contracts more than the game panel 1100 due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity, the rear cell 1130 is supported by the cell fixing piece 1140 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 through the support hole 1131 so as to be movable within a certain range in the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction, and is supported in a state in which it can expand and contract with respect to the game panel 1100, so the rear cell 1130 can expand and contract freely. Therefore, even if the environment such as temperature and humidity changes, the rear cell 1130 does not wrinkle or crack, and the decorative effect of the rear cell 1130 can be maintained, so that the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved by the pattern of the rear cell 1130 visible through the transparent game panel 1100, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the support hole 1131 (cell fixing piece 1140) in the rear cell 1130 is provided in a position behind the center device 2500, etc., which is provided on the front of the game panel 1100, the support hole 1131 with the specified pattern cut out can be made difficult to see by the front center device 2500, etc., and the poor appearance caused by the support hole 1131 (cell fixing piece 1140) being visible can be suppressed, and the appearance within the game area 5a can be improved, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is more appealing to players.

In addition, the rear cell 1130 is provided in an expandable state on the game panel 1100 using the cell fixing piece 1140, and is not attached to the game panel 1100 as in the conventional technology, so that the effort required for decorating the transparent game panel 1100 can be simplified, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. In detail, in the game panel 1100 that is cut, the rear cell 1130 can be attached using the cell fixing piece 1140 after the cutting process, so the rear cell 1130 is not scratched during the cutting process of the game panel 1100. In addition, the cut surface is not roughened due to differences in the materials, etc. between the game panel 1100 and the rear cell 1130, and the finishing process after the cutting process can be omitted. On the other hand, in the game panel 1100 formed to have an opening 1112 by cutting or injection molding, the rear cell 1130 is not attached, so the effort required for attachment can be eliminated. Therefore, the rear cell 1130 can be installed behind the transparent gaming panel 1100 more easily than with conventional technology, and the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, because the rear cells 1130 are provided behind a portion of the gaming panel 1100, the amount of rear cells 1130 used can be reduced compared to when the rear cells 1130 are provided over the entire surface of the gaming panel 1100, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

However, if the game panel 1100 is transparent, it becomes difficult for the player to see the game panel 1100. Therefore, when looking inside the game area 5a, the player will focus on the decorations of the rear unit 3000 located behind the game panel 1100. As a result, depending on the player, it may become difficult to focus on the game ball B circulating in front of the game panel 1100, and the difficulty in seeing the game ball B may reduce the player's interest in the game. In contrast, in this embodiment, a rear cell 1130 with a predetermined pattern is provided behind a portion of the transparent game panel 1100, so that when a player looks into the game area 5a, the player is more likely to focus on the pattern on the rear cell 1130. Therefore, simply by looking at the game panel 1100, the player naturally focuses on the game ball B circulating within the game area 5a, making it easier to see the game ball B circulating within the game area 5a, and allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, a rear cell 1130 with a predetermined pattern is provided at a part of the rear of the transparent game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), so that the pattern of the rear cell 1130 can hide the decorative body provided at the rear from the player. Therefore, if a decorative body that can be illuminated is provided at the rear of the rear cell 1130, the pattern of the rear cell 1130 can prevent the player from noticing the presence of the decorative body when the decorative body is not illuminated. Then, when the decorative body is illuminated as the game progresses, the rear cell 1130 is illuminated by the light from the decorative body at the rear, so that the player can be made to notice the presence of the decorative body whose presence was not foreseen, which can greatly surprise the player and strongly make the player think that a chance has arrived, and can show the player a more effective illuminating performance, which entertains the player and suppresses a decline in interest.

As described above, the decorative body provided at the rear can be hidden from view by the rear cell 1130, so that the movable decorative body can be moved as the game progresses from a state where it is invisible due to the rear cell 1130 to a state where it is visible through the opening 1112 that penetrates the front and rear of the game panel 1100, thereby presenting a moving performance in which the movable decorative body appears as the game progresses. Therefore, the appearance of the movable decorative body can suggest to the player that a chance has come, making the player strongly think that a favorable game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) that gives the player an advantage may occur, increasing the player's sense of expectation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the rear cell 1130 is supported on the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100 by the cell fixing piece 1140, the rear cell 1130 can be easily attached and detached from the gaming panel 1100 by removing the cell fixing piece 1140 from the gaming panel 1100. As a result, by removing the cell fixing piece 1140 from the gaming panel 1100, a rear cell 1130 with a different pattern can be attached or replaced to the gaming panel 1100, so that it is possible to easily respond to changes in specifications or model changes of the pachinko machine 1, and to suppress increases in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 and the rear cell 1130 are separate, the following excellent effects can be achieved. In detail, when a decorative film is attached to the game panel as in the conventional technology, if an opening is provided in the game panel, the opening portion of the decorative film is cut off, so it is not possible to decorate the inside of the opening with the decorative film. In contrast, in this embodiment, since the game panel 1100 and the rear cell 1130 are separate, even if an opening 1112 is provided in the game panel 1100, the inside of the opening 1112 can be decorated by extending a part of the rear cell 1130 into the opening 1112, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a different appearance from the conventional one, and making it easier to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players. In this case, in the center device 2500 etc. attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, a part of the rear cell 1130 extends rearward from the edge of the opening 1112 toward the center, so that the part of the center device 2500 can be decorated from behind with the pattern of the rear cell 1130, improving the appearance of the game area 5a.

Furthermore, because the cell fixing piece 1140 is made transparent, it is possible to make the cell fixing piece 1140 difficult to see from the front through the support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130, thereby preventing the deterioration of the appearance within the play area 5a.

In addition, the cell fixing piece 1140 is provided with a positioning pin 1144 that protrudes forward from a position different from the protrusion 1142 on the main body piece 1141 and is inserted into the positioning hole 1110b of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. The mounting screw that is screwed into the mounting hole 1110a of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 through the mounting hole 1143 and the positioning pin 1144 make it impossible for the cell fixing piece 1140 to rotate around the axis in the front-to-rear direction. Therefore, if the cell fixing piece 1140 rotates for some reason, it is possible to prevent the cell fixing piece 1140 from coming into contact with other components, causing a malfunction, or the cell fixing piece 1140 from becoming easily visible to the player, thereby deteriorating the appearance of the gaming area 5a.

In addition, since the support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130 is provided behind the peripheral wall portion 2511a that protrudes forward like a wall on the center base 2511 of the center device 2500, even if the center device 2500 is formed transparent, the peripheral wall portion 2511a that protrudes forward like a wall refracts light in a staggered manner, making the rear support hole 1131 less visible. This prevents the support hole 1131 (cell fixing piece 1140) from being seen, and improves the appearance within the play area 5a, providing a pachinko machine 1 that is more appealing to players.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the second start opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning opening opening unit 2640 provided in the attacca unit 2600 in the center role 2500 of the game board 5, the flat guide piece 2636 and the first large winning opening door body 2641 are arranged so that they at least partially overlap with the start opening solenoid 2632, the first attacca solenoid 2642, and the opening/closing link 2637 and the opening/closing link 2647 in a plan view, making it possible to reduce the front-to-back and left-to-right dimensions of the second start opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning opening opening unit 2640. In addition, since the flat guide piece 2636 and the first large winning opening door body 2641 are arranged so as to intersect with the opening/closing link 2637 and the opening/closing link 2647 in a front view, it is possible to reduce the vertical dimensions of the second start opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning opening opening unit 2640. In addition, since the flat guide piece 2636 and the first large prize opening door body 2641 are provided above or below the starting opening solenoid 2632 and the first attacca solenoid 2642, it is possible to provide the guide piece 2636 and the first large prize opening door body 2641 so that they overlap with the starting opening solenoid 2632 and the first attacca solenoid 2642 in a plan view, and it is possible to reduce the front-rear dimensions of the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large prize opening opening opening/closing unit 2640. Furthermore, since the flat guide piece 2636 and the first large prize opening door body 2641 are provided with the notches 2636b and the notches 2641b that avoid contact with the opening/closing link 2637 and the opening/closing link 2647, it is possible to bring the opening/closing link 2637 and the opening/closing link 2647 and the guide piece 2636 and the first large prize opening door body 2641 as close as possible in a plan view. And, since the second start opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 can be made smaller than before, the arrangement space for other components (decorations) in the pachinko machine 1 can be made relatively larger, and the arrangement space can be used to make the decorations larger or to provide new decorations. Also, as described above, since the second start opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 can be made smaller than before, the arrangement freedom of the second start opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 can be increased, and it is possible to provide the second start opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning opening opening opening/closing unit 2640 in a position different from that of a conventional pachinko machine. For this reason, a pachinko machine 1 with an unprecedented appearance can be provided, and a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players can be provided.

In addition, the guide piece 2636 and the first large prize opening door body 2641 are provided with the notches 2636b and 2641b to avoid contact with the opening/closing link 2637 and the opening/closing link 2647. Therefore, in order to miniaturize the second start opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large prize opening opening opening unit 2640, when the start opening solenoid 2632, the first attacca solenoid 2642, the opening/closing link 2637 and the opening/closing link 2647, and the guide piece 2636 and the first large prize opening door body 2641 are closely arranged, , the cutouts 2636b and 2641b prevent the opening/closing links 2637 and 2647 from coming into contact with the guide piece 2636 and the first large prize opening door body 2641, so the start opening solenoid 2632 and the first attacca solenoid 2642 can move the guide piece 2636 and the first large prize opening door body 2641 back and forth without any problems, allowing the second start opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large prize opening opening/closing unit 2640 to perform their functions reliably.

Furthermore, in the second starting opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning opening opening/closing unit 2640, the starting opening solenoid 2632, the first attacca solenoid 2642, the opening/closing link 2637, the opening/closing link 2647, the guide piece 2636 and the first large winning opening door body 2641 are accommodated and supported in the container-shaped unit case 2635 or unit case 2645 consisting of the first case portion 2633 or first case portion 2643 and the second case portion 2634 or second case portion 2644, so that no decorative board on which a sensor for detecting the game ball B or a light-emitting means such as an LED is mounted is built in, and the second starting opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 can be made even smaller. In addition, because it does not have built-in sensors or decorative boards, the sensors and decorative boards can be placed separately from the second start opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning opening/closing unit 2640, which increases the design freedom of the distribution path of the game ball B and saves on design labor associated with changing the distribution path (flow path), allowing for cost reduction and short delivery times for the pachinko machine 1.

In the case of a unit with a built-in sensor in a case as in the prior art, in order to increase the degree of freedom in the placement of the unit, it is possible to remove the sensor from the case and use a unit without a built-in sensor depending on the model used. However, in this case, if one tries to obtain mass production benefits by reusing the unit in multiple models, it is necessary to manufacture both a unit with a sensor attached and a unit with a removed sensor in the same unit, which makes the labor required for manufacturing the units complicated and makes it difficult to obtain sufficient mass production benefits. In addition, if the same unit contains a mixture of units with a removed sensor, there is a risk that a unit without a sensor will be mistakenly installed during the assembly of the pachinko machine, which will cause a malfunction and also necessitate the need to check the units during assembly, which increases the labor required and the cost. In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the second start opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 are not provided with sensors (are not built-in), so the same second start opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 can be used regardless of the model used, so it is only necessary to manufacture the same second start opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning opening opening/closing unit 2640, and sufficient mass production effects can be obtained. In addition, since there are no identical second start opening/closing units 2630 or first large winning opening opening/closing units 2640 with different functions, there is no need to check the second start opening/closing unit 2630 or the first large winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 when assembling the pachinko machine 1, which can prevent malfunctions due to assembly errors and simplify the effort required for assembly, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, in the second start opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning opening opening/closing unit 2640, the start opening solenoid 2632 and the first attacca solenoid 2642 that move the guide piece 2636 and the first large winning opening door body 2641 forward and backward are solenoids, so the response of the guide piece 2636 and the first large winning opening door body 2641 forward and backward can be faster than when the start opening solenoid 2632 and the first attacca solenoid 2642 are drive motors. In addition, the solenoids as the start opening solenoid 2632 and the first attacca solenoid 2642 are designed so that the plungers move in and out in the left and right directions, so the dimensions in the front-to-back direction of the second start opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning opening opening opening unit 2640 can be reduced, making it easier to secure space behind the second start opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning opening opening opening unit 2640. Therefore, it is possible to make the props and decorations behind the second start opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 larger, or to place new props and decorations behind them, which makes the pachinko machine 1 more noticeable and strongly attracts the player's attention, while also providing more entertainment for the player with the props and other features at the rear, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the second start opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning opening opening/closing unit 2640, the game ball B is arranged so as not to come into contact with the notch 2636b and the notch 2641b of the guide piece 2636 and the first large winning opening door body 2641. Therefore, when the start opening solenoid 2632 and the first attacca solenoid 2642 are causing the guide piece 2636 and the first large winning opening door body 2641 to protrude forward, even if the game ball B flows over the guide piece 2636 and the first large winning opening door body 2641, the game ball B will not come into contact with the guide piece 2636 and the first large winning opening door body 2641. Since there is no contact with the notch 2636b or the notch 2641b that penetrates the inner piece 2636 or the first large winning opening door body 2641 in the vertical direction, it is possible to prevent malfunctions such as a change in the flow direction of the game ball B flowing on the guide piece 2636 or the first large winning opening door body 2641, or the game ball B coming to a stop on the guide piece 2636 or the first large winning opening door body 2641, and it is possible to prevent malfunctions from causing distrust among players and reducing their interest.

Furthermore, in the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning opening opening opening unit 2640, the notch 2636b and the notch 2641b of the guide piece 2636 and the first large winning opening opening door body 2641 are notched so as to be recessed from the rear end edge toward the front. This causes the rear end side of the notch 2636b and the notch 2641b of the guide piece 2636 and the first large winning opening door body 2641 to be open toward the rear. This makes it possible to easily insert the opening/closing link 2637 and the opening/closing link 2647 into the notch 2636b and the notch 2641b from the rear end edge side of the guide piece 2636 and the first large winning opening door body 2641, which simplifies the assembly of the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning opening opening opening unit 2640 and suppresses the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, as described above, the notch 2636b and the notch 2641b of the guide piece 2636 and the first large prize opening door body 2641 are formed in a notch shape that is open to the rear, so that when the guide piece 2636 and the first large prize opening door body 2641 are protruded forward, it is possible to make a part of the opening and closing link 2637 and the opening and closing link 2647 protrude rearward from the rear end edge of the guide piece 2636 and the first large prize opening door body 2641. In other words, it is possible to position the rear end edge of the guide piece 2636 and the first large prize opening door body 2641 forward from the rear end of the opening and closing link 2637 and the opening and closing link 2647. As a result, the dimensions of the guide piece 2636 and the first large prize opening door body 2641 in the front-to-rear direction can be reduced, so that the second start opening opening and closing unit 2630 and the first large prize opening opening opening and closing unit 2640 can be made smaller, and a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects can be reliably provided.

In addition, in the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning port opening/closing unit 2640, the container-shaped unit case 2635 and unit case 2645 which house and support the starting port solenoid 2632, the first attacca solenoid 2642, the opening/closing link 2637, the opening/closing link 2647, and the guide piece 2636 and the first large winning port door body 2641 are composed of two parts, the first case portion 2633 and the first case portion 2643, and the second case portion 2634 and the second case portion 2644. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the number of parts in the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 and the first large winning port opening/closing unit 2640, and therefore makes it possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. Also, in this case, since the unit case 2635 or unit case 2645 is composed of two parts, the first case part 2633 or first case part 2643 and the second case part 2634 or second case part 2644, the starting port solenoid 2632, the first attacca solenoid 2642, the opening/closing link 2637 or opening/closing link 2647, the guide piece 2636, and the first large prize opening door body 2641 can be sandwiched between the first case part 2633 or first case part 2643 and the second case part 2634 or second case part 2644, and the effort required for assembly can be simplified.

Furthermore, in the second starting hole opening/closing unit 2630, the part (detection part) of the second starting hole sensor 2601 through which the game ball B passes and is detected is located forward of the unit case 2635, so that the detection part of the second starting hole sensor 2601 is located forward, and the distance from the guide piece 2636 (second starting hole 2005) to the second starting hole sensor 2601 can be made as short as possible, allowing the winning game ball B to be detected quickly and making the detection of the game ball B by the second starting hole sensor 2601 more visible from the player's side, and allowing the player to visually see the detection of the game ball B can increase the player's anticipation for the game and make it more enjoyable.

In addition, the first large prize opening decoration board 2672, which is equipped with multiple LEDs capable of emitting light upward, is provided below the first large prize opening door body 2641 protruding forward, and the light from the LEDs of the first large prize opening decoration board 2672 is irradiated from below onto the game ball B on the first large prize opening door body 2641 through the cutout portion 2641b of the first large prize opening door body 2641. This allows the light from the LEDs of the first large prize opening decoration board 2672 to be irradiated onto the game ball B circulating on the first large prize opening door body 2641 through the cutout portion 2641b, so that the player can see an effect in which the game ball B circulating on the first large prize opening door body 2641 is illuminated from below, which has never been seen in a pachinko machine before, and can strongly attract the player's interest and entertain the player, thereby suppressing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the rear performance unit 3600 in the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5, when the rear upper decorative body 3650 having the rear upper decorative lens 3651 with a predetermined decoration on the front is in the upper retracted position, the rear upper decorative body 3650 is positioned so as to straddle the upper front of the upper part of the display screen of the performance display device 1600 in the left-right direction, so that the performance image displayed on the display screen of the performance display device 1600 can be viewed in a good condition and enjoyed by the player. In this state, when the lock release solenoid 3663 of the lock mechanism 3660 is operated according to the progress of the game to release the restriction of falling by the upper lock claw 3661b of the lock latch 3661, the rear upper decorative body 3650 falls to the lower appearance position. This back-upper decorative body 3650 is provided with a lock mechanism 3660 having a lock release solenoid 3663, and has a back-upper decorative substrate 3653 on which a back-upper decorative lens 3651 and a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and is formed to a size that spans the performance display device 1600 from left to right, so that the weight of the back-upper decorative body 3650 is greater than that of the lifting decorative body provided in a conventional pachinko machine, and the back-upper decorative body 3650 is urged downward by the auxiliary spring 3616. Therefore, when the restriction on falling by the upper lock claw 3661b of the lock latch 3661 of the lock mechanism 3660 is released as the game progresses, the back-upper decorative body 3650 falls at a speed faster than a free fall due to the urging force of the auxiliary spring 3616, and the back-upper decorative body 3650 falling at a speed faster than the conventional one can be shown to the player. At this time, the large rear upper decorative body 3650 on the left and right falls while blocking the performance image displayed on the display screen of the performance display device 1600, so that the player who is watching the performance image can be sure to notice the fall of the rear upper decorative body 3650 (moving performance) and can enjoy the moving performance of the rear upper decorative body 3650.

When the rear upper decorative body 3650 that has fallen from the retracted position comes into contact with the shock absorbing portion 3781f of the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780 in the rear lower decorative body 3700 that is provided at the appearance position, the shock absorbing portion 3781f absorbs the impact of the fall, making it difficult for the rear upper decorative body 3650 that has fallen to the appearance position to bounce upward. In addition, if the rear upper decorative body 3650 is restricted from rising by the lower locking claw 3661c of the locking latch 3661 at the same time as it reaches the appearance position, the fallen rear upper decorative body 3650 can be prevented from bouncing upward at the appearance position. For this reason, when the rear upper decorative body 3650 is dropped from the retracted position, the rear upper decorative body 3650 stops at the appearance position without bouncing back, so that it can be made to look as if the rear upper decorative body 3650 has fallen with a thud or a thud, and a powerful falling performance with a sense of weight can be shown to the player, which can have a strong impact on the player. In addition, because the rear upper decorative body 3650 can be made to look like a falling performance with a powerful impact with a sense of weight, the falling performance of the rear upper decorative body 3650 can make the player strongly think that something good is going to happen, which can increase the player's expectations for the game, entertain the player, and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, by illuminating the multiple LEDs mounted on the upper back decorative board 3653 as the game progresses, the upper back decorative lens 3651 on the front side of the upper back decorative body 3650 can be brightly illuminated and decorated, strongly drawing the player's attention to the upper back decorative body 3650.

Furthermore, by appropriately combining the falling effect (moving effect) of the rear upper decorative body 3650, the light-emitting effect by the light-emitting decoration, and the effect image by the effect display device 1600, a variety of effects can be presented to the player, making it less likely for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the shock absorbing section 3781f can absorb the impact caused by the fall of the rear upper decorative body 3650, it is possible to prevent the rear upper decorative body 3650 and the rear lower decorative body 3700 located at the appearance position from being damaged by the impact of the fall. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption of play caused by damage to the rear upper decorative body 3650, etc., and allows the player to enjoy the falling performance (movable performance) of the rear upper decorative body 3650 in good condition, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, the lock latch 3661 is configured to protrude due to the biasing force of the lock spring 3662, thereby restricting the fall or ascent of the rear upper decorative body 3650. The lower surface of the upper lock claw 3661b, which restricts the ascent of the lock latch 3661, is inclined so that it becomes higher toward the tip, and the upper surface of the lower lock claw 3661c, which restricts the fall, is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the edge. As a result, when the rear upper decorative body 3650 is dropped from the retracted position, the lock latch 3661 automatically retreats against the biasing force of the lock spring 3662 due to the inclination of the lower surface of the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661. When the rear upper decorative body 3650 reaches the emergence position, the retreated lock latch 3661 protrudes due to the biasing force of the lock spring 3662, and the lower lock claw 3661c is inserted into the lock groove 3781e, thereby instantly restricting the ascent and preventing the rear upper decorative body 3650 from bouncing upward at the emergence position. On the other hand, when the rear upper decorative body 3650 is raised from the emergent position to the retracted position, the protruding lock latch 3661 can be retracted against the biasing force of the lock spring 3662 by the inclined upper surface of the upper lock claw 3661b, and when the rear upper decorative body 3650 reaches the retracted position, the retracted lock latch 3661 protrudes due to the biasing force of the lock spring 3662, and the upper lock claw 3661b is inserted into the lock groove 3603 to restrict falling. In this way, even without driving the unlocking solenoid 3663, the fall or rise can be automatically restricted (locked) by the rise and fall of the rear upper decorative body 3650, and the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably realized.

In addition, the lower locking claw 3661c of the locking latch 3661 makes it possible to restrict ascent from the emergence position, and a rear-lower decorative body 3700 is provided which abuts the rear-upper decorative body 3650 at the emergence position and can move upward. Therefore, if the rear-upper decorative body 3650 is raised after the rear-upper decorative body 3650 has been dropped to the emergence position while its upward movement is restricted by the lower locking claw 3661c of the locking latch 3661, an upward lifting force will be applied to the rear-lower decorative body 3700 by the lower locking claw 3661c of the locking latch 3661, and the rear-upper decorative body 3650 and the rear-lower decorative body 3700 will rise together. Therefore, when the rear upper decorative body 3650 is dropped and then raised, it rises together with the rear lower decorative body 3700, and a large decorative body that appears to be a combination of the rear upper decorative body 3650 and the rear lower decorative body 3700 rises, which can greatly surprise the player and create an extremely strong impact, as well as making the player feel strongly that something good is going to happen, increasing their anticipation for the game, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, when the rear upper decorative body 3650 is raised from the appearance position, the auxiliary spring 3616 biases the rear upper decorative body 3650 upward, thereby reducing the load on the rear upper decorative body 3650 as it rises.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the performance display device 1600 capable of displaying performance images is provided behind the game panel 1100, that is, behind the game area 5a where the game is played, on the game board 5, so that the pachinko machine 1 can have an appearance similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine in which the performance display device 1600 is provided, so that players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines are less likely to hesitate, and it is easier to select this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play. In addition, behind the game panel 1100, the back front left performance unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is provided in a position to the left away from the center of the performance display device 1600, so that the back front left performance unit 3300 is less likely to obstruct the performance image displayed on the display screen of the performance display device 1600, allowing the player to fully enjoy the performance image. Since the back-front-left performance unit 3300 has a back-front-left decorative body 3301 on the front side, the front-front-left decorative body 3301 can decorate the front of the performance display device 1600 and the inside of the game area 5a, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the back-front-left performance unit 3300 has a back-front-left decorative sheet 3308 facing backward on the rear side, but the back-front-left decorative sheet 3308 cannot be seen from the front player side through the back-front-left performance unit 3300 (back-front-left decorative body 3301). On the other hand, since the performance display device 1600 is provided behind the back-front-left performance unit 3300, the display screen of the performance display device 1600 can reflect the decoration of the back-front-left decorative sheet 3308 provided on the rear side of the back-front-left performance unit 3300 to the front. In other words, the back-front-left decorative sheet 3308 of the back-front-left performance unit 3300 can be reflected on the display screen of the performance display device 1600. However, when the performance image is displayed on the performance display device 1600 (normal state), the display screen is bright, and the brightness cancels out the reflection of the image on the back front left back decorative sheet 3308, so that the image on the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen is almost invisible.

In this state, if the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is intentionally darkened (for example, blacked out), the reflection of the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 becomes relatively brighter than the display screen, so that the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen. In other words, if the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is darkened, the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 provided on the rear surface of the back front left performance unit 3300 is reflected on the display screen, so that the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen (reflected pattern 3310) is faintly visible compared to the performance image displayed on the display screen (see FIG. 197). At this time, since the back front left performance unit 3300 is provided at a position away from the center of the performance display device 1600 to the left, when the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is darkened, the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen can be easily seen by the player. For this reason, by going dark or intentionally darkening the display screen while a performance is being performed using a performance image by the performance display device 1600, the player can be shown a performance in which the pattern (decoration) of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 on the back of the back front left performance unit 3300 is reflected on the display screen. Therefore, even if the appearance is similar to a conventional pachinko machine, the player can be shown a performance that has never been seen in any pachinko machine before, in which the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen. This strongly attracts the player's attention, makes a strong impact, and makes the player think that something good is going to happen, increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 of the back front left performance unit 3300 is a different decoration (pattern) from the pattern of the back front left decorative body 3301, if the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is darkened to make the reflected pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 visible, the player can be made to recognize that a decoration (back front left back decorative sheet 3308) that is clearly different from the back front left decorative body 3301 is reflected on the dark display screen, which can have a strong impact on the player. In more detail, in the normal state in which a performance image is displayed on the display screen of the performance display device 1600, only a character with a predetermined expression is visible as the back front left decorative body 3301 provided on the front of the back front left performance unit 3300, and a character with a different expression as the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is not reflected on the display screen. When the display screen is darkened by blacking out or the like, the character on the back front left back decorative sheet 3308, with a different expression from that of the back front left decorative body 3301, appears to be reflected on the display screen, as if it were adjacent to the back front left performance unit 3300, so that the player can be presented with an effect in which the character's back (different) face can be seen, and the player can enjoy the gap in the character's expression. For example, if this effect is performed before an advantageous game state occurs in which the player is in an advantageous position, such as a jackpot game, the effect can make the player strongly think that the advantageous game state will not occur, and that it may be a "miss," and then the advantageous game state ("jackpot") occurs, surprising the player and further increasing his interest.

Furthermore, since the rear front left performance unit 3300 is provided behind the game panel 1100, it is possible to prevent light from entering the display screen (front) of the performance display device 1600 between the rear front left performance unit 3300 and the performance display device 1600. Therefore, when the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is darkened, the front of the performance display device 1600 can be made sufficiently dark, making it easier for the image on the rear front left back decorative sheet 3308 of the rear front left performance unit 3300 to be reflected, and making the reflected image (reflective image 3310) of the rear front left back decorative sheet 3308 easier to see from the player's side, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Also, as described above, when the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is darkened, the reflected pattern 3310 of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 of the back front left performance unit 3300 reflected on the display screen is faintly visible, so for example, by shortening the time for which the display screen is darkened, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen. In other words, depending on the player, it is possible to make the player notice the reflected pattern 3310 of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen. This makes the player grin or gasp when he or she notices that the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen, making the player feel like he or she has made a profit and entertaining the player.

Furthermore, as described above, when the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is darkened, the image on the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 provided on the rear surface of the back front left performance unit 3300 is reflected on the display screen, making the reflected image 3310 (decoration) of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, depending on the relative positions of the performance display device 1600 and the back front left performance unit 3300 (back front left back decorative sheet 3308), it is possible to make the reflected back front left back decorative sheet 3308 less visible to players seated in front of this pachinko machine 1, and to make the reflected image on the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 more visible to players seated in front of the adjacent pachinko machine or players in the vicinity of this pachinko machine 1. This makes it possible to appeal to other players about the pachinko machine 1, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players, and also making it easier for players to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play, making playing with the pachinko machine 1 enjoyable and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the back-front-left performance unit 3300 is located away from the center to the left of the performance display device 1600, it is possible to make it so that the image of the back-front-left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen is only visible to the right eye of the player sitting in front. As a result, when the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is darkened, the image of the back-front-left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen can only be seen by the right eye, making the reflected image of the back-front-left back decorative sheet 3308 appear uncertain, and it is possible to present the player with a performance that makes him/her feel as if he/she is seeing an illusion, while amplifying the sense of eerieness caused by the performance, thereby entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the rear front left performance unit 3300 is provided near the front end of the rear box 3000 and the performance display device 1600 is provided behind the rear box 3000, the front-to-rear distance between the rear surface of the rear front left performance unit 3300 (the rear front left back decorative sheet 3308) and the display screen of the performance display device 1600 can be made as long as possible, making it easier to see the image on the rear front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, players seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can be fully entertained by the performance that produces the above-mentioned effects, and a decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the center distribution unit 2520 in the center feature 2500 of the game board 5, the game ball B is supplied through the upper warp passage 2513 to the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531 of the crown 2530, which has a peripheral wall portion 2533 on its outer periphery that is higher than the radius of the game ball B, and rolls on the central surface portion 2531a of the rolling surface portion 2531 while being prevented from contacting the peripheral wall portion 2533 by the inclination of the peripheral surface portion 2531b, and enters the passage opening 2532. In this case, the shape of the passing opening 2532 provided in the rolling surface portion 2531 is non-circular (here, square) such that the longest opposing line passing through the center and connecting the two opposing parts extends in the front-to-back direction, thereby preventing the game ball B from spinning around the edge of the passing opening 2532 and preventing the game ball B from being kicked by the passing opening 2532, and allowing the game ball B to quickly enter the passing opening 2532. Therefore, since the player can see the center distribution piece 2523 located downstream of the crane 2530 moving back and forth, even if the player hits or shakes the pachinko machine 1 to try to make the game ball B enter the passage opening 2532 at the desired timing so that the center distribution piece 2523 can distribute the game ball B to the first upper starting opening 2004, the game ball B will enter the passage opening 2532 while waiting for the timing, preventing the fraudulent act from being accomplished and reducing the burden on the game hall caused by the fraudulent act.

In addition, because the passage opening 2532 is non-circular, it is possible to suppress (or prevent) the game ball B from being kicked by the passage opening 2532 and entering another passage opening 2532, so that the probability of the game ball B entering the passage opening 2532 (acceptance probability) can be stabilized, and it is possible to reliably provide a pachinko machine 1 with the same performance in terms of the probability of acceptance into the passage opening 2532.

Specifically, in the Kruun 2530, the rolling surface portion 2531 is dish-shaped with a low center, and one passage opening 2532 is provided in the center of the rolling surface portion 2531. In this Kruun 2530, the game ball B supplied near the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531 is prevented from contacting the peripheral wall portion 2533 by the peripheral surface portion 2531b, which has a steeper angle than the central surface portion 2531a, and rolls in a circle while gradually decreasing its turning radius from near the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531, and enters the central passage opening 2532. At this time, when the game ball B starts to rotate, the peripheral surface portion 2531b causes the game ball B to roll without coming into contact with the peripheral wall portion 2533, so that abnormal vibrations caused by hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from acting on the game ball B through the peripheral wall portion 2533, and the abnormal vibrations can prevent the game ball B from rolling toward the passage opening 2532, thereby preventing fraudulent acts in which the game ball B is illegally introduced into the passage opening 2532. In addition, since the game ball B rolls in a circular shape, while the passage opening 2532 is a non-circular square shape, when the rotation radius of the game ball B gradually decreases, the game ball B eventually comes into contact with one of the four corners outside the inscribed circle in the passage opening 2532, and the game ball B quickly enters (falls) toward the passage opening 2532, and the game ball B does not rotate around the edge of the passage opening 2532. Therefore, even if one tries to control the timing at which game ball B falls from the crane 2530 by hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1 so that game ball B is distributed to the first upper starting hole 2004 by the center distribution piece 2523, which can be seen moving back and forth, game ball B will enter the passage hole 2532 while timing the game, preventing the achievement of fraudulent activity and reducing the burden on the game hall caused by fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 151(b), when the rolling surface portion 2531 is dish-shaped with a low center and multiple passing holes 2532, including a specific passing hole 2532 to which a specified privilege is awarded, are provided near the center of the rolling surface portion 2531, a game ball B supplied near the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531 is prevented from contacting the peripheral wall portion 2533 by the peripheral surface portion 2531b, and rolls in a circle while gradually reducing its turning radius from near the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531, and enters one of the multiple passing holes 2532 provided near the center, and when the game ball B enters the specific passing hole 2532, a specified privilege is awarded. At this time, when game ball B begins to rotate, the peripheral surface portion 2531b causes it to roll without coming into contact with the peripheral wall portion 2533, thereby preventing abnormal vibrations caused by hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1 from acting on game ball B through the peripheral wall portion 2533.This prevents fraudulent acts in which the abnormal vibrations cause game ball B to roll toward the passage opening 2532, causing it to be illegally inserted into the passage opening 2532. Furthermore, even if multiple pass openings 2532 are arranged on the same circumference, since each pass opening 2532 is non-circular, when the rotation radius of the game ball B rotating in a circular shape gradually becomes smaller, it will eventually come into contact with any part of each pass opening 2532 that is located outside the circumscribing circle that tangents the inscribing circle of each of the multiple pass openings 2532, and the game ball B will quickly enter (fall) toward the pass opening 2532 it has come into contact with, so that the game ball B will not spin around on the edge of the pass opening 2532, or be kicked by the pass opening 2532 and enter another pass opening 2532. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is struck or shaken to make the game ball B enter a desired passage opening 2532 (specific passage opening 2532), if the game ball B comes into contact with another passage opening 2532 before approaching the desired passage opening 2532, the game ball B will enter that passage opening 2532, preventing the achievement of fraudulent acts. Also, when the game ball B comes into contact with the passage opening 2532, it enters that passage opening 2532, and the game ball B is not kicked by the passage opening 2532, so that the entry probability (acceptance probability) of the game ball B into the passage opening 2532 can be stabilized, and a pachinko machine 1 with the same performance in terms of the acceptance probability into the passage opening 2532 can be reliably provided. In addition, as described above, the game ball B is not kicked at the specific passage opening 2532, and the game ball B that comes into contact with the specific passage opening 2532 can enter the specific passage opening 2532, which makes it possible to avoid making the player feel disappointed, and allows the player to enjoy the game and prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as in the sorting unit 2800 shown in FIG. 151(c), when the rolling surface portion 2803 is made flat and inclined downward in a predetermined direction, and a winning hole 2801 and a losing hole 2802 are provided as passage holes near the downstream end of the rolling surface portion 2803, the game ball B rolling from the upstream side to the downstream side on the rolling surface portion 2803 may enter the winning hole 2801 or the losing hole 2802 while being prevented from contacting the peripheral wall portion 2809 by the dam portion 2808. Since the dam portion 2808 prevents the game ball B from contacting the peripheral wall portion 2809, the game ball B may cross the dam portion 2808 and come into contact with the peripheral wall portion 2809, and the dam portion 2808 is made to a low height that the game ball B can cross. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 1 is struck or shaken to cause abnormal vibrations while game ball B is in contact with the dam portion 2808 in order to change the rolling direction of game ball B toward the winning opening 2801 using the dam portion 2808, the dam portion 2808 will move relative to game ball B so as to slip beneath it, thereby minimizing the force acting on game ball B in the direction of the winning opening 2801 as much as possible, and preventing fraudulent acts such as game ball B being illegally inserted into the winning opening 2801. Furthermore, since the winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 are non-circular in shape, when game ball B contacts the edge of the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802 when it attempts to enter the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802, the game ball B will quickly enter (fall) towards the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802 that it has contacted, and game ball B will not spin around on the edge of the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802, or be kicked by the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802 and enter another losing opening 2802 or the winning opening 2801. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is struck or shaken to make the game ball B enter the winning hole 2801 at a desired timing, if the game ball B comes into contact with the winning hole 2801 or the losing hole 2802, the game ball B will enter the winning hole 2801 or the losing hole 2802, so that it is possible to prevent the achievement of fraudulent acts. Also, if the game ball B comes into contact with the winning hole 2801 or the losing hole 2802, it will enter the winning hole 2801 or the losing hole 2802, and the game ball B will not be kicked by the winning hole 2801 or the losing hole 2802, so that the probability of the game ball B entering the winning hole 2801 (acceptance probability) can be stabilized, and a pachinko machine 1 with the same performance in terms of the acceptance probability into the winning hole 2801 can be reliably provided. In addition, since there is provided a winning hole 2801 to which a specified benefit is awarded, as described above, game ball B will not be kicked at the winning hole 2801, and game ball B that comes into contact with the winning hole 2801 can enter the winning hole 2801 as is, which prevents the player from feeling disappointed and allows the player to enjoy the game and prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, according to this embodiment, as described above, since it is possible to prevent the achievement of fraudulent acts, it is possible to make the player realize that even if they perform fraudulent acts, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts. In this case, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a vibration sensor 1040, and an alarm can be issued in response to abnormal vibrations by vibration notification processing, thereby further increasing the deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

As described above, the shape of the passage opening 2532 can prevent fraudulent acts from being committed through abnormal vibrations such as hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1, making it possible to omit the vibration sensor 1040 for detecting abnormal vibrations, thereby reducing the load on the control of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the passage opening 2532 of the rolling surface portion 2531 is non-circular, the following excellent action and effect can be achieved. In detail, in conventional pachinko machines, since the through hole of the Kruun as the rolling surface portion is circular, many players recognize the through hole (passage opening) as being circular. In contrast, in this embodiment, the passage opening 2532 of the rolling surface portion 2531 in the Kruun 2530 is non-circular, so that a strong impact can be given to players who are accustomed to the shape of the through hole in conventional pachinko machines by the passage opening 2532, which has a shape never seen in pachinko machines before, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the passage opening 2532 of the rolling surface portion 2531. Therefore, the player is strongly made to believe that something good will happen if game ball B enters the passage opening 2532 of the crane 2530, and when game ball B is supplied to the rolling surface portion 2531 (crane 2530), the player is made to feel anxious and excited depending on whether or not the game ball B enters the desired passage opening 2532, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, in the Kluen 2530, the passage opening 2532 is provided so that the extension direction of the longest opposing line (diagonal line) in the non-circular passage opening 2532 faces the front-rear direction, so that the part extending in a straight line or a curved line with a small curvature in the left-right direction on the periphery of the passage opening 2532 can be eliminated or reduced. In other words, the parts of each side constituting the periphery of the passage opening 2532 extend in a direction intersecting the left-right direction (diagonal direction). In this way, since the edge (constituting side) of the passage opening 2532 extends in a diagonal direction, the relative movement distance between the game ball B and the edge (side) of the passage opening 2532 due to abnormal vibration in the front-rear direction can be shortened compared to the case where the edge (side) of the passage opening 2532 extends in the left-right direction, and the influence of abnormal vibration can be reduced. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is struck or shaken to cause abnormal vibrations or impacts in the forward or backward directions when game ball B is about to enter the passage opening 2532, thereby delaying or speeding up the timing of game ball B's entry into the passage opening 2532, the effect of the abnormal vibrations or impacts on game ball B can be reduced, and game ball B can be made to immediately enter the passage opening 2532, reliably preventing the achievement of fraudulent activity.

In addition, because the diagonal extension direction of the passage opening 2532 faces the front-to-rear direction, the shape of the passage opening 2532 can be more easily seen when viewed from a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the rolling surface portion 2531 having the non-circular passage opening 2532, which has never been seen in a pachinko machine before, can be shown to the player, making a strong impact on the player and providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players, and making it easier for players to select this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play, making playing with this pachinko machine 1 enjoyable and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as described above, the peripheral surface portion 2531b of the rolling surface portion 2531 in the crane 2530 and the dam portion 2808 of the distribution unit 2800 are at a low height that the game ball B can climb over. Therefore, even if the peripheral surface portion 2531b or the dam portion 2808 is struck or shaken to cause abnormal vibrations while the game ball B is in contact with the peripheral surface portion 2531b or the dam portion 2808 in an attempt to change the rolling direction of the game ball B toward the passage opening 2532, the peripheral surface portion 2531b and the dam portion 2808 will move relative to the game ball B so as to slip under it, and the force acting on the game ball B in the direction of the passage opening 2532 or the winning opening 2801 can be reduced as much as possible. This makes it possible to prevent the rolling direction of game ball B from being directed toward the passage opening 2532 or the winning opening 2801 due to unauthorized abnormal vibrations, and prevents unauthorized acts such as game ball B being illegally inserted into the passage opening 2532 or the winning opening 2801.

In addition, a peripheral wall portion 2533 is provided that extends upward from the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531 to a position higher than the radius of the game ball B, so that the peripheral wall portion 2533 can prevent the game ball B from falling outward from the rolling surface portion 2531, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B via the rolling surface portion 2531 and the passage opening 2532, preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since a peripheral wall portion 2533 is provided on the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531, even if an illegal act is attempted by inserting an illegal tool such as a piano wire from the outside into the rolling surface portion 2531 and the passage opening 2532, the peripheral wall portion 2533 can prevent the illegal tool from entering, thereby further increasing the deterrent effect against illegal acts.

Furthermore, even if the peripheral wall portion 2533 is provided on the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531, the peripheral surface portion 2531b can prevent the game ball B from contacting the peripheral wall portion 2533, so that abnormal vibrations caused by hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from acting on the game ball B through the peripheral wall portion 2533. This prevents fraudulent acts in which the game ball B is illegally inserted into the passage opening 2532 due to abnormal vibrations that direct the game ball B's rolling direction toward the passage opening 2532.

In addition, since the game ball B is supplied near the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531 or the rolling surface portion 2803, it is possible to easily increase the rolling distance from when the game ball B is supplied to the rolling surface portion 2531 or the rolling surface portion 2803 until it enters the passing port 2532, the winning port 2801, or the losing port 2802. This allows the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B rolling on the rolling surface portion 2531 or the rolling surface portion 2803 for a longer period of time, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, game balls B are supplied near the outer periphery of the rolling surface 2531, and as described above, it is possible to lengthen the rolling time of game balls B on the rolling surface 2531. For example, the rolling time on the rolling surface 2531 makes it easier to match the distribution timing of game balls B downstream of the passage opening 2532 with the execution timing of a specified performance by a performance device such as a movable decoration or a performance display device. Therefore, the effect of the joint performance by the distribution of game balls B and the performance device can be fully exerted, entertaining players and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the center role 2500 of the game board 5, the concave curved wall portion 2554f of the binding base 2550 accommodates a portion of the mounting boss 2515 of the center base 2511 in the main unit 2510 and the mounting boss 2614 of the attacca base plate 2610 in the attacca unit 2600 as predetermined members, and the peripheral wall portion 2554 of the binding base 2550 is fitted to the rib 2516 of the center base 2511 and the attacca base plate 2610 in the attacca unit 2600. By abutting against the rib 2618 of 610, the binding base 2550 can be positioned non-rotatably at a predetermined position on the center base 2511 or the attacca base plate 2610, and in this state, the binding base 2550 can be attached to the center base 2511 or the attacca base plate 2610 by screwing a mounting screw into the mounting boss 2515 or the mounting boss 2614 through the mounting hole 2553 penetrating the main body 2551 of the binding base 2550. On the other hand, the binding base 2560 and the binding base 2570 can be attached to a predetermined member by screwing a mounting screw into the predetermined member through the respective mounting hole 2563 or the mounting hole 2573.

Then, the cable tie CT is inserted through the annular band holding portions 2552, 2562, and 2572 of the binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570, and the wiring EC connected to the peripheral control board 1510, etc. is tightened together with the band holding portions 2552, 2562, and 2572, so that the wiring EC can be tied and held in a bundled state. At this time, since the cable tie CT is inserted through the annular band holding portions 2552, 2562, and 2572, the cable tie CT does not come out of the annular band holding portions 2552, 2562, and 2572, and the multiple wiring EC can be reliably tied. For this reason, by attaching the binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570 to a desired position (the position where the mounting boss 2515 and mounting boss 2614 are provided) on a predetermined member (center base 2511 or attacca base plate 2610), it is possible to provide the band holding portion 2552, band holding portion 2562, and band holding portion 2572 for holding the wiring EC at the desired position. In other words, by attaching the binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570, it is possible to provide the band holding portion 2552, band holding portion 2562, and band holding portion 2572 at any position on the predetermined member (center base 2511 or attacca base plate 2610).

In more detail, even if a harness support portion (corresponding to a band holding portion) for holding the wiring EC cannot be formed in the specified member itself due to its size, shape, etc. in a position along the path (route) of multiple wiring EC in a specified member (center base 2511 or attacca base plate 2610), it is easy to secure space for providing mounting bosses for attaching binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570 with mounting screws, so binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570 can be attached. Then, by attaching a plurality of binding bases 2550, binding bases 2560, and binding bases 2570 to the path (route) of the wiring EC in a specified member (center base 2511 or attacca base plate 2610), and holding the wiring EC in band holding portions 2552, band holding portions 2562, and band holding portions 2572 of binding bases 2550, binding bases 2560, and binding bases 2570, the wiring EC can be held on the desired route. Therefore, even if the wiring EC moves for some reason such as maintenance or vibration, the wiring EC can be maintained (held) on the desired route via binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570, so the wiring EC will not deviate from the desired route, and it is possible to prevent the wiring EC from coming into contact with other components and becoming disconnected, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reliably hold the wiring EC on the desired route so that it is difficult for the player to see, thereby improving the appearance.

In addition, by attaching the binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570, the band holding portion 2552, band holding portion 2562, and band holding portion 2572 can be provided on the specified components (center base 2511 and attacca base plate 2610). This reduces the cost of the specified components compared to forming the band holding portions on the specified components themselves, and makes it easier to accommodate design changes and model changes, thereby suppressing increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570 are attached to the specified member (center base 2511 or attacca base plate 2610) by screwing mounting screws through the mounting holes, and since the binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570 are detachably attached by the mounting screws, when the binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570 are removed from the specified member while the multiple wiring ECs are held in the band holding portion 2552, band holding portion 2562, and band holding portion 2572 of the binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570, the multiple wiring ECs can be removed from the desired route while still bundled. For this reason, for example, when checking the installation status of parts installed at the back of multiple wiring EC (on the route) during maintenance, in the conventional technology, multiple wiring EC inserted into the gaps made by the harness support parts must be removed one by one from the gap, and then reinserted one by one into the gap and returned to its original position, which is time-consuming. However, with this configuration, multiple wiring EC can be moved away at once simply by removing binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570, eliminating the above-mentioned time-consuming work and making it easier to check the installation status of parts installed at the back of multiple wiring EC, thereby reducing the burden on the game hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed.

As described above, since the wiring EC is attached to the specified members (center base 2511 or attacca base plate 2610) via binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570, when assembling pachinko machine 1, it is possible to first hold multiple wiring EC in band holding portions 2552, band holding portions 2562, and band holding portions 2572 of binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570, and then attach binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570 to the specified members. As a result, when assembling the pachinko machine 1, the multiple wiring EC is held and bundled by the band holding portion 2552, band holding portion 2562, and band holding portion 2572 of the binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570, so that the multiple wiring EC is less likely to get in the way of assembly, making the assembly work easier and suppressing increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, by simply attaching the binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570 to the mounting bosses (mounting boss 2515 and mounting boss 2614) of the specified member (center base 2511 and attacca base plate 2610), it is possible to provide the band holding portion 2552, band holding portion 2562, and band holding portion 2572 for holding the wiring EC on the specified member. Therefore, compared to providing the band holding portion directly on the specified member, the mounting bosses can be formed without complicating the structure of the molding die (metal mold). Therefore, the structure of the molding die (metal mold) for molding the specified member can be simplified, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the concave curved wall portion 2554f of the binding base 2550 accommodates the mounting boss 2515 and mounting boss 2614 of a specified member (center base 2511 and attacca base plate 2610), and the peripheral wall portion 2554 of the binding base 2550 abuts against the specified member, thereby restricting the rotation of the binding base 2550 and allowing the binding base 2550 to be positioned relative to the specified member, thereby improving the workability of installing the binding base 2550.

In addition, by abutting the peripheral wall portion 2554 of the binding base 2550 against a specified member (center base 2511 or attacca base plate 2610), the rotation of the binding base 2550 can be restricted. Therefore, even if the wiring EC is pulled due to maintenance or the like after the binding base 2550 is attached to a specified member and the wiring EC is held by the band holding portion 2552, the binding base 2550 will not rotate. This prevents the direction (routing direction) of the wiring EC held by the band holding portion 2552 from changing due to the rotation of the binding base 2550, and the wiring EC can be kept in the desired position, making it difficult for the player to see the wiring EC, providing a pachinko machine 1 that looks good.

Furthermore, since the binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570 are formed in the same color (transparent in this embodiment) as the specified components (center base 2511 and attacca base plate 2610), the binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570 can be made less noticeable when attached to the specified components, and poor appearance can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570 are attached to the mounting boss 2515 and mounting boss 2614 of the specified components (center base 2511 and attacca base plate 2610), by providing multiple mounting bosses in advance on the specified components, even if the path (route) of the wiring EC is changed due to a design change, model change, etc., the binding base 2550, binding base 2560, and binding base 2570 can be attached to the mounting boss on the changed route (or close to the route), making it possible to easily respond to design changes, etc., and suppressing increases in the costs associated with the pachinko machine 1. Also, as described above, by providing a plurality of mounting bosses in advance on the specified member (center base 2511 or attacca base plate 2610) and attaching the bundling base 2550, bundling base 2560, and bundling base 2570 to the mounting bosses on the desired route, it is possible to easily respond to design changes, etc., and therefore the versatility of the specified member can be improved and the specified member (component) can be made common. Furthermore, by using the bundling base 2550, bundling base 2560, and bundling base 2570 of this embodiment, rather than providing an extra portion for holding the wiring EC in advance on the specified member (center base 2511 or attacca base plate 2610), it is possible to simplify the mold for molding the specified member, since it is only necessary to provide an extra mounting boss in advance on the specified member.

In addition, one binding base 2560 is provided with multiple band holding parts 2562 oriented in different directions, so that when the binding base 2560 is attached to a specified component (center base 2511 or attacca base plate 2610), the wiring EC can be held using the band holding part 2562 oriented in a direction that corresponds to the direction of the wiring EC passing through that part, without having to reattach the binding base 2560 to change its orientation. This increases the versatility of the binding base 2560 and suppresses increases in the costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the game board 5, the harness WH1 consisting of multiple wiring EC is fastened and bundled together with the wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011 extending from the performance display device 1600 and the rear box 3010 by a cable tie CT, so that the tightening with the cable tie CT can increase the sliding resistance between the harness WH1 and the wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011, making it difficult for the harness WH1 to come off the wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011. In addition, the harness WH1, which is made up of multiple wiring EC, is bound together with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 by fastening them with a cable tie CT. This prevents the wiring EC from coming loose one by one from the harness WH1 at the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. This prevents some of the loose wiring EC from coming loose from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, and also prevents the wiring EC from coming loose from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, which can lead to the wiring EC becoming more susceptible to breakage.

In addition, since the harness WH1 consisting of multiple wiring EC is bound together with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 by tightening with the cable tie CT, the harness WH1 can be slid in the longitudinal direction of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 while being bound together with the cable tie CT depending on the tightening force of the cable tie CT. As a result, when it is necessary to check the components hidden by the harness WH1 during maintenance, etc., in the conventional technology where the wiring EC is not bound by the cable tie CT, the work is performed by moving (sliding) each wire EC from the harness WH1, whereas in this embodiment, multiple wiring EC (harness WH1) can be slid at once, making the checking work easier and reducing the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, since the tips of the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 for supporting the harness WH1 are free ends, the harness WH1 can be easily inserted from the open free end sides of the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011, thereby improving workability. At this time, hooks 1603a and 3011a are provided at the tips of wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011, protruding toward performance display device 1600 and rear box 3010. When harness WH1 is fastened and bundled together with wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011 by cable tie CT, even if cable tie CT slides together with harness WH1 toward the free end of wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011, further sliding is prevented by abutting hooks 1603a and 3011a. This prevents harness WH1 together with cable tie CT from coming off the tips of wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011, and a pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects can be provided.

In addition, since the cable tie CT is composed of a band portion CTa and a locking portion CTb that prevents the band portion CTa from being retracted, i.e., it can only be inserted in one direction, by simply inserting the tip of the band portion CTa wrapped around the wiring engaging portion 1603, the wiring engaging portion 3011, and the harness WH1 or WH2 into the locking portion CTb and pulling it, the wiring engaging portion 1603, the wiring engaging portion 3011, and the harness WH1 or WH2 can be locked in a tightened state, thereby improving the workability of bundling the harness WH1 or WH2. At this time, because the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is in contact with the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011, even if a force acts on the cable tie CT to rotate around the axis of the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 for some reason, the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is in contact with the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011, so that the cable tie CT can be prevented from rotating around the axis of the harness WH1 or the harness WH2. This prevents the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT and the tip of the band portion CTa extending from the locking portion CTb from coming into contact with other components, preventing malfunctions.

Furthermore, since the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is abutted against the side of the wiring engagement portion 1603 or the wiring engagement portion 3011 opposite the harness WH1 or harness WH2, the following excellent operational effects can be achieved. In more detail, if the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is abutted against the side of the wiring engagement portion 1603 or the wiring engagement portion 3011 that is in contact with the harness WH1 or harness WH2, the tip of the band portion CTa protruding from the locking portion CTb needs to be pulled in the direction of the performance display device 1600 or the rear box 3010, and the performance display device 1600 or the rear box 3010 gets in the way, making the tying work difficult. In response to this, the locking portion CTb is abutted against the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 on the side opposite the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, so that when the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bundled with the cable tie CT, the locking portion CTb faces the worker, and by pulling the tip of the band portion CTa protruding from the locking portion CTb in a direction away from the performance display device 1600 and the rear box 3010, the wiring retaining portion 1603, the wiring retaining portion 3011, and the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be tightened, further improving workability.

In addition, since the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is abutted against the portion of the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 opposite the harness WH1 and harness WH2, as described above, the locking portion CTb faces the worker, making it easy to check whether the tip of the band portion CTa is inserted into the locking portion CTb, and providing a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to check the work.

Furthermore, because the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is abutted against the portion of the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011 on the opposite side from the harness WH1 or WH2, the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011 is interposed between the harness WH1 or WH2 and the locking portion CTb, and the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011 can function as a barrier that prevents the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT from coming into contact with the harness WH1 or WH2. This provides the following excellent operational effects. In detail, when the tip of the band portion CTa is inserted into the lock portion CTb of the cable tie CT and the tip of the band portion CTa is pulled to bundle the cables, if the wiring EC of the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 abuts against the lock portion CTb, part of the wiring EC will be pulled into the lock portion CTb together with the band portion CTa that is being pulled, which may cause the insulating coating of the wiring EC to be torn. In contrast, the locking portion CTb is abutted against the side of the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011 opposite the harness WH1 or WH2. In other words, the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011 is interposed between the harness WH1 or WH2 and the locking portion CTb. Therefore, the harness WH1 or WH2 (wiring EC) does not abut against the locking portion CTb. Even if the tip of the band portion CTa through which the locking portion CTb is inserted is pulled, a part of the wiring EC is not pulled into the locking portion CTb together with the band portion CTa. This prevents the insulating coating of the wiring EC from breaking, and protects the harness WH1 or WH2 tied together with the cable tie CT.

In addition, because the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT is abutted against the portion of the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011 opposite the harness WH1 or harness WH2, the cable tie CT (band portion CTa) can be easily cut when removing the harness WH1 or harness WH2 from the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011 for maintenance or disassembly of the pachinko machine 1. In more detail, as described above, because the block-shaped locking portion CTb faces the worker, by guiding a cutting tool such as pliers along the locking portion CTb, the band portion CTa can be easily cut without damaging other portions.

In addition, since the rear cover 640 of the main frame 4 and the peripheral control board box 1520 protruding rearward from the cable tie CT are provided as protective parts for protecting the cable tie CT, the locking part CTb of the cable tie CT can be protected, and therefore, under various circumstances such as assembly, transportation, installation, and installation in the game hall of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), it is possible to prevent other members from coming into contact with the cable tie CT for some reason, and it is possible to prevent damage to the cable tie CT (locking part CTb) and prevent the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from coming off the wiring locking part 1603 and the wiring locking part 3011. In addition, since the rear cover 640 of the main frame 4 and the peripheral control board box 1520 can protect the cable tie CT from coming into contact with other members, it is possible to avoid damage to other members due to the cable tie CT coming into contact, and the occurrence of malfunctions can be reduced.

Furthermore, the rear cover 640 of the main frame 4 can reliably prevent other components from coming into contact with the cable tie CT, preventing other components from coming into contact with the cable tie CT (locking portion CTb) for some reason and damaging it, and preventing the harness WH1 and harness WH2 from coming off the wiring retaining portion 1603 and wiring retaining portion 3011 due to damage to the locking portion CTb. Also, the rear cover 640 of the main frame 4 can prevent other components from coming into contact with the cable tie CT, preventing other components from being damaged by the cable tie CT coming into contact with it, reducing the occurrence of malfunctions.

In addition, when the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear of the game board 5 is covered by the back cover 640 of the main frame 4, so that the back cover 640 can prevent other components in the island equipment of the game hall, such as the wiring EC connecting the pachinko machine 1 to the game hall side, the game balls B, and other components from contacting (abutting) with the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT. This can prevent the harness WH1 and harness WH2 from coming off the wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011 due to the release of the fastening of the band portion CTa by the locking portion CTb due to contact with other components, and can prevent the occurrence of malfunctions caused by the cable tie CT. In addition, since the back cover 640 can prevent the fastening from loosening or being released due to contact with other components with the locking portion CTb, a type of cable tie CT in which the band portion CTa can be attached and detached from the locking portion CTb can be used.

In addition, since the peripheral control board box 1520 protruding from the cable tie CT is provided as a protective part for protecting the cable tie CT, when another member moves from the rear toward the rear box 3010 on which the wiring locking part 1603 and the wiring locking part 3011 are provided, the other member abuts against the peripheral control board box 1520 as a protective part before contacting the cable tie CT, and the other member can be prevented from moving further toward the cable tie CT, and the other member can be prevented from contacting the cable tie CT. Therefore, since the contact (abutment) of the other member with the cable tie CT (locking part CTb) can be avoided, the restriction on the movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 by the cable tie CT is not released due to contact with the other member, and the occurrence of a malfunction caused by the cable tie CT can be prevented. In addition, since a peripheral control board box 1520 is provided as a protective part to protect the cable tie CT, even if for some reason another component approaches the game board 5 from behind beyond the rear cover 640 of the main body frame 4, as described above, the peripheral control board box 1520 that protects the cable tie CT is also present, so the cable tie CT can be doubly protected.

In addition, as a protective section for protecting the cable ties CT, a peripheral control board box 1520 is provided on the rear surface of the game board 5 where the play area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 is provided, protruding rearward from the cable ties CT. Therefore, even if the game board 5 is placed on a workbench with its rear surface facing down during assembly work of the game board 5, the peripheral control board box 1520 abuts against the workbench, so the workbench does not abut against the locking section CTb of the cable ties CT. Alternatively, even if multiple game boards 5 are transported stacked during transport work of the game board 5, the other game boards 5 abut against the peripheral control board box 1520, so the other game boards 5 do not abut against the locking section CTb. For this reason, the presence of the peripheral control board box 1520 makes it possible to prevent the locking portion CTb of the cable tie CT from coming into contact with other components such as the workbench or game board 5 and being crushed, and prevents malfunctions caused by the harness WH1 and harness WH2 coming off the wiring retaining portion 1603 and wiring retaining portion 3011 due to damage to the locking portion CTb.

Furthermore, the rear of the performance display device 1600 and the rear box 3010 are made transparent, and the harnesses WH1 and WH2 are supported visibly by the wiring retaining portions 1603 and 3011. This allows the harnesses WH1 and WH2 supported by the wiring retaining portions 1603 and 3011 to be seen from the outside. This makes it easy to check whether all of the wiring EC that makes up the harnesses WH1 and WH2 is tied together with cable ties CT and whether their movement is restricted. This prevents the shipment of defective products with some of the wiring EC loose, and also makes it easier to check the cable ties CT during maintenance, etc.

In addition, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be seen through the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011, the task of bundling the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 with the cable tie CT can be easily performed, improving workability.

In addition, the harness WH1 and harness WH2 can be seen through the transparent wiring retaining portion 1603 and wiring retaining portion 3011, and the cable tie CT is milky white with low light transmittance and is a different color (e.g., gray, yellow, white, black, blue, red, green, etc.) from the multiple wirings EC that constitute the harness WH1 and harness WH2. Therefore, when the harness WH1 and harness WH2 (multiple wirings EC) and the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT are seen through the wiring retaining portion 1603 and wiring retaining portion 3011, it is clearly visible that the band portion CTa is straddling the harness WH1 and harness WH2. This allows the harness WH1 and harness WH2 to be reliably confirmed to be tied by the cable tie CT, and makes it easy to tie the wiring retaining portion 1603, wiring retaining portion 3011, and harness WH1 and harness WH2 by the cable tie CT.

Furthermore, because the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT is in contact with the harness WH1 or WH2 at an angle to the longitudinal direction, the contact area can be made larger and the frictional resistance between the cable tie CT (band portion CTa) and the harness WH1 or WH2 can be made larger compared to when the cable tie CT is in contact with the harness WH1 or WH2 in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. Therefore, the movement of the harness WH1 or WH2 by the cable tie CT can be sufficiently restricted, and the harness WH1 or WH2 or the wiring EC can be prevented from coming off the wiring retaining portion 1603 or the wiring retaining portion 3011, thereby avoiding the occurrence of malfunctions.

In addition, since the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT is in contact with the harness WH1 or WH2 at an angle, the following excellent effects can be achieved. In detail, when the harness WH1 or WH2 is tightened and tied with the cable tie CT, a force is applied from the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT to the harness WH1 or WH2 (wiring EC), and depending on the strength of the force, the insulating coating film covering the wiring EC may deteriorate early, making it easier for defects such as leakage and short circuits to occur. In contrast, when the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT is in contact with the harness WH1 or WH2 at an angle, the contact area between the band portion CTa and the harness WH1 or WH2 (wiring EC) can be made larger than when the band portion CTa is wrapped around the harness WH1 or WH2 in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the harness WH1 or WH2. Therefore, even if the cable tie CT is tightened with the same strength, by making contact at an angle to increase the contact area, the force acting when tightening can be widely dispersed and relatively small, which can prevent early deterioration of the insulating coating and the occurrence of problems such as electrical leakage and short circuits.

In addition, since the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 extend in a strip-like shape, when the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bundled together with the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 using the cable tie CT, since the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 have width, the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT can automatically come into contact at an angle with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, and a pachinko machine 1 that provides the above-mentioned effects can be reliably provided.

Furthermore, the harness WH1 and harness WH2, which are made up of multiple wiring EC, are individually bound with a specific cable tie at a location away from the wiring retaining portion 1603 and wiring retaining portion 3011, so that the multiple wiring EC constituting the harness WH1 and harness WH2 can be prevented from coming apart one by one over the entire length of the harness WH1 and harness WH2, and the loose wiring EC can be prevented from coming into contact with other components, thereby preventing malfunctions.

In addition, since the harness WH1 and harness WH2 are bundled and tied together at a location away from the wiring retaining portion 1603 and wiring retaining portion 3011 using the special cable tie, if the harness WH1 or harness WH2 is pulled in its longitudinal direction for some reason, as the harness WH1 or harness WH2 moves, the locking portion of the special cable tie comes into contact with the wiring retaining portion 1603 or wiring retaining portion 3011 and the cable tie CT, and the special cable tie can prevent the harness WH1 or harness WH2 from moving any further.

Furthermore, because the harness WH1 and harness WH2, which are made up of multiple wiring EC, are tied together with a special cable tie at a location away from the wiring locking portion 1603 and wiring locking portion 3011, the multiple wiring EC are gathered together so that the outer circumference of the harness WH1 and harness WH2 approaches a circle, and the band portion of the special cable tie extends in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the harness WH1 and harness WH2. This allows the harness WH1 and harness WH2 to be bundled together compactly at the location of the special cable tie, making it easier to check the components located behind the harness WH1 and harness WH2.

In addition, in the portion of the specific cable tie provided away from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the band portion of the specific cable tie extends in a direction perpendicular to the (longitudinal direction of) the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. On the other hand, in the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the band portion CTa of the cable tie CT is made to contact the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 at an angle, so that the direction in which the band portion CTa and the band portion extend relative to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be made different between the portion of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 and the portion of the bundling portion. As a result, in the work of bundling the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, by checking the position and number of the band portion CTa and the direction in which the band portion extends, it is easy to check whether the work is being performed according to the work manual. In this case, the cable ties CT of the wiring fastening parts 1603 and 3011 may be different colors from the specific cable ties, making it easier to check the fastening work.

In addition, since the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 extend in a flat or band-like shape, the contact area between the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 and the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be made larger than when the wiring retaining portion 1603 and the wiring retaining portion 3011 are rod-shaped, and the frictional resistance can be increased. This makes it easier to exert the effect of the cable tie CT as a movement restriction means, and the movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be reliably restricted to further prevent malfunctions.

Furthermore, since the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are configured to extend in a flat or strip-like shape, the multiple wirings EC constituting the harnesses WH1 and WH2 tend to spread out in a line along the surface of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, making it easier to dissipate heat from the wiring EC. At this time, the harnesses WH1 and WH2 can be visually confirmed through the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, making it easier to check the multiple wirings EC constituting the harnesses WH1 and WH2 one by one through the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011.

In addition, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are extended from the performance display device 1600 and the rear box 3010 in the opposite direction to the movement of the harness WH1 in the direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the harness WH1 when tension is applied to the harness WH1. Even if the harness WH1 is pulled or pulled during assembly or maintenance of the pachinko machine 1, the harness WH1 moves in the opposite direction to the tip at the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. Therefore, the harness WH1 will not come loose from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, the tips of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, including the hook portion 1603a and the hook portion 3011a, are formed at an angle so that they move away from the performance display device 1600 and the rear box 3010 as they approach the tips, making it easier to insert the harness WH1 from the tip side of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 between the performance display device 1600 and the rear box 3010, improving workability.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5, the protruding pin 3063 of the mounting supporter 3060 is inserted into the through-holes of the multiple functional holes 3013 provided at the position where the main body 3061 straddles the rear box 3010, and then the mounting screw is inserted into the through-holes of the functional holes 3013 corresponding to the multiple first mounting holes 3062 among the multiple functional holes 3013 provided at the position where the main body 3061 straddles from the opposite side of the mounting supporter 3060 in the rear box 3010, and screwed into the first mounting hole 3062 and tightened, so that the mounting supporter 3060 can be attached to the rear box 3010. In this state, the mounting supporter 3060 is attached to the rear box 3010 in a non-rotatable manner because the protruding pin 3063 is inserted into the through-hole of the functional hole 3013. The back right performance unit 3400 can be fixed (attached) to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3060 by attaching the back right performance unit 3400 to the attachment supporter 3060 using the multiple second attachment holes 3064 provided in the main body 3061 of the attachment supporter 3060 attached to the back box 3010. The attachment supporter 3060 may be attached to the back right performance unit 3400 after the attachment supporter 3060 is attached to the back box 3010. At this time, as described above, the protruding pin 3063 of the attachment supporter 3060 is inserted into the through hole, and the positioning accuracy of the back right performance unit 3400 attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3060 can be improved, so that the back right performance unit 3400 can be reliably attached to the desired position, making it easier to exert the effect of the back right performance unit 3400.

The rear box 3010 has multiple functional holes 3013, so the rear right performance unit 3400 can be attached to the desired position by attaching the attachment supporter 3060 to the multiple functional holes 3013 that are provided at the desired position where the rear right performance unit 3400 is to be attached. Therefore, when it is necessary to change the position of the rear right performance unit 3400 due to design changes, model changes, etc., the rear box 3010 does not need to be remade, and the position of the rear right performance unit 3400 can be easily changed by simply attaching the attachment supporter 3060 to the multiple functional holes 3013 that are provided at the desired position. This increases the degree of freedom in the placement of the rear right performance unit 3400, and makes it possible to easily respond to design changes, model changes, etc., thereby suppressing increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1.

As described above, the rear right performance unit 3400 can be attached to the desired position by attaching the mounting supporter 3060 to the multiple functional holes 3013 in the desired position of the multiple functional holes 3013 in the rear box 3010, which increases the freedom of placement of the rear right performance unit 3400, allowing the rear right performance unit 3400 to be placed in a more effective position. By attaching the rear right performance unit 3400 to a position not seen in previous pachinko machines 1, it is possible to strongly attract the player's attention, and a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players can be provided.

In addition, since the mounting supporter 3060 (main body 3061) is sized to span multiple functional hole portions 3013 in the rear box 3010, it is possible to mount multiple performance units such as the rear right performance unit 3400 on one mounting supporter 3060. By mounting multiple performance units on one mounting supporter 3060, the mounting supporter 3060 can be used to unitize multiple performance units together. Therefore, by mounting multiple performance units on the mounting supporter 3060 and then mounting the mounting supporter 3060 to the rear box 3010, multiple performance units can be mounted on the rear box 3010 at once, which simplifies the effort required to assemble the pachinko machine 1 and suppresses increases in costs.

Furthermore, since the mounting supporter 3060 is attached to the rear box 3010 across multiple functional holes 3013, the mounting supporter 3060 can reinforce the rear box 3010, increasing the durability of the rear box 3010 and making it less likely to break. In addition, since the mounting supporter 3060 can reinforce the rear box 3010, the rear box 3010 can be made less likely to deform even when subjected to load from the rear right performance unit 3400 or vibrations and inertial forces due to movable performance, and the rear right performance unit 3400 can be fixed in a fixed position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rear right performance unit 3400 from shaking or moving unnecessarily, so that the decorative effect and performance effect of the rear right performance unit 3400 can be reliably exerted, and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that entertains the player and suppresses a decline in interest.

In addition, since the rear right performance unit 3400 is attached to the rear box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3060, a gap of the same thickness as the main body 3061 of the mounting supporter 3060 can be formed between the rear right performance unit 3400 and the rear box 3010, making it easier to release heat from the rear right performance unit 3400, the rear box 3010, etc. through the gap. In addition, the multiple functional hole parts 3013 provided in the rear box 3010 each have a through hole, and as described above, the mounting position of the mounting supporter 3060 can be appropriately selected, so that since there are functional hole parts 3013 to which the mounting supporter 3060 is not attached, heat from the rear right performance unit 3400 side can be ventilated and released through the through hole of the functional hole part 3013 to which the mounting supporter 3060 is not attached. For this reason, the configuration of the multiple functional holes 3013 of the rear box 3010 and the mounting supporter 3060 can reduce the effects of heat on the rear right performance unit 3400 and the rear box 3010, etc., and ensure that the decorative and performance effects of the rear right performance unit 3400, etc. can be fully realized.

Furthermore, since the rear right performance unit 3400 is attached to the rear box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3060, the attachment supporter 3060 can reduce the transmission of vibration between the rear box 3010 and the rear right performance unit 3400. This prevents the rear box 3010 and the rear right performance unit 3400 from shaking or moving unnecessarily, so the decorative and performance effects of the rear box 3010 and the rear right performance unit 3400 can be reliably achieved, and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that entertains players and prevents a decline in interest.

As described above, by appropriately selecting the multiple functional holes 3013 to which the mounting support 3060 is attached from the multiple functional holes 3013 provided in the rear box 3010, the position of the rear right performance unit 3400 can be easily changed without having to remake the rear box 3010, so that the rear box 3010 can be reused as the same regardless of the model, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the rear right performance unit 3400 is attached to the rear box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3060, by preparing multiple mounting supports 3060 with different sizes and shapes of main body 3061 in advance, it is possible to easily accommodate position changes not only in the direction along the surface on which the multiple functional hole portions 3013 of the rear box 3010 are provided, but also in the direction perpendicular to said surface, thereby further increasing the freedom of positioning of the rear right performance unit 3400.

In addition, because the rear right performance unit 3400 is attached to the rear box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3060, there is no need to provide a mounting boss for attaching the performance unit to the rear box 3010 as in conventional technology, and because through holes are provided in the multiple functional hole portions 3013 for attaching the mounting supporter 3060, the rear box 3010 can be made lighter than before, making it easier to handle (transport) and handle the rear box 3010 when assembling the pachinko machine 1, etc.

As described above, the mounting supporter 3060 can be positioned by inserting the protruding pin 3063 of the mounting supporter 3060 into the through hole of the functional hole portion 3013, making it possible to make it difficult for the rear right performance unit 3400 to move via the mounting supporter 3060. This prevents the rear right performance unit 3400 from moving or shaking unnecessarily during the movable performance, so that the player can be reliably shown the movable performance moving as desired, the desired performance effect can be reliably achieved, the player can be entertained, and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

The main body 3061 of the mounting supporter 3060 is composed of a plurality of block-shaped head portions 3061a each having a first mounting hole 3062 and a second mounting hole 3064, and a plate-shaped back connecting piece 3061b and a side connecting piece 3061c that connect the plurality of head portions 3061a together. Compared to forming the main body 3061 of the mounting supporter 3060 with a constant thickness over its entire length, the amount of material required for the back connecting piece 3061b and the side connecting piece 3061c can be reduced, so the cost and weight of the mounting supporter 3060 can be reduced, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5, the protruding pin 3053 of the mounting supporter 3050 is inserted into one of the two through holes of the functional hole portion 3013 in the box-frame-shaped rear box 3010, and the first mounting hole 3052 is aligned with the remaining through hole in the functional hole portion 3013. Then, the mounting screw is screwed into the first mounting hole 3052 through the through hole from the rear of the rear box 3010 on the side opposite the mounting supporter 3050 and tightened, whereby the mounting supporter 3050 can be attached to the rear box 3010. In this state, the mounting supporter 3050 is attached to the rear box 3010 in a non-rotatable manner because the protruding pin 3053 is inserted into one of the two through holes. The rear performance unit 3500 can be fixed (attached) to the rear box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3050 by attaching the rear performance unit 3500 to the attachment supporter 3050 using the second attachment hole 3055 at the tip of the boss portion 3054 protruding from the main body portion 3051 of the attachment supporter 3050 attached to the rear box 3010. The attachment supporter 3050 may be attached to the rear performance unit 3500 after the attachment supporter 3050 is attached to the rear box 3010. At this time, as described above, the protruding pin 3053 of the attachment supporter 3050 is inserted into one of the two through holes in the functional hole portion 3013, and the positioning accuracy of the rear performance unit 3500 attached to the rear box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3050 can be improved, so that the rear performance unit 3500 can be reliably attached to the desired position, making it easier to exert the effect of the rear performance unit 3500.

And, since the rear box 3010 has a plurality of functional hole portions 3013, the rear performance unit 3500 can be attached to the desired position by attaching the attachment supporter 3050 to the functional hole portion 3013 provided at the desired position where the rear performance unit 3500 is to be attached. Also, in the attachment supporter 3050, the boss portion 3054 having the second attachment hole 3055 at the tip is extended (protruded) in a predetermined direction (forward) from the main body portion 3051, so by preparing a plurality of attachment supporters 3050 with different lengths of the protruding boss portion 3054 in advance, the rear performance unit 3500 can be attached to a position at a desired distance from the surface on which the functional hole portion 3013 of the rear box 3010 is provided by using the attachment supporter 3050 with the boss portion 3054 of the desired length. For this reason, when it is desired to change the position of the rear performance unit 3500 due to design changes, model changes, etc., the rear box 3010 does not need to be remade. By simply attaching the mounting supporter 3050 to the functional hole portion 3013 located at the desired position, or by attaching the mounting supporter 3050 with a boss portion 3054 of the desired length, the position of the rear performance unit 3500 can be easily changed in a direction along the surface on which the functional hole portion 3013 is located or in a direction perpendicular to said surface. This increases the degree of freedom in the placement of the rear performance unit 3500, and makes it easier to respond to design changes, model changes, etc., thereby suppressing increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1.

As described above, the rear performance unit 3500 can be attached to the desired position by attaching the mounting supporter 3050 to the functional hole 3013 at the desired position among the multiple functional hole portions 3013 in the rear box 3010, or by attaching the mounting supporter 3050 to a boss portion 3054 of the desired length. This increases the freedom of placement of the rear performance unit 3500, allowing the rear performance unit 3500 to be placed in a more effective position. By attaching the rear performance unit 3500 to a position not seen in previous pachinko machines, it is possible to strongly attract the player's attention, and a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players can be provided.

As described above, by appropriately selecting the functional hole 3013 to which the mounting supporter 3050 is attached and the mounting supporter 3050 having a boss portion 3054 of different lengths for the multiple functional hole portions 3013 provided in the rear box 3010, the position of the rear performance unit 3500 can be easily changed without having to remake the rear box 3010. This makes it possible to reuse the same rear box 3010 regardless of the model, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the boss portion 3054 with the second mounting hole 3055 at the tip of the mounting supporter 3050 is provided between the first mounting hole 3052 and the protruding pin 3053. This allows the load from the rear performance unit 3500 attached to the second mounting hole 3055 to be evenly applied to the rear box 3010 through the first mounting hole 3052 (mounting screw) and the protruding pin 3053, making it difficult for the mounting supporter 3050 to be damaged and allowing the rear performance unit 3500 to be kept attached in good condition, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, a flat piece 3051a is provided on the surface of the main body 3051 of the mounting supporter 3050 opposite to the surface from which the protruding pin 3053 protrudes. When the main body 3051 is pressed toward the rear box 3010 to insert the protruding pin 3053 of the mounting supporter 3050 into the through hole in the functional hole 3013 of the rear box 3010, the main body 3051 can be easily pressed toward the rear box 3010 by pressing the piece 3051a, and the protruding pin 3053 can be reliably inserted into the through hole. In addition, since the piece 3051a is flat, it can be easily pressed with a finger or the like, making it easier to install the mounting supporter 3050 and reducing the effort required to assemble the pachinko machine 1.

As described above, the mounting supporter 3050 can be positioned by inserting the protruding pin 3053 of the mounting supporter 3050 into one of the two fixed holes in the functional hole portion 3013, so that the rear performance unit 3500 can be made difficult to move via the mounting supporter 3050. Therefore, even if the rear performance unit 3500 is used as a performance device (movable decorative body) capable of performing movable performance, it is possible to prevent the rear performance unit 3500 from moving or shaking unnecessarily during the movable performance, so that the player can reliably see the movable performance that moves as desired, the desired performance effect can be reliably achieved, the player can be entertained, and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the rear performance unit 3500 is attached to the rear box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3050, a gap of the same thickness as the main body 3051 of the mounting supporter 3050 can be formed between the rear performance unit 3500 and the rear box 3010, and heat can be easily released from the rear performance unit 3500, the rear box 3010, etc. through the gap. In addition, the multiple functional hole parts 3013 provided in the rear box 3010 each have a through hole, and as described above, the mounting position of the mounting supporter 3050 can be appropriately selected, so that since there are functional hole parts 3013 to which the mounting supporter 3050 is not attached, heat from the rear performance unit 3500 side can be ventilated and released through the through hole of the functional hole part 3013 to which the mounting supporter 3050 is not attached. For this reason, the configuration of the multiple functional holes 3013 of the rear box 3010 and the mounting supporter 3050 can reduce the effects of heat on the rear performance unit 3500 and the rear box 3010, etc., and ensure that the decorative and performance effects of the rear performance unit 3500, etc. can be fully realized.

Furthermore, since the rear performance unit 3500 is attached to the rear box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3050, the attachment supporter 3050 can reduce the transmission of vibration between the rear box 3010 and the rear performance unit 3500. This prevents the rear box 3010 and the rear performance unit 3500 from shaking or moving unnecessarily, so that the decorative effects and performance effects of the rear box 3010 and the rear performance unit 3500 can be reliably exerted, and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, since the rear performance unit 3500 is attached to the rear box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3050, there is no need to provide an attachment boss for attaching the rear performance unit 3500 to the rear box 3010 as in the conventional technology, and since through holes are provided in the multiple functional hole portions 3013 for attaching the attachment supporter 3050, the rear box 3010 can be made lighter than before, making it easier to handle (transport) and handle the rear box 3010 when assembling the pachinko machine 1, etc.

In addition, since the colors of the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 are different from the color of the back box 3010, when the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 are attached to the back box 3010, the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 can be easily identified. Therefore, when assembling or disassembling the pachinko machine 1, the position of the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 is easy to find, so the work can proceed smoothly. By simplifying the labor required for assembly, the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the attacca unit 2600 of the center gimmick 2500, the case (unit case 2635 and unit case 2705) of the door unit (second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 and opening/closing unit 2700) is provided with a plurality of wiring support parts (band holding part 2635c, wiring locking part 2635d, and band holding part 2706) for supporting the wiring EC extending from the drive means (starting port solenoid 2632 and solenoid 2702) and the wiring EC extending from the sensor (second starting port sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711). Therefore, by supporting these wiring EC on the wiring support parts, the plurality of wiring EC can be bundled together, and the wiring EC can be prevented from extending in various directions from the door unit. In this case, since the wiring EC is supported by being fastened to the wiring support part by the cable tie CT, it is possible to prevent the wiring EC from coming loose or coming off the wiring support part, compared to the case where the wiring EC is inserted between the wiring support part, which extends in a rod or strip shape so as to have a free end, and the case. Therefore, when assembling the pachinko machine 1, the wiring EC extending from the case of the door unit can be prevented from getting in the way of assembly or getting caught on other members, improving workability, reducing the complexity of the assembly work and suppressing an increase in costs. In addition, by bundling multiple wiring EC with the wiring support part, it is possible to prevent the wiring EC extending from the case from getting caught on other members, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring EC from being damaged or coming off the driving means or sensor when assembling, and it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of defects caused by the wiring EC.

In addition, the wiring EC connected to the drive means (starting port solenoid 2632 and solenoid 2702) held in the case (unit case 2635 and unit case 2705) and the wiring EC connected to the sensor (second starting port sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711) that is provided near the door unit (second starting port door body 2631 and door body 2701 of the opening/closing unit 2700) and detects the game ball B whose circulation has been changed by the door unit are connected together to the wiring support part (band holding part 2635). Since the door unit is supported by the wiring EC and the wiring retaining portion 2635c, the wiring retaining portion 2635d, and the band holding portion 2706, when assembling the pachinko machine 1, the type of sensor corresponding to the part where the door unit is used (for example, the second starting opening 2005, the first large winning opening 2006, the second large winning opening 2007, the V winning opening 2008, etc.) can be set in advance via the wiring EC and the wiring supporting portion, so that the type of sensor corresponding to the door unit can be reliably installed and it is possible to prevent the installation of a different type of sensor. In addition, when the door unit or sensor is removed for maintenance or the like and then reassembled, it is possible to prevent the loss of the sensor and to prevent the installation of a different type of sensor.

Furthermore, the case (unit case 2635 and unit case 2705) of the door unit (second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 and opening/closing unit 2700) is provided with a wiring support section (band holding section 2635c, wiring locking section 2635d, and band holding section 2706) that supports the wiring EC. By supporting the wiring EC extending from the drive means (starting port solenoid 2632 and solenoid 2702) and the sensor (second starting port sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711) on the wiring support section, the wiring EC can be aligned along the case, making it difficult for the player to see the wiring EC and improving the appearance.

In addition, the cases (unit case 2635 and unit case 2705) of the door units (second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 and opening/closing unit 2700) can restrict the movement of the sensors (second starting port sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711) provided outside the door units. Therefore, when the door units are attached to a specified member such as a base plate (attacca base plate 2610 and base plate 2710) during assembly of the pachinko machine 1, the movement of the sensors can be restricted by the door units, and the sensors can be attached by the door units, simplifying the assembly process and reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because the door unit (second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 and opening/closing unit 2700) is designed to restrict the movement of the sensors (second starting port sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711), the sensors can be removed simply by removing the door unit during maintenance, etc., simplifying the effort required for removal and reducing the burden on the gaming hall in which this pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, the wiring EC from the sensors (second starting port sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711) installed outside the door unit (second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 and opening/closing unit 2700) is supported by the wiring support part (band holding part 2635c, wiring locking part 2635d, and band holding part 2706) with a certain amount of length slack, so the sensor can be separated relative to the door unit within the range of that length slack. Therefore, when assembling the pachinko machine 1, even if the sensor is installed after the door unit is installed or the door unit is installed after the sensor is installed, the wiring EC from the sensor is not pulled unnecessarily, and the installation work (assembly work) can be performed smoothly with the wiring EC connected to the sensor supported by the wiring support part of the door unit in advance.

Furthermore, the wiring EC connected to the sensors (second starting port sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711) is supported at a length longer than the shortest length from the sensor to the wiring support part (band holding part 2635c and wiring locking part 2635d, and band holding part 2706). Therefore, when removing the door unit (second starting port opening/closing unit 2630, and opening/closing unit 2700) from the specified parts (attacca base plate 2610, and base plate 2710) for maintenance, etc., the wiring EC from the sensor has a sufficient length, so that the door unit can be separated to a certain extent from the specified parts, and maintenance, etc. can be carried out smoothly, and an increase in the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be suppressed.

In addition, since the door unit (second starting port opening/closing unit 2630, and opening/closing unit 2700) is provided with multiple wiring support parts (band holding part 2635c, wiring locking part 2635d, and band holding part 2706), when the direction of routing the wiring EC is changed due to a design change, a model change, etc., the wiring support part provided in the optimal position for the wiring EC to pass through can be selected to support the wiring EC. Therefore, design changes, model changes, etc. can be accommodated without remaking the case (unit case 2635, and unit case 2705), and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the door unit (second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 and opening/closing unit 2700) is provided with multiple wiring support parts (band holding part 2635c, wiring locking part 2635d, and band holding part 2706), after the door unit is assembled, the wiring EC from other components can be supported and bundled on the vacant wiring support parts that do not support the wiring EC from the drive means (starting port solenoid 2632 and solenoid 2702) and the sensor (second starting port sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711), thereby improving the handling of the wiring EC within the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the wiring EC is supported by being fastened with cable ties CT, and if an attempt is made to commit fraud against the door unit (second start opening/closing unit 2630 and opening/closing unit 2700) or the sensors (second start opening sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711), the cable ties CT must be cut, which would leave traces of fraudulent activity, making users hesitate to commit fraud, and thus providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly deterrent to fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the attacca unit 2600 of the center role 2500, the solenoids (starting port solenoid 2632, second attacca solenoid 2652, V distribution solenoid 2662, and solenoid 2702) as driving means move the gate bodies (second starting port gate body 2631, second large winning port gate body 2651, V winning port gate body 2661, and gate body 2701) forward and backward according to the progress of the game, so that the game ball B passes through and the sensors (second starting port sensor 2601, second large winning port sensor 2602, V winning port sensor 2603, V winning port sensor 2604, V winning port sensor 2605, V winning port sensor 2606, V winning port sensor 2607, V winning port sensor 2608, V winning port sensor 2609, V winning port sensor 2701, V winning port sensor 2701, V winning port sensor 2701, V winning port sensor 2701, V winning port sensor 2702, V winning port sensor 2703, V winning port sensor 2704, V winning port sensor 2705, V winning port sensor 2706, V winning port sensor 2707, V winning port sensor 2708, V winning port sensor 2709, V winning port sensor 2709, V winning port sensor 2701 ... Since the sensor 2603, the losing port sensor 2604, and the ball sensor 2711) are provided outside the case (unit case 2635, unit case 2655, unit case 2665, and unit case 2705) of the door unit (second start port opening/closing unit 2630, second large prize port opening/closing unit 2650, V-sorting unit 2660, and opening/closing unit 2700), no sensor is provided inside the case, and therefore the unit having the door body (door unit) can be made relatively small compared to conventional technology, and the door unit can be made compact. Therefore, since the door unit can be made compact, the degree of freedom in arranging the door unit can be increased, and by providing the door unit in a position different from that of conventional pachinko machines 1, a pachinko machine 1 with an unprecedented appearance can be provided, and a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players can be provided.

In addition, at least some of the sensors (second start opening sensor 2601, second large prize opening sensor 2602, V prize opening sensor 2603, losing opening sensor 2604, and ball sensor 2711) are located forward of the cases (unit case 2635, unit case 2655, unit case 2665, and unit case 2705) of the door units (second start opening opening/closing unit 2630, second large prize opening opening/closing unit 2650, V distribution unit 2660, opening/closing unit 2700). This makes it possible to reduce the front-to-rear dimension required for detecting game ball B compared to the case in which a sensor is located inside the case, as in conventional technology, and makes it easier to secure space at the rear. Therefore, as described above, the door unit can be made smaller and the space at the rear can be made easier to secure, so that the rear props and decorations can be made larger or new props and decorations can be placed at the rear, making the pachinko machine 1 more noticeable and strongly attracting the player's attention. The props at the rear can also entertain the player more, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the sensors that detect the game ball B (second start opening sensor 2601, second large winning opening sensor 2602, V winning opening sensor 2603, losing opening sensor 2604, and ball sensor 2711) are provided outside the cases (unit case 2635, unit case 2655, unit case 2665, and unit case 2705) of the door units (second start opening opening/closing unit 2630, second large winning opening opening/closing unit 2650, V distribution unit 2660, and opening/closing unit 2700), so the same door units can be used regardless of the model used, and sufficient mass production effects can be obtained by manufacturing only the same door units, and by using the same door units, defects due to assembly errors can be prevented, and the effort required for assembly can be simplified, reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In more detail, for example, in a unit with a built-in sensor in a case according to the conventional technology, in order to increase the degree of freedom in the placement of the unit, it is conceivable to remove the sensor from the case and use a unit without a built-in sensor depending on the model being used. However, in this case, if one tries to obtain mass production benefits by reusing the unit in multiple models, it is necessary to manufacture both a unit with a sensor attached and a unit with the sensor removed from the same unit, which makes the time required for manufacturing the units complicated and makes it difficult to obtain sufficient mass production benefits. Furthermore, if there is a unit with a removed sensor in the same unit, there is a risk that a unit without a sensor will be mistakenly installed when assembling the pachinko machine, which can cause a malfunction and also necessitates the need to check the units during assembly, which is time-consuming and increases costs.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the door units (second start opening/closing unit 2630, second large winning opening opening/closing unit 2650, V distribution unit 2660, and opening/closing unit 2700) are not provided with (do not have built-in) sensors (second start opening sensor 2601, second large winning opening sensor 2602, V winning opening sensor 2603, losing opening sensor 2604, and ball sensor 2711). Therefore, even if the positions of the sensors are different in multiple models, the same door unit can be used regardless of the model used, so only the same door unit needs to be manufactured, and sufficient mass production effects can be obtained. In addition, since there are no door units with different functions in the same door unit, there is no need to check the door unit when assembling the pachinko machine 1, which can prevent malfunctions due to assembly errors and simplify the effort required for assembly, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, at least a portion of the sensors (second start opening sensor 2601, second large winning opening sensor 2602, V winning opening sensor 2603, losing opening sensor 2604, and ball sensor 2711) are provided forward of the cases (unit case 2635, unit case 2655, unit case 2665, unit case 2705) of the door units (second start opening opening/closing unit 2630, second large winning opening opening/closing unit 2650, V distribution unit 2660, and opening/closing unit 2700). By providing the part of the sensor through which game ball B passes (detection hole) forward of the case, the detection hole of the sensor is positioned forward, making it easier for the player to see the detection of game ball B. By allowing the player to see the detection of game ball B, the player's anticipation for the game can be heightened and the player can enjoy the game.

In addition, the door bodies (second starting opening door body 2631, second large winning opening door body 2651, V winning opening door body 2661, and door body 2701) are adapted to advance and retreat forward by penetrating the flat attacca base plate 2610 and base plate 2710, so that receiving openings (second starting opening 2005, second large winning opening 2007, V winning opening 2008, losing opening 2009, etc.) for receiving game ball B and passages for game ball B are provided in the attacca base plate 2610 and the attacca front plate 2620. Therefore, when changing the model or design, the receiving entrance and passageway configuration can be easily changed simply by changing the attacca base plate 2610, making it easier to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players, and since the door units (second start opening/closing unit 2630, second large winning opening opening/closing unit 2650, V-distribution unit 2660, and opening/closing unit 2700) can be reused without modification, the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the cases (unit case 2635, unit case 2655, unit case 2665, and unit case 2705) of the door units (second start opening/closing unit 2630, second large prize opening opening/closing unit 2650, V-distribution unit 2660, and opening/closing unit 2700) are attached behind the attacca base plate 2610, the attacca base plate 2610 makes it possible for the cases to be difficult to see from the player's side, and the deterioration of appearance due to the cases (drive means (start opening solenoid 2632, second attacca solenoid 2652, V-distribution solenoid 2662, and solenoid 2702)) can be suppressed, and a pachinko machine 1 with good appearance can be provided.

Furthermore, the cases (unit case 2635, unit case 2655, unit case 2665, and unit case 2705) holding the drive means (starting port solenoid 2632, second attacca solenoid 2652, V distribution solenoid 2662, and solenoid 2702) and the gate bodies (second starting port gate body 2631, second large prize gate gate body 2651, V prize gate gate body 2661, and gate body 2701) are separated into a first case part and a second case part (first case part 2633 and second case part Since the door unit is made up of two parts (first case part 2630, second case part 2650, V-distribution unit 2660, V-opening unit 2700), it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of parts in the door unit (second start opening/closing unit 2630, second large prize opening opening/closing unit 2650, V-distribution unit 2660, and opening/closing unit 2700), and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the case is composed of a first case part and a second case part (first case part 2633 and second case part 2634, first case part 2653 and second case part 2654, first case part 2663 and second case part 2664, and first case part 2703 and second case part 2704), it is possible to hold the drive means (starting port solenoid 2632, second attacca solenoid 2652, V distribution solenoid 2662, and solenoid 2702) and the door body (second starting port door body 2631, second large prize port door body 2651, V prize port door body 2661, and door body 2701) between the first case and the second case, simplifying the effort required for assembly.

Furthermore, the attacca front plate 2620, which is located forward of the case (attacca base plate 2610, base plate 2710), is arranged to contact the sensors (second start opening sensor 2601, second large prize opening sensor 2602, V prize opening sensor 2603, losing opening sensor 2604, and ball sensor 2711), at least a portion of which is located forward of the case (unit case 2635, unit case 2655, unit case 2665, unit case 2705). Therefore, the attacca front plate 2620 can restrict the movement of the sensor in a specified direction, making it possible to position the sensor in a specified position.

In addition, because the outer surfaces of the cases (unit case 2635, unit case 2665, and unit case 2705) are in contact with the sensors (second start port sensor 2601, V winning port sensor 2603, losing port sensor 2604, and ball sensor 2711), the cases can restrict the movement of the sensors in a specified direction, making it possible to position the sensors in a specified position. Furthermore, when assembling the pachinko machine 1, the sensors can be guided by the contacting cases, making the assembly work easier.

[11. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 203 according to the progress of the game on the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 214 to Fig. 216. Fig. 214 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, Fig. 215 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on process in Fig. 214, and Fig. 216 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. First, various random numbers used in game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process.

[11-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include special random numbers used to determine whether or not a jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state will be generated, initial value determination random numbers for hit determination used to determine the initial value of this special random number, reach determination random numbers used to determine whether or not a reach (missed reach) will be generated when a jackpot game state is not generated, variable display pattern random numbers used to determine the variable display pattern of the special patterns that are variably displayed on the first special pattern display device and the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400, pattern random numbers used to determine the jackpot game pattern or small jackpot game pattern (determine the type of win) that is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device and the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 when a jackpot game state is generated, and pattern initial value determination random numbers used to determine the initial value of this pattern random number. In addition to these random numbers, there are also prepared random numbers for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece that allows the second starting port 2005 to accept a gaming ball, initial value determination random numbers for determining whether or not to open and close the random numbers for determining whether or not to open and close the random numbers, and random numbers for normal pattern variable display patterns for use in determining the variable display pattern of the normal pattern that is variably displayed on the normal pattern display device of the function display unit 1400.

Of the various random numbers used in this type of game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the special random number is updated directly by hardware using a main control built-in hard random number circuit built into the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, this main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as the initial value, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. When all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such rapid lottery drawing, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time when it obtains a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as the special random number.

In contrast, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated within a predetermined fixed range of values from the minimum to the maximum, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control timer interrupt process described below is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum to the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit from the minimum to the maximum value, the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated. This type of counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter." The initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed range of values of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the checksum value (sum value) obtained by treating various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU as numerical values and calculating their sum during the main control side power-on processing described below does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off processing (when power is turned off), etc., the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is set by executing an initial value derivation process in which the main control MPU retrieves an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM and always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number based on the retrieved ID code. In other words, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning symbol is derived using the ID code, and a two-stage security measure is taken to prevent analysis: the first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even using an external device when the ID code is stored in non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU, and the second security measure is that the same fixed value is derived based on the ID code by executing an initial value derivation process when the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM is cleared.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU and using the extracted ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol wins is determined will be explained. For example, even if a person who is trying to illegally acquire game balls paid out as prize balls obtains and disassembles the game board 5 in some way, illegally obtains the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU, and is able to grasp the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol wins is determined matches the normal symbol win determination value, the ID code is given a unique code for identifying the individual, so it will be completely different from the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU' equipped in other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol wins is determined matches the normal symbol win determination value is also completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the acquired game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', i.e., other pachinko machines 1', so even if momentary interruptions are generated at the predetermined intervals obtained by disassembly and analysis, and game balls are passed through the normal winning opening 2003 at those predetermined intervals, it is not possible to open and close the movable piece to generate a game state in which game balls can be received by the second starting opening 2005.

[11-2. Processing when power is turned on on the main control side]
First, the main control MPU is circuit-configured so that when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer, for example, indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) in use, or indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when a subroutine is terminated and the routine is returned to, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded.

Under the control of the main control MPU, the main control side power-on processing is performed as shown in Figures 214 and 215. When this main control side power-on processing starts, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10). This RAM access permission setting allows updates to be made to the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU sets the initial value and starts the main control built-in WDT (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT, which monitors whether the main control MPU's operation (system) is operating normally, a timer setting value is set in the watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT control register") built into the main control MPU, and the main control built-in WDT is started to start timing until the main control MPU is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is started, timing by the main control built-in WDT is started, and if the timer clear setting value is not set in the watchdog timer clear register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT clear register") built into the main control MPU before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. In contrast, when the main control built-in WDT is started and timing begins, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the timing by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and timing begins again. In this way, by repeatedly clearing the timing by the main control built-in WDT before it reaches the time set by the timer setting value and then starting timing again, it is possible to monitor whether the main control MPU (system) is operating normally.

Following step S12, the main control MPU performs a power outage clear process (step S14). In this power outage clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input from the power outage monitoring circuit. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, and in this embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S14, the main control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S16). In this determination, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is not being operated, and determines that the RAM clear switch is being operated, whereas when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is being operated, and determines that the RAM clear switch is being operated.

In the judgment of step S16, when the main control MPU judges that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S18). On the other hand, in the judgment of step S16, when the main control MPU judges that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20). In other words, the main control MPU is in a state in which it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU (i.e., the main control built-in RAM) for a predetermined time from the time of power-on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, including game information related to the game such as unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the main prize ball number information output, etc.), and is set to a value of 1 when various information is erased, and a value of 0 when various information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control MPU performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 waits until it starts (boots). In this embodiment, the wait time until booting (boot timer) is set to 2.5 seconds (s).

Following step S22, the main control MPU judges whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. The judgment of step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. In the judgment of step S24, when the main control MPU judges that a power outage warning signal has been input, it returns to the judgment of step S24 again, and repeats the judgment of step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT cannot be cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs this main control side power-on processing again. The fact that the determination in step S24 is made following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be explained in detail later.

If the main control MPU determines in step S24 that no power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1 when various information is to be erased, and to 0 when various information is not to be erased. In step S26, if the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 0, that is, if it is determined that various information is not to be erased, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum is calculated by treating the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values.

Following step S28, the main control MPU judges whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off process (power-off) described later (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU judges that they match, it judges whether the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG is a flag indicating whether game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG have been stored and held in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later, and is set to 1 when the main control side power-off process has been normally completed, and to 0 when the main control side power-off process has not been normally completed. Note that the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after manufacturing for inspection in the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310 will be described in detail later.

When the main control MPU determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, that the main control side power cut processing has been normally completed, it sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as power recovery (step S34). This setting is done by reading the power recovery information from the ROM (i.e., the main control built-in ROM) built into the main control MPU, and setting this power recovery information in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to this various information are stored in a predetermined memory area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and the state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with high frequency from a fraudulent means (for example, a high frequency output device hidden in the hem of a fraudster's arm) and the main control MPU itself is reset and then restored.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). This causes various information, checksum values (sum values), etc. to change as various processes are performed thereafter. Therefore, unless the main control side power failure process described below is normally completed and the backup flag BK-FLG is not set to a value of 1, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as described below.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), i.e., when it determines that various information should be erased, or when the main control MPU determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or when the main control MPU determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), i.e., when it determines that the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, it clears the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (step S38). Here, the main control MPU does this by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. The main control MPU may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as the initial value and set it. In addition, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch indicates RAM clear and various information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, the main control MPU retrieves a unique ID code previously stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal pattern hit determination random number based on this retrieved ID code, and sets this fixed value as the normal pattern hit determination initial value determination random number to be used to determine the initial value of the above-mentioned normal pattern hit determination random number.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the working area of the main control's built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control's built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM. This initializes the game backup information, and for example, the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball count information is set to the initial value of 0.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is for setting the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt process described below is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, the transmission serial port prescaler corresponding to the various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU (for example, the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the dispensing control board 633 and the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the peripheral control board 1510) is set to the communication speed and whether or not parity is enabled, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and enable transmission.

Following step S44, the main control MPU initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, the gaming machine testing facility initializes the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information when the power is turned on (setting it to output OFF data).

Following step S46, the main control MPU performs the activation setting of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, the special random number used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is updated by hardware by latching and acquiring the random number in the hardware random number control register built into the main control MPU, and the activation of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is set in the hardware random number setting register. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is activated by these settings, it extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, and when all values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts one value in the predetermined numerical range, and extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. When the main control MPU obtains a random number (random number value) from the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, and obtains the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit when this latch signal is input from a hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets this obtained random number value as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU reserves the command to be sent when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to inform the user that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A detailed explanation of how step S50 schedules the commands to be sent when the power is turned on will be provided later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S52). This setting causes the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S42, i.e., every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, as described above, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

When the main control MPU determines in step S54 that no power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a non-win/lose random number update process (step S56). In this non-win/lose random number update process, the random numbers for reach determination, the random numbers for variable display patterns, the random numbers for determining initial values for patterns, and the random numbers for determining initial values for small win patterns, etc., are updated. In this way, in the non-win/lose random number update process, random numbers that are not related to win/lose determination (win determination) are updated by software. Note that the random numbers for normal pattern win determination, the random numbers for determining initial values for normal pattern win determination, and the random numbers for normal pattern variable display patterns, etc., are also updated by this non-win/lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, where the main control MPU determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, the process performs a non-win/lose random number update process in step S56, and repeats steps S54 to S56. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as the "main process on the main control side."

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S54 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets the interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting disables the main control timer interrupt process described below, prevents writing to the main control's built-in RAM, and protects the above-mentioned game information and other information from being overwritten.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process is performed as when the power outage clear signal was started to be output in the power outage clear process in step S14.

Following step S60, the main control MPU stops the drive signals output to, for example, the various displays of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2632, the first attacca solenoid 2642, the second attacca solenoid 2652, etc. (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control's built-in RAM, thereby preventing updates to the contents of the main control's built-in RAM.

After step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT that was started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and it becomes impossible to start timekeeping again, so that the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs this main control side power-on processing again. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU cannot make the judgment of step S54 and cannot perform the main control side power off processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without performing the main control side power off processing, and the main control side power on processing is performed again. In other words, since the main control side power off processing is not performed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off processing based on the time immediately before the forcible reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored, so the checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power off processing is performed at the previous power off and the checksum value (sum value) calculated in step S28 when the built-in reset circuit is forced to reset and restarted cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased (cleared) in the processing of step S38.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and when power is subsequently restored, the main control side performs power-on processing.

In step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32 it is checked whether the main control's power-off processing has been completed normally. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

Here, we will explain the point that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is made following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, we will explain the problems that arise when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is carried out.

As described above, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption. In other words, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary interruption or power outage, the charge stored in the hardware, the electrolytic capacitor MC2, is applied as DC +5V, so that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed within the period of approximately 7 ms after the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off. This ensures that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off while the player is playing, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is being performed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, when power is restored, in the wait time standby process of step S22, the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) and starts counting the waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment, it is set to 2.5 seconds). If an instantaneous interruption or power outage occurs just before the waiting time is reached, the charge stored in the hardware, the electrolytic capacitor MC2, is applied as DC +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU. However, within a period of about 7 ms, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. This causes the main control side timer interrupt processing described later to be performed, and even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing may not be completed. For this reason, the value calculated as the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power on processing is started again when power is restored.

When this happens, when power is restored, the main control side power-on process is started and the wait time standby process in step S22 is completed without an instantaneous or power outage. After that, when the checksum calculated in step S28 based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is compared in step S30 with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous or power outage, the checksum values will not match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared in step S38. In other words, when power is restored, the RAM clear switch is operated by a staff member or other attendant of the game parlor, and the above-mentioned game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no intention from the staff member or other attendant of the game parlor to clear the RAM.

In this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input is provided as step S24. When a power failure warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, and the time count by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and time counting cannot be started again, so that the main control MPU can be forced to reset by the main control built-in WDT. Although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time waiting process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as described above, so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step S24 for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. When a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, when it is determined in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, thereby forcibly resetting the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 and restarting the main control board 1310. This makes it possible to prevent the game from progressing and to prevent various information, including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the main prize ball number information output), from being updated, and prevents fluctuations in the checksum calculation result. As a result, when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculated and stored value in step S64, and therefore does not initialize the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary or power outage occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary or power outage occurs from being initialized when power is restored.

In addition, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step S24 for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. When a power outage warning signal has not been input (i.e., when it is determined by the judgment of step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has not been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is progressing a game, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 supplies power to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, so that game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output) due to the progress of the game are output. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is able to complete the main control side power cut process, which is comprised of the processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes for storing various information including information indicating the value of the force determination counter, and an infinite loop, the main control MPU determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (i.e., the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64), when restarted, and therefore does not initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary or power outage occurs. In other words, the game information is restored to the state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurs, and the main control board 1310 can be started.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT, thereby making it possible to start the main control side power outage processing again without updating the contents of the main control's built-in RAM at all. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power outage processing within the "power supply assurance period during momentary power outage or power outage" of approximately 7 ms as before, which is determined by hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, when a momentary or interrupted power interruption occurs during the main control side power-on processing upon power recovery, and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the interruption or interruption. Therefore, if the main control side power cut processing cannot be completed within the "momentary or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, then immediately after the wait time standby processing of step S22, In step S24, it is determined whether a power outage warning signal has been input, and if a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination in step S24. As long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated. By setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, the time count by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and it becomes impossible to start counting again, so that the main control MPU can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

A mechanism is adopted in which the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT using such software, thereby preventing progression to steps subsequent to step S24 (specifically, the control flow in which interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission is set in step S52 to start the main control side timer interrupt processing described below), thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the main prize ball number information output)) from being updated. In this way, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power is cut off from the island equipment of the gaming hall, the main control's built-in RAM is divided into two parts: a part that is handled by software so that the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball information)) are not changed at all, and a part that is handled by hardware so that the main control's power outage processing is completed reliably and the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball information)) are not changed at all. By configuring it in two parts, it is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball information)) from being changed.

Next, the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in order to inform the user that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2632 and information indicating the drive state of the first attack solenoid 2642 and the second attack solenoid 2652. Here, we will first explain the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2632 and information indicating the drive state of the first attack solenoid 2642 and the second attack solenoid 2652; in other words, the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not reserve the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen showing a jackpot game state (e.g., a screen showing a jackpot game effect) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the main control board 1310 is driving the first attacca solenoid 2642 or the second attacca solenoid 2652 to open the first large prize opening 2006 or the second large prize opening 2007 by the opening/closing member, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and starts driving the first attacca solenoid 2642 or the second attacca solenoid 2652, causing the first large prize opening 2006 or the second large prize opening 2007 to transition from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member to a state in which it is open.

However, when a momentary or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns to normal when power is restored. Therefore, when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return to normal based on the game state (whether or not the game is in a time-saving state, etc.) indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot game state as a game state and power is restored afterwards, the peripheral control board 1510 can return to normal by displaying a screen during the jackpot game state in the display area of the performance display device 1600 based on the game state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but cannot display at all which round of the jackpot game state it is. In other words, even if, for example, a game ball enters the first main winning port 2006 or the second main winning port 2007 and is detected by the first main winning port sensor 3002 or the second main winning port sensor 2602, and the main control board 1310 transmits a large winning port 1 count display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the number of game balls that have entered the first main winning port 2006 or the second main winning port 2007, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the number of game balls that have entered the first main winning port 2006 or the second main winning port 2007 on the display area of the performance display device 1600 according to the game status, but cannot display at all which round of the jackpot game status (i.e., which round).

In such a situation, for example, when the fourth round (fourth round) of the big win game state is ended, the main control board 1310 stops driving the first attacca solenoid 2642 and the second attacca solenoid 2652, and transmits a large prize opening 1 closing display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1310, which instructs the first large prize opening 2006 and the second large prize opening 2007 to transition from an open state to a closed state by the opening and closing member (i.e., the start of closing the first large prize opening 2006 and the second large prize opening 2007 of the attacca unit 2100 between rounds). When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (the fifth round) of the big win game state, the main control board 1310 starts driving the first attacca solenoid 2642 and the second attacca solenoid 2652 to switch the first large win opening 2006 and the second large win opening 2007 from a state in which they are closed by the opening and closing member to a state in which they are open (i.e., the fifth round of opening of the first large win opening 2006 and the second large win opening 2007 begins), and a fifth display command for the opening of the big win opening is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen corresponding to the game state described above to a screen indicating the start of the fifth round of the big win game state in the display area of the performance display device 1600.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen (for example, a screen informing the player that the movable piece is open) on the display area of the performance display device 1600 to inform the player that the game state is favorable to the player because the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2005, if an instantaneous or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is in a state in which it is driving the starting port solenoid 2632 to open the movable piece and open the second starting port 2005, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the instantaneous or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and transitions to a state in which it starts driving the starting port solenoid 2632 to close the movable piece and close the second starting port 2005.

However, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 and recover when power is restored. Therefore, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary interruption or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2005, generating a gaming state advantageous to the player, and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return to normal by displaying a screen showing the jackpot gaming state in the display area of the performance display device 1600 based on the gaming state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration, but the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display at all in the display area of the performance display device 1600 a screen informing the player that the gaming state has now become advantageous to the player, in which a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2005. For this reason, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine may be surprised by the occurrence of a momentary or power outage and forget that when power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred was one in which game balls could be received into the second starting port 2005. In such a case, even though the game state at the time of power restoration is restored to one in which game balls can be received into the second starting port 2005, a screen instructing the player to play (i.e., a screen instructing the player to insert a game ball into the second starting port 2005) is not displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 at the time of power restoration, and the player may not know what game to play.

As described above, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem in that the game state immediately before the momentary or blackout could not be quickly restored after power was restored. In other words, there was a problem in that a player seated in front of the pachinko machine would mistakenly think that the pachinko machine's system had frozen when power was restored after a momentary or blackout.

In this embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is restored), in step S50, the power-on status command, which is classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control side timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above example, when a momentary or power outage occurs during the fourth round of the jackpot game state and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 starts driving the first attacca solenoid 2642 and the second attacca solenoid 2652 as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the first large winning opening 2006 and the second large winning opening 2007 transition from a state in which they are closed by the opening/closing members to a state in which they are open. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can transmit this information to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game state (i.e., a screen indicating which round it is) in the display area of the performance display device 1600, but can display a screen indicating that it is a jackpot game state, that the first attacca solenoid 2642 and the second attacca solenoid 2652 have started to be driven, and that the first large prize opening 2006 and the second large prize opening 2007 have been opened by the opening and closing members (for example, a screen indicating "It's a jackpot. The large prize openings are open. A screen conveying the message to the player, "Play the game so that the game balls enter the large prize opening." can be displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 to instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play the game so that the game balls enter the first large prize opening 2006 or the second large prize opening 2007 after power is restored. Also, for example, in the above example, in a game state in which game balls can be received by the second start opening 2005 and which is advantageous to the player, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control As the return destination of the board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 can display a screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 informing the player that the start port solenoid 2632 has started to be driven to open the movable piece and open the second start port 2005 (for example, a screen conveying the message to the player, "The movable piece is open. Please play so that the game ball will enter the second start port."), and instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which the game ball will enter the second start port 2005 after power is restored.

This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions on where to return the peripheral control board 1510 when power is restored after a momentary or power outage. Therefore, once power is restored, the game can be quickly restored to the state it was in immediately before the momentary or power outage. In other words, when a momentary or power outage occurs and then power is restored, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine will see that the system of the pachinko machine has frozen, which can prevent the player from mistaking this for a malfunction.

Next, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, will be described. When the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the above-mentioned backup process of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power off process consisting of an infinite loop. Therefore, even if a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, the checksum values will not match in the comparison judgment in step S30, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will necessarily be cleared in step S38.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, so that only three commands, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, the power-on state command is transmitted first, followed by the power-on main control return destination command, followed by the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is transmitted as the first command from the main control board 1310 to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process.

The power-on state command is composed of information that instructs the player to clear the RAM when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power interruption), information that instructs the player to return to either the time-saving state or the non-time-saving state when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power interruption), and information that indicates the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, we will explain the problem that occurs when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of the pachinko machine is used to determine which copyright of the work it is for and what kind of game specifications it has when creating the so-called max type, mid type, or sweet type of pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310) (for example, in addition to game specifications in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big win game state occurs, game specifications in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times (for example, 30 or 70 times) for the special pattern (so-called ST machine)).

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights may be mixed. In such a case, the workers on the manufacturing line may not know which of the multiple types of work copyrights (for example, the copyrights of the works Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) the main control board 1310 is being sent to the manufacturing line to manufacture for which of the multiple types of work copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Movie D), or may mistakenly believe that the main control board 1310 is being sent to the manufacturing line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F).

For this reason, when main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are manufactured on the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed, workers on the production line will not be able to confirm which work copyright the main control board 1310 manufactured on the production line is for, and even for the same work copyright, they will not be able to confirm which model type it is (max type, middle type, sweet type, or any other type) or what the game specifications are (game specifications in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, or ST machine).

As a result, if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when manufacturing the main control boards 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that produces the pachinko machine 1, the main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control boards 1310 to the game board 5 while still mixed. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line may attach a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the work copyright. This results in a problem of reduced production efficiency of the game board 5.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs and power is restored), in order to transmit a power-on status command including information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, during the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the manufacturing line, an operator on the production line of the manufacturer that produces the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310, and based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received by the inspection device from the main control board 1310, the inspection device 201 determines the model code of the pachinko machine, i.e., the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, including the series code for identifying which of the above-mentioned model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next big win game state occurs, By visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code that specifies the game specification where a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for the special symbol to change (such as an ST machine), and the game specification code that specifies the game specification where a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for the special symbol to change, it is possible to determine which copyright of the work the main control board 1310 corresponds to, and even for the same copyright of the work, it is possible to determine which model type (max type, middle type, or sweet type) and what the game specification is (a game specification where when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big win game state occurs, or an ST machine).

As a result, even if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when manufacturing the main control boards 1310 on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the workers in the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type, work copyright, and game specifications of the main control boards 1310, and can separate the main control boards 1310 for each work copyright and send them to the subsequent game board assembly line. Then, the workers on the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control boards 1310 that correspond to the game boards 5 for the work copyrights to the game boards 5, and can prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game boards 5 caused by the work of attaching the main control boards 1310 that do not correspond to the game boards 5 for the work copyrights to the game boards 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game boards 5.

[11-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at an interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in Fig. 214 and Fig. 215.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing starts, the main control MPU switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 216 (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks, a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, the register bank is switched from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second register bank. Note that in this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, starts, the process of saving each register to a stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric role control processing described later, the time during which the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric role control processing described later, as well as the time for which the payout control board 633 receives the various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) and the ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payout owner ACK signal has been input. Specifically, when the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the change time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, thereby accurately measuring the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input judgment time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input judgment time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input judgment time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0. These various times and the ACK signal input judgment time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU reads, for example, detection signals from the gate sensor 2501, the detection signals from the general winning port sensor 3001, the detection signals from the first lower start port sensor 2101 and the first upper start port sensor 2524, the detection signals from the second start port sensor 2601, the detection signals from the first large winning port sensor 3002 and the second large winning port sensor 2602, the detection signals from the V winning port sensor 2603, the detection signals from the losing port sensor 2604, the detection signals from the out sensor 664, the detection signals from the magnetic sensor 1030, the operation signals (RAM clear signals) from the RAM clear switch, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which informs the payout control board 633 that the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control process described below has been successfully received, and stores these as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, when the detection signal from the first lower start gate sensor 2101 or the first upper start gate sensor 2524, or the detection signal from the second start gate sensor 2601 is read, the corresponding start gate winning command classified as "other" is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first lower start gate sensor 2101 or the first upper start gate sensor 2524, the corresponding start gate winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and when there is a detection signal from the second start gate sensor 2601, the corresponding start gate winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started, the input states of all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing) are first read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. The result of the second read is compared with the result of the first read. It is determined whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again as the third time, and the result of the third read is compared with the result of the second read. It is determined again whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again as the fourth time, and the result of the fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. It is determined again whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, it is treated as if no game balls have entered the game.

In this way, in the switch input process, the input states of all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those for which vacant terminal processing has been applied) are read twice in total, by comparing the first to third readings and the second to fourth readings, thereby making it possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., and therefore, the detection signals from the gate sensor 2501, the general winning port sensor 3001, the first lower start port sensor 2101 and the first upper start port sensor 2102 are read twice. This can improve the reliability of the detection signal from 2524, the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2601, the detection signal from the first large prize port sensor 3002 and the second large prize port sensor 2602, the detection signal from the V prize port sensor 2603, the detection signal from the losing port sensor 2604, the detection signal from the out sensor 664, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1030, the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which informs the payout control board 633 that the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control process described below has been successfully received by the payout control board 633.

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal malfunction monitoring processing, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing is determined based on the information acquired in the switch input processing of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to ground (GND) as a vacant terminal processing, so that its logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal malfunction monitoring processing, whether or not the logic state of the input terminals of the various input ports that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing is LOW is determined based on the information acquired in the switch input processing of step S104. When the main control MPU determines that the logic state of the input terminal that has been subjected to vacant terminal processing is not LOW, it stores a malfunction command classified as a notification display that notifies the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU that a malfunction has occurred as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs a win/lose random number update process (step S106). In this win/lose random number update process, the above-mentioned pattern random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random numbers for determining the initial value for the pattern and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small win pattern, which are updated in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 215, are also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the pattern and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small win pattern are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further increase randomness. In contrast, the pattern random numbers are random numbers related to the win/lose judgment (win judgment), so the respective counters are counted up only each time this win/lose random number update process is performed. In addition, the random numbers for determining whether a normal pattern is a win or lose and the random numbers for determining the initial value for normal pattern is also updated by this win/lose random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won is an initial value update type counter that is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. It counts up from the initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won, from the minimum value to the maximum value, the initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won is updated by this win/lose random number update process. The initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won.

In this embodiment, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the patterns and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small winning patterns are updated by the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) shown in FIG. 215, and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. However, if the processing time of this routine becomes uneven each time the interrupt timer occurs and the main control side main processing is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer occurs, causing the number of times the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 is executed to become random, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the patterns and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small winning patterns may be updated only in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls based on this input information is created, and a self-check command for checking the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is created. The created prize ball command and self-check command are then sent to the payout control board 633 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the first main winning slot 2006 or the second main winning slot 2007, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls, and since the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to inform the player of this fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 633. If a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a specified time, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and sent to the payout control board 633.

In addition, in the prize ball control process of step S108, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, if the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, a main prize ball number information output command classified as "other" is created to inform the player of this fact, and is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of this counter for determining the main prize ball number information output is calculated by reading input information from the input information memory area described above, and counting the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on this input information, that is, based on the game balls that have entered the various prize openings such as the general prize opening 2001, the first lower start opening 2003, the first upper start opening 2004, the second start opening 2005, and the first large prize opening 2006 and the second large prize opening 2007 (hereinafter referred to as the ``various prize openings provided on the game board 5'').The value is stored and updated in the prize ball planned information memory area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the RAM built in the main control is read, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information read from the input information storage area described above based on the input information read from the input information storage area described above. When the value indicating the added number of balls exceeds the value of 10 (i.e., when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform the user of this fact and is stored in the output information storage area as transmission information, and the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated as the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the RAM built in the main control described above.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs a frame command reception process (step S110). The dispensing control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified as status indications (e.g., frame status 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame status 2 command). In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information informing the payer control board 633 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU reshapes the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified as status indications (frame status 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame status 2 command)) and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the winning ball is confirmed. If it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation cheat") is occurring, the value of the radio wave irradiation cheat counter is incremented by a value of 1. The value of this radio wave cheat counter is incremented each time it is determined that a radio wave irradiation cheat is occurring in the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. When the value of the radio wave irradiation cheat counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to a value of 250 based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt period during which the fraud detection process performs the main control side timer interrupt process), a radio wave irradiation cheat notification command classified as a notification display that informs the user that a radio wave irradiation cheat is occurring is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal is input from the first large prize opening sensor 3002 or the second large prize opening sensor 2602 when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when a game ball enters the first large prize opening 2006 or the second large prize opening 2007), a prize abnormality display command classified as an abnormal condition and a notification display is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric role control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric role control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU, and this obtained random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether the special random number (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU) matches the big win determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM (determines whether a big win game state is generated (referred to as a "special lottery")), or the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number is taken out and it is determined whether it matches any of the win type determination values pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM according to the big win type or small win type (determines the win type).

If these judgment results (lottery results) are due to the first lower start port sensor 2101 or the first upper start port sensor 2524, various commands related to the special pattern 1 synchronization performance are created, whereas if the judgment result (lottery results) is due to the second start port sensor 2601, various commands related to the special pattern 2 synchronization performance are created and stored in the transmission information memory area as transmission information. In addition, the special pattern variable display pattern is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above, and the output of a lighting signal to the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light up the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 in accordance with the determined special pattern variable display pattern, and the output is stored in the output information memory area described above as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot game state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related (jackpot opening command, large prize opening 1 open Nth time display command, large prize opening 1 closing display command, large prize opening 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, for example, the output of a drive signal to the first attacca solenoid 2642 and the second attacca solenoid 2652 to open and close the opening and closing member is set, and stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the first large prize opening 2006 and the second large prize opening 2007 are changed from a closed state to an open state. When the number of times (rounds) is two, a lighting signal is output to the 2 round indicator lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 to light the 2 round indicator lamp, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information; when the number of rounds is fifteen, a lighting signal is output to the 15 round indicator lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 to light the 15 round indicator lamp, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information; and a lighting signal is output to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 to light a specified color to indicate whether or not a time reduction has occurred, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and normal electric role control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric role control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and normal prize winning slot winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this normal prize winning slot winning processing, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 2501 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on the result of this determination, when a detection signal has been input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether the normal symbol has been hit described above is extracted and stored as normal prize winning slot winning information in the normal prize winning slot winning slot winning information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

This regular prize slot winning information storage area has sections 0 to 3 (four sections), and regular prize slot winning information is stored in the order of section 0, section 1, section 2, and section 3. For example, if regular prize slot winning information is stored in sections 0 to 2 of the regular prize slot winning information storage, when a detection signal from gate sensor 2501 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the regular prize slot winning information is stored in section 3 of the regular prize slot winning information storage.

The regular prize winning information stored in the 0th section of the regular prize winning information storage is set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. When this regular prize winning information is set, the regular prize winning information in the 1st section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the regular prize winning information storage, the regular prize winning information in the 2nd section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the 1st section of the regular prize winning information storage, and the regular prize winning information in the 3rd section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the 2nd section of the regular prize winning information storage, and the 3rd section of the regular prize winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when normal prize winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal prize winning information storage, the normal prize winning information in the first section of the normal prize winning information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the normal prize winning information storage, and the normal prize winning information in the second section of the normal prize winning information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal prize winning information storage, and the second section of the normal prize winning information storage and the third section of the normal prize winning information storage become free areas. Here, when normal prize winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal prize winning information storage, the output of the lighting signal of the normal reserve display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal prize winning information so that the total number of stored normal prize winning information is set as a reserved ball and the normal reserve display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following the normal winning port winning process, the normal winning port winning information set in the working area of the RAM built in the main control is read out, and the value of the random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol wins is determined from the read normal winning port winning information to determine whether or not it matches the normal symbol winning determination value previously stored in the ROM built in the main control (called the "normal lottery"). This determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery) determines whether or not to open or close the movable piece. If the decision is made to open or close the movable piece, the movable piece will be in an open state, creating a game state in which a game ball can be received by the second starting port 2005, creating a game state that is advantageous to the player. The normal symbol variable display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and the output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variable display pattern, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

For example, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol hits is the same as the normal symbol hit determination value previously stored in the ROM with the main control, various commands related to the normal electric role performance are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2632 is set to open and close the movable piece, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol hits is the same as the normal symbol hit determination value previously stored in the ROM with the main control, a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance are created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. In addition, the output of a light signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above through the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when the main control MPU has normally received various commands from the payout control board 633, it outputs a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU based on the output information, outputs a drive signal to the first attacca solenoid 2642 and the second attacca solenoid 2652 that perform the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing members of the first large winning opening 2006 and the second large winning opening 2007 when the game is in a jackpot game state, outputs a drive signal to the start opening solenoid 2632 that performs the opening and closing operation of the movable piece, and also outputs various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a small winning information output signal, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, a time-saving information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal, to the payout control board 633.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circuit serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special chart 1 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to special chart 2 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to jackpots (for example, a large prize port 1 count display command corresponding to a large prize port count command based on a detection signal from the first large prize port sensor 3002 or the second large prize port sensor 2602 when a game ball entering the first large prize port 2006 or the second large prize port 2007 is detected), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance, and various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance. Various commands classified as related to electric effects, various commands classified as notification displays, various commands classified as status displays, various commands classified as test-related commands, and various other commands (for example, a main prize ball number information output command that instructs the main control board 1310 to transmit a main prize ball number information output signal to the hall computer as main prize ball number information every time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning holes provided on the game board 5 reaches 10 balls) are stored. The main serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main serial data is composed of a status indicating the type of command with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating the variation of the effect with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, so that the main serial transmission port built into the main control MPU can at least transfer the command set in its transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete transmission from the transmission shift register as main serial data. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption occurs after power is turned on, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when power is turned on in step S50 of the main control power-on processing shown in FIG. 215, in order to inform the user that power has been restored, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.As main serial data, these are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, followed by the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command at power-on, followed by the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 of the main control power-on processing. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are transmitted.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control's built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control's built-in WDT is cleared in step S122 by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU. This clears the timekeeping by the main control's built-in WDT. Then, the main control's built-in WDT restarts counting time, which avoids the main control MPU being forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 can execute and complete the above-mentioned backup process for storing game information as the game progresses before power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is in progress, and when power is restored, based on the game information for which the backup process has been executed, the main control board 1310 can output a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 which instructs the drive state of the start port solenoid 2632, first attacker solenoid 2642, and second attacker solenoid 2652, which are the electrical drive sources due to the port output process of step S118 in this routine, when power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, as the return destination for the game progress by the main control board 1310. In other words, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 215, the main control board 1310 creates a power-on state command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on, based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same processing shown in FIG. 214, in order to inform the user that power has been turned on (power has been restored), and stores these command in the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. This is stored in the transmission information storage area, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the main serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on state command, followed by transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command, followed by transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return the game when power is restored in the display area of the display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 when power is turned on. This allows the game to be quickly restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage when power is restored while the player is playing, and the destination to which the game will be returned by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600 to notify the player, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 does not appear to be in a frozen state, which is a so-called frozen state, and the player is prevented from mistaking it for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage after power is restored, the game can be prevented from being misunderstood for a malfunction by the player.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38 of the main control side power-on processing shown in Fig. 214. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is made in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 of the same processing shown in Fig. 215, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, so that only the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. M's transmission information memory area, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the main peripheral serial data is transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, followed by transmission to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command, and then transmission to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process is configured to display detailed model information on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310, that is, based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which comprises the above-mentioned series code for identifying which of the model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, in addition to the game specifications in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that a special pattern can fluctuate (ST machine)).

[12. Various control processes of the dispensing control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in Fig. 203 will be described with reference to Figs. 217 to 220. Fig. 217 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on process, Fig. 218 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on process in Fig. 217, Fig. 219 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on process following Fig. 218, and Fig. 220 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

[12-1. Processing when power is turned on for the dispensing control unit]
First, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the payout control unit power-on process is performed under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in Fig. 217 to Fig. 219. When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of the payout control MPU interrupt. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is performed with priority.

Following step S500, the dispensing control MPU performs input/output settings (I/O input/output settings) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, the various input ports and various output ports of the dispensing control MPU are set, etc.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer process 1 (step S506) and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, and in this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) are set as the waiting time (wait timer). The determination in step S508 is based on the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 has been operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch. When the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal) is HI, it is determined that the signal does not command the RAM clear to be performed and the RAM clear switch is not operated. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal) is LOW, it is determined that the signal commands the RAM clear to be performed and the RAM clear switch is operated.

When the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU is in a state in which it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the payout control MPU (i.e., the payout control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time from when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S512, when the payout control MPU judges that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to erase payout information related to the payout of, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, the number of prize balls stocked PBS, the actual ball count PB, the number of drive commands DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area) stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs a setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting allows access to the payout control built-in RAM, and allows, for example, writing (storing) or reading payout information.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer, for example, indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) in use, or indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when terminating a subroutine and returning to this routine, and the stack pointer advances each time a stack is added. In step S520, the stack pointer is set to an initial address, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are added to the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading the stacks in order from the last stacked to the first stacked.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is equal to 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 1 when the payout information is to be cleared and to 0 when the payout information is not to be cleared.

When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout control MPU determines not to erase the payout information, it calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is calculated by treating the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (when power is off) described below (step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a value of 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag that indicates whether payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value was stored and retained in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off processing described below, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally, and to a value of 0 when the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed normally.

In the judgment of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a value of 1, that is, when it is judged that the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 0, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built into the payout control MPU (i.e., the payout control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM. This sets information to be used for various processes based on the payout information related to the payout, such as the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas (for example, the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, stored in the CR communication information storage area, and the mismatch counter reset judgment time stored in the time management information storage area). Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value of 0 (is a value of 1), that is, when the payout control MPU judges that the payout information should be erased, or in the judgment of step S526, when the payout control MPU judges that the checksum values do not match, or in the judgment of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value of 1 (is a value of 0), that is, when the payout control unit power off processing has not been completed normally, the payout control MPU clears the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S532). This clears the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S534). This setting is done by reading the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the dispensing control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt period when the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process described below is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the dispensing control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S538). This setting causes the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S536, i.e., every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the dispensing control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by sequentially setting the values A, B, and C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, as described above, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

When the dispensing control MPU determines in step S540 that no power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, as described below, and is set to 1 when 2 ms have elapsed and to 0 when 2 ms have not elapsed.

In the judgment of step S542, if the dispensing control MPU determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to the value 0, that is, that 2 ms has not elapsed, the dispensing control MPU returns to step S540 and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S542, if the dispensing control MPU determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, that 2 ms have elapsed, it sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 0 (step S544).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals based on this information are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU. The output information storage area stores various information such as payout master ACK information indicating that various payout-related commands (prize ball commands and self-check commands) from the main control board 1310 have been received normally, drive information for controlling the drive of the payout motor 584, prize ball number information indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information to be displayed on the error LED indicator. Based on this output information, when various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 have been received normally, the payout control MPU outputs a payout master ACK signal to the main control board 1310 from the output terminal of a specified output port, outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584, or outputs the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 outputs a prize ball number information output signal to the external terminal board 558 every time the payout motor 584 actually pays out 10 game balls).

Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter is provided to determine whether or not to output prize ball number information. This prize ball number information output determination counter counts the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described below, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) not shown in the figure for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584.

In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by this payout motor 584, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the value is updated based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described below.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information is read from this prize ball information storage area, and when the value of this read counter for determining the output of prize ball number information exceeds the value of 10 (i.e., when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls), a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated as the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM mentioned above), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the dispensing control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the dispensing control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM. For example, the operation signal of the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the CR unit, the main dispensing ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the main control board 1310 that the main control board 1310 has normally received the various commands sent in the command sending processing described below, etc. are each read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball-stuck determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball-stuck state has occurred due to the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the skip determination time, which is set when the payout blade 589 is not in a fixed position, the full determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls, the ball of the game ball taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 due to the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574, and the ball-stuck state are determined as a determination condition when the ball-stuck state is determined by the ball-stuck state. In addition to managing the time of the ball run-out determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether the number of game balls received and dispensed by the ball receiving section 589b of the dispensing blade 589 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the time management unit 100 also manages the time of the mismatch counter reset determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether to reset the mismatch counter INCC, which is used to monitor whether inconsistent game balls are being repeatedly dispensed due to a mismatch between the number of game balls received and dispensed by the ball receiving section 589b of the dispensing blade 589 and the number of balls actually detected by the dispensing detection sensor 591. For example, when the ball jamming determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so that the ball jamming determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time this timer update process is performed, and the ball jamming determination time is accurately measured by the subtraction result becoming a value of 0. Note that these various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit have been input. Based on the various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the working area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, information used for various processing is set based on payout information related to payout, such as payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in the various information storage area (for example, the number of prize balls stocked PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area).

With this process, for example, even if there is a momentary or power outage, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary or power outage, which are stored as payout backup information. As a result, even if there is a momentary or power outage while the payout device 580 is performing a payout operation of game balls and the payout operation cannot be continued due to the momentary or power outage, the payout operation can be continued when power is restored, so that the game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 without excess or shortage. In other words, when the payout control MPU is exchanging various signals with the CR unit during CR communication processing while paying out game balls to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202, if there is an instantaneous or power outage that cuts off the exchange of various signals with the CR unit and makes it impossible to continue paying out game balls, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous or power outage that are stored as payout backup information. This makes it possible to continue exchanging various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the instantaneous or power outage when power is restored, and to continue paying out game balls.

In this way, even if the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is interrupted or stopped, when power is restored it is restored to the state it was in immediately before the interruption or stoppage, and the various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit are not affected by the interruption or stoppage. This makes it possible to increase the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit.

In addition, the various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which was set in the process of setting the working area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, and if this read PRDY signal output setting information is set to a logic state of a PRDY signal that indicates, for example, that a payout operation for paying out loaned balls is impossible, the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit. Then, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, a determination is made as to whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH. If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, it is determined that the retry operation is operating abnormally, that is, it is determined that the payout operation of the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, and the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1. In the payout ball operation determination setting process, the setting for outputting an error state to the CR unit is, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal, which informs the CR unit that the payout operation to pay out loaned balls is impossible when there is no communication with the CR unit, and this is stored in the CR communication information storage area.

In this way, in the CR communication process, at the next timer interrupt after power is restored, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area, and the PRDY signal is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the payout device 580 for game balls was in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power outage, the state is restored when power is restored, so that at an extremely early stage after power is restored, a PRDY signal that notifies the CR unit that the payout operation for paying out loaned balls is impossible can be output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, and it is possible to inform the CR unit that the payout operation of the payout device 580 for game balls is in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting a useless loaned ball request signal, BRDY, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

In the CR communication processing, in the port input processing of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this CR connection signal, when its logic is HI, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as HI to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to inform the CR unit that a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is possible, whereas when its logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as LOW to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to inform the CR unit that a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is not possible. The logic state of the EXS signal, which indicates that a single dispensing operation has started or ended, is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and the CR connection signal, which indicates whether the dispensing control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected or not, is stored in the status information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and ball exhaustion check process (step S556). In this full tank and ball exhaustion check process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether the lower tray 202 described above is full of stored game balls based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, and whether the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball exhaustion detection sensor 574. For example, the determination of whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls is performed by using a timer interrupt period of 2 ms, and when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the current full tank and ball out check process and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full tank and ball out check process (2 ms ago), that is, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process of step S552 starts timing the above-mentioned full tank determination time. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes a value of 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time has arrived, the full tank and ball out check process determines whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the lower tray 202 is determined to be full of stored game balls, and full tank information that conveys this is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls, and full tank information indicating this is stored in the status information storage area.

The determination of whether the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number also uses a timer interrupt period of 2 ms. When the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is ON in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process and the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is OFF in the previous full tank and out-of-ball check process (2 ms ago), that is, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process of step S552 starts timing the above-mentioned out-of-ball determination time. Then, when the out-of-ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the out-of-ball determination time has arrived, it is determined whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is ON, ball out information informing the user that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is stored in the status information storage area, whereas when the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is OFF, ball out information informing the user that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than the predetermined number is stored in the status information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) are received from the main control board 1310. When these various commands are received normally, payer ACK information informing that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the various commands are not received normally, connection abnormality information informing that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in the various command signals) is stored in the status information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the dispensing control MPU performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the dispensing control internal RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting process, it sets the operation of prize balls, loan balls, ball removal, ball jamming, etc., judges the retry operation, and monitors the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls in stock).

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned status information storage area, and display data to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 is created and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. For example, the above-mentioned ball out information is read from the status information storage area, and based on this ball out information, when the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, corresponding display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands classified as state displays (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) are created based on this various information and sent to the main control board 1310. For example, when ball out information is read from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a frame state 1 command is created and sent to the main control board 1310 based on this ball out information.

Following step S566, the dispensing control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the values A, B and C are set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in that order, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539, where the payout control MPU sets the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to a value A, and in step S540 determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, in step S542 it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if 2 ms have elapsed, in step S544 it sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 0, in step S546 it sets the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to a value B, and in step S548 Port output processing is performed in step S550, port input processing is performed in step S552, timer update processing is performed in step S554, CR communication processing is performed in step S556, full tank and bulb out check processing is performed in step S558, command reception processing is performed in step S560, command analysis processing is performed in step S562, main operation setting processing is performed in step S564, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S566, command transmission processing is performed in step S568, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processing in steps S539 to S568 is referred to as the "dispensing control unit main processing".

The processing contents of the payout control unit main processing vary depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. This causes the time required for processing by the payout control MPU to vary. Therefore, in the port output processing of step S548, the payout control MPU outputs a payout master ACK signal to the main control board 1310 as a priority, which indicates that various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received. This ensures that the payout control MPU has enough processing time to perform other variable processing.

On the other hand, when the dispensing control MPU determines in step S540 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets the interrupt prohibition (step S570). This setting prevents the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process described below from being performed, prevents writing to the dispensing control built-in RAM, and protects the dispensing information described above from being rewritten.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). This stops the payout of game balls.

Following step S574, the dispensing control MPU clears the watchdog timer (step S576). This clearing is performed by sequentially setting values A, B, and C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by treating the payout information in the working area of the payout control internal RAM, excluding the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the storage area for the payout backup flag HBK-FLG value, as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets the prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). This setting prohibits access to the payout control built-in RAM, making writing and reading impossible, and protects the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S582, the dispensing control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not sequentially set to values A, B, and C. This causes the dispensing control MPU to be reset, after which the dispensing control unit power-on processing is performed again. The processing from step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as the "dispensing control unit power-off processing."

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and when power is subsequently restored, the payout control unit performs power-on processing.

In step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528 it is checked whether the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally. In this way, by doubly checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is checked whether the payout backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

[12-2. Dispense control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This dispensing control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the dispensing control unit power-on process shown in Figures 217 to 219.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is started, the payout control MPU, as shown in FIG. 220, disables the timer interrupt and switches (saves) the register (step S590). Here, it switches from the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above to an auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is no longer overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main processing from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and is set to a value of 1 when 2 ms have elapsed and to a value of 0 when 2 ms have not elapsed.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (restores) the register (step S594). This restoration switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is no longer overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the dispensing control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596) and ends this routine.

[13. Various control processes of peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 225. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on process, FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. In this embodiment, the priority order of the interrupt process is set to the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 integrates the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on a single semiconductor chip.

[13-1. Processing when peripheral control unit is powered on]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 221. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on process is performed under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. 221. When this peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a process of determining whether it is a hot start or a cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like are performed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC can be initialized in an extremely short time. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state where interrupt permission is set, and is in a state where it can receive various commands, such as commands related to the control of game performances and commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1, output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current calendar information and current time information are set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once, when the power is turned on. After performing this current time information acquisition process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing described later, and is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later, which is executed when a V blank signal that indicates that the screen data (information that specifies the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value of 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. In addition, after the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, it outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not equal to 1 (it is equal to 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 and repeatedly determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1. By repeating such determinations, the CPU enters a standby state until the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1, that is, when it determines that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is to be executed, it first sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 1 (step S1008). This steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer start process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described below is started, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value of 1 to count the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer has been started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed, thereby initializing the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs performance operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this presentation operation unit monitoring process, in the presentation operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the presentation operation unit 300 monitors the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the press operation unit 303 based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which various information (for example, rotation (direction of rotation) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 and operation history information of the press operation unit 303 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the presentation operation unit 300, and the like) obtained based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a pressure detection sensor 381, and a lift detection sensor 382 (hereinafter referred to as "various sensors provided in the presentation operation unit 300") provided in the presentation operation unit 300 is set, and it is appropriately determined whether or not to reflect the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the operation state of the press operation unit 303 in the game presentation. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the performance operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the schedule data for light emission mode generation is rewritten according to the adjusted brightness. This allows the volume and brightness adjustments to be reflected in real time, and the performance will proceed with the adjusted volume and brightness.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as one process of the performance operation unit monitoring processing. In the lamp palette setting processing, the luminance of the LEDs used as direct light and the luminance of the LEDs used as indirect light are set based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of a luminance designation value, a normal palette value, and a special palette value. When the lamp palette setting processing is executed during the progress of a performance, and a player (or a staff member of the game hall) operates the performance operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a luminance designation value ranging from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance, the above-mentioned gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC can be updated to the set luminance designation value.

Here, we will briefly explain the brightness designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value that make up the lamp palette setting table. The brightness designation value is a value that can set one of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value, which is the minimum brightness (lights off), to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the maximum brightness, and the normal palette value and special palette value, which will be described later, are each preset in correspondence with the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value. A player (or a staff member or other attendant at the game hall) can set one brightness designation value ranging from the 1st brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the maximum brightness, by operating the operable performance operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303).

For example, when a player (or a staff member or other attendant at an amusement hall) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 clockwise and the current brightness is set to a first brightness designated value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness designated value, which is the minimum brightness (lights off), the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light are increased in accordance with a predetermined mathematical formula (e.g., a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value, which is the maximum brightness, whereas when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 counterclockwise and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light are decreased in accordance with a predetermined mathematical formula (e.g., a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) from the 31st brightness designated value, which is the maximum brightness, to the first brightness designated value. When the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 to select the desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is confirmed. In this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance where the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) can set the brightness while the performance is in progress, and at this time, the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, when the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) operates the rotary operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the performance display device 1600 while the performance is in progress, a bar-shaped indicator indicating the positions from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value is displayed, so that the degree of the desired brightness of the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) can be visually shown as an image. In addition, in this embodiment, the 14th brightness designated value is set as the initial value (default).

Normal palette values are set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are irradiated as direct light. For normal palette values, one of 17 steps is selected in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value, and the palette value corresponding to one brightness specification is set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) within the range of 32 steps ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value, which are the brightness specification values described above.

The minimum palette value (20%) is 20% of the maximum palette value (100%) that corresponds to one brightness specification in the 32-step range of the brightness specification values from 0th (zero) to 31st brightness specification values described above. Similarly, for the other palette values, the values (%) written in parentheses are the values relative to the maximum palette value (100%) that corresponds to one brightness specification in the 32-step range of the brightness specification values from 0th (zero) to 31st brightness specification values described above.

In this embodiment, the normal palette value is the maximum palette value (100%) that is pre-selected and set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, and the palette value (50%) is pre-selected and set as the above-mentioned gradation information for a specific decorative board (not shown) (an LED that is dazzling to the player) among the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light.

The special palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used in light guide plates that are irradiated as indirect light. Unlike normal palette values, the special palette value has only one level, and among the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which are the above-mentioned brightness designation values, the palette value corresponding to one brightness designation is set as the above-mentioned gradation information according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve).

As described above, if the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is the same as that of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate will be darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value, rather than using the normal palette value set for the luminance of the LED used as direct light, and the first luminance designation value, which is the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designation value, which is the minimum luminance (light off), is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th luminance designation value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%) as the lowest luminance at which the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light can be visually recognized, and the palette value corresponding to one luminance designation value within the range from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value is set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

In this way, in the lamp palette setting process, when setting the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of a brightness specification value, a normal palette value, and a special palette value, the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is set by the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) according to the normal palette value corresponding to the brightness specification value operated by the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, while the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is set by the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness specification value operated by the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is too dazzling and operates the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to set the brightness to a lower level, even if the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is set to the lowest brightness (i.e., the first brightness designated value which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) brightness designated value which is the minimum brightness (lights off)) and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (i.e., the first brightness designated value which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) brightness designated value which is the minimum brightness (lights off)) in conjunction with this, the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness designated value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), so the lowest brightness at which the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light by indirect light is set.

Furthermore, without having to individually set the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame for the LEDs used as direct light, the programmer designing the light emission patterns can simply set the light emission patterns in accordance with the flow of the presentation, watch the flow of the presentation based on the light emission patterns of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame, and then set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative board that is too dazzling (or that a slightly darker brightness would produce a better presentation effect), and set the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for other decorative boards, thereby extremely easily changing the balance of the overall light emission patterns. In other words, even if a player (or a staff member of the game hall) operates the operable performance operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a single brightness designated value ranging from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value which is the maximum brightness, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the single brightness designated value is set for a specific decorative board, while a maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to the single brightness designated value is set for other decorative boards, so that brightness adjustment can be made very easily without destroying the relationship between the light emission modes (bright or dark) that have been set relative to each other.

Furthermore, although it is more difficult to adjust the brightness of indirect light from a light guide plate than direct light, it is possible to set the brightness for LEDs used as indirect light using special palette values that are different from the normal palette values (i.e., independent of the normal palette values). As a result, the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light is managed by the special palette values, while the brightness of LEDs used as direct light is managed by the normal palette values, making it easy to adjust the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of LEDs used as direct light.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the display data creation process described below, and outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC to the liquid crystal output board 1530. This allows various screens (images) to be drawn (displayed) on the performance display device 1600. Note that in the display data output process, if drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen's worth (one frame's worth) is canceled. This prevents delays in processing time, but may result in dropped frames. However, it is a mechanism that allows the sound data output process described below to prioritize the use of music, sound effects, and other sound effects that match the various effects from various speakers such as the vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, and main frame speaker 622 (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers").

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, in the sound data creation processing described below, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the data to various speakers from the set output channel. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various performances are played from the various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

The scheduler update process also updates the pointer to indicate which light emission data, from the first light emission data, is to be output among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating light emission modes.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which sound command data, starting from the first sound command data, should be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC among the sound command data that indicates sound data for musical effects, sound effects, and other sound effects, and sound data for alerts and announcements, arranged in chronological order to constitute the sound generation schedule data.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which drive data from the first drive data is to be output among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data. The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, as described below. In this motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated every time its own process is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so even if for some reason the pointer in the motor and solenoid drive process changes from the drive data it was originally supposed to point to to other drive data, it is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process to point to the drive data it was originally supposed to point to.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands sent from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described below, and the received various commands are analyzed, and the random numbers used for various settings of the performance (for example, random numbers used for performances related to reserved read-ahead) are updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and in this received command analysis process, the various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are analyzed. Based on the analyzed various commands, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LEDs used as direct light and the luminance of the LEDs used as indirect light are set based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the above-mentioned luminance designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, and based on the analyzed various commands, reads (extracts) the schedule data for generating the light emission mode from the peripheral control ROM, executes the lamp palette setting process, and when the player (or a staff member of the game hall or other attendant) operates the performance operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a luminance designation value ranging from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated to the set luminance designation value and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also analyzes whether the command received from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command to instruct the start of a start port winning performance, a normal pattern memory command to identify the number of reserved normal patterns (0 to 4), a variable pattern command to instruct the start of a variable performance such as the variable display of decorative patterns on the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of special patterns, a pattern memory command output when the start reserved number changes, or a large prize port 1 count display command output each time a game ball is received by the first large prize port 2006 or the second large prize port 2007, and recognizes the current game state.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the received command analysis processing analyzes the various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The various commands include various commands classified as related to special chart 1 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to special chart 2 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to jackpots, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to normal electric role performance, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test related, and various commands classified as other. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to notices, etc. based on the received command, and reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and schedule data for electrical drive source, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on the lottery result and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 to execute a performance based on the lottery results.

In addition, the peripheral control ROM stores various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the performance display control unit 1511, etc. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating the light emission mode of various LEDs, sound generation schedule data for generating performance sounds such as music and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating the drive mode of an electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that specifies the configuration of the screen in chronological order, and specifies the order of the screens to be drawn on the performance display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission mode data that specifies the light emission mode of various LEDs in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in chronological order, and specifies the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data specifies an output channel number for indicating which of the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC to use, and a track number for indicating which of the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in chronological order, and specifies the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified as notification displays, the schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for light emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, and the schedule data for the electrical drive source, which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications, are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in the warning process, if multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and when that abnormality is resolved, it automatically transitions to the remaining abnormality notification. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that a certain abnormality has occurred because another abnormality has occurred after the occurrence of one abnormality but before the abnormality has been resolved.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. This RTC acquisition information update process updates the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and updates the year, month, and date, which are the calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, based on the updated time information.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When the VDP of the peripheral control IC receives screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, it reads image data from the SDRAM based on the received screen data and generates one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame's worth) in the built-in VRAM to be drawn (displayed) on the performance display device 1600.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for sound generation, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (i.e., each time the peripheral control unit performs steady-state processing), the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is identified based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the sound data is output to the various speakers from the output channel set in this sound data creation process. This allows sounds such as music and sound effects that match the various performances to be played from the various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is varied by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and then converted into 1024 levels of values from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, with the volume set to increase from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled to the volume set to board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the body frame speaker 622 for low tones on the body frame 4. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the body frame speaker 622 for low tones on the body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data. In addition to the sound data for music, sound effects, and other sound effects and the sub-volume value for adjusting their volume, the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC also incorporate sound data for notification sounds to alert parlor staff and the like of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 and the sub-volume value for adjusting their volume.

Specifically, for the sound effects, the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch as described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value, completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch. The sub-volume value of the sound effects can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the sound effects operation unit 300, except for a predetermined period after power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a certain period when the special pattern display (first special pattern display unit, second special pattern display unit) starts or stops the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the fixed display of the decorative pattern).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, except for a predetermined period after power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a certain period when the special pattern display (first special pattern display unit, second special pattern display unit) starts or stops the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the final display of the decorative pattern), By operating the rotation operation unit 302 and pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process is converted into seven levels of board volume values from 0 to 6, and by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch depending on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the board volume value is increased or decreased to set the board volume, and the sub-volume value of the performance sound can be adjusted.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC combine the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC with a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used, and amplify the volume of this combined effect sound to the master volume value that actually becomes the volume that flows from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4, and then serialize this amplified effect sound and output it as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized sound is at its maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value so that the volume of the sound coming from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4 is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound, the sound data of the sound embedded in the track to be used among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC and the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the sound embedded in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized sound is actually amplified to the master volume value that is the volume coming from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, and this amplified sound is serialized and recorded. For the alarm sound, the sound data of the alarm sound incorporated in the track being used is mixed with the maximum volume that is not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the alarm sound incorporated in the track being used, and the volume of this mixed alarm sound is amplified to the master volume value that is actually the volume that is played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4, and this amplified alarm sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, to briefly explain the control of playing an alarm sound to alert parlor staff and the like of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 when the special sound is being played from the top central speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for bass on the main frame 4, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the special sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track in which this special sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the alarm sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value for which the volume of the alarm sound is set to maximum are combined, and the volume of this combined special sound and alarm sound are amplified to the master volume value that will actually be the volume played from the top central speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for bass on the main frame 4, and the amplified special sound and alarm sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, the only sound that actually comes out of the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the low-pitched body frame speaker 622 on the body frame 4 is the notification sound at maximum volume. At this time, the sound effects are muted, so no sound comes out of the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the low-pitched body frame speaker 622 on the body frame 4, but the sound effects are proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data described above.

In this embodiment, the alarm sound is played for a predetermined period (e.g., 90 seconds) from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4. After the predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the sound that is being played according to the sound generation schedule data that was previously forcibly set to mute is reset to the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch as the sub-volume value (if the volume of the sound is adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the sound operation unit 300, the volume is set to the adjusted sub-volume value of the sound), and the alarm sound is played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4.

In this way, when the sound effects are being played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, when an alarm sound is played to notify the parlor staff of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the sound effects is muted and the alarm sound is played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4. However, since this muted sound effects progress according to the sound generation schedule data, when the alarm sound stops being played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the sound effects do not start playing again from the point where the alarm sound started, but start playing again from the point where the alarm sound started playing and progressed according to the sound generation schedule data until the point where the predetermined period of time had elapsed.

Also, the notification sounds and announcement sounds are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC can control the sound source of the peripheral control IC by a program to adjust the volume from mute to maximum volume. The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a staff member of the game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, and other performance sounds played from the various speakers will be low, but the notification sounds set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is committing a fraudulent act. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sounds is low, it is possible to prevent staff members of the game hall from being unable to notice the malfunction or the player's fraudulent act due to the notification sounds.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM for backup.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 0 as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1004, sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 to initialize it, and repeats the judgment of step S1006 until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In other words, in step S1006, the CPU waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, and if it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, it performs the processing of steps S1008 to S1038, and returns to step S1004 again. In this way, if it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, the processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit regular processing."

In this peripheral control unit regular processing, the routine starts by setting the regular processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1008, indicating that the peripheral control unit regular processing is being executed, and then in step S1010, a 1 ms interrupt timer start process is performed, and then in step S1036, the routine is performed, and finally in step S1038, the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0, indicating that the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed. The peripheral control unit regular processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described later, which is executed when a V blank signal, which indicates that the peripheral control unit's CPU is ready to accept screen data, is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the CPU of the peripheral control IC. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the performance display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeated approximately every 33.3 ms.

[13-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is explained, which is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC, which indicates that the peripheral control IC is ready to receive screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 (step S1045), as shown in Fig. 222. As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Fig. 221 is being executed, and is set to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed.

In the judgment of step S1045, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, it ends this routine. On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1045, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed, it sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 1 (step S1050) and ends this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing, and is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is not executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is equal to 0, i.e., whether the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, in step S1050, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1. This is because, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, if a V blank signal is input and the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed as determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 221, and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing currently being executed is forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is started from the beginning. In order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. 221 is turned on. In step S1008 of the power-on process (peripheral control unit steady-state process), the steady-state process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state process is being executed, and in step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady-state process) in FIG. 221, the steady-state process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state process has been completed. In other words, this is a procedure for when the peripheral control unit steady-state process cannot be completed by the time the next V blank signal is input after the V blank signal is input, resulting in a so-called processing lag.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing is not completed within the time of about 33.3 ms and the processing is delayed, the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 221 will result in a standby state until the next V blank signal is input. In other words, the time to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed will be about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. 221, is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit regular processing, but if there is a peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times, not 64 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit regular processing is delayed, the consistency between the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit's normal processing slows down, the progress of the presentation can be reliably maintained.

[13-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 221, will be described. When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 223 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is a counter that counts the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 221 and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the performance display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit routine process is repeatedly executed every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit routine process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed 32 times before the next peripheral control unit routine process is executed. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit routine process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, followed by the second, ..., and 32nd 1 ms timer interrupts in sequence.

In the judgment of step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times, that is, when it judges that the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has started, it ends this routine as it is. In the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is set to have a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing as the priority of the interrupt processing, but the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, in the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the V blank signal is generated and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started again when the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 times, it adds (increments) the value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, step S1102. By adding the value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 221, and the number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, has been executed, increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the motor, solenoid, and other electric drive sources are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for the motors, solenoids, and other electric drive sources arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is performed. As a result, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, the electric drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and the electric drive sources provided in various performance units provided on the game board 5) are driven according to the electric drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable object information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition processing, history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (e.g., original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created by determining whether or not detection signals have been input from the various sensors provided in the various presentation units provided on the game board 5, and set this in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the movable positions by setting the original positions (standby positions) of the various movable objects provided in the various presentation units provided on the game board 5 and acquiring the movable positions.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a performance operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this performance operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals are input from various sensors provided in the performance operation unit 300, history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) is created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. From the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be obtained. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the performance operation unit 301, it is possible to adjust the volume of the performance sounds output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and to adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted in multiple numbers on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up in a 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied and backed up in a 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAM. Note that in this embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set to different areas, and the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAM and the regular processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set to different areas.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, various processing related to the performance in steps S1104 to S1108 is executed as the performance progresses within a period of 1 ms. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 221, various processing related to the performance in steps S1014 to S1032 is executed as the performance progresses within a period of approximately 33.3 ms. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as is. Therefore, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal occurs, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled, and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing by the occurrence of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, the progress state of the performance can be reliably matched.

As mentioned above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the performance display device 1600, and the interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly, the time lag caused by the slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt.

[13-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts transmitting various commands as serial data from the main control board 1310, this triggers the CPU to take in 1 byte (8 bits) of information from the main serial data into a reception buffer at the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC, and when this taking is completed, this triggers an interrupt to be generated and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is performed. One packet of the main serial data is composed of 3 bytes, with the status assigned to the first byte, the mode assigned to the second byte, and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and calculating their sum to the third byte.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200), as shown in FIG. 224. This 1-byte reception period timer sets the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

In the judgment of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, when it is judged that it is within the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC takes in the 1 byte of information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC (step S1202) and adds (increments) the value of the reception counter SRXC by 1, step S1204. This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times information has been taken out from the reception buffer, and takes a value of 1 when the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, takes a value of 2 when the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, and takes a value of 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on, etc.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the receive counter SRXC is equal to the value 3, i.e., whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been retrieved from the receive buffer (step S1206). In this determination, it is determined whether the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1206 that the receive counter SRXC is not equal to the value 3, that is, that the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, has not yet been retrieved from the receive buffer, followed by the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, in that order, it sets a 1-byte receive period timer (step S1208) and ends this routine. By setting the 1-byte receive period timer in step S1208, a period is set in which the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges in step S1206 that the receive counter SRXC is equal to 3, that is, when it judges that the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, it sets the receive counter SRXC to an initial value of 0 (step S1210) and calculates the sum value (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which were already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main loop serial data from the main control board 1310, so it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they discharge electrostatically, generating noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is in an environment where it is subject to noise.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values, calculates their sum (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main control board 1310. This allows the CPU of the peripheral control IC to determine whether the main serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to main serial data that is different from the normal data.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, it stores the status assigned to the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned to the second byte of the main serial data in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216), and ends this routine.

On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1200 that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, that the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded, or if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, it ends this routine.

[13-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process will be described, which is executed when a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in Fig. 225, and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1302). In the determination of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power failure warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine as it is.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges that a power outage warning signal has been input, it judges whether 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this judgment, the timer started in step S1300 judges whether 2 microseconds have passed. In the judgment of step S1304, when 2 microseconds have not passed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302 and judges whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If it judges that a power outage warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine, but if it judges that a power outage warning signal has been input, it judges again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have passed. In other words, in the judgment of step S1304, it judges whether a power outage warning signal has been input continuously for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, was started.

In the judgment of step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges that the power outage warning signal has been input continuously for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, was started, it performs power saving processing (step S1306). In this power saving processing, the backlight of the performance display device 1600 is turned off, excitation to the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 is turned off, various LEDs are turned off, etc. are sequentially executed to reduce the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, and stable operation is ensured for the period of 20 milliseconds during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands currently being sent by the main control board 1310, the CPU waits for at least 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the command being sent. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process for the command (step S1310). In this backup process, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied and backed up in a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1312). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has not been input, or following step S1314, it returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power outage warning signal has been input. In other words, it continues to determine indefinitely whether the power outage warning signal has been input. By continuing to determine indefinitely in this manner, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has not been input, it is no longer able to output a clear signal to the external WDT, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset. On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a WDT clear process in step S1314, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 221 is started again.

In this way, if the input of the power outage warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314 so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset just before the power outage state occurs. On the other hand, if the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for a period exceeding 2 microseconds, and the determination of step S1302 is passed, if the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process of step S1314 is not executed so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, so that such noise can be dealt with by automatically returning to reset.

[Control process of main control board]
Next, an example of the control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. Fig. 226 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric role control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used in the various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 226, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes a first start gate passing process, such as obtaining a first special random number of the first special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM (step S232), on the condition that the detection signal from the first lower start gate sensor 2101 or the first upper start gate sensor 2524 is in the ON state (a ball has entered the first lower start gate 2003 or the first upper start gate 2004) (step S231). Also, on the condition that the detection signal from the second start gate sensor 2601 is in the ON state (a ball has entered the second start gate 2005) (step S233), the main control MPU 1310a executes a second start gate passing process, such as obtaining a second special random number of the second special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a jackpot execution flag indicating that control is being performed in the jackpot game state is set (step S235), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, a jackpot control process (step S235A) for controlling the jackpot game state is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display state when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stops is a state suggesting a "15R jackpot", a process for controlling the opening and closing of the first large prize winning port 2006 is executed according to the 15R jackpot game state. Also, when the result is a state suggesting a "5R jackpot", a process for controlling the opening and closing of the first large prize winning port 2006 is executed according to the 5R jackpot game state, and when the result is a state suggesting a "2R jackpot", a process for controlling the opening and closing of the first large prize winning port 2006 is executed according to the 2R jackpot game state.

In the jackpot control process (step S235A), after controlling the opening of the first large winning slot 2006, the process of setting the time-saving flag and the time-saving count counter is executed. The time-saving flag is a flag indicating the time-saving state, and is set when the 2R jackpot game state is ended because the result of the lottery process when the first special symbol stops changing during the time-saving state indicates a "2R jackpot", when the 5R jackpot game state is ended because the result of the lottery process indicates a "5R jackpot", and when the 15R jackpot game state is ended during the time-saving state and during the non-time-saving state. The time-saving flag is then reset during the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 237 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown when the next jackpot occurs or when the counter value of the time-saving count counter becomes "0".

The time-saving counter indicates the remaining number of times the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) will continue as the number of times the time-saving state will continue. When the time-saving state is controlled after the end of a jackpot game state, the number of times the time-saving state will continue is set when the jackpot game state ends. The time-saving counter counts down each time the variable display of the special symbols is executed until the counter value reaches "0", but if the next jackpot occurs before the counter value reaches "0", it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 237 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown (returning the counter value to "0").

If the jackpot in progress flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small jackpot in progress flag, which indicates that control is being performed in the small jackpot game state, is set (step S236), and if the small jackpot in progress flag is set, a small jackpot control process (step S236A) is executed to control the small jackpot game state. In addition, in the small jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display state when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stops is a state that suggests a "small jackpot", a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the second large prize winning port 2007 according to the small jackpot game state, and when the game ball received in the second large prize winning port 2007 is distributed to the V prize winning port 2008 and detected by the V prize winning port sensor 2603, a transition to the 15R jackpot game state is controlled.

In addition, if neither the big win in progress flag nor the small win in progress flag is set, a first special pattern process including a lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops is executed (step S238) on the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area is "0" (step S237), and a second special pattern process including a lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special pattern stops is executed (step S239) on the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area is not "0" (step S237). In this way, in this example, it is configured to execute the variable display of the second special pattern preferentially when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not "0".

Figure 227 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first start port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the processing of step S231, if it is determined that the first lower start hole sensor 2101 and the first upper start hole sensor 2524 are in the ON state and that a gaming ball has entered the first lower start hole 2003 or the first upper start hole 2004, then, as shown in FIG. 227, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first pattern random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as processing of step S241.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area, from the main control built-in RAM, and judges whether the first reserved memory number is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" based on this counter value (step S242). If it is determined in the process of this step S242 that the first reserved memory number is not its maximum value, the following steps S243 to S245 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into a reserved state. That is, first, as the process of the step S243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number obtained in the step S241 is stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a performance pre-determination process to determine, based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first pattern random number, and the variable random number obtained in step S241, whether the display result of the variable display of the first special pattern is a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach performance as a game performance executed by the performance display device 1600, the type of mode (type of variable pattern) of the game performance to be executed, before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S245), and then terminates the process.

However, if it is determined in the processing of step S242 that the first reserved memory number is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved.

When the first reserved memory number changes based on a game ball entering the first lower starting hole 2003 or the first upper starting hole 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved memory number display in the function display unit 1400 is updated to correspond to the first reserved memory number, and a command indicating the first reserved memory number (first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special pattern 1 storage command 0-4)) is set in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the performance display device 1600 based on receiving the first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special pattern 1 storage command 0-4).

Figure 228 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the above-mentioned performance pre-judgment process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the performance pre-judgment process, it compares the random numbers acquired in the above-mentioned step S241 or the random numbers acquired in step S251 described later, specifically the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number), the pattern random numbers (first pattern random number, second special random number), the reach random number, and the variable random number, with a pre-judgment table (not shown) to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached, and if so, the type of jackpot, and if not, whether or not a reach performance will be executed as the game performance executed by the performance display device 1600, and the type of game performance to be executed (step S261).

Then, a pre-determination command is set according to the specified pre-determination information (whether or not a jackpot will be obtained, the type of jackpot if a jackpot is obtained, whether or not a reach effect will be executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if a jackpot is not obtained, the type of game effect to be executed, etc.), the type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and the reserved memory number (the value of the reserved number counter) stored corresponding to the obtained special random number. For example, in the effect pre-determination process for the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first start port passing process, a first special symbol pre-determination command is set according to the specified pre-determination information, the fact that the first special random number has been obtained, and the first reserved memory number (the value of the first special reserved number counter), and in the effect pre-determination process for the second special symbol executed in step S255 of the second start port passing process described later, a second special symbol pre-determination command is set according to the specified pre-determination information, the fact that the second special random number has been obtained, and the second reserved memory number (the value of the second special reserved number counter) (step S262).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a pre-determination command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp pre-determination information such as the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the first lower start port 2003, first upper start port 2004, or second start port 2005 where the start winning has occurred, whether the display result of the variable display of the special pattern based on the start winning that has occurred is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, whether a reach performance will be executed as a game performance executed by the performance display device 1600 if it is not a jackpot, and the type of mode of the game performance to be executed before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a reserved memory area for storing pre-determination information regarding the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol).

The reserved memory area (first reserved memory area, second reserved memory area) has 1 to 4 memory areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control IC stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command in order, starting from the first (first) memory area. Then, when the pre-determination command is received in a case where the pre-determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) memory area, the notified pre-determination information is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 3) memory area, and when a variation pattern command (first variation pattern command, second variation pattern command) that notifies the start of the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) is received, the pre-determination information stored in the first memory area of the reserved memory area (first reserved memory area, second reserved memory area) is discarded in accordance with the received variation pattern command (first variation pattern command, second variation pattern command), and the pre-determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) memory area is moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) memory area (shifting the pre-determination information stored in the reserved memory area). This allows the pre-determination information for the first special pattern to be stored in a manner that allows the order in which the suspension of the variable display start occurred to be identified, and the pre-determination information is discarded in order starting from the earliest.

In this way, when the variable display control is put on hold, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (on hold), the jackpot expectancy (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, such as when the on-hold display is newly output or when the on-hold display is shifted in response to the on-hold consumption.

Figure 229 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

Now, in the processing of step S233, if it is determined that the second start hole sensor 2601 is in the ON state and a gaming ball has entered the second start hole 2005, as shown in FIG. 229, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second pattern random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the processing of step S251.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and judges whether the second reserved memory number is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" based on this counter value (step S252). If it is determined in the process of step S252 that the second reserved memory number is not its maximum value, the following steps S253 to S254 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into a reserved state. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number obtained in the above step S251 is stored in the second special symbol reserved memory area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a performance pre-determination process to determine, based on the second special random number, the reach random number, the second pattern random number, and the variable random number obtained in step S251, whether the display result of the variable display of the second special pattern is a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach performance as the game performance executed on the display device 851, and the type of mode (type of variable pattern) of the game performance to be executed, before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S255), and then terminates the process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of step S252 that the second reserved memory count is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly placed on hold.

In addition, when the second reserved memory number changes based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 2005, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved memory number display in the function display unit 1400 is updated to correspond to the second reserved memory number, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number (second reserved number designation command 0-4 (special pattern 2 storage command 0-4)) is set in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the performance display device 1600 based on receiving the second reserved number designation command 0-4 (special pattern 2 storage command 0-4).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on game balls entering the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004 is set to "4", while the upper limit of the second reserved memory number based on game balls entering the second start port 2005 is set to "4". Note that the second start port 2005 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time-saving state, and the change time of the second special symbol is shorter than in the normal state. Therefore, even if the upper limit of the second reserved memory number is set to "4", a long period will continue in which the change display of the second special symbol is not performed, or a long period will continue in which the second reserved memory number is at the upper limit, so that a disadvantageous state for the player will be prevented in which the player does not get a chance to win a jackpot even if a game ball enters the second start port 2005.

Figure 230 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S238). Note that the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process are similar program modules, and only the random numbers and tables used for the judgment are different. Therefore, only the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes will be selectively executed depending on the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special symbol normal process (step S280) in which a first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the read first special random number.
2. A first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which a process of determining the display mode when the first special symbol's variable control is stopped is performed based on the result of a lottery process regarding the display mode when the first special symbol's variable control is stopped.
3. A first variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which a lottery process is performed for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the variation random number and the variation mode of the performance display executed in response to the special symbol on the performance display device 1600.
4. A first special symbol variation process (step S283) in which the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 waits until the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped.
5. A first special symbol stop process (step S284) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol so that the mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400.

The first special symbol process flag is set to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S280) should be performed when the power is turned on.

Figure 231 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal processing of the first special pattern (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 231, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines whether there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the reserved state based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter as the processing of step S301. If it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the reserved state as the processing of step S302, the random number stored in the first memory area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (e.g., first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read from the same RAM. Next, in the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the random numbers (first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the first special pattern reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a start winning are stored in the first (earliest) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) memory area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n=1 to 3) memory area, and when the start condition for variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4) memory area. This allows the order in which the reservation of variable display control of the first special symbol occurred to be stored in a specific order, and the reservation of variable display control is released in order starting from the earliest reservation (the reservation that occurred first).

Then, in step S305, a winning determination process is performed, which is a lottery process for determining whether or not the jackpot will be won, based on the first special random number of the first special symbol that has been read out. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stopping symbol setting process (step S281), this process ends.

Figure 232 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the winning determination table shown in FIG. 233(A) with the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 when the first special pattern normal processing is being performed, and the second special random number read in the second special pattern normal processing when the second special pattern normal processing is being performed) (step S311).

The winning determination table shown in Figure 233 (A) includes, for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number), a low probability winning determination table used when the game state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time-saving state) and time-saving state (low probability time-saving state)), and a high probability winning determination table used when the game state is high probability (high probability time-saving state). In the low probability hit determination table which is referenced for comparison with the first special random number, the first special random numbers are associated with each other so that they match the jackpot determination value indicating that the first special random number has won a jackpot with a jackpot probability of 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, 1/299 when the setting value is 3, 1/289 when the setting value is 4, 1/279 when the setting value is 5, and 1/269 when the setting value is 6, match the jackpot determination value indicating that the first special random number has won a small hit with a small hit probability of 3/319, and match the miss determination value indicating that any other first special random number is a miss. In addition, in this example, in the low probability hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the second special random number within the second special pattern process processing, the second special random number is associated with each of the above-mentioned second special random numbers so that it matches the big hit determination value indicating that the second special random number has won a big hit with a big hit probability of 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, 1/299 when the setting value is 3, 1/289 when the setting value is 4, 1/279 when the setting value is 5, and 1/269 when the setting value is 6, matches the small hit determination value indicating that the second special random number has won a small hit with a small hit probability of 144/319, and matches the miss determination value indicating that any other second special random number is a miss. That is, the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being determined as a small hit than the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, and the player is placed in a more favorable state when the variable display of the second special symbol based on the start winning at the second start port 2005 is executed than when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the start winning at the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004 is executed. Also, the hit determination table for high probability is configured to increase the probability of a jackpot for each setting value by 10 times compared to the hit determination table for low probability. Note that for the setting values 1 to 6, which have different jackpot probabilities, the hall manager can change the setting value by performing a predetermined setting change operation using the setting key when the power is turned on.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a jackpot has occurred as a result of comparing the hit determination table with the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol, or the second special random number read in the normal processing of the second special symbol) (step S312), it sets a jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has resulted in a jackpot (step S313) and ends the hit determination process.

In addition, if a comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern, or the second special random number read in the normal processing of the second special pattern) determines that a small hit has occurred (step S314), a small hit flag is set (step S315), indicating that the corresponding variation has resulted in a small hit, and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if neither a big win nor a small win has been won, i.e., if it is determined that the win has been a miss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

The reach judgment table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and includes a reach judgment table for the time-saving state used when the game state is in the time-saving state, and a reach judgment table for the non-time-saving state used when the game state is not in the time-saving state. In the reach judgment table for the time-saving state, the reach random numbers are associated with one type of reach random number so that it matches a reach judgment value indicating a reach, and 71 types of reach random numbers match a reach judgment value indicating a non-reach.

In addition, in the reach determination table for the non-time-saving state, five types of reach random numbers, including the same reach random numbers as those set in the reach determination table for the time-saving state, are associated with the above-mentioned reach random numbers so that they match the reach determination values indicating that a reach will occur, and 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination values indicating that a reach will not occur. Thus, in this embodiment, in the non-time-saving state, the reach determination values indicating that a reach will occur are higher than in the time-saving state.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is a miss (step S317) based on the comparison between the selected reach judgment table and the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316), it sets a reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is a reach and ends the process (step S318).

Figure 234 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 234, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305). The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321) and whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S324).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a determines the type of jackpot by comparing the first pattern random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the jackpot pattern determination table shown in FIG. 233 (B), and determines the state when the variable control of the first special pattern corresponding to the determined type of jackpot (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) is stopped (step S322).

in particular,
1. A 15R sure-variable jackpot in which an opening and closing pattern is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) to close the first large winning opening 2006 after the first large winning opening 2006 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first large winning opening sensor 3002 detects that 10 game balls have won the first large winning opening 2006, thereby controlling to a 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 2006, and after the jackpot game state ends, the execution period of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is shortened from the normal state until the variable display of the special patterns is executed 77 times, and the state is controlled to a high probability time-saving state in which a lottery for a special lottery result is executed with a higher probability than normal. 2. a 5R time-saving jackpot in which the 5R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 2006 is controlled by repeating an opening/closing pattern five times (five rounds) after the first large winning opening 2006 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first large winning opening sensor 3002 detects that 10 game balls have entered the first large winning opening 2006, and the execution period of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is shortened from the normal period until the variable display of the special patterns is executed 77 times after the jackpot game state ends;
3. A 2R jackpot in which an opening and closing pattern is repeated twice (2 rounds) to close the first large winning opening 2006 after the first large winning opening 2006 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first large winning opening sensor 3002 detects that 10 game balls have won the first large winning opening 2006, and if the time-saving state is controlled before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the time-saving state is controlled to be terminated if a jackpot is not achieved within 77 times of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the jackpot game state ends, and if the time-saving state is controlled before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the time-saving state is controlled to be normal after the jackpot game state ends,
The winner will be determined from one of the three types of jackpots.

In addition, if the jackpot flag is set in the second special symbol stopping symbol setting process, the type of jackpot is determined by comparing the second symbol random number read in the second special symbol normal process with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 233 (B), and the mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the second special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot (the stopping symbol of the second special symbol) is determined.

in particular,
1. A 15R sure-variable jackpot in which an opening and closing pattern is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) to close the first large winning opening 2006 after the first large winning opening 2006 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first large winning opening sensor 3002 detects that 10 game balls have won the first large winning opening 2006, thereby controlling to a 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 2006, and after the jackpot game state ends, the execution period of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is shortened from the normal state until the variable display of the special patterns is executed 77 times, and the state is controlled to a high probability time-saving state in which a lottery for a special lottery result is executed with a higher probability than normal. 2. a 5R time-saving jackpot in which the 5R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 2006 is controlled by repeating an opening/closing pattern five times (five rounds) after the first large winning opening 2006 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first large winning opening sensor 3002 detects that 10 game balls have entered the first large winning opening 2006, and the execution period of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is shortened from the normal period until the variable display of the special patterns is executed 77 times after the jackpot game state ends;
3. A 2R jackpot in which an opening and closing pattern is repeated twice (2 rounds) to close the first large winning opening 2006 after the first large winning opening 2006 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first large winning opening sensor 3002 detects that 10 game balls have won the first large winning opening 2006, and if the time-saving state is controlled before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the time-saving state is controlled to be terminated if a jackpot is not achieved within 77 times of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the jackpot game state ends, and if the time-saving state is controlled before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the time-saving state is controlled to be normal after the jackpot game state ends,
The winner will be determined from one of the three types of jackpots.

The jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number is assigned 8 judgment values in the case of a 15R sure jackpot, 100 judgment values in the case of a 5R time-limited jackpot, and 92 judgment values in the case of a 2R jackpot. In other words, when a lottery result based on the first special random number results in a jackpot, there is a 4% probability of a 15R jackpot, a 50% probability of a 5R jackpot, and a 46% probability of a 2R jackpot. Similarly, the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number is assigned 92 judgment values in the case of a 15R sure jackpot, a 100 judgment value in the case of a 5R time-limited jackpot, and 8 judgment values in the case of a 2R jackpot. That is, if a lottery result based on the second special random number indicates a jackpot, there is a 46% chance of a 15R jackpot, a 50% chance of a 5R jackpot, and a 4% chance of a 2R jackpot. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is configured so that the jackpot symbol determination table compared to the second symbol random number has a higher probability of determining a 15R jackpot than the jackpot symbol determination table compared to the first symbol random number, and the player is in a more favorable state when the second special symbol variable display based on the start winning entry into the second start opening 2005 is executed than when the first special symbol variable display based on the start winning entry into the first lower start opening 2003 or the first upper start opening 2004 is executed.

In addition, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stopping pattern according to the type of jackpot is determined as the manner in which the first special pattern stops. Specifically, if a 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern, if a 5R jackpot is determined, the 5R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern, and if a 15R jackpot is determined, the 15R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern.

In addition, if the big win flag is not set in step S131, but the small win flag is set (step S324), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of small win by comparing the first pattern random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the small win pattern determination table shown in Figure 233 (C), and determines the state when the variable control of the first special pattern corresponding to the determined type of big win is stopped (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) (step S325).

in particular,
1. The opening and closing pattern for opening the second large winning opening 2007 for a short time (e.g., 80 ms) and then closing it is executed twice to control the state to a small winning game state in which a game ball can (easily) enter the second large winning opening 2007, and when the game ball received in the second large winning opening 2007 is distributed to the V winning opening 2008 and detected by the V winning opening sensor 2603, the first large winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (e.g., 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls have entered the first large winning opening 2006, 2. A first small win, which controls the game state to a 15R big win state in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the first large winning opening 2006 by repeating an opening and closing pattern 14 times when detected by the first large winning opening sensor 3002, and after the big win game state ends, the execution period of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is shortened more than usual until the variable display of the special patterns has been executed 77 times, and controls the game state to a high probability time-saving state in which the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. An opening/closing pattern is executed twice to close the second large prize opening 2007 after opening it for a short time (e.g., 80 ms), thereby controlling the state to a small win game state in which a game ball can (easily) enter the second large prize opening 2007, and an opening/closing pattern is executed twice to close the first large prize opening 2006 after opening it for a long time (e.g., 29 seconds) or when the first large prize opening sensor 3002 detects that 10 game balls have entered the first large prize opening 2006 when the game ball received in the second large prize opening 2007 is distributed to the V prize opening 2008 and detected by the V prize opening sensor 2603. By repeating this 14 times, the game state is controlled to a 15R jackpot game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the first large winning hole 2006, and if the game state was controlled to a time-saving state before the start of the 15R jackpot game state, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state which is ended if a jackpot is not achieved before the varying display of special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is executed 77 times after the jackpot game state ends, and if the game state was controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the 15R jackpot game state, the game state is controlled to a normal state after the jackpot game state ends, and one of the two types of small wins is determined to be a second small win.

The small win pattern determination table compared to the first pattern random number has 200 judgment values allocated to it in the case of a first small win. In other words, if a lottery result based on the first special random number results in a small win, there is a 100% chance of a first small win, and no chance of a second small win. On the other hand, the small win pattern determination table compared to the second pattern random number has 20 judgment values allocated to it in the case of a first small win, and 180 judgment values allocated to it in the case of a second small win. In other words, if a lottery result based on the second special random number results in a small win, there is a 10% chance of a first small win, and a 90% chance of a second small win.

In addition, when the type of small win is determined, the stop pattern corresponding to the type of small win is determined as the state of the first special pattern when it stops. Specifically, if the first small win is determined, the first small win pattern is determined as the small win pattern, and if the second small win is determined, the second small win pattern is determined as the small win pattern.

If neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the symbol to be a losing symbol (step S327). After the determination process for the stop symbol has been performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a judgment result notification command corresponding to each lottery result so that the lottery result (indicating the type of big win, small win, reach miss, or miss (which may also indicate the form of the stopped symbol of the first special symbol)) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as the process of step S328. Then, as the process of step S329, the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282), and this process ends.

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the performance display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and change pattern command (changingly displaying the left, center, and right decorative patterns and displaying them stationary in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → center decorative pattern (note that the left, center, and right decorative patterns may also be displayed synchronously as the same pattern and displayed stationary at the same time)). Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines the mode (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern displayed on the performance display device 1600 when the fluctuation stops to be a small win pattern ("final battle") if a small win or 2R jackpot is identified from the received judgment result notification command, a 5R time-limited jackpot pattern (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are the same even number pattern of "0" to "9") if a 5R time-limited jackpot is identified, and a 15R time-limited jackpot pattern (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are the same odd number pattern of "0" to "9") if a 15R special jackpot is identified. In addition, if a reach miss is identified, a miss pattern with a reach (a combination of the same left and right decorative patterns from "0" to "9" but with a different center decorative pattern; a reach miss pattern) is determined, and if a miss is identified, a miss pattern without a reach (a combination of the left, center, and right decorative patterns in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different) is determined, and the display of the determined stop pattern is controlled on the performance display device 1600 when the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (when the game performance ends).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the time-saving state can be controlled after the jackpot game state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed up to 77 times, but the time-saving state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of jackpots after the transition to the time-saving state is controlled. Specifically, if the time-saving state is controlled after the jackpot game state and a predetermined number of jackpots (for example, two) occur thereafter, the state may be controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the predetermined number of jackpot game states. Also, even if the number of jackpots that occur is less than the predetermined number, the state may be controlled to the non-time-saving state during the jackpot game state, and the time-saving state may be controlled again after the jackpot game state.

Figure 235 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 235, if the big win flag is set (step S341), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for the big win type determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S342); if the small win flag is set (step S343), the main control MPU 1310a selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for the small win type determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S344); if the reach flag is set (step S345), the main control MPU 1310a selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for the reach (step S346); if neither the big win flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, if it is a normal miss (a miss that does not execute the reach performance), the main control MPU 1310a selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for the miss (step S347).

Then, the selected variation pattern table is compared with the variation random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol to determine the variation pattern to be executed (step S348), and a variation pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the determined variation pattern is to be started, to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the performance control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 for the variation time thus determined.

In this example, multiple types of variation pattern tables are provided for each judgment result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the pattern random number (first pattern random number, second pattern random number). In addition, multiple variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variable display control of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) is stored in a form associated with the variable random number, respectively, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a compares the selected variation pattern table among multiple types of variation pattern tables according to the judgment result based on the special random number and the pattern random number with the variable random number read in step S302 of the first special pattern normal processing, and obtains the variation time information associated with the read variable random number from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). As a result, a lottery process is performed for the variation pattern of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, in this example, the variable pattern table during a reach is set to determine the type of reach performance to be executed by comparing a judgment value indicating which reach performance to execute with a variable random number. For example, among the reach performances, the super reach performance has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the normal reach performance, and when the super reach performance is executed, the player's expectation of a jackpot game state increases.

When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, the next step S351 is to determine whether the counter value of the time-saving counter, which sets the number of times the time-saving state continues, is "0". If the counter value is not "0", the time-saving counter is counted down (step S352), and then it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous time-saving counter is "0" (step S353). If the counter value is "0", a time-saving end flag is set (step S354) to indicate that the control of the time-saving state (time-saving control) is to be ended.

If the process in step S351 determines that the time-saving counter has a value of "0," or if the process in step S353 determines that the time-saving counter is not "0," the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol change process (step S283), the process ends.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table when a loss occurs, the fluctuation time information of the special pattern, which is set to about 1 second in the time-saving state, is associated with the special pattern random numbers (first special pattern, second special pattern), while the fluctuation time information of the special pattern, which is set to about 12 seconds in the non-time-saving state, is associated with the special pattern random numbers (first special pattern, second special pattern), so that the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern is set. In other words, the fluctuation pattern when a loss occurs selected in the time-saving state has the fluctuation time information of the special pattern set so that the time required for the fluctuation display control of the special pattern is extremely short compared to the fluctuation pattern when a loss occurs selected in the non-time-saving state.

Figure 236 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern change process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol fluctuation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 236, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process for the fluctuation pattern (step S282) is set as the process of step S371. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery-selected fluctuation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol stop process (step S284), this process ends.

Figure 237 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern stopping process (step S284).

When the first special pattern process flag indicates that the first special pattern stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 237, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs display control to display the stop pattern determined in the first special pattern stop pattern setting process on the first special pattern display of the functional display unit 1400 as the process of step S381, and sets a stop display command to instruct the performance display device 1600 to derive and display the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the first special pattern as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time-saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time-saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time-saving flag (step S385). This ends the time-saving control (control of the time-saving state) and starts non-time-saving control (control of the normal state) when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) has been performed a predetermined number of times (77 times in this example).

When the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is to start (step S387), and sets the waiting time until the start of the jackpot game (the time to display the jackpot game start, etc.) in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process is also executed to set the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot in a jackpot counter indicating the remaining number of rounds. The jackpot counter is decremented by one for each round executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot counter becomes "0", the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the specified number of rounds has been executed and controls to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot control process described below, the pre-opening process (step S401) and the during-opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the jackpot count counter reaches "0", and when the round ends in the during-opening process (step S402), the jackpot count counter is decremented by 1 and, based on the jackpot count reaching "0", the process moves to the post-opening process (step S403) to end the jackpot game.

Then, a jackpot execution flag is set to indicate that a jackpot game is being executed (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R sure-win jackpot start command, 5R time-limited jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R sure-win jackpot, 5R time-limited jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. As a result, the performance of the jackpot game corresponding to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the performance display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers, etc. Similarly, the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process also sets a jackpot start command (15R special jackpot start command, 5R time-limited jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) according to the type of jackpot (15R special jackpot, 5R time-limited jackpot, 2R jackpot).

In addition, the jackpot in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, is reset when the jackpot game ends, specifically when the opening and closing control of the first large prize opening 2006 according to the type of jackpot in the post-opening large prize opening process (step S403) of the jackpot control process (step S235A) has ended (for all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game) (for example, opening and closing control that repeats an opening and closing pattern two, five, or fifteen times to close the first large prize opening 2006 after the first large prize opening 2006 has been opened for a long period of time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first large prize opening sensor 3002 detects that ten game balls have entered the first large prize opening 2006). By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S235A) is prevented from being executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric device control process (step S114), while the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

Also, when the big win flag is not set (step S386), if the small win flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a small win start command indicating that a small win game is to be started (step S391), and sets the waiting time until the start of the small win game (the time to display the fact that a small win game is to be started, etc.) in the interval timer (step S392). Then, a small win execution flag indicating that a small win game is being executed is set (step S393). The small win start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of small win. In step S391, a small win start command (first small win start command, second small win start command) according to the type of small win (first small win, second small win) is set. As a result, the presentation of the small win game according to the type of small win specified by the small win start command is executed by the presentation display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, a small win start command (first small win start command, second small win start command) according to the type of small win (first small win, second small win) is set.

The small win in progress flag, which indicates that a small win game is being played, is reset when the small win game ends, specifically when the opening and closing control of the second large winning opening 2007 according to the type of small win is completed in the small win in progress process (step S411) of the small win control process (step S236A) described later (for example, the opening and closing control in which the second large winning opening 2007 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is repeated twice). By resetting the small win in progress flag, the small win control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric role control process (step S114), while the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are made executable.

In addition, if the small win flag is not set, i.e., if a miss occurs, the waiting time until the next variable display of the special symbol begins (the time during which the static special symbol is displayed) is set in the interval timer (step S394), and the process proceeds to step S395.

When the processing of steps S386 to S394 is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 ends this processing when it updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the initial value of the first special symbol normal processing (step S395).

Figure 238 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three processes is selectively executed depending on the jackpot process flag.

1. A pre-opening process (step S401) for waiting until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the game will move to the jackpot game state based on the fact that the state of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the variable display stops has become a jackpot symbol, or until the next round starts.
2. A process (step S402) during which the first large prize opening 2006 is controlled to be open based on the state of the special symbol when the variable display stops becoming a big win symbol, or the first large prize opening 2006 is controlled to be open based on the start of the next round, and the first large prize opening 2006 is closed after being opened for a long time (e.g., 29 seconds) or when the first large prize opening sensor 3002 detects that 10 game balls have entered the first large prize opening 2006.
3. A post-opening process of waiting until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot game state has ended when all rounds have ended (step S403).

The jackpot process flag is manipulated in the processing of step S42 to indicate that the pre-opening process (step S401) should be performed. In addition, in the processing during opening of the jackpot opening (step S402), at the start of a round in which the first jackpot opening 2006 is controlled to be open, a jackpot round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and at the end of a round in which the first jackpot opening 2006 is controlled to be closed, a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game presentation corresponding to the number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is executed by the presentation display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc.

[Changes in preview effects depending on button operation timing]
In this embodiment, the operation valid period during which operations can be received on the effect operation unit 301 is divided into a first half effective period corresponding to a first half that is a period before a specific timing, and a second half effective period corresponding to a second half that is a period after a specific timing, and a preview effect is set for each valid period, which is executed when the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Then, depending on whether the player operates the effect operation unit 301 during the first half effective period or the second half effective period during the operation valid period, a button effect (operation effect) with a different preview effect is executed.

In this example, the above-mentioned button effect (operation effect) can be executed when the display of the changing patterns starts. In addition, while the button effect is being executed, the effect display device 1600 displays an image indicating the operation valid period and the specific timing. This makes it possible to recognize whether, while the button effect is being executed, the first half valid period, which corresponds to the first half, which is the period before the specific timing, is being executed, or the second half valid period, which corresponds to the second half, which is the period after the specific timing. The operation valid period is set to 3 seconds, and the first half valid period and the second half valid period are each set to 1.5 seconds, so that the operation valid period is divided evenly.

Also, in this example, before the button performance begins, it is determined which of the preview performances belonging to the first preview performance group will be executed as the preview performance corresponding to the first half valid period. If the player operates the performance operation unit 301 during the execution of the first half valid period, the preview performance that has already been determined is executed. Also, during the execution of the button performance, the performance display device 1600 may display an image suggesting the preview performance that will be executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated as the preview performance corresponding to the first half valid period, or may display an image indicating that the preview performance that will be executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated is unknown without displaying an image suggesting the preview performance that will be executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated. In other words, if an image is displayed that suggests the preview performance that will be performed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated, it is possible to grasp the preview performance that will be performed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated, regardless of whether or not the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half effective period, whereas if an image is not displayed that suggests the preview performance that will be performed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated, it is impossible to grasp the preview performance that will be performed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated unless the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half effective period.

On the other hand, before the button performance begins, it is determined which of the preview performances belonging to the second preview performance group, which is a different group from the first preview performance group, will be executed as the preview performance corresponding to the latter half valid period. If the player operates the performance operation unit 301 during the execution of the latter half valid period, the preview performance that has already been determined is executed. Also, during the execution of the button performance, the performance display device 1600 may display an image suggesting the preview performance to be executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated as the preview performance corresponding to the latter half valid period, or may display an image indicating that the preview performance to be executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated is unknown without displaying an image suggesting the preview performance to be executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated. In other words, if an image is displayed that suggests the preview performance that will be performed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated, it is possible to grasp the preview performance that will be performed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated, regardless of whether or not the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the latter half effective period, whereas if an image is not displayed that suggests the preview performance that will be performed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated, it is impossible to grasp the preview performance that will be performed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated unless the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the latter half effective period.

In the above, the preview performance belonging to the first preview performance group, which is the preview performance corresponding to the first half effective period, and the preview performance belonging to the second preview performance group, which is the preview performance corresponding to the second half effective period, are set to be different. In other words, the preview performance to be executed differs depending on whether the player operates the performance operation unit 301 during the operation effective period, the first half effective period, or the second half effective period. As a result, during the execution of the button performance, the player only needs to operate the performance operation unit 301 at the operation timing that executes the preview performance he/she desires, between the preview performance belonging to the first preview performance group, which is the preview performance corresponding to the first half effective period, and the preview performance belonging to the second preview performance group, which is the preview performance corresponding to the second half effective period, and by being able to select the preview performance to be executed after the button performance, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Also, as described above, during the execution of a button performance, the performance display device 1600 may not display an image suggesting a preview performance to be executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half valid period, but may display an image indicating that the preview performance is unknown. Similarly, during the execution of a button performance, the performance display device 1600 may not display an image suggesting a preview performance to be executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the second half valid period, but may display an image indicating that the preview performance is unknown. In this way, when an image indicating that the preview performance to be executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated is displayed, it is not known what preview performance will be executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated, and there is a possibility that the preview performance desired by the player will be executed, and the player may participate in a button performance requiring the operation of the performance operation unit 301 with anticipation. In particular, when one of the preview effects corresponding to the first half valid period and the preview effect corresponding to the second half valid period is clear and the other preview effect is unknown, the player can be given the choice of selecting and executing the clear preview effect or selecting and executing the unknown preview effect that may possibly be the preview effect desired by the player, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

Figure 239 is a flowchart showing an example of a button effect execution process. First, the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges whether it is time to start the variable display of the pattern (decorative pattern) (step S2101). Then, if it is judged that it is time to start the variable display of the pattern (decorative pattern), it makes an execution judgment as to whether to execute a button effect (step S2102). Furthermore, if a button effect is to be executed, the state of the button in the instruction image that instructs the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is also determined.

Figure 240 (A) is a table showing an example of a button performance judgment pattern. Button performance judgment patterns 0 to 2 are set in the button performance judgment pattern table. In the above-mentioned step S2102, a random number for button performance judgment is used based on whether the result of the variable display of the pattern is a hit or a miss, and one of the button performance judgment patterns 0 to 2 set in the button performance judgment pattern table is determined.

Button performance determination pattern 0 is a pattern in which no button performance is performed. Button performance determination pattern 1 is a pattern in which a button performance is performed and the button appearance in the instruction image that instructs the operation of the performance operation unit 301 is displayed in a normal appearance. Button performance determination pattern 2 is a pattern in which a button performance is performed and the button appearance in the instruction image that instructs the operation of the performance operation unit 301 is displayed in a red appearance that is different from the normal appearance.

In this example, when determining the button performance judgment pattern, button performance judgment patterns 1 and 2 are determined to have a higher expectation of a hit than button performance judgment pattern 0. In other words, when a button performance is executed, the expectation of a hit is higher than when a button performance is not executed, and players can participate in the button performance with high expectations. Also, among button performance judgment patterns 1 and 2, button performance judgment pattern 2 is determined to have a higher expectation of a hit than button performance judgment pattern 1. In other words, when a button performance is executed, if the button appears in a red state, the expectation of a hit is higher than when the button appears in a normal state, and players can participate in the button performance with high expectations.

Next, in the button performance execution process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a decision has been made to execute a button performance in the execution decision as to whether or not to execute a button performance (step S2103). If it is determined that a decision has been made to execute a button performance, the content of the button performance is determined (step S2104). As the content of the button performance, it is determined whether or not to divide the operation effective period during which operations on the performance operation unit 301 can be accepted into a first half effective period and a second half effective period, and if the operation effective period is divided into a first half effective period and a second half effective period, it is also determined whether or not to display preview performances corresponding to each effective period (preview performances executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated) and images suggesting these preview performances.

Figure 240 (B) is a table showing an example of a button effect execution pattern. Button effect determination patterns 1 to 10 are set in the button effect execution pattern table. In the above-mentioned step S2104, when the button is displayed in the normal mode, a random number for button effect execution is used based on whether the result of the variable display of the pattern is a hit or a miss, and one of the button effect execution patterns 1 to 10 set in the button effect execution pattern table is determined. Also, when the button is displayed in the red mode, a random number for button effect execution is used based on whether the result of the variable display of the pattern is a hit or a miss, and one of the button effect execution patterns 2 to 10 set in the button effect execution pattern table is determined.

Button performance execution pattern 1 is a pattern in which the operation valid period during which operations can be received on the performance operation unit 301 is not divided into a first half effective period and a second half effective period, but is a single valid period. In addition, in button performance execution pattern 1, a preview performance A is set as the preview performance corresponding to the operation valid period (a preview performance executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated), and the performance display device 1600 displays "Preview A" as an image suggesting that the preview performance corresponding to the operation valid period is preview performance A.

Button performance execution patterns 2 to 10 are patterns that divide the operation valid period during which operations on the performance operation unit 301 can be accepted into a first half valid period and a second half valid period. In addition, in button performance execution patterns 2 to 10, a preview performance belonging to the first preview performance group, preview performance A, is set as the preview performance corresponding to the first half valid period (preview performance executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half valid period). Of these, button performance execution patterns 2 to 6 are patterns that display "Preview???" on the performance display device 1600 as an image indicating that the preview performance corresponding to the first half valid period is unknown (an image that does not suggest preview performance A). On the other hand, button performance execution patterns 7 to 10 are patterns that display "Preview A" on the performance display device 1600 as an image suggesting that the preview performance corresponding to the first half valid period is preview performance A.

In addition, for button performance execution patterns 2 to 4, preview performances B, C, and D, which are preview performances belonging to the second preview performance group, are set as preview performances corresponding to the second half effective period (preview performances executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated during execution of the second half effective period). And, for button performance execution patterns 2 to 4, the performance display device 1600 is set to display "Preview???" as an image indicating that the preview performance corresponding to the second half effective period is unknown (an image that does not suggest preview performance B, C, or D). In other words, for button performance execution patterns 2 to 4, both the preview performance corresponding to the first half effective period and the preview performance corresponding to the second half effective period are displayed so that they are both unknown.

In addition, in button performance execution patterns 5 and 6, preview performances C and D, which are preview performances belonging to the second preview performance group, are set as preview performances corresponding to the second half effective period (preview performances executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated during execution of the second half effective period). In addition, in button performance execution patterns 5 and 6, "preview C" and "preview D" are displayed on the performance display device 1600 as images suggesting that the preview performance corresponding to the first half effective period is preview performance C or preview performance D. In other words, in button performance execution patterns 5 and 6, of the preview performance corresponding to the first half effective period and the preview performance corresponding to the second half effective period, the preview performance corresponding to the first half effective period is unclear, but the preview performance corresponding to the second half effective period is displayed so that it is clear.

In addition, in button performance execution patterns 7 and 8, preview performances C and D, which are preview performances belonging to the second preview performance group, are set as preview performances corresponding to the second half effective period (preview performances executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated during execution of the second half effective period). In addition, in button performance execution patterns 7 and 8, the performance display device 1600 displays "Preview???" as an image indicating that the preview performance corresponding to the second half effective period is unknown (an image that does not suggest preview performance C or preview performance D). In other words, for button performance execution patterns 7 and 8, of the preview performance corresponding to the first half effective period and the preview performance corresponding to the second half effective period, the preview performance corresponding to the first half effective period is made clear, but the preview performance corresponding to the second half effective period is displayed so that it is unknown.

In addition, in button performance execution patterns 9 and 10, preview performances belonging to the second preview performance group, preview performances C and D, are set as preview performances corresponding to the second half effective period (preview performances executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated during execution of the second half effective period). In addition, in button performance execution patterns 9 and 10, "preview C" and "preview D" are displayed on the performance display device 1600 as images suggesting that the preview performance corresponding to the first half effective period is preview performance C or preview performance D. In other words, in button performance execution patterns 9 and 10, the preview performance corresponding to the first half effective period and the preview performance corresponding to the second half effective period are displayed so that both are clearly visible.

In this example, when determining the button performance execution pattern, if the button is displayed in a normal state, one of button performance execution patterns 1 to 10 is determined, whereas if the button is displayed in a red state, button performance execution pattern 1 is not determined, and one of button performance execution patterns 2 to 10 is determined. As described above in detail, when the button performance is executed, if the button appears in a red state, the expectation of a hit is higher than when the button appears in a normal state. For this reason, when the operation valid period is divided into a first half effective period and a second half effective period when executing the button performance (button performance execution patterns 2 to 10), the expectation of a hit is higher than when the operation valid period is not divided into a first half effective period and a second half effective period (button performance execution pattern 1), and the player can participate in the button performance with high expectations.

In addition, in this example, when determining the button performance execution pattern, the button performance execution patterns 2 to 4, 5 to 8, and 9 and 10 are determined in this order so that the expectation of a hit increases. In other words, since the button performance execution patterns 5 and 6 are determined to have a higher expectation of a hit than the button performance execution patterns 2 to 4, when the performance display device 1600 displays an image suggesting a preview performance corresponding to the first half effective period, the expectation of a hit is higher than when an image suggesting a preview performance corresponding to the first half effective period is not displayed (when an image indicating that the preview performance corresponding to the first half effective period is unknown is displayed). Similarly, since the button performance execution patterns 7 and 8 are determined to have a higher expectation of a hit than the button performance execution patterns 2 to 4, when the performance display device 1600 displays an image suggesting a preview performance corresponding to the second half effective period, the expectation of a hit is higher than when an image suggesting a preview performance corresponding to the second half effective period is not displayed (when an image indicating that the preview performance corresponding to the second half effective period is unknown is displayed). Because of this, when executing the button performance, the more pre-announcement performances that are clear between the pre-announcement performances that correspond to the first half effective period and the pre-announcement performances that correspond to the second half effective period, the higher the expectation of a win will be, and the player will be able to participate in the button performance with anticipation.

Next, in the button performance execution process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC executes the button performance based on the button performance content determined in step S2102 or step S2104 (step S2105). Then, if the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the operation valid period after the button performance starts (step S2106), a preview performance corresponding to the operation valid period at the time when the performance operation unit 301 is operated (if the operation valid period is divided, either the first half effective period or the second half effective period) is executed (step S2107).

In this example, when the operation valid period is divided into a first half valid period and a second half valid period (button effect execution patterns 2 to 10), if the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half valid period, a preview performance corresponding to the first half valid period is executed, and if the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the second half valid period, a preview performance corresponding to the second half valid period is executed. Also, if the performance operation unit 301 is not operated during the execution of either the first half valid period or the second half valid period, neither the preview performance corresponding to the first half valid period nor the preview performance corresponding to the second half valid period is executed.

In addition, in the button performance execution pattern 2, a preview performance B is set as a preview performance corresponding to the latter half effective period (a preview performance executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the latter half effective period), but a specific performance is executed after the preview performance B is executed. In other words, the preview performance B is executed as a performance that suggests that a specific performance will be executed. In addition, the specific performance is a performance set in the variation pattern, and the button performance execution pattern 2 in which the preview performance B is set can be determined only when the variation pattern in which the specific performance is set is executed. In addition, since the specific performance is a performance set in the variation pattern, when the button performance based on the button performance execution pattern 2 is executed, if the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the latter half effective period, the preview performance B is executed and the specific performance is executed, whereas if the performance operation unit 301 is not operated during the execution of the latter half effective period, the preview performance B is not executed but the specific performance is executed.

Figure 241 shows a specific example of a button effect when it is executed. Here, the case where a button effect based on button effect execution pattern 5 is executed is explained below.

As shown in FIG. 241(A), when the display of the decorative pattern changes starts in the performance display device 1600, the button performance starts immediately thereafter (FIG. 241(B)). While the button performance is being executed, an instruction image instructing the operation of the performance operation unit 301 is displayed near the center of the performance display device 1600, and a valid period bar, which is an image indicating the operation valid period during which operations can be accepted for the performance operation unit 301, is displayed slightly below the center of the performance display device 1600. In addition, a dividing line is displayed inside the valid period bar to indicate the specific timing for dividing the operation valid period into a first half valid period and a second half valid period, and the left side of the dividing line inside the valid period bar indicates the first half valid period, and the right side of the dividing line inside the valid period bar indicates the second half valid period.

In addition, in the area showing the first half valid period and the area showing the second half valid period inside the valid period bar, an image showing the preview performance executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated is displayed in front of the filled area showing the remaining period of the operation valid period. Specifically, in the area showing the first half valid period inside the valid period bar, "Preview???" is displayed as an image showing that the preview performance corresponding to the first half valid period (preview performance executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half valid period) is unknown (an image that does not suggest preview performance A), and in the area showing the second half valid period inside the valid period bar, "Preview C" is displayed as an image showing that the preview performance corresponding to the second half valid period (preview performance executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the second half valid period) is preview performance C. Then, as time passes after the start of the button performance, the filled area showing the remaining period of the operation valid period inside the valid period bar decreases from the left side to the right side.

As shown in FIG. 241(C), when the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half effective period, the preview performance A is determined as the preview performance corresponding to the first half effective period, and the preview performance A is executed, so that it is possible to know that the unknown preview performance is the preview performance A (FIG. 241(D)). Also, as shown in FIG. 241(E), when the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the second half effective period, the preview performance C is determined as the preview performance corresponding to the second half effective period, and the preview performance C is executed (FIG. 241(F)). Also, as shown in FIG. 241(G), when the performance operation unit 301 is not operated during the execution of either the first half effective period or the second half effective period until the operation effective period has elapsed, neither the preview performance A as the preview performance corresponding to the first half effective period nor the preview performance C as the preview performance corresponding to the second half effective period is executed.

In this example, if the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half effective period, or if the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the second half effective period, the button performance being executed is terminated, and immediately thereafter, a preview performance corresponding to the operation effective period (either the first half effective period or the second half effective period) at the timing when the performance operation unit 301 was operated is executed. However, if the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half effective period, or if the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the second half effective period, it is also possible to wait for the operation effective period of the button performance to elapse, and then execute a preview performance corresponding to the operation effective period (either the first half effective period or the second half effective period) at the timing when the performance operation unit 301 was operated. Also, during the changing display of the pattern that executed the button effect, it is sufficient that a preview effect corresponding to the operation valid period (either the first half valid period or the second half valid period) at the timing when the effect operation unit 301 was operated is executed. For example, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the effect operation unit 301 was operated during the execution of the first half valid period or the second half valid period, a preview effect corresponding to the operation valid period (either the first half valid period or the second half valid period) at the timing when the effect operation unit 301 was operated may be executed.

In this example, the effective operation period is set to 3 seconds, and the first half effective period and the second half effective period are each set to 1.5 seconds, so that the effective operation period is divided evenly, but this is not limited to the above. The ratio of the first half effective period to the second half effective period in the effective operation period may be unequal, and the first half effective period and the second half effective period may be divided differently. For example, the first half effective period may be shorter than the second half effective period in the effective operation period, and a preview performance with a high expectation of winning may be set as the preview performance corresponding to the first half effective period (the preview performance executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half effective period). In such a case, even if it is difficult to operate the performance operation unit 301 during the execution of the first half effective period, it is possible to generate an incentive to operate the performance operation unit 301 during the execution of the first half effective period.

In this example, as an image displayed on the performance display device 1600, an image showing a preview performance executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated is displayed inside the valid period bar and on the front side of the filled area showing the remaining period of the operation valid period, so that it can always be seen regardless of whether the filled area showing the remaining period of the operation valid period is reduced. In contrast, an image showing a preview performance executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated is displayed inside the valid period bar and on the rear side of the filled area showing the remaining period of the operation valid period, so that it cannot be seen in a blindfolded state when the filled area showing the remaining period of the operation valid period is not reduced, and it can be gradually seen as the filled area showing the remaining period of the operation valid period is reduced. With such a configuration, as time passes after the start of the button performance, the filled area showing the remaining period of the operation valid period inside the valid period bar decreases, and the image showing the preview performance executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated gradually becomes clear, so that the user can pay attention with anticipation to what kind of preview performance will be revealed. In addition, the player can be given the choice of operating the performance operation unit 301 before the image showing the preview performance that will be executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated becomes clear, or operating the performance operation unit 301 after the image showing the preview performance that will be executed when the performance operation unit 301 is operated becomes clear, which can prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

[Execution of crazy effects and mute effects triggered by reserved winning]
In this embodiment, when a game ball B enters the first lower starting port 2003, the first upper starting port 2004, or the second starting port 2005, in the above-mentioned performance pre-determination process, based on the obtained special random number, reach random number, pattern random number, and variable random number, pre-determination information such as whether or not the display result of the special pattern variable display will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether or not to execute a reach performance as a game performance executed by the performance display device 1600, and the type of mode (type of variable pattern) of the game performance to be executed is determined before the variable display corresponding to the start winning is started, and a command related to the pre-determination information is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can also grasp the pre-determination information.

In this example, when the type of game presentation (type of variation pattern) specified by the pre-determination information is a specific reach presentation, it is possible to execute a madness presentation as a presentation to surprise the player when a ball is scored that corresponds to the pre-determination information. In the madness presentation, a cut-in image of a character going mad is displayed, and a scream of the character "Kyaaa" is output in a situation where the presentation sounds such as background music that are output as the presentation progresses are muted. In other words, in the madness presentation, all presentation sounds other than the character's scream are muted. In this way, when a ball is scored that will result in the execution of a specific reach presentation, the madness presentation is suddenly executed separately from the presentation being executed, so that the player can be surprised and players who are watching the presentation being executed can be made aware that such a ball has been scored.

In addition, in this example, after the crazy effect is executed, the images displayed as the effect progresses remain normal, but a mute effect is executed in which all effect sounds, including effect sounds such as background music that are output as the effect progresses, are muted. In this way, when a ball is scored that will trigger a specific reach effect, the crazy effect is executed first to surprise the player, making the mute effect executed afterwards stand out, giving the player a sense of tension and anticipation. Also, even if the player does not realize that a ball has scored that will trigger a specific reach effect when the crazy effect is executed, the mute effect executed afterwards can make the player aware of the fact that such a ball has scored.

In addition, in this example, the mute effect after the execution of the crazy effect can be continued until the variable display of the patterns corresponding to the ball that will execute a specific reach effect starts. In other words, if there is already a reserve (memory of a special random number) at the time of the ball that will execute a specific reach effect, the variable display of the patterns corresponding to the reserve is executed, and then the variable display of the patterns corresponding to the ball that will execute a specific reach effect starts, so that the mute effect after the execution of the crazy effect can be continued across multiple variable display of the patterns. In this way, by allowing the mute effect to continue across multiple variable display of the patterns, the tension and anticipation given to the player can be maintained until the start of the variable display of the patterns corresponding to the ball that will execute a specific reach effect.

Conventionally, a pre-judgment performance based on pre-judgment information (so-called look-ahead performance) uses a hold display displayed on the performance display device 1600 by a start winning during the execution of the variable display of the pattern, and executes a hold change performance that suggests the expectation of a win by changing the state of the hold display during the period until the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the start winning is executed and the hold display is erased, and by executing several such pre-judgment performances in combination, the player's sense of expectation is heightened. In this respect, in this example, as a pre-judgment performance based on pre-judgment information (so-called look-ahead performance), even if a complex and lively performance is not executed as in the conventional pre-judgment performance, a frenzy performance and a mute performance after the frenzy performance are executed, which gives the player a sense of tension and expectation, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game.

Figure 242 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball entry crazy performance execution process. First, when a game ball B enters the first lower start port 2003, the first upper start port 2004, or the second start port 2005, a command related to pre-determination information is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a command related to pre-determination information (step S2201), it judges whether the mode type (type of variation pattern) of the game performance specified by the pre-determination information is a specific reach performance (step S2202). Then, when it is judged that the mode type (type of variation pattern) of the game performance specified by the pre-determination information is a specific reach performance, it judges whether the variation display of the pattern being executed is a normal variation (variation display of a pattern that is not a reach) and whether a pre-determination performance (so-called a look-ahead performance) based on pre-determination information earlier than the pre-determination information is being executed (step S2203). In addition, a specific reach effect corresponds to a reach effect with a high expectation of a hit (for example, a super reach effect) among multiple types of reach effects with different expectation of a hit.

In step S2203, when a ball is received that will cause a specific reach performance to be executed, if it is determined that the display of the symbols being executed is a normal display (a display of a symbol that will not result in a reach) and that a pre-judgment performance based on pre-judgment information prior to the pre-judgment information (so-called look-ahead performance) is not being executed, a frenzy performance and a mute performance are executed after the frenzy performance (step S2204). In other words, only when the display of the symbols being executed is a normal display (a display of a symbol that will not result in a reach) and a pre-judgment performance based on pre-judgment information (so-called look-ahead performance) is not being executed, a frenzy performance and a mute performance are executed after the frenzy performance are executed when a ball is received that will cause a specific reach performance to be executed. Here, in the frenzy performance, a cut-in image in which a character goes crazy is displayed for a predetermined period (2 seconds in this example), and the sound of the character screaming "Kyaa" is output in a situation where the performance sound such as BGM output as the performance progresses is muted. In other words, during the madness effect, all sound effects are muted except for the screams of the character. Also, during the muted sound effect after the madness effect is executed, the images displayed as the effect progresses remain normal, but all sound effects, including background music and other sound effects that are output as the effect progresses, are muted.

In this example, the condition for executing the crazy effect and the mute effect after the crazy effect is that when a ball is scored that will result in a specific reach effect, the display of the currently executing pattern is a normal change (a display of a pattern that does not result in a reach). For example, when the display of the currently executing pattern is a reach change (a display of a pattern that will result in a reach) and a reach effect is being executed, if a ball is scored that will result in a specific reach effect and the crazy effect or mute effect is executed, a situation will occur in which attention to the reach effect is hindered. In this regard, by setting the display of the currently executing pattern as a normal change (a display of a pattern that does not result in a reach), it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In this example, the condition for executing the crazy performance and the mute performance after the crazy performance is that the pre-judgment performance (so-called look-ahead performance) based on the pre-judgment information before the pre-judgment information is not being executed at the time of the ball entering which will execute a specific reach performance. In addition to the crazy performance and the mute performance, the pre-judgment performance (so-called look-ahead performance) can be performed by using the hold display displayed on the performance display device 1600 by the start winning during the execution of the variable display of the pattern, and by executing the variable display of the pattern according to the start winning and erasing the hold display, a hold change performance that suggests the expectation of a win by changing the state of the hold display can be executed. For this reason, for example, when a hold change performance is being executed as a pre-judgment performance (so-called look-ahead performance), if a ball enters which will execute a specific reach performance and the crazy performance or the mute performance is executed, a situation occurs in which attention to the hold change performance is hindered. In this regard, by setting the condition that the pre-judgment performance (so-called look-ahead performance) based on the pre-judgment information before the pre-judgment information is not being executed, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In this example, a cut-in image of a character going mad is displayed as a madness effect, and the sound of the character screaming "Kyaaa" is output in a state where the sound of the effect, such as background music, that is output as the effect progresses, is muted. The character's scream is the one that corresponds to the character appearing in the cut-in image. A number of different characters are prepared as characters that can appear in the cut-in image, and the cut-in image is set to display a character that corresponds to the stage currently being performed. A number of stages are prepared for each of the multiple types of characters, and the stage is switched every time several to several tens of changes are performed, and for example, the background image in which the character is involved is switched. In this way, a unified effect can be achieved in the madness effect by displaying the cut-in image and outputting the scream using a character that corresponds to the stage currently being performed.

Next, in the ball-entering crazy effect execution process, if, after the execution of the mute effect, the timing is either the start of the display of the changing patterns corresponding to the ball entering (on hold) which will result in the execution of a specific reach effect, or the elapse of a predetermined mute period after the ball entering (on hold) which will result in the execution of a specific reach effect, whichever is earlier (step S2105), the mute effect being executed is terminated and the background music and other effect sounds that are output as the effect progresses are output as normal (step S2106). This point will be described in more detail later.

Figure 243 is a time chart showing an example of when the crazy effect and the mute effect are executed. Here, we explain the case where there are already three reserved numbers (special random numbers stored) at the time when a ball is scored that will trigger a specific reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 243(A), when the display of the changing pattern in progress is a normal change (a display of a changing pattern that does not result in a reach) and a pre-determination performance based on pre-determination information (so-called pre-reading performance) is not being performed, when a ball is received that will result in a specific reach performance, a frenzy performance is performed for a predetermined period (in this example, 2 seconds), a cut-in image of a character going frenzy is displayed, and a scream sound of the character "Kyaa" is output in a situation where the performance sounds such as BGM that are output as the performance progresses are muted. In other words, in the frenzy performance, all performance sounds other than the character's scream sound are muted. In addition, the cut-in image is displayed using almost the entire display area of the performance display device 1600, in front of the display of the changing decorative pattern in progress and behind the display of the pending display. In this way, the cut-in image is displayed using almost the entire display area of the performance display device 1600, in front of the display of the changing decorative pattern in progress, making it easy to notice that the frenzy performance is being performed.

After the crazy effect is executed, a mute effect is executed, and the images displayed as the effect progresses are left as normal, but all effect sounds, including background music and other effect sounds output as the effect progresses, are muted. Then, after the mute effect starts, if the time comes to start the display of the changing patterns corresponding to the ball entering (on hold) that will result in the execution of a specific reach effect before the predetermined mute period has elapsed since the ball entering (on hold) that will result in the execution of a specific reach effect, the mute effect being executed is ended, and the effect sounds, such as background music, output as the effect progresses are output as normal.

In this example, since there are already three reserved (special random number memory) at the time of the ball entering which will execute a specific reach performance, the display of the pattern corresponding to the ball entering (reserved) which will execute the specific reach performance will start after executing the display of the pattern corresponding to the three reserved. In other words, the mute performance after the execution of the crazy performance can be continued across three display of the pattern, which is the number of reserved. In this way, by allowing the mute performance to continue across three display of the pattern, the tension and expectation given to the player can be sustained toward the start of the display of the pattern corresponding to the ball entering (reserved) which will execute the specific reach performance. In addition, at the start of the display of the pattern corresponding to the ball entering (reserved) which will execute the specific reach performance, the mute performance ends, and the performance sound such as BGM output as the performance progresses is output as usual, so that the tension given to the player can be released. Furthermore, the specific reach effect is a reach effect with a high expectation of a win (for example, a super reach effect) among multiple types of reach effects with different expectation of a win, and since the specific reach effect has a high probability of resulting in a win, the expectation given to the player can be particularly high during the execution of the crazy effect or the mute effect.

In addition, as pre-determination effects (so-called look-ahead effects), in addition to the crazy effects and mute effects, it is possible to execute the hold change effects mentioned above, but while the mute effect is being executed, the execution of other pre-determination effects (so-called look-ahead effects) such as the hold change effect is restricted. As a result, the tension given to the player continues while the mute effect is being executed, but by not executing other pre-determination effects (so-called look-ahead effects) such as the hold change effect, it is possible to prevent this tension from being interrupted.

Figure 244 is an explanatory diagram showing the light-emitting state of the door frame when the crazy performance and the mute performance are performed. The door frame 3 is equipped with a door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430, and each is made to be able to emit light in a predetermined color. Then, as shown in Figure 244 (A), during the performance of the crazy performance, the light-emitting part moves from the bottom of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430 to the top, and further toward the door frame top unit 450, and the light emission is controlled as if the light was gathered on the door frame top unit 450, and during the performance of the mute performance after the performance of the crazy performance, the door frame top unit 450 is made to maintain a lit state until the mute performance is completed (Figure 244 (B)). For this reason, while the mute effect is being performed, the player can maintain a sense of tension and anticipation until the start of the changing display of the patterns corresponding to the ball being scored (reserved) which will result in the execution of a specific reach effect.

In the above, the door frame top unit 450 is kept lit while the mute effect is being executed, but during the period when such a mute effect is being executed, the execution of other light-emitting effects using at least the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, and the door frame top unit 450 as effects unrelated to the mute effect (such as effects related to the changing display of patterns) is restricted. As a result, the sense of tension felt by the player continues while the mute effect is being executed, but by not executing other light-emitting effects unrelated to the mute effect, it is possible to prevent this tension from being interrupted.

As shown in FIG. 243(B), if a predetermined mute period has elapsed since the ball (on hold) that will result in the execution of a specific reach performance after the start of the mute performance, but before the display of the changing patterns corresponding to the ball (on hold) that will result in the execution of a specific reach performance begins, the mute performance being executed is terminated, and the performance sounds such as background music that are output as the performance progresses are output as normal. In other words, if a predetermined mute period has elapsed since the ball (on hold) that will result in the execution of a specific reach performance after the start of the mute performance, the performance sounds such as background music that are output as the performance progresses are output as normal until the display of the changing patterns corresponding to the ball (on hold) that will result in the execution of a specific reach performance begins.

The above-mentioned mute period is set on the assumption that, after the start of the mute performance, up to three times of pattern change display will be performed with normal change (display of pattern change that does not result in a reach) until the start of the pattern change display corresponding to the ball entering (reserved) that will execute a specific reach performance. In other words, the time for normal change is set to about 10 seconds, and the mute period is set to about 30 seconds. As a result, if the pattern change display is not normal (display of pattern change that does not result in a reach) but a reach performance (e.g., 30 to 360 seconds) is executed by reach change (display of pattern change that results in a reach) during the period after the start of the mute performance, for example, the mute performance being executed will end due to the passage of the mute period in the middle of the reach performance, and the performance sound such as BGM output as the performance progresses will be output as usual, so that the expectations from the performance sound of the reach performance can be enjoyed as usual. Also, if you do not set whether the mute period has elapsed, the mute effect may be executed for a long period of time, which may cause anxiety that the speaker may be damaged. However, by ending the mute effect when the mute period has elapsed, this situation can be prevented from occurring.

In this example, after the start of the mute performance, if a predetermined mute period has elapsed since the ball (on hold) that will execute a specific reach performance begins before the display of the changing patterns corresponding to the ball (on hold) that will execute a specific reach performance begins, the mute performance being executed is terminated, and the performance sounds such as BGM that are output as the performance progresses are output as normal. In contrast, while the mute performance is being executed, the door frame top unit 450 is configured to maintain a lit state, but even if the mute period has elapsed, the door frame top unit 450 does not end its lit state, and the door frame top unit 450 is configured to maintain its lit state until the display of the changing patterns corresponding to the ball (on hold) that will execute a specific reach performance begins. In this way, the door frame top unit 450 is maintained in a lit state regardless of whether the mute period has elapsed, so that even if the mute period has elapsed and the mute performance has ended, it is possible to know that the display of the changing patterns corresponding to the ball (on hold) that will execute a specific reach performance has not been executed.

The plate unit 200 in this example is provided with a volume adjustment button 227 that can be operated by the player. The volume adjustment operation using the volume adjustment button 227 allows the volume to be adjusted in stages for the sounds output from the various speakers (such as the main frame speaker 622). For example, the volume output from the various speakers can be adjusted from 1 (lowest volume) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (highest volume), and the higher the stage is when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated upward, the higher the volume output from the various speakers will be, and the lower the stage is when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated downward, the lower the volume output from the various speakers will be. In this example, the volume at the lowest stage (1) is zero, and all performance sounds are inaudible. In addition, the volume of the sounds output from the various speakers can be adjusted both during and during the change or non-change of the patterns. In this configuration, while a muted effect is being performed, the volume can be adjusted internally by operating the volume adjustment button 227, but all sound effects, including background music and other sound effects that are output as the effect progresses, remain muted.

In response to this, the device may be configured to restrict internal volume adjustments when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated while the mute effect is being performed. With this configuration, even if the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, the volume is not adjusted internally, allowing the user to notice that the mute effect is being performed.

In this example, all performance sounds, including the BGM and other performance sounds that are output as the performance progresses, are muted during the execution of the mute performance, but this is not limited to the above, and only some of the performance sounds may be muted. For example, while the mute performance is being executed, the performance sounds such as the BGM that are output as the performance progresses may be muted, whereas the ball entry sound that is output when the ball enters the first lower starting gate 2003, the first upper starting gate 2004, the second starting gate 2005, etc. may be output without being muted. With this configuration, even during the execution of the mute performance, it is possible to confirm that the ball has entered the first lower starting gate 2003, the first upper starting gate 2004, the second starting gate 2005, etc., by the ball entry sound. In addition, the operation sound that is output when the operation unit such as the volume control button 227 is operated may also be output without being muted. With this configuration, while the mute effect is being performed, the sound effects such as background music that are output as the effect progresses are not output, and even if the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, the sound of the effect does not change, but the fact that the volume adjustment button 227 has been operated can be confirmed by the operation sound.

[Execution of a scoring hint using luminous materials]
In this embodiment, depending on the type of winning, it is possible to control the time-saving state (advantageous game state) in which the execution period of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is shorter than usual until the variable display is executed 77 times after the end of the big win game state. In such a time-saving state, the normal lottery drawn by the passage of the game ball B through the gate 2002 is more likely to be a "normal win" than in the normal state (non-time-saving state), and the normal lottery becoming a "normal win" makes it easier for a large number of game balls B to enter the second start hole 2005. As a result, in the time-saving state, the second start hole 2005 is more likely to accept the game ball B than the first lower start hole 2003 or the first upper start hole 2004, so that the game ball B is accepted by the second start hole 2005, and a hitting operation (so-called "right hit") is performed with the game ball B aimed at the right side of the center device 2500.

In this example, a second starting hole decorative board 2671 is provided around the second starting hole 2005 of the attacca unit 2600, on whose upper surface a number of LEDs are mounted for illuminating and decorating the second starting hole 2005. In other words, the number of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the second starting hole decorative board 2671 are lit up, thereby illuminating and decorating the area around the second starting hole 2005. In the normal state (non-time-saving state), the number of LEDs provided around such a second starting hole 2005 work in conjunction with the LEDs of other decorative boards provided in the play area 5a, enabling integrated illumination and decoration throughout the entire play area 5a.

In this example, when game ball B enters the first lower starting hole 2003, the first upper starting hole 2004, or the second starting hole 2005, the above-mentioned pre-determination process determines, based on the acquired special random number, reach random number, pattern random number, and variable random number, whether the display result of the special pattern variable display is a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach performance as a game performance executed by the performance display device 1600, and the type of mode (type of variable pattern) of the game performance to be executed, before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning, and sends a command related to the pre-determination information from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can also grasp the pre-determination information.

In this example, when game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005 during control of the time-saving state, a suggestion effect is executed in which the light emission patterns of the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005 indicate the expected probability of whether or not a winning ball will be included in the changing pattern display that will show the result after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005. Such "changing pattern display that will show the result after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005" includes a changing pattern display that is being executed at the time of the ball entering the second starting hole 2005, a changing pattern display that has not been executed and that is already stored as reserved at the time of the ball entering the second starting hole 2005, and a changing pattern display that has not been executed and that will be stored as reserved at the time of the ball entering the second starting hole 2005. Whether or not the variable display of the pattern being executed at the time of the ball entering the second starting hole 2005 is a winning ball can be grasped from the winning/losing information based on the winning/losing command or the variable pattern command transmitted at the start of the variable display of the pattern, and whether or not the variable display of the unexecuted pattern already stored as reserved at the time of the ball entering the second starting hole 2005 or the variable display of the unexecuted pattern to be stored as reserved at the time of the ball entering the second starting hole 2005 is a winning ball can be grasped from the pre-determination information based on the command related to the pre-determination information transmitted at the time of the ball entering the second starting hole 2005. In this way, when the game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005 during the control of the time-saving state, by executing the suggestion performance using the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005, it is possible to grasp early on the possibility that the result of the variable display of the pattern shown after the ball entering the second starting hole 2005 will be a winning ball. In particular, if there is an unexecuted variable display of a pattern that has already been stored as reserved, when game ball B subsequently enters second starting hole 2005, a suggestive effect is executed using multiple LEDs provided around second starting hole 2005, making it possible to grasp early on the possibility that any of the unexecuted variable display of a pattern that has already been stored as reserved will be a winning display, without waiting for the variable display of the unexecuted pattern to be executed.

Regarding the above, if the upper limit of reserved balls has not been reached, when the game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005, it is stored as reserved, and a suggestive effect is enabled using a plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005, and the expectation of whether or not a winning ball will be included in the changing display of the pattern that will show the result after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005 is indicated. In other words, if the upper limit of reserved balls has not been reached, the suggestive effect is enabled by continuing the player's operation of the handle 195 so that the game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005, and it is possible to grasp early on the possibility that any of the changing displays of the unexecuted patterns that have already been stored as reserved balls will be a winning ball. Here, in the time-saving state, balls are likely to enter the second starting hole 2005, and the reserved balls are likely to reach the upper limit, and when the reserved balls are close to the upper limit, the balls B that are intended to enter the second starting hole 2005 are often stopped from being shot in so as not to exceed the upper limit of reserved balls. In this regard, in this example, even if the number of reserved balls is close to the upper limit, the player can continue to operate the handle 195 to enable the suggestive performance to be executed, so that the player can continue to shoot the game ball B into the second starting hole 2005, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when the upper limit of reserved balls has been reached, when game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005, although it is not stored as reserved, a suggestive effect can be executed using multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005, and the expectation of whether or not a winning ball will be included in the changing display of the patterns that will show the result after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005 is indicated. In other words, when the upper limit of reserved balls has been reached, the suggestive effect can be executed by continuing the player's operation of the handle 195 so that game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005, and it is possible to grasp early on the possibility that any of the changing displays of the patterns that have not yet been executed and that are already stored as reserved will be a winning ball. Here, in the time-saving state, it is easy for the ball to enter the second starting hole 2005, and the number of reserved balls is easy to reach the upper limit. When the upper limit is reached, even if more game balls B enter the second starting hole 2005, the display of the pattern due to the balls entering is not executed, so that the ball B is often stopped from being thrown into the second starting hole 2005. In this respect, in this example, even if the upper limit of reserved balls is reached, the player can continue to operate the handle 195 to enable the execution of the suggestive performance, so that the ball B can be continued to be thrown into the second starting hole 2005, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In this example, when the game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005 during the time-saving state control, the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005 is used to execute a suggestive effect that suggests the expectation of whether or not a winning pattern will be included in the changing display of the patterns that will be shown after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005. However, the suggestive effect may be configured to only suggest the expectation of whether or not the changing display of the unexecuted patterns that is already stored as reserved at the time of the ball entering the second starting hole 2005 will be a winning pattern. Even in this case, if there is a changing display of an unexecuted pattern that is already stored as reserved, the suggestive effect can be executed by continuing the player's operation of the handle 195 so that the game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005 thereafter, and it is possible to grasp early on the possibility that one of the changing displays of the unexecuted patterns will be a winning pattern without waiting for the changing display of the unexecuted patterns that is already stored as reserved to be executed.

In this example, when the game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005 during the time-saving state control, the light emission state of the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005 is used to execute a suggestive effect that suggests the expected probability of whether or not a winning ball will be included in the changing display of the patterns that will show the result after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005. However, it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to enable the execution of a suggestive effect when it is determined that the player is continuing to operate the handle 195 (detection by the handle touch sensor 192 or the handle rotation detection sensor 189). In this way, when there is a changing display of an unexecuted pattern that is already stored as reserved, if it is determined that the player is continuing to operate the handle 195, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect because there is an intention to have the ball enter the second starting hole 2005, and it is possible to grasp early on the possibility that one of the changing displays of the unexecuted patterns will be a winning ball, without waiting for the changing display of the unexecuted patterns that is already stored as reserved to be executed.

In addition, in this example, when game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005 while the time-saving state is being controlled, a suggestion effect is executed in which the light emission pattern of multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005 suggests the expected degree of whether or not a winning combination will be included in the changing display of the patterns that will show the result after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005; however, without being limited to this, a suggestion effect may be executed in which the light emission pattern of a specific light-emitting element suggests the expected degree of whether or not a winning combination will be included in the changing display of the patterns that will show the result after the ball enters the first lower starting hole 2003 or the first upper starting hole 2004 while the normal state (non-time-saving state) is being controlled. Even with this, if there is a variable display of an unexecuted pattern that has already been stored as reserved, by enabling the execution of a suggestive effect when the game ball B subsequently enters the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004, it is possible to grasp early on the possibility that any of the variable displays of the unexecuted patterns will be a hit without waiting for the variable display of the unexecuted pattern that has already been stored as reserved to be executed. Also, in the normal state (non-time-saving state), it is more difficult for the ball to enter the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004 compared to the ball entering the second start port 2005 in the time-saving state, but since the suggestive effect can be executed by having the ball enter the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004, it is possible to generate the player's motivation to try to have the ball enter the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, in this example, in both cases where the upper limit number of reserved balls has not been reached and game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005 and is stored as reserved, and where the upper limit number of reserved balls has been reached and game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005 and is not stored as reserved, a suggestive effect is executed that suggests the expectation of whether or not a winning ball will be included in the changing display of the pattern that will be shown as a result after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005, by the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005. However, it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to enable the execution of a suggestive effect only when the upper limit number of reserved balls has not been reached and game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005 and is stored as reserved. As a result, only when the upper limit number of reserved balls has not been reached, the suggestive effect can be executed by continuing the player's operation of the handle 195 so that game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005, and it is possible to grasp early the possibility that any of the changing display of the unexecuted patterns that has already been stored as reserved will be a winning ball. Also, in this example, a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) is set as the period for executing the suggestive performance, but in the above configuration, it may be configured so that a new suggestive performance can be executed each time game ball B enters second starting hole 2005 and is stored as a new pending ball.

In addition, in this example, when game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005, a suggestive effect is executed, which suggests the expectation of whether or not a winning ball will be included in the changing display of the patterns that will show the result after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005, by the light emission mode of multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005. However, it is not necessary to execute a suggestive effect, and when game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005, there may be cases where a suggestive effect is executed and cases where a suggestive effect is not executed. In such a configuration, when a suggestive effect is executed, the expectation of whether or not a winning ball will be included in the changing display of the patterns that will show the result after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005 is higher than when a suggestive effect is not executed.

In this example, when game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005 during the time-saving state control, a suggestive effect is executed that suggests the expectation of whether or not a winning ball will be included in the changing display of the patterns that will show the result after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005, by the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005. However, the suggestive effect may be configured to suggest the expectation of whether or not a specific reserved ball will be a winning ball among the changing display of the unexecuted patterns that are already stored as reserved balls at the time of the ball entering the second starting hole 2005. In such a configuration, for example, it is preferable to display a reserved display corresponding to each reserved ball on the performance display device 1600 in a manner different from other reserved displays so that it is possible to determine which reserved ball is the specific reserved ball, that is, which reserved ball is being subjected to the suggestive effect. As a result, when game ball B enters second start hole 2005, if a suggestion effect is executed for a specific reserved ball that is already stored as reserved at the time of ball entry into second start hole 2005, it is possible to grasp early on the possibility that the specific reserved ball will be a winning ball, without waiting for the display of a changing pattern corresponding to the specific reserved ball that is already stored as reserved to be executed, and the player can wait with anticipation until the display of a changing pattern corresponding to the specific reserved ball is executed.

In the above, when a game ball B enters the second start port 2005 in a situation where there is a specific hold, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests the expectation of whether or not the specific hold will be a hit. However, the following modified example may be used. Specifically, after a specific hold is stored, each time a game ball B enters the second start port 2005 and is stored as a new hold, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect for the specific hold, and the expectation of whether or not the specific hold will be a hit may be suggested depending on the number of times that the suggestive effect can be executed each time it is stored as a new hold. For example, the more the number of times that the suggestive effect can be executed each time it is stored as a new hold, the higher the expectation of whether or not the specific hold will be a hit. Also, when the number of times that the suggestive effect can be executed each time it is stored as a new hold reaches a predetermined number (for example, three times), the expectation of whether or not the specific hold will be a hit may be higher. According to this, after a specific hold is stored, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect for the specific hold by having the ball enter the second start port 2005, and since it is possible to determine whether the expectation of whether the specific hold will be a hit is high or not, it is possible to motivate the player to have the ball enter the second start port 2005, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Also, after a specific hold is stored, each time a game ball B enters the second start port 2005 and is stored as a new hold, it is possible to draw attention to whether the execution of the suggestive effect for the specific hold will continue (the execution of the suggestive effect will be repeated), and it is possible to draw attention with anticipation to the execution of the suggestive effect until the display of the changing pattern corresponding to the specific hold is executed.

Figure 245 is a flow chart showing an example of a ball-entry suggestion effect execution process. First, when the game state is in the time-saving state (step S2301), the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges whether or not game ball B has entered the second starting hole 2005 (step S2302). Then, if it is judged that game ball B has entered the second starting hole 2005 during control of the time-saving state, the CPU determines the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005 based on whether or not a winning ball is included in the changing display of the pattern that shows the result after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005 (step S2303). As described above, the "variable display of the pattern whose result will be shown after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005" includes the variable display of the pattern being executed at the time of the ball entering the second starting hole 2005, the variable display of the unexecuted pattern that is already stored as reserved at the time of the ball entering the second starting hole 2005, and the variable display of the unexecuted pattern that will be stored as reserved at the time of the ball entering the second starting hole 2005. Whether or not the variable display of the pattern being executed at the time of the ball entering the second starting hole 2005 is a winning display can be determined from the winning/losing command or the winning/losing information based on the variable pattern command transmitted at the start of the variable display of the pattern, and whether or not the variable display of the unexecuted pattern that is already stored as reserved at the time of the ball entering the second starting hole 2005 or the variable display of the unexecuted pattern that will be stored as reserved at the time of the ball entering the second starting hole 2005 is a winning display can be determined from the pre-determination information based on the command related to the pre-determination information transmitted at the time of the ball entering the second starting hole 2005.

In this example, the light emission modes of the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005 are set to blue, green, red, and rainbow. When determining the light emission modes of the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005, the order is blue, green, red, and rainbow, so that the expectation that a winning will be included in the changing display of the pattern that will show the result after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005 increases. Note that the rainbow color is set as a light emission mode that can be determined only when a winning will be included in the changing display of the pattern that will show the result after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005. From this, when performing the suggestive performance, the more the multiple LEDs are lit in a light emission mode that suggests a high expectation that a winning will be included in the changing display of the pattern that will show the result after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005, the more likely it is that the result of the changing display of the pattern that will be shown after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005 will be a winning, and the more the player can pay attention to the result of the changing display of the pattern with anticipation.

Next, in the ball-entering suggestion effect execution process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC executes the suggestion effect by rapidly blinking the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005 in the light-emitting mode determined in step S2303, and continues the rapid blinking in that light-emitting mode until a predetermined period has elapsed (step S2304). In this example, when the suggestion effect is executed, the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005 are rapidly blinked, making it easier to notice that the suggestion effect is being executed. Also, while the suggestion effect is being executed, even if game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005, a new suggestion effect is not executed. In other words, it is possible to execute a new suggestion effect when game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005 only when the suggestion effect is not being executed.

In this example, a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) is set as the period for executing the suggestive performance. It is preferable to set the period for executing such a suggestive performance to be shorter than the time for the pattern to change during control of the time-saving state. In this way, since more suggestive performances can be executed during control of the time-saving state than the results of the pattern change display are shown, the lighting state of the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005 increases the chance that the result of the pattern change display shown after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005 is likely to be a hit, and the player can pay attention to the execution of the suggestive performance with anticipation.

In addition, in this example, during control of the normal state (non-time-saving state), the reserved display is displayed on the performance display device 1600 so that the number of reserved balls can be known from the time when the start winning occurs during the execution of the pattern change display until the pattern change display corresponding to the start winning is executed, whereas during control of the time-saving state, the reserved display is not displayed on the performance display device 1600 from the time when the start winning occurs during the execution of the pattern change display until the pattern change display corresponding to the start winning is executed. In other words, during control of the time-saving state, when a game ball B enters the second start hole 2005, the reserved display is not displayed and the number of reserved balls is not known, so it is not possible to know whether the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit. Therefore, during control of the time-saving state, regardless of whether the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit, it is possible to continue shooting game balls B so that many game balls B enter the second start hole 2005.

In this example, during control of the normal state (non-time-saving state), a pre-judgment effect (so-called pre-reading effect) is performed by using a hold display displayed on the effect display device 1600 by a start winning during the execution of the variable display of the pattern, and it is possible to execute a hold change effect that suggests the expectation of a win by changing the state of the hold display during the period from when the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the start winning is executed to when the hold display is erased. In addition, in the hold change effect, blue, green, red, and rainbow colors are set as the state of the hold display, and the final state of the hold display is executed in the order of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors so that the expectation of a win increases. In addition, in the hold change effect, it is possible to change the state of the hold display to a state that suggests a high expectation of a win during the period from when the start winning is executed during the variable display of the pattern to when the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the start winning is executed. In other words, when a pending display is displayed on the performance display device 1600 due to a start winning during the execution of the pattern changing display, the state of the pending display may change thereafter, and when the pattern changing display corresponding to the start winning is executed, it is necessary to wait to see whether a state indicating a high expectation of a win appears until the state of the pending display is finally determined.

In contrast, during the time-saving state control, the hold display is not displayed on the performance display device 1600 from the start winning during the execution of the pattern change display until the pattern change display corresponding to the start winning is executed, and therefore the above-mentioned hold change performance is not executed. As a result, during the time-saving state control, it is possible to draw attention to the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005, which are the target of the suggestive performance. In addition, in the suggestive performance, the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005 is blue, green, red, or rainbow, and only flashes at high speed until a predetermined period has elapsed, and the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs does not change until the predetermined period has elapsed. For this reason, after the suggestive performance starts, there is no need to continue to pay attention to the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005, and it is possible to grasp early on the possibility that the result of the pattern change display shown after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005 will be a win, without waiting for the pattern change display corresponding to the ball entering the second starting hole 2005 to be executed.

Figure 246 is an explanatory diagram showing the light-emitting points on the game area when the suggestive effect is executed. As shown in Figure 246, when the game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005 during the control of the time-saving state, the suggestive effect is executed so that the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005 flash at high speed for a predetermined period of time. In addition, the light-emitting mode of the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005 is set to flash at high speed in any of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors. In this way, during the control of the time-saving state, the suggestive effect is executed using the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005 where the game ball B should enter, so that even a player who is paying attention to whether or not the ball will enter the second starting hole 2005 will naturally notice that the suggestive effect is being executed.

In addition, when a game ball B enters the first lower start gate 2003 or the first upper start gate 2004 during control in the normal state (non-time-saving state), a hold display is displayed in the lower left area of the performance display device 1600, and a change display of a pattern corresponding to the start winning is performed, making it possible to execute the hold change performance described above until the hold display is erased. In addition, the hold display displayed on the performance display device 1600 is displayed in any of blue, green, red, or rainbow colors.

In addition, when a suggestive performance is executed when a game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005 during control of the time-saving state, not only do the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005 flash rapidly during the execution of the suggestive performance, but also a predetermined light-emitting unit 2590 provided at the upper left of the game area 5a lights up or flashes. This makes it easier for players who do not pay attention to the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005 to notice that a suggestive performance is being executed when a game ball B enters the first lower starting hole 2003 or the like during control of the normal state (non-time-saving state), when a reserve change performance is executed, not only does the state of the reserve display displayed on the performance display device 1600 change during the execution of the reserve change performance, but the common light-emitting unit 2590 lights up or flashes. This makes it easier for a player who is not paying attention to the performance display device 1600 to notice that a reserve change performance is being executed when a ball enters the first lower starting hole 2003 or the like during control in the normal state (non-time-saving state).The common light-emitting unit 2590 is provided at a position such that the distance from the second starting hole 2005, where the ball should enter during control in the time-saving state, is approximately the same as the distance from the first lower starting hole 2003, where the ball should enter during control in the normal state (non-time-saving state). As a result, although the position of the starting hole (first lower starting hole 2003, second starting hole 2005) where the ball should enter differs depending on whether the machine is controlled to the time-saving state or the normal state (non-time-saving state), whether or not an effect suggesting the likelihood of a win (indicative effect, hold change effect) is being performed can be determined by simply visually checking the common light-emitting unit 2590 located at approximately the same distance from each starting hole, so that even if the starting hole (first lower starting hole 2003, second starting hole 2005) where the ball should enter changes, it is difficult to miss that such an effect is being performed.

In the above, when the suggestive performance is performed, not only the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005 flash rapidly, but also the common light-emitting unit 2590 lights up or flashes, but the light-emitting mode of the common light-emitting unit 2590 is set to light up or flash in a light color different from the light-emitting color used in the suggestive performance (in this example, blue, green, red, rainbow colors). For example, the light-emitting mode of the common light-emitting unit 2590 is set to light up or flash in yellow, purple, orange, etc. This makes it difficult to mistake the light-emitting mode of the common light-emitting unit 2590 as suggesting the degree of expectation of a win, even if the common light-emitting unit 2590 lights up or flashes when the suggestive performance is performed, and after confirming that the common light-emitting unit 2590 is lit up or flashing, it can be clearly recognized that the degree of expectation of a win should be confirmed by the light-emitting mode of the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005.

In this example, the light color used in the suggestive performance when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 is blue, green, red, or rainbow, while the light color used in the reserve change performance when the ball enters the first lower starting port 2003 is blue, green, red, or rainbow. The same light color is set, but a different light color may be set. In addition, the light-emitting mode of the common light-emitting unit 2590 may be configured to light or blink in a light color different from the light color used in the suggestive performance, or to light or blink in a light color different from the light color used in the reserve change performance. In this way, even if the common light-emitting unit 2590 lights or blinks when the reserve change performance is executed, it is difficult to mistakenly think that the light-emitting mode itself suggests the expectation of a win, and after confirming that the common light-emitting unit 2590 is lighted or blinking, it can be clearly recognized that the expectation of a win should be confirmed by the state of the reserve display displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In addition, in this example, when the game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005 during control of the time-saving state, the suggestive performance is executed using the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005. However, when the game ball B enters the first lower starting hole 2003 during control of the normal state (non-time-saving state), the suggestive performance may be executed using the multiple LEDs provided around the first lower starting hole 2003. In such a case, during the execution of the suggestive performance during control of the normal state (non-time-saving state), not only do the multiple LEDs provided around the first lower starting hole 2003 flash at high speed, but the common light-emitting unit 2590 is also made to light up or flash. In other words, the common light-emitting unit 2590 is provided at a position such that the distance from the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting hole 2005 used during the execution of the suggestive performance during control of the time-saving state is approximately the same as the distance from the multiple LEDs provided around the first lower starting hole 2003 used during the execution of the suggestive performance during control of the normal state (non-time-saving state). As a result, although the location where the suggestive effects are executed differs depending on whether the machine is controlled to the time-saving state or the normal state (non-time-saving state), whether or not an effect that suggests the likelihood of a win (suggestive effect) is being executed can be determined by simply visually checking the common light-emitting unit 2590 located at approximately the same distance from the location where each suggestive effect is executed, making it difficult to miss that such an effect is being executed even if the location where the suggestive effect is executed changes.

In addition, in this example, the common light-emitting unit 2590 is positioned so that the distance from the second starting port 2005 where the ball should be placed during control of the time-saving state is approximately the same as the distance from the first lower starting port 2003 where the ball should be placed during control of the normal state (non-time-saving state); however, without being limited to this, the common light-emitting unit 2590 may be configured to be positioned so that the distance from the multiple LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 used when executing the suggestion performance is approximately the same as the distance from the hold display displayed in the lower left area of the performance display device 1600 used when executing the hold change performance. As a result, although the area where the effects (suggestive effects, hold change effects) are executed differs depending on whether the machine is controlled to the time-saving state or the normal state (non-time-saving state), whether or not an effect that suggests the likelihood of a win (suggestive effects, hold change effects) is being executed can be determined by simply visually checking the common light-emitting unit 2590 located at approximately the same distance from the area where each effect is executed, making it difficult to miss that such an effect is being executed even if the area where the effect (suggestive effects, hold change effects) is executed changes.

The present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention, as described below.

In other words, in the above embodiment, the invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1 or a slot machine as a gaming machine, but it is not limited to this and may be applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, and in this case, the same effects as those described above can be achieved. It can also be applied to so-called enclosed gaming machines in which the player does not touch the gaming ball B, and gaming machines called managed gaming machines.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the main body 2551 of the binding base 2550 and the main body 2561 of the binding base 2560 are shown to be flat or block-shaped, but this is not limited to this, and the main body of the binding base may be a unit case of an opening/closing unit having a retractable door body that opens and closes the winning opening and distributes the game balls B, or may be a unit base of a performance unit.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 2000 Front unit 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3600 Back rear performance unit 3601 Unit base (fixed base)
3602 Guide shaft 3604 Rotation slit 3700 Back lower decoration body (movable decoration body)
3710 First rotating decoration body 3713 First rotating decoration body decorative substrate (electronic component)
3720 Second rotating decoration body 3723 Second rotating decoration body decorative substrate (electronic component)
3730 Third rotating decorative body 3733 Third rotating decorative body decorative substrate (electronic component)
3740 Fourth rotating decorative body 3743 Fourth rotating decorative body decorative substrate (electronic component)
3750 Rear decoration body 3753 Rear decoration body decorative board (electronic parts)
3760 Left unit 3780 Right unit 3781 Right slide base (movable base)
3787 Gear cover (movable base)
3787a Wiring locking portion 3787b Wiring locking portion (harness support portion)
3787c Wiring locking portion 3788 Unit arm (arm)
EC Wiring CT Cable tie CTa Band part CTb Lock part WH3 Harness

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs a lottery for winning when a ball enters a starting hole and a starting condition is satisfied, and awards a profit based on the result of the lottery,
A variable display means for displaying a variable pattern based on the result of the lottery;
A storage means for storing information about a ball entering the starting hole with a predetermined number as an upper limit when the ball enters the starting hole during the execution of the variable display of the symbol;
a hold display means for displaying a hold display corresponding to the information stored in the storage means;
a pre-determination means for determining whether or not the start condition is satisfied based on information stored in the storage means;
A performance execution means for determining and executing a predetermined performance from among a plurality of performances including a special performance,
The special performance is configured to be executed based on the lottery result regarding the winning corresponding to the variable display of the pattern being executed and the judgment result by the advance judgment means when a ball enters the starting hole, and is executed using a light-emitting unit different from the display unit on which the pending display is displayed, and can be executed at the timing when a ball enters the starting hole while the variable display of the pattern is being executed in a situation where the information stored in the storage means has not reached an upper limit,
Even if a ball enters the starting hole while the special effect is being executed, the special effect will not be executed anew. However, the special effect can be executed at the timing when a ball enters the starting hole even in a situation where there is no information stored in the storage means, and is executed for a time shorter than a specific time that can be selected when the variable display of the symbols is performed.
When a ball enters the starting hole in a predetermined situation in which the hold display corresponding to the information stored in the storage means is not displayed on the display unit, the special performance can be executed at the timing when the ball enters the starting hole,
A specific light-emitting unit different from the light-emitting unit used for the special performance is provided,
When the special performance is executed, the state of the specific light-emitting unit is configured to be different from the state indicating the expectation degree for the hit performed using the light-emitting unit,
The specific light-emitting unit is provided at a position separated from the position of the light-emitting unit used for the special performance ,
When looking at the gaming machine from the front,
The display unit on which the reserved display is displayed is configured to be located between the light-emitting unit used for the special performance and the specific light-emitting unit not used for the special performance.
The gaming machine is characterized by the above.

Images